SZABO

Reference • Bibliography—Thanatology

Traced to the 1700s, the term thanatology is defined as the study of the broad and
complex topic of death. Because of the breadth of the published material and the
challenges of discovery in large bibliographic databases and catalogs, finding and
DEATH AND DYING
identifying monographic material on death, dying, grief, and bereavement can be extremely
challenging. Although several bibliographical resources have been published on thanatology,
those titles were incomplete, limited in scope, or leaned heavily toward one area of the

AN ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE THANATOLOGICAL LITERATURE

DEATH AND DYING
field while ignoring others.

In Death and Dying: An Annotated Bibliography of the Thanatological Literature, John F.

Szabo provides more than 2,200 citations of monographs, many annotated, on the sci-
ence and study of death and dying. Among the areas addressed are the psychological,
philosophical, and attitudinal aspects; coping and dealing with the burdens of care-
giving and working in the helping professions; instructional and educational topics
for practitioners, primarily healthcare providers; cultural differences in bereavement
rituals; and grief, mourning, and loss. In addition, notable titles on or relating to death
and dying in popular culture, death themes in literature, methods of death, or specific
ethical, policy, or public issues are also included when they contribute important infor-
mation to subject areas on which the book focuses.

Death and Dying will be helpful to students, researchers, academics, caregivers,

healthcare professionals, psychologists, social workers, and anyone interested in
death, dying, bereavement, or care of the terminally ill.

JOHN F. SZABO is director of the Atlanta–Fulton Public Library System. He is the author
of Mortuary Science: A Sourcebook (Scarecrow Press, 1993).

AN ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

For orders and information please contact the publisher THANATOLOGICAL LITERATURE
SCARECROW PRESS, INC.
A wholly owned subsidiary of
The Rowman & Littlefield Publishing Group, Inc.
4501 Forbes Boulevard, Suite 200
Lanham, Maryland 20706
1-800-462-6420 • fax 717-794-3803
JOHN F. SZABO
www.scarecrowpress.com

DeathDyingPODLITH.indd 1 10/8/09 11:09:33 AM

 Death and Dying
An Annotated Bibliography of the
Thanatological Literature

John F. Szabo

The Scarecrow Press, Inc.

Lanham • Toronto • Plymouth, UK
2010
Published by Scarecrow Press, Inc.
A wholly owned subsidiary of The Rowman & Littlefield Publishing Group, Inc.
4501 Forbes Boulevard, Suite 200, Lanham, Maryland 20706
http://www.scarecrowpress.com

Estover Road, Plymouth PL6 7PY, United Kingdom

Copyright © 2010 by John F. Szabo

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any
electronic or mechanical means, including information storage and retrieval systems,
without written permission from the publisher, except by a reviewer who may quote
passages in a review.

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Information Available

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Szabo, John F., 1968–
Death and dying : an annotated bibliography of the thanatological literature / John F.
Szabo.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 978-0-8108-7275-2 (hardback : alk. paper) — ISBN 978-0-8108-7276-9 (ebook)
1. Death—Bibliography. 2. Thanatology—Bibliography. I. Title.
Z5725.S93 2010
016.1559'37—dc22 2009029795

 ™ The paper used in this publication meets the minimum requirements of

American National Standard for Information Sciences—Permanence of Paper
for Printed Library Materials, ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992.

Printed in the United States of America

 Contents

Introduction v

1 Adolescents 1
2 Aging and Death 6
3 Attitudes toward Death 11
4 Bibliographies 18
5 Childhood Bereavement 23
6 Communication about Death 41
7 Coping and Caregivers 46
8 Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying 57
9 Death Education 72
10 The Death of a Child 80
11 Dying 92
12 Eschatology 113
13 Ethical Issues 116
14 Fear of Death 125
15 General Works 128
16 Grief and Mourning 149
17 Historical Views of Death and Dying 193

iii
iv Contents

18 Hospice 200
19 Immortality 213
20 Legal and Financial Issues 216
21 Mental Health Issues 220
22 Miscellaneous 225
23 Near-Death Experiences 227
24 Nursing 231
25 Palliative Care 234
26 Parental Loss and Grief 242
27 Pastoral Care 249
28 Philosophical Studies 257
29 Practitioner Education 265
30 Rituals 276
31 Sibling Loss and Grief 282
32 Thanatology 285
33 Widowhood 289

Name Index 301

Title Index 327
About the Author 375
 Introduction

Since Geoffrey Gorer’s essay “The Pornography of Death” in 1955, there has
been a clear and unarguable deluge of publishing in the subject areas of death,
dying, grief, and bereavement. Gorer asserts that while sex was the pornography
of Victorian society, death is today’s pornography. This provocative proposition
led to significant writing and research on death attitudes, the psychology of death,
viewing death and grief as a natural part of life, and a reevaluation of care for the
dying. All of this, of course, has diminished the taboo of death and dying, though
it has certainly not eliminated it.
While it can be traced to the 1700s, the term thanatology has gained traction
in recent decades to refer to the study of the broad and complex topic of death.
Thanatology is fundamentally the interdisciplinary study of death, dying, grief,
and bereavement; however, use of the term is seen more commonly in academic
works, specifically scientific, and those intended for practitioners in the helping
professions.
There have been several bibliographical resources published on thanatology in
an effort make discovery easier. Unfortunately, those titles are now limited due
to their age. Many of them were incomplete at the time, were limited in scope,
or leaned heavily toward one area of the field while ignoring others. From my
bibliographical work on mortuary science, funerals, and other death rituals, I
discovered that a bibliographical resource that encompassed all of thanatology
was seriously needed. Because of the breadth of the published material and the
challenges of discovery in large bibliographic databases and catalogs, finding and
identifying monographic material on death, dying, grief, and bereavement can be
extremely challenging without such a resource.
This book provides more than 2,200 citations, many annotated, on the sci-
ence and study of death and dying; psychological, philosophical, and attitudinal
aspects; coping and dealing with the burdens of caregiving and working in the

v
vi Introduction

helping professions; instructional and educational topics for practitioners, pri-

marily health care providers; rituals, but limited to the contexts of bereavement
and cultural differences; and grief, mourning, bereavement, and loss. It does not
include titles on death and dying in popular culture; death themes in literature;
methods of death (homicide, suicide, cancer, and so forth); or specific ethical,
policy, or public issues around death and dying (euthanasia, right-to-die, capital
punishment, etc.). There are, of course, numerous exceptions. Notably, titles on
or relating to these areas are included when they contribute important information
to subject areas on which the book focuses.
The greatest volume of material is on grief, mourning, bereavement, and loss,
primarily because these titles have the broadest audience and, as the taboo of
death topics has subsided, the desire for popular materials on these subjects has
swelled. While much of this material has self-help or religious themes, there is
a sizeable body of research material on this subject. General works on loss have
only been included when they provide useful content on loss associated with
death.
A huge sea of material exists on childhood bereavement, the death of children
and adolescents, and communicating with young people about death and dying.
Categorizing these can be difficult, as much of this material covers all three areas.
Noted death educator Kenneth J. Doka’s Children Mourning, Mourning Children
is an excellent example of this collective treatment.
I hope that this book will be helpful to students, researchers, academics, care-
givers, health care professionals, psychologists, social workers, and anyone with
an interest in death, dying, bereavement, or the care of the terminally ill.
I am indebted to librarians, library support staff, and collections from many
libraries, but I am particularly indebted to the rich collections of Emory Univer-
sity Libraries.
 1
Adolescents

1. Allen, Janet. Using Literature to Help Troubled Teenagers Cope with End-
of-Life Issues. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 2001.
2. Baxter, Grant, and Wendy Stuart. Death and the Adolescent: A Resource
Handbook for Bereavement Support Groups in Schools. Ontario: University of
Toronto Press, 1999.
3. Bode, Janet. Death Is Hard to Live With: Teenagers Talk about How They
Cope with Loss. New York: Bantam Doubleday Dell Books for Young Readers,
1993. Cartoon artwork by Stan Mack.
Bode uses personal stories, vignettes, graphics, and a direct discussion of death
to present the issue to young adults. She covers funerals, violent deaths, parental
and sibling death, and the myriad of feelings experienced by teenagers. Com-
ments or explanations by professionals on various subjects are offered throughout
the book. Bode also offers some treatment for issues of cultural and religious
variations in approaching death, dying, and bereavement. References for recom-
mended books and videos are presented in a narrative at the book’s conclusion.
4. Corr, Charles A., and David E. Balk. Handbook of Adolescent Death and
Bereavement. New York: Springer, 1996.
5. Corr, Charles A., and Joan N. McNeil, eds. Adolescence and Death. New
York: Springer, 1986.
6. Dower, Laura, and Elena Lister. I Will Remember You: What to Do When
Someone You Love Dies: A Guidebook through Grief for Teens. New York:
Scholastic, 2001.
In assisting teens in coping with death, Dower talks about being in a state of
denial, keeping a grief journal, different types of grief, the role of ritual in grief,

1
2 Chapter 1

cultural expressions of grief (African American, Ancient Egyptian, Buddhist,

Christian, Islam, Judaic, Native American), dealing with feelings, physical ef-
fects of grief, helping others grieve, remembering the loved one, aftershocks
of grief, and finding routine again. She offers guidance for specific situations:
parental loss, losing a friend, violent or sudden death, and so forth. Appendixes
include reading lists, music, movies, and organizations with websites. Includes a
bibliography and author biographies.

7. Finch, Stuart M., and Elva O. Poznanski. Adolescent Suicide. Springfield, IL:
Charles C. Thomas, 1971.

8. Fitzgerald, Helen. The Grieving Teen: A Guide for Teenagers and Their
Friends. New York: Simon & Schuster, 2000.
A certified death educator, Fitzgerald offers an incredibly thorough guide for
teens dealing with death. She discusses reacting to the news of a death, support
groups, the hospice movement, feelings of fear and anger, visiting the hospital,
saying goodbye, funerals and related subjects, grief and bereavement, and recov-
ery. The book answers some very specific questions teens may have about death,
for example, what is death like for the dying person? What does a dead body look
or feel like? Fitzgerald includes extensive discussion on feelings, grief, and the
future following a death, and she offers stories from teens who have experienced
a death and advice on being a friend to someone grieving. Includes a resource
list, bibliography, and list of websites. Foreword by noted thanatologist Earl A.
Grollman.

9. Footman, Marilyn E., and Pamela Espeland. When a Friend Dies: A Book
for Teens about Grieving and Healing. Minneapolis, MN: Free Spirit Publishing,
2005. Originally published in 1994.
Straightforward and direct, this book stresses to teens that feelings of grief are
normal and confirms that teens and adults grieve differently.

10. Giddens, Sandra, and Owen Giddens. Coping with Grieving and Loss. New
York: Rosen Publishing Group, 2003. Rev. ed. Originally published in 2000.
Intended for high school audiences, this text addresses issues of loss, grief,
mourning, and funerals. The authors discuss feelings of anger, guilt, depression,
and acceptance often experienced by those grieving. They offer coping tech-
niques and suggestions for recovery. Thoughtful chapters are included on vio-
lence in schools and the September 11, 2001, terrorist attacks. A brief glossary,
organizations providing assistance to teens, and suggestions for further reading
are included.

11. Gravelle, Karen, and Charles Haskins. Teenagers Face-to-Face with Be-
reavement. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Julian Messner, a division of Silver Burdett
Press, Simon & Schuster, 1989.
 Adolescents 3

Gravelle and Haskins present seventeen adolescents and young adults who
describe their grief experienced as teens following the deaths of family members
and friends from causes ranging from cancer to automobile accidents to cystic
fibrosis. The authors discuss what is different about adolescent bereavement and
present a caring, sensitive treatment of the subject. The focus is on the feelings and
experiences of teenagers and their methods of coping with grief. Subjects include
personal relationships with the terminally ill, initial reactions to death, problems
facing classmates and friends, coping with depression, feelings of guilt and anger,
and renewing family life following the death of an immediate family member.
12. Grollman, Earl A., ed. Bereaved Children and Teens: A Support Guide for
Parents and Professionals. Boston: Beacon Press, 1995.
In a collection of articles by prominent thanatology and death education ex-
perts, Grollman presents a comprehensive guide to bereavement in youth for par-
ents, caregivers, teachers, clergy, and health care professionals. Topics covered
include explaining death to young children, adolescent understandings of death,
disenfranchised grief of children, talking to children about terminal illness, cul-
tural and religious perspectives on death and children, treatments and therapies to
help children cope with death, care of the dying child, special needs of bereaved
children, and using film and drama to help children cope with death. A section
on cultural and religious perspectives includes articles on issues among African
American, Jewish, Protestant, and Catholic children.
13. Hogan, N. S. An Investigation of the Adolescent Sibling Bereavement
Process and Adaptation. Chicago: Loyola University, 1987. Author’s doctoral
dissertation.
14. Hughes, Lynne B. You Are Not Alone: Teens Talk about Life after the Loss
of a Parent. New York: Scholastic, 2005.
Hughes, who lost both of her parents at a young age, is the founder and director
of the nonprofit Comfort Zone Camp, a place for grieving children. She, along
with her campers, offers suggestions for coping with grief and moving beyond it
through testimonials. Includes detailed information about the camp.
15. Irish, Jerry A. A Boy Thirteen: Reflections on Death. Philadelphia: West-
minster Press, 1975.
16. Kuehn, Eileen. Death: Coping with the Pain. Mankato, MN: LifeMatters,
2001.
Intended for an elementary and junior high school audience.
17. LaGrand, Louis E. Coping with Separation and Loss as a Young Adult:
Theoretical and Practical Realities. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1986.
18. McBride, Alfred. Death Shall Have No Dominion. Dubuque, IA: William
C. Brown, 1979.
4 Chapter 1

McBride, a Roman Catholic priest, offers death education for adolescents from
a Catholic perspective.
19. Meyers, Karen, Mark J. Kittleson, and William Kane. The Truth about
Death and Dying. New York: Facts on File, 2005.
The authors offer a guide to death and dying for teen audiences.
20. Millet, Edmund A. An Investigation among Junior Highs into the Under-
standing of Death and Dying and a Program Response. Boston: Boston Univer-
sity School of Theology, 1979.
This book was a project report associated with Millet’s pursuit of the doctor
of ministry degree.
21. Morgan, John D., ed. The Dying and the Bereaved Teenager. Philadelphia,
PA: Charles Press, 1990.
In addition to collections of essays on the dying and the bereaved teenager,
this book also offers four essays on the role of the school in dealing with the
bereaved teen, including suicide postvention. Morgan is coordinator of Death
Education Conferences and a professor of philosophy at King’s College in Lon-
don, Ontario. Most of the contributors are health and mental health professionals
from Canada.
22. Myers, Edward. Teens, Loss, and Grief: The Ultimate Teen Guide. Lanham,
MD: Scarecrow Press, 2006. Part of the It Happened to Me series, volume 8,
Arlene Hirschfelder, series editor. First paperback edition. Illustrations by Kelly
Adams. Previously published in 2004 as When Will I Stop Hurting?: Teens, Loss,
and Grief.
23. Pershy, Mary Kelly. Helping Teens Work through Grief. Washington, DC:
Accelerated Development, 1997.
24. Schoeneck, Therese. Griefjourney: Notes on Grief for Teens, Young Adults,
and Anyone Who Is Grieving. Syracuse, NY: Hope for the Bereaved, 2006.
A booklet printed by nonprofit group Hope for the Bereaved, an organization
offering one-on-one counseling, support groups, a helpline, the HOPELine news-
letter, and community education. Schoeneck is the founder.
25. Scrivani, Mark. When Death Walks In: For Teenagers Facing Grief.
Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 1991. Poetry and illustrations by Ben Sieff.
Intended for adolescents, this 32-page paperback serves as an easy-to-read
guide that discusses feelings, different styles of grief, suicidal thoughts, dreams,
remembrances, going back to school, seeking and finding support, and forgive-
ness.
26. Ward, Barbara. Good Grief: Exploring Feelings, Loss, and Death with over
Elevens and Adults: A Holistic Approach. Bristol, PA: Jessica Kingsley Publish-
ers, 1996. Originally published in 1993.
 Adolescents 5

27. Wilde, Gary. Dealing with Death: A Four-Week Course to Help Junior
Highers Explore Their Feelings about Death. Loveland, CO: Group Publishing,
1991.
28. Wolfelt, Alan D. Healing a Teen’s Grieving Heart: 100 Practical Ideas for
Families, Friends, and Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2001.
Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.
Wolfelt, educator and grief counselor, discusses the special mourning needs of
teens and offers suggestions for family members, teachers, coaches, clergy, and
caregivers.
29. ———. Healing Your Grieving Heart for Teens: One Hundred Practical
Ideas. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2001. Companion Press is an imprint
for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.
Wolfelt offers a book to help teens mourn. He presents 100 specific, practical
ideas for mourning well and ends with a touching final word. Each numbered idea
includes a suggestion to express yourself. Wolfelt is also director of the Center
for Loss and Life Transition.
30. Wolfelt, Alan D., and Megan E. Wolfelt. The Healing Your Grieving Heart
Journal for Teens. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2002. Companion Press
is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.
31. Zim, Herbert S., and Sonia Bleeker. Life and Death. New York: William
Morrow, 1970. Illustrated by Rene Martin.
In this 64-page hardback book for young adolescents, husband and wife au-
thors discuss physical facts of death, funeral and mourning customs, and attitudes
surrounding death and dying. Customs from around the world are presented, as
death is discussed as an important part of life. Illustrated with black-and-white
sketches. Includes an index.
 2
Aging and Death

32. Angel, Marc D. Aging and Dying as Aspects of Living. New York: United
Jewish Appeal, 1984. Part of the United Jewish Appeal Young Leadership Cabi-
net Judaica Series.
33. Benoliel, Jeanne Quint. Dealing with Death: Discussions of Death Pre-
sented for Those Concerned with the Delivery of Care Service for the Elderly.
Los Angeles: University of Southern California, Ethel Percy Andrus Gerontology
Center, 1973.
34. Botsford, Anne L., and Force Lawrence T. Botsford. End of Life Care: A
Guide for Supporting Older People with Intellectual Disabilities and Their Fami-
lies. Albany, NY: New York State Association of Regional Councils, 2000.
35. Boyle, Joan M., and James E. Morriss. The Mirror of Time: Images of Ag-
ing and Dying. New York: Greenwood Press, 1987.
36. Cicirelli, Victor G. Older Adults’ Views on Death. New York: Springer,
2002.
Cicirelli, professor of developmental and aging psychology at Purdue Uni-
versity, presents a study of older adults ranging in age from 70 to 90 examining
influences of age-related health changes, religious beliefs, culture, and family
relations. He also discusses various meanings of death, fears about death, and
how people view the dying process. Topics include sociocultural and personal
meanings of death, death trajectories, views and expectations about the dying
process, and interrelationships between all of these themes. Includes extensive
references and an index.
37. DeRopp, Robert Sylvester. Man against Dying. New York: St. Martin’s
Press, 1960.

6
 Aging and Death 7

38. Gaventa, William C., and David L. Coulter, eds. End-of-Life Care: Bridg-
ing Disability and Aging with Person-Centered Care. Binghamton, NY: Haworth
Pastoral Press, 2005. Copublished simultaneously as Journal of Religion, Dis-
ability, and Health, Volume 9, Number 2, 2005.
The editors present a series of articles about how to achieve a good death, tak-
ing into account the special considerations for those with a disability. The articles
are structured around two primary papers on end-of-life issues among disabled
and aging populations. With a particular focus on Alzheimer’s disease, this book
explores how society thinks about disability in general as well as within the con-
text of death and dying. Policies, ethics, quality of life, and consent are addressed
in detail. An extensive bibliography and list of websites are included.
39. Jury, Mark, and Dan Jury. Gramp: A Man Ages and Dies. New York:
Grossman Publishers (Viking Press), 1976. Photographs by Mark Jury and Dan
Jury. Narrative text by Mark Jury.
With powerfully emotional and raw photographs of their grandfather’s final
weeks and months, Mark Jury and Dan Jury open a door to death and dying in
this 152-page biographical piece. Accompanied by text that relays both Frank
Tugend’s dying and his caregivers’ struggle and perseverance, they reveal the
realities of all that the dying process can involve.
40. Kutscher, Austin H., and I. K. Goldberg, eds. Oral Care of the Aging and
Dying Patient. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1973. Part of the American
Lecture Series.
This book is a strange text on a rarely explored corner of thanatology. Includes
a chapter titled “Use of an Electrically Driven Toothbrush in the Management of
Oral Hygiene in the Dying Patient.”
41. Marshall, Victor W. Last Chapters: A Sociology of Aging and Dying. Mon-
terey, CA: Brooks/Cole, 1980. Part of the Brooks/Cole Series in Social Gerontol-
ogy, Vern Bengtson, editor.
Bengtson notes in his foreword that the proliferation of material published on
death and dying in the 1960s and 1970s was characterized by titles focusing on
awareness of death and dying rather than an understanding of the subject. This
book attempts to bring together research on the social organization of death, dy-
ing, and aging. The primary theme is that problems and issues associated with
dying and aging are based on society’s need to “construct meaning in a continu-
ally changing world.” Marshall points out that humans are constantly negotiating
with one another to resolve issues of who they are, who they were, and who they
will be. He discusses the character of death in society, societal problems associ-
ated with death and dying, fear of death, attitudes toward death, awareness of
finitude, the concept of terminal status passage, environmental and community
contexts, and making sense of death and dying. Appropriate for death education
and sociology classes, each section concludes with review questions. Includes a
lengthy list of references and name and subject indexes.
8 Chapter 2

42. McCall, Junietta Baker. Grief Education for Caregivers of the Elderly. New
York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 1999.
43. McGee, Ann Young. The Impact of an Educational Intervention Module
on Death and Dying on Death Anxiety among Middle-Aged and Older Adults in
North Carolina. Raleigh: North Carolina State University, 1980.
This title is McGee’s doctoral dissertation. In 2005, she served as executive
director of the White House Conference on Aging.
44. Meeks, Linda Brower, and Philip Heit. Aging, Dying, and Death. Colum-
bus, OH: Charles E. Merrill Co., 1984. Part of the Health: Focus on You series.
45. ———. Aging, Dying, and Death: A Teacher’s Guide. Columbus, OH:
Charles E. Merrill Co., 1984.
46. Minot, Charles. The Problem of Age, Growth, and Death. New York: Put-
nam, 1908.
47. Morgan, John D. Ethical Issues in the Care of the Dying and Bereaved
Aged. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1996.
48. Munnichs, Joep M. A. Old Age and Finitude: A Contribution to Psycho-
gerontology. New York: S. Karger, 1966.
49. Nearing, Helen. Light on Aging and Dying. Gardiner, ME: Tilbury House,
1995.
50. Overall, Christine. Aging, Death, and Human Longevity: A Philosophical
Inquiry. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2003.
51. Prichard, Elizabeth R., Margot Tallmer, Austin H. Kutscher, Robert DeBel-
lis, and Mahlon S. Hale, eds. Geriatrics and Thanatology. New York: Praeger,
1984. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series, volume 1, Austin H. Kutscher
and Lillian H. Kutscher, general editors.
Prichard and her coeditors present a collection of articles on care for the dying
elderly. Topics include psychiatric considerations in aging and death, the be-
reaved elderly, effects of parental death on middle-aged adults, adaptive behavior
of the elderly in facing death, the relationship between death and the elderly’s
perception of self-worth, and reincarnation. Includes references, an index, and
brief professional information about each contributor. Preface written by Rose
Dobrof, director of the Brookdale Center on Aging at Hunter College of the City
University of New York.
52. Roslansky, John D., and George Wald, eds. The End of Life: A Discus-
sion at the Nobel Conference. London: North-Holland, 1973. This is the eighth
volume of the Nobel Conference Lectures at the Gustavus Adolphus College,
St. Peter, MN, 1972. It is dedicated to Arne Tiselius (1902–1971), winner of the
1948 Nobel Prize in Chemistry.
 Aging and Death 9

This book is a collection of five papers on the origin of death, physiological

aspects of aging and death, the modern imagination of death, changing the life
span, and immortality. Contributors to the 83-page volume include medical fac-
ulty and theologians.
53. Samarel, Nelda. Caring for Life and Death. New York: Taylor & Francis,
1991. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore
Wass, editor.
54. Shrut, Samuel D. Old Age and Death Attitudes: A Comparative Analysis
and Evaluation of Responses by a Group of Ambulatory White Female Persons
Sixty-Five Years and Older Living under Varying Conditions of Institutional
Supervision. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms, 1956. Publication No.
16,604.
55. Sinick, Daniel. Counseling Older Persons: Careers, Retirement, Dying.
New York: Human Sciences Press, 1977.
56. Sterns, H. L., E. A. Kennedy, and C. Sed. Person-Centered Planning for
Later Life: A Curriculum on Death and Dying for Adults with Mental Retarda-
tion. Chicago: Rehabilitation Research and Training Center Clearinghouse on
Aging and Developmental Disabilities, 2000.
57. Tallmer, Margot. Thanatologic Aspects of Aging: Selected Readings.
Brooklyn, NY: Highly Specialized Promotions, 1980.
58. Tomer, Adrian. Death Attitudes and the Older Adult: Theories, Concepts,
and Applications. Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000. Part of the Series in
Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
Tomer offers a series of scholarly works that explore death attitudes and bridge
the closely related though infrequently connected fields of thanatology and
gerontology. This book examines death attitudes among older adults, attitudes
regarding themselves in relation to the end of life, and controversial end-of-life
issues in the context of older adults. Articles discuss meanings of life and death in
successful aging; terror management perspectives on successful aging; develop-
ing a comprehensive model of death anxiety; microsuicide and the elderly; con-
ceptual distinctions in death-related attitudes; death anxiety in younger and older
adults; ageism and elderly suicide; fear of death and end-of-life decisions in the
context of older adults’ ethnicity; and death anxiety in nursing home personnel
as a function of race, hospice care, death attitudes, and aging in the twenty-first
century. A comprehensive review of correlates of death anxiety in older adults
is also incorporated. Includes several tables, extensive references, and an index.
Also includes a series foreword by Neimeyer and foreword by Jeffrey A. Gior-
dano, professor of gerontology at the University of South Florida.
59. Watson, Wilbur H., and Robert J. Maxwell, eds. Human Aging and Dying:
A Study in Sociocultural Gerontology. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1977.
10 Chapter 2

The authors attempt to “fill a void created by the lack of ethnographic data on
the organization of behavior in old age.” Using field studies, they offer insight
into the dying and their caregivers with a distinct focus on Jewish and African
American elderly. The first part of the book examines aging as status passage
in comparative social and cross-cultural contexts, while the second part looks at
social organization within the families of various cultural groups. Includes refer-
ences and an index.
60. Zarit, Steven H., ed. Readings in Aging and Death: Contemporary Perspec-
tives. New York: Harper & Row, 1977. Part of the Contemporary Perspectives
Reader Series, Phillip Whitten, editor.
Zarit, of the University of Southern California’s Adrus Gerontology Center,
offers fifty-nine reprinted articles on aging and death from a sociological per-
spective. The paperback begins with a 75-item questionnaire written by Edwin
Shneidman.
 3
Attitudes toward Death

61. Adlerstein, Arthur M., and H. I. Gerard. The Relationship between Reli-
gious Belief and Death Affect. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1958.
62. Anderson, Patricia, with an interview from Marilee Longacre. All of Us:
Americans Talk about the Meaning of Death. New York: Delacorte Press, 1996.
This is a book about how people feel about dying presented as a collection of
interviews. Anderson relays the stories and feelings of celebrities, professionals,
teens in gangs, and many others. Many insights concerning fear of death; atti-
tudes toward death; and lessons to be learned from dying, death, and grieving are
presented. An excellent final chapter titled “The Highest Common Denominator”
offers commentary on the commonalities of Americans’ views toward death and
the juxtaposition of these with general accepted thought on death. A short bio-
graphical narrative is included for each of the more than sixty people featured.
Also includes a bibliography.
63. Armstrong, Harry G. The Emerging Death Mystique: The Challenge and
the Promise. Hicksville, NY: Exposition Press, 1978.
64. Bradbury, Mary. Representations of Death: A Sociological Perspective.
New York: Routledge/Taylor & Francis, 1999.
Bradbury, with a background in both anthropology and social psychology,
presents a book for both the social scientist and the bereaved. It is a study of how
death is presented in images and how this affects the social psychology of death-
related institutions. The sometimes jarring photographs in the book, taken by
Peter Rauter, stress the observational nature of her study. They include a funeral
parlor interviewing room, coffin-making workshop, storage facilities in an em-
balming room, corpses, a horse-drawn hearse, funeral vehicles, funeral flowers,
a catafalque in a crematorium chapel, computer-operated cremators, a burning

11
12 Chapter 3

coffin in a cremator, and a cemetery. Bradbury discusses social representations

of death and loss, medicine’s effect on death representations, attitudes toward the
body, commerce and ritual associated with death, and thoughts on “representing”
death. Includes an appendix detailing research methods and approach as well as
a lengthy bibliography and an index.
65. Callahan, Daniel. The Troubled Dream of Life: Living with Mortality. New
York: Simon & Schuster, 1993. Also cited as The Troubled Dream of Life: In
Search of a Peaceful Death.
Callahan, a medical ethicist, discusses the politics, ethics, and social issues
associated with death and dying. He examines death attitudes and the balance
between the goals of medicine and having a realistic perspective of dying.
66. Curl, James Stevens. A Celebration of Death. London: Constable, 1980.
67. Day, Stacey B., ed. Death and Attitudes toward Death. Minneapolis: Uni-
versity of Minnesota, Bell Museum of Pathobiology, 1972.
68. de Parvillez, Alphonse. Joy in the Face of Death. New York: Desclee, 1963.
Translated by Pierre de Fon.
69. Deveau, Eleanor J., and David W. Adams, eds. Beyond the Innocence of
Childhood: Factors Influencing Children and Adolescents’ Perceptions and At-
titudes toward Death. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1995. Part of the
Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
70. Dumont, Richard G., and Dennis C. Foss. The American View of Death:
Acceptance or Denial? Cambridge, MA: Schenkman Publishing, 1972.
Noting in their introduction that the major objective of the monograph is to
invalidate a key that it poses, the authors suggest that the question of whether
Americans accept or deny that death is naïve, since many individuals both accept
and deny death simultaneously. While a study of a particular albeit diverse group—
Americans—the text is more an analysis of changes in how people cope with the
notion and reality of death and their attitudes toward the phenomenon. Dumont
and Foss review and discuss attitude formation and change, fear of death, death
wishes, the acceptance–denial controversy, methodological problems in death at-
titude research, individual variability of death attitudes, and the acceptance–denial
hypothesis. Includes references and suggestions for further reading.
71. Fleming, Steve, and Richard Lonetto. Children’s Conceptions of Aging and
Death. New York: Springer, 1978. Also published as volume 3 of the Springer
Series on Death and Suicide in 1980, with only Richard Lonetto as author.
72. Fulton, Robert. A Compilation of Studies of Attitudes toward Death, Funer-
als, and Funeral Directors: Participated in by the Clergy, the Public, Including
Critical Segments Thereof, Funeral Directors. Minneapolis: Center for Death
Education and Research, University of Minnesota, 1971.
 Attitudes toward Death 13

73. ———. The Sacred and the Secular: Attitudes of the American Public to-
ward Death. Milwaukee, WI: Bulfin, 1963.
A small, 23-page booklet on varying views toward death in the United States.
74. Goldsmith, Charles E. A Theoretical Analysis of Attitudes of Older People
toward Dying. Boston: Boston University Graduate School, 1967.
75. Goodman, Lisl Marburg. Death and the Creative Life: Conversations with
Prominent Artists and Scientists. New York: Springer, 1981. Volume 4 of the
Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor.
76. Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, Symposium No. 11. Death and
Dying: Attitudes of Patient and Doctor. New York: Group for the Advancement
of Psychiatry, 1966.
77. Gualtieri, Antonio R. The Vulture and the Bull: Religious Responses to
Death. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1984.
78. Hawkins, Anne Hunsaker. Reconstructing Illness: Studies in Pathography.
West Lafayette, IN: Purdue University Press, 1993.
Hawkins suggests that accounts of religious conversions are being replaced by
personal accounts of experience with disease. She divides these pathographies
into three categories: those where patients believe they can be responsible for
their own recovery, those searching for the good death, and those who view death
as a battle with disease or a personal journey. She discusses the myth of rebirth
and the promise of a cure, the myths of battle and journey, constructing death
through myths about dying, and myths about medicine and the healthy mind. The
appendix includes a bibliography of pathographies organized by disease as well
as an extensive list of references.
79. Kaplan, Pascal M. Understanding Death from a Spiritual Perspective. New
York: Sufism, 1977.
80. Kastenbaum, Robert J., and Ruth Aisenberg. Death in Our Lives and
Thoughts. New York: Springer, 1975. Condensed from The Psychology of
Death.
81. Kaufman, Barry Neil, and Suzi Lyte Kaufman. A Land beyond Tears: The
Liberating Approach to Death and Dying. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1982.
82. Klein, Allen. The Courage to Laugh: Humor, Hope, and Healing in the
Face of Death and Dying. New York: Jeremy P. Tarcher/Putnam, 1998.
Calling himself a “jollytologist,” Klein brings laughter to the subject of death
and dying. He discusses the lines between helpful humor and hurtful humor and
attempts to answer the question, “Tasteless or triumphant?” In this book, he
talks about the courage to laugh in the face of death; humor’s role with hope and
healing; when humor is and is not appropriate; humor in hospice; turning tears
14 Chapter 3

to laughter in children; humor with cancer and AIDS; humor in bereavement and
loss; and last laughs at funerals, at memorials, and in eulogies. Klein includes
numerous stories, anecdotes, and quotes. Includes a bibliography.
83. Knott, J. Eugene. Thanatopics: Activities and Exercises for Confronting
Death. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1989.
84. Kramer, Herb, and Kay Kramer. Conversations at Midnight: Coming to
Terms with Dying and Death. New York: W. Morrow and Co., 1993.
85. Lehner, Ernst. Devils, Demons, Death, and Damnation. New York: Dover,
1972.
86. Lonetto, Richard, and Donald I. Templer. Death Anxiety. Washington, DC:
Hemisphere Publishing, 1986. Part of the Series in Health Psychology and Be-
havioral Medicine, Charles D. Spielberger, editor in chief.
The authors attempt to frame the study of death anxiety in such a way that it
will find a prominent place in the behavioral and social sciences. They present
both theoretical analyses and research on death anxiety that have been derived
from a variety of environments. The text explores the correlates of death anxi-
ety, its dimensions, death imagery, and coping with the anxiety. The appendix
deals with measurement and features Boyar’s Fear of Death Scale, other death
attitude scales, and the Death Anxiety Scale. Includes extensive references and
an index.
87. Lunceford, Ronald, and Judy Lunceford. Attitudes on Death and Dying: A
Cross-Cultural View. Los Alamitos, CA: Hwong Publishers, 1976.
88. Marks, Amy Seidel, and Bobby J. Calder. Attitudes toward Death and
Funerals. Evanston, IL: Center for Marketing Sciences, J. L. Kellogg Graduate
School of Management, Northwestern University, 1982.
89. McCoy, Marjorie Casebier. To Die with Style! Nashville, TN: Abingdon
Press, 1974.
Through numerous stories and literary references, McCoy comments on vary-
ing approaches to death. She refers to these “styles” in chapters on accepting,
defiant, sensual, humorous, tragic, and questing attitudes toward death. A final
chapter addresses “achieving” one’s own death. Includes a list of titles for further
reading arranged by subject.
90. Mitchell, Marjorie Edythe. The Child’s Attitude toward Death. New York:
Schocken, 1967.
91. Moore, Virginia. Ho for Heaven! Man’s Changing Attitude toward Dying.
New York: Dutton, 1956.
92. Murphy, Marie. New Images of the Last Things: Karl Rahner on Death and
Life after Death. New York: Paulist Press, 1988.
 Attitudes toward Death 15

93. Murphy, N. Michael. The Wisdom of Dying: Practices for Living. Boston:
Element Books, 1999.
Advocating for a celebration of job in death, Murphy, a physician who has
worked in hospice environments, presents a positive vision from a spiritual, soul-
ful perspective. He incorporates references to ancient myths and traditions from
Ireland and the United Kingdom. This book is marketed as “An inspirational
guide for dying consciously. A celebration of living consciously.” Includes emo-
tional stories of the dying and their caregivers.
94. National Cancer Foundation. A Constructive Approach to Terminal Illness.
New York: National Cancer Foundation, 1962.
95. Neimeyer, Robert A., ed. Death Anxiety Handbook: Research, Instrumen-
tation, and Application. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1994. Part of the
Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
Offering the first comprehensive treatment of death anxiety, Neimeyer’s book
explores the causes, correlates, and consequences of the fear of death; implica-
tions for applied contexts; useful ideas for health care settings; applications for
psychotherapy; and instruction for death education. Such in-depth measurements
of death attitudes as copies of instruments with scoring keys, extensions and
refinements of widely used instruments, scales assessing death acceptances and
competencies, and reliability of available data are included. Philosophical and
psychological theories on death are covered as to how they affect the attitudes of
bereaved young adults, persons with AIDS, nursing home care workers, clients
in psychotherapy, and individuals who have had near-death experiences. This
title is intended for physicians, researchers, psychotherapists, hospice workers,
and others in the helping professions. Neimeyer is a professor of psychology at
University of Memphis and is widely published on thanatological topics.
96. Nouwen, Henri J. M. Our Greatest Gift: A Meditation on Dying and Car-
ing. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1994.
Nouwen explores attitudes toward death in the context of Catholic spirituality.
97. Sheikh, Anees A., and Katharina S. Sheikh. Death Imagery: Confronting
Death Brings Us to the Threshold of Life. Milwaukee, WI: American Imagery
Institute, 1991.
98. Singer, Peter. Rethinking Life and Death: The Collapse of Our Traditional
Ethics. New York: Oxford University Press, 1994. Published by St. Martin’s
Press in 1995.
99. Stannard, David E., ed. Death in America. Philadelphia: University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1975.
An important work in thanatology, Stannard’s book offers a collection of eight
essays by anthropologists, cultural historians, and literary scholars Phillippe
16 Chapter 3

Aries, Mary Ann Meyers, Patricia Fernandez Kelly, Stanley French, Ann Doug-
las, Lewis O. Saum, Jack Goody, and Stannard himself. In his introduction, Stan-
nard highlights what he sees as contradicting themes in Americans’ attitudes and
approaches toward death. He notes that one of those themes is “the popular social
criticism, exemplified by Jessica Mitford’s The American Way of Death, focusing
on the excesses of the funeral industry.” The other is the “more scholarly socio-
logical analysis of the common fate of most Americans, who now die in hospitals
and rest homes, deserted by their families and friends, and faced with doctors and
nurses so intent on maintaining their professional demeanor that they avoid per-
sonal contact with the dying at every turn.” He later argues, however, that these
two themes, “the extravagant masquerade of death and the determined avoidance
of the dying,” are actually reactions with a common source. Contributed articles
discuss bibliographic trends in death and the interpretation of culture, the cem-
etery as cultural institution, death in Mexican folk culture, death and the Puritan
child, death in Mormon thought and practice, changes in attitudes toward death
in Western societies, and death in the popular mind of pre–Civil War America.
Includes references, a small number of illustrations, and brief biographical in-
formation on the editor and contributors. Stannard is an American studies and
history professor at Yale University.
100. Stillion, Judith M. Death and the Sexes: An Examination of Differential
Longevity, Attitudes, Behaviors, and Coping Skills. Washington, DC: Hemi-
sphere Publishing, 1985. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health
Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
A developmentally oriented psychologist, death education teacher, and coun-
selor, Stillion examines the psychology of sex roles in the context of death and
dying. She presents research on sex differences in longevity, looking at the
changing face of death as well as biogenetic, environmental, and psychosocial
perspectives on death. Other topics covered include sexism in death, sex roles
and death attitudes across the life span, implications of gender identity and role
for death attitudes, gender and suicide, speculations concerning sex differences
in murder and suicide, widowhood, adult grief reactions, women and grief, a
model of bereavement counseling, sex roles and death education, and counseling
the bereaved with observations on sex roles. Each chapter concludes with a list
of references.
101. Walker, Kenneth M. The Circle of Life: A Search for an Attitude to Pain,
Disease, Old Age, and Death. New York: Consortium Press, 1970.
102. Weiner, Bill. Quiet Desperation: Plain Talk on Life and Death. Secaucus,
NJ: Lyle Stuart, 1980.
Originally intended to be a book about the life experiences of older people,
it became a narrative about death as Weiner’s oral documentary brought to the
surface many comments on death and dying. For two years, the author spoke with
400 men and women in hospitals, nursing homes, and funeral parlors and taped
 Attitudes toward Death 17

them. He spoke with war veterans, the terminally ill, holocaust survivors, and
those grieving the death of a loved one. The words of those interviewed are sad,
humorous, and often inspiring.
103. Weiss, Jess E. The Vestibule. Port Washington, NY: Ashley Books,
1972.
In an effort to alleviate “the sting of death” and to “establish with more cer-
tainty that there is an afterlife,” Weiss offers a collection of varied essays on
death experiences. Includes Elisabeth Kübler-Ross’s essay “The Experience of
Death.”
104. Zinker, Joseph Chaim. Terminal Illness as a Source of Personality Change
in a Woman Suffering from Cancer. Cleveland: Western Reserve University,
1963.
This is Zinker’s doctoral dissertation. Founder of the Gestalt Institute in Well-
fleet, MA, he has been involved in the growth and development of Gestalt theory
and methodology for many years.
 4
Bibliographies

105. Annotated Catalog of Books and Audiovisual Materials on Thanatology:

Death, Bereavement, Loss, Grief, and Recovery from Bereavement. Brooklyn,
NY: Highly Specialized Promotions, 1976. Cover title is The Thanatology Li-
brary.
This is both a bibliography and a catalog with prices. Includes indexes.
106. Benson, Hazel B. The Dying Child: An Annotated Bibliography. New
York: Greenwood Press, 1988. Part of the Contemporary Problems of Childhood
series, number 6, Carol Ann Winchell, editor.
This text is an extensive annotated bibliography of books, journal articles, and
dissertations published primarily from 1960 to 1987. The entries are divided by
subject within the general categories of General Aspects, The Young Child, The
Adolescent, The Family, The Caregivers, and Physical Care. General Aspects
includes bibliographies, historical views on death and dying, religious aspects of
death, cultural beliefs, legal and ethical issues, grief and mourning, and anticipa-
tory grief. Appendixes offer lists of children’s books on death, audiovisual ma-
terials, support organizations, wish-granting organizations, hospices, and basic
bibliographic tools. Includes an author index, a selective keyword subject index,
and a list of journal abbreviations. Benson is a medical librarian and head of the
pharmacy library at Ohio State University.
107. Bernstein, Joanne E. Books to Help Children Cope with Separation and
Loss. New York: R. R. Bowker, 1977.
Bernstein, an authority on bibliotherapy, presents an annotated bibliography
of 438 titles dealing with childhood bereavement. She also devotes a significant
part of the book to book selection, thoughts and concepts relating to childhood
bereavement, and an overview of bibliotherapy. Includes a section on selected
reading for adult guides; a bibliography on bibliotherapy; author, title, and sub-

18
 Bibliographies 19

ject indexes; and an extremely useful interest level index listing subject followed
by age group interest level.
108. Farberow, Norman L. Bibliography on Suicide and Suicide Prevention:
1897–1957; 1958–1967. Rockville, MD: National Institute of Mental Health,
1969. Also published and distributed by the U.S. Government Printing Office.
Farberow provides 2,202 references in this 203-page book.
109. Friedler, Anna B. Guide to the 400 Best Children’s and Adult’s Multicul-
tural Books about Disability, Illness, and Death. Newton Centre, MA: Lift Every
Voice Multicultural and Minority Source Materials Co., 1997.
110. Fulton, Robert. Death, Grief, and Bereavement: A Bibliography, 1845–
1975. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying
series, Robert J. Kastenbaum, editor. The title page notes “with the assistance of
Jerry Carlson, Karl Krohn, Eric Markusen, and Greg Owen.” Fulton’s introduc-
tion attributes the publishing to the Center for Death Education and Research at
the University of Minnesota, of which he is affiliated.
Fulton offers more than 3,800 references that include both monographic and
serial publications. Entries are numbered consecutively and are arranged alpha-
betically by author. Citations do not include notes or annotations. Includes a
simple subject index.
111. ———. Death, Grief, and Bereavement: A Chronological Bibliography,
1843–1970. Minneapolis: Center for Thanatological Studies, University of Min-
nesota, 1970. Publisher also cited as the Center for Death Education and Research
at the University of Minnesota.
112. Fulton, Robert, Margaret R. Reed, and Joyce H. Thielen. Death, Grief,
and Bereavement II: A Bibliography, 1975–1980. New York: Arno Press, 1981.
Also cited as A Bibliography on Death, Grief, and Bereavement II, 1975–1980.
This is a supplement to Fulton’s earlier work, Death, Grief, and Bereavement,
1845–1975.
Includes Joseph C. Santora’s 230-title Guide to Doctoral Dissertations on
Death and Dying, 1970–1978.
113. Guthman, Robert F. Jr., and Sharon Kay Womack. Death, Dying, and
Grief: A Bibliography. Lincoln, NE: Pied Publications, 1978. Also cited as pub-
lished by Word Services, Waco, TX.
The authors present an alphabetical list of more than 2,000 citations, most pub-
lished in the thirty years preceding publication of the bibliography. Works cover
all areas of death, dying, and grief. Citations are divided into sections based on
format: articles in periodicals and newspapers; books; miscellaneous; speeches
and reprinted, mimeographed, and unpublished papers; government documents;
theses and dissertations; pamphlets; and surveys and papers presented at meet-
ings. No annotations are included.
20 Chapter 4

114. Halporn, Roberta. The Thanatology Library. New York: Highly Special-
ized Promotions, 1976.
An annotated catalog of books and audiovisual materials available from Highly
Specialized Promotions.
115. Hayslip, Bert, and Robert J. Kastenbaum. Death and Dying: A Selective
Bibliography for Gerontology Instruction. Washington, DC: Association for Ger-
ontology in Higher Education, 1995.
116. Kutscher, Austin H. A Bibliography of Books on Death, Bereavement,
Loss, and Grief: 1935–1968. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1969.
Also cited as A Bibliography of Books on Death, Loss, and Grief: 1935–1968.
Kutscher lists approximately 1,200 references in this 84-page book.
117. ———. A Bibliography of Books on Death, Bereavement, Loss, and Grief:
1968-1972. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1974. Also cited as A
Bibliography of Books on Death, Loss, and Grief: 1968–1972.
118. Kutscher, Martin L., Daniel J. Cherico, Austin H. Kutscher, Robert DeBel-
lis, Raphael Lorenzo, and Roberta Halporn. A Cross-Index of Indices of Books
of Thanatology. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1978. Distributed by Arno
Press.
119. Kutscher, Martin L., Daniel J. Cherico, Austin H. Kutscher, Amy E. Han-
ninen, Steven Johnson, and David Peretz. A Comprehensive Bibliography of the
Thanatology Literature. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1975. Part of the
MSS Thanatology Series. This book’s title is also cited as Bibliography of the
Thanatology Literature.
Kutscher and others offers more than 4,800 citations of journal articles, mono-
graphs, and other publications. There are no notes or annotations. A short list of
bibliographical sources is included in the acknowledgments. Includes a simple
subject index.
120. Mace, Gillian S., Faren R. Akins, and Dianna L. Akins. The Bereaved
Child: Analysis, Education, and Treatment: An Abstracted Bibliography. New
York: IFI/Plenum Press, 1981.
121. Marks, Renee U. The Sociology of Death: A Selected Bibliography. Ann
Arbor: University of Michigan, School of Public Health, Department of Epide-
miology, 1965.
122. Meagher, David K., ed. As It Is Said: A Selected, Annotated Bibliography
in Death and Dying. 11th ed. Brooklyn, NY: Center for Thanatology Research
and Education, 2003.
123. Miller, Michael James, and Albert Jay Acri. Death: A Bibliographical
Guide. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1977.
 Bibliographies 21

124. Morgan, J. H., ed. Death and Dying: A Resource Bibliography for Clergy
and Chaplains (1960–1976). Wichita, KS: Institute on Ministry and the Elderly,
1977.
125. Poteet, G. Howard. Death and Dying: A Bibliography, 1950–1974. Troy,
NY: Whitston Publishing, 1976.
126. Poteet, G. Howard, and Joseph C. Santora. Death and Dying: A Bibliogra-
phy (1974–1978). Troy, NY: Whitston Publishing Co., 1989.
An unannotated bibliography of mostly periodical literature published from
1974 to 1978. Subject focus is death and dying, euthanasia, and suicide. Citations
are divided by subject. Includes an author index and a broad list of journals.
127. Prince, Arlene. Death and Dying: A Mediagraphy: An Annotated Listing
of Audiovisual Materials. 1977. Project sponsored by the Health Sciences Learn-
ing Resources Center, the University of Washington, and the Allied Memorial
Council.
Prince has compiled a 266-page bibliography of audiovisual materials on ter-
minal care, thanatology, and related subjects. Includes indexes.
128. Sell, Irene L. Death and Dying: An Annotated Bibliography. New York:
Tiresias Press, 1977.
Sell, an associate professor of nursing at Long Island University, offers 506 an-
notations (382 articles, 71 books, and 53 audiovisual items) that are presented for
their relevance to nursing. Most of the works cited were published in the 1970s
with some in the 1960s. Includes author and extensive subject indexes.
129. Sell, Kenneth D. Hospice, an International English Language Bibliogra-
phy. Durham, NC: Hospice of North Carolina, 1981.
130. Simpson, Michael A. Dying, Death, and Grief: A Critically Annotated
Bibliography and Source Book of Thanatology and Terminal Care. New York:
Plenum Press, 1979.
Simpson plays the role of critic for the literature of death and dying. He uses
a one- to five-star rating system and writes candid and helpful commentary on
more than 700 titles on death and dying. Examples of comments include “catchy
title,” “well-meaning but not at all special,” “over-emotional,” and “wispy and
frail book.” Such formats as books, films, audiovisual materials, and journal ar-
ticles are included. There is no index. Simpson is on the faculty at the Academic
Department of Psychiatry, Royal Free Hospital, London.
131. Southard, Samuel. Death and Dying: A Bibliographical Survey. Bibliogra-
phies and Indexes in Religious Studies. New York: Greenwood Press, 1991.
Primarily focused on theological, pastoral, and counseling aspects of death
and dying, this annotated bibliography includes more than 2,200 books, articles,
chapters, and reports.
22 Chapter 4

132. Szabo, John F. Mortuary Science: A Sourcebook. Metuchen, NJ: Scare-

crow Press, 1993. Paperback reprint published in 2002.
In the first reference book devoted entirely to mortuary science, Szabo pres-
ents a thorough bibliographical examination of the funeral industry and related
subjects, including even the most specialized areas of the field. Most citations
are annotated, with special notes on editions and reprints. Areas covered include
autopsy, cremation, burial rites and ceremonies, caskets and vaults, cemeteries,
embalming, epitaphs, ethnic customs, funeral dress and apparel, funeral music,
funeral reform, grave markers, laws and regulations, liturgies and sermons, me-
morial societies, organ and body donation, premature burial, per-need service,
restorative art, and several others. The text is organized by subject, with author
and title indexes and five appendixes.
133. Vernick, Joel J. Selected Bibliography on Death and Dying. Washington,
DC: National Institutes of Health/U.S. Government Printing Office, 1970.
134. Zalaznik, Patricia Weller. Bibliography on Grief: Your Guide to the Right
Resources to Cope with Loss and Death. Minneapolis, MN: Abundant Resources,
1995.
 5
Childhood Bereavement

135. Alderman, Linda. Why Did Daddy Die?: Helping Children Cope with the
Loss of a Parent. New York: Pocket Books/Simon & Schuster, 1989.
Alderman offers her own emotional journey following the death of her hus-
band and how she guided her children through their own bereavement. Helpful
for both those grieving and those helping children grieve, this book provides
tips for teachers as well as answers to commonly asked questions following
the loss of a parent. Alderman discusses how to tell children about death and
loss; funerals and issues surrounding them pertinent to children; understanding
a child’s concept of death; phases of grief (shock and denial, anger, bargaining,
depression, acceptance); and reaching out for help. Includes a brief annotated
bibliography.
136. Altschul, Sol, and G. H. Pollock. Childhood Bereavement and Its After-
math. Madison, CT: International Universities Press, 1988.
137. Anthony, Sylvia. The Discovery of Death in Childhood and After. New
York: Basic Books, 1972. First American edition. Originally published as The
Child’s Discovery of Death: A Study in Child Psychology by Kegan Paul, Lon-
don, in 1940, and by Harcourt, Brace, New York, in 1940. Also published by
Penguin, Baltimore, MD, in 1973.
In a revised edition of her earlier work, Anthony presents an exploration of
how children respond to death. She highlights similarities between the way
contemporary children react to death and the rituals of prehistoric peoples.
Anthony’s authoritative book is an often-cited classic. An appendix to chapter 1
is titled “Story-Completion Responses from Children Whose Mental Condition
Appears to Be Pathological.” Includes bibliography and name index.

23
24 Chapter 5

138. Barnard, Paul, Ian Morland, and Jan Nagy. Children, Bereavement, and
Trauma: Nurturing Resilience. Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1999.
139. Bernstein, Joanne E. Helping Children Cope with Loss: A Bibliotherapy
Approach. New York: R. R. Bowker, 1978.
140. Bernstein, Joanne E., and Stephen V. Gullo. When People Die. New York:
Dutton, 1977.
Bernstein and Gullo provide frank information about what happens when
people die from both physical and spiritual perspectives. For ages five and up.
141. Berry, Joy Wilt. About Death. Chicago: Children’s Press, 1990.
142. ———. Good Answers to Tough Questions about Death. Chicago: Chil-
dren’s Press, 1990.
143. Boritzer, Etan. What Is Death? Santa Monica, CA: Veronica Lane Books,
2000. Part of the Love and Feelings for Kids series. Illustrated by Nancy For-
rest.
This book is a gentle and thoughtful presentation of death for young children.
With understandable but specific narrative, Boritzer explores death traditions
from various cultures and religions.
144. Christ, Grace Hyslop. Healing Children’s Grief: Surviving a Parent’s
Death from Cancer. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.
Christ, an associate professor of social work at Columbia University, stud-
ied 88 families in which 157 children lost one of their parents when they were
three to seventeen years old. Fifty-one fathers and thirty-seven mothers were
treated for advance stages of cancer at Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center.
The families, except for one, participated in a psychoeducational intervention
program designed to help families cope with the death of one parent. The inter-
ventions provided information that allowed Christ to conduct quantitative and
qualitative analyses. This book summarizes the latter. The analysis examines how
the children coped from six months preceding to fourteen months following the
parent’s death. The data yielded five developmentally separate age groups. Most
of the children in the study adapted well to the loss. Includes a bibliography and
name and subject indexes.
145. Coloroso, Barbara. Parenting through Crisis: Helping Kids in Times of
Loss, Grief, and Change. New York: HarperCollins, 2000. Also published by
Quill, New York, in 2001.
146. Corr, Charles A., and Donna M. Corr. Handbook of Childhood Death and
Bereavement. New York: Springer, 1996.
147. Dennison, Amy, Allie Dennison, and David Dennison. After You Lose
Someone You Love: Advice and Insight from the Diaries of Three Kids Who’ve
 Childhood Bereavement 25

Been There. Minneapolis, MN: Free Spirit Publishing, 2005. Published in 2003
as Our Dad Died: The True Story of Three Kids Whose Lives Changed.
Written from a child’s point of view, this book relays the experiences of young
children dealing with the sudden loss of a parent. The authors write about the
death, the funeral, the cemetery, the first week, the first year, thoughts and feel-
ings, and their sadness and grief. Includes practical suggestions for coping and a
brief list of recommended titles. Foreword by Harold S. Kushner.
148. Dickerson, Julie G., and Patricia Brant. Grandpa’s Berries: A Story to
Help Children Understand Grief and Loss. Johnstown, PA: Cherubic Press,
1995.
149. Doka, Kenneth J., ed. Children Mourning, Mourning Children. Washing-
ton, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 1995.
Doka and several fellow scholars on death and dying offer twelve articles
on various topics related to childhood bereavement and death. They address
children’s understandings of death, answering the questions of grieving children.
They talk to children about illness, life-threatening illnesses in children, HIV in
the context of orphans and victims, parental and childhood grief, children and
traumatic loss, the role of the school, the worlds of dying children and their well
siblings, a child’s reconstruction of a deceased parent, and family bereavement.
Contributors include J. William Worden, Charles A. Corr, Catherine M. Sand-
ers, and Earl A. Grollman. Includes references, a sampler of literature for young
readers arranged by age group, and selected and annotated bibliographies by
Corr. The back of the book provides information about the Hospice Foundation
of America and its educational and publishing activities.
150. ———, ed. Living with Grief: Children, Adolescents, and Loss. Washing-
ton, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 2000. Distributed by Brunner/Mazel,
Philadelphia.
Produced in conjunction with the Hospice Foundation of America’s National
Bereavement Teleconference, this text is a compendium of articles by noted
experts on childhood grief. Divided into sections titled “Theoretical Overview,”
“Clinical Approaches with Children and Adolescents,” and “Special Losses,”
Doka’s book offers chapters on adolescent grief, the relationship of culture and
class to grief, the role of the school, empowering families and other natural sup-
port systems, counseling approaches, play therapy, benefits of ritual, the role of
groups with grieving children and teens, death education, parental and sibling
bereavement, and traumatic loss. Most chapters are followed by stories, vignettes,
dialogues, or other narratives that illustrate the chapter’s theme. Charles A. Corr
offers a special chapter on using books to help children cope. In it he presents an
annotated bibliography of recommended titles. Also included is a list of resource
organizations with detailed descriptions and a list of references. Foreword by
Jack D. Gordon, president of the Hospice Foundation of America.
26 Chapter 5

151. Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families. Helping the Grieving
Student: A Guide for Teachers: A Practical Guide for Dealing with Death in Your
Classroom. Portland, OR: Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families,
1998.
152. ———. Thirty-Five Ways to Help a Grieving Child. Portland, OR: Dougy
Center for Grieving Children and Families, 1999. Part of the Dougy Center for
Grieving Children and Families Guidebook Series.
153. ———. When Death Impacts Your School: A Guide for School Administra-
tors. Portland, OR: Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families, 2000.
154. Dyregov, Atle. Grief in Children: A Handbook for Adults. London: Jessica
Kingsley Publishers, 1991.
155. Emswiler, Mary Ann, and James P. Emswiler. Guiding Your Child through
Grief. New York: Bantam Books, 2000.
The Emswilers are founders of the New England Center for Loss and Transi-
tion and The Cove, a program for grieving children and their families. This com-
passionate guide provides professional advice for parents and caregivers who are
helping a child through a period of bereavement. It discusses the variety of ways
in which children grieve, changes in family dynamics, effective ways to ease the
transition to these changes, communicating with children about death and dying,
coping with the overwhelming sorrow experienced during holidays, depression
emanating from grief and how to identify it, and other suggestions for helping
children heal. Other chapters address stepparenting a grieving child, issues with
grieving teens, and long-term effects of childhood grief. Includes a suggested
reading list and ideas for school personnel and health care professionals for deal-
ing with grieving children. Also includes information about the organizations
founded by the authors.
156. Fassler, Joan. Helping Children Cope: Mastering Stress through Books
and Stories. New York: Free Press, 1978.
157. Fiorini, Jody J., and Jodi Ann Mullen. Counseling Children and Adoles-
cents through Grief and Loss. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2006.
158. Fitzgerald, Helen. The Grieving Child: A Parent’s Guide. New York:
Simon & Schuster, 1992.
Fitzgerald, director of the first grief program in the nation established in a com-
munity health center, presents a guide for parents to help make a child’s world
whole again following a death. Acknowledging that explaining death to a child is
an incredibly difficult task for parents, the author offers advice for telling a child
about death and coping with loss. She discusses introducing children to the real-
ity of death through books, language, and other methods; children’s reactions to
death; coping with the reality of death; dealing with the emotional responses of a
 Childhood Bereavement 27

child—anger, fear, guilt, depression, and so on; and moving beyond grief and re-
turning to school. Fitzgerald also includes a section on resolving childhood grief
as an adult and several activities for children and adults—drawing, writing, ac-
tivities with clay, funeral home and cemetery visits, and so forth. Includes a short
bibliography sectioned by age group. Introduction by Elisabeth Kübler-Ross.
159. Fogarty, James A. The Magical Thoughts of Grieving Children: Treating
Children with Complicated Mourning and Advice for Parents. Amityville, NY:
Baywood Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John
D. Morgan, editor.
160. Fox, Sandra Sutherland. Good Grief: Helping Groups of Children When
a Friend Dies. Boston: New England Association for Education of Young Chil-
dren, 1985.
161. Fry, Virginia Lynn. Part of Me Died, Too: Stories of Creative Survival
among Bereaved Children and Teenagers. New York: Dutton/Penguin, 1995.
Fry attempts to help children and teens to express their grief in a manner that
brings healing rather than angst by presenting stories about young people. Each
chapter offers a different story and focuses on a different type of grief, includ-
ing that experienced following an accidental death; the death of a grandparent,
mother, father, sibling, friend; a death from AIDS; a suicide; and a murder. The
book concludes with an epilogue bringing the reader up-to-date with how the
young people in the stories are doing now. Fry is the director of the Hospice
Council of Vermont and teaches at the University of Vermont.
162. Furman, Edna. A Child’s Parent Dies: Studies in Childhood Bereavement.
New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1974.
163. Gaffney, Donna A. The Seasons of Grief: Helping Your Children Grow
through Loss. New York: New American Library, 1988.
164. Goldman, Linda. Breaking the Silence: A Guide to Help Children with
Complicated Grief—Suicide, Homicide, AIDS, Violence, and Abuse. Washington,
DC: Accelerated Development, 1996.
165. ———. Helping the Grieving Child in School. Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta
Kappa Education Foundation, 2000.
166. ———. Life and Loss: A Guide to Help Grieving Children. Muncie, IN:
Accelerated Development, 1994.
167. Greenlee, Sharon, and Bill Drath. When Someone Dies. Atlanta, GA:
Peachtree Publishers, 1992. Illustrated by Bill Drath.
A simple book for children on loss and grief featuring soft, gentle nature
scenes. Greenlee is also a counselor.
168. Grollman, Earl A. The Child and Death. Boston: Beacon Press, 1967.
28 Chapter 5

169. Hartnett, Johnette. Children and Grief: Big Issues for Little Hearts. South
Burlington, VT: Good Mourning, 1993.
170. Heegaard, Marge Eaton. Coping with Death and Grief. Minneapolis, MN:
Lerner Publications, 1990.
Emphasizing that death is a natural part of life, Heegaard presents a helpful
book for older children on how to say goodbye, dealing with the feelings that fol-
low the death of a loved one, and helping others who are grieving. Heegaard, a
grief and loss counselor who works with children, provides practical information
on death and funerals in a gentle, thoughtful way. Includes a glossary and titles
for further reading.
171. Hickman, Martha Whitmore. Last Week My Brother Anthony Died. Nash-
ville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1984. Illustrated by Randie Julian.
172. Holford, Karen, and Kevin McCain. I Miss Grandpa: A Story to Help Your
Child Understand Death—and Eternal Life. Nampa, ID: Pacific Press Publishing
Association, 2004.
173. Huntley, Theresa. Helping Children Grieve When Someone They Love
Dies. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1991. Revised paperback edition
published in 2002.
174. Jackson, Aariane R., and Leigh Lawhon. Can You Hear Me Smiling?: A
Child Grieves a Sister. Washington, DC: Child & Family Press, 2004.
175. James, John W., Russell Friedman, and Leslie Landon Matthews. When
Children Grieve: For Adults to Help Children Deal with Death, Divorce, Pet
Loss, Moving, and Other Losses. New York: HarperCollins, 2001.
This book is designed to equip parents, teachers, and caregivers with the skills
to help grieving children. The authors present an easy-to-read guide with numer-
ous practical suggestions, personal stories, and real-life accounts. Includes the
questionnaire used by Matthews to assess how children process loss and the ef-
fect that parental skills in the area have on recovery from bereavement. Informa-
tion on the Grief Recovery Institute is included.
176. Jersild, Arthur T., and Frances B. Holmes. Children’s Fears. New York:
Teachers College, Columbia University, 1935.
177. Jewett, Claudia L. Helping Children Cope with Separation and Loss.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1982. Also cited as being published
by Bergin & Garvey Publishers in 1982 with coauthor S. Hadley.
178. Job, Nina, and Gill Frances. Childhood Bereavement: Developing the Cur-
riculum and Pastoral Support. London: National Children’s Bureau, 2004.
Job and Frances provide a guide for teachers and school personnel to address
issues relating to dying, death, and grief. They utilize best practices, case studies,
 Childhood Bereavement 29

and expert knowledge from a network of professionals studying childhood be-

reavement. This book strongly emphasizes the critical role of schools in assisting
young people with these issues. Work of the Childhood Bereavement Network
is featured.
179. Johnson, Joy. Keys to Helping Children Deal with Death and Grief.
Hauppauge, NY: Barron’s Educational Series, 1999. Also cited as Keys to Teach-
ing Children about Death and Grief.
180. Johnson, Joy, and Marv Johnson. Tell Me Papa: A Family Book for
Children’s Questions about Death and Funerals. Council Bluffs, IA: Centering
Corporation, 1978. Illustrated by Shari Borum.
181. Juneau, Barbara Frisbie. Sad but O.K. My Daddy Died Today: A Child’s
View of Death. Grass Valley, CA: Blue Dolphin Publishing, 1988.
182. Klicker, Ralph L. A Student Dies, a School Mourns: Dealing with Death
and Loss in the School Community. Philadelphia: Accelerated Development,
2000. Also published by Hemisphere Publishing, Washington, DC, in 1999.
183. Kliman, Gilbert. Preventive Opportunities in Childhood Bereavement
(Death of a Parent Study). White Plains, NY: Center for Preventive Psychiatry,
1964.
184. Knowles, Don, and Nancy Reeves. But Won’t Granny Need Her Socks?:
Dealing Effectively with Children’s Concerns about Death and Dying. Dubuque,
IA: Kendall/Hunt Publishing Co., 1983.
185. Koocher, Gerald P. Talking about Death with “Normal” Children: Re-
search Strategies and Issues. Boston: Developmental Evaluation Clinic, The
Children’s Hospital Medical Center, 1973.
186. Kopp, Ruth Lewshenia. Where Has Grandpa Gone?: Helping Children
Cope with Grief and Loss. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan, 1983.
Includes a read-aloud section for children titled “Mommy, What Does It Mean
to Die?”
187. Kroen, William C., and Pamela Espeland. Helping Children Cope with
the Loss of a Loved One: A Guide for Grownups. Minneapolis, MN: Free Spirit
Publishing, 1996.
188. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. On Children and Death: How Children and Their
Parents Can and Do Cope with Death. New York: Simon & Schuster/Touch-
stone, 1997. Originally published in 1983.
189. ———. Remember the Secret. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts, 1981. Illus-
trated by Heather Preston.
30 Chapter 5

Kübler-Ross offers a touching story about loss for children facing life-
threatening illness or the loss of a loved one. A 32-page paperback, this book will
help young people understand the gift of life as well as the reality of death.
190. Kysar, Ardis, and Elizabeth Overstad. Helping Young Children Cope with
Crisis: A Guide for Training Child Care Workers. St. Paul, MN: Toys ’n Things
Press, 1979.
191. Lamers, William Jr. Death, Grief, Mourning, the Funeral, and the Child.
Chicago: National Association of Funeral Directors, 1965.
192. Landau, Elaine. Death: Everyone’s Heritage. New York: Julian Messner,
1976.
A sensitive explanation of death for youth, Landau provides an overview of
death and discusses euthanasia, the process of dying, caring for the terminally
ill, suicide, grief and bereavement, funerals, and recovery from grief. Includes
a comforting epilogue and brief bibliography. Landau worked as a newspaper
reporter, children’s book editor, and children’s librarian.
193. Lehmann, Linda, Shane R. Jimerson, and Ann Gaasch. Mourning Child
Grief Support Curriculum: Early Childhood Edition: Kindergarten–Grade 2.
Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000.
194. ———. Mourning Child Grief Support Curriculum: Middle Childhood
Edition: Grades 3–6. Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000.
195. ———. Mourning Child Grief Support Curriculum: Preschool Edition:
Denny the Duck Stories. Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000.
196. LeShan, Eda. Learning to Say Goodbye: When a Parent Dies. New York:
Macmillan, 1976.
A guide for middle school–aged children dealing with the death of a parent.
197. ———. When a Parent Is Very Sick. Boston: Joy Street Books, a Division
of Little, Brown and Company, 1986.
198. Levete, Sarah, Christopher O’Neill, and Roger Vlitos. When People Die.
Brookfield, CT: Copper Beach Books, 1998.
Intended for elementary school audiences.
199. Levy, E. L. Children Are Not Paper Dolls: A Visit with Bereaved Siblings.
Greely, CO: Counseling Consultants, 1982.
200. Lewis, Paddy Greenwall, and Jessica G. Lippman. Helping Children Cope
with the Death of a Parent: A Guide for the First Year. Westport, CT: Praeger,
2004.
201. Lindsay, Bruce, and John Elsegood. Working with Children in Grief and
Loss. London: Bailliere Tindall, 1996.
 Childhood Bereavement 31

202. Mallonie, Bryan, and Robert Ingpen. Lifetimes: The Beautiful Way to Ex-
plain Death to Children. New York: Bantam Books, 1983.
Intended for audiences ages eight to ten.
203. McCarthy, Jane Ribbens, and Julie Jessop. Young People, Bereavement,
and Loss: Disruptive Transitions? London: National Children’s Bureau for the
Joseph Rowntree Foundation, 2005.
In this 86-page paperback, the authors examine the implications of bereave-
ment on the lives of children and teens through a thorough review of scholarly
literature on the topic. They suggest that bereavement is a general part of grow-
ing up. The book explores case studies on how young people discuss experiences
with loss; the theoretical history of research on bereavement and young people;
empirical evidence of bereavement as a risk factor in the lives of young people;
social and cultural contexts of bereavement; approaches to education and inter-
vention; and implications for policy makers and practitioners in forming guide-
lines, procedures, and practices for working with young people who are bereaved.
An appendix provides statistical data on numbers of young people experiencing
bereavement. Also includes an extensive list of references.
204. McGuire, Leslie. Death and Illness. Vero Beach, FL: Rourke Corporation,
1990.
Intended for juvenile audiences, this book uses the experiences of several
young people to explain losing a loved one because of a terminal illness.
205. Miller, Sally Downham. Mourning and Dancing for Schools: A Grief and
Recovery Sourcebook for Students, Teachers, and Parents. Deerfield Beach, FL:
Health Communications, 2000.
Miller’s book is about recognizing the losses experienced by members of a
school community and understanding the effects of bereavement over time. She
includes many stories about her work with schools and those mourning. She also
discusses team training, print and audiovisual resources, organizations and sup-
port groups, and “writing through the storm.”
206. Monroe, Barbara, and Frances Kraus, eds. Brief Interventions with Be-
reaved Children. New York: Oxford University Press, 2005.
Monroe and Kraus, both on staff at the St. Christopher’s Hospice in London,
present theoretical concepts on and practical implications of brief work with be-
reaved youth and their families. The authors’ unique focus is on “flexible and ac-
cessible short-term services delivered at the right time” and how they “underpin
the strengths of bereaved children.” Their premise is that such brief interventions
support the youths’ recovery rather than pathologizing the grief process. This no-
tion appears in other works but is not examined in-depth as it is here. Appropriate
for practitioners and educators, this book includes chapters from seventeen con-
tributors. Topics include family assessment, therapeutic interventions, shrinking
the space between people, brief interventions before bereavement, the role of
32 Chapter 5

volunteers in providing bereavement support to children, loss and grief in school

communities, interventions in critical care environments, traumatically bereaved
children, the aftermath of suicide, and moving beyond grief. Includes several
highlighted personal stories as case studies.
207. Moody, A. Mr. Death: Four Stories. New York: Harper & Row, 1975.
Intended for audiences ages twelve and older.
208. Moore, Jane Peters. Crafting a Crazy Quilt: Four Teachers Piece To-
gether Death in a School Context. Milwaukee, WI: National-Louis University,
National College of Education, 2001. Author’s doctoral dissertation.
209. Morgan, John D., ed. Young People and Death. Philadelphia: The Charles
Press, 1991.
Several experts in child psychology and behavior collectively offer a guide-
book for families dealing with death and loss.
210. Moser, Adolph, and David Melton. Don’t Despair on Thursdays!: The
Children’s Grief Management Book. Kansas City, MO: Landmark Editions,
1996.
With its compelling cartoon cover and elementary text, this 61-page book
helps children deal with grief following both death and the loss of friends who
have moved away.
211. Mundy, Michaelene. Sad Isn’t Bad: A Good-Grief Guidebook for Kids
Dealing with Loss. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1998.
212. Nussbaum, Kathy. Preparing the Children: Information and Ideas for
Families Facing Terminal Illness and Death. Kodiak, AK: Gifts of Hope, 1998.
213. Nussbaum, Kathy, and Melody Chord. Including the Children: A Resource
Guide for Adults to Help Children Deal with the Terminal Illness and Death of a
Loved One. Eugene, OR: Healing Wings, 1994.
214. O’Toole, Donna R. Growing through Grief: A K–12 Curriculum to Help
Young People through All Kinds of Loss. Burnsville, NC: Mountain Rainbow
Publications, 1989.
215. Oates, Martha D. Death in the School Community: A Handbook for Coun-
selors, Teachers, and Administrators. Alexandria, VA: American Counseling
Association, 1993.
216. Palmer, Pat, and Dianne O’Quinn Burke. “I Wish I Could Hold Your
Hand”: A Child’s Guide to Grief and Loss. San Luis Obispo, CA: Impact Pub-
lishing, 1994.
217. Papadatou, Danai, and Constantine J. Papadatos. Children and Death.
New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1991.
 Childhood Bereavement 33

218. Papenbrock, Patricia L., and Robert F. Voss. Loss: How Children and
Teenagers Can Cope with Death and Other Kinds of Loss. Raymond, WA: Medic
Publishing Co., 1990.
219. Pennells, Margaret, and Susan C. Smith. The Forgotten Mourners: Guide-
lines for Working with Bereaved Children. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers,
1995.
220. Pringle, Laurence. Death Is Natural. New York: Four Winds Press,
1977.
A simple 54-page book for children that explains death in the most general
sense.
221. Rathke, Julia Wilcox. What Children Need When They Grieve: The Four
Essentials: Routine, Love, Honesty, and Security. New York: Three Rivers Press,
2004.
222. Reed, Elizabeth L. Helping Children with the Mystery of Death. Nashville,
TN: Abingdon Press, 1970.
223. Richmond, Judy. Just You and Me: Making Memories with Your Children.
St. Joseph, MO: Hands of Hope Hospice, 1995.
224. Romain, Trevor. What on Earth Do You Do When Someone Dies? Min-
neapolis, MN: Free Spirit Publishing, 1999. Edited by Elizabeth Verdick.
Romain, an author and illustrator of several children’s books, offers this 72-
page small paperback written for younger children. It is divided into eighteen
chapters, each a question about death, mourning, or funerals. Examples include
Who can I talk to? Is it ok to cry? Will I ever feel better? Where has the person
gone? Where else can I go for help? Includes four titles for suggested reading.
Romain encourages children to visit libraries and bookstores for additional infor-
mation. Includes simple illustrations.
225. Romond, Janice Loomis. Children Facing Grief. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey
Press, 1989.
226. Rowling, Louise. Grief in School Communities: Effective Support Strate-
gies. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2003.
Departing from the traditional approach of addressing grief in young people
from an individual, supportive perspective, Rowling uses the “school commu-
nity” as the organizing supportive framework, recognizing that losses are “em-
bedded in a young person’s social environment as well as the family.” She also
focuses more on the effects of bereavement on the child in their present environ-
ment rather than the adult the child will become. A member of the International
Work Group on Death, Dying, and Bereavement and associate professor at the
University of Sydney, Rowling’s topics include critical incident management,
creating a supportive school environment, partnerships with outside agencies,
34 Chapter 5

disenfranchised grief in school settings, and the impact of loss on children and
adolescents. Includes an excellent glossary, a bibliography, and an index.
227. Rudman, Masha Kabakow. Children’s Literature: An Issues Approach.
2nd ed. New York: Longman, 1984.
228. Rudman, Masha Kabakow, Kathleen Dunne Gagne, and Joanne E. Bern-
stein. Books to Help Children Cope with Separation and Loss: An Annotated
Bibliography. 4th ed. New York: R. R. Bowker, 1993. Part of the Serving Special
Needs Series.
Containing more than an annotated bibliography, Rudman’s book is a source-
book on the issue of loss and children. In the bibliography, she includes 746
titles and provides thorough critical annotations. More than half of the titles were
published between 1989 and 1993. Rudman also includes some lengthy narrative
in the front of the book on separation, loss, and bibliotherapy for young people.
Here she discusses a child’s concepts of separation, a child’s reaction to separa-
tion, helping children cope, history of bibliotherapy, research in bibliotherapy,
and tips for successful bibliotherapy. She also provides lists of books and chap-
ters within books about separation and loss for adults. Another list contains titles
on bibliotherapy, including periodical articles. An appendix offers a list, arranged
by subject, of organizations and contact information with brief descriptions of
each. The book concludes with author, title, and subject indexes along with a
helpful interest level index listing bibliographic entries according to subject and
age level.
229. Rugg, Sharon. Memories Live Forever: A Memory Book for Grieving
Children. Marietta, GA: Rising Sun Center for Loss and Renewal, 1995.
Rugg, a licensed social worker, presents a collection of children’s writings
about death and loss along with exercises to help with sharing feelings.
230. Rugg, Sharon, and Rebecca Randall. Puppet Plays for Grieving Children.
Marietta, GA: Rising Sun Center for Loss and Renewal, 2000.
Rugg and Randall present a collection of sixteen puppets dealing with various
themes of death and dying. Themes include fatal accidents, terminal illnesses,
parental losses, life changes, the loss of a pet, natural disasters, suicides, divorces,
homesickness, HIV and AIDS, among others. The authors also offer ideas about
creating puppets and puppet theaters.
231. Schaefer, Dan, and Christine Lyons. How Do We Tell the Children? New
York: Newmarket Press, 1986. Published in 1993 with the subtitle A Step-by-Step
Guide for Helping Children Two to Teen Cope When Someone Dies. Third edi-
tion published in 2001.
Told in direct and simple language, this book explains the facts of death to
children and teens and offers guidance on coping with loss. It explores how their
emotions affect their reactions to death. Schaefer and Lyons begin with a review
of what children think about death, noting differences by age group. They exam-
 Childhood Bereavement 35

ine how to explain death to children in various situations, including the death of
a grandparent, infant death, the death of friend or classmate, an accidental death,
a murder, a suicide, and AIDS. They offer compassionate advice on talking to
children about someone who is dying. A touching chapter is offered on speaking
about death with a mentally challenged child. Grief and recovery from bereave-
ment are thoroughly treated with chapters on special grief needs of children;
the grieving process; dealing with anger, guilt, and responsibility; and helping
children heal. A brief chapter on funerals is included. The authors also offer an
extensive crisis checklist as well as an annotated bibliography divided by subject
and a list of support groups. Foreword by David Peretz, professor of psychiatry
at the College of Physicians and Surgeons at Columbia University.
232. Schuurman, Donna L. Helping Children Cope with Death. Portland, OR:
Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Families, 1998.
233. ———. Never the Same: Coming to Terms with the Death of a Parent. New
York: St. Martin’s Press, 2003.
Schuurman presents a thoughtful and sensitive guide for parents, teachers, and
other caregivers for grieving children. She discusses feelings without emphasiz-
ing stages of grief. An appendix includes an article titled “Limitations of Studies:
How to Know What to Believe When You Read a Study’s Findings.” Includes a
bibliography. Schuurman is executive director of The Dougy Center for Grieving
Children and Families and past president of the Association for Death Education
and Counseling.
234. Seibert, Dinah, Judy Catherine Drolet, and Joyce V. Fetro. Are You Sad
Too?: Helping Children Deal with Loss and Death. Santa Cruz, CA: ETR As-
sociates, 1993.
This 154-page paperback offers “suggestions for teachers, parents, and other
care providers of children to age 10.” Chapters address educating children about
loss and death; sharing death experiences to include cultural traditions and reli-
gious beliefs; how children learn about death; what children need to know about
death; responding to children’s questions, including examples; responding to a
loss or a death; and using children’s literature to teach about death. Also includes
suggested readings, references, and a short glossary.
235. Siekmann, Theodore C. Come the End: Instructions for Young People on
the Last Things. New York: J. F. Wagner, 1951.
236. Silverman, Janis. Help Me Say Goodbye: Activities for Helping Kids Cope
When a Special Person Dies. Minneapolis, MN: Fairview Press, 1999.
Silverman presents an art therapy and activity book for young children coping
with death.
237. Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe. Never Too Young to Know: Death in Children’s
Lives. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.
36 Chapter 5

Though somewhat theoretical, this book’s numerous vignettes make it helpful

to general readers seeking help with dealing with death in the context of children.
The publisher notes that it is the first book to “bring together diverse fields of
study and offer a practical as well as multifaceted theoretical approach to how
children cope with death.” Silverman explores how children are affected by loss
and challenges brought on by grief and how they can be supported in bereave-
ment. Includes extensive references; an index; and a helpful appendix featuring
resources, organizations, and websites for the bereaved.
238. Sirvis, Barbara. Death and Dying: An Educational Module for Special
Educators. New York: Teachers College of Columbia University, 1976.
239. Smilansky, Sara. On Death: Helping Children Understand and Cope.
New York: P. Lang, 1987.
240. Smith, B. A. Somewhere Just Beyond. New York: Macmillan, 1993.
Intended for audiences ages eight to twelve.
241. Smith, Susan C., and Margaret Pennells. Interventions with Bereaved
Children. Bristol, PA: J. Kingsley Publishers, 1995.
242. Sogn, Donnelen L. Remember the Laughter: Children, Death, and Loss.
Minneapolis, MN: Winston Press, 1978.
243. Sprung, Barbara. Death. Austin, TX: Raintree Steck-Vaughn, 1998. Part
of the Preteen Pressures series.
Intended for elementary and junior high school audiences, Sprung’s book is an
easy-to-read overview of death and grieving. She offers chapters on the death of a
parent, sudden death, suicide, and coping with the death of a loved one. Includes
a glossary, organizations to turn to for help, and a suggested reading list of both
fiction and nonfiction titles. Illustrated with photographs.
244. Stein, Sara Bonnett, Gilbert Kliman, and Dick Frank. About Dying: An
Open Family Book for Parents and Children Together. New York: Walker, 1974.
Reprinted in 1985.
Intended for audiences ages four to nine.
245. Stevenson, Robert G., ed. What Will We Do? Preparing a School Com-
munity to Cope with Crises. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1995. Sec-
ond edition is part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan,
editor.
246. Stewart, Gail B. Death. San Diego, CA: KidHaven Press, 2002. Part of the
Understanding Issues series.
Stewart introduces young children to death with photographs and narrative
discussing what death is, saying goodbye, and experiencing grief. Includes a ten-
word glossary with such terms as “brain-dead” and “rigor mortis,” a list of four
 Childhood Bereavement 37

titles for further exploration, and information about the author. The Understand-
ing Issues series explores “uncomfortable topics” that impact children.
247. Swetland, Sandra, and Nancy Calhoun. Helping Children Cope with
Death: A Guide for School Personnel. Pittsburgh, PA: Allegheny Intermediate
Unit, Nonpublic Schools Program, 1984.
248. Terhune, James A. Coping with Personal Losses. Eugene, OR: J. Terhune,
1987.
A self-published text for juvenile audiences.
249. Trozzi, Maria, and Kathy Massimini. Talking with Children about Loss.
New York: Berkley, 1999.
250. Vandeman, George E. Papa, Are You Going to Die? Mountain View, CA:
Pacific Press, 1970.
251. Vogel, Linda Jane. Helping a Child Understand Death. Philadelphia:
Fortress Press, 1975.
252. Ward, Barbara. Good Grief: Exploring Feelings, Loss, and Death with
under Elevens: A Holistic Approach. Bristol, PA: Jessica Kingsley Publishers,
1996. Originally published in 1993.
253. Wass, Hannelore, and Charles A. Corr, eds. Childhood and Death. Wash-
ington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1984.
254. ———, eds. Helping Children Cope with Death: Guidelines and Re-
sources. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1982. Revised second edition
published in 1984 as part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health
Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
255. Webb, Nancy Boyd, ed. Helping Bereaved Children: A Handbook for
Practitioners. New York: Guilford Press, 2002. Originally published in 1993.
A member of the faculty of Fordham University’s Graduate School of Social
Service, Webb has assembled articles from ten diverse contributors along with
several of her own pieces to assist social workers, psychologists, and others who
may fill the role of helping a child through loss. Topics include children’s emo-
tional responses to death, differences between childhood and adult grief, religious
and cultural influences on a child’s understanding of death, disabling grief, sev-
eral variations on professional intervention, therapy options, vicarious traumati-
zation of counselors, sibling death, grandparent death, parental death, suicide and
grieving children, violent deaths, play therapy groups, the death of a teacher, and
school-based intervention. Case studies are almost always referenced. Appen-
dixes include training programs and certifications in play therapy, grief counsel-
ing, and trauma/crisis counseling; a brief list of bereavement resources; resources
for play materials; and a limited bibliography focused on religious, cultural, and
ethnic practices related to death. Foreword by Earl A. Grollman.
38 Chapter 5

256. Weitzman, Elizabeth. Let’s Talk about When a Parent Dies. New York:
PowerKids Press/Rosen Publishing Group, 1996. Part of the Let’s Talk Library.
Intended for young children, this is a simple book on grief. The author empha-
sizes how death is not the child’s fault, how one can never love too much, sharing
feelings, fear, accepting the loss, and holding on to memories. Includes a brief
glossary and color photographs to illustrate the concepts.

257. Wolfelt, Alan D. A Child’s View of Grief: A Guide for Parents, Teachers,
and Counselors. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2004. Companion Press is
an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.
Wolfelt, director of the Center for Loss and Life Transition, presents a 45-page
booklet on how children and adolescents grieve after a loved one dies. Includes
guidance for parents and caregivers.

258. ———. Healing the Bereaved Child: Grief Gardening, Growth through
Grief, and Other Touchstones for Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion
Press, 1996. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life
Transition.
Wolfelt offers guidance for helping a child through bereavement. He discusses
the unique qualities of a child’s grief, the six needs of mourning, foundations
for counseling bereaved children, counseling techniques, support groups for
bereaved children, helping grieving children at school, and helping the grieving
adolescent. Wolfelt advocates a more holistic approach to the grief process.

259. ———. Healing a Child’s Grieving Heart: 100 Practical Ideas for Fami-
lies, Friends, and Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2001. Com-
panion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.
Wolfelt presents an idea book for adults who are helping a child grieve.
260. ———. Healing Your Grieving Heart for Kids: 100 Practical Ideas:
Simple Advice and Activities for Children after a Death. Fort Collins, CO: Com-
panion Press, 2001. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and
Life Transition.
For six- to twelve-year-olds, this book offers simple advice and suggested ac-
tivities for children following the death of a loved one. Wolfelt affirms feelings
and emphasizes that they are normal and necessary.
261. ———. Helping Children Cope with Grief. Muncie, IN: Accelerated De-
velopment, Inc., 1983.
Prolific author Wolfelt offers a guide for parents, educators, and caregivers
working with grieving children. He offers suggestions for creating a caring re-
lationship and an open atmosphere for children to discuss feelings and attitudes
toward death and dying. Topics covered include factors influencing a child’s
response to death, emotional responses, dimensions of childhood grief, physi-
ological changes, regression, explosive emotions, acting out, fears, guilt and self-
 Childhood Bereavement 39

blame, reconciliation, skills needed by the caregiver, and helping others to help
children. Discussion questions are also provided to help in facilitating group
conversations about grief and death. Wolfelt also includes an important chapter
on the “Big Man” or “Big Woman” syndrome among bereaved children. Includes
a list of twelve activities for children and their caregivers, selected periodicals,
organizations and support groups, several tables of data, and an extensive list of
contemporary resources that deal with children and grief. Wolfelt wrote the book
while he was a doctoral fellow in the Department of Psychiatry and Psychology
at the Mayo Clinic in Rochester, Minnesota.
262. Wolfenstein, Martha, and Gilbert Kliman, eds. Children and the Death of
a President: Multidisciplinary Studies. New York: Doubleday, 1965.
Developed from a conference at the Albert Einstein College of Medicine on
“Children’s Reactions to the Death of the President” in April of 1964, this volume
is a collection of studies by thirteen researchers. Most of the material relates to
the death of President John F. Kennedy. The studies explore reactions to the as-
sassination, Oedipal themes in the reactions, differences between the death of the
president and the death of a parent, and others. Includes titles and institutional
affiliation of the contributors, a questionnaire for school children used in one
study, several essays by junior high school students about the assassination, a
transcript of tape recorded interviews between a researcher and children about
the assassination, and an index.
263. Wolff, S. Bereavement in Children under Stress. New York: Penguin,
1969.
264. Worden, J. William. Children and Grief: When a Parent Dies. New York:
Guilford Press, 1996.
Worden, codirector of the Harvard Child Bereavement Study based at Mas-
sachusetts General Hospital, presents major findings of the study in this book,
which combines theory, research, and practical advice for those helping children
grieve the loss of a parent. Offering a detailed examination of bereavement in
children, the book is based on extensive interviews and assessments of school-
aged children who have a lost a parent. Worden explores the mourning process
for children, the role of mediators in a child’s bereavement experience, loss
through death compared to other types of loss, counseling and intervention, and
intervention models and activities. The text is appropriate for advanced courses
in bereavement, child therapy, and developmental psychopathology. A touching
epilogue includes several quotes from children who have lost a parent because of
death, offering advice to other children who have experienced the same loss. Ap-
pendixes include project assessment instruments and a screening instrument with
scoring instructions. Includes a list of suggested readings by subject area.
265. Zeligs, Rose. Children’s Experience with Death. Springfield, IL: Charles
C. Thomas, 1974.
40 Chapter 5

A clinical child psychologist in private practice, Zeligs discusses the effects of

death on children, their developmental concepts of death, fear of death, hospital
settings for sick children, communicating with dying children, parental issues
when a child is dying, special issues with disabled children, death and adoles-
cents, parental death, and religion and death from a child’s perspective. Includes
author and subject indexes.
 6
Communication about Death

266. Arnstein, Helene S. What to Tell Your Child about Birth, Illness, Death,
Divorce, and Other Family Crises. Indianapolis, IN: Bobbs-Merrill, 1962. Pub-
lished in cooperation with the Child Study Association of America. Originally
published in 1960 as What to Tell Your Children about Birth and Death.
In addition to the other topics, Arnstein discusses how best to communicate
about serious health issues, death, and dangers. A brief section on where to go for
help is included along with a list of print and organizational resources.
267. Berrigan, Daniel. We Die before We Live: Talking with the Very Ill. New
York: Seabury Press, 1980.
268. Better Business Bureau. Alerting Bereaved Families: A Special Bulletin.
New York: Better Business Bureau, 1961.
269. Bryant-Mole, Karen. Talking about Death. Austin, TX: Raintree Steck-
Vaughn, 1999. Part of the Talking About series.
This book is a heavily illustrated 32-page book for young children on death,
dying, funerals, feelings, and remembering loved ones. Includes a glossary and
list of three titles for suggested readings.
270. Buckman, Robert, Ruth Gallop, and John Martin. I Don’t Know What to
Say: How to Help and Support Someone Who Is Dying. Boston: Little, Brown,
1989. Also published by Key Porter Books, Toronto, in 1988, and by Vintage
Books, New York, in 1992.
271. Callanan, Maggie, and Patricia Kelly. Final Gifts: Understanding the Spe-
cial Awareness Needs and Communications of the Dying. New York: Bantam,
1997. Originally published in 1992.

41
42 Chapter 6

272. Carmody, John. Conversations with a Dying Friend. New York: Paulist
Press, 1992.
273. Cobb, Nancy. In Lieu of Flowers: A Conversation for the Living. New
York: Pantheon Books, 2000.
Cobb’s book is an effort to bring laughter and enlightenment to the subject
of death and loss. She refers to the instances when the living meet the dying as
“divine intersections.” Told in a direct and frank style, unlike many books of
consolation, Cobb relays the stories of others who have experienced loss.
274. Coute, Lucille. Conversations with a Dying Friend. Pacific Percep.,
1977.
275. Dempsey, David. Death, the Press, and the Public. New York: Arno
Press, 1982.
276. DiGiulio, Robert C., and Rachel Kranz. Straight Talk about Death and
Dying. New York: Facts on File, 1995.
Written for adolescents, this book provides concise information about a variety
of death-related topics. DiGiulio covers American attitudes toward death, teens’
individual experiences with death, coming to terms with death, and Kübler-
Ross’s five stages of dying. He includes a valuable “Where to Find Help” section
that includes suicide and homicide resources, alcohol and drug counseling and
help, sexually transmitted diseases, as well as gay and lesbian support groups. A
brief but appropriate list of books on death and dying is also provided.
277. Golubow, Mark. For the Living: Coping, Caring, and Communicating
with the Terminally Ill. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2001. Part of the
Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
278. Grollman, Earl A., ed. Explaining Death to Children. Boston: Beacon
Press, 1967.
279. Guilmartin, Nance. Healing Conversations: What to Say When You Don’t
Know What to Say. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2002.
280. Hartnett, Johnette. Death Etiquette for the 90s: What to Do, What to Say.
South Burlington, VT: Good Mourning, 1993.
281. Hedtke, Lorraine, and John Winslade. Remembering Lives: Conversations
with the Dying and the Bereaved. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2004.
Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
282. Iserson, Kenneth V. Grave Words: Notifying Survivors about Sudden,
Unexpected Deaths. Tucson, AZ: Galen Press, 1999.
This book is a 342-page manual covering all imaginable aspects of adult and
pediatric death notification, along with relevant aspects of grief, bereavement,
and communication skills.
 Communication about Death 43

283. Jackson, Edgar N. Explaining Death to Children. Boston: Beacon Press,

1967.
284. ———. Telling a Child about Death. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1965.
Also cited as published by Channel Press, New York.
285. Jacobsen, Gail B. Write Grief: How to Transform Loss with Writing.
Menomonee Falls, WI: McCormick & Schilling, 1990.
286. Klopfenstein, Janette. Tell Me about Death, Mommy. Scottdale, PA: Her-
ald Press, 1977.
287. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Living with Death and Dying. New York: Mac-
millan, 1981. Published by Collier Books, New York, in 1981 and 1984. Pub-
lished by Simon & Schuster/Touchstone, New York, in 1997, with the title Living
with Death and Dying: How to Communicate with the Terminally Ill.
288. Kutscher, Austin H. Death, the Press, and the Public. New York: MSS
Information Corp., 1978. Published by Arno Press, New York, in 1981 as part
of the Foundation of Thanatology/Arno Press Continuing Series on Thanatology,
with David Dempsey as the lead author.
This 254-page edition is based on a symposium by the Foundation of Thanatol-
ogy and others.
289. Kutscher, Austin H., and Lillian G. Kutscher. Dialogues: The Dying
and the Living. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1978. Distributed by Arno
Press.
290. Levine, Stephen. Meetings at the Edge: Dialogues with the Grieving and
the Dying, the Healing, and the Healed. Garden City, NY: Anchor Press, 1984.
Levine presents stories of people in different phases of terminal illness and
bereavement.
291. Linn, Erin. I Know Just How You Feel: Avoiding the Clichés of Grief.
Incline Village, NV: Publisher’s Mark, 1986.
292. MacGregor, Cynthia, and David Clark. Why Do People Die?: Helping
Your Child Understand—with Love and Illustrations. Secaucus, NJ: Carol Pub-
lishing Group, 1998.
293. Menten, Ted. Gentle Closings: How to Say Goodbye to Someone You
Love. Philadelphia: Running Press, 1991.
Known for his books on teddy bears and his own teddy bear creations, Menten
offers a book of stories about those who have gracefully said goodbye and how
they did it. The book began when he joined a local teddy bear lovers’ club on a
visit to give bears to critically ill children in the hospital. Menten notes that the
goodbye at death is about pushing aside despair and rejoicing in memories. A
short bibliography is included.
44 Chapter 6

294. Moffatt, Bettyclare. Gifts for the Living: Conversations with Caregivers
on Death and Dying. Santa Monica, CA: IBS Press, 1988.
295. Morris, Virginia. Talking about Death Won’t Kill You. New York: Work-
man Publishing, 2001.
Morris attempts to demystify death and dying by offering straight talk on feel-
ings about death. She notes that this means talking about loss, pain, and deep
fears as well as love and intimacy. The book is filled with personal stories that
illustrate the art of dying well or what Morris calls the “good death.”
296. Resnick, Sheila Handler. Coping with Dying: A Study of Patient and
Family Interaction in Terminal Illness. Washington, DC: Catholic University of
America, 1976.
297. Rudolph, Marguerita. Should the Children Know?: Encounters with Death
in the Lives of Children. New York: Schocken Books, 1978.
This guidebook is designed to equip adults with the skills necessary to help
young children deal with death. Rudolph offers suggestions to help children rec-
ognize their fears, deal with feelings of loss upon the death of a loved one, and
help familiarize children with the concept of death using literature and through
the care of plants and animals. She uses individual stories to convey the concepts.
Includes a brief annotated bibliography.
298. Shepard, Martin. Someone You Love Is Dying: A Guide for Helping and
Coping. New York: Harmony Books, 1975.
Shepard, a psychiatrist, presents a practical guide to dealing with the complex
emotions of anxiety, guilt, resentment, despondency, aversion, and helplessness.
He notes that all are natural reactions to death. He discusses preparing for death,
minimizing fear and grief, and the benefits of talking about experiences with
death. Shepard stresses the importance of open and honest communication. He
also suggests realistic alternatives to the traditional ways in which society treats
the dying. Includes a list of organizations with narrative and contact information
about each and suggested book and film titles.
299. Standard, S., and Nathan H. Standard, eds. Should the Patient Know the
Truth? New York: Springer, 1955.
300. Thomas, V. R. Saying Goodbye to Grandma. New York: Clarion Books,
1988.
301. Verwoerdt, Adriaan. Communication with the Fatally Ill. Springfield, IL:
Charles C. Thomas, 1966.
302. Watts, Richard G. Straight Talk about Death with Young People. Philadel-
phia: Westminster Press, 1975.
303. Wogrin, Carol. Matters of Life and Death: Finding the Words to Say
Goodbye. New York: Broadway Books, 2001.
 Communication about Death 45

Wogrin presents a simple, straightforward guide to communicating with the

terminally ill through both verbal and nonverbal expression. She discusses the
dying process, long goodbyes, helping children say goodbye, saying goodbye
even when the relationship has been difficult, and learning lessons from the dy-
ing. She focuses on conversations with dying people and what to say and do.
Includes an annotated bibliography and list of websites as well as information
on organizations that offer advice and suggestions on saying goodbye. Wogrin
is a registered nurse and licensed clinical psychologist who serves as executive
director of the National Center for Death Education and also as director of the
Bereavement Studies Program at Mount Ida College in Newton, Massachusetts.
304. Wooten-Green, Ron. When the Dying Speak: How to Listen and Learn
from Those Facing Death. Chicago: Loyola Press, 2001.
305. Zagaranski, D. Stuck for Words: What to Say When Someone Is Grieving.
Melbourne, Australia: Hill of Content Publishing, 1994.
 7
Coping and Caregivers

306. Ainsworth-Smith, Ian, and Peter W. Speck. Letting Go: Caring for the
Dying and the Bereaved. London: SPCK Publishing, 1982.
307. Anderson, Jon. Death and Friends. Pittsburgh, PA: University of Pitts-
burgh Press, 1970. Published by Carnegie Mellon University Press, Pittsburgh, in
2003 as part of the Carnegie Mellon Classic Contemporary Series.
308. Baird, Robert M., and Stuart E. Rosenbaum. Caring for the Dying: Criti-
cal Issues at the Edge of Life. Amherst, NY: Prometheus Books, 2003.
309. Barnard, Christiaan. Good Life/Good Death: A Doctor’s Case for Eutha-
nasia and Suicide. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1980.
310. Bartlow, Bruce G. Medical Care of the Soul: A Practical and Healing
Guide to End-of-Life Issues for Families, Patients, and Health Care Providers.
Boulder, CO: Johnson Books, 2000.
311. Barton, David, ed. Dying and Death: A Clinical Guide for Caregivers.
Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins, 1977.
Barton argues that for practitioners to be successful in collectively caring for
dying persons, they must be able to “discern and respond appropriately to the
myriad of needs of the person and the members of his or her family.” He also be-
lieves they must have a working knowledge of basic theoretical concepts and the
ability to “appreciate the perspectives and abilities of a wide variety of health care
and health care–related personnel.” This multidimensional approach, he asserts,
will lead to optimal assistance and the greatest benefit for dying patients. He
notes in his preface that the book is intended for physicians, clergy, social work-
ers, psychologists, mental health counselors, nurses, and others working with the
dying and their families. The text features articles by contributors Jan van Eys;

46
 Coping and Caregivers 47

John M. Flexner; Ann B. Hamric; Liston O. Mills; Daniel T. Peak; Charles E.

Scott; and Robert M. Veatch, who wrote “Caring for the Dying Person: Ethi-
cal Issues at Stake.” There are also two unlisted contributors: Linda Cummings
and John W. Gattis. Articles focus on theoretical considerations; dying, death,
and bereavement as health care problems; clinical care approaches to the dying
person; emotions and feelings of the dying; deterrents to therapeutic care; issues
for clergy; the elderly and death; and caring for children who may die. Includes
references and a limited index.
312. Beckman, Gunnel. Admission to the Feast. New York: Rinehart & Win-
ston, 1971.
This book is the end-of-life account of a nineteen-year-old woman with
leukemia.
313. Brown, Norman O. Life against Death. London: Routledge and Kegan
Paul, 1959. Also published by Random House, New York, and by Sphere Books,
London, in 1968.
314. Callari, Elizabeth S. A Gentle Death: Personal Caregiving to the Termi-
nally Ill. Greensboro, NC: Tudor, 1986.
Callari is founder and executive director of the Center for Awakening, a
nonprofit organization that provides care and support for terminally ill pa-
tients. Her book provides compassionate guidance for those caring for the
terminally ill. She begins with a discussion of caregiving and learning from the
dying. Other chapters address communication with the dying, the suddenness
of death even when it is expected, respecting patients’ choices, special needs
of the dying, privacy, treating the fear of abandonment, working with clergy,
dignity, the importance of commitment, physical aspects of death, funerals,
unresolved grief, emotions of survivors, moving forward, and resolution and
healing. Helpful guidance and discussion is provided on the seemingly minor
issues of flowers versus donations, funeral dinners, and prearranged funerals.
Callari’s concluding chapter, “Birthing and Dying,” draws on her experience
as an obstetrical nurse to make the link between birth and death, the concept
of passage.
315. Cargas, Harry J., and Ann White, eds. Death and Hope. Washington, DC:
Corpus Books, 1970.
The editors and their fellow contributors offer commentary and analysis on the
theologies of death, hope, and faith, contrasting them today with yesteryear. The
text is written from various Christian perspectives.
316. Carlson, Lisa. Caring for the Dead: Your Final Act of Love. Hinesburg,
VT: Upper Access Books, 1998.
317. Carpenter, Edward. The Drama of Love and Death. New York: Mitchell
Kennerley, 1912.
48 Chapter 7

318. Carroll, David. Living with Dying: A Loving Guide for Family and Close
Friends. New York: Paragon House, 1991. Originally published by McGraw-
Hill, New York, in 1985.
Carroll offers an excellent practical guide for loved ones of the dying. He
presents a significant amount of authoritative information and advice from phy-
sicians, psychiatric nurses, gerontologists, and thanatologists. Several personal
stories and anecdotes from the dying are also incorporated. Topics include caring
for the dying at home, talking to a dying person about dying, sources for help
and support, funeral arrangements, hospice care, how to grieve, helping someone
handle pain, talking with young people about death, and providing emotional first
aid. Includes an annotated list of references and an index. Foreword by Austin
H. Kutscher.
319. Carter, Nick. Death Strain. Lincoln, NE: University Publishing Co., 1970.
Published by Award Books in 1976.
320. Carter, Steven. The Nothing That Is and the Nothing That Is Not: On
Death, Dying, and Suffering. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 2004.
321. Cutter, Fred. Coming to Terms with Death: How to Face the Inevitable
with Wisdom and Dignity. Chicago: Nelson-Hall, 1974.
322. Davies, Betty. Fading Away: The Experience of Transition in Families
with Terminal Illness. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1995. Part of the
Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
323. Davis, Richard H., ed. Dealing with Death. Los Angeles: University of
Southern California Press, 1973.
324. De Bary, Richard. My Experiments with Death: A Study of the World Soul
in Its Relations with the Private Self. London: Longmans, Green & Co., 1936.
325. Destouches, L. F. Death on the Installment Plan. New York: New Direc-
tions, 1966.
326. Dicks, Russell, and Thomas Kepler. And Peace at Last. Philadelphia:
Westminster Press, 1953.
327. Doka, Kenneth J. Living with Life-Threatening Illness: A Guide for Pa-
tients, Their Families, and Caregivers. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 1998.
Originally published by Lexington Books, New York, in 1993.
328. Doyle, Nancy. The Dying Person and the Family. New York: Public Af-
fairs Commission, 1972.
329. Farberow, Norman L., and Edwin S. Shneidman, eds. The Cry for Help.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1972.
 Coping and Caregivers 49

330. Furman, Joan, and David McNabb. The Dying Time: Practical Wisdom for
the Dying and Their Caregivers. New York: Belltower Publishing, 1997.
Furman and McNabb present a comprehensive guide for both the dying and
their caregivers. It focuses on creating environments conducive to peace and
tranquility. The book covers guided imagery for coping with pain, specifics about
the moment of death, memorial services, health concerns for caregivers, physical
care, and spiritual matters. Furman is a holistic nurse practitioner, and McNabb
is an AIDS educator and caregiver. They deliver a very sensitive and thoughtful
book with several personal and emotional stories from the authors’ own experi-
ences.
331. Griffith, William H. Confronting Death. Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press,
1977.
332. Grof, Stanislav, and Joan Halifax. The Human Encounter with Death. New
York: E. P. Dutton, 1977.
333. Grollman, Earl A., ed. When Your Loved One Is Dying. Boston: Beacon
Press, 1980.
Grollman, a rabbi and widely respected authority on thanatology, presents a
simple collection of thoughts and words of advice on critical matters during the
final weeks of life. This book is intended for use as emotional support and guid-
ance. Includes numerous quotes and a list of organizations.
334. Gruber, Otto. When I Die. New York: Vantage Press, 1965.
335. Gubrium, Jaber F. Living and Dying at Murray Manor. New York: St.
Martin’s Press, 1975.
Stressing that the book is not a survey of statistics about nursing homes, Gu-
brium examines the social organization of care in a single nursing home, which
he calls Murray Manor. The question he poses that frames the book is “How is
care in a nursing home accomplished by those people who participate in its ev-
eryday life?” The care he refers to is whatever the participants consider to be part
of life in the nursing home in contrast with life in other places, and the people
he refers to are the staff, residents, relatives, visiting physicians, morticians, and
others who have cause to be there. Includes an index.
336. Hansen, Adolf. Responding to Loss: A Resource for Caregivers. Ami-
tyville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2004. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning
Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
337. Henderson, Randi, and Richard Marek. Here Is My Hope: Inspirational
Stories from the Johns Hopkins Hospital. New York: Doubleday, 2001. The
cover title is Here Is My Hope: A Book of Healing and Prayer: Inspirational
Stories from the Johns Hopkins Hospital. The alternate title is Here Is My hope:
50 Chapter 7

Inspirational Stories from the Johns Hopkins Hospital: A Book of Healing and
Prayer.
One of the most highly regarded hospitals in the United States, Johns Hop-
kins Hospital is also known for its spiritual component, which is highlighted by
the large marble statue of Christ in its rotunda. Patients, family members, and
others leave prayers at the statue called Divine Healer by Bertel Thorvaldsen
(1770–1844). An appendix in Henderson and Marek’s book includes many of
the prayers. The book provides a link between faith and medicine through the
telling of true stories. It stands as an inspirational guide for the terminally ill,
caregivers, and the bereaved. It was inspired by an article in the Baltimore Sun
by Diana Sugg.
338. Jackson, Edgar N. When Someone Dies. Philadelphia: Fortress Press,
1971.
339. Johnson, L. D. The Morning after Death. Nashville, TN: Broadman Pub-
lishing, 1978.
Johnson writes about the death of his daughter, Carole Johnson, in 1962. In-
cludes a bibliography.
340. Kastenbaum, Robert J. On Our Way: The Final Passage through Life and
Death. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2004.
341. Kavanaugh, R. E. Facing Death. Baltimore, MD: Penguin Group, 1974.
Published by Nash Publishing, Los Angeles, in 1972.
342. Kelly, Evelyn B. Dealing with Death: A Strategy for Tragedy. Blooming-
ton, IN: Phi Delta Kappa Educational Foundation, 1990.
343. Kramer, Scott, and Kuang-ming Wu. Thinking through Death. Malabar,
FL: R. E. Krieger Publishing Co., 1988.
344. Kreeft, Peter J. Love Is Stronger Than Death. San Francisco, CA: Harper
& Row, 1979.
345. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Working It Through. New York: Collier Books,
1987. Originally published by Macmillan, New York, in 1982.
346. Lattanzi-Licht, Marcia, and Kenneth J. Doka, eds. Coping with Public
Tragedy. New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2003. Part of the Hospice Foundation
of America’s Living with Grief Series, supported by the Foundation for End of
Life Care.
The book’s subject, the annual theme for the Hospice Foundation of America,
is designed to “give local hospices an opportunity to make known their capabili-
ties in helping their communities when terrible events occur.” Using examples
of various national tragedies throughout the text, the contributing writers discuss
dimensions of public tragedy, responses, loss and grief, public grief, different
 Coping and Caregivers 51

perceptions of public tragedy in the context of different faiths, the role of funeral
directors, critical incident stress management, crisis counseling approaches, talk-
ing to children about terrorism, implications for school environments, finding
meaning in the wake of a public tragedy, memorialization and ritual, victim advo-
cacy, and lessons from combat veterans. Two articles touch on the role of hospice
in such instances, specifically collaboration with relief agencies. Includes a list
of organizations with descriptions and contact information. Foreword by Jack D.
Gordon, president of the Hospice Foundation of America.
347. Leahey, Maureen, and Lorraine M. Wright, eds. Families and Life-
Threatening Illness. Springhouse, PA: Springhouse Corp., 1987.
348. Lee, Elizabeth. A Good Death: A Guide for Patients and Carers Facing
Terminal Illness at Home. London: Rosendale Press, 1995.
349. Lembke, Janet. The Quality of Life: Living Well, Dying Well. Guilford,
CT: Lyons Press, 2003.
Born from her experiences with her own dying mother, Lembke writes about
the challenging decisions and issues that must be dealt with by those who care for
the dying “old, frail people whose minds are lost forever in the shadows.” Using
her own research and the stories of a diverse group of caregivers, she examines
hospice, dementia, and coping with dementia as a caregiver; the bioethics of
withdrawal of life support; other methods of death by choice; and maintaining
quality of life. The book concludes with a list of helpful organizations, notes, and
a bibliography that includes both print and online resources.
350. Lerner, Gerda. A Death of One’s Own. New York: Harrow, 1980. Also
published by the University of Wisconsin Press, 1985.
351. Little, Deborah Whiting. Home Care for the Dying: A Reassuring, Com-
prehensive Guide to Physical and Emotional Care. Garden City, NY: Dial Press,
1985.
352. Lugt, Herbert Vander. Light in the Valley. Wheaton, IL: Victor Books,
1977.
353. McGeachy, D. P. A Matter of Life and Death. Richmond, VA: John Knox,
1966.
354. McKerrow, Margaret M. A Time to Care: A Study in Terminal Illness.
England: Self-published, 1980.
355. McMullen, Ernan. Death and Decision. Boulder, CO: Westview Press,
1978.
Includes T. C. Schelling’s “Strategic Relationships in Dying.”
356. McNamara, Beverley. Fragile Lives: Death, Dying, and Care. Philadel-
phia: Open University Press, 2001.
52 Chapter 7

A lecturer in anthropology at the University of Western Australia, McNa-

mara greets the subject of death from a sociological perspective. She notes
how the fragility of the dying reminds the living in a stark way of their own
mortality. Her book muses on how this affects the care of the dying, on health
care professionals and their work, and on the social institutions that work
with death and dying. McNamara highlights the patterns in how society deals
with death and dying and contrasts this with what she describes as an often
“chaotic” process. In her analysis, she discusses the fear of concern, uncer-
tainty among the terminally ill, the medical profession’s “affair” with death,
palliative care, and the “good death.” Includes a methodological appendix and
extensive references.
357. Mervyn, Carol. The Effects of Chronic and Terminal Illness on the Family.
Vancouver: University of British Columbia, 1980.
358. Metzger, Arnold. Freedom and Death. Ralph Manheim, trans. London:
Human Context Books, 1973.
359. Meyer, Maria M., and Paula Derr. The Comfort of Home: An Illustrated
Step-by-Step Guide for Caregivers. Portland, OR: CareTrust Publications, LLC,
1998.
360. Morgan, John D., ed. Meeting the Needs of Our Clients Creatively: The
Impact of Art and Culture on Caregiving. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publish-
ing, 1999. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan,
editor.
With a tremendously broad array of topics, Morgan assembles a collection of
articles that explore the important role of the arts and cultural elements in help-
ing those with terminal illness, their caregivers, and the bereaved. Topics include
using popular music with adolescents, humor, culture-centered counseling, pal-
liative care and bereavement in a Buddhist context, Hindu funerals, rituals for
the nonreligious, self-awareness among caregivers, children’s exposure to sud-
den traumatic death and strategies for helping them, general music therapy, and
hospice care of formerly abused individuals.
361. Nadeau, Janice Winchester. Families Making Sense of Death. Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1998. Part of the Understanding Families series,
Bert N. Adams and David M. Klein, editors.
A licensed psychologist and family therapist, Nadeau explores family dynam-
ics following a death and how they contribute to healing in bereavement. She
uses personal stories that illustrate this healing. Chapters focus on meaning-
making in the grief process, family stress, dreams, afterlife, attitudes toward
death, philosophical meanings, and details on her research methods. She also
introduces the term “coincidancing” to “capture the action of grieving people as
they used coincidences to construct meanings.” Includes references, an index,
and information about the author.
 Coping and Caregivers 53

362. Newell, Martha M. The Role of the Volunteer in the Care of the Terminal
Patient and the Family. New York: Arno Press, 1981. Also cited as published by
MSS Information Corp., New York, in 1978, as The Role of the Volunteer and
Volunteer Director in Caring for the Dying Patient and the Bereaved.
363. Oaks, J., and G. Ezell. Dying and Death: Coping, Caring, and Under-
standing. 2nd ed. Scottsdale, AZ: Gorsuch Scarisbrick, 1993.
364. Oliver, Marjorie. Through the Valley: A Caregiver’s Account of Terminal
Illness. Shippensburg, PA: Treasure House, 1995.
365. Osborne, Ernest. When You Lose a Loved One. New York: Public Affairs
Committee, 1965. Pamphlet 269.
This book is a discussion of the emotional, social, and financial problems relat-
ing to death in the family.
366. Parry, Joan K. Social Work Theory and Practice with the Terminally Ill.
New York: Haworth Press, 1989.
367. Pearson, Cynthia, and Margaret L. Stubbs. Parting Company: Under-
standing the Loss of a Loved One: The Caregiver’s Journey. Seattle, WA: Seal
Press, 1999.
This compassionate guide is a collection of case studies—fourteen narratives
from caregivers who are dealing with end-of-life issues. With these stories, the
authors address psychological aspects of caring for the terminally ill, aspects of
home care, and the stresses and emotional strain of caregiving.
368. Pelgrin, Mark. And a Time to Die. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing
House, 1976. Pelgrin’s account was edited by Elizabeth B. Howes and Sheila
Moon.
This book chronicles the personal experiences of a cancer patient, giving in-
sights into his faith, thoughts on the meaning of life, and dealing with a terminal
illness.
369. Perry, J. K., ed. Social Work Practices with the Terminally Ill: A Transcul-
tural Perspective. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1990.
370. Quill, Timothy E. Death and Dignity. New York: W. W. Norton, 1993.
371. Reoch, Richard. To Die Well: A Holistic Guide for the Dying and Their
Caregivers. New York: Harper Perennial, 1996. Also published as Dying Well:
A Holistic Guide for the Dying and Their Carers by Gaia Books, London, in
1997.
372. Roth, Deborah, and Emily LeVier. Being Human in the Face of Death.
Santa Monica, CA: IBS Press, 1990.
Roth and LeVier offer a guidebook for caregivers with advice for coping and
dealing with the emotional challenges surrounding death rather than tips for
54 Chapter 7

specific tasks, which many other titles contain. Roth is director of publications
for the Center for Help in Time of Loss, and LeVier leads training programs for
hospice volunteers. Mary Ball, founder of the Center for Help in Time of Loss in
Hillsdale, NJ, wrote the introduction and notes that the purpose of the book is to
help caregivers “unlock one of the best resources they have—their humanness.”
Though not noted elsewhere, chapters are written by professionals in the field.
Includes a fill-in-the-blank Caregiver’s Workbook and bibliography arranged by
subject.

373. Rothman, J. C. Saying Goodbye to Daniel: When Death Is the Best Choice.
New York: Continuum, 1995.

374. Sankar, Andrea. Dying at Home: A Family Guide for Caregiving. New
York: Bantam Books, 1995. This revised edition includes a special preface. Orig-
inally published by Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, MD, in 1991.
In this comprehensive guide to caring for the terminally ill at home, Sankar
presents numerous first-person accounts by people who have been part of a home
death experience. These accounts illustrate both the emotional and practical is-
sues associated with caring for the dying at home. She examines the reasons so
many people choose to spend their final time at home and offers practical sugges-
tions for making this decision and assuming some measure of control of the dying
process and environments. Sankar also examines the tradition of home death;
transitioning from hospital to home care; the use of professional assistance in
the home; caregiving; social support for both the dying person and the caregiver,
including children involved in the process; the physical drain and emotional
strain for the caregiver; support groups and therapy; demystifying death; signs of
approaching death; legal and financial matters; and funerals. Appendixes provide
specific guidance on the tasks and problems of caregiving; pain medications; and
additional resources featuring living wills, nursing home resources, and organi-
zations that support caregivers. Specific guidance includes general appearance,
hygiene, skin care, sexuality, nutrition, bowel issues, mobility, transfers, eye
care, sleep, cognitive impairment, agitation, administering medications, breath-
ing problems, oxygen, seizures, pain control, and assessment. A final appendix
offers two sample letters, one to send to a physician notifying them of the deci-
sion to provide home care for the dying, and the other a letter from the physician
indicating agreement with the decision to allow death at home and willingness to
sign the death certificate. Includes a helpful glossary, a short bibliography, and
an index. Also includes nine illustrations, most showing how to complete a task,
and two tables.

375. Sharoff, Kenneth. Coping Skills Therapy for Managing Chronic and
Terminal Illness. New York: Springer, 2004. Title also cited as A Coping Skills
Manual for Chronic and Terminal Illness.
 Coping and Caregivers 55

376. Sharp, Joseph. Living Our Dying: A Way to the Sacred in Everyday Life.
New York: Hyperion Books, 1996.
377. Shield, Renee Rose. Uneasy Endings: Daily Life in an American Nursing
Home. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1988. Part of the Anthropology of
Contemporary Issues series, Roger Sanjek, editor.
Shield, having participated in life at a nursing home for fourteen months,
offers clearly defined suggestions for improving care. Interestingly, she points
out the limitations on reciprocity within this environment, noting that the “old
people are always recipients whose need and obligation to repay are seen as un-
necessary and difficult to satisfy. The system encourages their passivity, which
deepens their dependency and helps to explain why they are often perceived as
children.” Many individual stories are shared. The author is a clinical instructor in
community health at Brown University. Includes three tables, notes, references,
and an index.
378. Smith, Bradford. Dear Gift of Life: A Man’s Encounter with Death. Wall-
ingford, PA: Pendle Hill Publishing, 1965.
379. Smith, Carole R. Social Work with the Dying and Bereaved. London:
Macmillan, 1982.
380. Snow, Lois W. A Death with Dignity. New York: Random House, 1975.
381. Spiegel, Maura, and Richard Tristman, eds. The Grim Reader: Writings on
Death, Dying, and Living On. New York: Anchor Books/Doubleday, 1997.
Spiegel and Tristman pull together an impressive array of writings on death
and dying that capture the evolution of societal thinking on the subject.
382. Storley, C. J. Beginning at the End: A Study in Death and Life. Minneapo-
lis, MN: Augsburg Publishing House, 1975.
383. Sudnow, David. Passing On: The Social Organization of Dying. Engle-
wood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1967. Originally titled Passing On: The Social
Organization of Dying in the County Hospital. Author’s 1966 doctoral disserta-
tion from the University of California, Berkeley.
384. Turnbull, Richard. Terminal Care. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publish-
ing, 1986. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Han-
nelore Wass, editor.
385. Van Bommel, Harry. Choices: For People Who Have a Terminal Illness,
Their Families, and Their Caregivers. Toronto: NC Press, 1986. Distributed in
the United States by Independent Publishers Group, Port Washington, NY.
386. Vernon, Glenn M. The Sociology of Death: An Analysis of Death-Related
Behavior. New York: Ronald Press, 1970.
56 Chapter 7

387. Wagner, Heather Lehr, and Marvin Rosen. Dealing with Terminal Illness
in the Family. Philadelphia: Chelsea House Publishers, 2002.
388. Webb, Marilyn. The Good Death: The New American Search to Reshape
the End of Life. New York: Bantam Books, 1997.
389. Wolfelt, Alan D. How to Care for Yourself While You Care for the Dying
and the Bereaved. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 1996. Companion Press
is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.
 8
Cross-Cultural Views
on Death and Dying

390. Ashenburg, Katherine. The Mourner’s Dance: What We Do When People

Die. New York: North Point Press, 2003.
The publisher notes that Ashenburg explores the “rich and endlessly inventive
choreographies different cultures have devised to mark a universal and deeply felt
condition.” Indeed, she covers a variety of faiths and cultures while examining
everything from bereavement garb to keepsakes to deathbed portraits. Other top-
ics include hair bracelets, funeral rites, mourning rituals, etiquette, funeral pyres,
wakes, and Internet support groups. Includes a bibliography.
391. Bailey, Lloyd R. Biblical Perspectives on Death. Durham, NC: Duke
University, 1979.
392. Barlow, Brent. Understanding Death. Salt Lake City, UT: Deseret Books,
1979.
393. Berger, Arthur. Perspectives on Death and Dying: Cross-Cultural and
Multidisciplinary Views. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1989.
394. Braun, Kathryn L., James H. Pietsch, and Patricia L. Blanchette, eds.
Cultural Issues in End-of-Life Decision Making. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Pub-
lications, 2000.
With text alternating between clinical and philosophical topics, the authors
cover a broad range of cultural issues that affect decision making by and for the
dying. Topics addressed include physical aspects of dying, advance directives,
the Patient Self-Determination Act, and ethnic and religious perspectives. A sec-
tion of the book is devoted to end-of-life issues within institutional cultures and
among special populations. A special chapter on communicating with patients
about death and dying concludes the book. The book is intended for health care
professionals.

57
58 Chapter 8

395. Bregman, Lucy. Death and Dying, Spirituality, and Religions: A Study of
the Death Awareness Movement. New York: Peter Lang, 2003.
396. Brener, Anne. Mourning and Mitzvah: A Guided Journal for Walking the
Mourner’s Path through Grief to Healing. Woodstock, VT: Jewish Lights, 1993.
In this easy-to-navigate book, Brener offers more than sixty guided exercises
to help loved ones during the period of bereavement. The text is divided into
three parts: Tzimzum (Contraction), Shevirat Kelim (The Breaking of Vessels),
and Tikkun (Healing). The contents page offers excellent descriptions of each
concept. Includes art by Laurie Gross and Hebrew text by Joel Hoffman. Also
includes source acknowledgments, a glossary, and a list of recommended titles.
397. Brice, Carleen. Lead Me Home: An African American’s Guide through the
Grief Journey. New York: Avon, 1999.
Sharing her personal story of loss, Brice gives practical tips for navigating the
journey through bereavement and how to see that one becomes wiser and stronger
as a result. The publisher notes the special aspect of grief among African Ameri-
cans: “the grief journeys often include more complicated and painful emotions:
frustration with the knowledge that black men and women have a greater chance
of dying from major common diseases than their white counterparts, anger at the
frequency of drug- and violence-related deaths, and the collective grief of a com-
munity that has buried too many of its young people.”
398. Carter, James. Death and Dying among African Americans: Cultural
Characteristics and Coping Tidbits. New York: Vantage Press, 2001.
399. Charmaz, Kathy, Glennys Howarth, and Allan Kellehear. The Unknown
Country: Death in Australia, Britain, and the USA. New York: St. Martin’s Press,
1997.
This book looks at death from an extremely broad perspective, including ar-
ticles on death themes in Australian painting and nineteenth-century fiction, but
also notable pieces on death attitudes in Britain and death-related bioethics in the
United States. Included are articles by noted writers on thanatological subjects
Donald P. Irish, Michael R. Leming, Peter C. Jupp, and Beverley Raphael. Top-
ics run the gamut from American death practices, emotional reserve and grieving
among the English, cryonics, the birth of cremation in Britain, and loss of self
associated with grief. Irish’s article, “Diversity in Universality: Dying, Death,
and Grief,” includes interesting commentary and insights on African American
funeral customs, Mexican American perspectives regarding death, Lakota culture
and death, and Hmong death customs. Professional background on each contribu-
tor is also included.
400. Chen, Clarence Lee. Chinese Americans in Loss and Separation: Social,
Medical, and Psychiatric Perspectives. New York: Foundation of Thanatology,
1992.
 Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying 59

401. Chung, Sue Fawn, and Priscilla Wegars. Chinese American Death Rituals:
Respecting the Ancestors. Lanham, MD: AltaMira Press, 2005.
402. Church of England, Board for Social Responsibility. On Dying Well: An
Anglican Contribution to the Debate on Euthanasia. London: Church Informa-
tion Office, 1975.
This book presents the Anglican Church’s perspective and theology on eutha-
nasia, exploring issues of legality, medicine, and morality. Also cited with Lord
Amulree as author.
403. Churn, Arlene H. The End Is Just the Beginning: Lessons in Grieving for
African Americans. New York: Harlem Moon/Broadway Books, 2003.
Churn, an ordained Baptist minister and grief counselor, discusses the often
misunderstood traditions within the African American perspective on death. She
offers insights into the concept of communal loss and group mourning brought
to North America by African slaves. Churn explores African traditions of lavish
burial, the adoption of biblical guidelines for mourning, and the funeral celebra-
tions of the home-going and victory celebration. Includes numerous biblical
references.
404. Cooper-Lewter, Nicholas C. Black Grief and Soul Therapy. Richmond,
VA: Harriet Tubman Press, 1999.
405. Counts, David R., and Dorothy Ayers Counts, eds. Coping with the Final
Tragedy: Cultural Variation in Dying and Grieving. Amityville, NY: Baywood
Publishing, 1991.
406. Crissman, James K. Death and Dying in Central Appalachia: Changing
Attitudes and Practices. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1994.
Much of this book is focused on various death rituals employed by people of
the Appalachian region of the United States and the meanings behind them. Top-
ics include neighborliness and the death watch, burial receptacles and grave dig-
ging, wakes, funeral services and burial customs, grave markers and other forms
of memorialization, music, and mining disasters. Includes several images from
the early twentieth century, notes, a bibliography, and an index.
407. Day, Stacey B., and Thomas Dillon Redshaw. Tuluak and Amaulik: Dia-
logues on Death and Mourning with the Inuit Eskimo. Minneapolis: University
of Minnesota, Bell Museum of Pathobiology, 1973.
408. Dyer, Barry Albin. Final Departures: Weird and Wonderful Tales of
Death, Funerals, and Bereavement from around the World. London: Hodder &
Stoughton, 2005. First published in 2003.
A London funeral director, Dyer offers a humorous look at undertaking around
the world and how humans view death across cultures. With such chapter titles
as “Amazing Embalmings,” Dyer explores cryonics, mummification, funeral
60 Chapter 8

ceremonies and death rites, and the newer idea of projecting the dead into space.
A small section of photos includes images of, among other things, a cryostat,
Elvis Presley’s funeral cortege, a Japanese hearse, and a woman entombed in her
husband’s glass coffee table (with beer cans resting on top). Weird indeed. An
appendix offers a list of possible methods of final departure by both burial and
cremation.
409. Field, David, Jenny Hockey, and Neil Small, eds. Death, Gender, and
Ethnicity. New York: Routledge, 1997. Jenny Hockey is also cited as Jennifer
Lorna Hockey.
The editors present a series of articles that explore cross-cultural attitudes and
views toward death, many in a British context. The editors’ own article analyzes
differences in how the British view death according to gender and ethnicity.
Others topics in the book include childhood death, masculinity and loss, cultural
representation and social practice in grieving women, sex and death in the tabloid
press, ethnicity and the use of palliative care services, multiculturalism in pallia-
tive care, and thoughts on loss and burial from a migrant’s perspective. Tables
and information on research tools are also included.
410. Freemantle, Francesca. The Tibetan Book of the Dead: The Great Libera-
tion through Hearing in the Bardo. Berkeley, CA: Shambhala, 1975. Translated
by Chogyam Trungpa.
411. Gorer, Geoffrey. Death, Grief, and Mourning in Contemporary Britain.
London: Cresset Press, 1965.
412. Goss, Robert, and Dennis Klass. Dead but Not Lost: Grief Narratives in
Religious Traditions. Walnut Creek, CA: AltaMira Press, 2005.
413. Grollman, Earl A. Living with Loss, Healing with Hope: A Jewish Per-
spective. Boston: Beacon Press, 2000.
414. Hayslip, Bert, and Cynthia A. Peveto. Cultural Changes in Attitudes to-
ward Death, Dying, and Bereavement. New York: Springer, 2005. Part of the
Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor.
Comparing their own study to Richard A. Kalish and David K. Reynolds’s
Death and Ethnicity study first published in 1976, Hayslip and Peveto look
at the impact of cultural changes and attitudes toward death, dying, grief,
and mourning. The latter study, highlighted in this book, focuses on Hispanic
Americans, African Americans, and Asian Americans and uses Caucasians
as a comparison group. The text reexamines the Kalish and Reynolds study,
explores the impact of cultural change on death attitudes, presents the current
study and its findings, and offers various hypotheses. Appendixes provide de-
tails of the study data. Includes references and an index. Foreword by Robert
J. Kastenbaum.
 Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying 61

415. Heilman, Samuel C. When a Jew Dies: The Ethnography of a Bereaved

Son. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2001. An S. Mark Taper Founda-
tion Jewish Studies book.
Often using his own experiences surrounding the death of his father, Heil-
man explores the social aspects and mourning customs of Jewish bereavement.
Includes a helpful glossary and an extensive index. Heilman is chair in Jewish
studies and sociology at City University of New York.
416. Hendin, Herbert. Black Suicide. New York: Basic Books, 1969.
417. Holloway, Karla F. C. Passed On: African American Mourning Stories:
A Memorial. Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 2002. A John Hope Franklin
Center book.
More than a collection of mourning stories and vignettes, Holloway’s book
is a superb survey of death and dying in black America. She explores the most
unusual areas of death and dying to give a thorough overview of African Ameri-
can funeral practices and rituals. Includes photographs, a bibliography, and an
index. In addition to serving as dean of Humanities and Social Sciences at Duke
University, Holloway is also a faculty associate at the Duke Institute on Care at
the End of Life.
418. Howarth, Glennys, and Peter C. Jupp, eds. Contemporary Issues in the
Sociology of Death, Dying, and Disposal. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1996.
Both a review of attitudes toward death and an examination of cultural
variations on death and associated rituals, this book is a collection of articles
discussing death in Western societies, social representations of death through-
out the world, the role of health and death workers, and social implications of
legal and medical responses to death and dying. Specific areas treated include
the anthropology of the non-Western death ritual; social facts of death; funeral
rituals of Sikhs in Britain; American denial and British avoidance of death; the
preservation, memorialization, and destruction of beauty in death; death attitudes
of British Hindus; terminal care education for doctors; nurses’ perceptions of
stress in terminal care environments; police coping with death; the culture of
childhood cancer; euthanasia and assisted suicide; organ donation; and facing
death without tradition. Contributors include noted thanatology scholars Jennifer
Hockey, Douglas Davies, Tony Walter, and Jeanne Katz. Includes an extensive
bibliography and index.
419. Infeld, Donna Lind, and Audrey K. Gordon. Hospice Care and Cultural
Diversity. New York: Haworth Press, 1995.
420. Irish, Donald P., Kathleen F. Lundquist, and Vivian Jenkins Nelson, eds.
Ethnic Variations in Dying, Death, and Grief: Diversity in Universality. Wash-
ington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1993. Part of the Series in Death Education, Ag-
ing, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
62 Chapter 8

421. Isaacs, Ronald H. Every Person’s Guide to Death and Dying in the Jewish
Tradition. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1999.
422. Jalland, Pat. Changing Ways of Death in Twentieth-Century Australia:
War, Medicine, and the Funeral Business. Sydney, Australia: University of New
South Wales Press, 2006.
Addressing such topics as palliative care, cancer, cemeteries, cremation, and
the funeral business, Jalland offers a thorough examination of Australian attitudes
and approaches to death, dying, grief, and bereavement from 1918 onward. She
looks at the transformed culture of death and grief, the denial of grief, and par-
ticularly the effects of World War I and World War II and medical advances on
how Australians view death. Jalland also discusses a second cultural shift that
began in the 1980s. She notes the influence of Kübler-Ross. The book gives an
excellent in-depth look at Australian funerals, disposal, and memorialization
practices. Includes a small number of black-and-white photographs and an index.
The bibliography lists both primary and secondary sources. Primary sources in-
clude family papers, oral histories, manuscripts, and unpublished memoirs.
423. Jarow, Rick. Tales for the Dying: The Death Narratives of the Bhagavita-
Purana. Albany: State University of New York Press, 2003.
424. Jewish Theological Seminary of America. From This World to the Next:
Jewish Approaches to Illness, Death, and the Afterlife. New York: Jewish Theo-
logical Seminary of America Library, 1999.
425. Johnson, Christopher Jay, and Marsha G. McGee, eds. How Different Re-
ligions View Death and Afterlife. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1991.
The authors present a collection of articles written mostly by clergy from ap-
proximately twenty faith traditions. They explore how each faith views matters
of death and dying.
426. Kalish, Richard A., ed. Death and Dying: Views from Many Cultures.
Farmingdale, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1979. Part of the Perspectives on Death
and Dying series, volume 1. Series also cited as Perspectives on Death in Human
Experience.
Examining death across time and cultures, Kalish presents fourteen articles
that explore attitudes toward death, rituals surrounding death and dying, and
approaches to grief and bereavement. Articles are divided into three sections:
“Death in Other Cultures,” “Death in Mexico and the United States,” and “War
and Disaster.” Topics covered include death and ancient Finnish culture, prepara-
tion for death in western New Britain, the death culture of Mexico and Mexican
Americans, the black experience with death analyzed through writings, death rit-
uals and bereavement practices in Appalachian and non-Appalachian Kentucky,
grief work in the aftermath of an airplane crash, justifying death, and handling
the dead in a disaster. Includes references.
 Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying 63

427. Kalish, Richard A., and David K. Reynolds. Death and Ethnicity: A Psy-
chocultural Study. Farmingdale, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1981. Second print-
ing. Originally published by the Ethel Percy Andrus Gerontology Center at the
University of Southern California, Los Angeles, in 1976.
Noting that significant research has been conducted in the death, dying, and
bereavement field and that most of the studies were conducted with such highly
specialized populations as the elderly or mental patients, Kalish and Reynolds
make comparisons between groups of varying ethnocultural backgrounds. Their
study focuses on the ways people verbalize their thinking about death, dying,
and grieving and the ways they actually behave. Participants in the study were
from four major ethnic groups in the Los Angeles area: black Americans, Japa-
nese Americans, Mexican Americans, and Anglo Americans. Influences of age,
sex, education, and religiousness are also explored. An appendix summarizes
interview results by ethnicity, age, and sex. The interviewed was made up of 178
questions. Includes a bibliography and an index.

428. Kamerman, Jack B. Death in the Midst of Life: Social and Cultural In-
fluences on Death, Grief, and Mourning. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall,
1988.

429. Kay, Alan A. A Jewish Book of Comfort. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson,
1993.
Kay delivers a comforting and compassionate collection of readings reflecting
Jewish approaches to dying, death, and mourning. Includes references and an
index.

430. Klein, Stanley. The Final Mystery. New York: Doubleday, 1974.
Klein explores the varied interpretations of death in different cultures and
religions.

431. Kraemer, David Charles. The Meanings of Death in Rabbinic Judaism.

New York: Routledge, 2000.
Noting that there are many books devoted to death and mourning in the con-
text of Jewish laws and customs, the publisher notes that this is the first title
studying the death and mourning practices of the founders of postbiblical Juda-
ism, the rabbis of late antiquity. Kraemer, professor of Talmud and rabbinics at
the Jewish Theological Seminary of America in New York, connects the rituals
and death preparations mentioned in the earliest canonical texts with Jewish
beliefs that formed their foundation. From a sometimes archeological and an-
thropological approach, he explores early rabbinic death practices, approaches
to burial, and mourning. Includes eleven photographs of catacombs, ossuaries,
ceiling paintings, reliefs, and carvings. Also includes detailed notes, references,
and an index.
64 Chapter 8

432. Kramer, Kenneth. The Sacred Art of Dying: How the World Religions
Understand Death. New York: Paulist Press, 1988.
433. Lamm, Maurice. The Jewish Way in Death and Mourning. Middle Village,
NY: Jonathan David Publishers, 2000. Originally published in 1969.
434. Leary, Timothy Francis, Ralph Metzner, and Richard Alpert. The Psyche-
delic Experience: A Manual on the Tibetan Book of the Dead. New Hyde Park,
NY: University Books, 1964. Published by the Citadel Press, New York, in 1992,
as the First Citadel Underground Edition.
435. Lee, J. Y. Death and Beyond in the Eastern Perspective: A Study Based on
the Bardo Thodol and the I Ching. New York: Gordon and Breach, 1974.
436. Lifton, Robert Jay, Shuichi Kato, and Michael Reich. Six Lives, Six Deaths:
Portraits from Modern Japan. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1979.
The authors take psychohistorical and sociohistorical approaches to investigat-
ing and discussing six Japanese men and how they experience dying. Lifton’s
“paradigm of death and the continuity of life, particularly in the context of
Japanese culture and history” is presented, along with Kato’s examination and
exploration of the “differences and similarities in elite and mass world views in
Japan and how they have influenced attitudes toward death.” Most of these men
died in the first half of the twentieth century. Includes a bibliography arranged
by chapter and an index.
437. Liss-Levinson, Nechama, and Karen Savary. When a Grandparent Dies: A
Kid’s Own Remembering Workbook for Dealing with Shiva and the Year Beyond.
Woodstock, VT: Jewish Lights, 1995.
Liss-Levinson provides a guide and workbook for Jewish children who have
recently lost a grandparent. Includes places to draw and doodle, fill-in-the-blank
exercises for remembering the grandparent’s life, ideas and addresses of orga-
nizations for giving tzedakah, and places for photos and writing down feelings.
The book also encourages children to correspond with the author about the book.
Concludes with an excellent glossary.
438. Long, Susan Orpett. Final Days: Japanese Culture and Choice at the End
of Life. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 2005.
Long reports on a decade-long study of end-of-life decisions in Japan. While
she points out differences, the book is as much about the commonality of ap-
proach toward such decisions. Long notes in the first chapter: “Real-life decisions
are not limited to the application of explicit cultural rules or moral principles but
rather are tied up with a cacophony of multiple, sometimes conflicting values
and interpersonal relationships.” Coverage includes the structuring of options for
dying, metaphors and scripts for the good death, social roles and relationships,
deciding whether to treat terminal illnesses, cultural stereotypes in the context
of life-and-death decisions, and choice and the creation of a meaningful death.
Includes extensive notes, a lengthy bibliography, and an index.
 Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying 65

439. McIlwain, Charlton. Death in Black and White: Death, Ritual, and Family
Ecology. Cresskill, NJ: Hampton Press, 2003. Part of the Hampton Press Com-
munication Series: Critical Bodies.
440. Millen, Rochelle L. Women, Birth, and Death in Jewish Law and Practice.
Hanover, NH: University Press of New England for Brandeis University Press,
2004.
441. Moller, David Wendell. Dancing with Broken Bones: Portraits of Death
and Dying among Inner-City Poor. New York: Oxford University Press, 2004.
442. Morgan, John D. Death and Bereavement around the World: Death and
Bereavement in the Emerging World. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing,
2007. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
443. Morgan, John D., and Pittu Laungani, eds. Death and Bereavement around
the World: Asia, Australia, and New Zealand (Volume 4). Amityville, NY: Bay-
wood Publishing, 2005. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D.
Morgan, editor.
444. ———. Death and Bereavement around the World: Death and Bereavement
in Europe (Volume 3). Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2004. Part of the
Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
445. ———. Death and Bereavement around the World: Death and Bereave-
ment in the Americas (Volume 2). Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003.
Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
446. ———. Death and Bereavement around the World: Major Religious Tradi-
tions. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2002. Part of the Death, Value, and
Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
447. Mullin, Glenn H. Death and Dying: The Tibetan Tradition. Boston: Ar-
kana, 1986.
448. ———. Living in the Face of Death: The Tibetan Tradition. Ithaca, NY:
Snow Lion Publications, 1998.
449. Nader, Kathleen, Nancy Dubrow, and B. H. Stamm, eds. Honoring Dif-
ferences: Cultural Issues in the Treatment of Trauma and Loss. Philadelphia:
Brunner/Mazel, 1999.
450. Neuberger, Julia. Caring for Dying People of Different Faiths. Abingdon,
U.K.: Radcliffe Medical Press, 2004. Also cited as published by the Austen Cor-
nish and Lisa Sainsbury Foundations in 1987.
451. Northcott, Herbert C., and Donna M. Wilson. Dying and Death in Canada.
Aurora, Ontario: Garamond Press, 2001.
66 Chapter 8

452. O’Shaughnesay, T. Muhammed’s Thoughts on Death: A Thematic Study

of the Qur’Anic Data. London: Brill, 1969.

453. Palmer, Greg. Death: The Trip of a Lifetime. San Francisco, CA: Harper-
SanFrancisco, 1993. Based on the PBS series by the same title (a KCTS-Palmer/
Fenster, Inc. coproduction).
Sometimes bizarre and creepy, this around-the-world narrative explores an
expansive variety of death-related subject matter to include cryogenic resurrec-
tion, Australian funeral practices, a Taiwanese “death theme park,” positive death
images in film, and mortality as seen through different world cultures.

454. Parkes, Colin Murray, and Pittu Laungani. Death and Bereavement across
Cultures. New York: Routledge, 1997.

455. Parry, Joan K., and Angela Shen Ryan. A Cross-Cultural Look at Death,
Dying, and Religion. Chicago: Nelson-Hall, 1995.

456. Pine, Vanderlyn R., Otto S. Margolis, Kenneth J. Doka, Austin H.

Kutscher, Daniel J. Schaefer, Mary-Ellen Siegel, and Daniel J. Cherico, eds. Un-
recognized and Unsanctioned Grief: The Nature and Counseling of Unacknowl-
edged Loss. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1990.
The editors present a collection of twenty-two articles focusing on the grief
experienced by individuals that is often not recognized or sanctioned by indi-
vidual members of society and/or society as a whole. Many reasons for such
unrecognized or unsanctioned grief are given, including AIDS patients, brain
death, Alzheimer’s patients, children of divorced parents, comatose patients,
homosexuals, prisoners, psychiatric patients, the “old old,” the “other woman,”
rape victims, unmarried cohabitants, children of the elderly, fiancés, foster home
relationships, and war veterans. The text is broken up into the following sections:
“Unrecognized and Unsanctioned Grief in the Family,” “Perspectives on Unac-
knowledged Grief,” “Approaches to Coping with Unsanctioned or Unrecognized
Grief,” “Caregivers and Unacknowledged Grief,” and “Unsanctioned Grief at the
Loss of the Companion Animal.” Includes some illustrations and academic and
professional information for each contributor but no index.

457. Platt, Larry A., and V. Richard Persico, eds. Grief in Cross-Cultural Per-
spective: A Casebook. New York: Garland, 1992.
Noting the growth in anthropological research on the social meaning of death,
grief, and mourning, the editors stress the need to make cross-cultural compari-
sons of this data and attempt to do so in this book. They present twelve articles
divided into sections titled “The Social Meaning of Death,” “The Relationship
between the Deceased and the Survivor,” “Mode of Death,” and “Social Support
Network.” Topics include materialism and the ritual economy of death; symbol-
ism and social change in Whalsay, Shetland; Gusli funerals; Sebei mortuary
rituals; Bara funeral customs in Madagascar; death in Islam; mortuary rituals in
 Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying 67

Highland Peru; traumatic loss among Crow Indian children; dying processes in a
Hutterian colony; aging and death in Kaliai; patterns and processes of mourning
among the Yolngu of Australia; and dying, death, and bereavement among the
Maya Indians of Mesoamerica. Includes notes, references, and an index.
458. Price, Julius J. Rabbinic Conceptions about Death. Chicago: Open Court
Press, 1920.
459. Rabinowicz, Rabbi Tzvi. A Guide to Life: Jewish Laws and Customs of
Mourning. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1989.
Rabbi Rabinowicz presents a thorough practical guide to the death rites and
mourning customs within the Jewish faith. Includes memorial prayers, a family
record form for yahrzeit dates, an extensive glossary, a lengthy bibliography, and
a detailed index.
460. Rahner, Karl. On the Theology of Death. New York: Seabury Press, 1961.
Also cited as being published by Herder and Herder, New York, in 1961. Trans-
lated by Charles H. Henkey.
This book includes an in-depth explanation and overview of Catholic beliefs
about death.
461. Riemer, Jack. Jewish Insights on Death and Mourning. New York:
Schocken Books, 1996. Published with coauthor Sherwin B. Nuland by Syracuse
University Press, Syracuse, NY, in 2002.
462. ———. Jewish Reflections on Death. New York: Schocken Books and
Jewish Publication Society of America, 1974.
463. ———. Wrestling with the Angel: Jewish Insights on Death and Mourning.
New York: Schocken Books, 1995.
464. Robben, Antonius C. Death, Mourning, and Burial: A Cross-Cultural
Reader. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers, 2004.
465. Ronan, Margaret. Death around the World. New York: Scholastic Book
Services, 1978.
466. Rosenblatt, Paul C., and Beverly R. Wallace. African American Grief.
New York: Routledge, 2005. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereave-
ment, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
Rosenblatt presents a thorough examination of African American grief and
bereavement, noting cultural elements and other unique aspects. He discusses
visitations, wakes, and funerals; African American institutions dealing with
death; discussing grief; family involvement in the grieving process; religion; con-
tinuing contact with the deceased; and talking and crying with others. He offers
such insightful chapters as “Our Grief and Theirs: African Americans Compare
Their Grief with Euro-American Grief” and “Understanding African American
Grief.” Rosenblatt notes that “in order to understand African American grief it is
68 Chapter 8

important to understand how an African American death may have been caused
in whole or in part by racism.” Premature death occurs with greater frequency
among African Americans that with the population as a whole. He elaborates on
connections between African American premature death and racism. Appendixes
include a list of those interviewed with a brief description and the interview
guide with questions. Includes extensive references as well as author and subject
indexes.

467. Rosenblatt, Paul C., R. P. Walsh, and D. A. Jackson. Grief and Mourning
in Cross-Cultural Perspectives. New Haven, CT: Human Relations Area Files,
1976. Also cited as being published in Washington, DC, in 1977.

468. Saunders, Cicely M., and Robert J. Kastenbaum, eds. Hospice Care on the
International Scene. New York: Springer, 1997. Part of the Springer Series on
Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor.
Saunders, founder of the hospice movement, offers an introduction to the hos-
pice mission and philosophy. Several articles follow detailing how the hospice
approach manifests itself in various countries around the world. Jan Stjernsward
presents the perspective of the World Health Organization on the international
hospice movement. In addition to cultural differences, notable treatment is given
to palliative care and attitudes toward death. An appendix features regional data
presented in graphs. Includes references and an index.
469. Shiloh, Ailon, and Ida Cohen Selavan, eds. Ethnic Groups of America:
Their Morbidity, Mortality, and Behavior Disorders, Volume I: The Jews.
Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1974.
Shiloh, a professor of anthropology in public health at the University of Pitts-
burgh, assembles a group of sixty-four contributors to write this extensive survey
of death and dying among Jews. The writers explore demography, blood groups
among Sephardic and Ashkenazi Jews, genetic disorders, carcinoma, morbidity
patterns, and behavior disorders. Includes author and subject indexes.
470. Smith, Sharon Hines. African American Daughters and Elderly Mothers:
Examining Experiences of Grief, Loss, and Bereavement. New York: Garland,
1998. Part of Garland Studies on the Elderly in America series and a revision of
the author’s doctoral thesis at the University of Pennsylvania in 1996.
Smith presents her study of thirty African American women who share experi-
ences of grief and loss upon the death of their elderly mothers. Tables document-
ing her research include “Themes Describing the Personal Meaning of Elderly
Mother’s Death for Daughter’s Interview,” “Characterizations of Elderly African
American Mothers by Daughters Interviewed,” “Years of Schooling” (of daugh-
ters interviewed), and “Marital Status of Daughters and Frequency” (number
of marriages). Appendixes include Smith’s research tools. Includes extensive
references.
 Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying 69

471. Solomon, Lewis D. The Jewish Tradition and Choices at the End of Life:
A New Judaic Approach to Illness and Dying. Lanham, MD: University Press of
America, 2001.
472. Spiro, Howard M., Mary G. McCrea Curnen, and Lee Palmer Wandel,
eds. Facing Death: Where Culture, Religion, and Medicine Meet. New Haven,
CT: Yale University Press, 1996. Prepared under the auspices of the Program for
Humanities in Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, and The Goethe-
Institut, Boston.
This book was derived from a colloquium on ars moriendi, typically referenc-
ing the art of dying but here really referring to the way of dying. The colloquium
was at the Yale University School of Medicine in New Haven, Connecticut, and
it was jointly sponsored by the Program for Humanities in Medicine at Yale and
the Goethe-Insitut in Boston. At this gathering, medical professionals spoke of
their reactions to death, followed by philosophers, historians, and clergy relaying
how cultural differences and religious experiences have affected how people deal
with and are affected by death. There was also a focus on AIDS. Spiro notes in
his preface that those in the caring professions need to focus less on reacquaint-
ing themselves with death and instead stop ignoring it. He writes: “We doctors
and nurses have simply to open our eyes to what we do—and our hearts and
minds to what we fear. We need to contemplate, and talk about, death. We need
once again to express our grief when our patients die and our anger that defeat
sometimes brings. We need to feel.” There are twenty-two articles divided into
two sections titled “Witnessing Death: The Medical Battle” and “Framing Death:
Cultural and Religious Responses.” Articles focus on limitations of medical tech-
nology, reflections on death and AIDS, the doctor’s role in death, euthanasia and
physician-assisted suicide, caring for the dying, death in children, childhood be-
reavement, emergence of hospice care in the United States, aging and dying, the
peaceful death, the art of dying in Hindu India, mortality from a Jewish perspec-
tive, Catholic theology’s views on death, Chinese popular beliefs on death, the
meaning of death in Islam, death and dying in early America, and the NAMES
Project AIDS Quilt. Includes references, brief biographies of the contributors,
and an index. Foreword by Daniel Callahan.
473. Spiro, Jack D. Time to Mourn: Judaism and the Psychology of Bereave-
ment. New York: Bloch Publishing, 1968.
Spiro presents a study and analysis of Jewish mourning and bereavement from
a psychological perspective.
474. Sulzberger, Cyrus. My Brother Death. New York: Harper & Brothers,
1961. Reprinted edition published by Arno Press, New York, in 1977, as part of
the Literature of Death and Dying series.
Sulzberger, former lead foreign correspondent with the New York Times, of-
fers a narrative that is part travelogue and part anthropological study into death
70 Chapter 8

attitudes and cultural differences surrounding death issues. Told from the view-
point of a newspaper man who lives abroad, Sulzberger brings concepts to life
through journalistic prose. Ideas from this book were incorporated into the 1965
film The Playground. Includes a bibliography.
475. Taylor, Richard P. Death and the Afterlife: A Cultural Encyclopedia.
Santa Barbara, CA: ABC-CLIO, 2000.
476. Van Der Zee, James, Owen Dodson, and Camille Billops. The Harlem
Book of the Dead. Dobbs Ferry, NY: Morgan & Morgan, 1978.
In this book, Van Der Zee has compiled a collection of funeral photography.
The work documents African American funeral traditions and offers poems with
each photograph. Includes a conversation with the photographer when he was
ninety-one years old. Foreword by Toni Morrison.
477. Wardi, Anissa Janine. Death and the Arc of Meaning in African American
Literature. Gainesville: University of Florida Press, 2003.
Originally Wardi’s dissertation at the University of Florida, this book explores
African American death themes in literature. Wardi presents five essays with
the themes “Graveyard Dirt: The Embodied South in A Gathering of Old Men
and Beloved,” “Cotton Fields and Cane Stalks: Labor and Death in Of Love and
Dust and Song of Solomon,” “‘His House Is a Dead Thing’: Home and Exile in
Linden Hills,” “‘A Crooked Kind of Mourning’: Migration and Loss in Jazz, The
Men of Brewster Place, and In My Father’s House,” and “Conversations with the
Dead: Echoes of ‘Kabnis’ in Mama Day.” Wardi offers a conclusion titled “Our
People’s Graves.” Includes notes, a bibliography, and an index.
478. Watt, Jill. Canadian Guide to Death and Dying. Toronto: International
Self-Counsel Press, 1974.
479. Weiss, Abner. Death and Bereavement: A Halakhic Guide. Brooklyn,
NY: Union of Orthodox Jewish Congregations of America, 2000. Distributed by
Mesorah Publications. Originally published in 1991.
480. White Deer of Autumn. The Great Change: A Native American Perspec-
tive on Dying. Hillsboro, OR: Beyond Words Publishing, 1992.
481. Wilson, Liz. The Living and the Dead: Social Dimensions of Death in
South Asian Religions. Albany: State University of New York Press, 2003.
482. Wolfson, Ron. A Time to Mourn, a Time to Comfort. Woodstock, VT:
Jewish Lights, 1993. A project of the Federation of Jewish Men’s Clubs and
the University of Judaism. Part of the Art of Jewish Living series. Also cited
as A Time to Mourn, a Time to Comfort: A Guide to Jewish Bereavement and
Comfort.
Intended to reach two audiences simultaneously, mourners and comforters,
Wolfson’s book explores all aspects of Jewish approaches to death, dying,
 Cross-Cultural Views on Death and Dying 71

mourning, and comforting. Through many anecdotes and personal stories pre-
sented as a guidebook, he covers many pertinent topics. Among them are talk-
ing with the dying, the process of dying, advance directives, issues surrounding
disposition of the body, childhood death, the phases of Jewish bereavement, grief
work and Jewish mourning, funeral arrangements, Kaddish, Sephardic burial
customs, observance of Shiva, condolence letters, visiting the grave, memorials,
ethical wills, living wills, excessive grief, exhumation, remembering the de-
ceased, widowhood, estate issues, and afterlife concerns. Includes an appendix
that addresses estate instructions, an estate planning checklist, a selected bibliog-
raphy with special section on books for children, and a glossary. Also includes
information on the Federation of Jewish Men’s Clubs. Wolfson is vice president
of the University of Judaism in Los Angeles.
 9
Death Education

483. Barnett, Geraldine E. Death Anxiety of Perinatal Nurses: The Relationship

to Death Education and Death Exposure. Miami, FL: Barry University, 1996.
484. Bennett, Roger V. Death and the Curriculum. Chicago: American Educa-
tion Research Association, 1974.
485. Berg, David W., and George G. Daugherty. Death Education: A Survey
and Study of Colleges and Universities. DeKalb, IL: Educational Perspectives
Associates, 1974.
Berg and Daugherty, associate directors of the Task Force on Death Educa-
tion, conducted this survey and study to determine the number of courses at the
post–high school level that are devoted entirely to the study of death and dying
and those that devote a significant proportion of time to the topic, to identify
the materials used in the courses, to ascertain the names of those teaching the
courses, to determine the departments within the respective institutions incorpo-
rating the courses, and to analyze the basic topics included in the death education
courses. Complete listings of the above are included. A chapter on the study’s
conclusions includes commentary on death and dying as a multidisciplinary area
of teaching, the recent development (in 1974) of these courses being offered, and
the wide range of depth that courses offer into the subject. A copy of the survey
form is included.
486. ———. Perspectives on Death: Student Activity Handbook. DeKalb, IL:
Perspectives on Death, 1972.
487. ———. Perspectives on Death: Teacher’s Resource Book. DeKalb, IL:
Perspectives on Death, 1972.

72
 Death Education 73

488. Blowers, Margaret Robin. The Effectiveness of a Death Education Pro-

gram on Children’s Knowledge and Attitudes toward Death. Albany, NY: Col-
lege of St. Rose, 1991.

489. Brinkman, June M., and Tresa F. Quarles. Death Education Resource
Book. Portland, ME: J. Weston Walch, 1988.
This spiral-bound paperback provides basic information on death-related sub-
jects to instructors teaching a death education unit as part of a life skills, health, or
sociology class. It offers guidelines and suggestions for presentation of the sub-
ject to students. Appropriate for both teen and adult audiences, this book may also
be appropriate for seminars or workshops. Each section contains special activities
and projects as well as questions for review and discussion. A short bibliography
and an extensive glossary of death-related terminology are included. The authors
are teachers in Virginia.

490. Cable, Dana G., and Ellen Zinner. Death in the Public Scene, Facing
the 1990s: Papers and Addresses of ADEC’s 1989 Conference, Association for
Death Education and Counseling Conference in Baltimore, MD. New York:
Hemisphere Publishing, 1990.
491. Carse, James P., and Arlene B. Dallery, eds. Death and Society: A Book of
Readings and Sources. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1977.
The authors note in their introduction that the book is “offered as a provocation
for further reflection on the problem of death.” It is a collection of essays appro-
priate for death education courses, divided into sections on abortion, euthanasia,
suicide, death and the law, death and aging, and death and the caring institutions.
The appendix offers an essay by Monroe Lerner titled “When, Why, and Where
People Die,” with excellent statistical tables. Includes a selected bibliography of
books on death and dying published in the early 1970s.
492. Cline, Sally. Lifting the Taboo: Women, Death, and Dying. New York:
New York University Press, 1997. This edition was published in Great Britain by
Abacus in 1996. Also published by Little, Brown in 1995.
Cline gives three reasons for her examination of issues relating to death now.
The first is to take death “out of the closet” and look at the special relationship
women have to the dying process. The second is to investigate society’s current
uninformed attitude toward death. The third is the advent of AIDS and its effects
on increasing awareness of death and mortality. She also notes that in addition to
numerous women being HIV-positive, many are also filling the role of caregiver
during this crisis. Cline examines earlier cultural and religious views toward
death, female funeral directors, widowhood, notions of image, sex and language
with cancer, suicide, and unacknowledged losses. Includes extensive notes, a
bibliography with suggestions for further reading, and an index.
74 Chapter 9

493. Corr, Charles A., ed. Creativity in Death Education and Counseling. Lake-
wood, OH: Forum for Death Education and Counseling, 1983.
494. Croskery, Beverly F. Death Education: Attitudes of Teachers, School
Board Members, and Clergy. Palo Alto, CA: R & E Research Associates, 1979.
Originally presented as the author’s thesis at the University of Toledo.
495. Davis, Thomas Martin. The Effect of the Death Education Film “In My
Memory” on Elementary School Students in the La Crosse Wisconsin Public
Schools. Bloomington: Indiana University, 1975.
This is Davis’s doctoral dissertation. He now serves as a professor and chair
of the Division of Health Promotion and Education at the University of Northern
Iowa.
496. Eddy, James M. The Development and Validation of a Knowledge Test
of Death and Dying for College Students. University Park: Pennsylvania State
University, 1979.
497. Eddy, James M., and Wesley Alles. Death Education. St. Louis: Mosby,
1982.
498. Fredrick, David L., and Donna M. Fredrick, eds. Death Education and
Counseling: A Training Manual. Berkeley, CA: Pilgrimage, 1978.
499. Gatliffe, Eleanor D. Death in the Classroom: A Resource Book for Teach-
ers and Others. London: Epworth Press, 1988.
500. Gibson, A. Barbara, Polly C. Roberts, and Thomas J. Buttery. Death Edu-
cation: A Concern for the Living. Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta Kappa Educational
Foundation, 1982.
501. Gordon, Audrey K., and Dennis Klass. They Need to Know: How to Teach
Children about Death. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1979.
502. Green, Betty R., and Donald P. Irish, eds. Death Education: Preparation
for Living. Cambridge, MA: Schenkman Publishing Co., 1971.
503. Gullo, Stephen V., Paul R. Patterson, and John E. Schowalter, eds. Death
and Children: A Guide for Educators, Parents, and Caregivers. Dobbs Ferry,
NY: Tappan Press, 1985.
504. Halporn, Roberta. Lessons from the Dead: The Graveyard as a Classroom for
the Study of the Life Cycle. Brooklyn, NY: Highly Specialized Promotions, 1979.
505. Holbrook, Frank B. Frank Answers on Death. London: Southern Press,
1975.
506. Horton, Keith V. Elders: The Need for Death Education. Orangeburg:
South Carolina State University, 1996.
 Death Education 75

507. Jackson, Maggie, and Jim Colwell. A Teacher’s Handbook of Death. Lon-
don: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2002.
508. Kienow, Nancy Louise. Death Education and Death Anxiety in Student
Nurse Aides. 1992. Author’s doctoral dissertation.
509. Knott, J. Eugene. Thanatopics: A Manual of Structured Learning Experi-
ences for Death Education. Kingston, RI: SLE Publications, 1982.
510. Krohe, Dale C. A Survey to Determine the Status of Death Education in
the Wisconsin Secondary Health Education Curriculum. La Crosse: University
of Wisconsin, La Crosse, 1975.
A 63-page seminar paper.
511. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Questions and Answers on Death and Dying. New
York: Simon & Schuster/Touchstone, 1997. Originally published by Macmillan,
New York, in 1974.
This 177-page companion volume to On Death and Dying answers the most
frequently asked questions about death and dying. Questions are divided into
several categories, including telling the patient, suicide and terminal illness, sud-
den death, prolongation of life, euthanasia, where to best care for dying patients,
family problems after death, funerals, old age, and personal questions for the
author herself.
512. Lansing, Patricia. A Comparison of Attitudes of Associate Degree Student
Nurses Caring for the Dying Patient before and after Death Education. Laramie:
University of Wyoming School of Nursing, 1992.
This was Lansing’s master’s thesis.
513. Leaman, Oliver. Death and Loss: Compassionate Approaches in the
Classroom. New York: Cassell Publishing Co., 1995.
514. Lunney, June Rigby. Describing Death in America: What We Need to
Know. Washington, DC: National Academies Press, 2003.
515. Macpherson, Colin R. Must I Think about Death? Now?: Student Essays
from “Death, Dying, and Grieving,” a First-Year Course, University of Cincin-
nati College of Medicine, Cincinnati, Ohio. Cincinnati, OH: University of Cin-
cinnati, 1996.
516. Meagher, David K., and Robert G. Stevenson. Dying, Death, and Be-
reavement: Continuities, Changes, and Challenges: Papers from ADEC’s 1990
Conference. London: Taylor & Francis, 1991.
517. Memorial Society of Edmonton and District. A Teaching Unit on Death
and Dying. Edmonton, Alberta: The Society, 1975.
Intended for senior high school and junior college students.
76 Chapter 9

518. Mills, Gretchen C., Ray Reisler, Alice E. Robinson, and Gretchen Ver-
milye. Discussing Death: A Guide to Death Education. Homewood, IL: ETC
Publications, 1976.
The authors offer a straightforward resource for educators presenting death
topics or teaching a death education course. Concepts to cover, lesson ideas,
activities, and selected resources are offered for various age groups. Includes a
list of questions to be explored through fiction and a questionnaire about death
experiences and attitudes. Also includes special notes for teachers.
519. Morgan, John D. Death Education in Canada: Survey, Curricula, Proto-
cols, Bibliography. London, Ontario: King’s College, 1990.
520. Nessit, Marion. Death: A Teacher’s Guide. Toronto, Ontario: Holt, Rine-
hart & Winston, 1972. Part of the Infinity Series.
521. Otero, George G. Death, a Part of Life: An Experimental Unit. Denver,
CO: Center for Teaching International Relations, Graduate School of Interna-
tional Studies, University of Denver (Colorado Seminary), 1976. Also cited as
being published by the Office of Education, Washington, DC, in 1975.
522. Pacholski, Richard A. Long-Term Effects of Death Education and Coun-
seling: Papers from the 1987 Annual Meeting of ADEC, Ontario Association for
Death Education and Counseling Meeting in London. New York: Hemisphere
Publishing, 1989.
523. ———. Re-Searching Death: Selected Essays in Death Education and
Counseling. Lakewood, OH: Forum for Death Education and Counseling, 1986.
524. Pyles, Marian S. Death and Dying in Children’s and Young People’s Lit-
erature: A Survey and Bibliography. Jefferson, NC: McFarland, 1988.
Pyles offers a study of death and dying themes in literature for youth. General
topics covered include folklore; the death of pets, friends, and relatives; and one’s
own death. Includes numerous passages from the literature and bibliographies for
adults and children. The index is very helpful.
525. Reynolds, Paul Davidson, and Robert Fulton. Decision for Death: Simu-
lation of a Societal Consensus Group. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota,
Center for Death Education and Research, 1973.
526. Reynolds, Rita M. Blessing the Bridge: What Animals Teach Us about
Death, Dying, and Beyond. Troutdale, OR: NewSage Press, 2001.
527. Rofes, Eric E., and “The Unit” at Fayerweather Street School, ed. The
Kids’ Book about Death and Dying, by and for Kids. Boston: Little, Brown,
1985.
Rofes presents a book for children that answers the most common questions
about death and dying. The questions originated from a group of students ages
 Death Education 77

eleven to fourteen who called themselves “The Unit” at Fayerweather Street

School, where Rofes is teacher and codirector. Subjects addressed include a defi-
nition of death, funeral customs, the death of older relatives and parents, the death
of children, violent deaths, and life after death. Includes a brief but thoroughly
annotated bibliography.
528. Rothschild, Janet. Income Level and Parental Attitudes toward Death
Education for Preschool Children. Denton: University of North Texas, 1982.
529. Sargent, Marilyn. Talking to Children about Death. Rockville, MD: Na-
tional Institute of Mental Health, U.S. Department of Health, Education, and
Welfare, 1990.
530. Scott, Frances G., and Ruth M. Brewer, eds. Confrontations on Death: A
Book of Readings and a Suggested Method of Instruction. Corvallis, OR: Con-
tinuing Education Publications, 1971.
531. Silverman, Nancy Jean Price. The Relationship between End-of-Life Edu-
cation Obtained through Didactic, Clinical, Personal, and Introspective Experi-
ences and the Attitudes of Nursing Students toward the Care of the Dying Patient.
Dayton, OH: Wright State University, 2004.
532. Somerville, Rose M. Death Education as Part of Family Life Education:
Using Imaginative Literature for Insights into Family Crises. Minneapolis, MN:
Family Coordinator, 1972.
533. Spinetta, John J. Talking with Children with a Life-Threatening Illness:
A Handbook for Health Care Professionals. Bethesda, MD: National Cancer
Institute, 1979.
A 35-page booklet.
534. Stevenson, Robert G., and Eileen P. Stevenson, eds. Teaching Students
about Death: A Comprehensive Resource for Educators and Parents. Philadel-
phia: Charles Press, 1996.
Includes articles by thirty-two contributors on issues relating to childhood
bereavement, life-threatening illnesses in adolescents, coping with grief, perspec-
tives on death education in the United States, suicide, death themes in literature,
and others. The authors both work in high schools as grief counselors and death
educators.
535. Thomas, James L., ed. Death and Dying in the Classroom: Readings for
Reference. Phoenix, AZ: Oryx Press, 1984.
Thomas aims to encourage educators to discuss the topic of death freely and
openly with students. Contributors provide suggested activities that have been
tested in the classroom as well as personal accounts of creatively dealing with death
and dying in the school setting. Sections included are “Teachers’ and Students’
Perceptions,” “Instructional Methods,” and “Classroom Encounters/Personal
78 Chapter 9

Narratives.” Appendixes include material for children and young adults, a list
of organizations and associations with descriptions, and a questionnaire entitled
“You and Death,” designed by Edwin S. Shneidman of the Center for Advanced
Study in the Behavioral Sciences. The 75-question instrument is intended to mo-
tivate discussion among students about attitudes, experiences, and thoughts about
death. Includes a brief annotated bibliography, an index, and a list of contributors
with brief biographical information.
536. Thomas, Pat. I Miss You: A First Look at Death. Hauppauge, NY: Bar-
ron’s Educational Series, 2001.
537. Ulin, Richard Otis, and Robert Kelly. Death and Dying Education. Wash-
ington, DC: National Education Association, 1977.
538. Wass, Hannelore. Death Education II: An Annotated Resource Guide.
Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1985. Part of the Series in Death Edu-
cation, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
Wass delivers an updated version of her earlier resource guide.
539. Wass, Hannelore, Charles A. Corr, Richard A. Pacholski, and Catherine
M. Sanders. Death Education: An Annotated Resource Guide. Washington, DC:
Hemisphere Publishing, 1980.
The authors, all educators on death and dying, offer this critically annotated
list of resources on death education. Titles are divided by subject area, typically
according to the intended audience. Other categories covered are reference books,
bibliographies, periodical articles, audiovisual resources, conference listings, or-
ganizational resources, and community resources. Includes more than 500 entries
and topical indexes and a general index.
540. Wolf, Anna M. Helping Your Children to Understand Death. Rev. ed.
New York: Child Study Press, 1973. Originally published by Child Study As-
sociation of America, New York, in 1955, as Helping Your Child Understand
Death. Also cited as Helping Your Child to Understand Death.
541. Zalaznik, Patricia Weller. Dimensions of Loss and Death Education: A
Resource and Curriculum Guide. Minneapolis, MN: EDU-PAC Publishing Co.,
1987. Earlier edition published in 1980.
542. Zinner, Ellen S. Coping with Death on Campus. San Francisco, CA:
Jossey-Bass, 1985. Part of the New Directions for Student Services series, Ur-
sula Delworth and Gary R. Hanson, editors. Also part of the Jossey-Bass Higher
Education Series.
Through a collection of articles, the author covers several topics relating to
death in a campus environment. Among them are effects of loss experiences
on academic performance and student behavior, student services’ responses to
death, the role of the counseling center in responding to student death, group
 Death Education 79

survivorship, suicide on campus, and death education. Includes a brief annotated

bibliography and an index.
543. Zinner, Ellen S., and Joan D. McMahon. How to Conduct a One-Day
Conference on Death Education: The Dos and Don’ts. Brooklyn, NY: Highly
Specialized Promotions, 1980. Part of the Forum for Death Education and Coun-
seling’s Thanatology Service Series.
 10
The Death of a Child

544. Anthony, E. James, and Cyrille Koupernik, eds. The Child in His Family:
The Impact of Disease and Death. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1973. Part
of the Yearbook of the International Association for Child Psychiatry and Allied
Professions and also The Child in His Family series, volume 2.
While describing many cultural variations in the reaction to death by children,
the contributors also draw on common elements in these responses to death,
dying, and disease. Intended for clinicians, topics covered include meaningful
communication with the fatally ill child; fear of death in fatally ill children and
their parents; dying children in a hospital environment; effects of death on an
adolescent pediatric ward; the capacity for mourning in children; pathological
mourning; psychic loss; and issues surrounding suicide, homicide, and parricide.
Includes bibliographic references and an index. Foreword by John Bowlby.
545. Arnold, Joan Hagan, and Penelope Buschman Gemma. A Child Dies: A
Portrait of Family Grief. 2nd ed. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1994.
Winner of the 1994 American Journal of Nursing Book of the Year Award, this
short paperback features chapters on the meaning of loss, the process of grieving,
differences in dealing with the death of an older and a younger child, and guid-
ance for caregivers dealing with grieving families. Includes a foreword by Earl A.
Grollman. Grollman notes in his foreword: “If I were to recommend one book to
grieving families and health professionals concerning the catastrophic experience
of a child’s death, it would be this one. The deep truths and exquisite beauty will
bring solace to many grieving hearts.”
546. Ashton, Joyce, and Dennis Ashton. Loss and Grief Recovery: Help Car-
ing for Children with Disabilities, Chronic or Terminal Illness. Amityville, NY:
Baywood Publishing, 1996.

80
 The Death of a Child 81

547. Avery, Gillian, and Kimberley Reynolds, eds. Representations of Child-

hood Death. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2000.
Avery and Reynolds, both scholars of children’s literature, present a fascinat-
ing examination and analysis of childhood death imagery and representations
in folklore, ballads, women’s manuscript journals, religious writings, literature,
Edwardian fantasy writing, poetry, horror fiction, and cinema. Includes notes,
eight plates with images, a bibliography, and an index.
548. Berg, Julie. When a Classmate Dies. Fargo, ND: Prairie House, 1991.
549. Bernstein, Judith R. When the Bough Breaks: Forever after the Death of a
Son or Daughter. New York: Andrews McMeel Publishing, 1998.
550. Bertoia, Judi. Drawings from a Dying Child: Insights into Death from a
Jungian Perspective. New York: Routledge, 1993.
551. Bluebond-Langner, Myra. The Private Worlds of Dying Children. Prince-
ton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1978.
552. Bordow, Joan. The Ultimate Loss: Coping with the Death of a Child. New
York: Beaufort Books, 1982.
Discussing the crisis of child death, Bordow notes in her introduction that this
book “talks about entering into, moving through, and then going beyond a child’s
death through acceptance not only of what has happened but what is.” Includes
moving stories of children’s deaths and suggestions for the grieving process. Also
includes a chapter on support groups and organizations with narrative on each.
553. Breebaart, Joeri, and Piet Breebaart. When I Die, Will I Get Better? New
York: P. Bedrick Books, 1993.
554. Bruce, James W. From Grief to Glory: Spiritual Journeys of Mourning
Parents. Wheaton, IL: Crossway Books, 2002.
555. Buckingham, Robert W. A Special Kind of Love: Care of the Dying Child.
New York: Continuum Publishing Co., 1983. Part of the Continuum Counseling
Series. Published as Care of the Dying Child: A Practical Guide for Those Who
Help Others, by Continuum, New York, in 1990.
Buckingham presents a guide for doctors, nurses, social workers, ministers,
teachers, family, and friends on caring for terminally ill children.
556. Burton, Lindy, ed. Care of the Child Facing Death. Boston: Routledge
and Kegan Paul, 1974.
557. Conrad, Bonnie Hunt. When a Child Has Been Murdered: Ways You Can
Help the Grieving Parents. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1998. Part of
the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
558. Cook, Judith A. The Adjustment of Parents Following the Death of a
Child from a Terminal Illness: A Dissertation. Columbus: Ohio State University
82 Chapter 10

Research Foundation and Ohio Department of Mental Health, Office of Program

Evaluation and Research, 1982.
559. Cook, Sarah Sheets. Children and Dying: An Exploration and a Selective
Professional Bibliography. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1973.
Revised and expanded in 1974 with the title Children and Dying: An Explora-
tion and Selective Bibliographies. Also cited as being published by the Center for
Thanatology Research and Education, New York, in 1974, with the title Children
and Dying: An Exploration and Annotated Bibliography.
Compiled and edited by Roberta Halporn, the revised and expanded edition
contains fourteen essays divided into three sections: “How Children Feel and
React to Death,” “How Adults React to the Sick, Dying, or Bereaved Child,”
and “Working Constructively with the Dying or Bereaved Child.” Contributors
include Earl A. Grollman, Edgar Jackson, Edward D. Futterman, Phyllis R. Sil-
verman, and others. Bibliographies contain only a few dozen titles.
560. Corr, Charles A., and Donna M. Corr. Hospice Approaches to Pediatric
Care. New York: Springer, 1985.
Includes S. J. Fleming’s article “Children’s Grief.”
561. Crider, Tom. Give Sorrow Words: A Father’s Passage through Grief.
Chapel Hill, NC: Algonquin Books, 1997.
Intended for those grieving with no firm religious beliefs, this book suggests
seeking comfort from stories, poetry, mythology, memoirs, and biographies from
a variety of cultures and beliefs. The narrative includes entries from Crider’s
journal documenting his progress through bereavement following the death of
his twenty-one-year-old daughter, Gretchen, in a house fire while she was away
at college. Includes a list of titles for suggested reading.
562. Daher, Douglas. And the Passenger Was Death: The Drama and Trauma
of Losing a Child. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the Death,
Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
563. Dean, Katie Hodge. Grief’s Journey . . . When a Child Dies. Huntington
Beach, CA: Dancing Peanut Productions, 2004.
Dean created this spiral-bound booklet following the death of her son, Blake
“Peanut,” who was seventeen months old when he died in a car crash in 2000.
Poetry and photos accompany open spaces for the reader to create a journal.
Dean’s intent is to assist other parents who have lost a child.
564. Deaton, Bob, and William A. Berkan. Planning and Managing Death Is-
sues in the Schools. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1995.
565. Deveau, Eleanor J., and David W. Adams. Beyond the Innocence of Child-
hood: Helping Children and Adolescents Cope with Life-Threatening Illness and
Dying. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1995. Part of the Death, Value, and
Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
 The Death of a Child 83

566. Dick, Harold M. Dying and Disabled Children: Dealing with Loss and
Grief. New York: Haworth Press, 1988.
567. Doerr, Maribeth Wilder. For Better or Worse: For Couples Whose Child
Has Died. Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 1992.
568. Donnelly, Katherine Fair. Recovering from the Loss of a Child. New York:
Macmillan, 1982.
569. Easson, William M. The Dying Child: The Management of the Child or
Adolescent Who Is Dying. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1970. Second
edition published in 1981.
570. Edelstein, Linda. Maternal Bereavement: Coping with the Unexpected
Death of a Child. New York: Praeger, 1984.
Developed from the author’s doctoral dissertation, this book addresses the
issues of the mourning–liberation process, bereavement, and the adaptations
of mothers to the deaths of their children. She also includes the social contexts
of bereavement in her study. Edelstein covers the stages of bereavement; out-
comes and atypical reactions; psychological defenses; the special relationship
between mother and child; the nature of the loss; the impact of the death and
the early days following death; memorials; death wishes; faith; connections
in heaven; superstition; guilt; anger and depression; new directions emerging
from bereavement; and emotional and social supports through family, self-
help groups, and professionals. The appendix includes the questionnaire used
in the author’s research and sixteen tables that reflect the research. Includes a
bibliography.
571. Fargues, Marie. The Child and the Mystery of Death. Glen Rock, NJ: Pau-
list Press, 1966. Translated by Sister Gertrude.
572. Field, Marilyn J., and Richard E. Behrman, eds. When Children Die: Im-
proving Palliative and End-of-Life Care for Children and Their Families. Wash-
ington, DC: National Academies Press, 2003. A publication of the Committee on
Palliative and End-of-Life Care for Children and Their Families, Board on Health
Sciences Policy, National Institute of Medicine.
573. Fischoff, Joseph, and Noreen O’Brien Brohl. Before and After My Child
Died: A Collection of Parents’ Experiences. Detroit: Emmons-Fairfield Publish-
ing Co., 1981.
574. Floyd, Gregory. A Grief Unveiled: One Father’s Journey through the
Death of a Child. Brewster, MA: Paraclete Press, 1999.
575. Frantz, Thomas T. When Your Child Has a Life-Threatening Illness. Rev.
ed. Washington, DC: Association for the Care of Children’s Health and the
Candlelighters Childhood Cancer Foundation, 1988.
84 Chapter 10

576. Goldman, Ann. Care of the Dying Child. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1994.
577. Gyulay, Jo-Eileen. The Dying Child. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978.
578. Hamovitch, Maurice B. The Parent and the Fatally Ill Child. Los Angeles:
Delmar, 1964. Reprinted in 1968. Also cited as being published by the City of
Hope Medical Center in Duarte, CA.
579. ———. Parental Reactions to the Death of a Child. 1962.
A mimeograph.
580. Hill, Lenore, ed. Caring for Dying Children and Their Families. New
York: Chapman & Hall, 1994. Distributed by Singular Publishing Group.
Hill, head nurse at Martin House Hospice for Children in Wetherby, United
Kingdom, provides practical advice to all those involved in the care of a dying
child. She explores physical and educational care, symptom control, special is-
sues with AIDS diagnoses, the role of hospice, sibling issues, spiritual care, and
home health care. Communication about death is covered thoroughly. Includes
references, suggestions for further reading, a resource guide for organizations in
the United Kingdom, and an index.
581. Huber, Terri. No Time Out from Grief: Surviving the Death of My Son. San
Jose, CA: Writer’s Club Press/iUniverse.com, 2000.
582. Johnson, Joy, and Marv Johnson. Children Die, Too. Omaha, NE: Center-
ing Corporation, 1978.
Johnson and Johnson present a small booklet that compassionately discusses
death and children for parents and caregivers immediately following the news
that a child may die.
583. Johnson, Sherry E. After a Child Dies: Counseling Bereaved Families.
New York: Springer, 1987.
584. Judd, Dorothy. Give Sorrow Words: Working with a Dying Child. Lon-
don: Free Association Books, 1989. Published by Haworth Press, New York, in
1995.
585. Kagan, Henya. Gili’s Book: A Journey into Bereavement for Parents and
Families. New York: Teachers College Press, 1998. Author also cited as Henya
Kagan (Klein), Henya Klein Kagan, and Henya Kagan Klein.
In his foreword, Allen E. Ivey of the University of Massachusetts at Amherst
notes that Kagan presents a holistic meaning of the experience of loss in this
book, a memorial to her daughter. Gili was fatally injured by a reckless driver
and died five days after the accident in 1989. Kagan offers an alternative to the
theories that identify stages and suggest that there are rigid commonalities in
how people react to death and dying. She suggests that for many the stages and
 The Death of a Child 85

theories are irrelevant. The book is divided into three parts, the first focusing on
the life and death of Gili with photos and drawings. An interlude follows where
the author talks about her initial reactions to Gili’s death. The third part is a more
academic, in-depth discussion of bereavement. Includes a bibliography, list of
organizations and other resources, and an index.
586. Klass, Dennis. The Spiritual Lives of Bereaved Parents. Philadelphia:
Brunner/Mazel, 1999. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Rob-
ert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
587. Klopfenstein, Pamela. My Heart Will Forever Go On: Coping with the
Daily Challenges of Raising a Child with Special Needs and How to Survive the
Loss When They Are Called Away. Bloomington, IN: AuthorHouse, 2005.
In this 125-page book, Klopfenstein describes her efforts to get the best medi-
cal care for her son, Jonathan Michael Klopfenstein, and other challenges of care
for terminally ill children.
588. Kluger-Bell, K. Unspeakable Loss: Understanding the Experience of
Pregnancy Loss, Miscarriage, and Abortion. New York: W. W. Norton & Co.,
1998.
589. Knapp, Ronald J. Beyond Endurance: When a Child Dies. New York:
Schocken Books, 1986.
Knapp’s text emerges from 155 interviews with families who experienced
the tragic loss of a child. He explores three types of death and the problems as-
sociated with mourning in each: death occurring after a long illness, sudden or
unexpected death, and death by murder. This book is intended for both families
and professionals working with the bereaved. Subjects covered include maturity
of dying children; the helpfulness of anticipating death; the effects on the rela-
tionship between parents; devastation of the diagnosis; final moments with dying
children; grief following sudden death and the “why” question; information and
assistance-seeking following a child’s murder, including information on Parents
of Murdered Children, Inc.; the family as a unit during crisis; postdeath issues,
including autopsies and funerals; coping and survival; and depression. Includes
a thorough discussion of the Kinder-Mourn Experiment by Lucy D. Christopher.
Kinder-Mourn was established and organized in Charlotte, North Carolina, in
1978, to serve as a safe harbor for parents who have suffered the death of a child.
A short bibliography is also included.
590. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. The Dougy Letter: A Letter to a Dying Child.
Berkeley, CA: Ten Speed Press, 1979.
In 1981, a young boy with an inoperable brain tumor named Dougy Turno
wrote a letter to Dr. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, asking her why no one would talk to
him about death and dying. She corresponded with him and encouraged him to
meet Beverly Chappell, a registered nurse who worked in the area of death and
dying. Eventually, Chappell founded The Dougy Center in Portland, Oregon, in
86 Chapter 10

1982. The center provides a safe place for young people and their families who
are grieving a death to share their experiences.
591. Limbo, Rana K., and Sara Rich Wheeler. When a Baby Dies: A Handbook
for Healing and Helping. La Crosse, WI: Resolve through Sharing, La Crosse
Lutheran Hospital/Gundersen Clinic, Ltd., 1986.
592. Lister, Marcie, and Sandra Lovell. Healing Together: For Couples Griev-
ing the Death of Their Baby. Omaha, NE: Centering Corp., 1991.
593. Livingston, Gordon. Only Spring: On Mourning the Death of My Son.
San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1995. Published by Marlowe and Co.,
New York, in 1999. Cover provides the additional subtitle A Father’s Story of a
Child’s Gift of Love.
Livingston’s book documents the illness and death of his son, Lucas Scott
Livingston, who died in 1992. He describes this difficult journey and how his
family dealt with the trajectory of Lucas’s illness, his death, and their bereave-
ment. Foreword by Mark Helprin.
594. Martinson, Ida Marie. The Dying Child, the Family, and the Health Pro-
fessionals. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1976.
595. ———, ed. Home Care for the Dying Child: Professional and Family Per-
spectives. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1976.
Martinson, associate professor of nursing and lecturer in physiology at the
University of Minnesota, discusses the home as an alternative location for care
of the dying child and presents a collection of articles from a pediatric nursing
perspective. The book fully describes the Home Care Project and explores clini-
cal details of leukemia. Article topics include the role of advocacy in the rite of
passage, effects of pain on the child, parent and health care professionals, support
systems for professional caregivers, the remaining child, reintegration of the fam-
ily following death, support groups, clinical diagnoses, health care approaches to
hair loss in children with cancer, appropriate hospital settings, a model of care for
dying in the home, children’s conceptions of death, and child–adult interactions
in health care environments. Personal recollections from parents and health care
professionals are also included. Includes a listing of contributors with related
educational backgrounds.
596. Marx, Robert J., and Susan Wengerhoff Davidson. Facing the Ultimate
Loss: Coping with the Death of a Child. Belgium, WI: Champion Press, 2003.
597. McCracken, Anne, and Mary Semel. A Broken Heart Still Beats: After Your
Child Dies. Center City, MN: Hazelden, 1998. New edition published in 2000.
598. Mehren, Elizabeth. After the Darkest Hour the Sun Will Shine Again: A
Parent’s Guide to Coping with the Loss of a Child. New York: Simon & Schus-
ter, 1997. A Fireside edition.
 The Death of a Child 87

599. Miller, Sukie, and Doris Ober. Finding Hope When a Child Dies: What
Other Cultures Can Teach Us. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1999. Reprint
Fireside edition published in 2002.
Miller, along with cocontributer Doris Ober, provides meaningful answers to
painful questions following the death of a child, including Why did my child die?
Where is my child now? Can my child hear me? Can I help my child where she’s
gone? Includes appendixes on self-help resources as well as on the Institute for
the Study of Afterdeath and its senior researchers. Miller is the institute’s founder
and director.
600. Mitchell, Ellen, Carol Barkin, Audrey Cohen, Lorenza Colletti, Barbara
Eisenberg, Barbara J. Goldstein, Madelaine Perri Kasden, Phyllis Levine, Ariella
Long, and Rita Volpe. Beyond Tears: Living after Losing a Child. New York: St.
Martin’s Griffin, 2005.
The authors are bereaved mothers who lost their children as young adults and who
have told their stories to frequent Newsday contributor Ellen Mitchell. Relaying their
experiences with the unimaginable loss of a child, they share what parents should
expect in the first year following the death of a child and beyond, including how a
once harmonious relationship can become strained, the development of a new defi-
nition of “normal,” differences in grief between mothers and fathers, and accepting
that there is no answer to the question Why? The book includes the important reas-
surance that the clouds do lift over time, that parents can find a way to survive, and
that it is possible to learn to live and even laugh again. A touching book.
601. Murray, Donald Morison. The Lively Shadow: Living with the Death of a
Child. New York: Ballantine Books, 2003.
Murray, a Pulitzer Prize–winning journalist for the Boston Globe, writes about
the long road to healing following the loss of a child. This book is also his own
story of the loss of his daughter, Lee Murray.
602. Osgood, Judy. Meditations for Bereaved Parents. Sunriver, OR: Gilgal
Publications, 1983.
Osgood offers a collection of fifty meditations written by parents who have lost
a child. Bible verses precede most of the meditations, and reliance on faith and
religion is emphasized.
603. Pearson, Judy C. Marriage after Mourning: The Secrets of Surviving
Couples. Dubuque, IA: Kendall/Hunt Publishing Co., 1995.
604. Pedersen, Debbie Wiley. An Exploration of Issues and Challenges Sur-
rounding the Marital Relationships of Parents after the Death of a Child. Denver,
CO: Regis University, 1997.
Spine title: Marriage after the Death of a Child.
605. Peppers, Larry G. How to Go on Living after the Death of a Baby. Atlanta,
GA: Peachtree Publishers Ltd., 1985.
88 Chapter 10

606. Peppers, Larry G., and Ronald J. Knapp. Motherhood and Mourning:
Perinatal Death. New York: Praeger, 1980.
The authors thoroughly examine issues surrounding perinatal death. Sections
focus on the problem of perinatal death and common characteristics of grieving
mothers; material grief; problems in relationships, including communication and
sexual matters; and such practical issues as funerals, support groups, and commu-
nity responses. Includes four charts, a short bibliography, and brief information
about the authors.
607. Pregent, Carol. When a Child Dies. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press,
1992.
608. Rando, Therese A., ed. Parental Loss of a Child. Champaign, IL: Research
Press, 1986.
609. Reed, Mary Lou. Grandparents Cry Twice: Help for Bereaved Grandpar-
ents. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and
Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
610. Rheingold, Joseph C. The Mother, Anxiety, and Death: The Catastrophic
Death Complex. Boston: Little, Brown, 1967. This first edition was also pub-
lished by J. & A. Churchill, London.
Rheingold offers a review and an analysis of the catastrophic death complex
in the context of the mother–child relationship, the meaning of anxiety, and
the psychology of death. He discusses meanings of death, attitudes toward
death, origins of the fear of death, maternal destructiveness, basic anxiety,
psychopathology, and psychotherapy. Includes a bibliography and author and
subject indexes.
611. Riches, Gordon, and Pam Dawson. An Intimate Loneliness: Supporting
Bereaved Parents and Siblings. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2000. Part
of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor.
Riches and Dawson explore the effects of a child’s death on family relation-
ships, how differences between the grief of mothers and fathers contribute to
marital tension, and the significant effect of parental grief on bereaved siblings.
They also explore the impact of grief on self and family identity, particularly
the role of shared remembrances in “transforming survivors’ relationships with
the deceased.” Special topics covered include isolation in bereavement, sudden
death, the “invisibility” of fathers’ and siblings’ grief, cultural and gender expec-
tations, and the failure of intimate relationships. Appropriate for death education
and counseling classes, this book includes case studies and discussion questions
on some topics. Also includes extensive references.
612. Rosenblatt, Paul C. Help Your Marriage Survive the Death of a Child.
Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 2000.
 The Death of a Child 89

613. ———. Parent Grief: Narratives of Loss and Relationship. Philadelphia:

Brunner-Mazel, 2000. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Rob-
ert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
Through intensive interviews with twenty-nine couples who have endured the
devastating loss of a child, Rosenblatt uses narrative to convey the unique nature
of parental grief. He highlights numerous aspects of parental grief from both indi-
vidual and couple perspectives. Among them are the process of seeking the good
and positive that can come from death and the grieving process; ways in which
parents characterize the child; continuing relationships; couples’ communications
about the influence of a child’s death on their relationship; use of metaphors by
parents in describing death; dying and grief; how baptism, police inquiry, and
autopsy are death rituals; and the sexual relationship of grieving parents. In addi-
tion to the narratives, Rosenblatt provides analysis and exploration of them. This
book is intended for death educators, therapists, clergy, social workers, psycholo-
gists, and counselors. Includes extensive references and an appendix detailing the
methodology.
614. Rosof, Barbara D. The Worst Loss: How Families Heal from the Death of
a Child. New York: Henry Holt, 1994.
Rosof is a child psychotherapist and former faculty member at the Indiana
University School of Social Work. With this book, she gives a caring and com-
passionate guide for parents suffering from the disabling loss of a child. She uses
stories of families who have experienced such a loss to communicate ideas and
suggestions for recovering from this unique grief. Rosof discusses the effects of
child death on parents and children; the ways children die and how it seems to be
a violation of the natural order; acute grief; how children grieve; barriers to griev-
ing; relationship issues between partners; grief associated with types of losses
(terminal illness, murder, suicide, infant death); and moving beyond bereavement
and living life again. Includes a list of helpful organizations and a bibliography.
615. Sahler, Ollie Jane Z., ed. The Child and Death. St. Louis: C. V. Mosby,
1978.
Includes Hal Lipton’s essay “The Dying Child and the Family: The Skills of
the Social Worker.”
616. Sanders, Catherine M. How to Survive the Loss of a Child: Filling the
Emptiness and Rebuilding Your Life. Rocklin, CA: Prima Publishing, 1992.
617. Schiff, Harriet Sarnoff. The Bereaved Parent. New York: Penguin Books,
1978. Originally published by Crown Publishers, New York, in 1977.
Schiff addresses feelings of grief, fear, guilt, and hopelessness in this guide to
dealing with the bereavement following the loss of a child. She discusses power-
lessness, marital issues associated with the loss of a child, religious issues, sib-
ling grief, communicating while grieving, the funeral, and moving beyond grief.
90 Chapter 10

The author notes that, “This book is not designed to tug at your heartstrings. It
is meant to pull at your bootstraps, to draw you from the quagmire of grief into
the land of the living.” Schiff lost her own son at age ten from complications of
congenital heart disease.
618. Schowalter, John E., Penelope Buschman, Paul R. Patterson, Austin H.
Kutscher, Margot Tallmer, and Robert G. Stevenson, eds. Children and Death:
Perspectives from Birth through Adolescence. New York: Praeger, 1987. Part
of the Foundation of Thanatology series, volume 9. Cover page and title page
acknowledge the editorial assistance of Jeanne D. Cole.
This book is an interdisciplinary work that notes, “Since the Kennedy assas-
sination, there has been a societal imprimatur for children to participate in funeral
services and mourning rituals.” This book discusses children’s interest in and
exposure to death-related issues, children’s conceptions of death, and the death of
a child and its implications. Margot Tallmer presents the preface with separate com-
mentary on each of the four sections: “Children’s Concepts of Death,” “Emotional
Impact of Disease,” “Perspectives on Childhood Death and Dying,” and “Coping
with Childhood Death.” Articles address adolescents’ concepts of death and their
deadly ramifications, children’s understanding of irreversibility, nonfunctionality
and universality, death education, posttraumatic stress disorder in children with
cancer, newborn death, communicating about death, teaching medical students the
psychological aspects of chronic illness in children, definitions of dying, childhood
fear of death, preoccupations with death in normal children, reactions to childhood
death, paranormal experiences associated with the death of a child, Candlelighters
parents groups, and early stage parental grief. Joanne E. Bernstein presents a short
but heavily annotated list of outstanding children’s books about death. Includes an
index and brief information about each of the contributors.
619. Schowalter, John E., Paul R. Patterson, and Margot Tallmer, eds. The
Child and Death. New York: Columbia University Press, 1983.
620. Schulman, J. L. Coping with Tragedy: Successfully Facing the Problem of
a Seriously Ill Child. Chicago: Follett Publications, 1976.
621. Stetson, Brad. Living Victims, Stolen Lives: Parents of Murdered Children
Speak to America. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2002. Part of the Death,
Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
622. Tengbom, Mildred. Help for Bereaved Parents. St. Louis: Concordia,
1981. Part of the Coping with Trauma Series.
623. Tittensor, John. Year One: A Record. Fitzroy, Victoria, Australia: McPhee
Gribble/Penguin, 1984.
Tittensor, an Australian writer, tells about his unimaginable grief following
the death of his seven- and nine-year-old children in a house fire. Much of this
105-page book is written in a diary format.
 The Death of a Child 91

624. Toder, Francine. When Your Child Is Gone: Learning to Live Again. Sac-
ramento, CA: Capital Publishing, 1986.
Although this book covers loss of children to causes other than death (cus-
tody decisions, kidnapping, disappearances), it is perhaps most useful for those
who have experienced the death of a child. Toder, a psychologist, discusses the
uniqueness of the pain associated with child loss, feelings of guilt, coping more
effectively, the effects of personality type on recovery, and selecting a psycho-
therapist. Includes a helpful chapter on identifying community resources.
625. Wilkenfeld, Loren. When Children Die. Dubuque, IA: Kendall/Hunt Pub-
lishing Co., 1977. Part of the Topics in Human Behavior Series.
Wilkenfeld presents a collection of reprinted articles on childhood death.
 11
Dying

626. Aldiss, Brian Wilson, and Margaret Aldiss. When the Feast Is Finished:
Reflections on Terminal Illness. London: Little, Brown, 1999.
627. Armstrong, H. G. The American Way of Dying. Hicksville, NY: Exposi-
tion Press, 1978.
628. Arvio, Raymond Paavo. The Cost of Dying and What You Can Do about
It. New York: Harper & Row, 1974.
Beginning his introduction by noting that, “the specter of enlightened consum-
erism . . . haunts the American funeral today,” Arvio offers a book extremely
critical of the funeral industry and its focus on consumerism. He goes on to
suggest that, “A gentle flow of public and private criticism over the years has
been tolerated by the powerful funeral Establishment [capitalization intended],
while Jessica Mitford, Ruth Mulvey Harmer, and Leroy Bowman are dismissed
as hopeless radicals.” Intending the book to be an advocacy tool for the develop-
ment of memorial societies, Arvio focuses his text on their creation, benefits, and
business model. An appendix offers a sample form from the Queens Memorial
Society to express a person’s wishes for procedures and steps to be taken at the
time of their death.
629. Austin, Mary. Experiences Facing Death. New York: Arno Press, 1977.
Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published by Bombs-
Merrill, Indianapolis, IN, in 1931.
630. Backer, Barbara A., Natalie Hannon, and Joan Young Gregg. To Listen,
to Comfort, to Care: Reflections on Death and Dying. Albany, NY: Delmar Pub-
lishers, 1994.

92
 Dying 93

631. Backer, Barbara A., Natalie Hannon, and Noreen A. Russell. Death and
Dying: Understanding and Care. Albany, NY: Delmar Publishers, 1994.
632. Basta, Lofty L., and Carole Post. A Graceful Exit: Life and Death on Your
Own Terms. New York: Plenum Press, 1996.
633. Bergersen, Betty S., ed. Distance and the Dying Patient. St. Louis: C. V.
Mosby, 1967.
634. Boerstler, Richard W. Letting Go: A Holistic and Meditative Approach to
Living and Dying. Watertown, MA: Associates in Thanatology, 1982.
A psychotherapist and self-described “practitioner in thanatology,” Boerstler
presents a 48-page paperback discussing a holistic view of the universe, medita-
tion and death, and comeditation and its use in modern thanatology. Illustrations
include a diagram of transpersonal (comeditation) practice in thanatology, the
Cosmic Web, Kuan Yin, Yin-Yang, and the Dancing Shiva. The appendix is an
abstract of a presentation made by Boerstler at the annual conference of the Fo-
rum for Death Education and Counseling in Boston, November 6–8, 1981, titled
“Meditation and the Dying Process.”
635. Brauer, Paul H. A Constructive Approach to Terminal Illness. New York:
National Cancer Foundation, 1958.
636. Bregman, Lucy. Beyond Silence and Denial: Death and Dying Reconsid-
ered. Louisville, KY: Westminster John Knox Press, 1999.
637. Bruce, Hank. The Family Caregiver’s Journal: A Guide to Facing the
Terminal Illness of a Loved One. Sorrento, FL: Petals & Pages Press, 1998.
638. Burnell, George M. Final Choices: To Live or to Die in an Age of Medical
Technology. New York: Insight Books/Plenum Press, 1993.
Emphasizing the need to think of death in terms of choices rather than the
abstract, Burnell writes about discontinuing life-sustaining machines, extraor-
dinary means to continue life, pain in dying, patient and family disagreements,
American Medical Association positions on these issues, bioethics commit-
tees, dying as a matter of individual freedom, definitions of death, quantity
versus quality of life, organ donation, and hospice. Numerous other matters
are explored in sections and chapters titled with questions. Eight appendixes
feature a map of state laws governing durable power of attorney, health care
agents, and proxy appointments; an example of a living will declaration; infor-
mation about and an example of a health care proxy; the Hippocratic Oath; the
Death with Dignity Act; a directory of organizations; an organ donor criteria
chart; and a map of state laws governing surrogate or family decision making
for patients without advance directives. Includes a list of titles for suggested
reading divided by subject and an index.
94 Chapter 11

639. Byock, Ira. Dying Well: The Prospect for Growth at the End of Life. New
York: Putnam/Riverhead, 1997. Also cited as Dying Well: Peace and Possibili-
ties at the End of Life.
Through the stories of family members and others, Byock presents this book
about “realizing the human potential to grow as individuals and as members of
families through the human process of dying.” He discusses how the telling and
receiving of stories about a loved one’s dying can be healing acts. He asserts that
society’s aversion to discussing death until it is required robs people of incred-
ible opportunities. Byock notes that, “socially we have paid dearly, and culturally
we are poorer for failing to explore the inherently human experience of dying.”
Includes an index and an appendix on how to write family stories.
640. Campbell, Karen. Death Descending. London: Collins, 1976.
641. Carlozzi, Carl G. Death and Contemporary Man: The Crisis of Terminal
Illness. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1968.
642. Carmody, John Tully. Meditations on the End of Life. Harrisburg, PA:
Trinity Press International, 1997.
643. Cartwright, Ann, Lisbeth Hockey, and John L. Anderson. Life before
Death. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1973. Part of the Reports of the
Institute for Social Studies in Medical Care series. Cartwright is director of the
Institute.
While the book offers excellent insights and data on death and dying, it is pri-
marily focused on nursing care of the dying. Tables included in the appendixes
document symptoms of the dying, the cause of death relative to the institution,
and data on deaths at home and deaths alone versus with family and friends.
Chapters touch on a broad array of topics from elderly people living alone to
laundry needs of the incontinent. Other topics covered are providing relief of
common symptoms to the dying, the role of the nurse in varying institutional con-
texts, family members as caregivers, social class and area variations, coordination
of services for the dying, and chiropody. Includes references and an index.
644. Castles, Mary Reardon. Dying in an Institution: Nurse/Patient Perspec-
tives. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1979.
645. Caughill, Rita E., ed. The Dying Patient: A Supportive Approach. Boston:
Little, Brown, 1976.
This book contains seven originally published articles and one reprint on death,
dying, and grieving. It addresses dying with dignity, coping with death in acute
care units, supportive care with consideration of the age of the dying patient, the
dying child, and grieving as a response to loss.
646. Chambers, Ross. Facing It: AIDS Diaries and the Death of the Author.
Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 1998.
 Dying 95

647. Chaney, Earlyne. The Mystery of Death: Initiation at the Moment of

Death. York Beach, ME: Samuel Weiser, Inc., 1988.
Chaney suggests that death is a passage not worthy of fear and that life will take
on new meaning once this is realized. A self-described mystic, Chaney refers to the
“art of dying” and notes in the preface that “not only is death a timely subject, but
there is an art to doing it—a right way to die just as there is a right way to live.”
648. Colman, Hila. Hanging On. New York: Atheneum, 1977.
649. Conley, Herbert N. Living and Dying Gracefully. New York: Paulist Press,
1979.
650. Cooke, Hannah. When Someone Dies: A Practical Guide to Holistic Care
at the End of Life. Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann, 2000.
651. Copperman, Harriet. Dying at Home. New York: Wiley, 1983.
652. Crichton, Ian. The Art of Dying. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities Press
International, 1976.
653. Dalai Lama XIV, and Donald S. Lopez. The Joy of Living and Dying in
Peace. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1997.
654. Davidson, Glenn W. Living with Dying: A Guide for Relatives and
Friends. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1975.
655. Davidson, Marjoe. My Life Is on Hold: One Family’s Struggle with Ter-
minal Illness. Concrete, WA: MDEES Publishing, 1994.
656. de Bosis, Lauro. The Story of My Death. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1933.
657. Dempsey, David. The Way We Die: An Investigation of Death and Dying
in America Today. New York: Macmillan, 1975. Also published by McGraw-
Hill, New York, in 1977.
658. Dileo, Cheryl, and Joanne Loewy. Music Therapy at the End of Life.
Cherry Hill, NJ: Jeffrey Books, 2005.
659. Dobihal, Edward F. Jr., and Charles W. Stewart. When a Friend Is Dying:
A Guide to Caring for the Terminally Ill. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1984.
660. Doyle, Derek. Caring for a Dying Relative: A Guide for Families. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1994.
662. Draznin, Yaffa. How to Prepare for Death: Your Own or Someone Else’s.
New York: Hawthorne Publishing, 1976.
96 Chapter 11

663. Droege, Thomas A. With Open Arms: Receiving Care with Grace and
Gratitude. Bloomington, IN: Youth & Family Institute, 2005.
664. Duda, Deborah. Coming Home: A Guide to Dying at Home with Dignity.
New York: Aurora Press, 1987. First edition published in March 1982, as A
Guide to Dying at Home, by John Muir Publications, Santa Fe, NM.
Following Mother Teresa, Duda began studying alternative healing and work-
ing with the dying. Her book provides practical advice on facilitating a com-
fortable death at home. She begins with the stories of three people who died at
home. She discusses making the decision to die at home, financial considerations,
sources of assistance in the process, transitioning from the hospital, medical
considerations, how to be with someone who is dying, children involved in the
process, practical home care, emotional issues, legal considerations, preparing for
death, funerals, and bereavement. Duda also touches on Elisabeth Kübler-Ross’s
stages of dying and the Dying Person’s Bill of Rights. Her comments on medical
considerations and practical home care are particularly extensive. Fourteen ap-
pendixes contain useful addresses, the hospice physicians’ standing order form,
the American Medical Association Statement on Life-Prolonging Medical Treat-
ment, the Guidelines for Home Care of Persons Infected by the Virus That Causes
AIDS, a sample state living will, a patient’s bill of rights, information on taking
a dying person home from the hospital when the staff objects, the Bach Flower
Remedies, games to play, reflexology foot and hand charts, holistic healing tech-
niques and terms, the Consumer Guide to the Federal Trade Commission Funeral
Rule, and references. There is also biographical information about the author.
665. Edwards, Dan, and M. J. Graves, eds. Death: The Doorway to the Future.
LeVale, MD: Excelsior Books, 1977.
666. Elias, Norbert. The Loneliness of Dying. New York: Basil Blackwell,
1985. Translated by Edmond Jephcott.
667. Ellis, Albert, and Michael Abrams. How to Cope with a Fatal Illness: The
Rational Management of Death and Dying. New York: Barricade Books, 1994.
668. Evans, Jocelyn. Living with a Man Who Is Dying. New York: Taplinger
Publishing Co., 1971. Also published by Blond, London.
669. Feigenberg, Loma. Terminal Care: Friendship Contracts with Dying Can-
cer Patients. New York: Brunner/Mazel, 1980.
670. Fein, Leonard J. Against the Dying of the Light: A Father’s Journey
through Loss. Woodstock, VT: Jewish Lights Publishing, 2001.
671. Frick, Marlena. All the Days of His Dying. London: Allison & Busby,
1972.
 Dying 97

672. Gibbons, Joan Lyon, and Elizabeth Boyden Howes. Come Phoenix Word:
An Account of a Woman’s Journey and Struggle for Consciousness during a
Terminal Illness: Journal and Writings of Joan Lyon Gibbons, 1924–1987. San
Francisco, CA: Guild for Psychological Studies Publishing House, 1989.
673. Glaser, Barney G., and A. L. Strauss. Awareness of Dying. Chicago: Al-
dine Publishing Co., 1968. Originally published in 1965. Published by Weiden-
feld & Nicholson, London, in 1966.
674. Glaser, Barney G., and Anselm L. Strauss. Anguish: A Case History of a
Dying Patient. Mill Valley, CA: Sociology Press, 1971. Also cited as Anguish:
A Case History of a Dying Trajectory. Also cited as being published by Aldine
Publishing Co., Chicago.
675. ———. Anguish: A Case History of a Dying Trajectory. Mill Valley, CA:
Sociology Press, 1970. Also cited as Anguish: A Dying Trajectory, published by
Aldine Publishing Co., Chicago.
676. ———. Time for Dying. Chicago: Aldine Publishing Co., 1968.
677. Gleason, Edward S. Dying We Live. Cambridge, MA: Cowley Publica-
tions, 1990.
678. Gollwitzer, Helmut. Dying We Live: The Final Messages and Records of
the Resistance. New York: Pantheon Books, 1956.
679. Graham, Billy. Facing Death and the Life After. Waco, TX: Word Books,
1987.
680. Greinacher, Norbert, and Alois Muller, eds. The Experience of Dying.
New York: Herder and Herder, 1974.
681. Griffith, William H. More Than a Parting Prayer: Lessons in Caregiving
for the Dying. Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 2004.
Believing that dying patients are the best teachers, Griffith explores the issues
of death and dying in the context of faith. He uses personal experiences as well as
the stories of the dying and their families to put these issues in context. He served
as an on-call chaplain with the Hospice of the Valley in Phoenix, Arizona, and
is currently chaplain for the Hospice of South Central Indiana. Griffith discusses
denial of death, hope, emotional and spiritual pain, honoring the care receiver’s
faith, caring for the dying agnostic, fear of grieving alone, and child death. A
lengthy appendix includes thought-provoking questions from each chapter in the
book.
682. Grof, Stanislav. Dimensions of Dying and Rebirth. Virginia Beach, VA:
ARE Press, 1977.
98 Chapter 11

683. Grof, Stanislav, and Christina Grof. Beyond Death: The Gates of Con-
sciousness. New York: Thames & Hudson, 1980.
684. Grollman, Earl A. In Sickness and in Health: How to Cope When Your
Loved One Is Ill. Boston: Beacon Press, 1987.
Grollman, noted author and thanatologist, presents poetic meditations for
family members and loved ones of those who are terminally ill. Meditations are
divided by subject area.
685. Gruman, Gerald J. A History of Ideas about the Prolongation of Life. New
York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Origi-
nally published in 1966.
686. Guinness, Howard Wyndham. The Last Enemy: Living with Terminal Ill-
ness. London: Church Pastoral Aid Society, 1974.
687. Hablitzel, William E. Dying Was the Best Thing That Ever Happened to
Me: Stories of Healing and Wisdom along Life’s Journey. Austin, TX: Sunshine
Ridge Publishing/Greenleaf Book Group, 2006.
With moving stories from his professional life as a physician, Hablitzel offers
inspiring lessons on living and dying. The common theme in the stories is the
timelessness of the moment.
688. Hagglund, Tor-Bjorn. Dying: A Psychoanalytic Study with Special Refer-
ence to Individual Creativity and Defensive Organization. New York: Interna-
tional Universities Press, 1978.
Hagglund focuses on the overwhelming feeling of helplessness experienced by
the dying as well as two main problems faced by both the person dying and their
loved ones. He defines these problems as the preoccupation with the inconceiv-
able nature of dying and the defense against the anxiety of not understanding. His
chapters explore the psychodynamics of the dying patient, children’s reactions
to death, psychotherapy of dying adult patients, and a psychoanalytic study of
narcissism, phallic defense, and creativity in mourning. Includes references and
an index.
689. Hampe, Johann Christoph. To Die Is to Gain: The Experience of One’s
Own Death. Atlanta, GA: John Knox Press, 1979.
690. Hampton, C. Transition Called Death. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Pub-
lishing House, 1979.
691. Hanlan, Archie J. Autobiography of Dying. Garden City, NY: Doubleday,
1979.
692. Hardy, Mark A., Lillian G. Kutscher, Gerald B. Appel, John M. Kiernan,
Austin H. Kutscher, Martha L. Orr, Carole Torres, and Lissa Parsonnet. Positive
Approaches to Living with End Stage Renal Disease: Psychosocial and Thanato-
logic Aspects. New York: Praeger, 1986.
 Dying 99

693. Harmon, Louise. Fragments on the Deathwatch. Boston: Beacon Press,

1998.
Harmon, a professor of law, emphasizes the needs of those caring for the dying
and makes her case with several legal arguments. The text is filled with footnotes,
quotations, poems, and other tidbits that almost equal the volume of the text itself.
Harmon describes her agonizing experience on the deathwatch with her father.
Includes thirty-three pages of additional notes at the end of the book.
694. Harper, George Lea. Living with Dying: Finding Meaning in Chronic Ill-
ness. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1992.
695. Harrold, Joan K., and Joanne Lynn. A Good Dying: Shaping Health Care
for the Last Months of Life. New York: Haworth Press, 1998.
696. Harwell, Amy. Ready to Live, Prepared to Die: A Provocative Guide to
the Rest of Your Life. Wheaton, IL: Harold Shaw Publishers, 1995.
697. Hawkins, Anne Hunsaker, and James O. Ballard. Time to Go: Three Plays
on Death and Dying, with Commentary on End-of-Life Issues. Philadelphia: Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania Press, 1995.
698. Hennezel, Marie de. Intimate Death: How the Dying Teach Us How to
Live. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1997. Translated by Carol Brown Janeway.
699. Herhold, Robert M. Learning to Die, Learning to Live. Philadelphia: For-
tress Press, 1976.
700. Hill, Nancy. Living with Terminal Illness. St. Louis: Concordia Publishing
House, 1995.
701. Hill, T. Patrick, and David A. Shirley. A Good Death: Taking More Con-
trol at the End of Your Life. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1992. Copyright by
Choice in Dying, Inc., The National Council for the Right to Die. “A Merloyd
Lawrence book.”
Hill, director of education at Choice in Dying, and Shirley, former associate
director of education at Choice in Dying, present a guidebook for physicians,
clergy, attorneys, nurses, and others on individual freedom and compassionate
care at the end of life. Strong advocates for living wills and heath care proxies,
the authors use case histories to discuss a variety of topics, including artificial
nutrition, respirators, and balancing pain relief with the desire to be lucid and able
to communicate. They also explore the implications of suicide, assisted suicide,
and withdrawal of life support. Right-to-die matters are discussed in the context
of major religious traditions. Includes notes, a list of titles for further reading, a
list of organizations, a sample will and power of attorney, an appendix featuring
state laws governing living wills/declarations and appointment of a health care
agent, information about the authors, and an index. Preface by Fenella Rouse,
executive director, Choice in Dying, Inc.
100 Chapter 11

702. Hinton, John M. Dying. Baltimore, MD: Penguin Books, 1967. Second
edition published in 1972.
703. Horn, Robert C., and C. Everett Koop. How Will They Know If I’m Dead?:
Transcending Disability and Terminal Illness. Delray Beach, FL: GR Press/St.
Lucie Press, 1997.
704. Howells, W. D., Henry James, John Bigelow, Thomas Wentworth Higgin-
son, Henry M. Alden, William Hanna Thomson, Guglielmo Ferrero, Julia Ward
Howe, and Elizabeth Stuart Phelps. In after Days: Thoughts on the Future Life.
New York: Arno Press, 1976. Originally published in 1910.
705. Hubbard, David A. Why Do I Have to Die? Glendale, CA: Regal Books,
1978.
706. Hunt, Gladys M. The Christian Way of Death. Grand Rapids, MI: Zonder-
van Publishing House, 1971.
707. Hutschnecker, Arnold A. The Will to Live. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall, 1951.
708. Hyde, Margaret O. Meeting Death. New York: Walker Publishing Co.,
1989.
709. Jacobsen, Fay W., Margaret Kindlen, and Allison Shoemark. Living
through Loss: A Manual for Those Working with Issues of Terminal Illness and
Bereavement. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1997.
710. Johnson, Elizabeth A. As Someone Dies: A Handbook for the Living. Santa
Monica, CA: Hay House, 1987.
711. Johnson, Margaret Woods. We Lived with Dying. Waco, TX: Word Books,
1975.
712. Kalish, Richard A., ed. Caring Relationships: The Dying and the Be-
reaved. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1980. Part of the Perspectives on
Death and Dying series, volume 2. Series also cited as Perspectives on Death in
Human Experience.
In this book, Kalish points out the growth in literature on death and dying in re-
cent years and the challenges of “putting this new knowledge and awareness into
action in institutional settings.” Contributors’ articles focus on standards of care
for the terminally ill, dying versus well-being, the social theory of dying, family
communication during a child’s fatal illness, dying and dignity, psychosocial
aspects of terminal care, anticipatory grief, reactions of family systems to sudden
and unexpected death, SIDS, nursing care of the terminal patient, relationship to
death as a source of stress for nurses, medical staff coping mechanisms for death,
and attitudes of physicians on disclosing information to and maintaining life for
terminal patients. Includes references but no index.
 Dying 101

713. ———, ed. The Final Transition. Farmingdale, NY: Baywood Publishing,
1984.
714. Kaplan, Louise J. No Voice Is Ever Wholly Lost. New York: Simon &
Schuster, 1995.
715. Karnes, Barbara. Gone from My Sight: The Dying Experience. Depoe Bay,
OR: Barbara Karnes Publishing, 1986.
716. Kaufman, Sharon R. And a Time to Die: How American Hospitals Shape
the End of Life. New York: Scribner, 2005.
Kaufman, a medical anthropologist, explores the often unacknowledged ten-
sion between medical efforts to extend life and the desire to allow patients to “let
go.” Her book insightfully notes that, “In the past thirty years, the advent of medi-
cal technology capable of sustaining life without restoring health, the expectation
that a critically ill person need not die, and the conviction that medicine should
routinely thwart death have significantly changed where, when, and how Ameri-
cans die and has put us all in the position of doing something about death.” She
focuses her analysis on the hospital, where so many deaths occur and where these
tensions are always present. Her text discusses hospital culture, heroic interven-
tion, the paradox of resuscitation, financial considerations in medical treatment,
and thoughts on the terms suffering, dignity, and quality of life. Two appendixes
document the author’s research and provide comments on diversity’s effects on
these issues. Includes notes, an extensive bibliography, and an index.
717. Kearney, Michael. A Place of Healing: Working with Suffering in Living
and Dying. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.
718. Keleman, Stanley. Living Your Dying. New York: Random House, 1975.
719. Kellehear, Allan. Dying of Cancer: The Final Year of Life. New York:
Harwood Academic Publishers, 1990.
This book examines the ways in which the dying organize and choose to live
their remaining time and social experiences. Kellehear, a sociology professor
at La Trobe University in Melbourne, Australia, discusses preparing for death;
physical and social adjustments; saying goodbye; alternative therapies; and com-
municating with physicians, clergy, and loved ones. He uses interviews with
100 terminally ill cancer patients who expect to live less than one year. The text
also explores death attitudes, consumerism, and changing patterns of morbidity
and mortality. Includes a bibliography, appendixes with research details, and an
index.
720. Kennedy, Patricia H. Dying at Home with Cancer. Springfield, IL: Charles
C. Thomas, 1982.
721. Kessler, David. The Needs of the Dying: A Guide for Bringing Hope, Com-
fort, and Love to Life’s Final Chapter. New York: Quill, 2000.
102 Chapter 11

722. ———. The Rights of the Dying: A Companion for Life’s Final Moments.
New York: HarperCollins, 1997.
723. Kolf, June Cerza. Comfort and Care in a Final Illness: Support for the
Patient and Caregiver. Tucson, AZ: Fisher Books, 1999.
Experienced in hospice care, Kolf provides guidance and support for both the
patient and caregiver with helpful commentary on medical care, hospital versus
homecare decisions, legal and financial issues, saying goodbye, and adjusting
emotionally. She also addresses the need for open and honest communication,
listening, physical support, alleviation from caregiver burnout, and making final
arrangements. The text is interspersed with effective graphics featuring helpful
tips, vignettes, statistics, and important highlights from the text. Includes sugges-
tions for further reading; a list of periodical, pamphlet, and online resources; a
section on helpful organizations arranged by subject, and an index.
724. Kopp, Ruth Lewshenia, and Stephen Sorenson. Encounter with Terminal
Illness. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing House, 1980. Also cited as
Terminal Illness.
725. Kothari, M. L., and L. A. Mehta. Death, a New Perspective on the Phe-
nomena of Disease and Dying. New York: M. Boyars, 1986. Distributed by
Scribner.
726. Kramp, Erin Tierney, Douglas H. Kramp, and Emily P. McKhann. Liv-
ing with the End in Mind: A Practical Checklist for Living Life to the Fullest by
Embracing Your Mortality. New York: Three Rivers Press, 1998.
727. Krant, Melvin J. Dying and Dignity: The Meaning and Control of a Per-
sonal Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1974.
A physician who has cared for cancer patients for many years, Krant attempts
to bring together thoughts, ideas, theories, and concepts that relate to “pertinent
psychological and sociologic information regarding the individual, his family,
and the medical care system as they interrelate around the process of fatal illness
and experience of dying.” His chapters focus on putting dying into context for the
present time, fears surrounding death, indignities of dying, fatal illness and the
physician, peaceful death through euthanasia, families of the dying, and his own
proposals for education about death for different audiences. Includes references
but no index.
728. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. AIDS: The Ultimate Challenge. New York: Mac-
millan, 1987.
729. ———. To Live Until We Say Goodbye. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall, 1978. Features photographs by Mal Warshaw. Published by Simon &
Schuster as a Touchstone edition in 1997.
A powerful, moving book, Kübler-Ross shares stories of the dying as she as-
sists them with acceptance of death. Warshaw’s photographs bring Kübler-Ross’s
 Dying 103

famous work with the dying to life, giving readers an intimate, touching view of
the terminally ill.
730. ———. The Wheel of Life: A Memoir of Living and Dying. New York:
Touchstone, 1998.
731. Kurtzman, J., and P. Gordon. No More Dying. Los Angeles: Jeremy P.
Tarcher, Inc., 1976.
732. Lamerton, Richard. Care of the Dying. Westport, CT: Technomic Publish-
ing, 1976. Published by Priory Press, London, in 1973.
733. Levine, Stephen. Healing into Life and Death. Garden City, NJ: Anchor
Press/Doubleday, 1987.
734. ———. Who Dies?: An Investigation of Conscious Living and Conscious
Dying. Garden City, NY: Anchor Press/Doubleday, 1982. Reprinted in 1989.
735. ———. A Year to Live: How to Live This Year as If It Were Your Last. New
York: Belltower Publishing, 1998.
736. Lifton, Robert J., and Eric Olson. Living and Dying. New York: Praeger,
1974. Published by Bantam, New York, in 1975.
737. Lofland, Lyn H. The Craft of Dying: The Modern Face of Death. Beverly
Hills, CA: Sage Publications, 1978.
In light of the new attitudes adopted toward death and dying during the 1970s,
Lofland, associate professor of sociology, explores “modern dying” with chapters
on the prolongation, bureaucratization, and secularization of dying; issues sur-
rounding beliefs about death and dying, social organization, and the culture of
medical practice; the “happy death movement,” emerging ideologies, and com-
munication about death. Includes a bibliography.
738. Longacre, Christine. Facing Death and Finding Hope: A Guide to the
Emotional and Spiritual Care of the Dying. New York: Doubleday, 1997.
739. Lynn, Joanne, and Joan Harrold. Handbook for Mortals: Guidance for
People Facing Serious Illness. New York: Oxford University Press, 1999. A
publication of the Center to Improve Care of the Dying at George Washington
University. Research for the book funded by the Alfred P. Sloan Foundation of
New York City.
Lynn and Harrold, both physicians, offer a guidebook with practical, comfort-
ing information for both the dying and those caring for them. Topics include
coping with uncertainty, orchestrating support from teams of caregivers, commu-
nicating about death, dying and terminal care with doctors, managing symptoms,
pain management, what to expect as various diseases progress, making deci-
sions about foregoing medical treatment, funeral planning, childhood death, and
grief and bereavement. Extremely well organized, this book contains numerous
104 Chapter 11

organizational resources, reading lists, illustrations, quotes, acknowledgment

notes, and an index. Book sales support Americans for Better Care of the Dying.
Foreword by Rosalynn Carter.
740. Madden, Ed. Carpe Diem: Enjoying Every Day with a Terminal Illness.
Boston: Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 1993. Also cited as being published by the
Boston Neighborhood News, Dorchester, MA.
741. Magee, Bryan. Facing Death. London: William Kimber & Co., Ltd.,
1977.
742. Martin, Jenny A. The Next Step Forward: Music Therapy with the Ter-
minally Ill. Proceedings from a Symposium for Music Therapists Working in
Palliative Care. Bronx, NY: Calvary Hospital, 1989.
743. Martocchio, Benita C. Living While Dying. Bowie, MD: Robert J. Brady
Publishers, 1982.
Intended for professionals involved in care for the dying, this book focuses
on the “social and psychological processes at work among people who are living
while dying and those persons interacting with them.” Martocchio has conducted
a study of dying patients that centers on human behavior in interaction with the
environment during the process of dying. She discusses death as a social problem
in the twentieth century, theoretical and sensitizing concepts, her research strat-
egy, and the realities of the dying. The author provides a postscript that surfaces
her challenges with working on such a difficult subject and the emotional impact
it has. Includes a short list of references, an appendix with nursing care plans,
and an index.
744. McNees, Pat. Dying: A Book of Comfort. New York: Warner Books,
1996.
745. Meagher, David K., and R. Debra Shapiro. Death, the Experience. Min-
neapolis, MN: Burgess Publishing, 1984.
746. Mennes, Marya. Last Rights: A Case for the Good Death. New York: Wil-
liam Morrow, 1974.
747. Metchnikoff, Elie. The Prolongation of Life: Optimistic Studies. New
York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Origi-
nally published in 1908.
748. Meyer, Charles. Surviving Death: A Practical Guide to Caring for the
Dying and Bereaved. Mystic, CT: Twenty-Third Publications, 1991. Originally
published in1988. Also cited as Surviving Death: For Those Caring for the Dying
and the Bereaved.
749. Moller, David Wendell. Life’s End: Technocratic Dying in an Age of
Spiritual Yearning. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000.
 Dying 105

750. ———. On Death without Dignity: The Human Impact of Technological

Dying. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1990. Part of the Perspectives on
Death and Dying series, Richard A. Kalish, editor.
Noting that symbols of dying in U.S. culture are permeated by catastrophic
and threatening images, Moller argues that much is to be learned about human
responses to mortality by studying the dying and related cultural symbols. He
also points out that humanity’s response to suffering, tragedy, and death is “an
indispensable measure of the human condition.” Moller addresses varying inter-
pretations of the meaning of death, denial of death, the technocratic physician
and technological medicine, dying and loss of fellowship, the social organization
of the hospital, patient alienation in hospital environments, the stigma associated
with dying, societal forces on the process of dying, and the social isolation of
dying. Includes references.
751. Morduch, Anna. No Screen for the Dying. London: Regency Press, 1964.
752. Mundy, Jon. Learning to Die. Blauvelt, NY: Freedeeds Association,
1976.
753. Nairn, Rob. Living, Dreaming, Dying: Practical Wisdom from the Tibetan
Book of the Dead. Boston: Shambhala Publications, 2004. Distributed by Ran-
dom House.
754. Neale, Robert E. The Art of Dying. New York: Harper & Row, 1973.
Neale offers several challenging approaches to considering our own death with
the goal of understanding death and dying as a natural part of life and growing
from it.
755. Neuhaus, Richard John. As I Lay Dying: Meditations upon Returning.
New York: Basic Books, 2002.
A prolific writer and religion scholar, Neuhaus is editor of First Things, a pub-
lication of the Institute on Religion and Public Life. He is also the organization’s
president. His self-help book is a candid collection of meditations in which he
muses on the definition of a good death and other common questions about death
and dying.
756. Nuland, Sherwin B. How We Die: Reflections on Life’s Final Chapter.
New York: Knopf, 1994. Published by Vintage Books, New York, in 1995.
757. Payne, Sheila, and Caroline Ellis-Hill. Chronic and Terminal Illness: New
Perspectives on Caring and Carers. New York: Oxford University Press, 2001.
758. Peachey, Mark. Facing Terminal Illness. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press,
1981.
Described by Richard Showalter in the foreword as a confession of faith, this
is the story of the executive secretary of the Rosedale Mennonite Missions and
106 Chapter 11

his battle with cancer. This 72-page book contains several photos of the author
before and during his illness.
759. Plouffe, Rhea Therese. Terminal Illness and the Experience of God: A
Qualitative Study of the Transitional Space. Ottawa: National Library of Canada/
Bibliotheque Nationale du Canada, 2001.
760. Poss, Sylvia. Toward Death with Dignity: Caring for Dying People. Bos-
ton: Allen & Unwin, 1981.
761. Preston, S. H., Nathan Keyfitz, and Robert Schoen. Causes of Death. New
York: Seminar Press, 1972.
762. Priest, Mary Woodward. Diary of Courage: Coping with Life-Threatening
Illness. San Francisco, CA: Strawberry Hill Press, 1990.
763. Prunkl, Peter R., and Rebecca L. Berry. Death Week: Exploring the Dying
Process. New York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1989. Part of the Series in Death
Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
764. Quicksall, Larry E. We Need to Talk: A Practical Guide for Those Facing
Terminal Illness. Effingham, IL: FamilyGrowth Publications, 2002.
This book is an 82-page handbook offering common sense guidance to those
facing death through terminal illness.
765. Quill, Timothy E. A Midwife through the Dying Process: Stories of Heal-
ing and Hard Choices at the End of Life. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University
Press, 1997.
766. Rasberry, Salli. The Art of Dying: Honoring and Celebrating Life’s Pas-
sages. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts, 2001.
767. Reiffel, James, and Lillian G. Kutscher. Psychosocial Aspects of Cardio-
vascular Disease: The Life-Threatened Patient, the Family, and the Staff. New
York: Columbia University Press, 1980.
768. Rinpoche, Sogyal, Patrick Gaffney, and Andrew Harvey. The Tibetan
Book of Living and Dying. New York: HarperCollins, 1994.
769. Robbins, Joy, and Janet Moscrop. Caring for the Dying Patient and the
Family. New York: Chapman & Hall, 1995.
770. Rock, Lois, and Sheila Moxley. When Goodbye Is Forever. Intercourse,
PA: Good Books, 2004.
771. Rodman, F. Robert. Not Dying. New York: Random House, 1977. Subtitle
appears on the cover as A Psychoanalyst’s Memoir of His Wife’s Death.
Assistant clinical professor of psychology at the University of California, Los
Angeles, and a member of the faculty at the Los Angeles Psychoanalytic Institute,
Rodman emphasizes the importance of respecting each person’s unique approach
 Dying 107

to dying and death. This view comes from his own tragic experience with his
wife’s death and denial of her prognosis. He explores feelings of self-hatred, self-
reproach, self-pity, guilt, and anger.
772. Rollin, Betty. Last Wish. New York: Public Affairs Publishing, 1998.
773. Rosen, Elliott J. Families Facing Death: Family Dynamics of Terminal
Illness. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1990.
A family therapist, Rosen is psychological consultant to the Jansen Memorial
Hospice in Tuckahoe, New York. He writes about the disruption of the family
system by terminal illness. His first chapters give definitions of the family and
discuss the family as a system. Discussing how families psychologically prepare
for death, Rosen offers tasks for the grieving family to perform to deal with antic-
ipatory grief and looks at socially unsanctioned grief, the emotional shock wave
of death, and anticipated death versus sudden death. His suggestions include the
use of literary and cinematic materials, healing through rituals, and coaching. A
final chapter examines ethnic perspectives on death and gender roles. Appendixes
include an annotated filmography and a suggested reading list.
774. Rosenfeld, Stephen S. The Time of Their Dying. New York: W. W. Nor-
ton, 1977.
Rosenfeld, an editorial writer and columnist for the Washington Post, writes
about the process of dying, dealing with the death of both parents within a short
time frame, and coming to terms with mortality and the meaning of death and life.
He draws on his own painful experience of losing both parents to cancer.
775. Rowland, M. How to Die. Hollywood, CA: N.p., 1942.
776. Ryerson, Marjorie. Companions for the Passage: Stories of the Intimate
Privilege of Accompanying the Dying. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan
Press, 2005.
777. Ryndes, True, and Susan Bruno. A Pathway for Patients and Families
Facing Terminal Illness. Arlington, VA: The Organization, 1997.
778. Sauer, Herbert I. Geographic Patterns in the Risk of Dying and Associated
Factors, United States, 1968–1972. Hyattsville, MD: U.S. Department of Health
and Human Services, Public Health Service, Office of Health Research, Statis-
tics, and Technology, National Center for Health Statistics, 1980.
779. Saunders, Cicely M., and Mary Baines. Living with Dying: The Manage-
ment of Terminal Disease. New York: Oxford University Press, 1989. Originally
published in 1983.
Founder of St. Christopher’s Hospice in 1967, and the hospice movement it-
self, Saunders, along with coauthor Baines, presents a 74-page volume on clinical
treatments for the terminally ill. Chapters include information on terminal pain,
the use of analgesics for terminal pain, adjuvant therapy in pain control, the control
108 Chapter 11

of symptoms other than pain, and other components of “total pain.” Other topics
covered are severe pain, oral narcotics, opiates, nonsteroidal antiinflammatory
drugs, antibiotics, antispasmodic drugs, anorexia, dry or painful mouth, hic-
cough, incontinence, insomnia, anxiety, depression, confusion, terminal restless-
ness, convulsions, and mental pain. Includes charts, a patient’s drawing, refer-
ences, and an index.
780. Schweibert, Pat, and Paul Kirk. When Hello Means Goodbye. Portland,
OR: University of Oregon Health Sciences Center, 1981.
781. Scrimgeour, Elizabeth. Honouring Sacred Spaces: Voicing Stories of Ter-
minal Illness. Pretoria: University of South Africa, 2002.
782. Seeland, Irene B. The Final 48 Hours: Observations on the Last Days of
Life. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1991.
783. Segerberg, Osborn. Living with Death. New York: Dutton, 1976.
784. Seligman, Martin. Helplessness: On Depression, Development, and
Death. San Francisco, CA: W. H. Freeman, 1975.
Seligman presents a thorough analysis of helplessness as a component of de-
pression, terminal illness, and coping with death.
785. Shane, Thomas W. When Life Meets Death: Stories of Death and Dying,
Truth and Courage. New York: Haworth Press, 1998.
786. Shepard, Martin. Dying: A Guide for Helping and Coping. Sag Harbor,
NY: Permanent Press, 2000.
Shepard presents an uplifting, gentle exploration of the process of dying and
a guidebook for helping the dying and grieving. The text includes meditations
for the dying and grieving, quotes on death and dying, and epitaphs. Also incor-
porated are poignant sketches by artist and illustrator Mac Shepard, who died in
1972. Shepard served as chief psychiatric resident at Mount Sinai Hospital in
New York.
787. Shuman, Ron. Day by Day. Oakland, CA: Scrimshaw Press, 1977.
788. Singh, Kathleen Dowling. The Grace in Dying: How We Are Transformed
Spiritually as We Die. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1998.
789. Smith, Rodney. Lessons from the Dying. Boston: Wisdom Publications,
1998.
790. Smith, Walter J. Dying in the Human Life Cycle: Psychological, Biomedi-
cal, and Social Perspectives. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1985.
Smith discusses the extensive variety of reactions to death and dying through-
out the life cycle. He begins with stillbirth and perinatal death and continues on
to the elderly and death. Among the topics he explores are effective management
 Dying 109

of grieving parents, photographing the deceased infant, replacement pregnancy,

sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS), psychological issues for families of SIDS
victims, childhood bereavement, analytical theories of childhood mourning, chil-
dren’s conceptual awareness of death, childhood and adolescent cancer, etiology
of adolescent suicide, catastrophic life-threatening events in adulthood, conjugal
bereavement, anticipatory grief, psychiatric morbidity during bereavement, clini-
cal management of the bereaved, communication about death, the patient’s desire
to know and the physician’s willingness to tell, palliative versus curative care,
polypharmacology of hospice care, bereavement in hospice settings, management
of terminal disease, terminal drop theory, the disengagement theory in the context
of the elderly, right-to-die issues, active and passive euthanasia, and caring for the
dying older person. Includes name and subject indexes as well as bibliographies
for each chapter, though each is listed at the end of the book.
791. Spilling, Roy. Terminal Care at Home. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1986. Part of the Oxford General Practice Series, volume 10.
Spilling offers a guide to improving care of the terminally ill at home and for
ensuring that more people are able to make this choice. The contributors discuss
issues of communication, tall about inadequate support services for home care,
and offer tips to family members for controlling symptoms at home.
792. Stanford, Gene, and Deborah Perry. Death out of the Closet: A Curriculum
Guide to Living with Dying. New York: Bantam Books, 1976.
793. Starck, Peter. Last Breath: Cautionary Tales from the Limits of Human
Endurance. New York: Ballantine Books, 2001.
794. Staton, Jana, Roger Shuy, and Ira Byock. A Few Months to Live: Different
Paths to Life’s End. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press, 2001.
The authors present nine terminally ill patients in Missoula, Montana, who are
suffering from cancer, heart disease, and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease.
Their ages, diagnoses, and ethnicities vary. The book’s substance is how these
patients think and talk about their eventual death, coping with pain, and finding
meaning in their lives and situation. The book also focuses on the experience of
the caregivers and other support systems that are in place. Other topics discussed
include communicating about death and dying, end-of-life decision making, lack
of support for caregivers, personal growth, the final stages of life, and memori-
als at the end of life. An introductory chapter contains detailed profiles of the
study participants. Includes a list of references, professional backgrounds of the
contributors, and an appendix describing the Missoula Demonstration Project’s
baseline research and methodology.
795. Straub, Sandra Helene. Death without Notice. Amityville, NY: Baywood
Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan,
editor.
110 Chapter 11

796. Strauss, Anselm L. Chronic Illness and the Quality of Life. St. Louis:
C. V. Mosby, 1975. Revised second edition published in 1984.
797. Suszycki, Lee H. Social Work and Terminal Care. New York: Praeger,
1984. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series.
798. Tallmer, Margot, ed. Sexuality and Life-Threatening Illness. Springfield,
IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1984. A Foundation of Thanatology text.
799. Thompson, Douglas K. A Refuge from the Storm: A Shelter from the Storm
of Caring for a Loved One with a Terminal Illness. Fairfax, VA: Xulon Press,
2003.
800. Tigges, Kent Nelson, and William Matthew Marcil. Terminal and Life-
Threatening Illness: An Occupational Behavior Perspective. Thorofare, NJ:
Slack, 1988.
801. Twycross, Robert G. The Dying Patient. London: Christian Medical Fel-
lowship, 1975. A Christian Medical Fellowship topic book.
802. United States Congress, Office of Technology Assessment. Institutional
Protocols for Decisions about Life-Sustaining Treatments: Special Report.
Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1988.
803. Vaux, Kenneth L., and Sara Anson Vaux. Dying Well. Nashville, TN:
Abingdon Press, 1996.
804. Vogt, Christopher P. Patience, Compassion, Hope, and the Christian Art
of Dying Well. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 2004. A Sheed & Ward
book.
Vogt explores the concept of dying well in the Christian tradition, including
the ars moriendi tradition of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. Includes a
bibliography.
805. Wahl, Charles W., Robert C. Leslie, and Nathalie E. Kennedy. Helping
the Dying Patient and His Family. New York: National Association of Social
Workers, 1960.
806. Walker, Alice. To Hell with Dying. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanov-
ich, 1988. Illustrated by Catherine Deeter.
807. Wanderer, Zev. Letting Go. New York: Warner Books, 1978.
808. Wass, Hannelore, Felix M. Berardo, and Robert A. Neimeyer. Dying: Fac-
ing the Facts. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1995. Originally published by
Hemisphere Publishing/Harper & Row, Washington, DC, in 1979, and also by
McGraw-Hill, New York, in 1979. Originally part of the Series in Death Educa-
tion, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
 Dying 111

809. Waterhouse, Michael. Staying Close: A Positive Approach to Dying and

Bereavement. London: Constable, 2003.
Motivated by his own experience with his mother’s debilitating illness and
eventual death, Waterhouse’s goal for the book is to initiate discussion on a topic
he considers taboo. He explores the changing views of the dying process and new
approaches to bereavement and funerals. Includes a brief list of recommended
titles and a list of useful contacts, mostly in London.
810. Watson, David. Fear No Evil: One Man Deals with Terminal Illness.
Wheaton, IL: H. Shaw Publishers, 1984.
811. Watts, Alan W. Death. Millbrae, CA: Celestial Arts, 1975.
812. Weeks, O. Duane, and Catherine Johnson. When All the Friends Have
Gone: A Guide for Aftercare Providers. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing,
2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
813. Weenolsen, Patricia. The Art of Dying: How to Leave This World with
Dignity and Grace, at Peace with Yourself and Your Loved Ones. New York: St.
Martin’s Griffin, 1996. Also published and cited with the title The Art of Dying:
The Only Book for Persons Facing Their Own Death.
Using case histories, exercises, and her own gently delivered advice, Weenol-
sen presents a compassionate guidebook to the “good death.” A psychologist,
she helps the dying and their loved ones understand the process with chapters on
preparing for death, telling others that a loved one has died, how to discuss death
with young children, legal and financial issues, medical concerns, psychospiritual
guidance, coping positively with daily life, the stigma associated with disability
and disfigurement, how to exert power over pain, support groups, the emotional
roller coaster, retaining identity, aid-in-dying, forgiveness, creating meaning
from despair, rituals and myths for the end of life, and specifics on what it is like
to die. Includes a subject bibliography.
814. Weingarten, Violet. Intimations of Mortality. New York: Alfred A. Knopf,
1978.
Weingarten provides a novelist’s account of her experiences as a cancer pa-
tient. The memoir includes criticisms of books and information about death.
815. Wheeler, David R. Journey to the Other Side. New York: Ace Books,
1976.
Includes an introduction by Elisabeth Kübler-Ross.
816. Winter, Arthur. Moment of Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas,
1969.
817. Worth, Richard. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross: Encountering Death and Dying.
Philadelphia: Chelsea House Publishers. Part of the Women in Medicine series.
112 Chapter 11

Appropriate for younger audiences, this short biography of Elisabeth Kübler-

Ross includes many personal stories, family photographs, and vignettes of her
work with dying patients. Includes a timeline of her life and accomplishments, a
short bibliography, and a thorough index.
818. Zorza, Victor, and Rosemary Zorza. A Way to Die. New York: Alfred A.
Knopf, 1980.
 12
Eschatology

819. Adams, Jay Edward. Realized Millennialism: A Study in Biblical Eschatol-

ogy. St. Louis: Adams, 1959.
Later editions cited with the titles I Will Tell Thee the Mystery and The Time
Is at Hand.
820. Arendzen, John Peter. What Becomes of the Dead?: A Study of Eschatol-
ogy. 2nd ed. New York: Sheed & Ward, 1951.
821. Brandon, Samuel G. Judgment of the Dead: Life after Death in Major
Religions. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1969.
822. Dehejia, Vidya. Living and Dying: An Inquiry into the Enigma of Death
and Afterlife. Chicago: Advent Books, 1979. Originally published by Vikha in
New Delhi in 1979.
823. Doss, Richard W. The Last Enemy: A Christian Understanding of Death.
New York: Harper & Row, 1974. Also cited as The Last Enemy: A Theology of
Death.
This book is an examination of Christian attitudes and theology surrounding
death.
824. Ducasse, Curt John. A Critical Examination of the Belief in a Life after
Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1962.
825. Eliade, Mircea. Death, Afterlife, and Eschatology. New York: Harper &
Row, 1967. Reprinted in 1974.
826. ———. The Myth of Eternal Return. New York: Pantheon Books, 1954.

113
114 Chapter 12

827. Godin, Andre, ed. Death and Presence: Studies in the Psychology of
Religion. Brussels, Belgium: Lumen Vitae Press, 1972. Also cited as Death and
Presence: The Psychology of Death and the Afterlife.
828. Greely, Andrew M. Death and Beyond. Chicago: Thomas More Press,
1976.
829. Guardini, Romano. The Last Things Concerning Death, Purification after
Death, Resurrection. New York: Pantheon Books, 1954. Translated by Charlotte
E. Forsyth and Grace B. Branham.
830. Hanley, E. Life after Death. New York: Norton Publishers, Leisure Books,
1977.
831. Henderson, Joseph L., and Maud Oakes. Wisdom of the Serpent: The
Myths of Death, Rebirth, Resurrection. New York: Macmillan, 1971.
832. Hick, John H. Death and Eternal Life. New York: Harper & Row, 1976.
Providing a thorough survey and analysis of the afterlife, Hick’s work exam-
ines religious traditions and philosophical theories to firmly conclude that there
is the existence of life beyond death. Hick suggests that the best hypothesis is a
blending of Eastern and Western approaches to the subject. The text explores the
concepts of global theology, reincarnation, purgatory, humanism, parapsychol-
ogy, epiphenomenalism, universalism, karma and vedantic philosophies, rebirth
in the Buddhist tradition, pareschatology, nirvana, spiritualism, and Christian
mysticism. Includes a bibliography and an index.
833. Kantonen, T. A. Life after Death. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1962.
834. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. On Life after Death. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts,
1991.
In this 96-page paperback, the acclaimed thanatologist discusses her thoughts
and feelings on the afterlife. Includes four essays: “Living and Dying”; “There Is
No Death”; Life, Death, and Life after Death”; and “Death of a Parent.”
835. Mayer, Gladys. Behind the Veils of Death and Sleep. New York: Krishna
Press, 1973. Also published by New Knowledge Books, East Grinstead, Sussex,
England.
In this 44-page paperback booklet, Mayer focuses on death and resurrection.
She muses on existing knowledge about life beyond death, spiritual knowledge
versus knowledge one looks for, the loss of imagination in the development of
intellect, definitions of death, and the etheric body. Includes discussions of purga-
tory, kama loca, and the Sun Sphere.
836. Moltmann, Jurgen. Theology of Hope: On the Ground and the Implica-
tions of a Christian Eschatology. New York: Harper & Row, 1967. First English
edition translated by James W. Leitch and published by SCM Press, London, in
1967.
 Eschatology 115

837. Shatte, Howard Alexander. Time and Its End: A Comparative Existential
Interpretation of Time and Eschatology. New York: Vantage Press, 1962.
838. Simpson, Michael. Death and Eternal Life. Notre Dame, IN: Fides Pub-
lishers, 1971.
839. Strothmann, Maynard Herman. Eschatology and the Mission of Christian-
ity. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms, 1956. Publication No. 16,825.
840. Tompkins, Susan E. Is Death the End? London: Christian Education
Movement, 1979.
841. Toynbee, Arnold et al. Life after Death. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson,
1976.
 13
Ethical Issues

842. Alters, Sandra. Death and Dying: Who Decides? Detroit, MI: Thomson
Gale, 2005.
843. Baird, Robert M., and Stuart E. Rosenbaum. Euthanasia: The Moral Is-
sues. Buffalo, NY: Prometheus Books, 1989.
844. Battin, Margaret Pabst. Ending Life: Ethics and the Way We Die. New
York: Oxford University Press, 2005.
Intended as a sequel to Battin’s The Least Worst Death: Essays in Bioethics on
the End of Life, this work explores the rapidly changing landscape of bioethics
in the context of death and dying issues. This collection of essays examines such
expected end-of-life issues as suicide in old age, death with dignity, and hospice
but also topics that have received less treatment in the literature, for example
global justice as it relates to the supposed duty to die, genetic prognostication,
serpent-handling and other religious practices that pose a death risk, and suicide
bombings. She also explores the refusal of medical treatment, the ethical aspects
of increased life span, and terminal procedure. An interesting chapter is incorpo-
rated on the same-day deaths of John Adams and Thomas Jefferson (July 4, 1826)
and possible implications for bioethics. Includes a thorough index and numerous
references. Battin is a noted bioethicist and distinguished professor of philosophy
and adjunct professor of internal medicine in the Division of Medical Ethics at
the University of Utah.
845. ———. The Least Worst Death: Essays in Bioethics on the End of Life.
New York: Oxford University Press, 1994.
Battin’s text focuses on end-of-life issues, specifically withdrawing or with-
holding care. She explores the “duty to die” concept and how other countries and
cultures address these issues sociologically. This book is an excellent review of

116
 Ethical Issues 117

the politics of dying and the cultural issues surrounding death. Battin is profes-
sor of philosophy and adjunct professor of internal medicine at the University of
Utah’s Division of Medical Ethics.
846. Bayles, Michael D. Medical Treatment of the Dying: Moral Issues. Cam-
bridge, MA: Schenkman Publishing Co., 1978.
847. Beauchamp, Tom L., and Seymour Perlin, eds. Ethical Issues in Death and
Dying. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1978. Published by Prentice-Hall,
Saddle River, NJ, in 1996, with Robert M. Veach as coauthor.
Includes Peter M. Black’s “Definitions of Brain Death.”
848. Bender, David L., and Richard Hagen. Death and Dying: Opposing View-
points. St. Paul, MN: Greenhaven Press, 1985. Published in 1974 and 1981 as
Problems of Death: Opposing Viewpoints. William Dudley was the book editor
for the 1992 edition.
This book is a collection of articles on controversial issues surrounding death.
It is ideal for high school and college audiences. Major areas covered are eutha-
nasia, abortion, suicide, and the funeral industry. Articles presented are from both
individuals and organizations. Includes bibliographies of periodical articles for
each subject, an appendix of organizations, and discussion activities. Bender is the
editor of the Opposing Viewpoints series and has authored most of the titles.
849. Berger, Arthur S. Dying and Death in Law and Medicine: A Forensic
Primer for Health and Legal Professionals. Westport, CT: Praeger, 1993.
Berger reviews legal and medical issues as well as important decisions that
come before and after death. He examines right-to-die issues, advanced direc-
tives, defining and determining death, anatomical gifts, and sources of legal
information along with appropriate forms. Appendixes include death-related
statutes and common law doctrines and a guide to the law library, which also
serves as a helpful glossary. A bibliography and table of cases are incorporated.
Medical foreword by David V. Schapira and legal foreword by Judge Raphael
Steinhardt. Berger is director of the International Institute for the Study of Death
and vice president of cross-cultural affairs for the Foundation of Thanatology at
the Columbia-Presbyterian Medical Center in New York City.
850. Brodie, Howard. Ethical Decisions in Medicine. Boston: Little, Brown &
Co., 1976.
851. Brown, Judy. The Choice: Seasons of Loss and Renewal after a Father’s
Decision to Die. Berkeley, CA: Conari Press, 1995.
This book is an exploration of family relationships when someone is termi-
nally ill and focusing on decisions to continue treatment. The death of Brown’s
father, Stanley Ball, was a suicide assisted by Dr. Jack Kevorkian, the patholo-
gist in Michigan often associated with the subject of assisted suicide. Ball was
Kevorkian’s tenth assisted suicide. Includes an extensive bibliography.
118 Chapter 13

852. Cutler, Donald R. Updating Life and Death: Essays in Ethics and Medi-
cine. Boston: Beacon Press, 1969.
853. Dodder, Clyde, and Barbara Dodder, eds. Suicide. Boston: Beacon Press,
1970.
854. Doka, Kenneth J., and Bruce Jennings. Ethical Dilemmas at the End of
Life. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 2005.
855. Dyck, Arthur J. Life’s Worth: The Case against Assisted Suicide. Grand
Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 2002.
856. Freeman, Eugene. Bioethical Problems: Death and Social Responsibility.
LaSalle, IL: Open Court Publishing, 1978.
857. Gervais, Karen Grandstrand. Redefining Death. New Haven, CT: Yale
University Press, 1986.
Gervais, associate professor of philosophy at Illinois Wesleyan University,
makes the point that the “morally relevant notion of human life necessarily in-
volves existence as a person and that such an existence is present only when the
brain allows for the possibility of consciousness.” She uses this theory to suggest
that people who are demonstrably in persistent vegetative states are clearly dead
in the same manner that brain-dead patients are. Gervais advocates for a public
policy that defines death as the “permanent cessation of consciousness,” still
allowing for patients and their families to choose something less for their own
treatment. In the book, she discusses the conceptual problems with death, defini-
tions of death, and an analysis of the Uniform Declaration of Death Act. Includes
extensive notes and references.
858. Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, Symposium No. 12. The Right
to Die: Decision and Decision Makers. New York: Group for the Advancement
of Psychiatry, 1973.
This book is a collection of writings on the debate over the right to die and
euthanasia.
859. Guroian, Vigen. Life’s Living toward Dying: A Theological and Medical–
Ethical Study. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1996.
860. Hafen, Brent Q., and Kathryn J. Frandsen. Faces of Death: Grief, Dying,
Euthanasia, Suicide. Englewood, CO: Morton Publishing, 1983.
861. Hardwig, John, and Nat Hentoff. Is There a Duty to Die?: And Other Es-
says in Bio-Ethics. New York: Routledge, 2000.
862. Hillyard, Daniel, and John Dombrink. Dying Right: The Death with Dig-
nity Movement. New York: Routledge, 2001.
 Ethical Issues 119

863. Horan, Dennis J., and David Mall, eds. Death, Dying, and Euthanasia.
Washington, DC: University Publications of America, 1977. Also published by
Alethia Books, Frederick, MD, in 1980.
864. Humber, James M., and Robert F. Almeder. Is There a Duty to Die?
Totowa, NJ: Humana Press, 2000.
865. Humphry, Derek. Final Exit: The Practicalities of Self-Deliverance and
Assisted Suicide for the Dying. Eugene, OR: Hemlock Society, 1991.
Humphry, founder of the Hemlock Society in 1980, in California, offers a con-
troversial book on the practicalities of euthanasia. The book jacket notes that it
is “intended to be read by a mature adult who is suffering from a terminal illness
and is considering the option of rational suicide if and when suffering becomes
unbearable.” Topics covered include selecting a doctor, legal issues, hospice op-
tions, cyanide, self-starvation, storing drugs, insurance, autopsies, and physician-
assisted dying. Also includes the grizzly chapter “Bizarre Ways to Die,” which
includes sections on electrocution, drowning, shooting, ovens, car exhausts, and
poisonous plants, among others. Includes a list of recommended titles and infor-
mation about both the author and the society.
866. ———. Let Me Die before I Wake: Hemlock’s Book of Self-Deliverance for
the Dying. New York: Dell Publishing Co., 1992. Originally published in 1981
and sold only to members of the Hemlock Society.
Referred to as the “Bible of Euthanasia” on 60 Minutes, in this book Humphry
tells the true stories of those who have chosen to end their lives in the face of
terminal illness. Includes information about laws governing assisted suicide and
euthanasia in several states.
867. Jatz, Jay, and Alexander Morgan Capron. Catastrophic Diseases: Who
Decides What? New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1975.
868. Kilner, John F., and Arlene B. Miller. The Center for Bioethics and Hu-
man Dignity Presents Dignity and Dying: A Christian Appraisal. Grand Rapids,
MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1996.
869. Kleespies, Phillip M. Life and Death Decisions: Psychological and Ethi-
cal Considerations in End-of-Life Care. Washington, DC: American Psychologi-
cal Association, 2004.
870. Kung, Hans, and Walter Jens. Dying with Dignity: A Plea for Personal
Responsibility. New York: Continuum, 1995. Includes contributions by Dietrich
Niethammer and Albin Eser. Translated by John Bowden from the original Ger-
man edition published by R. Piper GmbH & Co., Munich, in 1995. First British
edition published by SCM Press, London, in 1995.
Controversial German theologian Kung argues that “there should be no com-
pulsion to die but there should be no compulsion to live either.” A Christian who
120 Chapter 13

advocates giving the dying the responsibility to make a conscientious decision

about the manner and time of their death, Kung discusses the experience of dying,
definitions of death, attitudes toward dying, and mercy killing. In separate sec-
tions, Jens offers several case studies on the dignity and indignity of dying.
871. Lamb, David. Death, Brain Death, and Ethics. Albany: State University of
New York Press, 1985. Published by Taylor & Francis in 1988.
872. Landes, Alison, and Cornelia Blair. Death and Dying: Who Decides?
Wylie, TX: Information Plus, 1996. Published with coauthors Cornelia Blair and
Carol D. Foster in 1992, and with Allison Landes and Carol D. Foster in 1994.
873. Lasagna, Louis. Life, Death, and the Doctor. New York: Knopf, 1968.
With chapters titled as questions, Lasagna explores the difficult issues of
physician preparedness, outdated medical school teaching, life-or-death decision
making, law as the possible enemy of patients, and preparing for death. Other
topics unrelated to death are also covered.
874. Loewy, Erich H., and Roberta Springer Loewy. The Ethics of Terminal
Care: Orchestrating the End of Life. New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum
Press, 2000.
875. Martin, J. Paul. Symposium: Death as an Ethical Issue for the Professions.
New York: Columbia University, 1975.
876. Mills, Liston O. Perspectives on Death. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press,
1969.
Mills offers perspectives on death from the Old Testament and New Testament
as well as from church interpretation. He also includes sections on ethical issues
surrounding the dying and those grieving, the psychology of death, and death as
a theme in contemporary literature.
877. Misbin, Robert I. Euthanasia: The Good of the Patient, the Good of Soci-
ety. Frederick, MD: University Publishing Group, 1992.
878. Morgan, John D. An Easeful Death?: Perspectives on Death, Dying, and
Euthanasia. Sydney, Australia: Federation Press, 1996.
879. Nevins, M. A Bioethical Perspective on Death and Dying. Rockville, MD:
Information Planning Associates, 1977.
880. Oden, Thomas C. Should Treatment Be Terminated? New York: Harper
& Row, 1976.
In this 93-page book, Oden explores the inherent conflict between the “sanctity
of life” and the “easy death.” The introduction focuses on the dilemma of life
support, and the remaining text addresses the questions of “Who decides?” and
“By what guidelines?” The book closes with an essay on the respect for life and
acceptance of death. Oden explores matters of bodily self-determination; heroic
 Ethical Issues 121

treatment; benevolent crisis acquiescence; absolute discontinuance; and resource

availability, both physical and financial. Preface by Drew Forest.
881. Petrinovich, Lewis. Living and Dying Well. New York: Plenum Press,
1996. Part of the Critical Issues in Social Justice series, Melvin J. Lerner and
Riel Vermunt, editors. Published in association with the International Center for
Social Justice Research, Department of Psychology, Washington University, St.
Louis, MO.
Petrinovich argues that developments in biotechnology and the medical sci-
ences require a reevaluation of moral issues regarding life and death. He believes
the new evaluation should be multidisciplinary and puts each of the issues in the
context of social, psychological, and biological realities. Petrinovich examines
genetic screening; the Human Genome Project; death and the social contract;
organ transplantation; suicide; euthanasia; capital punishment; end-of-life policy
issues; medical ethics and hospital review boards; general health care policy is-
sues, including rationing; and responsibilities of physicians. Includes references
and name and subject indexes.
882. Pojman, Louis P. Life and Death: Grappling with the Moral Dilemmas of
Our Time. Boston: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 1992.
883. Poor, Belinda, and Gail Poirrier. End of Life Issues. Boston: Jones and
Bartlett Publishers, 2001.
884. Ramsey, P. Ethics at the Edges of Life: Medical and Legal Intersections.
New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1978.
885. Risley, Robert L. Death with Dignity: A New Law Permitting Physician
Aid-in-Dying. Eugene, OR: Hemlock Society, 1989.
886. Roberts, Harry. Euthanasia and Other Aspects of Life and Death. London:
Constable & Co., Ltd., 1936.
887. Scherer, Jennifer M., and Rita James Simon. Euthanasia and the Right to
Die: A Comparative View. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 1999.
888. Schneider, Carl. Law at the End of Life: The Supreme Court and Assisted
Suicide. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 2000.
889. Schuklenk, Udo. Access to Experimental Drugs in Terminal Illness: Ethi-
cal Issues. New York: Pharmaceutical Products Press, 1998. Also published by
Haworth, Binghamton, NY, in 1998.
890. Shannon, Thomas A. Death and Dying: A Reader. Lanham, MD: Rowman
& Littlefield, 2004.
Shannon presents a collection of reprinted articles that focus on ethical issues
around death and dying. The articles explore palliative care, physician-assisted
suicide, tube feeding in the context of advance progressive dementia, euthanasia,
122 Chapter 13

Catholic teachings on prolonging life, consciousness, and the definition of death.

Includes brief information about the contributors and an index.
891. Shavelson, Lonny. A Chosen Death: The Dying Confront Assisted Suicide.
New York: Simon & Schuster, 1995.
892. Sherlock, Richard, and C. Mary Dingus. Families and the Gravely Ill:
Roles, Rules, and Rights. New York: Greenwood Press, 1988. Part of the Contri-
butions in Medical Studies series, number 23.
Using the well-known story of Karen Ann Quinlan as an introduction, the au-
thors begin an exploration of the ethics of care for the terminally or gravely ill and
the implications for families. Psychosocial issues, communication with the dying,
family decision making, legal issues, and public policy are all covered. Includes
references with each chapter, a bibliography, an index, and an excellent appendix
that offers sections of various state statutes dealing with death issues.
893. Slater, E., Anthony G. M. Flew, and A. B. Downing. Death with Dignity:
A Reply to “On Dying Well.” London: Voluntary Euthanasia, 1976.
894. Snyder, Carrie. Death and Dying: Who Decides? Detroit: Gale Group,
2001. Published with author Barbara Wexler in 2003.
895. Steinberg, Maurice D., and Stuart J. Youngner. End-of-Life Decisions: A
Psychosocial Perspective. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1998.
In ten articles, contributors address the challenging questions and issues that
arise for health care professionals involved in end-of-life care. Articles discuss
competence to refuse life-sustaining treatment, depression in the context of re-
fusal of life-sustaining treatment, family dynamics in decisions to withhold or
withdraw treatment, obstacles to doctor–patient communication, consultation for
end-of-life treatment decisions for children, issues with AIDS, evaluating patient
requests for euthanasia and assisted suicide in terminal illness, and legal and ethi-
cal issues. Foreword by Paul S. Appelbaum.
896. Thielicke, Helmut. The Doctor as Judge of Who Shall Live and Who Shall
Die. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1976.
897. Thomasma, Davis C., and Thomasine Kimbrough Kushner. Birth to
Death: Science and Bioethics. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996.
898. Thompson, Ian, ed. Dilemmas of Dying: A Study in the Ethics of Terminal
Care. Edinburgh, UK: Edinburgh University Press, 1979.
899. Uhlmann, Michael M. Last Rights?: Assisted Suicide and Euthanasia De-
bated. Washington, DC: Ethics and Public Policy Center, 1998. Also published
by William B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., Grand Rapids, MI.
900. United States Senate. Death with Dignity: An Inquiry into Related Public
Issues. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1972.
 Ethical Issues 123

901. Vaux, Kenneth L. Will to Live—Will to Die: Ethics and the Search for a
Good Death. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg, 1978.
902. Veatch, Robert M. Death, Dying, and the Biological Revolution: Our Last
Quest for Responsibility. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1976. Revised
edition published in 1989.
Veatch’s scholarly book explores issues of morality and ethics surround-
ing death and dying. He muses on whether death is moral in a technological
age, the ethics of choosing not to prolong dying, and the notion of a “good
death.” He suggests possible definitions of death and offers insights into the
matters of stopping versus not starting treatments, direct versus indirect kill-
ing, and allowing to live versus allowing to die. He also explores decisions to
refuse treatment, surrogates in decision making, public policy issues of dying
morally, and organ donation. Includes a bibliography and list of legal cases
pertinent to the book accompanied by a description of what issue each case
addresses.
904. Walton, Douglas N. Brain Death: Ethical Considerations. West Lafayette,
IN: Purdue University Press, 1980.
905. Weir, Robert F., ed. Ethical Issues in Death and Dying. New York: Co-
lumbia University Press, 1977. Second edition published in 1986.
Weir, a philosophy professor at Oklahoma State University, presents thirty-six
articles on various ethical issues surrounding death and dying. They are divided
into sections on truth telling with the terminally ill patient, problems of defining
death and determining when death has occurred, selective nontreatment of handi-
capped newborns, physicians’ responsibilities to critically ill and dying patients,
euthanasia, and suicide. Contributors include Robert M. Veatch, M. Pabst Battin,
and Edwin S. Shneidman.
906. ———, ed. Physician-Assisted Suicide. Bloomington: Indiana University
Press, 1997.
907. Williams, Mary E. Do the Terminally Ill Have a Right to Die? San Diego,
CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001.
908. ———. Should Physicians Be Permitted to Hasten the Deaths of Termi-
nally Ill Patients? San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001.
909. Williams, Robert H., ed. To Live and to Die: When, Why, and How. New
York: Springer-Verlag, 1973.
Williams, a former faculty member at Harvard Medical School, and numerous
well-published contributors explore compelling questions surrounding death and
other topics. They discuss ethics of organ donation and transplantation and its
implications on identity, care of dying patients, major goals in promoting life or
death, and lessons from the dying.
124 Chapter 13

910. Yount, Lisa. Physician-Assisted Suicide and Euthanasia. New York: Facts
on File, 2000.
911. Zucker, Marjorie B. The Right to Die Debate: A Documentary History.
Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1999.
 14
Fear of Death

912. Arnold, Johann Christoph. Be Not Afraid: Overcoming the Fear of Death.
Maryknoll, NY: Orbis Books, 2003.
Arnold, a pastoral counselor, tells the stories of people who have courageously
greeted death without fear. He uses several anecdotes from Tolstoy, Dickens,
and others to show how life can be lived without the anxieties and fears associ-
ated with death and dying. He suggests that death can be met with confidence.
The book is written from a Christian perspective and includes numerous biblical
references.
913. Becker, Ernest. The Denial of Death. New York: Free Press, 1973. Pub-
lished by Peter Smith in 1998.
With the premise that man’s innate fear of death is a principal source of his
activity throughout life, Becker presents a thorough and original examination of
the fear and frequent denial of death. He investigates and illustrates how humans
attempt to transcend death through religion, narcissism, heroism, charisma, and
neurosis. Becker won the Pulitzer Prize for this book in 1974 and died the same
year. Includes extensive references and an index.
914. Berger, Arthur S., and Joyce Berger. Fear of the Unknown: Enlightened
Aid-in-Dying. Westport, CT: Praeger, 1995.
915. Bermann, Eric. Scapegoat: The Impact of Death-Fear on an American
Family. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1973. Also cited as being
published by Greenhaven Press in 1974.
In this scholarly analysis of death fear and its effects, Bermann explores
themes of death-terror, fear as an organizing theme, defenses against “know-
ing” and “feeling,” thanatophobic countermeasures, cognitive dysfunction as a
family style, and fate and dissipation of anger. A concluding chapter includes a

125
126 Chapter 14

discussion of clinical research and death. Includes a selected bibliography and

an index.
916. Bondeson, Jan. Buried Alive: The Terrifying History of Our Most Primal
Fear. New York: W. W. Norton, 2001.
The author offers a serious examination of a notable element in the fear of
death. Thorough and engaging discussions of this fear are presented in chapters
on both real-life and literary burials of the living. Includes extensive references
and an index. Bondeson is a professor at the University of Wales College of
Medicine and also holds a doctorate in experimental medicine.
917. Carrington, Hereward. Death Deferred: How to Live Long and Happily,
Defer Death, and Lose All Fear of It. Whitefish, MT: Kessinger Publishing,
1997.
918. Feldman, Marvin J., Paul J. Handal, and Hyman S. Barahal. Fears Related
to Death and Suicide. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1974.
919. Frazer, Sir James George. The Fear of the Dead in Primitive Religion.
New York: Arno Press, 1976. Originally published in three volumes in 1933,
1934, and 1936. Also published in a single volume by Biblo and Tannen, New
York, in 1966.
In this book an anthropologist examines how the dead are feared in many
cultures through William Wyse Foundation Lectures given at Trinity College in
Cambridge, United Kingdom, from 1932–33.
920. Gordon, David Cole. Overcoming the Fear of Death. New York: Macmil-
lan, 1970.
921. Johns, Fran Moreland. Dying Unafraid. San Francisco, CA: Synergistic
Press, 1999.
A journalist and hospice volunteer, Johns presents touching and inspiring
stories of people who have died without fear. In doing so, she addresses issues
of self-deliverance, physician-hastened death, and individual rights in the face of
death. One of her stories is about Jessica Mitford, author of The American Way
of Death.
922. Langner, Thomas S. Choices for Living: Coping with Fear of Dying. New
York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Press, 2002. Part of the PATH in Psychology
series.
Langner addresses attitudes toward death and dying, causes of the fear of dy-
ing, counterphobic behaviors, mementos and monuments, denial of death, and
suicide.
923. Ligouri, Alphonsus St. A. How to Face Death without Fear. Ligouri, MO:
Ligouri Press, 1976.
 Fear of Death 127

924. McCarthy, J. Fearful Living: The Fear of Death. New York: Halsted
Press, 1979.
925. Noys, Benjamin. The Culture of Death. New York: Berg, 2005.
Pointing out Western culture’s obsession with death, Noys examines death in
the new millennium with fears of terrorism and other sudden threats. He notes
that societies today live in an “age of panic” and discusses the politicization of
death, bioethics, and the meaning of death. Includes a bibliography, filmography,
and list of Internet sites.
926. Williams, Tom A. Dreads and Besetting Fears. Boston: Little, Brown,
1923.
927. Worden, J. William, and W. Proctor. PDA (Personal Death Awareness):
Breaking Free of Fear to Live a Better Life Now. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall, 1976.
 15
General Works

928. Agee, James. A Death in the Family. New York: Bantam, 1985. Originally
published in 1957.
929. Aiken, Lewis R. Dying, Death, and Bereavement. 4th ed. Mahwah, NJ:
Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2001. Published by Allyn & Bacon, Boston, in
1985 and 1991.
This textbook provides general information on mortality and thanatology and
explores causes and circumstances of death, cultural beliefs and customs, human
development and death, and dying and surviving. Some treatment of aging, ac-
cidental death, suicide and homicide, legal issues, fears of death, and hospice are
also included. Appendixes include a list of organizations concerned with death
and dying; a short bibliography of books for children and adolescents on death
and dying; and instruments for assessing fears, anxiety, and attitudes toward
death. The chapter on children and death contains a verbatim conversation be-
tween a father and his ten-year-old daughter from Robert Jay Lifton’s The Broken
Connection: On Death and the Continuity of Life and a brief section on children’s
games and sayings about death. An instructor’s manual for this text is available
from the publisher.
930. Alden, Henry M. A Study of Death. St. Clair Shores, MI: Scholarly Press,
1976.
931. Backer, Barbara A., Natalie Hannon, and Noreen A. Russell. Death and
Dying: Individuals and Institutions. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1982.
Attempting to provide a framework for organizing disparate research on thana-
tology, the authors offer a proposed integration of the thanatological literature.
As noted in the preface, they “identify patterns and responses to death and dy-
ing in American society; discuss problems related to the termination of life; and

128
 General Works 129

examine the structure and processes of interaction among the terminally ill, their
families, and helping professionals.” Emphasizing the caring aspects of health
care for the dying rather than curing aspects, the authors offer their underlying
principle of insisting that caregivers be “exposed to a humanistic approach to
counterbalance the industrialization of health care in the United States.” Topics
covered include death attitudes, effects of forbidden death, perceptions of death,
dying as a process, fear of death and dying, stigma, the evolution of hospital
care, caregivers’ responses to dying patients, communication about death, pain
control, children’s concepts of death, parental loss, infant death, a definition of
death, redefining death, the right to refuse treatment, euthanasia, suicide, funeral
functions and history, pathological grief reactions, therapeutic intervention with
the bereaved, cross-cultural perspectives, grief reactions, the milieu of death, the
death movement, and society’s response to death and dying. Sections include
summaries, learning exercises, audiovisual material lists, and references. An ap-
pendix provides addresses of audiovisual distributors. Includes an index.
932. Bertman, Sandra L. Facing Death: Images, Insights, and Interventions: A
Handbook for Educators, Healthcare Professionals, and Counselors. New York:
Hemisphere Publishing, 1991. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and
Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
Acknowledging the significant achievements of thanatological research during
the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s, Bertman points out that much of the contribution
to the knowledge base has been in the biological and behavioral sciences. She
attempts to remedy this with explorations into the arts and humanities. Herman
Feifel notes in his foreword that Bertman “underscores how the arts not only can
provide a vital adjunct in teaching and counseling for the thanatologist but also
how they can serve as an avenue for self-discovery.” According to Bertman, “The
arts cannot stay the flights of the birds of sorrow, but they can help us to better
appreciate and endure them.” Her text discusses the use of the arts to stimulate
dialogue, reveal concerns, enable grieving, and provide consolation. All in the
context of arts and humanities, she addresses views of mortality and immortality,
existential aloneness, the art of dying, tolerance for ambivalence, and responses
to death images among various audiences. A separate chapter focuses on guide-
lines for using the arts in this context and new approaches to counseling. Ap-
pendixes feature a nine-question, multiple-choice death attitudes questionnaire;
a presentation evaluation form for “Facing Death: A Most Memorable Image”;
and a first-year course syllabus for “Medical Humanities: On Dissection, Dying
and Death.” Includes numerous images and illustrations as well as a bibliography.
Bertman directs the program in medical humanities at the University of Massa-
chusetts Medical Center in Worcester.
933. Blackwell, Roger D. Living with Death. Old Tappan, NJ: Revell, 1978.
934. Bland, Olivia. The Royal Way of Death. London: Constable, 1986.
130 Chapter 15

935. Bleckman, Isaac A., and Kurt J. Guggenheimer. Death and Dying, A to Z:
A Loose-Leaf Encyclopedic Handbook on Death and Dying and Related Subjects.
Queens Village, NY: Croner Publications, 1980.
Bleckman and Guggenheimer offer an extensive directory on all things death-
related, including U.S. and foreign hospices, suicide prevention centers and
agencies, universities and national organizations offering gerontology studies,
and V.A. national cemeteries. The book also includes information on Medicare
reimbursement for hospice care, right-to-die issues and laws by state, narrative on
religion and death, taxes, the philosophy of death, body donation, and the funeral
industry. An extensive bibliography is also included.
936. Bloch, Maurice, and Jonathan Parry, eds. Death and the Regeneration of
Life. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1982.
937. Bloom, Shalom. Death, Dying, and Terminal Illness. Lexington, MA:
Xerox College Publishing, 1973.
938. Boros, Ladislaus. Mystery of Death. New York: Seabury Press, 1973.
939. Bradley, Buff. Endings: A Book about Death. Reading, MA: Addison-
Wesley, 1979.
940. Bregman, Lucy, and Sara Thiermann. First Person Mortal: Personal Nar-
ratives of Dying, Death, and Grief. New York: Paragon House, 1995.
941. Brouardel, Paul, and F. Lucas Benham. Death and Sudden Death. New
York: William Wood, 1902. A translation of Brouardel’s La mort et la mort
subite.
942. Bryant, Clifton D., ed. Handbook of Death and Dying. Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage Publications, 2003.
943. Bugen, Larry A., ed. Death and Dying: Theory, Research, and Practice.
Dubuque, IA: William C. Brown Company, 1979.
944. Bultmann, Rudolph. Life and Death. New York: Fernhill, 1965.
945. Burland, C. A. Myths of Life and Death. New York: Crown Publishers,
1974.
946. Carey, Gabrielle, and Rosemary Lee Sorensen. The Penguin Book of
Death. New York: Penguin Books, 1996.
947. Carr, Thomas K. Introducing Death and Dying: Readings and Exercises.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 2005.
948. Cassell, Dana K., Robert C. Salinas, and Peter S. Winn. The Encyclopedia
of Death and Dying. New York: Facts on File, 2005.
 General Works 131

From abandonment of the dying to wrongful death, the authors present an ex-
tensive encyclopedic treatment of death and dying for all audiences. In addition
to a lengthy bibliography and an index, the volume contains thirteen appendixes.
They include an advance care plan document from Project GRACE (Guidelines
for Resuscitation and Care at End-of-Life); odds on death due to injury from the
National Safety Council (includes numbers of deaths, one-year odds, and lifetime
odds); death and mortality statistics from the Centers for Disease Control; infor-
mation on end-of-life care at home from the National Cancer Institute; text on
where to write for death certificates in the United States, including cost and other
pertinent information; U.S. war death statistics; a checklist for end-of-life plan-
ning; information on what to know for funeral preplanning; a list of organization
and help groups; a listing of death care industry and consumer organizations; a
compilation of websites offering resources and help; and a section of museums
of funeral customs and history. The introduction includes a brief cultural history
of death and dying and information about death and funeral practices in modern
times. A special section on Native American burial customs is also included.
949. Chaney, Patricia S., ed. Dealing with Death and Dying. Horsham, PA:
Intermed Communications, 1980. Chaney is also author of Dealing with Death
and Dying—Nursing Skillbook, published by Intermed in 1976.
950. Chidester, David. Patterns of Transcendence: Religion, Death, and Dying.
Belmont, CA: Wadsworth Publishing Group, 1990.
951. Choron, Jacques. Death and Modern Man. New York: Collier Books,
1971. Originally published as Modern Man and Mortality by Macmillan, New
York, in 1964.
952. ———. Suicide. New York: Scribner, 1972.
953. Clark, David. The Sociology of Death: Theory, Culture, Practice. Oxford,
UK; Cambridge, MA: Blackwell Publishers/Sociological Review, 1993.
954. Clemens, Christopher, and Mark Smith. Death: Grim Realities and Comic
Relief. New York: Delacorte Press, 1982.
955. Cope, Gilbert, ed. Dying, Death, and Disposal. London: Society for the
Promotion of Christian Knowledge, 1970.
956. Corless, Inge B., and Barbara B. Germino. A Challenge for Living: Dying,
Death, and Bereavement. Boston: Jones and Bartlett, 1995. Also published by
Springer as Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living in 2003.
957. ———. Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living. New
York: Springer, 2003. Published by Jones and Bartlett, Boston, in 1995, as A
Challenge for Living: Dying, Death, and Bereavement.
132 Chapter 15

958. ———. Dying, Death, and Bereavement: Theoretical Perspectives and

Other Ways of Knowing. Boston: Jones and Bartlett, 1994.
959. Corr, Charles A., and John D. Morgan. Statements on Death, Dying, and
Bereavement. London, Ontario: International Work Group on Death, Dying, and
Bereavement through King’s College, 1994.
960. Corr, Charles A., Clyde M. Nabe, and Donna M. Corr. Death and Dying,
Life and Living. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole, 1994. The fifth edition was
published in 2005 by Wadsworth Publishing Co., Belmont, CA.
961. Cox, Gerry R., and Timothy B. Gongaware. Sociology of Death and Dy-
ing: A Teaching Resource. Washington, DC: American Sociological Association,
2004.
962. D’Arcy, Martin Cyril, and Basil Gurrin. Death and Life. London: Long-
mans, Green, and Company, 1942.
963. Dastre, Albert. Life and Death. London: Walter Scott Publishing Com-
pany, 1911. Translated by W. I. Greenstreet.
964. de Beauvoir, Simone. A Very Easy Death. Burnsville, NC: Celo Press,
1965. Also published by Penguin Books, Harmondsworth, UK, in 1969, and
Warner Paperback Library, New York, in 1973.
965. de Vries, Brian, ed. End of Life Issues: Interdisciplinary and Multidimen-
sional Perspectives. New York: Springer, 1999. Part of the Springer Series on
Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor.
The author, associate professor of gerontology at San Francisco State Uni-
versity, has assembled eighteen articles divided into four parts: “Individual/
Personal Issues,” “Interpersonal/Microsystem Issues,” “Social/Exosystem
Issues,” and “Cultural and Institutional/Macrosystem Issues.” Article topics
include patient preferences for place of death, age cohort differences in per-
ceptions of funerals, grief and the self-concept, facilitating perceived control
in the dying process, palliative counseling, the impacts of bereavement on
families, perceptions of recovery from bereavement, grandparent participation
in family bereavement, animals as neglected members of the family in studies
of death and dying, communication about death, financial considerations for
families facing a death, widowhood, physician-assisted suicide, the sociocul-
tural meaning of dying, death education in churches and temples, and cemeter-
ies in cyberspace.
966. DeSpelder, Lynne Ann, and Albert Lee Strickland. The Last Dance: En-
countering Death and Dying. 3rd ed. Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield Publishing Co.,
1987. Sixth edition published by McGraw-Hill Higher Education in 2001.
Intended for undergraduate audiences, this college textbook provides an over-
view of thanatology. As the study of death is interdisciplinary, so is this textbook,
 General Works 133

covering the health professions, social sciences, and humanities. Each chapter
offers a reading list. Photographs, illustrations, graphs, quotes, and anecdotes
accompany the text.
967. ———. The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying. Mountain View,
CA: Mayfield Publishing Co., 1995.
968. Dickenson, Donna L., Malcolm Lewis Johnson, and Jeanne Samson Katz.
Death, Dying, and Bereavement. 2nd ed. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications,
in association with the Open University, 2000. Originally published in 1993.
In this revised and updated version of the popular first edition, the editors
present a collection of articles covering a broad spectrum of issues related to
death, dying, and bereavement. The articles are divided into the sections “Life
and Death,” “Caring for Dying People,” “Dilemmas and Decisions at the End
of Life,” and “Bereavement: Private Grief, Collective Responsibility.” A great
diversity of writings, the book includes research, valuable information, stories,
personal reflections, and poems. Topics covered include the concept of the good
death, approaches to death in Hindu and Sikh communities, palliative care, living
with muscular sclerosis, complementary medicine for the dying, communicating
with dying children, dying trajectories, Jewish perspectives on death, intimacy
and terminal care, do not resuscitate decisions, right-to-die issues, resource al-
location and palliative care, cross-cultural perspectives on bereavement, single
parents losing only children, gay and lesbian bereavement, and epitaphs. Refer-
ences are included for each article.
969. Doka, Kenneth J., and John D. Morgan. Death and Spirituality. Ami-
tyville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1993. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning
Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
970. Donne, John. Death and Dying. New York: Arno Press, 1977.
971. Donnelly, John. Language, Metaphysics, and Death. New York: Fordham
University Press, 1978. Reprinted in 1994.
972. Dublin, Louis I. Factbook on Man from Birth to Death. New York: Mac-
millan, 1965.
973. Ducasse, Curt John. Nature, Mind, and Death. La Salle, IL: Open Court
Publishing, 1951.
974. Durkheim, Emile. Suicide. New York: Free Press, 1966. Translated by
John A. Spaulding and George Simpson.
975. Eckert, William G., ed. Introduction to Forensic Sciences. 2nd ed. Boca
Raton, FL: CRC Press, 1997.
976. ———. On Death. Wichita, KS: International Reference Organization in
Forensic Medicine, 1967.
134 Chapter 15

In this book, Eckert assembles numerous articles on the forensic sciences. Top-
ics include forensic psychiatry, the role of the forensic laboratory, pathology and
toxicology, bloodstain pattern interpretation, legal issues, and scientific evidence
in court.
977. Elliot, Gil. Twentieth Century Book of the Dead. New York: Scribner,
1972.
978. Enright, D. J. The Oxford Book of Death. New York: Oxford University
Press, 2002.
Enright presents a compilation of quotes, writings, poems, and essays about
death divided by subject to include the hour of death, suicide, views and attitudes,
mourning, graveyards and funerals, resurrections and immortalities, hereafters,
revenants, war, plague, persecution, love and death, children and death, epitaphs,
requiems, and last words.
979. Evans, W. E. D. The Chemistry of Death. Springfield, IL: Charles C.
Thomas, 1963.
980. Evans-Wentz, W. E., ed. The Tibetan Book of the Dead. New York: Ox-
ford University Press, 1927.
981. Ezell, G., D. J. Anspaugh, and J. Oaks. Death and Dying: From a Health
and Sociological Perspective. Scottsdale, AZ: Gorsuch Scarisbrick, 1987.
982. Farrell, James J. Inventing the American Way of Death, 1830–1920. Phila-
delphia: Temple University Press, 1980. Part of the American Civilization series,
Allen F. Davis, editor.
Treating death as a cultural event, Farrell illustrates how societies and civili-
zations reveal themselves in their attitudes and approaches to death, dying, and
bereavement. Farrell looks at the cosmological contexts of death, scientific natu-
ralism, the development of the modern cemetery, modernization of the funeral
service, and the meaning and management of death in an Illinois county. Includes
notes and an index.
983. Flew, Anthony, ed. Body, Mind, and Death. New York: Macmillan,
1964.
984. Flumiani, Carlo M. Life and Death. Albuquerque, NM: American Classi-
cal College Press, 1972.
985. Forbes, John Douglas. Death Warmed Over. Elizabeth, NJ: Pageant Press
International/Poseidon Press, 1975.
986. Forrai, Maria S., and Rebecca Anders. A Look at Death. Minneapolis,
MN: Lerner Publications, 1977. Part of the Lerner Awareness Series.
Forrai’s black-and-white photographs help convey the concept of death, im-
portance of grief, and customs of mourning followed by young people. Includes
 General Works 135

images of ill seniors, cemeteries, grave markers, funeral ceremonies, caskets,

and people grieving. The text is written by Anders. Biographical information is
provided on Forrai. Foreword by Robert C. Slater, professor and director in the
Department of Mortuary Science at the University of Minnesota.
987. Fruehling, James A., ed. Sourcebook on Death and Dying. Chicago: Mar-
quis Professional Publications, 1982.
This book is a compilation of articles along with a directory of associations,
self-help groups, hospices, and memorial societies.
988. Fulton, Gere B., and E. K. Metress. Perspectives on Death and Dying.
Boston: Jones and Bartlett, 1995.
This is a general guide on the philosophical, psychological, sociological, an-
thropological, legal, medical, and ethical aspects of dying.
989. Fulton, Robert, ed. Death and Dying: Challenge and Change. Rev. ed. San
Francisco, CA: Boyd & Fraser, 1981. Originally published by Addison-Wesley,
Reading, PA, in 1978. Revised edition also cited as being published by Heinle &
Heinle, San Francisco, CA, in 1981.
990. ———. Death and Identity. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1965. Second
revised edition published with Robert Bendiksen by Robert J. Brady, Bowie, MD,
in 1976. Also published with Robert Bendiksen by Charles Press, Philadelphia,
in 1994.
A classic text in thanatology, Fulton’s book explores death and dying in twenty-
seven articles divided into sections on theoretical discussions of death; attitudes
and responses to death; grief and mourning; and ceremony, social organization,
and society. Topics include the sociology of death, attitudes toward death and
dying, responses to the concept of death in children and early adolescents, reli-
gious conviction and fear of death, acute grief, bereavement and mental health,
mourning processes, childhood bereavement, psychosocial aspects of terminal
care, social uses of funeral rites, widowhood, and a sociological analysis of fu-
neral expenditures. Contributors include David Sudnow, Robert Bendiksen, Felix
Berardo, Anselm L. Strauss, Herman Feifel, Barney G. Glaser, Robert J. Lifton,
Avery D. Weisman, and Vanderlyn Pine. Includes a bibliography arranged by
subject, brief information about the contributors, and an index.
991. Garrison, Webb. Strange Facts about Death. Nashville, TN: Abingdon
Press, 1978.
992. Gattegno, Caleb. On Death: An Essay. New York: Educational Solutions,
1978. Restricted printing.
This book is sixty-six pages in length.
993. Gilbert, Sandra M. Death’s Door: Modern Dying and the Ways We
Grieve. New York: W. W. Norton, 2006.
136 Chapter 15

Gilbert provides a 580-page examination of society’s relationship with death

through literature, history, poetry, and everyday societal practices. She explores
views toward death and how those views may have changed as a result of war and
terrorism. Other topics discussed include the psychology of grief, All Soul’s Day,
widowhood, caring for the dead, communicating with the dead, changes in dying
and mourning in the twentieth century, the effects of technology on dying, the
detachment of physicians, and collective society mourning. Includes an extensive
28-page bibliography.
994. Gorostiza, Jose. Death without End. Austin: University of Texas Press,
1969.
995. Greenstock, David L. Death: The Glorious Adventure. Westminster, MD:
Newman Press, 1956.
996. Grollman, Earl A. Concerning Death: A Practical Guide for the Living.
Boston: Beacon Press, 1974.
997. ———. Suicide: Prevention, Intervention, Postvention. Boston: Beacon
Press, 1971.
998. Haley, James. Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints. San Diego: Thom-
son Gale, 2003.
999. Hamner, James E., and Barbara J. Sax Jacobs, eds. Life and Death Issues.
Memphis: University of Tennessee, 1986. Based on presentations at the Sixth
Annual Frank M. Norfleet Forum for the Advancement of Health, convened No-
vember 4–5, 1985, at the Frank S. Groner Education Center of Baptist Memorial
Hospital in Memphis, TN.
1000. Hardt, Dale V. Death: The Final Frontier. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall, 1979. Also cited as being published by Simon & Schuster in 1979.
1001. Harrison, Robert Pogue. The Dominion of the Dead. Chicago: University
of Chicago Press, 2003.
An original exploration into the world of death, this book addresses the very
close relationship between the living and the dead. Harrison ponders why the
dead are buried, how the living maintain relationships with the dead, and why this
maintain of relationships occurs. The publisher describes the book as a “profound
meditation of how the thought of death shapes the communion of the living.”
Includes an extensive bibliography of works cited.
1002. Hawke, Sharryl. Death and Dying: A Living Study. Washington, DC:
U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, National Institute of Educa-
tion, 1974.
1003. Heilman, Samuel C., ed. Death, Bereavement, and Mourning. New
Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Publishers, 2005.
 General Works 137

This book is a collection of essays on death and dying in the context of a post–
9/11 society. Family grief, traumatic grief, terrorism, and collective reintegration
are major themes. A special essay is incorporated titled “The 9/11 Firehouse
Project.” Includes biographical information on the fourteen contributors.
1004. Hendin, David. Death as a Fact of Life. New York: W. W. Norton,
1973.
1005. Hickman, Tom. Death: A User’s Guide. New York: Delta/Bantam Dell,
2003. Ebury Press edition published in 2002.
Hickman puts forth a bizarre collection of stories, factoids, explanations, an-
ecdotes, and historical references about death. Amidst the humor and unusual
presentation, he offers some interesting facts and narratives on death attitudes,
cultural variations on death and dying, and views toward burial practices. In-
cludes a useful index.
1006. Hockey, Jennifer Lorna. Experiences of Death: An Anthropological Ac-
count. Edinburgh, Scotland: Edinburgh University Press, 1990. Distributed in
North America by Columbia University Press, New York.
1007. Houghton, Peter. On Death, Dying, and Not Dying. Philadelphia: Jessica
Kingsley Publishers, 2001.
1008. Howarth, Glennys, and Oliver Leaman. Encyclopedia of Death and Dy-
ing. London: Routledge, 2001.
1009. Hughes, Richard. The Radiant Shock of Death. New York: P. Lang,
1995.
1010. Jackson, Charles O. Passing: The Vision of Death in America. Westport,
CT: Greenwood Press, 1977.
1011. Jones, Constance. R.I.P.: The Complete Book of Death and Dying. New
York: HarperCollins Publishers, 1997.
1012. Jones, William Tudor. Metaphysics of Life and Death. New York:
George H. Doran, 1924.
1013. Kalish, Richard A., ed. Death, Dying, Transcending. Farmingdale, NY:
Baywood Publishing, 1979. Part of the Perspectives on Death and Dying series,
volume 3. Series also cited as Perspectives on Death in Human Experience.
Through fifteen articles from various contributors, Kalish gives a survey of
perspectives on dying and the transcendence of death. Articles examine meanings
of death, attitudes toward death, and bereavement. Topics include the onset of the
dying process, clinical research and the stages of dying, slow death, a psychoso-
cial analysis of cancer deaths, differences in bereavement due to type of death,
social organization and death, and attitudes toward the right to die among older
people. The final section features two odd essays. One discusses the experience
138 Chapter 15

of dying from falls using a study undertaken by Zurich geology professor Albert
Heim, who collected the subjective observations of survivors of falls in the Alps.
Another titled “The Coffin” muses on dying, being placed in a coffin after having
clothes removed, and then transcending back to a birth state.
1014. ———. Death, Grief, and Caring Relationships. Monterey, CA: Brooks/
Cole Publishing Co., 1981. Reprinted in 1985.
While this book is organized like a textbook, the author’s intent, as noted in
his preface, is to “write for people who want one book to give [them] the most
understanding of death, the process of dying, and grief.” Kalish discusses the
meaning of death, definitions of death, near-death experiences, attitudes toward
death, awareness of death, religion and immortality, death anxiety, childhood
death and bereavement, causes of death, the dying trajectory, what “dying”
means, the stages of dying, denial, grieving processes, normal responses to death,
the concept of a broken heart, bereavement roles and rituals, funerals, caring
relationships in health care settings, mental health issues, and caring organiza-
tions. Includes references and name and subject indexes.
1015. Karim, Abul Bashr Mohammed Fazlul. Death: Medical, Spiritual, and
Social Care of the Dying. Amsterdam, Netherlands: VU University Press, 1998.
1016. Kastenbaum, Robert J. Between Life and Death. New York: Springer.
Part of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, volume 1, Robert J. Kasten-
baum, series editor.
1017. ———. The Care of the Aged, the Dying, and the Dead. New York: Arno
Press, 1977.
1018. ———, ed. Death and Dying. New York: Arno Press, 1977.
A total of 40 volumes.
1019. ———. Death and the Visual Arts: An Original Arno Press Anthology.
New York: Arno Press, 1977.
1020. ———. Death as a Speculative Theme in Religious, Scientific, and Social
Thought: An Original Anthology. New York: Arno Press, 1977.
1021. ———. Death, Society, and Human Experience. 4th ed. Columbus, OH:
Merrill, 1991. Second edition published by C. V. Mosby, St. Louis, in 1977.
Published by Allyn & Bacon, Boston, in 2000.
Kastenbaum, professor of psychology at the University of Massachusetts, Bos-
ton, provides an overview of issues surrounding death and dying and how society
deals with death. With a textbook approach, Kastenbaum discusses definitions of
death, the death system, death and disaster, issues in dying, care of the dying, and
bereavement. In his chapter on the positions between life and death, he presents
a thought-provoking list of images that illustrate the possibilities for the reader’s
own life-death trajectories. He also offers an overview of Kübler-Ross’s five
 General Works 139

stages as well as some of his criticisms of the stages approach. Includes a list of
suggested readings.
1022. ———. Macmillan Encyclopedia of Death and Dying. New York: Mac-
millan Reference USA, 2003.
1023. Kastenbaum, Robert J., and Ruth Aisenberg. The Psychology of Death.
New York: Springer, 1972. Also published by Duckworth, London, in 1974.
Concise edition by Springer, New York, in 1976. Second edition published by
Springer, New York, in 1992.
In this important classic of thanatological literature, Kastenbaum explores the
changing conceptions of death. He writes about death attitudes and perceptions,
constructing death, death anxiety, grief and mourning, and deathbed scenes. In-
cludes notes and an index. For the 1992 edition, Kastenbaum provides a preface
that provides a chronology of each edition with narrative about each one.
1024. Kastenbaum, Robert J., and Beatrice Kastenbaum, eds. Encyclopedia of
Death. Phoenix, AZ: Oryx Press, 1989. Published with the subtitle Myth, History,
Philosophy, Science, by Avon Books, New York, in 1993.
1025. Kauffman, Jeffrey. Awareness of Mortality. Amityville, NY: Baywood
Publishing, 1995. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan,
editor.
1026. Kearl, Michael C. Endings: A Sociology of Death and Dying. New York:
Oxford University Press, 1989.
An appropriate textbook for a college course on death, Kearl’s book explores
death’s revelations of life, meanings of death in cross-cultural and historical per-
spectives, cemeteries as cultural institutions, impacts of death on society, social
stratifications, death and religion, secular perspectives, death and work, politics
of death, death and the military, death as a theme in popular culture, the medical
system’s approach to death, and the social psychology of dying and surviving.
He also addresses AIDS and the effects of mass death on the social order, suicide
and homicide, funeral rituals and obituaries, death fears, desacralization of death,
abortion, genocide, capital punishment, war, terrorism, and death in cinema and
television. Includes quotes, photographs, charts, short news clips, extensive refer-
ences, and a thorough index.
1027. Keizer, Bert. Dancing with Mr. D: Notes on Life and Death. New York:
Nan A. Talese/Doubleday, 1997. Translated from Dutch by the author.
A bestseller in the Netherlands, Keizer’s book is an autobiographical journey
through his experiences with the terminally ill. A physician who has training in
philosophy, he offers insights into the placebo effect, physician attitudes toward
alternative medicine, the overestimated power of medicine, the strangeness of
the phrase “to die,” and euthanasia, a legal practice in the Netherlands. This is a
140 Chapter 15

notable work for medical students and others in the helping professions. Includes
several stories from Keizer’s experience in nursing homes.
1028. Kellehear, Allan. Eternity and Me: The Everlasting Things in Life and
Death. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2004. Part of the Death, Value, and
Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1029. Knox, Jean McBee. Death and Dying. New York: Chelsea House Pub-
lishers, 1989.
Intended for juvenile audiences, Knox gently discusses death from a historical
perspective, dying with dignity, and grief. Introduction by C. Everett Koop.
1030. Koop, C. Everett. The Right to Life, the Right to Die. Wheaton, IL: Tyn-
dale House Publishers, 1976.
1031. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Death: The Final Stage of Growth. New York:
Simon & Schuster, 1986. Several reprints. Originally published by Prentice-Hall,
Englewood Cliffs, NJ, in 1975.
Perhaps the scholar and author most associated with death and dying in both
popular and scholarly communities, Kübler-Ross offers this important collec-
tion of essays that explore a death as a personal experience, a common theme
in Kübler-Ross’s writings. Articles discuss the organizational context of dying,
the notion of choice in dying among Alaskan Indians, Jewish views of death
and mourning, death in Hindu and Buddhist contexts, terminal illness, grief and
growth through funerals, and dying as the last stage of growth. Includes several
personal essays by Kübler-Ross and other contributors. Also includes references
and an appeal to contribute to the CARE World Hunger Fund.
1032. ———. The Tunnel and the Light: Essential Insights on Living and Dying.
New York: Marlowe & Co., 1999.
1033. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, and David Kessler. Life Lessons: Two Experts
on Death and Dying Teach Us about the Mysteries of Life and Living. New York:
Scribner, 2000.
1034. Kushner, Harold S. When Bad Things Happen to Good People. New
York: Avon Books, 1981.
1035. Kutscher, Austin H., ed. Death and Bereavement. Springfield, IL:
Charles C. Thomas, 1969.
1036. Lack, Sylvia A., and Richard Lamerton, eds. The Hour of Death. Lon-
don: G. Chapman, 1974.
1037. Langue, John. Death Is a Noun: A View of the End of Life. Boston: Little,
Brown, 1972.
1038. ———. Vital Signs (The Way We Die in America). Boston: Little, Brown,
1974.
 General Works 141

1039. Lawton, M. Powell, ed. Focus on the End of Life: Scientific and Social
Issues. New York: Springer, 2001. Part of the Annual Review of Gerontology
and Geriatrics, volume 20.
Contributors offer articles on ethics and spirituality, medical decision making,
quality-of-life trajectories of elders in the end of life, measuring quality of medi-
cal care for dying persons, comfort in older adults at the end of life, friendship in
dying, healthy elders’ early decisions for end-of-life living and dying, hospice,
nursing homes, ethnography at the end of life, and clinical issues.
1040. Leming, Michael R., and George E. Dickinson. Understanding Death,
Dying, and Bereavement. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1985. Cited
as Understanding Dying, Death, and Bereavement in 2nd edition in 1990. Sixth
edition published by Wadsworth in 2006.
1041. Lepp, Ignace. Death and Its Mysteries. New York: Macmillan, 1968.
Translated by Bernard Murchland.
1042. Leviton, Daniel, ed. Horrendous Death, Health, and Well-Being. New
York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1991. Part of the Series in Death Education, Ag-
ing, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
Leviton presents a collection of articles covering a broad scope of horren-
dous death issues. Death types included are those resulting from war, homicide,
genocide, terrorism, assassination, political torture, environmental destruction,
unemployment and poverty as correlates of morbidity/mortality, malnutrition and
starvation, accidents, nuclear winter, and general violence. The contributors also
explore young adults’ responses to types of horrendous death, horrendous death
as a community health problem, the economics of terrorism, fear of death, and
the root of violence. Articles include references, resources pertinent to the topic,
sources for further study, and exercises appropriate for the classroom. Includes
an index.
1043. Lewis, C. S. A Grief Observed. London: Faber & Faber, 1961. Also pub-
lished by Seabury Press, New York.
1044. Lindholm, Dorothy. Death Is a Miracle. Norris, TN: Exposition, 1977.
Also cited as being published in Hicksville, NY.
1045. Lofland, Lyn H. Toward a Sociology of Death and Dying. Beverly Hills,
CA: Sage Publications, 1976. Part of Sage Contemporary Social Science Issues,
volume XXVIII.
1046. Maeterlinck, Maurice. Before the Great Silence. New York: Arno Press,
1976. Part of The Literature of Death and Dying series. Translated by B. Miall.
First edition published in 1937.
1047. ———. Death. New York: Arno Press, 1977. Originally published in
1912.
142 Chapter 15

1048. Marrone, Robert L. Death, Mourning, and Caring. Pacific Grove, CA:
Brooks/Cole Publishing Co., 1997.
Marrone’s textbook, appropriate for college audiences, begins with an
introduction to thanatology and a review of changing U.S. attitudes toward
death and dying. Several cross-cultural vignettes, statistics, charts, pop culture
references, and photographs make the coverage extremely thorough for a lay
audience. Among the numerous facets of death and dying explored are dying
trajectories; death and the media; invisible death; death denial and avoidance;
disease; homicide and suicide; near-death experiences; Kübler-Ross’s stage
model; accidental death; coping models; visiting and communicating with the
dying; grief and mourning; children and death; parental and sibling bereave-
ment; psychological reintegration and coping strategies; adolescent issues; fear
of death; anticipatory grief; tragic death; disenfranchised grief; psychospiritual
transformation; caregiving; hospice; death anxiety; right-to-die issues; and fu-
nerals and rituals, including details on various religious rites (Muslim, Baha’I,
Judaic, Mormon, Unitarian Universalist, Catholic, Hindu, and Buddhist). Also
includes sections on attitudes toward death in African American, Hispanic
American, Asian American, and Native American communities. A lengthy
chapter focused on additional resources features websites, annotated reading
lists arranged by death-related topic, worksheets, and a 54-page list of refer-
ences. Includes subject and name indexes.
1049. Mehta, Rohit. The Journey with Death. Mystic, CT: Verry, 1977. Also
published by Motilal Banarsidass Indological Publishers & Booksellers, Delhi,
India.
Mehta’s book is an exploration of the mystery of death that addresses the com-
mon questions about death, including What is death? Why does it come? Can we
communicate with the dead? Is death the end of existence? Mehta discusses the
“interval between lives” and entertains reincarnation. Includes several literary
references. Introduction by Joy Mills.
1050. Mims, Cedric. When We Die: The Science, Culture, and Rituals of Death.
New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1999.
Mims presents a surprisingly successful attempt at providing a comprehensive
look at the facts of death. He covers the definition of death, biological perspec-
tives, causes of death, burial and cremation practices from around the world,
organ transplantation, embalming, funeral rites and ceremonies, emotional issues
that surround death and the corpse, mourning and grieving customs, care of the
dying, pathology and criminal investigations, attitudes toward death and immor-
tality, and mythology of death. Includes a section of rather macabre photographs,
references, and an index.
1051. Mitford, Jessica. The American Way of Death. New York: Simon &
Schuster, 1963.
 General Works 143

Generally considered an expose on American funeral practices, Mitford’s book

is a tongue-in-cheek factual analysis of the funeral industry. This book was a
bestseller when it was originally published and is intended to educate the public
in American mortuary practices. It accomplished that goal. Mitford discusses
at length funeral costs, “artifacts” or items associated with the funeral service,
profitability of the funeral home, cremation, funeral fashion, funeral directing
as a profession, the role of clergy, and attitudes of the press toward funeral
service. It includes a chapter entitled “New Hope for the Dead.” If anyone can
make mortuary science humorous and give it popular appeal, Mitford certainly
can and did. Appendixes include a directory of memorial societies and related
organizations, information on how to organize a memorial society, text on eye
banks, and a section on body donation for medical science. Despite its humorous
approach, this title can certainly be helpful to those anticipating a death and the
bereaved. Includes a comprehensive index and bibliography of books, pamphlets,
and magazine articles.
1052. Moller, David Wendell. Confronting Death: Values, Institutions, and
Human Mortality. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Moller advocates for replacing attitudes of avoidance and denial with those of
understanding and compassion. He uses the American Cancer Society’s refusal of
a request to include some of their materials in the book (quoting a representative)
to illustrate how individuals and organization avoid and disassociate themselves
from the subject. Moller’s text covers dying within various historical contexts,
the modern organization of death, the medicalization of death, trajectories of dy-
ing, suffering, funerals, grief as a social concept, widowhood beyond feminism,
children and death, parental bereavement, violent deaths and suicide, holocaust
and genocide, and mechanized death. Includes an extensive bibliography, various
photographs, and an image of the transi, the prevailing image of death.
1053. Natural Death Centre. The Natural Death Handbook. London: Natural
Death Centre, 2003.
1054. Nelson, Leonard J., ed. The Death Decision. Ann Arbor, MI: Servant
Books, 1984.
Nelson’s book covers various religious and ethical perspectives on issues sur-
rounding death and dying. Medical ethics, euthanasia, right-to-die issues, and
physician-assisted suicide are addressed, along with other topics.
1055. Newnes, Craig, ed. Death, Dying, and Society. East Sussex, United King-
dom: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1991. Articles also published in a special
issue of Changes: An International Journal of Psychology and Psychotherapy,
December 1990.
Newnes offers a collection of articles that address death and dying across
ages, cultures, families, and institutions. Some of the articles in the book were
144 Chapter 15

papers presented at the Death and Dying Conference of the Committee of the
Psychology and Psychotherapy Association in Liverpool, England, on November
5, 1990. They were subsequently published in a special issue of Changes, as
noted above. Other authors contributed articles afterward. Topics include help-
ing children whose parents die of AIDS, death awareness, youth suicide, Turkish
genocide of the Armenians, death and dying in AIDS psychology, euthanasia
trends in Britain and Europe, loss and societal perspectives, disaster issues using
the Lockerbie tragedy as context, living with AIDS, old age and death, child-
hood cancer, bereavement among those with learning difficulties, the impact
of HIV/AIDS on the African community, preparing toddlers for the death of a
parent, and organizational pressures and role stresses in the lives of social work
teams. Includes notes, references, and a poem titled “Someone All Alone,” by
Sarah Joseph.
1056. Ogg, Elizabeth. Facing Death and Loss. Lancaster, PA: Technomic
Books, 1985.
Ogg’s book is based on two previously published public affairs pamphlets and
includes some reprinted passages from them. It is a general discussion of death
as a taboo topic, the notion of choosing death, the good death, hospice, terminal
care, children and death, grief and bereavement, and moving on. She includes nu-
merous references to others’ experiences with death and bereavement and books
on these subjects. Chapters begin with quotes pertinent to the topics.
1057. Oliviere, David, and Barbara Monroe, eds. Death, Dying, and Social Dif-
ferences. New York: Oxford University Press, 2004.
1058. Pardi, Marco M. Death: An Anthropological Perspective. Washington,
DC: University Press of America, 1977.
1059. Parrish-Harra, Carol E. The New Age Handbook on Death and Dying.
Santa Monica, CA: IBS Press, 1989.
1060. Pattison, E. Mansell. The Experience of Dying. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall, 1977.
Pattison is a professor of psychiatry and human behavior, social science, and
social ecology at the University of California, Irvine. Through his own articles
and those of twenty-three other contributors, he offers many perspectives on dy-
ing. Topics covered include death attitudes, the will to live and the expectation of
death, faith and healing, meningomyelocele infants, accidents and trauma, hemo-
philia, the burned child, childhood cancer, leukemia, euthanasia, partial grief, and
styles of dying. Includes an interview with a twenty-eight-year-old dying mother
and a bibliography arranged by subject.
1061. Pearson, Leonard S., ed. Death and Dying: Current Issues in the Treat-
ment of the Dying Person. Middletown, NY: UPBS, 1977. Originally published
 General Works 145

by the Press of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, in 1969. Also cited
as being published by Aronson, New York, in 1969.
Respected clinical thanatologists contribute articles to this collection on the
treatment of the dying patient. Articles address psychological death, the effects
of death on the family, psychotherapy and the dying patient, clinical care, and
awareness of dying. The contributors include Richard A. Kalish, Robert J. Kas-
tenbaum, Lawrence LeShan, Cicely Saunders, and Anselm L. Strauss. The author
includes a lengthy selected bibliography.
1062. Peck, Rosalie, and Charlotte Stefanics. Learning to Say Goodbye: Deal-
ing wth Death and Dying. Muncie, IN: Accelerated Development, 1987.
The authors, with backgrounds in social work and mental health clinical nurs-
ing, present more of an academic treatment of death and dying than the self-help
guide suggested by the title. The book covers historical and cultural attitudes, the
care and treatment of terminal patients, patient advocacy, and death. Includes an
extensive section on developing thanatology programs and guidelines for health
professionals, clergy, and so forth. Offers a pre-test on myths surrounding death,
particularly cancer, as well as thoughts on changing attitudes toward death, dy-
ing, and bereavement.
1063. Pegg, Patricia F., and Erno Metze. Death and Dying: A Quality of Life.
London: Pitman Publishing, 1981.
1064. Raab, Robert A. Coping with Death. New York: Rosen Press, 1978. Re-
vised edition published in 1989.
1065. Rinpoche, Tulku Chagdud. Life in Relation to Death. 2nd ed. Cottage
Grove, OR: Padma Publishing, 2000.
1066. Sanders, Pete. Death and Dying. New York: Gloucester Press, 1991.
1067. Saunders, Cicely M. Care of the Dying. London: Macmillan, 1960.
1068. Schulz, Richard. The Psychology of Death and Dying. Reading, MA:
Addison-Wesley, 1978. Also cited as The Psychology of Death, Dying, and
Bereavement.
1069. Scott, Nathan A., ed. The Modern Vision of Death. Richmond, VA: John
Knox Press, 1967.
1070. Segraves, Kelly L. When You’re Dead, You’re Dead. San Diego, CA:
Beta, 1975.
1071. Selzer, Richard. Mortal Lessons: Notes on the Art of Surgery. New York:
Simon & Schuster, 1974. Reprinted in 1975 and 1976.
Often humorous and sarcastic, the author, on the faculty of the Yale School
of Medicine, describes death from a surgeon’s perspective. Edward Hoagland
146 Chapter 15

comments, “A careening, passionate book of knowledge, open-eyed about death

and life, and even reaching toward faith.”
1072. Shaler, Nathaniel Southgate. The Individual: A Study of Life and Death.
New York: D. Appleton & Co., 1901.
1073. Sherlock, William. A Practical Discourse Concerning Death. London:
R. Chiswell, 1696.
1074. Sherr, Lorraine. Death, Dying, and Bereavement: An Insight for Carers.
London: Blackwell Scientific, 1989.
1075. Shneidman, Edwin S. Death: Current Perspectives. 3rd ed. Mountain
View, CA: Mayfield Publishing Co., 1984. Other editions published in 1976 and
1980, and with John B. Williamson in 1995.
Shneidman is professor of thanatology and director of the Laboratory for the
Study of Life-Threatening Behavior at the University of California at Los An-
geles School of Medicine. Appropriate for a college textbook, this title explores
current topics related to death and dying through thirty-nine articles and essays,
many by such noted professionals as Cicely Saunders, Hannelore Wass, Avery
Weisman, Jacques Choron, Robert Jay Lifton, Robert M. Veatch, David Sudnow,
Phillippe Aries, Ernest Becker, Geoffrey Gorer, and Lily Pincus. The contributors
explore ethical debates, clinical issues, and theoretical discussions. The book is
divided into four parts: “Cultural Perspectives on Death,” “Societal Perspectives
on Death,” “Interpersonal Perspectives on Death,” and “Personal Perspectives on
Death.” The third edition offers perspectives on the topics of legal/ethical/moral
aspects of death and dying, causes and effects of suicide, lifespan views of the
survivors of death, the growing sense of urgency about twentieth century “mega-
death,” and the growing interest in the quality of life during the dying phases and
the criticality of quality care for the dying. Includes a short annotated bibliogra-
phy, a list of bibliographies, and name and subject indexes.
1076. ———. Death and the College Student. New York: Behavioral Publica-
tions, 1972.
1077. ———. Voices of Death. New York: Harper & Row, 1980.
1078. Short, Robert. A Time to Be Born—A Time to Die. New York: Harper &
Row, 1973.
1079. Simpson, Michael A. The Facts of Death. New York: Spectrum/Prentice-
Hall, 1979.
1080. Spurgeon, C. H. Death. New York: Pilgrim, 1978.
1081. Steinfels, Peter, and Robert M. Veatch, eds. Death Inside Out: The Hast-
ings Center Report. New York: Harper Forum Books/Harper & Row, 1975. Also
published by Fitzhenry & Whiteside, Canada.
 General Works 147

1082. Stephenson, John S. Death, Grief, and Mourning: Individual and Social
Realities. New York: Free Press, 1985.
From sociological, psychological, historical, and literary perspectives,
Stephenson provides this comprehensive, interdisciplinary approach to the
processes, practices, and experiences concerning death and dying in the United
States. He surveys and analyzes death attitudes, the hospice model, bereave-
ment as both a personal reaction and social convention, the denial of death,
ceremonies of death, suicide, and the implications of euthanasia. This book
is intended for sociologists, social workers, religious leaders, psychologists,
nurses, and caregivers.
1083. Ulanov, Barry. Death: A Book of Preparation and Consolation. New
York: Sheed & Ward, 1959.
Widely regarded as an expert on jazz, Ulanov presents a book of reflections
on death. He draws upon biblical scriptures and poets to “console loved ones and
help us prepare for our own [death].” Includes an index and notes on writers and
books referenced.
1084. Van Zeller, Hubert. Death in Other Words. Springfield, IL: Templegate
Publishing Co., 1975.
1085. Voysey, M. A Constant Burden. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul,
1975.
1086. Warner, W. Lloyd. The Living and the Dead. New Haven, CT: Yale
University Press, 1959.
1087. Wertenbaker, Lael T. Death of a Man. New York: Random House,
1957.
1088. When Death Comes. Corvallis, OR: Oregon State University, 1963. Ex-
tension Bulletin 809.
1089. Wilcox, Sandra Galdieri, and Marilyn Sutton, eds. Understanding Death
and Dying: An Interdisciplinary Approach. Port Washington, NY: Alfred Pub-
lishing Co., 1977. Published by Mayfield, Palo Alto, CA, in 1985. Also cited as
published in Sherman Oaks, CA.
1090. Williams, Mary E. Terminal Illness: Opposing Viewpoints. San Diego,
CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001. The author of the 2005 edition is Andrea C. Na-
kaya. Part of the Opposing Viewpoints series.
An excellent resource for high school and college students, this book explores
the many issues surrounding terminal illness. Topics include hospice care, dy-
ing at home, patients’ rights and having control over decisions regarding dying
and death, treatments for pain, euthanasia, marijuana use for the terminally ill,
physician-assisted suicide, living wills, and the “duty to die” argument. A bibliog-
raphy of periodical articles follows each section. Includes questions and issues for
148 Chapter 15

further discussion, a list of organizations with descriptions and contact informa-

tion, and a brief bibliography.
1091. Winters, Paul A. Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints. San Diego,
CA: Greenhaven Press, 1998.
1092. Worcester, Alfred. The Care of the Aged, Dying, and Dead. New York:
Arno Press, 1950. Part of The Literature of Death and Dying series. Second edi-
tion cited as The Care of the Aged, the Dying, and the Dead, published by Charles
C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, in 1961. Also cited as being published by Charles C.
Thomas in 1935.
1093. Wright, H. T. The Matthew Tree. New York: Pantheon Books, 1975.
1094. Wyschogrod, Edith, ed. The Phenomenon of Death: Faces of Mortality.
New York: Harper & Row, 1973.
Wyschogrod presents a collection of articles by leading scholars and thana-
tologists on death and dying. She divides them into three sections: “The Dying
Person and His World,” “Mass Death,” and “The Death Throes of Culture.”
Article subjects include psychotherapy and the terminally ill patient, the stages
of death, anticipatory grief, bereavement, death symbolism, resurrection, and the
process of dying. Contributors include Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, Lawrence LeShan,
Eda LeShan, and Austin H. Kutscher. Includes a selected bibliography of books,
articles, and unpublished material.
 16
Grief and Mourning

1095. Adams, Christine A., and John D. Morgan. The ABCs of Grief: A Hand-
book for Survivors. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the
Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1096. Adler, Charles S. We Are But a Moment’s Sunlight: Understanding
Death. New York: Washington Square Press, 1976.
1097. Aldrich, Sandra Picklesimer. Living through the Loss of Someone You
Love: One Woman’s Story of Loss, Grief, and New-Found Hope. Ventura, CA:
Regal Books, 1990.
A counselor and associate editor of Christian Herald magazine, Aldrich tells
the story of losing her husband and how she recovered from bereavement. The
text is based on the author’s seminars on grief recovery and addresses the shock
of death, anger at God, prayer, dealing with holidays, viewing grief as healthy,
financial issues for widows, how to help the bereaved, abnormal grief, talking to
children about death, depression, and survival. Includes several scriptural refer-
ences.
1098. Alexander, Helen Mae. Experiencing Bereavement. 3rd ed. Boston: Pau-
line Books & Media, 2002.
An effort to help those bereaved understand the grieving process, Alexander’s
book recounts numerous personal stories as she suggests that sharing common
feelings and reactions can lead to healing and recovery. Written from a Catholic
perspective, though not entirely religious in tone, chapters deal specifically with
facing terminal illness, acknowledging the reality of death, sudden death, hidden
bereavement, taboo deaths and the associated difficult circumstances, befriending
the bereaved, dealing with feelings of helplessness and hopelessness, and finding

149
150 Chapter 16

meaning in death. Includes a list of organizations that offer information and other
resources as well as a brief bibliography.
1099. Allen, Charles Livingstone. When You Lose a Loved One. Westwood,
NJ: F. H. Revell Co., 1959.
1100. Anderson, Colena M. Joy Beyond Grief. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan,
1974.
1101. Archer, John. The Nature of Grief: The Evolution and Psychology of
Reactions to Loss. New York: Routledge, 1999.
The author suggests that grief is a “common experience throughout all hu-
man cultures that has evolved from simpler versions in animals.” He argues
that grief is not, as many psychiatric and psychoanalytic perspectives would
indicate, an illness or disorder but rather a natural reaction to a variety of losses.
Archer references Darwinian and attachment theory in his analysis. He presents
a thorough historical background on grief research, offers definitions and varying
understandings of grief, and discusses the biological context of grief. Holistic and
analytical approaches are explored. The effects of specific relationships, gender,
and age on bereavement are also examined. Includes extensive references and
author and subject indexes. Several literary references and photographs are also
included.
1102. Aries, Philippe. The Hour of Our Death: The Classical History of West-
ern Attitudes toward Death over the Last One Thousand Years. New York: Ox-
ford University Press, 1991.
1103. ———. Western Attitudes toward Death: From the Middle Ages to the
Present. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1974. Reprinted in 1991.
1104. Armstrong, O. V. Comfort for Those Who Mourn. Nashville, TN: Abing-
don Press, 1978. Published by Cokesbury in 1930.
1105. Ascher, Barbara Lazear. Landscape without Gravity: A Memoir of Grief.
Harrison, NY: Delphinium Books, 1992.
A gay man’s heterosexual sister presents a memoir of grief following his death
at age thirty-one of AIDS. Ascher examines her own feelings of grief and the
alienation of her brother when he was alive and her coming to terms with it. Her
grief is described as overwhelming and unmanageable, yet she finds her way out
of the darkness. Commenting on the book, Richard Selzer notes that “grief ema-
nates like a vapor from the pages.” The book is a moving narrative with many
lessons about grief, bereavement, and acceptance.
1106. Attig, Thomas. The Heart of Grief: Death and the Search for Lasting
Love. New York: Oxford University Press, 2002.
 Grief and Mourning 151

1107. ———. How We Grieve: Relearning the World. New York: Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1996.
Though appropriate for professionals in the field, Attig intends this book for a
broad audience, including those who are grieving. According to Attig, the book
contains “one philosopher’s reflections on grieving as the centrally important hu-
man experience that it is.” As with other scholars, Attig stresses that his teaching,
writing, analysis, and theoretical discussions are rooted in listening to people’s
stories of grief and bereavement. Using these individual vignettes, he discusses
how grieving is active; respecting loss in others; and relearning the world, our-
selves, and relationships with the deceased. Notably, Attig offers contrasting
definitions of bereavement, mourning, grieving, and loss. In one chapter, he notes
with its title, “Bereavement is Choiceless, But Grieving Is Not.” Includes notes
and an index.
1108. Auz, Martin M., and Maureen Lyons Andrews. Handbook for Those Who
Grieve: What You Should Know and What You Can Do During Times of Loss: A
Resource for Family, Friends, Ministers, Caregivers, and Colleagues. Chicago:
Loyola Press, 2002.
Auz and Andrews present a resource guide that is intended to serve as the
“path to grief recovery.” Auz is a writer who has extensively studied organiza-
tional grief therapy, and Andrews has developed bereavement programs for many
organizations. The book includes tips for planning funerals and wakes; breaking
difficult news; supporting those who are grieving; understanding different kinds
of grief; helping children deal with death and grief; and addressing special issues
associated with death by suicide, murder, and accidents. Also includes sample
sympathy letters, lists of pertinent planning details, and a list of publications and
organizations providing grief support.
1109. Bauman, Harold. Grief’s Slow Work. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 1960.
Bauman’s work is a 15-page booklet for Christian clergy and mourners. Using
biblical references throughout the text, Bauman covers the process of grief and
factors affecting grief work.
1110. Bedard, Kathryn. Compassion and Courage in the Aftermath of Trau-
matic Loss: Stones in My Heart Forever. Binghamton, NY: Haworth Press,
2006.
This book is an emotional collection of September 11th stories of the author’s
work at the New Jersey Family Assistance Center.
1111. Berkus, Rusty. To Heal Again: Toward Serenity and the Resolution of
Grief. Los Angeles: Red Rose Press, 1984.
1112. Bernstein, Joanne E. Loss and How to Cope with It. New York: Seabury,
1977. Published by Houghton Mifflin, Boston, in 1976.
152 Chapter 16

1113. Bertman, Sandra L. Grief and the Healing Arts: Creativity as Therapy.
Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1999. Part of the Death, Value, and Mean-
ing Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1114. Blank, Jeanne Webster. The Death of an Adult Child: A Book for and
about Bereaved Parents. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1998. Part of the
Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1115. Boss, Pauline. Ambiguous Loss: Learning to Live with Unresolved Grief.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999.
1116. Bouvard, Marguerite Guzman, and Evelyn Gladu. The Path through
Grief: A Compassionate Guide. Amherst, NY: Prometheus Books, 1998.
A thorough guide to grief recovery, this text examines the many varieties of
grief, phases of grief, and coping methods. The authors write about grief as a
personal crisis and how it differs depending on personality traits, the manner of
death, and the relationship of the deceased to the person grieving. They offer spe-
cial guidance for those who have lost a loved one to homicide, murder, or AIDS.
Specific suggestions are also included for friends and coworkers to help others
grieve. Includes an excellent list of organizations and information centers as well
as an annotated bibliography. Foreword by Sandra L. Bertman.
1117. Bowlby, John. Attachment and Loss: Loss, Sadness, and Depression
(Volume 3). New York: Basic Books, 1980. Originally published as Attachment
and Loss in 1969.
1118. Bozarth, Alla Renee. A Journey through Grief: Gentle Specific Help to
Get You through the Most Difficult Stages of Grieving. Minneapolis, MN: Comp-
Care Publications, 1990. Published by Hazelden in 1994.
1119. ———. Life Is Goodbye, Life Is Hello: Grieving Well through All Kinds
of Loss. Minneapolis, MN: CompCare Publications, 1982.
1120. Brabant, Sarah. Mending the Torn Fabric: For Those Who Grieve and
Those Who Want to Help Them. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1996. Part
of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1121. Bright, Ruth. Grieving: A Handbook for Those Who Care. St. Louis, MO:
MMB Music, 1986.
1122. Brokhoff, John R. If Your Dearest Should Die. Iowa Falls, IA: CSS Pub-
lishers, 1975. Also cited as being published by CSS Publishers, Lima, OH.
1123. Brooke, Jill. Don’t Let Death Ruin Your Life: A Practical Guide to Re-
claiming Happiness after the Death of a Loved One. New York: Plume, 2002.
A former television correspondent and print journalist, Brooke attempts to
provide “solutions that can transform grief into practical motivation.” Her fo-
cus is on the growth that can come from the loss of a loved one. She includes
 Grief and Mourning 153

details of her personal experiences with loss, tips on how to preserve memo-
ries, information on compiling family histories, and ideas on how to reach out
to friends during the challenging time of bereavement. Includes a bibliography
and an odd but interesting appendix listing achievers who lost a parent early in
life. This list includes dozens of names with the person’s age at the time they
lost their parent.
1124. Brooks, Anne M. The Grieving Time: A Year’s Account of Recovery
from Loss. Garden City, NY: Dial Press, 1985. Published as The Grieving Time:
A Month by Month Account of Recovery from Loss by Delapeake, Wilmington,
DE, in 1982.
1125. Brown, Erica. Loss, Change, and Grief: An Educational Experience.
London: D. Fulton Publishers, 1999.
1126. Brown, Reg. Surviving the Loss of a Loved One: Living through Grief.
Grantham, MA: Autumn House Publications, 1999.
1127. Bruce, Elizabeth J., and Cynthia L. Schultz. Nonfinite Loss and Grief:
A Psychoeducational Approach. Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brookes Publishing,
2001.
1128. Buckingham, Robert W., and Sandra K. Huggard. Coping with Grief.
New York: Rosen Publishing Group, 1991.
1129. Canfield, Jack, and Mark Victor Hansen. Chicken Soup for the Grieving
Soul: Stories about Life, Death, and Overcoming the Loss of a Loved One. Deer-
field Beach, FL: Health Communications, 2003.
Part of the popular Chicken Soup series, this book offers several stories to
help those grieving. Stories address matters of faith, final gifts, death and chil-
dren, memories, coping with grief, and healing and recovery from bereavement.
Includes a list of organizations that support those grieving, including Web ad-
dresses, as well as information about Compassionate Friends, an international
self-help bereavement organization. Also includes extensive information about
the authors and contributors.
1130. Caplan, Sandi, and Gordon Lang. Grief’s Courageous Journey. Oakland,
CA: New Harbinger Publications, 1995.
1131. Carr, Arthur C., Bernard Schoenberg, David Peretz, Austin H. Kutscher,
and Ivan K. Goldberg, eds. Grief: Selected Readings. New York: Health Sciences
Publishing, 1975. Part of the Journal Reprint Series.
This book is part of a series of article reprints from the Foundation of Thanatol-
ogy intended to bring together mandatory readings for scholars and students on
each death-related subject. This collection, focusing on grief and bereavement,
includes articles and essays on contemporary theoretical views on mourning;
descriptive and empirical studies on bereavement (including works by Colin
154 Chapter 16

Murray Parkes and Erich Lindemann); text on grief in childhood, pathological

grief, and anticipatory grief; and a review of grief literature.
1132. Champagne, Marian. Facing Life Alone. New York: Bobbs-Merrill Co.,
1964.
1133. Churchill, Dorothy. From Mourning to Morning: Six Years Later. Asto-
ria, OR: S Dot S Publishing, 1997.
1134. Cleiren, Marc. Bereavement and Adaptation: A Comparative Study of the
Aftermath of Death. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing/Taylor & Francis,
1993. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore
Wass, editor.
Cleiren provides an extensive academic investigation into adaptation follow-
ing bereavement. He explores other theories including those by John Bowlby,
Colin Murray Parkes, Peter Marris, Ronald W. Ramsay, J. Gauthier, and W. L.
Marshall. Cleiren also presents empirical research on bereavement; the author’s
Leiden Bereavement Study; and the mode of death, kinship, and functioning
after bereavement. Research is illustrated in several graphs and charts. Includes
a bibliography.
1135. Cochran, Larry, and Emily Claspell. The Meaning of Grief. New York:
Greenwood Press, 1987.
1136. Collick, Elizabeth. Through Grief: The Bereavement Journey. London:
Darton, Longman & Todd, 1988.
Foreword by Claire Rayner.
1137. Collins, Vincent J. Grief: How to Life with Sorrow. St. Meinrad, IN: Ab-
bey Press, 1966.
1138. Cornils, Stanley P. The Mourning After: How to Manage Grief Wisely.
7th ed. Saratoga, CA: R&E Publishers, 1990. Also published in 1995. Formerly
published as Managing Grief Wisely in 1967, 1971, 1974, 1977, and 1983.
During the writing of this book, Cornils was pastor emeritus at the First Baptist
Church of Vallejo, California. The work is a 91-page booklet on dealing with
and managing grief. Includes chapters on manifestations of grief, feelings of
guilt, anger, abnormal grief, the work of mourning, acceptance, readjustment,
and ambivalence.
1139. ———. Your Healing Journey through Grief: A Practical Guide to Grief
Management. San Francisco, CA: Robert D. Reed Publishers, 2003.
1140. Coryell, Deborah Morris. Healing through the Shadow of Loss. Roch-
ester, VT: Healing Arts Press, 2004. Published by Shiva Foundation, Santa Fe,
NM, in 1997.
 Grief and Mourning 155

1141. Cox, Gerry R., Robert A. Bendiksen, and Robert G. Stevenson. Com-
plicated Grieving and Bereavement: Understanding and Treating People Expe-
riencing Loss. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2001. Part of the Death,
Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1142. Crenshaw, David A. Bereavement: Counseling the Grieving throughout
the Life Cycle. New York: Continuum, 1990. Part of the Continuum Counseling
Series.
Crenshaw examines grief from the perspective of the life cycle. Chapters
offer guidance on helping children, adolescents, adults, and seniors with grief.
Crenshaw presents the seven tasks of mourning: acknowledging the reality
of the loss, identifying and exploring the emotions of grief, commemorat-
ing the loss, acknowledging ambivalence, resolving ambivalence, letting go,
and moving on. Consequences of unresolved grief, normal and pathological
bereavement, and giving permission to not grieve by loved ones are also dis-
cussed. Includes an appendix of associations and organizations that help the
bereaved. Foreword by William Van Ornum, editor of the Continuum Coun-
seling Series.
1143. Curley, Terence P. Six Steps for Managing Loss: A Catholic Guide
through Grief. New York: Alba House Publishers, 1997.
1144. Cutler, William, and Richard Peace. Dealing with Grief and Loss: Hope
in the Midst of Pain. Littleton, CO: Serendipity House, 1990.
1145. Dane, Barbara O., and Carol Levine. AIDS and the New Orphans: Cop-
ing with Death. Westport, CT: Auburn House, 1994.
1146. Dane, Barbara O., and Samuel O. Miller. AIDS: Intervening with Hidden
Grievers. New York: Auburn House, 1992.
1147. Danto, Bruce L., and Austin H. Kutscher. Suicide and Bereavement. New
York: MSS Information Corp., 1977. Distributed by Arno Press.
1148. Davidson, Glenn W. Understanding Mourning: A Guide for Those Who
Grieve. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1984.
1149. Davidson, Joyce, and Kenneth J. Doka. Living with Grief: At Work, at
School, at Worship. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 1999.
Also published by Brunner/Mazel, Levittown, PA.
1150. Davies, Phyllis. Grief: Climb toward Understanding, Self-Help When
You Are Struggling. New York: Carol Communications, 1988. Also published by
Sunnybank Publishers, San Luis Obispo, CA, in 1987.
1151. Dawson, Ann. A Season of Grief: A Comforting Companion for Difficult
Days. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press, 2002.
156 Chapter 16

A newspaper columnist, Dawson offers a collection of stories, prayers, quotes,

and poems to help those recovering from a significant loss. Dawson also writes
about the death of her teenage son.
1152. DeBellis, Robert. Suffering: Psychological and Social Aspects in Loss,
Grief, and Care. New York: Haworth Press, 1986. Also cited as Suffering the
Psychological and Social Aspects in Loss, Grief, and Care.
1153. DeLone, Susan Talia. Love, Loss, and Healing: A Woman’s Guide to
Transforming Grief. Portland, OR: Sibyl Publishing, 1998.
1154. Dockrey, Karen. Will I Ever Feel Good Again?: When You’re Over-
whelmed by Grief and Loss. Grand Rapids, MI: F. H. Revell, 1993.
1155. Doka, Kenneth J., ed. Disenfranchised Grief: New Directions, Chal-
lenges, and Strategies for Practice. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2002.
1156. ———. Living with Grief after Sudden Loss: Suicide, Homicide, Accident,
Heart Attack, Stroke. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 1996.
Distributed by Taylor & Francis, Bristol, CT.
1157. Doka, Kenneth J., and John Breaux. Living with Grief: Loss in Later Life.
Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 2002.
1158. Doka, Kenneth J., and Joyce D. Davidson. Caregiving and Loss: Fam-
ily Needs, Professional Responses. Washington, DC: Hospice Foundation of
America, 2001.
1159. ———. Living with Grief: Who We Are, How We Grieve. Washington,
DC: Hospice Foundation of America, 1998. Also published by Brunner/Mazel,
Philadelphia.
1160. ———. Living with Grief When Illness Is Prolonged. Washington, DC:
Hospice Foundation of America, 1997. Originally published in 1977.
1161. Doyle, Polly. Grief Counseling and Sudden Death: A Manual and Guide.
Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1980.
1162. Dunlop, Richard S. Helping the Bereaved. Bowie, MD: Charles Press,
1978.
1163. Ellard, John, and Vamik D. Volkan. Normal and Pathological Responses
to Bereavement. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1974.
1164. Ellis, Thomas M. This Thing Called Grief: New Understandings of Loss.
Minneapolis, MN: Syren Book Company, 2006.
Ellis, a licensed marriage and family therapist and executive director of the
Center for Grief, Loss, and Transition, offers a collection of stories about loss
along with suggestions for transforming grief into a method of healing. He refers
to grief as a “crazy-making, complicated process [that] affects every dimension
 Grief and Mourning 157

of the self.” In addition to stories, this 106-page paperback includes several inspi-
rational poems, a list of organizations, and a bibliography divided by subject.
1165. Engram, Sara. Mortal Matters: When a Loved One Dies. Kansas City,
MO: Andrews McMeel Publishing, 1990.
Engram’s book is one for comforting the soul but also dealing with the practi-
cal issues following the death of a loved one. Engram also writes a nationally
syndicated column called Mortal Matters about death topics. Among the topics
are helping children understand death, acknowledging grief, using stories to ex-
plain death, recalling memories, learning to survive, healthy mourning, guilt and
grieving, unexpected death, living wills, disposition issues, funerals, rites and
rituals, financial issues, and organ and tissue donation.
1166. Ericsson, Stephanie. Companion through the Darkness: Inner Dialogues
on Grief. New York: HarperCollins, 1993.
In a book for the grieving, Ericsson defines grief as the “constant reawaken-
ing that things are now different.” She includes excerpts from her journal, along
with short essays on loss. The journal began after the loss of her husband while
she was pregnant with their only child. An acclaimed excerpt from the book was
published in the Utne Reader.
1167. Figley, Charles R. Traumatology of Grieving: Conceptual, Theoretical,
and Treatment Foundations. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999.
1168. Figley, Charles R., and Brian E. Bride. Death and Trauma: The Trauma-
tology of Grieving. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1997.
1169. Fitzgerald, Helen. The Mourning Handbook: The Most Comprehensive
Resource Offering Practical and Compassionate Advice on Coping with All
Aspects of Death and Dying. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1995. First Fireside
edition.
1170. Freeman, Lucy. The Sorrow and the Fury: Overcoming Hurt and Loss
from Childhood to Old Age. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1978.
Appropriate for both professionals and those seeking guidance for coping with
loss, Freeman’s text features case studies that illuminate her gain-through-loss
theory. She discusses the sense of loss, the mourning process, first losses, the
rewards of loss, combating loss through creativity, using laughter to deal with
loss, loss during early years and later in life, and tools for facing losses. Includes
a bibliography arranged by chapter.
1171. Freeman, Stephen J. Grief and Loss: Understanding the Journey. Bel-
mont, CA: Thomson/Brooks/Cole, 2005.
With both practical and theoretical information, Freeman provides a general
exploration of grief and loss. He also writes about the many emotions around
grief and mourning experienced by those in the helping professions. The text is
158 Chapter 16

appropriate for a high school or college level course on bereavement. Includes

numerous references.
1172. Freese, Arthur S. Help for Your Grief: Turning Emotional Loss into
Growth. New York: Schocken Books, 1977.
1173. Frigo, Victoria, Diane Fisher, and Mary Lou Cook. You Can Help Some-
one Who’s Grieving: A How-To Healing Handbook. New York: Penguin Books,
1996.
The authors offer insights and practical advice for friends, family, and co-
workers of the bereaved. Chapters discuss grief support groups, organizing
memorial services, funerals, writing sympathy notes, the spectrum of feelings
following a death, special considerations with the death of a child or a suicide,
journals, and communicating with the bereaved. A general theme is the im-
portance of grieving.
1174. Froman, Paul Kent. After You Say Goodbye: When Someone You Love
Dies of AIDS. San Francisco, CA: Chronicle Books, 1992.
1175. Ganeri, Anita. Journey’s End: Death and Mourning. New York: Peter
Bedrick Books, 1998. Also published by Evans Brothers, London.
1176. Gary, Juneau Mahan, and Linda Remolino. Coping with Loss and Grief
through Online Support Groups. Greensboro, NC: ERIC Clearinghouse on Coun-
seling and Student Services, 2000.
1177. Gaughen, Shasta. Coping with Death. San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press,
2003. Also published by Thomson Gale, Detroit.
1178. Gentles, Ian. Care for the Dying and the Bereaved. Toronto, Ontario:
Anglican Book Center, 1982.
1179. Gerber, Irwin, Alfred Wiener, Austin H. Kutscher, Delia Battin, Arthur
Arkin, and Ivan K. Goldberg, eds. Perspectives on Bereavement. New York:
MSS Information Corp., 1978. Published by Arno Press, New York, in 1979, as
a volume in the Foundation of Thanatology series and the Continuing Series on
Thanatology.
The editors have compiled articles that address bereavement from sociological,
pediatric, personal, religious, and therapeutic perspectives. General and future
perspectives are also included. Subjects discussed include widowhood, grief
work, mourning among children, pastoral issues, the grief work cycle in Judaism,
suggestions for office nurses, psychoanalytic therapy, parental loss, nursing care
for the family of the terminally ill, sympathy calls, death-related communica-
tion, and the concept of a model counseling center for the bereaved. Appendixes
include surveys on advice of the bereaved for others who are grieving and a
comparison of psychiatrists to nonpsychiatrists in their attitudes toward death
 Grief and Mourning 159

and bereavement. Includes a selected bibliography by Daniel J. Cherico, Martin

L. Kutscher, and Austin H. Kutscher.
1180. Glasscock, Geoffrey, and Megan Gressor. Coping with Loss and Grief.
London: Robinson Publishing, 1995.
1181. Glick, Ira O., Robert S. Weiss, and Colin Murray Parkes. The First Year
of Bereavement. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1974. Published under the
Wiley-Interscience imprint.
This title is a research report sometimes referred to as the Harvard Bereave-
ment Study, which was developed from work at the Harvard Laboratory of Com-
munity Psychiatry. It offers two theoretical advances: a realization that Erich
Lindemann’s early conceptualization of bereavement as a typical life crisis was
an oversimplification and an “increased understanding of the ‘normality’ and
benign predictive significance of many of the strange individual reactions of wid-
ows previously thought to be unhealthy.” The authors discuss the impact of death,
early emotional and physical reactions to bereavement, the availability and use of
help, ceremonies of leave-taking, grieving, widowhood, changing relationships,
the recovery process, patterns of recovery, and dealing with loss. A summary of
the research and methods used is included at the front of the book.
1182. Golden, Thomas R., and James E. Miller. When a Man Faces Grief:
Twelve Practical Ideas to Help You Heal from Loss. Fort Wayne, IN: Willow-
green Press, 1998. Also cited as When a Man Faces Grief: A Man You Know Is
Grieving.
1183. Gordon, Albert I. In Times of Sorrow. New York: United Synagogues of
America, 1949.
1184. Gorer, Geoffrey. Death, Grief, and Mourning. New York: Doubleday,
1965. Also published by Arno Press, New York, in 1976, as part of the Literature
of Death and Dying series.
1185. Goulding, Mary McClure. Time to Say Goodbye: Moving beyond Loss.
Watsonville, CA: Papier-Mache Press, 1996.
1186. Grainger, Roger. The Social Symbolism of Grief and Mourning. Philadel-
phia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1998.
1187. Graves, Sandra L. Expressions of Healing: Embracing the Process of
Grief. North Hollywood, CA: Newcastle Publishing Company, 1994.
1188. Griffin, Mary, and Carol Felsenthal. Cry for Help. New York: Double-
day, 1983.
1189. Grollman, Earl A. Living When a Loved One Has Died. Boston: Beacon
Press, 1977. Reprint in 1987.
160 Chapter 16

1190. ———, ed. What Helped Me When My Loved One Died. Boston: Beacon
Press, 1981.
1191. Guntzelman, Joan. Blessed Grieving: Reflections on Life’s Losses. Wi-
nona, MN: St. Mary’s Press, 1994.
1192. Hafer, W. Keith. Coping with Bereavement from Death or Divorce.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1981.
1193. Hansen, James C., and Thomas T. Frantz. Death and Grief and the
Family. Rockville, MD: Aspen Systems Corporation, 1984. Part of the Family
Therapy Collections, volume 8.
1194. Harris, Audrey Jane Axelrod. Why Did He Die? Minneapolis, MN: Ler-
ner Publications, 1965. Illustrated by Susan Sallade Dalke.
1195. Hartnett, Johnette. Different Losses, Different Issues: What to Expect and
How to Help. South Burlington, VT: Good Mourning, 1993.
1196. Harvey, John H. Embracing Their Memory: Loss and the Social Psychol-
ogy of Storytelling. Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 1996.
1197. ———. Give Sorrow Words: Perspectives on Loss and Trauma. Philadel-
phia: Brunner/Mazel, 2000.
1198. ———. Perspectives on Loss: A Sourcebook. Philadelphia: Brunner/Ma-
zel, 1998. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Nei-
meyer, consulting editor.
1199. Harvey, John H., and Eric D. Miller. Loss and Trauma: General and
Close Relationship Perspectives. Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2000.
1200. Heegaard, Marge Eaton. Grief: A Natural Reaction to Loss. Minneapolis,
MN: Fairview Press, 2002.
1201. ———. When Someone Very Special Dies. Omaha, NE: Centering Cor-
poration, 1988.
1202. Henry, DeWitt. Sorrow’s Company: Writers on Loss and Grief. Boston:
Beacon Press, 2001.
1203. Hickey, Tom. Loss Reaction and Grief Management. University Park,
PA: Gerontology Center, Pennsylvania State University, 1976.
1204. Hickman, Martha Whitmore. Healing after Loss: Daily Meditations for
Working through Grief. New York: Avon Books, 1994.
1205. Howard, Deborah. Sunsets: Reflections for Life’s Final Journey. Whea-
ton, IL: Crossway Books, 2005.
 Grief and Mourning 161

Howard, a certified hospice and palliative care nurse, offers words of encour-
agement from a Christian perspective for those who have lost a loved one. She
discusses the denial of death, the afterlife, and preparing for death. Includes an
appendix of frequently asked questions about hospice.
1206. Huber, Jim. A Thousand Goodbyes: A Son’s Reflection on Living, Dying,
and the Things That Matter Most. Nashville, TN: Thomas Nelson, 2001.
An Emmy Award–winning CNN sports journalist, Huber tells the story of the
redeemed relationship between himself and his father that developed during his
father’s final days. This book is a poignant exploration of dying and the ensuing
grief of a son.
1207. Hughes, Marylou. Bereavement and Support: Healing in a Group Envi-
ronment. Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1995. Part of the Series in Death
Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
1208. Hughs, Hugh Llewelyn. Peace at the Last. London: Calouste Gulbenkian
Foundation, 1960.
1209. Ironside, Virginia. You’ll Get over It: The Rage of Bereavement. London:
Hamish Hamilton/Penguin, 1996.
Ironside’s book moves through all the emotions and physical effects of be-
reavement from shock to the practical needs of grieving. She discusses fear,
powerlessness, guilt, rage, misery, wills and other legal matters, communicating
about death, spiritual matters, and potential benefits from a period of bereave-
ment. Includes a list of British organizations for support and suggestions for
further reading. A postscript describes the author’s own emotions following her
father’s death.
1210. Jackson, Edgar N. The Many Faces of Grief. Nashville, TN: Abingdon
Press, 1977.
1211. ———. Understanding Grief: Its Roots, Dynamics, and Treatment. Nash-
ville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1957.
In this major and early work on grief, Jackson provides both an introduction
to and a scholarly analysis of grief and bereavement. He discusses the definition
of grief, the dynamics of grief, the expression of grief feelings, dynamic compre-
hension of death’s significance, grief communication, building healthful attitudes
toward grief, how religious practices can sustain the grief-stricken, grief manifes-
tations, abnormal grief, death attitudes, grief precipitating a deep disturbance, and
funeral sermons. He also examines the roles of identification, substitution, and
guilt in relation to grief. Includes notes, a selected bibliography, and an index.
1212. ———. You and Your Grief. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1962. Origi-
nally published by Channel Press, New York, in 1961.
162 Chapter 16

1213. Jacobs, Selby. Pathologic Grief: Maladaptation to Loss. Washington,

DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1993.
1214. ———. Traumatic Grief: Diagnosis, Treatment, and Prevention. Phila-
delphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999.
1215. James, John W., and Frank Cherry. The Grief Recovery Handbook: A
Step-by-Step Program for Moving beyond Loss. New York: Harper & Row, 1988.
Revised edition entitled The Grief Recovery Handbook: The Action Program for
Moving beyond Death, Divorce, and Other Losses, with John W. James and Rus-
sell Friedman as authors, published by HarperPerennial, New York, in 1998.
1216. Jeffreys, J. Shep. Coping with Workplace Grief: Dealing with Loss,
Trauma, and Change. Boston: Thomson/Course Technology, 2005.
1217. ———. Helping Grieving People—When Tears Are Not Enough: A Hand-
book for Care Providers. New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2005. Part of the Series
in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
Jeffreys, a licensed psychologist and certified thanatologist, offers a guide
for the helping professions and other caregivers. He emphasizes that the book
is written to meet both the clinical needs of health care professionals but also
clergy, volunteers, and family caregivers. The narrative attempts to assist the
reader with understanding the three aspect of “exquisite witness,” the “heart”
dimension (self-awareness), the “head” dimension (understanding the human
grief response), and the “hands” dimension (supportive and clinical interven-
tions). Jeffreys covers a broad spectrum of topics, including the social and cul-
tural context of grief, cultural diversity considerations, psychospiritual aspects
of healing grief, death-related rituals, definitions of grief, the three conditions
of grief, the seven principles of human grief, loss and death in the family,
the family loss genogram, healing tasks, childhood bereavement, sibling loss,
self-help support groups, older adult grief, terminal illness, medical dilemmas,
patient rights, bioethical considerations, and patient dignity. Includes a pro-
vider self-assessment tool; case studies; and an epilogue discussing life, loss,
and grief along with “reflections of a grief psychologist’s wife.” Appendixes
feature an extensive list of additional readings, organization resources with
contact information and websites, and a sample advance medical directive.
Also includes an index.
1218. Jenkins, Bill. What to Do When the Police Leave: A Guide to the First
Days of Traumatic Loss. Richmond, VA: WBJ Press, 2001.
1219. Jensen, Amy Hillyard. Healing Grief. Redmond, WA: Medic Publishing,
1995.
1220. Jozefowski, Joanne T. The Phoenix Phenomenon: Rising from the Ashes
of Grief. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1999.
 Grief and Mourning 163

Jozefowski refers to the bereaved individuals whose stories she shares in the
book as “Phoenix Grievers” for their courage and resiliency. She offers the griev-
ing assistance with understanding their familiarity with grief, adjusting to the
five developmental stages of grief, using resources and tools to survive and grow
through each phase of grieving, learning how the bereaved can grow and find
inspirational strength, indentifying the potential for personal growth, learning
metaphors for each stage, and understanding grief’s opportunities to create mean-
ing and honor a loved one’s life and death. In doing so, she discusses the anatomy
and physiology of grief, bereavement through both natural and catastrophic
causes, shock and denial, anxiety and fear, grief work, creative atonement, for-
giveness, self-actualization, and moving beyond mourning. Includes an appendix
offering two sources of additional material on the subject, a brief bibliography,
and a list of titles labeled “supportive literature.” Foreword by Therese A. Rando,
the Institute for the Study and Treatment of Loss in Warwick, Rhode Island.
1221. Kalish, Richard A. Midlife Loss: Coping Strategies. Newbury Park, CA:
Sage Publications, 1989.
1222. Kast, Verena. A Time to Mourn: Growing through the Grief Process.
Einsiedeln, Switzerland: Daimon Verlag, 1988. Translated from the 1982 Ger-
man edition Trauern: Phasen und Chancen des psychischen Prozesses, published
by Kreuz Verlag, Stuttgart.
A professor of psychology at the University of Zurich, Kast explains the
role of mourning in the therapeutic process in this text developed from her
doctoral dissertation. She emphasizes how mourning can empower individu-
als and foster personal growth. Referring to mourning as a time for renewal,
introspection, and incubation, Kast notes that without this important process
during bereavement, depressive illness and other issues can develop. Includes
notes and a bibliography.
1223. Katafiasz, Karen. Grief Therapy: Out of Pain Can Come Profound
Transforming Healing. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1993.
1224. Kennedy, Eugene C. Cardinal Bernardin’s Stations of the Cross: Trans-
forming Our Grief and Loss into New Life. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2003.
1225. Keogh, Martin J. As Much Time as It Takes: A Guide for the Bereaved,
Their Family, and Friends. Charlottesville, VA: Hampton Roads Publishing Co.,
2005.
1226. Kissane, David, and Sidney Bloch. Family Grief Therapy. Philadelphia:
Open University Press. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor.
1227. Klass, Dennis. Parental Grief: Solace and Resolution. New York:
Springer, 1988. Volume 9 of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J.
Kastenbaum, series editor.
164 Chapter 16

Klass, a professor at Webster University in St. Louis, discusses the process and
resolution of parental grief and also illustrates the progression in four contexts.
These include the anatomy of social support through a look at The Compassion-
ate Friends, a worldwide family of bereaved parents; rage experienced by parents
of murdered children; ways the bereaved help the dying; and the psychotherapeu-
tic process. Appendixes include a narrative explaining the author’s perspective on
parent grief and John Bowlby’s Model of Grief and the Problem of Identification.
Includes references and an index.
1228. Klass, Dennis, Phyllis R. Silverman, and Stephen L. Nickman, eds.
Continuing Bonds: New Understandings of Grief. Washington, DC: Taylor &
Francis, 1996. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care,
Hannelore Wass, editor.
Noting in their preface that the continuing bond with the deceased in the reso-
lution of grief has been “overlooked or undervalued” in much of the scholarly and
clinical literature, the authors and contributors surface a new model of grief in
the analyses and critiques of the current model of grief. Topics discussed include
historical perspectives, grief recurrence, children’s construction of deceased
parents, husband sanctification in widowhood, the sometimes triadic relationship
of widowed persons’ new marriages, adolescent sibling bereavement, parental
bereavement, retroactive loss in adopted persons, grief and birth origin fantasies
of adopted women, ongoing attachment issues, adult child loss, and the deceased
child in the psychic and social worlds of bereaved parents during the resolution
of grief. The editors conclude with a definition of the continuing bond, the para-
dox of letting go and remaining involved, legitimization of old grief, problem
behaviors, and implications for therapeutic intervention. Contact information and
brief biographical narrative on each of the nineteen contributors is included. Also
contains a limited index, given the scope of material covered.
1229. Klein, Sandra Jacoby. Heavenly Hurts: Surviving AIDS-Related Deaths
and Losses. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1998. Part of the Death,
Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1230. Kolf, June Cerza. How Can I Help?: How to Support Someone Who Is
Grieving. Tucson, AZ: Fisher Books, 1999.
1231. ———. When Will I Stop Hurting?: Dealing with a Recent Death. Grand
Rapids, MI: Baker Books, 1987.
1232. Koolman, Gladys. After the Flowers Have Gone. Grand Rapids, MI:
Zondervan Publishing House, 1973.
1233. Kouri, Mary K. Keys to Dealing with the Loss of a Loved One.
Hauppauge, NY: Barron’s, 1991.
1234. Krauss, Pesach, and Morrie Goldfischer. Why Me?: Coping with Grief,
Loss, and Change. New York: Bantam Books, 1988.
 Grief and Mourning 165

Noting in his introduction that “too many people make the mistake of judg-
ing life by its length rather than its depth,” Krauss emphasizes the need for the
grieving to use their emotional and spiritual resources to transform grief into
self-discovery. A rabbi and chaplain at the Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer
Center in New York, Krauss discusses achieving self-awareness, life as a series
of entrances and exits, thinking positively, growing during a time of trouble, and
the drive for meaning. Chapters begin with selected quotes.
1235. Kreis, Bernadine, and Alice Pattie. Up from Grief: Patterns of Recovery.
Minneapolis, MN: Winston Press, 1982. Published by Seabury Press, New York,
in 1969.
1236. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, and David Kessler. On Grief and Grieving:
Finding the Meaning of Grief through the Five Stages of Loss. New York: Scrib-
ner, 2005.
Published after Kübler-Ross’s death in 2004, this book includes Kessler’s ac-
count of his own bereavement following her death. It reviews Kübler-Ross’s five
stages of grief; explores the “inner and outer worlds of grief”; and discusses grief
under such special circumstances as multiple losses through death, Alzheimer’s
disease, suicide, sudden death, and disasters. Comments on childhood death are
also included.
1237. Kuehn, Eileen. Loss: Understanding the Emptiness. Mankato, MN:
LifeMatters, 2001.
1238. Kuenning, Delores. Helping People through Grief. Minneapolis, MN:
Bethany House Publishers, 1987.
In his foreword, Granger Westberg, author of Good Grief, notes that this is a
textbook for “teaching caring people how to help helpfully.” Covering almost
every imaginable kind of grief, Kuenning presents a handbook for assisting the
bereaved. While focusing on various kinds of grief, she also suggests commonali-
ties among all who grieve. Other topics discussed include talking with children
about death, grief following a catastrophic death or suicide, dealing with life-
threatening or terminal illness, the death of a spouse, death as release, questions
about God’s will in matters of death and dying, and unique bereavement issues
associated with death following Alzheimer’s disease. All subjects are approached
from a Christian perspective. Includes several lists of tips in each chapter as well
as an extensive bibliography.
1239. Kumar, Sameet M. Grieving Mindfully: A Compassionate and Spiritual
Guide to Coping with Loss. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 2005.
Defining grief as a personal journey, Kumar, a psychologist, provides a guide
to loss from a Buddhist perspective. He discusses definitions of grief and mind-
fulness, the first year after a death, closure and transformation, the transformative
search for meaning in grief, depression, learning from grief, and channeling grief.
Includes a brief bibliography.
166 Chapter 16

1240. Kutscher, Austin H. But Not to Lose: A Book of Comfort for Those Be-
reaved. New York: Frederick Fell, 1969. Also published and distributed by MSS
Information Corp., New York.
1241. ———. For the Bereaved: The Road to Recovery. Philadelphia: Charles
Press, 1990.
1242. ———. For Those Bereaved: But Not to Lose: A Book of Comfort. New
York: Arno Press, 1980.
1243. Kutscher, Austin H., and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. For the Bereaved.
New York: Frederick Fell, 1971.
1244. ———, eds. Religion and Bereavement. New York: Health Sciences Pub-
lishing Corp., 1972. Also cited with the subtitle Counsel for the Physician/Advice
for the Bereaved/Thoughts for the Clergyman.
This work is an anthology of essays and quotations by clergy from various
faith backgrounds, including Jewish, Catholic, Episcopal, Baptist, Lutheran,
Presbyterian, Disciples of Christ, and Unitarian.
1245. Lamm, Maurice. Consolation: The Spiritual Journey beyond Grief.
Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society, 2004.
1246. Larson, Dale G. The Helper’s Journey: Working with People Facing
Grief, Loss, and Life-Threatening Illness. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 1993.
1247. Lawrenz, Mel, and Daniel Green. Life after Grief: How to Survive Loss
and Trauma. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Books, 1995.
1248. Lee, Carol. Good Grief: Experiencing Loss. London: Fourth Estate,
1994.
1249. Leech, Peter, and Zeva Singer. Acknowledgment: Opening to the Grief of
Unacceptable Loss. Laytonville, CA: Wintercreek Publications, 1988.
1250. Leick, Nini, and Marianne Davidsen-Nielsen. Healing Pain: Attachment,
Loss, and Grief Therapy. New York: Routledge, 1991.
1251. Lendrum, Susan, and Gabrielle Syme. Gift of Tears: A Practical Ap-
proach to Loss and Bereavement Counseling. New York: Tavistock/Routledge,
1992. Published by Brunner-Routledge, New York, in 2004.
1252. Levang, Elizabeth, and Sherokee Ilse. Remembering with Love: Mes-
sages of Hope for the First Year. Minneapolis, MN: Deaconess Press, 1993.
1253. Levine, Aaron. To Comfort the Bereaved. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson,
1994.
1254. Levine, Stephen. A Gradual Awakening. Garden City, NY: Anchor Press,
1989.
 Grief and Mourning 167

1255. ———. Unattended Sorrow: Recovering from Loss and Reviving the
Heart. Emmaus, PA: Rodale Books, 2005.
1256. Leviton, Daniel, ed. Horrendous Death and Health: Toward Action. New
York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1991. Part of the Series in Death Education, Ag-
ing, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
While intended to address the various “types of people-caused, premature
deaths” that could terminate life “at any moment,” Leviton’s book essentially
deals with such horrendous death as nuclear war and nuclear annihilation. A
companion volume to Horrendous Death, Health, and Well-Being, this title
discusses the treatment of the survivors of horrendous death and “action ap-
proaches from the grass roots.” Twelve articles focus on survivor-victims of
homicide and nuclear war; survivor-victims of war and holocaust; the psy-
chology of survival-directed action; educational approaches for helping young
children cope with nuclear annihilation; the establishment of the Consortium
on Peace, Research, Education, and Development; peace education; preven-
tion of war; citizen diplomacy programs; and theories of children’s love and
peace behaviors.
1257. Liebman, Joshua Loth. Peace of Mind. New York: Simon & Schuster,
1946.
1258. Lightner, Candy, and Nancy Hathaway. Giving Sorrow Words: How to
Cope with Grief and Get on with Your Life. New York: Time Warner, 1990.
1259. Lintermans, Gloria, and Marilyn Stolzman. The Healing Power of Grief:
The Journey through Loss to Life and Laughter. Belgium, WI: Champion Press,
2006.
1260. Linzer, N., ed. Understanding Grief and Bereavement. New York: Ye-
shiva University Press and KTAV Publishing House, 1977.
1261. Littlewood, Jane. Aspects of Grief: Bereavement in Adult Life. New
York: Tavistock/Routledge, 1992.
Littlewood, a lecturer in social policy and administration at Loughborough
University of Technology, begins her comprehensive study of adult bereavement
and the process of grieving with a review of Western attitudes toward death and
dying. She illustrates how these attitudes form the foundation of the way in which
adults typically grieve today. She also focuses on death rituals and funeral rites
and their effects on grieving. Littlewood looks at adult relationships and their
connection with complicated and uncomplicated grief; special circumstances sur-
rounding individuals’ deaths, and differences in grieving based on the relation-
ship to the deceased. Includes a bibliography and name and subject indexes.
1262. Lord, Janice Harris. No Time for Goodbyes: Coping with Grief, Anger,
and Injustice after a Tragic Death. Ventura, CA: Pathfinder Publishing, 1987.
168 Chapter 16

1263. Lund, Dale A. Men Coping with Grief. Amityville, NY: Baywood Pub-
lishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan,
editor.
1264. Mack, Stanley. Janet and Me: An Illustrated Story of Love and Loss.
New York: Simon & Schuster, 2004.
1265. MacNab, Francis A. Life after Loss: Getting over Grief, Getting on with
Life. Philadelphia: Millenium, 1989. Also published in Newtown, Australia.
1266. Malkinson, Ruth, and Simon Rubin. Traumatic and Nontraumatic Loss
and Bereavement: Clinical Theory and Practice. Madison, CT: Psychosocial
Press, 2000.
1267. Manning, Doug. Comforting Those Who Grieve: A Guide for Helping
Others. San Francisco, CA: Harper & Row, 1985.
1268. ———. Don’t Take My Grief Away from Me. Hereford, TX: Insight
Books, 1979. Published by Harper & Row, San Francisco, CA, in 1984, as Don’t
Take My Grief Away.
1269. Margolis, Otto Schwarz, Austin H. Kutscher, Eric R. Marcus, Howard C.
Raether, Vanderlyn R. Pine, Irene B. Seeland, Daniel J. Cherico, and Lillian G.
Kutscher, eds. Grief and the Loss of an Adult Child. New York: Praeger, 1988.
Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series.
The editors provide a collection of articles on the grief that follows the loss of
an adult child as well as other relationships. Articles are grouped into sections
on the loss of an adult child; grief in selected loss relationships, for example,
in-laws, widowers, grandparents, and the elderly widowed; interdisciplinary ap-
proaches to bereavement; and funeral service concepts in dealing with loss and
grief. Subjects receiving some treatment include acute grief; children with can-
cer; grandparent grief for an adult child; and grief in nontraditional relationships,
including extramarital affairs, cohabitating couples, and homosexuals. Includes
an index and brief information on the contributors.
1270. Margolis, Otto Schwarz, and Lillian G. Kutscher. Loss, Grief, and Be-
reavement: A Guide for Counseling. New York: Praeger, 1985. Part of the Foun-
dation of Thanatology series.
1271. Margolis, Otto Schwarz, Howard C. Raether, Austin H. Kutscher, J.
Bruce Powers, Irene B. Seeland, Robert DeBellis, and Daniel J. Cherico, eds.
Acute Grief: Counseling the Bereaved. New York: Columbia University Press,
1981. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series.
The editors present numerous articles that provide an overview of loss, grief,
and bereavement; review experiences of grief and bereavement; discuss counsel-
ing the bereaved; and explore survivor expectations associated with acute grief.
 Grief and Mourning 169

Notable chapter topics include the type of death as a determinant in acute grief,
emotional involvement of the family immediately preceding death, facilitation of
mourning after a natural disaster, grief and bereavement in the military, SIDS,
murder in schools, rescaling therapy, the role of the funeral director as a coun-
selor of the bereaved, clergy and mourning, biochemistry of acute grief with
regard to neoplasia, and the psychosocial value of a home funeral. Oddly, most
of the articles on acute grief and survivor expectations are about the funeral ritual
and the role of the funeral director. On the acknowledgments page, the editors
offer a definition of thanatology as a “new subspecialty of medicine . . . involved
in scientific and humanistic inquiries and the application of the knowledge de-
rived there to the subjects of the psychological aspects of dying; reactions to
loss, death, and grief; and recovery from bereavement.” Includes an index and
information about each contributor.
1272. Markham, Ursula. Element Guide to Bereavement: Your Questions An-
swered. Boston: Element Books, 1996.
1273. Marris, Peter. Loss and Change. New York: Pantheon Books, 1974.
1274. Marshall, George N. Facing Death and Grief: A Sensible Perspective for
the Modern Person. Buffalo, NY: Prometheus Books, 1981.
1275. Martin, John D., and Frank D. Ferris. I Can’t Stop Crying: It’s So Hard
When Someone You Love Dies. Toronto, Ontario: Key Porter Books, 1992.
1276. Martin, Sheila. Saying Goodbye with Love: A Step-by-Step Guide through
the Details of Death. New York: Crossroad Publishing, 1999.
1277. Martin, Sherry Hendricks. Beginning Again: Tools for the Journey
through Grief. Edmond, OK: Greystone Press, 2006.
1278. Martin, Terry L., and Kenneth J. Doka. Men Don’t Cry . . . Women Do:
Transcending Gender Stereotypes of Grief. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 2000.
Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, con-
sulting editor.
Acknowledging that there is “substantial knowledge about the stimulus (i.e.,
loss, death), the generic response (i.e., grief, mourning), and many of the influ-
encing variables” in responding to the death of a loved one, the authors aim to
focus their research on the “major mediator between all these, that is, the mourner
himself or herself.” Their book examines gender differences during bereavement
with discussion on patterns of grief, dissonant responses, personality as a shaper
of patterns, culture as a shaping agent, the implications of adaptive strategies for
counselors, and strategies for self-help and intervention. The authors’ research
tools, including the grief pattern inventory; extensive references; a bibliography;
and an index are incorporated.
170 Chapter 16

1279. Matse, Jan, H. Faber, and Marc-Armand-Jean-Marie Nevejan. Bereave-

ment: Three Aspects of Mourning for the Bereaved and for Those Who Want to
Help Them. London: Butterworth Press, 1971.
1280. Mayfield, James L. Discovering Grace in Grief. Nashville, TN: Upper
Room Books, 1994.
1281. McCabe, Marilyn. The Paradox of Loss: Toward a Relational Theory of
Grief. Westport, CT: Praeger, 2003.
1282. McCarthy, Sarah. A Voice for Those Bereaved by Suicide. Dublin, Ire-
land: Veritas Publications, 2001.
While telling the tragic story of her husband’s suicide, McCarthy offers a com-
passionate guide for those coping with the same unique grief. She also discusses
the challenges of dealing with such a tragedy when she was left with four children
under the age of ten. Their grief and her long road to recovery are detailed. She
discusses feelings of guilt, blame, anxiety, depression, of being defeated by life,
anger, alienation, forgiveness, hate, letting go, stress, and ultimate healing. A
short list of suggested titles is included; however, they deal with grief in general
and not the grief that follows suicide.
1283. McCormack, Jerusha Hull. Grieving: A Beginner’s Guide. Brewster,
MA: Paraclete Press, 2006. Originally published by Darton, Longman and Todd,
Ltd., London, in 2005.
In this short guidebook for those grieving the death of a loved one, McCor-
mack suggests that grief is a path of suffering through which many unexpected
discoveries may occur. She points out the “signposts” where these discoveries
may exist and where they may ultimately guide the reader to a new life. She notes
that the book is “less of a consolatory piece than a tour guide.” Written from a
Christian perspective, the text includes lots of practical advice along with quotes
and poems. McCormack is a member of the Anglican Church of Ireland.
1284. McIlwraith, Hamish. Coping with Bereavement. London: Oneworld,
1998.
1285. Menten, Ted. After Goodbye: How to Begin Again after the Death of
Someone You Love. Philadelphia: Running Press, 1994.
1286. Metzgar, Margaret. A Time to Mourn, a Time to Dance. Appleton, WI:
Aid Association for Lutherans/Quality Life Resources, 2000.
Metzgar’s work is a comforting book with Bible verses, stories, photographs,
and suggestions for coping with different kinds of loss. Includes an annotated
bibliography and an excellent list of national support resources with descriptions,
websites, email addresses, and hours of operation. Metzgar is founder of and
primary therapist at the Transition and Loss Center in Seattle, Washington.
 Grief and Mourning 171

1287. Miller, Jack Silvey. The Healing Power of Grief. New York: Seabury
Press, 1978. A Crossroad book.
1288. Miller, James E. A Pilgrimage through Grief: Healing the Soul’s Hurt
after Loss. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1995. Includes photographs by the
author.
1289. ———. Seasons of Grief and Healing: A Guide for Those Who Mourn.
Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 2000. Originally published as Winter
Grief, Summer Grace in 1995.
Focusing on how natural the grief process is, Miller validates the reader’s feel-
ings of loss. He uses numerous quotations, Bible verses, and passages from litera-
ture in this 63-page book. Miller is an Indiana grief counselor and clergyman.
1290. Miller, Jolanda. You Can Become Whole Again: A Guide to Christians in
Grieving. Atlanta, GA: John Knox Press, 1981.
1291. Miller, Robert J., and Stephen J. Hrycyniak. Grief Quest: Reflections for
Men Coping with Loss. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1996. Also cited as Grief
Quest: Men Coping with Loss.
Miller, a priest, offers ideas for men dealing with loss and grief.
1292. Miller, Sally Downham. Mourning and Dancing: A Memoir of Grief and
Recovery. Deerfield Beach, FL: Health Communications, 1999.
Miller’s memoir tells the story of her family’s bereavement and ultimate re-
covery following the death of her husband, Robert, from reticulum sarcoma. He
died nine days after his diagnosis. Through her personal experience and work
with grieving families, she has become a consultant, speaker, and writer on the
subjects of grief and loss.
1293. Minamide, Elaine. How Should One Cope with Death? Farmington Hills,
MI: Greenhaven Press, 2006.
1294. Minear, Paul Sevier. To Die and to Live: Christ’s Resurrection and
Christian Vocation. New York: Seabury Press, 1977.
Minear presents a book of comfort from a Christian perspective.
1295. Mitsch, Raymond R., and Lynn Brookside. Grieving the Loss of Someone
You Love: Daily Meditations to Help You through the Grieving Process. Ventura,
CA: Regal Books, 1993. Regal Books is a ministry of Gospel Light, a Christian
publisher. Originally published by Servant Publications in 1993.
A series of daily devotions, this book intends to help the reader work through
the emotions of anger, guilt, fear, and depression. It offers guidance for coming to
terms with loss from a Christian perspective. Includes quotes and Bible verses.
172 Chapter 16

1296. Mitscherlich, Alexander, and Margarete Mitscherlich. The Inability to

Mourn: Principles of Collective Behavior. New York: Grove Press, 1975. Dis-
tributed by Random House.
1297. Moffat, M. J. In the Midst of Winter: Selections from the Literature of
Mourning. New York: Vintage Books, 1982.
1298. Mogensen, Greg. Greeting the Angels: An Imaginal View of the Mourn-
ing Process. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1992. Part of the Death,
Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1299. Moltmann, Jurgen. In the End, the Beginning: The Life of Hope. Minne-
apolis, MN: Fortress Press, 2004. Also cited as being published by SCM Press,
London.
1300. Montgomery, Herb, and Mary Ann Montgomery. Beyond Sorrow: Re-
flections on Death and Grief. Minneapolis, MN: Winston Press, 1977. Features
photographs by the authors.
1301. Moody, Raymond A. Jr., and Dianne Arcangel. Life after Loss: Conquer-
ing Grief and Finding Hope. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 2001.
Arcangel is a former hospice chaplain and former director of the Elisabeth
Kübler-Ross Center of Houston. Moody is the author of Life after Life, a bestsell-
ing classic on death and dying. He is also an authority on near-death experiences.
This book discusses the stress of grief, emotions associated with grief, different
types of grieving associated with varying kinds of loss, receiving sympathy, func-
tional versus dysfunctional grief, adjusting to loss, transcending loss, blessings
received from loss, and near-death experiences. Interesting sections are included
on the effect of the Kennedy assassination and Princess Diana’s death on our
perceptions of loss. Includes an extensive list of print and Internet resources, a
directory of associations and organizations, and a glossary.
1302. Moore, James W. When Grief Breaks Your Heart. Nashville, TN: Abing-
don Press, 1995.
1303. Moorey, James. Living with Grief and Mourning. New York: Manches-
ter University Press, 1995. Distributed in the United States and Canada by St.
Martin’s Press, New York.
1304. Morgan, John D. Death 101: A Workbook for Educating and Healing.
Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2002. Part of the Death, Value, and Mean-
ing Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1305. ———. Personal Care in an Impersonal World: A Multidimensional Look
at Bereavement. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1993. Part of the Death,
Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
 Grief and Mourning 173

1306. Moriarty, David M., ed. The Loss of Loved Ones: The Effects of a Death
in the Family on Personality Development. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas,
1967. Originally published by Dutton, New York, in 1946.
Foreword by Bardwell H. Flower. Contributions from Timothy Harrington.
1307. Morris, Sarah. Grief and How to Live with It. New York: Grosset &
Dunlap, 1972.
1308. Mundy, Linus. Grief Therapy for Men: How to Grieve Like a “Real”
Man. St. Meinrad, IN: Abbey Press, 1997.
1309. Neimeyer, Robert A. Lessons of Loss: A Guide to Coping. New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1998. Published by Brunner-Routledge, Philadelphia, in 2001.
1310. ———. Meaning Reconstruction and the Experience of Loss. Washing-
ton, DC: American Psychological Association, 2001.
1311. Noel, Brook. Grief Steps: Ten Steps to Regroup, Rebuild, and Renew
after Any Life Loss. Fredonia, WI: Champion Press, 2004.
1312. Noel, Brook, and Pamela D. Blair. I Wasn’t Ready to Say Goodbye: Sur-
viving, Coping, and Healing after the Sudden Death of a Loved One. Belgium,
WI: Champion Press, 2000.
1313. Nolen-Hoeksema, Susan, and Judith Larson. Coping with Loss. Mahwah,
NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1999. Part of the LEA Series in Personality
and Clinical Psychology, Irving B. Weiner, editor.
Based on a long-term study of several hundred people who lost a loved one,
called the Bereavement Coping Project, this book offers a scholarly exploration
of the variety of ways in which people cope with the death of someone they love.
Utilizing more than 300 bereavement experiences, the authors discuss different
perspectives on loss, the special challenges of different types of losses, the effect
of personality on coping, children and grief, growth and resilience following loss,
and interventions. The book includes real-life stories, and it is highlighted by a
section at the end titled “Voices,” in which grieving people talk about coping
in their own words. Though important for researchers and scholars, the book is
especially appropriate for hospice workers, clergy, and other caregivers. Includes
extensive references and author and subject indexes. Nolen-Hoeksema is profes-
sor of psychology and director of the Gender and Mental Health Program at the
University of Michigan. Larson is a private practice therapist in California.
1314. Nouwen, Henri J. M. The Wounded Healer. Garden City, NJ: Image
Books, 1972.
1315. O’Connor, Nancy. Letting Go with Love: The Grieving Process. Tucson,
AZ: La Mariposa Press, 1985.
174 Chapter 16

1316. O’Toole, Donna R. Healing and Growing through Grief. Burnsville, NC:
Rainbow Connection, 1987.
1317. Oaks, Judy. Leaders Guide for Grief Recovery Support Groups. 2nd ed.
Berea, KY: Center for Personal Recovery, 1994.
1318. Oates, Wayne Edward. Your Particular Grief. Philadelphia: Westminster
Press, 1981.
1319. Osmont, Kelly. More Than Surviving: Caring for Yourself While You
Grieve. Portland, OR: Nobility Press, 1990.
1320. Osmont, Kelly, and Marilyn McFarlane. Parting Is Not Goodbye: Cop-
ing with Grief in Creative, Healthy Ways. Portland, OR: Nobility Press, 1986.
1321. Osterweis, Marian, Fredric Solomon, and Morris Green, eds. Bereave-
ment: Reactions, Consequences, and Care. Washington, DC: National Academy
Press, 1984.
1322. Parkes, Colin Murray. Bereavement: Studies of Grief in Adult Life. 2nd
American ed. Madison, CT: International Universities Press, 1987. Originally
published by the Tavistock Institute of Human Relations in 1972. Also published
by International Universities Press in 1973. Published by Penguin Books, Lon-
don, in 2004.
This book is a scholarly text widely used in the training of health professionals,
social workers, lawyers, clergy, and funeral directors. Parkes, senior lecturer in
psychiatry at the London Hospital, Whitechapel, discusses anger and guilt fol-
lowing a death, atypical grief, determinants of grief, mitigation, and the gaining
of a new identity. Foreword by John Bowlby.
1323. ———. Love and Loss: The Roots of Grief and Its Complications. New
York: Routledge/Taylor & Francis, 1996.
Dubbed a “doyen of bereavement research” by Margaret S. Stroebe, Parkes
offers another important text on grief and bereavement. He focuses on the links
between love and loss. He notes in his introduction that, “For most people love
is the most profound source of pleasure in our lives, while the loss of those who
we love is the most profound source of pain. Hence, love and loss are two sides
of the same coin.” He goes on to point out that, “It is the very intransience of life
that enhances love.” Based on a research project, Parkes explores these connec-
tions with discussion on attachment and love, patterns of attachment and patterns
of grief, other influences on attachment and loss, and disorders of attachment
and other psychiatric problems. Twenty-seven appendixes present and illustrate
Parkes’s research. Includes a brief list of organizations concerned with attach-
ment and loss, extensive references, and an index.
1324. Parkes, Colin Murray, and Robert S. Weiss. Recovery from Bereavement.
New York: Basic Books, 1983.
 Grief and Mourning 175

As with The First Year of Bereavement (Glick, Weiss, and Parkes, 1974), this
book, considered a classic of thanatological literature, also is based on the Har-
vard Bereavement Study, which documented how widows and widowers under
forty-five years of age coped with bereavement. This work, unlike the first, ex-
amines why some in the study had significant challenges to recovery when they
suffered immediate, unexpected grief, the reasons for intense anger and guilt, and
why some had lasting difficulties in adjustment. Includes tables and an index.
1325. Payne, Sheila, Sandra Horn, and Marilyn Relf. Loss and Bereavement.
Philadelphia: Open University Press, 1999. Part of the Health Psychology series,
Sheilla Payne and Sandra Horn, editors.
In an effort to provide students with an understanding of specific models of
adaptation to loss and important theoretical perspectives, the authors discuss
how conceptual models have been used in clinical and community interventions
and critique them. This comprehensive text examines the many variations to ap-
proaching loss and bereavement. Special attention is given to loss and bereave-
ment in social and cultural contexts, emphasizing the significant diversity of
approaches. Includes extensive references.
1326. Peacock, Carol Antoinette. Death and Dying. Portland, OR: Green Earth
Books, 2005.
Peacock, a child psychologist, presents this text on grieving as a guidebook
with specific steps for dealing with the pain of loss.
1327. Pearson, Althea. Growing through Loss and Grief: Dealing with Life’s
Tough Times. London: Marshall Pickering, 1998.
1328. Pike, Diane Kennedy. Life Is Victorious!: How to Grow through Grief.
New York: Simon & Schuster, 1976. Also published by Pocket Books, New
York, in 1977.
This book is a positive, cheery approach to dealing with grief.
1329. Pincus, Lily. Death and the Family: The Importance of Mourning. New
York: Pantheon Books, 1974. Also published by Vintage Paperbacks in 1976,
and Random House, New York, in 1976.
A frequently cited classic of bereavement literature, Pincus’s book uses per-
sonal stories gleaned from her work as a psychotherapist and social worker to re-
lay the critical importance of the bereavement process. She examines the effects
of grief on marriages, widowhood, repressed mourning, and effective methods
and tools for helping the bereaved. Pincus founded the Institute for Marital Stud-
ies at the Tavistock Institute for Human Relations in London. She notes in her
preface that she was seventy-five years old when she began writing this book.
1330. Pollock, George H. The Mourning-Liberation Process. Madison, CT:
International Universities Press, 1989. Published in two volumes.
176 Chapter 16

In this extensive investigation into the mourning-liberation process, Pol-

lock discusses mourning and adaptation, parent and sibling loss in childhood,
abandonment, the vulnerability associated with loss, manifestations of abnormal
mourning, issues associated with anniversaries and time, Freudian psychotherapy,
abandoning parents and abusive caretakers, and mourning and memorialization
through music. Pollock also gives general commentary on loss and creativity.
Includes references and name and subject indexes.
1331. Prend, Ashley Davis. Transcending Loss: Understanding the Lifelong
Impact of Grief and How to Make It Meaningful. New York: Berkley Books,
1997.
A psychotherapist and grief counselor, Prend suggests that death offers an
opportunity for a new type of relationship based on memory, spirit, and love
rather than physical presence. She discusses the shock of death and the ensuing
grief journey, the lifelong impact of grief, and “roadblocks and detours” to tran-
scendence of loss and grief. Detailing her solution for making loss meaningful,
Prend offers the acronym SOAR: spirituality, outreach (helping others), attitude
(healthy thinking), and reinvestment (embracing life). Includes a brief list of titles
for suggested reading.
1332. Price, Eugenia. Getting through the Night: Finding Your Way after the
Loss of a Loved One. New York: Random House, 1986.
1333. Ramsay, Ronald W., and Rene Noorbergen. Living with Loss: A Dra-
matic New Breakthrough in Grief Therapy. New York: William Morrow, 1981.
1334. Rando, Therese A., ed. Clinical Dimensions of Anticipatory Mourning:
Theory and Practice in Working with the Dying, Their Loved Ones, and Their
Caregivers. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2000.
1335. ———. How to Go on Living When Someone You Love Dies. New York:
Bantam Books, 1991. Reprint. Originally published as Grieving, by Lexington
Books, Lexington, MA, in 1988.
1336. ———, ed. Loss and Anticipatory Grief. Lexington, MA: Lexington
Books, 1986.
In this classic text, the contributors provide specific techniques for dealing
with impending loss. Rando notes that advances in medicine have profoundly
changed the nature of terminal illness and extended the dying process. Her book
addresses the resulting issue of anticipatory grief. Topics covered include adap-
tive anticipation of bereavement; anticipatory grief and reinvestment; the effects
of this grief on patients, family members, and caregivers; the clergy perspective;
meditation; creating and therapeutically utilizing anticipatory grief in survivors
of sudden death; strategies for the classroom; an older person’s anticipation of
their own death; and anticipating the death of an elderly parent. Practical matters
addressed are funeral preplanning, legal and ethical issues for both individuals
 Grief and Mourning 177

and institutions, and financial planning. Brief professional background informa-

tion is provided for each contributor. Includes a document and asset planning
form as part of financial and estate planning recommendations.
1337. Raphael, Beverly. The Anatomy of Bereavement. New York: Basic
Books, 1983.
In this comprehensive treatment of bereavement for academicians, the helping
professions, and those grieving, Raphael describes the various stages of mourn-
ing and healing and examines how bereavement is different at each stage of life.
A professor of psychiatry at the University of Newcastle in New South Wales,
Australia, she begins with a look at human bonds and death and the experience of
bereavement with separation then mourning. She moves on to the bereaved child;
adolescent grief and mourning; and other types of grief, including the death of a
spouse and the death of a child. Raphael also discusses the unique dynamics of
bereavement when brought about by death associated with disaster. She offers
suggestions for caring for the bereaved and how to live with loss. Extensive refer-
ences and a thorough index are included.
1338. Rapoport, Nessa. A Woman’s Book of Grieving. New York: William
Morrow, 1994. Linocuts by Rochelle Rubinstein Kaplan.
Rapoport provides a book of poems and meditations on grieving and loss.
1339. Reinsmith, A. M. Brady. Surviving Grief: Thirty Questions and Answers
for a Time of Loss. Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 2001.
1340. Rhea, Carolyn. When Grief Is Your Constant Companion: God’s Grace
for a Woman’s Heartache. New Hope, AL: New Hope Publishers, 2003.
1341. Rich, Phil. Grief Counseling Homework Planner. New York: John Wiley
& Sons, 2001.
1342. ———. A Healing Journey through Grief: Your Journey for Reflec-
tion/Recovery and Clinician’s Guide to a Healing Journey through Grief. New
York: John Wiley & Sons, 2000. The second title is the title of the accompanying
booklet.
1343. Roach, Sally S., and Beatriz C. Nieto. Healing and the Grief Process.
Albany, NY: Delmar Publishers, 1997. Part of the Nurse as Healer Series, Lynn
Keegan, series editor.
Intended for nurses and other health care professionals, this book surfaces and
discusses various situations that deal with death and dying. The text includes
alternative healing strategies, resources for caregivers and the bereaved, and per-
sonal stories of grief and loss. Roach and Nieto, both assistant professors in the
health sciences, discuss a consensus definition of grief and the role of the nurse
in the grieving process. Definitions of various terms, grief theories, and attributes
of grief are explored. Chapters also focus on anticipatory grief, the role of hospice
care, surviving the loss of a loved one, helping children cope with grief, grieving
178 Chapter 16

in the context of AIDS, traumatic loss, chronic sorrow, caregiving, bereavement

care, the role of “nurse-healers,” and growing through grief. The authors com-
ment on bibliotherapy, journal writing, relaxation therapy, and imagery as coping
methods during bereavement. Includes references and an index.
1344. Rochlin, Gregory. Griefs and Discontents: The Focus of Change. Bos-
ton: Little, Brown, 1965.
1345. Romanyshyn, Robert. The Soul in Grief: Love, Death, and Transforma-
tion. Berkeley, CA: North Atlantic Books, 1999.
1346. Roos, Susan. Chronic Sorrow: A Living Loss. New York: Brunner-
Routledge, 2002. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A.
Neimeyer, consulting editor.
In this work, the author achieves her goal of establishing a place for chronic
sorrow in the larger multidisciplinary field of loss and bereavement. She writes
extensively on the definition and parameters of chronic sorrow, while acknowl-
edging that it was Simon Olshansky, a rehabilitation counselor, who used the
term in the 1960s to describe the various grief responses of parents following the
diagnosis of a child’s mental retardation. Part of Roos’s historical treatment of
the subject of chronic sorrow is a captivating review of the historical mistreat-
ment and abuse of the mentally ill and physically disabled throughout human
history. She discusses interpreting loss; living with chronic sorrow; existential
issues of disillusionment, aloneness, vulnerability, inequity, insignificance, and
mortality; complicating factors; professional support and treatment; and implica-
tions and directions for research. She also includes commentary on loss themes
in fictionalized works. A final chapter discusses trends in professional education,
the shift toward depathologizing grief, psychotherapy, and the increasing preva-
lence of chronic sorrow. Includes a poem entitled “Words,” by Roos; extensive
references; and an index.
1347. Rose, Ada Campbell. Acquainted with Grief. Philadelphia: Westminster
Press, 1972.
1348. Rosenblatt, Paul C. Bitter, Bitter Tears: Nineteenth-Century Diarists and
Twentieth-Century Grief Theories. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press,
1983.
During a 1977 to 1978 school year sabbatical, Rosenblatt researched unpub-
lished nineteenth-century diaries containing material on close relationships. A
professor in the department of family social science at the University of Min-
nesota, he had been doing scholarly work on romantic love and was looking
to develop a bibliography and set of research notes on diaries. He discovered
that while diaries dealt with many elements of close relationships, there was a
significant volume of material on deaths, grief, and separations. He describes
the incredibly intense, personal, and emotional experiences of reading people’s
 Grief and Mourning 179

accounts of loss and bereavement. In this book, Rosenblatt explores many facets
and nuances of the diarists and their grief. Topics covered include the truthful-
ness of diarists in communicating their grief, their understanding of when the loss
occurred, patterning of grief, theories of grief work and its stages, anticipation
of death and separations, infant and maternal deaths, terminal care, changes over
time in mentions of loss, sibling and spousal loss, controlling grief, grief and
family symptoms, spiritism, heavenly reunions, substitutions for the lost, child-
naming and the seeking of a substitute, symbolic interaction theory, and widow-
hood. Three appendixes discuss working with diaries, the diarists the author re-
searched, and statistics. Includes a bibliography and name and subject indexes.
1349. Ross, E. Betsy. Life after Suicide: A Ray of Hope for Those Left Behind.
New York: Insight Books, 1997.
1350. Roth, Deborah. Stepping Stones to Grief Recovery. New York: Borgo
Press, 1988. Published with the Center for Help in Times of Loss. Also cited as
being published by IBS Press, Santa Monica, CA, in 1988.
1351. Ruitenbeek, Hendrik Marinus. Death and Mourning. Northvale, NJ:
Jason Aronson, 1995.
1352. Russell, Robert A. Dry Those Tears. Santa Monica, CA: DeVorss & Co.,
1975.
1353. Rynearson, Edward K. Retelling Violent Death. Philadelphia: Brunner-
Routledge, 2001.
Emphasizing that a violent death is more than a death in that it is caused by
external action, Rynearson writes about how the drama of violent dying is most
commonly retold as a story, and the compulsive replaying of this story “often
eclipses the retelling of [the person’s] living—the way they died takes precedence
over the way they lived.” He notes that the continuous replaying of this story
becomes unbearable, as it can only end in terror. Through the book, appropriate
for both clinicians and family members, Rynearson endeavors to help the reader
achieve a retelling that is restorative. He defines this as the “narrative reframing
of a violent dying story to include the teller as participant, rather than a horrified
witness, and to reconnect the teller with the living memories of the deceased.”
Among the topics explored are reenactment stories, resilient retelling, moving
from incoherent to coherent retelling, the incoherence of intense distress, illus-
trations of restorative retelling, retelling for children and adolescents, a model of
restorative retelling, specialized interventions, retelling the literature of death and
dying, and foretelling clinical challenges. An appendix features screening and
interventions for violent dying support, including support group guidance and
structures. Includes references and an index. Rynearson is a clinical professor of
psychiatry at the University of Washington and medical director of the Homicide
Support Project at the Virginia Mason Medical Center in Seattle, Washington.
180 Chapter 16

1354. Salem, Harry, and Cheryl Salem. From Grief to Glory: Rediscovering
Life after Loss. New Kensington, PA: Whitaker House, 2003.
1355. ———. From Mourning to Morning: Discovering the Healing Power of
God’s Love to Take You from Grief to Glory. Tulsa, OK: Harrison House Pub-
lishers, 2001.
1356. Sanders, Catherine M. Grief: The Mourning After, Dealing with Adult
Bereavement. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1989. Part of the Wiley Series on
Personality Processes, Irving B. Weiner, editor.
Intended for caregivers and health professionals, this book is a clinical ex-
amination of loss and grief. It offers practical suggestions for those who care for
the bereaved. Sanders presents her “Integrative Theory of Bereavement,” which
describes the phases of grief following the death of a loved one and provides
the basis for interventions during the grieving period. The phases include shock,
awareness of loss, conservation/withdrawal, healing, and renewal. She includes a
review of the evolution of bereavement theories and a discussion of complicated
grief, personality variables, social-situational variables, and death and the “family
constellation.” She also reviews the differences between the deaths of children,
spouses, and parents. A list of references as well as author and subject indexes
are included. A clinical practitioner in Charlotte, North Carolina, Sanders was
founder and coordinator of the Loss and Bereavement Resource Center at the
University of South Florida in Tampa.
1357. ———. Surviving Grief and Learning to Live Again. New York: Wiley,
1992.
1358. Sanders, Catherine M., P. A. Mauger, and P. N. Strong. A Manual for
the Grief Experience Inventory. Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psychologist Press,
1977.
1359. Schatz, William H. Healing a Father’s Grief. Redmond, WA: Medic
Publishing Co., 1984.
1360. Schiff, Harriett Sarnoff. Living through Mourning: Finding Comfort and
Hope When a Loved One Has Died. New York: Viking Press, 1986.
1361. Schleifer, Jay. Everything You Need to Know When Someone You Know
Has Been Killed. New York: Rosen Publishing Group, 1998.
1362. Schmitt, Abraham. Turn Again to Life: Growing Old through Grief.
Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 1987.
1363. Schneider, John. Stress, Loss, and Grief: Understanding Their Origins
and Growth Potential. Baltimore, MD: University Park Press, 1984. Also pub-
lished by Aspen Systems Corporation, Rockville, MD, in 1984.
 Grief and Mourning 181

Intended for those in the helping professions, Schneider’s book touches on

two primary themes—death and stress—noting that the latter when associated
with the former can have a profound impact on both mental and physical health.
Schneider discusses the implications of loss, the dimensions of loss, developmen-
tally related loss, a model for grieving, various processes for grieving, and facili-
tating the grieving process. He also offers a comparison of theories of mourning
using a holistic model. Chapters begin with familiar quotes. References are lo-
cated at the conclusion of each chapter. Includes author and subject indexes.
1364. Schneider, John M. Finding My Way: Healing and Transforming through
Loss and Grief. Colfax, WI: Seasons Press, 1994.
Schneider’s book is about the types of transformations that occur when indi-
viduals recognize loss and allow themselves to grieve. He notes in his preface
that grief is a “process of mending the breaks in our stories, moving beyond our
success and peak experiences to integrating the broken parts.” Topics include
grieving as a discovery process; recognizing and validating losses; coping with
awareness; healing and perspective; and integrating losses through remembering,
restoring, and recreating. He offers a life change inventory, responses to the loss
inventory instrument, models of loss and grief, and information about INTEGRA
(Association for Integrative and Transformative Grief) in three appendixes. In-
cludes references and recommended reading in a single bibliography, a glossary
for terms used in the book, and an index.
1365. Schneiderman, G. Coping with Death in the Family. Oakville, Ontario:
Chimo Publishing, 1979.
1366. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Arthur C. Carr, Austin H. Kutscher, David
Peretz, and Ivan K. Goldberg, eds. Anticipatory Grief. New York: Columbia
University Press, 1974. The Foundation of Thanatology is acknowledged in the
preparation of this volume.
The editors bring together an amazing fifty-nine contributors, many noted
thanatologists, in this important text on anticipatory grief. Numerous facets of an-
ticipatory grief are explored, including societal responses, dynamics of anticipa-
tory grief, psychotherapy and pharmacotherapy as enablers, clinical aspects and
observations, initiatory grief, ritual and therapy, and terminology in this arena.
The contributors also extensively explore anticipatory grief in such varied audi-
ences as parents, siblings, health care professionals, social workers, and caregiv-
ers. Includes references and an index.
1367. Schoeneck, Therese S. Hope for the Bereaved: Understanding, Coping,
and Growing through Grief. Syracuse, NY: Hope for the Bereaved, 2001.
This book is a collection of articles written for the bereaved by those who have
experienced a loss. Hope for the Bereaved, founded in 1978, is an independent,
not-for-profit community organization dedicated to providing hope, support, and
services to the bereaved.
182 Chapter 16

1368. Scrutton, Steve. Bereavement and Grief: Supporting Older People

through Loss. London: E. Arnold, 1995.
1369. Seale, Clive. Constructing Death: The Sociology of Dying and Bereave-
ment. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1998.
Seale examines death in social and material worlds. He discusses social aspects
of death, embodiment and the social structure, and experiencing and representing
the body. He also covers awareness and control of dying, grief and resurrective
practices, reporting death, revival of death awareness, and death in the context
of modern medicine. Includes tables on the distribution of hospice and palliative
care services worldwide and a comparison of people receiving hospice services
with others, views about dying earlier, and requests for euthanasia. Includes ex-
tensive references and an index.
1370. Selder, Florence, Mary Kachoyeanos, Mary Jo Baisch, and Mary Gissler,
eds. Enduring Grief: True Stories of Personal Loss. Philadelphia: Charles Press,
1994.
With the aim of helping people “learn how to pull their lives together after
suffering a terrible loss,” Selder and her fellow editors attempt to give practi-
cal advice rather than a theoretical discussion of loss. The text is rooted in the
experiences of 100 people interviewed by the editors. Topics addressed include
maintaining hope, seeking help from a hospice nurse, sibling loss, miscarriage,
death in a school setting, infant death, survivor guilt, AIDS, and parental grief.
Includes the names of many of those who told their stories. Selder is a practic-
ing psychotherapist and professor of nursing at the University of Wisconsin at
Milwaukee.
1371. Shapiro, Ester R. Grief as a Family Process: A Developmental Approach
to Clinical Practice. New York: Guilford Press, 1994.
Shapiro notes that much of the critical writing about death typically advocating
for a “more direct cultural confrontation with the reality of death” has focused
on the individual’s struggle with mortality and restoring control of one’s own
dying. In this book, she attempts to involve and direct attention to the painful
experiences of family members into society’s understanding of death and dying.
The book is for professionals who provide counseling to the bereaved of all ages.
In her fourteen chapters, Shapiro discusses a systemic developmental approach
to family bereavement, grief in adulthood, widowhood, childhood bereavement,
stories of grieving children, models of family bereavement, adaptation to the
crisis of grief, enhancing strategies for stable reorganization of bereaved fami-
lies, childhood death and its impact on adult and family development, cultural
and social factors, the sociocultural context of grief, circumstances of death and
the structure of grief, and grief therapy in the context of family development.
Includes references and an index.
 Grief and Mourning 183

1372. Shaw, Eva. What to Do When a Loved One Dies: A Practical and Com-
passionate Guide to Dealing with Death on Life’s Terms. Irvine, CA: Dickens
Press, 1993. Published by Writeriffic Publishing Group, Carlsbad, CA, in 2005.
In this thorough guide and sourcebook for those dealing with the death of a
loved one, Shaw offers suggestions for dealing with news of a death in the hours
immediately following notification, with specifics depending on the location and
manner of death. She discusses hospice, death in a care facility/at home/at work,
death certificates, autopsies, religious views of varying treatments of the body
following death, contacting family members, disposition, embalming, rituals,
funerals, memorial and committal services, memorial societies, death announce-
ments, and death etiquette. Additional chapters focus on loss; stages of grief;
coping with traumatic death; homicide and suicide; euthanasia; differences in
bereavement between genders, sexes, and age groups; support groups; recovery
through twelve-step programs; wills; legal issues; and benefits. She continues
on to include suggestions for such special situations as the death of a travel
companion, talking with the press when a death becomes a media event, when
death occurs abroad, and the public ordeal of a violent crime. The text includes
numerous quotes in the margins. Includes hundreds of listings of resources, sup-
port groups, and other places to seek assistance. Also offers information about the
Dougy Center for Grieving Children in Portland, Oregon. Although there is no
bibliography, excellent references are scattered throughout the book.
1373. Sheepshanks, Mary. The Bird of My Loving: A Personal Response to
Loss and Grief. London: M. Joseph, 1997.
1374. Sherr, Lorraine. Grief and AIDS. New York: Wiley, 1995.
1375. Shoshanna, Brenda. Embarkations: A Guide to Dealing with Death and
Parting. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1982.
1376. Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe. Helping Women Cope with Grief. Beverly
Hills, CA: Sage Publications, 1981.
1377. Silverman, William B., and Kenneth M. Cinnamon. When Mourning
Comes: A Book of Comfort for the Grieving. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1982.
Also cited as being published by Nelson-Hall, Chicago.
A book of comfort for the grieving, this text includes several literary, historical,
and religious references. Each chapter concludes with a page entitled “One Step
at a Time!” and offers suggestions for coping with bereavement. Also includes
several inspirational quotes. A bit melodramatic at times, the book’s introduction
notes it is “written for you with a pen dipped in tears.”
1378. Singer, Lilly, Margaret Sirot, and Susan Rodd. Beyond Loss: A Practical
Guide through Grief to a Meaningful Life. New York: Dutton, 1988.
184 Chapter 16

1379. Smith, Harold Ivan. Death and Grief: Healing through Support. Min-
neapolis, MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1995.
1380. ———. A Decembered Grief: Living with Loss While Others Are Cel-
ebrating. Kansas City, MO: Beacon Hill Press, 1999.
1381. ———. Friendgrief: An Absence Called Presence. Amityville, NY: Bay-
wood Publishing, 2001. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D.
Morgan, editor.
1382. ———. The Grief Care Guide. Kansas City, MO: Beacon Hill Press,
2002.
1383. Smith, Kathleen. Help for the Bereaved. London: Duckworth, 1978.
1384. ———. The Stages of Sorrow. Totowa, NJ: Biblio Distribution Centre,
1978.
1385. Smolin, Ann, and John Guinan. Healing after the Suicide of a Loved One.
New York: Simon & Schuster, 1993.
1386. Soder-Alderfer, Kay. With Those Who Grieve: Twenty Grief Survivors
Share Their Stories of Loss, Pain, and Hope. Elgin, IL: Lion Publishing, 1994.
1387. Spall, Bob, and Stephen Callis. Loss, Bereavement, and Grief: A Guide
to Effective Caring. Cheltenham, England: Stanley Thorne, 1997.
1388. Spiegel, Yorick. The Grief Process. London: SCM Press, 1978.
1389. ———. The Grief Process: Analysis and Counseling. Nashville, TN:
Abingdon Press, 1977.
1390. Spies, Karen Bornemann. Everything You Need to Know about Grieving.
New York: Rosen Publishing Group, 1990.
1391. Sprang, Ginny, and John S. McNeil. The Many Faces of Bereavement:
The Nature and Treatment of Natural, Traumatic, and Stigmatized Grief. New
York: Brunner/Mazel, 1995.
Beginning with a theoretical overview of traditional models of grief, the
authors explore typical grief responses, parental and spousal grief, and death
among the elderly. They then move on to an in-depth analysis and discussion of
traumatic grief and stigmatized grief. The section on traumatic grief examines
bereavement following death by murder, drunk driving, community disaster,
and critical incident. The section on stigmatized grief offers the same treatment
for bereavement associated with suicide and an AIDS-related death. As with
many books on thanatological subjects, this one notes the significant research
on bereavement of recent decades, particularly in the more specialized areas of
traumatic and stigmatized grief. Includes an appendix with a list of organizations
for survivors and victims, a bibliography, and name and subject indexes.
 Grief and Mourning 185

1392. Staudacher, Carol. Beyond Grief: A Guide for Recovering from the Death
of a Loved One. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 1987.
Staudacher offers an extremely detailed guide for the bereaved. The text is
full of specific suggestions for coping and dealing with a multitude of feelings
following the death of a loved one. She discusses the grief experience; disbe-
lief and numbness; the need for ritual; feelings of guilt, anger, fear, anxiety,
and despair; specific issues associated with the loss based on relationship to
the deceased; and issues related to the manner of death. These chapters address
accidental death, suicide, and murder. Staudacher offers guidelines for support
groups, ways to reach out for help, and suggestions for helping others grieve.
She also includes tips for assessing progress through bereavement. Her sug-
gestions are easily located in bulleted lists. A list of references is included.
1393. ———. Men and Grief: A Guide for Men Surviving the Death of a Loved
One: A Resource for Caregivers and Mental Health Professionals. Oakland, CA:
New Harbinger Publications, 1991.
1394. ———. A Time to Grieve: Meditations for Healing after the Death of a
Loved One. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1994.
This book is a collection of meditations for those who have lost a loved one.
1395. Stein, Diane. On Grief and Dying: Understanding the Soul’s Journey.
Freedom, CA: Crossing Press, 1996.
The author of several books on natural healing and spirituality, Stein presents
a guide to grieving and death from this perspective. She incorporates resources
from Greek mythology, psychic healing, and the contemporary Goddess move-
ment. She discusses death and rebirth; psychic contact with the dead; understand-
ing bereavement; acceptance of one’s own death; helping loved ones grieve;
reincarnation; and learning to accept, trust, and let go.
1396. Stroebe, Margaret S., Wolfgang Stroebe, and Robert O. Hansson, eds.
Handbook of Bereavement: Theory, Research, and Intervention. New York:
Cambridge University Press, 1993. Revised edition published in 1999. Pub-
lished in 2001 as Handbook of Bereavement Research: Theory, Research, and
Intervention.
Fifty-one contributors provide twenty-nine articles arranged into eight parts.
The articles focus on the phenomenology and measurement of grief; current
theories of grief, mourning, and bereavement; physiological changes following
bereavement; psychological, social, and health impacts of conjugal bereavement;
grief reactions to different types of loss; and coping, counseling, and therapy. The
editors also provide a framework for the book with an introductory article on be-
reavement research and theory and a conclusory article discussing contemporary
themes and controversies in bereavement research. Includes forty-six pages of
references as well as author and subject indexes.
186 Chapter 16

1397. Switzer, David K. The Dynamics of Grief: Its Sources, Pain, and Heal-
ing. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1970.
1398. Tagliaferre, Lewis, and Oary L. Harbaugh. Recovery from Loss: A
Personalized Guide to the Grieving Process. Deerfield Beach, FL: Health Com-
munications, 1990.
1399. Tallmer, Margot. Women Facing Loss: Disease, Bereavement, and Emo-
tional Response. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1996.
1400. Tanner, Dennis C. Aphasia: The Family’s Guide to the Psychology of
Loss, Grief, and Adjustment. Tulsa, OK: Modern Education Corp., 1984.
1401. Tanner, I. J. The Gift of Grief: Healing the Pain of Everyday Losses. New
York: Hawthorn Books, 1976.
Tanner addresses the stages of grief, morbid grief, substance abuse associated
with grief, and feelings of isolation in this overview of loss and bereavement.
1402. Tarlow, Sarah. Bereavement and Commemoration: An Archeology of
Mortality. Oxford, UK: Blackwell, 1999.
1403. Tatelbaum, Judy. The Courage to Grieve: Creative Living, Recovery, and
Growth. New York: Lippencott & Crowell, 1980. Published by Harper-Collins,
New York, in 1984. Also published by William Heinemann, London, in 1990, as
The Courage to Grieve: Creative Living, Recovery, and Growth through Grief.
Noting that grief is a natural, inevitable human experience, Tatelbaum pro-
vides a self-help book focused on grief following the death of a loved one. She
explores the many emotions that accompany this grief, including sorrow, guilt,
confusion, despair, resentment, and loneliness. She offers advice on coping
with the immediate experience of death as well as moving through the stages
of bereavement. Tatelbaum includes helpful information on understanding
the unique nature of grief among children. She counters the theory that grief
never ends and offers specific techniques for “finishing” or completing grief.
Appendixes include “The Dying Person’s Bill of Rights” and “Things to Be
Done after a Death Occurs,” a 19-item list of specific actions to take following
a death. Includes a brief bibliography. A psychiatric social worker at the Payne
Whitney Clinic of New York/Cornell Medical Center, she also worked at the
Massachusetts Mental Health Center and the Columbia University School of
Social Work.
1404. Temes, Roberta. Living with an Empty Chair: A Guide through Grief.
New York: Irvington Publishers, 1984. Also published by Mandala Press, Am-
herst, NY, in 1977.
1405. Tengbom, Mildred. Grief for a Season. Minneapolis, MN: Bethany
House Publishers, 1989.
 Grief and Mourning 187

1406. Thompson, Neil. Loss and Grief: A Guide for Human Services Practitio-
ners. New York: Palgrave, 2002.
1407. Thornton, V. K. The Survivor’s Guide. Los Angeles: Silver Lake Pub-
lishing, 2004.
1408. Tis’Ney, Carol. Mourner, Come to My Bosom. Los Angeles: De Vorse,
1933.
1409. Treadway, David C. Dead Reckoning: A Therapist Confronts His Own
Grief. New York: Basic Books, 1996.
1410. Tuck, William P. Facing Grief and Death. Nashville, TN: Broadman,
1975.
1411. Vail, Elaine. A Personal Guide to Living with Loss. New York: Wiley,
1982.
Vail, a professor and radio host, uses her research and personal experiences to
provide a layperson’s guide to bereavement.
1412. Valentine, Bill. A Season of Grief. Binghamton, NY: Harrington Park
Press, 2006.
Through this memoir about the loss of his partner, Valentine offers guidance
on recovering from devastating grief. It is both a love story and a narrative about
a journey through grief.
1413. Van Praagh, James. Healing Grief: Reclaiming Life after Any Loss. New
York: Dutton, 2000.
Van Praagh, an internationally known medium who claims to communicate
with spiritual realms, offers this self-help book for the bereaved. He advocates
grieving in personal ways rather than conforming to societal norms. He includes
many stories from his work as a medium. The book is filled with specific sug-
gestions on dealing with grief. A list of groups and associations as well as a brief
bibliography are included.
1414. Volkan, Vamik D., and Elizabeth Zintl. Life after Loss: The Lessons of
Grief. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1993.
Arranged in sections on complicated and uncomplicated mourning, this text
explores not only the process of grieving and its many forms but also the life-
changing effects of bereavement and the lessons it offers. Volkan, a psychiatrist
and psychoanalyst, discusses the work of mourning and letting go, using loss
as a vehicle for growth (a chapter he calls “Brutal Gifts”), circumstances that
complicate mourning, denial, when loss has no resolution, depression resulting
from grief, and differences between parents and children in bereavement. A final
section addresses possible resolutions, including therapy. Zintl is a journalist.
Includes a bibliography.
188 Chapter 16

1415. Vredevelt, Pam W. Empty Arms. Portland, OR: Multnomah Press, 1984.
1416. Walsh, Froma, and Monica McGoldrick, eds. Living beyond Loss: Death
in the Family. New York: W. W. Norton, 1995. Originally published in 1991.
Second edition paperback published by W. W. Norton, New York, in 2004.
1417. Walter, Carolyn Ambler. The Loss of a Life Partner: Narratives of the
Bereaved. New York: Columbia University Press, 2003.
Walter presents a broad review of various types of life partner loss, offers
suggestions for the helping professions, and describes possible clinical inter-
ventions. Chapters address losses related to spouses, opposite-sex partners, gay
partners, and lesbian partners. She provides discussion on similar and diverse
themes among bereaved partners, including ambivalence regarding existing ties
with bereaved partners, discrimination experienced by surviving partners, using
memories and continuing bonds in coping with grief, developing new relation-
ships, and making meaning from loss. Several intervention models are offered. A
brief discussion of clinical implications for response to the events of September
11, 2001 is included. Also includes references and an index.
1418. Walter, Tony. On Bereavement: The Culture of Grief. Philadelphia: Open
University Press, 1999. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor.
Colin Murray Parkes referred to this book as a “tour de force” on the social
position of the bereaved, a place between the living and the dead, with many
judgments from society on how to grieve. Walter discusses how the bereaved
have their grief inappropriately pathologized and policed. He covers historical
views on death and bereavement, current popular culture, politics of gender, and
an analysis of bereavement care. Includes an appendix detailing the author’s re-
search and an extensive list of references.
1419. Walton, Charlie. When There Are No Words: Finding Your Way to Cope
with Loss and Grief. Ventura, CA: Pathfinder Publishing, 1996.
1420. Weisman, Avery D. The Coping Capacity: On the Nature of Being Mor-
tal. New York: Human Sciences Press, 1984.
1421. Weizman, Savine Gross, and Phyllis Kamm. About Mourning: Support
and Guidance for the Bereaved. New York: Human Sciences Press, 1985.
Filled with personal stories and vignettes, this practical guide for the bereaved
discusses ritualized mourning through the funeral, the process of mourning,
dreams and expressions of grief, the return of grief during holidays and an-
niversaries, the death of a mate, the family as a support network, children and
grief, children and death, issues with adolescents, parental death, complicated
mourning, the importance of memories in mourning, and contemporary ethical
wills. The authors offer advice on how others can help those grieving. Includes
references and a brief index.
 Grief and Mourning 189

1422. Welshons, John E. Awakening from Grief: Finding the Way Back to Joy.
Makawao, Maui, HI: Inner Ocean, 2003. Distributed by Publishers Group West.
Originally published by Open Heart Publications, Little Falls, NJ, in 2000.
In 1981, Welshons founded Open Heart Seminars, an organization “dedicated
to enhancing spiritual education and awareness in our society.” In this book, he
offers uplifting stories and vignettes to help people recover from grief. He also
gives suggestions for coping with anger, loving and living again after a death,
finding inner peace, healing relationships, rediscovering joy, learning to forgive,
and helping others to grieve. Includes a list of recommended reading. Foreword
by Wayne W. Dyer, author of Ten Secrets for Success and Inner Peace.
1423. Wengerd, Sara. A Healing Grief: Walking with Your Friend through
Loss. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 2002.
Foreword by Larry Kehler.
1424. Wertheimer, Alison. A Special Scar: The Experiences of People Be-
reaved by Suicide. New York: Tavistock/Routledge, 1991.
1425. Westberg, Granger E. Good Grief: A Constructive Approach to the Prob-
lem of Loss. Rock Island, IL: Augustana Press, 1962. Also published by Fortress
Press, Philadelphia.
1426. Whitaker, Agnes, ed. All in the End Is Harvest: An Anthology for Those
Who Grieve. London: Darton, Longman and Todd, 1984.
Introduction by Colin Murray Parkes.
1427. White, James R. Grieving: Our Path Back to Peace. Minneapolis, MN:
Bethany House Publishers, 1997.
White, a counselor and hospital chaplain, offers a Christian-based approach to
healing the hurt of grief in this 87-page paperback.
1428. Wilson, Antoine. You and a Death in Your Family. New York: Rosen
Central, 2001.
Wilson presents a general book about death and grief for young people. It con-
tains several photographs depicting children dealing with the emotions associated
with losing a loved one. Wilson deals frankly with the subject, explaining crema-
tion and donations of bodies to science. Topics covered include talking about
death, feelings about death, emotional stages of grieving, and funerals. Includes a
very limited glossary with poorly selected terms; names, websites, and addresses
of organizations to go to for help; and a list of six books for further reading.
1429. Wolfe, Thomas. From Death to Mourning. New York: Charles Scribner
& Sons, 1958.
1430. Wolfelt, Alan D. Healing a Friend’s Grieving Heart: One Hundred
Practical Ideas for Helping Someone You Love through Loss. Fort Collins, CO:
190 Chapter 16

Companion Press, 2001. Companion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss
and Life Transition.
Wolfelt offers ideas for compassionately helping a friend through their be-
reavement. Through these numbered ideas, he teaches the fundamentals of grief
and mourning.
1431. ———. Healing Grief at Work: One Hundred Practical Ideas after Your
Workplace Is Touched by Loss. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2005. Com-
panion Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.
1432. ———. Healing the Grieving Heart: Practical Ideas for Families,
Friends, and Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 1998. Companion
Press is an imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.
1433. ———. Healing Your Grieving Heart: One Hundred Practical Ideas.
Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 1998. Companion Press is an imprint for the
Center for Loss and Life Transition.
Wolfelt offers 100 ideas on how to help yourself mourn, encouraging the
reader to take small steps toward recovering from grief.
1434. ———. The Journey through Grief: Reflections on Healing. 2nd ed. Fort
Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2003. Companion Press is an imprint for the
Center for Loss and Life Transition.
1435. ———. Understanding Grief: Helping Yourself Heal. Muncie, IN: Ac-
celerated Development, Inc., 1992.
1436. Wong, Mary M. Understanding Your Grieving Heart after a Loved
One’s Death. Longwood, FL: ADM Publishing, 2001.
Wong, editor of the National Directory of Bereavement Support Groups and
Services, provides a sourcebook for those grieving the death of a loved one. The
work contains helpful suggestions on dealing with anger, fear, stress, loneliness,
regrets, and depression. She writes about myths behind the grieving process; the
stages of grief; and such manifestations of grief as emotional, physical, intellec-
tual, spiritual, and financial challenges. Wong also covers the effects of grief on
marriage and children as well as relationships with family, friends, and cowork-
ers. She offers several suggestions on how to honor a loved one’s memory and
how to get through holidays, birthdays, and anniversaries. Much of the book is
devoted to helpful resources, including extensive information about hotlines and
support organizations. A selected bibliography divided by subject is also incor-
porated.
1437. Worden, J. William, ed. Dealing with Grief. New York: John Wiley &
Sons, 1996. Part of the IN SESSION: Psychotherapy in Practice series, Marvin
R. Goldfried, editor in chief.
In this serial for professionals, therapists address how grief is both similar
to and different from clinical depression, the characteristics of complicated
 Grief and Mourning 191

bereavement, successful therapeutic interventions for the bereaved, and treat-

ing survivors of homicide and sudden death. Includes twenty-four questions for
continuing education credits.
1438. Wray, T. J., and Ann Back Price. Grief Dreams: How They Help Heal Us
after the Death of a Loved One. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2005.
Reviewing dreams of visitation, messages, reassurance, trauma, and faith,
Wray and Price suggest that these grief dreams can be instrumental in the healing
after the death of a loved one. Using stories, the authors offer step-by-step guid-
ance on understanding and interpreting dream messages for the bereaved. Earl
A. Grollman and Kenneth J. Doka provide endorsements of the book. Includes
suggested readings and an extensive bibliography.
1439. Wright, Bob. Loss and Grief. New York: Churchill Livingstone, 1992.
Part of the Skills for Caring series, Susan Bird and David Rennie, editors.
A clinical nurse specializing in crisis intervention, Wright presents an excellent
though very general text on death and loss for those in the caring professions.
Chapters titles are “Separation and Loss,” “Grief, Dying, and Bereavement,” and
“Loss.” Appropriate for a short course on the topic, this 42-page book includes
case studies and exercise separate from the text. Includes a brief list of references
as well as titles for suggested reading.
1440. Wroblieski, Adina. Suicide Survivors: A Guide for Those Left Behind.
Minneapolis, MN: A. Wroblieski, 1994.
1441. Wylie, Betty Jane. New Beginnings: Living through Loss and Grief. To-
ronto, Ontario: Key Porter Books, 1991.
1442. Young, Dennis. Mourning Journey: Spiritual Guidance for Facing Grief,
Death, and Loss. Billerica, MA: Discipleship Publications International, 2003.
Writing from a pastoral and biblical perspective, Young presents a thoughtful
guide on dealing with process of grieving. He includes information and sugges-
tions for both those grieving and those assisting the bereaved. Young discusses
complicated grief and mourning, wakes and funerals, and “multicultural mourn-
ing.” Includes a list of organizations and support groups and a bibliography.
Young is a minister and grief counselor.
1443. Zeitlin, Steven J., and Ilana Beth Harlow. Giving a Voice to Sorrow: Per-
sonal Responses to Death and Mourning. New York: Perigee Books, 2001.
Referred to by the publisher as an “intimate grief support group in book form,”
this paperback provides several creative and personal ways to deal with death,
celebrate life, and remember loved ones. Storytelling, rituals, and memorials are
among the methods explored through personal stories. The authors stress the need
for balance between remembrance and letting go. Includes extensive notes.
1444. Zelenka, Linda. An Untimely Loss: A Passage to the Gentle Side of Grief.
New York: Paulist Press, 1996.
192 Chapter 16

Associated with The Compassionate Friends, an international self-help be-

reavement organization, Zelenka shares her own story of the loss of a child in this
41-page paperback. Through letters to God, she poses questions about untimely
loss and discusses what she calls the “gentle side of grief.”
1445. Zimmerman, Susan. Writing to Heal the Soul: Transforming Grief and
Loss through Writing. New York: Three Rivers Press, 2002.
Through true stories of Zimmerman and others, the author offers writing ex-
ercises to assist in dealing with the pain of loss with the goal of transforming the
grief into hope and healing. Using writing as a tool for healing became a theme
for Zimmerman after her daughter developed a neurological disorder that left her
physically disabled and unable to speak. Each chapter begins with an inspira-
tional quote. Includes an annotated list of recommended titles.
1446. Zinner, Ellen S., and Mary Beth Williams. When a Community Weeps:
Case Studies in Group Survivorship. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999.
1447. Zisook, Sidney. Grief and Bereavement. Philadelphia: Saunders, 1987.
 17
Historical Views of Death and Dying

1448. Bardis, Panos Demetrios. History of Thanatology: Philosophical, Reli-

gious, Psychological, and Sociological Ideas Concerning Death from Primitive
Times to the Present. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1981.
Bardis, editor of social science and professor of sociology at the University of
Toledo, notes in the preface that this book evolved from a paper he presented at
the Conference Internationale de Sociologie Religieuse in Venice, Italy, in Au-
gust 1979. It is an interdisciplinary, cross-cultural, and sociohistorical study of
death. His introduction indicates the book’s purpose is to “explain, evaluate, and
synthesize the most important ideas, from primitive times to the present, about
death.” In the text, Bardis offers a definition of death, historical views on death
from the Far East to Ancient Egypt and Ancient Greece and Rome. He includes
narrative on attitudes and views toward death in Judaism, Christianity, and Islam.
Includes a brief bibliography and a general index.
1449. Barley, Nigel. Grave Matters: A Lively History of Death around the
World. New York: Henry Holt, 1997. Originally published as Dancing on the
Grave in Great Britain.
British anthropologist Barley views death as a mirror to civilization in this
witty tour of death customs around the world.
1450. Boase, Thomas Sherrer Ross. Death in the Middle Ages: Mortality, Judg-
ment, and Remembrance. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1972. Part of the Library of
Medieval Civilization, Joan Evans and Christopher Brooke, editors.
In the General Editor’s Preface, Brooke notes that this text is part of a “revival
and revision” of the 1966 Thames & Hudson book The Flowering of the Middle
Ages, in which each chapter has been converted into a volume such as this one.
Boase expands the original work into an exploration of death themes in the
Middle Ages, mostly through an examination of Medieval art and architecture.

193
194 Chapter 17

Includes the foreword to the original edition, a select bibliography, and an exten-
sive list of illustrations.
1451. Bremer, J. M., Theo P. J. Van Den Hout, and Rudolph Peters. Hidden
Futures: Death and Immortality in Ancient Egypt, Anatolia, the Classical, Bibli-
cal, and Arabic-Islamic World. Amsterdam, Netherlands: Amsterdam University
Press, 1994.
1452. Colman, Penny. Corpses, Coffins, and Crypts: A History of Burial. New
York: Henry Holt and Company, 1997.
1453. Comper, Frances M. M., ed. Ars Morendi: The Book of the Craft of Dying
and Other Early English Tracts Concerning Death. New York: Arno Press, 1976.
The tracts are taken from manuscripts and printed books in the British Museum
and Bodleian Library. First edition published by Longmans, Green & Company,
London, in 1917.
1454. Curl, James Stevens. The Victorian Celebration of Death. New York:
Gale, 1972. Also published by David & Charles, London, and Partridge Press,
Detroit, in 1972.
With this survey of Victorian approaches and attitudes toward death, Curl
writes about funeral rites and ceremonies during this period as well as tombs,
mausoleums, cemeteries, and gravestones.
1455. Davey, Richard. A History of Mourning. London: Jay’s, 1890.
1456. Davies, Douglas James. A Brief History of Death. Malden, MA: Black-
well Publishing, 2005.
Davies notes that our interest in death is “infused with emotion, whether that of
the experience of bereavement or of its anticipation, or of the thought of our own
mortality” and that his book “seeks to capture some of these moods as reflected
within the kaleidoscope of the history, religion, and culture of many societies.”
Great emphasis is placed on how death in its many interpretations manifests it-
self in various societies. Death rituals are explored and several photographs are
included. These images include the interior and exterior of a Stockholm crema-
torium; an Auschwitz memorial; religious symbolism at a crematorium in Bor-
deaux; Memorial Day in rural Utah; a Hungarian gravestone; a communal memo-
rial in South Wales; and an exhibit in Amsterdam featuring eco-friendly funeral
products, including a backpack coffin. Includes a bibliography and an index.
1458. Duckett, Eleanor Shipley. Death and Life in the Tenth Century. Ann
Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1967.
1459. Fedden, Henry Romilly. Suicide: A Social and Historical Study. London:
P. Davies, Ltd., 1938.
 Historical Views of Death and Dying 195

1460. Filene, Peter G. In the Arms of Others: A Cultural History of the Right-
to-Die in America. Chicago: Ivan R. Dee, 1998.
1461. Frenay, Adolph Dominic. The Suicide Problem in the United States.
Boston: R. G. Badger, 1927.
1462. Gardiner, Alan H. The Attitude of Ancient Egyptians to Death and the
Dead. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 1935.
1463. Gittings, C. Death, Burial, and the Individual in Early Modern England.
London: Routledge, 1988.
1464. Greene, Carlton. Death and Sleep: Their Analogy Illustrated by Ex-
amples. London: Elliot Stock, 1904.
1465. Holck, Frederick H., ed. Death and Eastern Thought: Understanding
Death in Eastern Religions and Philosophies. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press,
1974.
Holck, professor of religious studies and coordinator of Asian studies at Cleve-
land State University, presents a comparative study of death traditions in various
Eastern cultures through eight articles, two of which he himself has authored.
He considers the subject with the assumption that Western approaches to death
and dying and the awakening to its complexity can be much informed by East-
ern thought. He addresses ideas on diet, caste systems, artifacts, reincarnation,
heaven and hell, and proper lifestyle. Includes notes.
1466. Homans, Peter, ed. Symbolic Loss: The Ambiguity of Mourning and
Memory at Century’s End. Charlottesville: University Press of Virginia, 2000.
Part of the Studies in Religion and Culture series, Frank Burch Brown, Gary L.
Ebersole, and Edith Wyschogrod, editors.
Homans, professor of psychology and religious studies at the University of
Chicago, and his fellow writers examine loss in the historical and anthropological
context of mourning, specifically the decline of mourning practices in the West.
Among the topics explored are inherited mourning, “sorrow songs” in Harlem
Renaissance thought, the ambiguity of remembrance, melancholia, and a theory
of symbolic loss. Articles include references and suggestions for further reading.
Includes an excellent, extensive index.
1467. Houlbrooke, Ralph A., ed. Death, Ritual, and Bereavement. New York:
Routledge, in association with the Social History Society of the United Kingdom,
1989.
Houlbrooke provides a social history of death in Britain through a series of
articles. Themes include the significance of death in Victorian Britain; individual
responses to death in seventeenth-century Britain; the concept of the good death
196 Chapter 17

in seventeenth-century England; cremation and death celebrations in nineteenth-

century Britain; treatment of death in children’s magazines in the nineteenth cen-
tury; and upper-class death, grief, and mourning in the early twentieth century. A
brief bibliography and background on each of the contributors is included.

1468. Isenberg, Nancy, and Andrew Burstein, eds. Mortal Remains: Death in
Early America. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2003.
An assemblage of articles on various aspects of death and the death ritual in
early America, this book examines the death attitudes, concepts of mortality,
the politics of death, issues with physical remains, and thoughts on the afterlife.
Specific subjects include dismemberment, burial and rebelliousness in slave soci-
eties, death in the early American novel, excesses of public eulogy in immortaliz-
ing the founding fathers, death and satire, the roots of American crime literature,
and epidemics and rituals of death in Boston and Philadelphia in the eighteenth
century. Includes twenty-four illustrations, extensive notes, brief biographical
information on each contributor, and an index.

1469. Jupp, Peter C., and Glennys Howarth, eds. The Changing Face of Death:
Historical Accounts of Death and Disposal. New York: St. Martin’s Press,
1997.

1470. Kapleau, Philip. The Wheel of Death: A Collection of Writings from Zen
Buddhists and Other Sources on Dying, Death, Rebirth. New York: Harper &
Row, 1971. Author assisted by Paterson Simons.
In this 110-page hardback, Kapleau assembles writings by both ancient and
contemporary minds reflecting a Zen Buddhist perspective on death matters. The
work was developed from a series of articles that first appeared in Zen Bow, the
publication of the Zen Center of Rochester, New York. Includes a superb glos-
sary and an index.
1471. Laderman, Gary. Rest in Peace: A Cultural History of Death and the
Funeral Home in America. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003.
Through a history of funeral homes and mortuary practices, Laderman pro-
vides a unique perspective on death, death attitudes, and how Americans think
about and deal with the subject. He notably takes issue with many of Jessica
Mitford’s accusations about the funeral industry in The American Way of Death,
and his book is considered a long-awaited rebuttal of her book and a defense of
the industry.
1472. Lerner, E. and J. Devils, Demons, Death, and Damnation. New York:
Dover Publications, 1971.
This book is a collection of writings from the Medieval and Renaissance peri-
ods on death, demons, and the world beyond.
 Historical Views of Death and Dying 197

1473. Llewellyn, Nigel. The Art of Death: Visual Culture in the English Death
Ritual, c. 1500–1800. London: Reaktion Books, 1991. Published in association
with the Victoria and Albert Museum in London.
Llewellyn presents a fascinating exploration of the meanings behind various
artifacts used in preindustrial English death rituals. Noting that people would
surround themselves with momento mori and that “this continual confrontation
with death was enhanced by a rich culture of visual artifacts,” he provides com-
mentary on and description of wax effigies; mourning rings and fans; death’s
head spoons; church monuments; Dance of Death prints; funeral invitations and
ephemera; jewels and swords; and the art of William Blake, Hans Holbein, and
William Hogarth, among others.
1474. Mack, Arien, ed. Death in American Experience. New York: Schocken
Books, 1973.
1475. Morley, John. Death, Heaven, and the Victorians. Pittsburgh, PA: Uni-
versity of Pittsburgh Press, 1971.
1476. O’Connor, Mary Catherine. The Art of Dying Well: The Development of
Ars Moriendi. New York: Columbia University Press, 1942.
1477. Pelikan, Jaroslav. The Shape of Death, Life, and Immortality in the Early
Fathers. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1961.
1478. Reynolds, Frank E., and Earle H. Waugh, eds. Religious Encounters with
Death: Insights from the History and Anthropology of Religions. University Park:
Pennsylvania State University Press, 1977.
1479. Shively, Charles. A History of the Conception of Death in America,
1650–1860. New York: Garland Publishing, 1988. Part of Harvard Disserta-
tions in American History and Political Science, Frank Freidel and Ernest
May, editors.
Shively devotes much of the preface to recommending other titles of interest
on his topic. This book began as his doctoral dissertation and explores the taboo
of death in early American life. He writes about Puritan ideas of death, early at-
titudes toward death and dying, enlightened ideas of death, Quakers and Shakers
and their views, death and the imagination, and rituals. Shively includes ten pho-
tographs, mostly images of paintings featuring death themes and photographs of
cemeteries and tombstones. He includes an interesting section on garden cemeter-
ies that features a list of cemeteries with their locations and year of commence-
ment. Includes notes and a list of primary and secondary sources.
1480. Stannard, David E. The Puritan Way of Death: A Study in Religion, Cul-
ture, and Social Change. New York: Oxford University Press, 1977.
198 Chapter 17

1481. Taylor, Timothy. The Buried Soul: How Humans Invented Death. Bos-
ton: Beacon Press, 2002.
Taylor explores how humans have viewed and related to death throughout his-
tory. He examines the mystery of death, how early humans amazingly divided the
physical body from the spirit that animated it, cannibalism, vampirism, modern
mummification, human sacrifice, near-death experiences, and the bewilderment
of death. Extensive notes and a lengthy bibliography are included. Taylor is a
member of the archeological faculty at the University of Bradford in the United
Kingdom.
1482. Toynbee, Jocelyn M. C. Death and Burial in the Roman World. Balti-
more, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996. Also cited as being authored
by Arnold Toynbee and published by Cornell University Press, Ithaca, NY, in
1970.
1483. Tromp, Nicholas J. Primitive Conceptions of Death and the Nether
World in the Old Testament. Rome: Pontifical Biblical Institute, 1969. The title
is also cited as Biblica et Orietalia (Sacra Scriptura Antiquitatibus Orientalibus
Illustrata) 21. Also published by Loyola Press, Chicago, in 1969.
This text is Tromp’s dissertation with additional bibliographical references. A
scholarly treatment of death themes and conceptions in the Old Testament, the
book is heavily cited with scripture and includes indexes to Ugaritic, Hebrew, and
Acadian references and words. Includes subject and author indexes.
1484. Wells, Robert V. Facing the “King of Terrors”: Death and Society in
an American Community, 1750–1990. New York: Cambridge University Press,
2000.
Wells explores American views toward death and their roles in communities.
He provides insights on how Americans’ communications about death have
changed over the past three centuries as well as causes of death and how this has
shaped death attitudes. Includes photographs of funeral embroidery, cemeteries,
tombstones, and other death artifacts.
1485. Whaley, Joachim, ed. Mirrors of Mortality: Studies in the Social History
of Death. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1981.
Whaley has assembled a collection of essays that offer commentary on death
themes in history. Essays included are Christiane Sourvinou-Inwood’s “To Die
and Enter the House of Hades: Homer, Before and After”; R. C. Finucane’s
“Sacred Corpse, Profane Carrion: Social Ideals and Death Rituals in the Later
Middle Ages”; Paul S. Fritz’s “From Public to Private: The Royal Funerals in
England, 1500–1830”; J. Whaley’s “Symbolism for the Survivors: The Disposal
of the Dead in Hamburg in the Late Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries”; John
McManners’s “Death and the French Historians”; David Irwin’s “Sentiment and
Antiquity: European Tombs, 1750–1830”; C. A. Bayly’s “From Ritual to Cer-
emony: Death Ritual and Society in Hindu North India since 1600”; and David
 Historical Views of Death and Dying 199

Cannadine’s “War and Death, Grief and Mourning in Modern Britain.” Includes
notes and an index.
1486. Zandee, Jan. Death as an Enemy According to Ancient Egyptian Concep-
tions. New York: Arno Press, 1977. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying
series. Originally published in 1960.
 18
Hospice

1487. Abbott, John W., ed. Hospice Resource Manual for Local Churches.
New York: Pilgrim Press, 1988.
This book is a 90-page guide for both pastors and lay ministers who find them-
selves in a hospice setting.
1488. Abel-Smith, Brian. The Hospice: 1800–1948. London: Heinemann,
1964.
1489. Amenta, Madalon O’Rawe, and Claire B. Tehan. AIDS and the Hospice
Community. New York: Haworth Press, 1991. Also cited as being published by
Harrington Park Press, New York, in 1991.
1490. Andreae, Christine. When Evening Comes: The Education of a Hospice
Volunteer. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2000.
1491. Appleton, Michael. Good End: End-of-Life Concerns and Conversations
about Hospice and Palliative Care. Tucson, AZ: Hats Off Books, 2005.
1492. Appleton, Michael, and Todd Henschell. At Home with Terminal Illness:
A Family Guide to Hospice in the Home. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall
Career & Technology, 1995.
1493. Armstrong-Dailey, Ann, and Sarah F. Zarbock. Hospice Care for Chil-
dren. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993. Reprinted in 2001
1494. Bencala, Rose, Elaine McIntosh, and Cynthia Salzman. Hospice Care
Demonstration Project: A Study of Two Models of Hospice Home Care Delivery.
Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Office of Hu-
man Development Services, Administration on Aging, Model Projects in Aging
Program, 1982.

200
 Hospice 201

1495. Beresford, Larry. The Hospice Handbook: A Complete Guide. Boston:

Little, Brown, 1993.
1496. Bernard, Jan Selliken, and Miriam Schneider. The True Work of Dying:
A Practical and Compassionate Guide to Easing the Dying Process. New York:
Avon Books, 1996.
Bernard and Schneider offer an exceptionally touching and sensitive guide
for the dying and those who care for them. With a hospice-oriented theme,
the authors present information on “home deathing,” the development of
the hospice movement in the twentieth century, spiritual matters with death,
parallels between birth and death, pain management, rituals for remembering,
and death as a healing experience. Includes a list of references used, recom-
mended readings arranged by subject, and helpful organizations. Also includes
information about Angels’ Work, the consultant business of the authors. Both
are registered nurses with experience in hospice environments. Foreword by
Bernie Siegel.
1497. Buckingham, Robert W. Among Friends: Hospice Care for the Person
with AIDS. Buffalo, NY: Prometheus Books, 1992.
1498. ———. The Complete Hospice Guide. New York: Harper & Row, 1983.
1499. ———. The Handbook of Hospice Care. Amherst, NY: Prometheus
Books, 1996.
Buckingham, professor of public health at New Mexico State University and
noted thanatologist, is one of the founders of the hospice movement in the United
States. With this book, he offers information and resources on hospice care. He
reviews the history of hospice and the philosophy behind hospice care. He ad-
dresses the basics of hospice and end-of-life palliative care but also examines the
practical issues that patients and their loved ones must often face, for example,
appropriateness of hospice for children and AIDS patients, cost-effectiveness of
hospice care, and transitioning medical providers. Buckingham also discusses
hospice administration, grief management, how to start a hospice, and the future
of hospice care. Kate S. Mahoney offers a chapter on contemporary issues in
hospice care, in which she discusses equity in the provision of hospice care, lack
of access to Medicaid among children and the resulting lack of hospice access,
disproportionate use of services by Caucasians, problems with benefits offered
by the U.S. Veterans Administration, access to hospice care in rural areas, reim-
bursement for care, recruitment issues for hospice staff, staff stress and burnout,
awareness to perceptions of good care, and education of the medical staff. In-
cludes a directory of hospice organizations in the United States and a thorough
list of references. Notes are included at the end of each chapter. Foreword by
Rosemary Johnson Hurzeler, chairman of the Hospice Association of America
and president and chief executive officer of the Connecticut Hospice, Inc., the
first American hospice.
202 Chapter 18

1500. Care of the Terminally Ill: The Hospice Concept. Rockville, MD: Proj-
ectShare, 1980.
1501. Carey, Deborah Allen. Hospice Inpatient Environments: Compendium
and Guidelines. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Publishing, 1986.
1502. Chase, Deborah. Dying at Home with Hospice. St. Louis, MO: C. V.
Mosby Co., 1986.
Chase, editor of the University of California, Berkeley, Wellness Letter, com-
ments on American perceptions of and reactions to death and the dying process
and then provides practical guidance on dying at home with hospice care. She dis-
cusses the hospice movement, hospice in action, the dynamics of dying, families
and children in the hospice context, final hours, grieving with hospice, and legal
and financial considerations. She provides a helpful 47-page chapter featuring
hospice resources in the United States arranged by state. A short bibliography and
two-page glossary are also included. There is no index.
1503. Clark, David, Michael Wright, and Jacek Luczak. Transitions in End-of-
Life Care: Hospice and Related Developments in Eastern Europe and Central
Asia. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2003.
1504. Cohen, Kenneth P. Hospice, Prescription for Terminal Care. German-
town, MD: Aspen Systems Corporation, 1979.
Cohen offers both an introduction to hospice care and a sourcebook for the
terminally ill and those who care for them. He begins with a discussion of hospice
versus hospital care and continues with a history of the hospice movement, not-
ing its origins in the Middle Ages. Other topics covered include dignity in death
and quality of life for terminally ill patients, attitudes toward death, death fear,
grief and bereavement, right-to-die issues, hospice models, elements of a success-
ful hospice program, cost considerations in care of the terminally ill, symptom
control, health insurance issues, legislation surrounding death issues, definitions
of death, and roadblocks to the hospice movement. Includes a description of
notable U.S. and Canadian hospices in chapter 11. Appendixes include a list of
hospices; a descriptive list of organizations dealing with death issues; guidelines
and directives for the California Natural Death Act; and various surveys for insur-
ance companies, hospitals, and hospices. Includes an index and a bibliography of
books and articles.
1505. Collett, Merrill. At Home with Dying: A Zen Hospice Approach. Boston:
Shambhala Publications, 1999.
1506. Connor, Stephen R. Hospice: Practice, Pitfalls, and Promise. Washing-
ton, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1998.
1507. Corless, Inge B., and Zelda Foster. The Hospice Heritage: Celebrating
Our Future. New York: Haworth Press, 1999.
 Hospice 203

1508. Corr, Charles A., and Donna M. Corr, eds. Hospice Care: Principles
and Practice. New York: Springer, 1983. Volume 5 of the Springer Series on
Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. Also published by Faber,
London.
1509. Cundiff, David E. Euthanasia Is Not the Answer: A Hospice Physician’s
View. Totowa, NJ: Humana Press, 1992.
1510. Davidson, Glenn W. The Hospice: Development and Administration.
Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1978. Part of the Series in Death Edu-
cation, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
1511. Delfosse, Renee. Hospice and Home Health Agency Characteristics:
United States, 1991. Hyattsville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Health
Statistics, 1995.
1512. Doyle, Derek. Volunteers in Hospice and Palliative Care: A Handbook
for Volunteer Service Managers. New York: Oxford University Press, 2002.
1513. Du Boulay, Shirley. Cicely Saunders, Founder of the Modern Hospice
Movement. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1984.
1514. DuBois, Paul M. The Hospice Way of Death. New York: Human Sci-
ences Press, 1980.
Appropriate for general audiences, DuBois presents an easy-to-read overview of
hospice and the hospice movement when it was still developing in the United States.
He offers a definition of hospice, commentary on the quality of dying in the United
States, information on the components of hospice care, text regarding the hospice
movement and the federal response, and case studies with St. Christopher’s Hospice,
Hospice, Inc., and Strong Memorial Hospital. The latter is an example of the failure
to start a hospice. Includes notes, a bibliography, and an index.
1515. ———. Hospices: A New Way to Die. New York: Human Services Press,
1979.
1516. ———. Hospital-Based Palliative Care Teams: The Hospital–Hospice
Interface. New York: Oxford University Press, 1998.
1517. ———. Terminal Care Support Teams: The Hospital–Hospice Interface.
New York: Oxford University Press, 1990.
1518. Ewens, James, and Patricia Herrington. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross and Jo-
sefina B. Magno Present Hospice: A Handbook for Families and Others Facing
Terminal Illness. Santa Fe, NM: Bear & Co., 1982.
1519. ———. Hospice: A Handbook for Families and Others Facing Terminal
Illness. Santa Fe, NM: Bear & Co., 1983.
204 Chapter 18

1520. The Family Book of Hospice Care. Minneapolis, MN: Fairview Press,
1999.
1521. Frozena, Cynthia L., and Maryann Hurtt. Hospice Care Planning: An
Interdisciplinary Guide. Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers, 1999.
1522. Gallagher-Allred, Charlette R., and Madalon O’Rawe Amenta. Nutrition
and Hydration in Hospice Care: Needs, Strategies, Ethics. New York: Haworth
Press, 1993.
1523. Glavan, Denise, Cindy Longanacre, and John Spivey. Hospice, a Labor
of Love. St. Louis, MO: Chalice Press, 1999.
1524. Goldberg, Jim, Dena Andre, Philip Brookman, Jane Livington, and Nan
Goldin, Sally Mann, Jack Radcliffe, and Kathy Vargas. Hospice: A Photographic
Inquiry. Boston: Little, Brown, in association with the Corcoran Gallery of Art
and the National Hospice Foundation, 1996.
1525. Halporn, Roberta, ed. The Hospice Concept. Brooklyn, NY: Highly Spe-
cialized Promotions, 1977. First publication in the Thanatology Service Series.
This work is a compilation of reprinted essays by Joan Kron, Robert Bucking-
ham III, Sylvia Lack, and Donna D. Bettes on hospice design, living with the dy-
ing, and applying the hospice concept. The book includes a selected bibliography
compiled by Halporn, which includes books and articles written by professionals
Robert Lamerton, Barbara McNulty, Colin Murray Parkes, and Robert G. Twycross
working at St. Christopher’s Hospice in England. Also includes titles under the
categories “Other Materials of Relevance,” “Tools for Working with Volunteers,”
“Self-Help Groups,” “Audiovisual Material,” and “Books in Preparation.” Kron’s
essay on hospice design, which was first published in New York Magazine in 1976,
includes interior renderings and floor plans for a proposed hospice facility in New
Haven, Connecticut. All this is contained in nineteen pages.
1526. Hamilton, Michael Pollock, and Helen F. Reid. A Hospice Handbook:
A New Way to Care for the Dying. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans
Publishing, 1980.
1527. Harris, Marilyn D., Elissa Della Monica, and Pamela Boyd. Handbook of
Hospice Policies and Procedures. Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers, 1999.
1528. Hastings Center. Access to Hospice Care: Expanding Boundaries, Over-
coming Barriers: A Special Supplement to the Hastings Center Report. Garrison,
NY: Hastings Center, 2003.
1529. Haupt, Barbara J. Development of the National Home and Hospice Care
Survey. Hyattsville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public
Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for
Health Statistics, 1994.
 Hospice 205

1530. Hayslip, Bert, and Joel Leon. Hospice Care. Newbury Park, CA: Sage
Publications, 1992. Part of the Geriatric Case Practice Training Series, Joel Leon,
editor.
The authors offer an academic exploration of hospice care likely intended
for health care practitioners working with older adults. Chapters focus on
working with patients and families, special knowledge needed for the hospice
environment, the educational role of hospice, communication and assessment
skills in hospice, and the importance of the interdisciplinary team. An intro-
duction to hospice care is also provided and includes some historical back-
ground. Includes an appendix with model fieldwork assignments, references,
and an index.
1531. Health Care Financing Administration, United States Government. Medi-
care Hospice Benefits: A Special Way of Caring for People Who Have a Terminal
Illness. Baltimore, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Health
Care Financing Administration, 1999.
1532. Hill, D., and D. Penso. Opening Doors: Improving Access to Hospice and
Specialist Care Services by Members of Black and Ethnic Minority Communities,
Occasional Paper 7. London: National Council for Hospice and Specialist Pal-
liative Care Services, 1995.
1533. Hilliard, Russell E. Hospice and Palliative Care Music Therapy: A Guide
to Program Development and Clinical Care. Cherry Hill, NJ: Jeffrey Books,
2005.
1534. Hospice as a Social Health Care Institution: Report of the Pre-Forum
Institute of the 105th Annual Forum of the National Conference on Social Wel-
fare. Tacoma, WA: Hillhaven Foundation, 1979. Also published by the National
Conference on Social Welfare, Columbus, OH.
1535. Huber, M. Clinical Protocols for Care of Hospice Patients: An Interdis-
ciplinary Approach. Detroit: Hospice of Michigan Programs, 1994.
1536. Indiana Health Planning and Agency Support Bureau, Plan Development
Section. The Hospice: Care for People with Terminal Illness. Indianapolis: Indi-
ana State Board of Health, 1977.
1537. Infeld, Donna Lind, and Nadine Reimer Penner. Bereavement: Client
Adaptation and Hospice Services. New York: Haworth Press, 1996.
1538. Jaffe, Carolyn, and Carol H. Ehrlich. All Kinds of Love: Experiencing
Hospice. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 1997. Part of the Death, Value,
and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1539. Jennings, Bruce. Ethics in Hospice Care: Challenges to Hospice Values
in a Changing Health Care Environment. New York: Haworth Press, 1997.
206 Chapter 18

1540. Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals. Hospice Self-

Assessment and Survey Guide. Chicago: Joint Commission on Accreditation of
Hospitals, 1983.
1541. ———. Hospice Standards Manual. Chicago: Joint Commission on Ac-
creditation of Hospitals, 1986.
1542. Kalina, Kathy. Midwife for Souls: Spiritual Care for the Dying: A Guide
for Hospice Care Workers and All Who Live with the Terminally Ill. Boston: St.
Paul Books & Media, 1993.
1543. Kircher, Pamela M. Love Is the Link: A Hospice Doctor Shares Her
Experience of Near-Death and Dying. Burdett, NY: Larson Publications, 1995.
Published for the Paul Brunton Philosophic Foundation by Larson Publications.
1544. Koff, Theodore H. Hospice: A Caring Community. Cambridge, MA:
Winthrop Publishers, 1980.
Koff, a consultant to Hillhaven Hospice, notes in the preface that this book
is written for the student of hospice, whether that person is a classroom student
or working in health care; however, the text not only provides an introduction
to the hospice movement and its values but also gives guidance and direction
on developing and administering a hospice program. Topics include palliative
versus curative care, eliminating isolation in dying, death with dignity, childhood
death, pain management, the continuum of care, the organization of hospice care,
privacy, hospice staff issues, hospice environments, multidisciplinary team ap-
proaches, funding and licensure in the administration of a hospice program, ac-
creditation, confidentiality, and methodological considerations in evaluating hos-
pice programs. Contributors include Betty Koff, Sister Teresa M. McIntier, John
A. Hackley, and Robert W. Buckingham. Includes references, a bibliography, and
an index. Foreword by John A. Hackley, president of the Hillhaven Foundation.
1545. Kohut, Jeraldine Marasco, and Sylvester Kohut. Hospice: Caring for the
Terminally Ill. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1984. Author also cited in
cataloging data as Jeraldine Joanne Kohut.
The authors, both professors at Tennessee Technological University, have
extensive personal and professional experience in hospice environments and
offer this book as the first comprehensive reference book regarding community-
supported hospices. The book is a practitioners’ guide for “[people] who want
to establish and/or maintain a quality community-based hospice program for the
terminally ill; for [people] who want to start other kinds of hospices, either as free
standing facilities, hospital-supported [facilities], or nursing home programs; or
for undergraduate or graduate students in allied health fields.” Most of the text is
focused on clinical concerns, though there is notable treatment of insurance is-
sues, grief and bereavement counseling, and ethical and legal issues. Appendixes
include bylaws of a hospice in Marshall, Alabama; an affiliate manual; and help-
 Hospice 207

ful hints to friends of hard of hearing people. Organization contact information

is included throughout the book. Includes an index. Forewords by Albert Gore
Jr, congressman from Tennessee, and Iris A. Kozil, executive director of Alive
Hospice in Nashville, Tennessee.
1546. Kutscher, Austin H., Samuel C. Klagsbrun, Richard J. Torpie, Robert
DeBellis, Mahlon S. Hale, and Margot Tallmer, eds. Hospice U.S.A. New York:
Columbia University Press, 1983. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series.
The editors have assembled thirty-four articles that consider the evolution of
the hospice movement and muse on where it might be headed in the decades to
come. Comment is provided on how cost considerations and rising costs for new
medical innovations have an impact on the development of hospice and how
hospice imposes limitations on therapeutic interventions. Contributors address
the acceptance of death in the hospice environment, the politics of expanding
hospice care, management concerns with hospice, right-to-die issues, humanistic
care of the dying, death with dignity, patient rights, the right to choose a place to
die, preserving personhood, sexuality and privacy among the chronically ill and
dying, humor and laughter, spiritual care, group therapy, senior volunteering in
hospice, a physical alternative to hospice, integrating care, the death of a hospice
in a tertiary hospital, hospice home care, and patient support. This title also con-
tains significant content on clinical issues and care. Includes an index and brief
information on each contributor. Preface by Austin H. Kutscher and Lillian G.
Kutscher.
1547. Lack, Sylvia A., and Robert W. Buckingham. First American Hospice:
Three Years of Home Care. New Haven, CT: Hospice, Inc., 1978.
1548. Lattanzi-Licht, Marcia E., and Jane Marie Kirschling. Bereavement
Care: A New Look at Hospice and Community-Based Services. New York:
Haworth Press, 1989.
1549. Lattanzi-Licht, Marcia E., John J. Mahoney, and Galen W. Miller. The
Hospice Choice: In Pursuit of a Peaceful Death. New York: Simon & Schuster,
1998. The cover subtitle also appears A National Hospice Organization Guide to
Hospice Care.
Intended to answer questions about hospice care for general audiences, this
guide from the National Hospice Organization discusses the many services hos-
pice can provide and how they can help families deal with the many issues faced
by the dying and their loved ones. The book addresses physician and nursing
services, counseling services, respite services for caregivers, bereavement coun-
seling, financial issues, cultural concerns, and special problems raised by sudden
death. Lattanzi-Licht is a hospice nurse and psychotherapist who cofounded the
Boulder County Hospice in Colorado. Mahoney and Miller are both affiliated
with the National Hospice Organization. Includes a special hospice question
and answer guide, notes, consumer information and resources, resource groups,
208 Chapter 18

additional reading suggestions, and an index. Also includes a history of the Na-
tional Hospice Organization logo.
1550. Lerman, Dan, and Claire B. Tehan. Hospital–Hospice Management
Models: Integration and Collaboration. Chicago: American Hospital Publishing,
1995.
1551. Lewis, Martyn. Tears and Smiles: The Hospice Handbook. London:
O’Mara, 1989.
1552. Ley, D., and Harry Van Bommel. The Heart of Hospice. Toronto, On-
tario: NC Press Limited, 1994.
1553. Lutheran Welfare Service of Northeastern Pennsylvania, Hospice Saint
John, and Model Projects in Aging Programs (United States). Hospice Saint
John: A Three-Year Demonstration of Hospice Care. Kingston, PA: Hospice,
Inc., 1982. Supported, in part, by a grant, HHS #03AD201, from the Model Proj-
ects in Aging Program, Administration on Aging, Office of Human Development
Services; Department of Health and Human Services.
1554. Manning, Margaret. The Hospice Alternative: Living with Dying. Lon-
don: Souvenir Press, 1984.
1555. Marrelli, Tina M. Hospice and Palliative Care Handbook: Quality,
Compliance, and Reimbursement. St. Louis, MO: Mosby-Year Book, Inc., 1999.
Second edition published in 2004.
1556. ———. Mosby’s Home Care and Hospice Drug Handbook. St. Louis,
MO: Mosby, 1999.
1557. Martocchio, Benita C., and Karin Dufault. Symposia on Hospice, Com-
passionate Care, and the Dying Experience. Philadelphia: Saunders, 1985.
1558. Maryuma, Terence Chikako. Hospice Care and Culture: Comparison of
the Hospice Movement in the West and Japan. Brookfield, VT: Ashgate Publish-
ing, 1999.
1559. McCann, Barbara A., and Karen Liffring Hill. The Hospice Project Re-
port. Chicago: Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals, 1985.
1560. McDonnell, Alice. Quality Hospice Care: Administration, Organization,
and Models. Owings Mills, MD: National Health Publishing, 1986.
1561. McNulty, Elizabeth G., and Robert A. Holderby. Hospice, a Caring
Challenge. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1983.
1562. Mojtabai, A. G. Soon: Tales from Hospice. Cambridge, MA: Zoland
Books, 1998.
 Hospice 209

1563. Mor, Vincent, and David S. Greer. The Hospice Movement. Baltimore,
MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1988.
1564. Mor, Vincent, and Susan Masterson-Allen. Hospice Care Systems: Struc-
ture, Process, Costs, and Outcome. New York: Springer, 1987. Volume 8 of the
Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert J. Kastenbaum, series editor. On
the acknowledgments page, the author notes that “this document was prepared,
in part, in connection with contract #500-85-0024 from the Health Care Financ-
ing Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services to Abt
Associates, Inc., with a subcontract to Brown University, Center for Health Care
Research.”
Mor, associate professor of community health at Brown University and proj-
ect director of the National Hospice Study, offers a thorough exploration of the
hospice organization and operational structure in the United States. He examines
the historical development of the hospice movement, noting its initiation in the
United States in 1974. Mor looks at social trends, legal and ethical issues, policy
matters, governmental roles in hospice settings, and the potential for organiza-
tional change. Other topics covered include the distribution and size of hospices;
hospice ownership and leadership structure; provision and range of services;
patient eligibility; demographics of hospice patients; a summary of case mix
studies; stress and burnout for caretakers of the terminally ill; attitudes toward
death; hospice roles; standards of care in the context of the hospice philosophy;
clinical control of care; pain and symptom management protocols; bereavement
counseling; nutritional support; alternative therapies; pediatric hospice programs;
quality of life outcomes; hospice cost issues, including overall health care cost
savings due to hospice; and hospice on the international scene. Includes lengthy
references and an index.
1565. Morrissey, Paul F. Let Someone Hold You: The Journey of a Hospice
Priest. New York: Crossroads Publishing Co., 1994.
1566. Munley, Anne. The Hospice Alternative: A New Context for Death and
Dying. New York: Basic Books, 1983.
Munley, director of apostolic planning for the congregation of the Immaculate
Heart of Mary in Scranton, Pennsylvania, offers a thorough overview of the hos-
pice model and the hospice movement. Unlike Kübler-Ross, who theorizes about
a series of stages leading to death, Munley believes dying is a “complex process
filled with contradictions and conflicting tensions.” She discusses how hospice
is about caring for the terminally ill, not curing them. In 349 pages, Munley ex-
plores the segregation of death; death as an age-old problem; dying as a social
problem; the history of hospices; inpatient hospice care and its components and
processes; the pains of the dying; interpretations of hospice; hospice principles;
patient’s dialectics; hospice staff issues; spiritual support in a hospice and
210 Chapter 18

caregiving context; the future of the hospice movement; and hospice in light of
such broad countercultural trends as the “back to nature” trend, self-help trend,
and quest for transcendence. Includes three appendixes featuring standards of a
hospice program, how to find hospice care, and a bibliography arranged by sub-
ject. Includes extensive notes and an index.
1567. Munro, Susan. Music Therapy in Palliative/Hospice Care. St. Louis:
Magnamusic-Baton, Inc., 1984.
1568. National Conference on Social Welfare. Hospice as a Social Health Care
Institution. Columbus, OH: National Conference on Social Welfare, 1978.
1569. Paradis, Lenora Finn. Hospice Handbook: A Guide for Managers and
Planners. Rockville, MD: Aspen Systems Corp., 1985.
1570. Petrosino, Barbara M. Nursing in Hospice and Terminal Care: Research
and Practice. New York: Haworth Press, 1986.
1571. Putnam, Constance E. Hospice or Hemlock?: Searching for Heroic Com-
passion. Westport, CT: Praeger, 2002.
Putnam contrasts right-to-die and physician-assisted suicide issues with the
hospice model. She uses profiles of Cicely M. Saunders, founder of the hospice
movement; Timothy Quill; Derek Humphry; Jack Kevorkian; Herbert Cohen;
and Joanne Lynn to illustrate her points. Putnam discusses pain and dignity-of-
life arguments, life trajectories, doctor–patient dialogue, and ideas for common
ground in the debate. Includes suggestions for further reading and an index.
1572. Ray, M. Catherine. I’m Here to Help: A Guide for Caregivers, Hospice
Workers, and Volunteers. New York: Bantam, 1997.
1573. Resnick, David B. Dying Declarations: Notes from a Hospice Volunteer.
New York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2005.
1574. Rhinehart, Emily, and Mary M. Friedman. Infection Control in Home
Care and Hospice. Sudbury, MA: Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2006.
1575. Rivera, Michelle A. Hospice Hounds: Animals and Healing at the Bor-
ders of Death. New York: Lantern Books, 2001.
1576. Rose, Charles Spencer. In the Midst of Life: A Hospice Volunteer’s Story.
Montgomery, AL: NewSouth Books, 2004.
1577. Rossman, Parker. Hospice: Creating New Models of Care for the Termi-
nally Ill. New York: Association Press, 1977. Published by Fawcett Columbine,
New York, in 1979 with the cover subtitle: A New Approach to Humane and
Dignified Care for the Dying. Foreword by Edmund D. Pellegrino, professor of
medicine at Yale University.
Rossman, associated with the New Haven Hospice, provides a general intro-
duction and overview of the hospice model in the United States. He reviews the
 Hospice 211

hospice concept in England and how the New Haven Hospice is an American
adaptation. He discusses palliative care, facility design, roles of various members
of the hospice caregiving team, advice to communities starting a hospice, finan-
cial issues, hospice within hospital environments, and home care for the dying.
An appendix features materials used in volunteer orientation.
1578. Saunders, Cicely M., and David Clark. Cicely Saunders: Founder of
the Hospice Movement, Selected Letters, 1959–1999. Oxford, UK: Clarendon,
2002.
1579. Saunders, Cicely M., and Dorothy H. Summers. Hospice: The Living
Idea. Philadelphia: Saunders, 1981. Also published by Saunders, London, in
1981.
1580. Scott, Patricia Cumin. Some Information for Those Caring for Patients.
London: St. Christopher’s Hospice, 1974.
1581. Sendor, Virginia F., and Patrice M. O’Connor. Hospice and Palliative
Care: Questions and Answers. Lanham, MD: Scarecrow Press, 1997.
1582. Sharp, Anne Wallace, and Susan Handle Terbay. Gifts: Two Hospice
Professionals Reveal Messages from Those Passing On. Far Hills, NJ: New Ho-
rizon Press, 1997.
1583. Sheehan, Denice C., and Walter B. Forman. Hospice and Palliative
Care: Concepts and Practice. Sudbury, MA: Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 1996.
1584. Siebold, Cathy. The Hospice Movement: Easing Death’s Pains. New
York: Twayne, 1992.
1585. Smith, Doug. Caregiving: Hospice-Proven Techniques for Healing Body
and Soul. New York: Macmillan USA, 1997.
1586. Stoddard, Sandol. The Hospice Movement: A Better Way of Caring for
the Dying. New York: Stein & Day, 1978. The prepublication title is cited as
Hospice. Revised edition published by Random House, New York, in 1991.
Also published by Vintage Books, New York, in 1992. Later editions also cited
as The Hospice Movement: Updated and Expanded, A Better Way of Caring for
the Dying.
1587. Taylor, Joan Leslie. In the Light of Dying: The Journals of a Hospice
Volunteer. New York: Continuum, 1989.
1588. Torrens, Paul R. Hospice Programs and Public Policy. Chicago: Ameri-
can Hospital Publishing, 1985.
1589. United States General Accounting Office. Hospice Care, a Growing
Concept in the United States: Report to the Congress. Washington, DC: U.S.
General Accounting Office, 1979.
212 Chapter 18

1590. ———. Medicare: Program Provisions and Payments Discourage Hos-

pice Participation: Report to the Subcommittee on Health, Committee on Way
and Means, House of Representatives. Washington, DC: U.S. General Account-
ing Office, 1989.
1591. United States Senate, Special Committee on Aging. Barriers to Hospice
Care: Are We Shortchanging Dying Patients: Hearing before the Special Com-
mittee on Aging, United States Senate, One Hundred Sixth Congress, Second Ses-
sion, Washington, DC, September 18, 2000. Washington, DC: U.S. Government
Printing Office, Superintendent of Documents, 2001.
1592. Volicer, Ladislav, and Ann Hurley. Hospice Care for Patients with Ad-
vanced Progressive Dementia. New York: Springer, 1998.
1593. Wentzel, Kenneth B. To Those Who Need It Most: Hospice Means Hope.
Boston: Charles River Books, 1981.
1594. Williams, Elaine K. A Regulatory Handbook for Hospice Social Work-
ers: The Heart of Healing. Southgate, MI: Elaine K. Williams Associates, 1998.
1595. Winn, Denise. The Hospice Way. London: Macdonald & Co., 1987.
1596. Worswick, Jacqueline. A House Called Helen: The Development of Hos-
pice Care for Children. 2nd ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. First
edition published in 1993.
This book is an account of Helen House, the first children’s hospice. Worswick
discusses the philosophy of children’s hospice care and recent international de-
velopments in pediatric palliative care. In addition to detailing services provided
by Helen House, she also outlines its operational framework. The new edition
notes the growth of the concept in the United States since the first edition was
published.
1597. Zimmerman, Jack McKay. Hospice: Complete Care for the Terminally
Ill. Baltimore, MD: Urban & Schwarzenberg, 1986. Originally published in
1981.
 19
Immortality

1598. Adams, J. Robert. Prospects for Immortality: A Sensible Search for Life
after Death. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the Death,
Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
1599. Bauman, Zygmunt. Mortality, Immortality, and Other Life Strategies.
Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 1992. Also published by Polity Press,
Oxford, in 1993.
In the introduction, Bauman notes that this book is “not a study in the sociol-
ogy of death and dying,” as this has received significant treatment in a growing
body of literature. The purpose is to “unpack and to open up to investigation, the
presence of death (i.e., of the conscious or repressed knowledge of mortality)
in human institutions, rituals and beliefs which, on the face of it, explicitly and
self-consciously serve tasks and functions altogether different, unrelated to the
preoccupations normally scrutinized in studies dedicated to the ‘history of death
and dying.’” He writes about the existential ambivalence of being and coping
with it, the ambition of immortality, immortality as the “great de-equalizer,” and
how death really cannot be perceived. Includes references and an index.
1600. Carrington, Hereward, and John R. Meader. Death: Its Causes and Phe-
nomena with Special Reference to Immortality. New York: Arno Press, 1977.
Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally published as Death:
Its Causes and Phenomena, by Dodd, Mead and Co., New York, in 1921. Reprint
published by Ayer Co. Publishing, Salem, NH, in 1976.
1601. Duhring, Nathan. Immortality: Physically, Scientifically, Now: A Rea-
sonable Guarantee of Bodily Preservation, a General Discussion, and Research
Targets. Washington, DC: Twentieth-Century Books Foundation, 1962.

213
214 Chapter 19

1602. Ettinger, Robert C. W. The Prospect of Immortality. Garden City, NY:

Doubleday, 1964. Published by McFadden-Bartell, New York, in 1966.
1603. Frazer, James G. Belief in Immortality and the Worship of the Dead.
London: Macmillan, 1913.
1604. Harrington, Alan. The Immoralist: An Approach to the Engineering of
Man’s Divinity. New York: Random House, 1969.
1605. Hocking, William Earnest. The Meaning of Immortality in Human Expe-
rience, Including Thoughts on Life and Death. New York: Harper & Brothers,
1957. Hocking’s Thoughts on Life and Death was originally published in 1937.
Revised edition published by Greenwood, Westport, CT, in 1973.
1606. ———. Thoughts on Death and Life. New York: Harper, 1937.
This book consists of the “Ingersoll Lecture on the Immortality of Man,” de-
livered at Harvard University in 1936, and the Hiram W. Thomas lecture “Mean-
ings of Death and Meanings of Life,” delivered at the University of Chicago in
1936.
1607. Kan, S. Symbolic Immortality. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution
Press, 1989.
1608. Maeterlinck, Maurice. Our Eternity (Extension of Essay on Death). Lon-
don: Methuen Publishing, 1913.
1609. Moore, Marvin. Life after What? Huntsville, AL: Southern Publishing
Association, 1977.
This book is a 31-page booklet exploring immortality and attitudes toward
death.
1610. Obayashi, Hiroshi, ed. Death and Afterlife: Perspectives of World Reli-
gions. New York: Praeger, 1992.
1611. Osler, William. Science and Immortality. New York: Arno Press, 1976.
Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series.
1612. Penelhum, Terence, ed. Immortality. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth, 1973.
Part of the Basic Problems in Philosophy Series, A. I. Melden and Stanley Mun-
sat, editors.
Penelhum, professor of philosophy and religious studies at the University of
Calgary, offers a discussion of the belief in life after death through nine articles
from various contributors. Articles center on the Christian theology of death and
discuss immortality of the soul, the notion of “another world,” resurrection of the
body, reincarnation, evidence of psychical research, questions of survival, and
religious beliefs and the afterlife. Includes a bibliography arranged by subject and
content information on other titles in the series.
 Immortality 215

1613. Perrett, Roy W. Death and Immortality. Boston: Kluwer Academic/Mar-

tinus Nijhoff, 1987. Part of the Studies in Philosophy and Religion series, volume
10.
In this book, Perrett, a New Zealand professor, discusses a number of philo-
sophical issues related to death and immortality. The text is divided into two
parts, the first approaching the philosophical issues with death and immortality
that are true for everyone, regardless of their religious thoughts or opinions on
immortality, and the second focusing on the concept of immortality and major
traditional accounts of it. In addition to literary and theological works, the author
also incorporates Indian philosophical traditions into his arguments. Includes an
appendix entitled “Karma and the Problem of Suffering,” a selected bibliography,
and an index.
1614. Phillips, D. Z. Death and Immortality. New York: St. Martin’s Press,
1970.
This 83-page book provides a general overview of immortality as a concept
and attitudes toward death.
1615. Pieper, Josef. Death and Immortality. New York: Herder & Herder,
1969.
In the opening chapter, Pieper refers to death as an “especially philosophical
subject.” He goes on to discuss the vocabulary of death and the problematic aspect
of euphemism, the meaning of the phrase “separation of body and soul,” natural
event versus punishment, the notion of there being no untimely death, death and
freedom, and definitions of immortality and eternal life. Includes notes.
1616. Scott, D. H. Is There Life after Death? New York: Bantam Books,
1977.
1617. Segerberg, Osborn. The Immortality Factor. New York: E. P. Dutton,
1974.
1618. Stephens, C. S. Natural Salvation: The Message of Science, Outlining
the First Principles of Immortal Life on Earth. New York: Arno Press, 1976.
Originally published in 1905.
1619. Tuccille, Jerome. Here Comes Immortality. New York: Stein & Day,
1973.
Tuccille presents a positive, sometimes humorous compendium of life-
extension methods to include cryonics, reanimation, and cloning.
 20
Legal and Financial Issues

1620. Aid Association for Lutherans. Step by Step: Your Guide to Making
Practical Decisions When a Loved One Dies. Appleton, WI: Aid Association for
Lutherans, 2000.
1621. Anderson, Patricia. Affairs in Order: A Complete Resource Guide to
Death and Dying. New York: Macmillan, 1991.
Divided into sections entitled “Planning Ahead,” “Death Care,” and “In the
Aftermath,” this thorough guide covers dozens of topics related to death, dy-
ing, and bereavement. Topics discussed include wills, probate, estate planning,
letters of instruction, funeral preplanning, cremation, embalming, the Federal
Trade Commission funeral rule, services and ceremonies, memorial societ-
ies, laws governing disposition, right-to-die issues, ethics surrounding death
and dying issues, determination of death, institutional dying, organ donation,
health care versus death care, hospice, death certificates, guardians for minor
children, and death in a foreign country. Only one chapter focuses on grief and
bereavement. Each chapter in the book ends with a list of resources and sup-
port. These include annotated reading lists, organizations with addresses, and
government agencies and their contact information. A lengthy bibliography is
included.
1622. Berger, Arthur S. When Life Ends: Legal Overviews, Medicolegal Forms,
and Hospital Policies. Westport, CT: Praeger, 1995.
1623. Bernard, Hugh Y. The Law of Death and Disposal of the Dead. New
York: Oceana Publications, 1966.
1624. Camp, Marcia, and Clarissa Willis. You Can’t Leave Till You Do the
Paperwork: Matters of Life and Death. Philadelphia: Xlibris Corp., 1999.

216
 Legal and Financial Issues 217

1625. Cantor, Norman L. Legal Frontiers of Death and Dying. Bloomington:

Indiana University Press, 1987.
1626. Connelly, Robert Joseph. Last Rights: Death and Dying in Texas Law
and Experience. San Antonio, TX: Corona Publishing Co., 1982. Revised paper-
back edition published in 1992.
1627. Dinsmore, J. S., ed. Death and Dying: An Examination of Legislative and
Policy Issues. Washington, DC: Georgetown University, Health Policy Center,
1977.
1628. Doudera, A. Edward, and J. Douglas Peters. Legal and Ethical Aspects of
Treating Critically and Terminally Ill Patients. Ann Arbor, MI: AUPHA Press, in
cooperation with the American Society of Law and Medicine, 1982.
1629. Gatov, Elizabeth Smith. Widows in the Dark: Rescuing Your Financial
Position. Bolinas, CA: Common Knowledge Press, 1985. Also cited as being
published by Warner Books, New York, in 1986.
1630. Herbeck, David J. An Act of Love: Preparing Your Spouse for Life with-
out You, a Financial Guide. Edina, MN: Beaver’s Pond Press, 2004.
1631. Kaplan, Karen Orloff, and Christopher Lukas. Staying in Charge: Practi-
cal Plans for the End of Your Life. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
Kaplan and Lukas offer a practical guide for preparing for a loved one’s death.
They discuss living wills, do not resuscitate orders, medical powers of attorney,
marshalling the support of friends and family, communicating about death, pal-
liative care, advance directives, nursing homes, and financial matters. Hospice
and, as the authors say, “learning to live in the midst of dying” are extensively
explored. Personal family stories are included to convey the messages. Includes
a suggested reading list and a lengthy and thorough list of resources divided by
subject with descriptions of each organization or website.
1632. Karnes, Barbara. The Final Act of Living. Vancouver, WA: Barbara
Karnes Books, 2003.
Based on her lectures, Karnes, a registered nurse, offers a simple guide to ap-
proaching death from disease and the associated grieving process. Such practical
end-of-life matters as durable powers of attorney and living wills are also ad-
dressed.
1633. Katz, Jay, and Alexander Morgan Capron. Catastrophic Diseases: Who
Decides What? A Psychosocial and Legal Analysis of the Problems Posed by
Hemodialysis and Organ Transplantation. New York: Russell Sage Foundation,
1975.
1634. Lee, Robert G., and Derek Morgan. Death Rites: Law and Ethics at the
End of Life. New York: Routledge, 1996.
218 Chapter 20

1635. Maxwell, Katie. No Lifetime Guarantee: Dealing with the Details of

Death. Crozet, VA: Betterway Publications, 1988.
Maxwell provides practical information and resources for loved ones follow-
ing a death in the family. Topics addressed include wills, probate, autopsies, body
disposition, anatomical gifting, and many others.
1636. McHugh, James T. Death, Dying, and the Law. Huntington, IN: Our
Sunday Visitor Press, 1976.
1637. McLean, Sheila. Death, Dying, and the Law. Brookfield, VT: Dartmouth
Publishing Co., 1996.
1638. Meyers, David W. Medicolegal Implications of Death and Dying: A De-
tailed Discussion of the Medical and Legal Implications Involved in Death and/or
Care of the Dying and Terminal Patient. Rochester, NY: Lawyers Cooperative
Publishing Co., 1981. Also published by Bancroft-Whitney Co., San Francisco.
1639. Moraczewski, Albert S. Determination of Death: Theological, Medical,
Ethical, and Legal Issues. St. Louis, MO: Catholic Health Association of the
United States, 1982.
1640. Muth, Annemarie. Death and Dying Sourcebook: Basic Consumer
Health Information for the Layperson about End-of-Life Care and Related Ethi-
cal and Legal Issues. Detroit, MI: Omnigraphics, 2000.
1641. President’s Commission for the Study of Ethical Problems in Medicine
and Biomedical and Behavioral Research. Deciding to Forego Life-Sustaining
Treatment: A Report on the Ethical, Medical, and Legal Issues in Treatment De-
cisions. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1983.
1642. ———. Defining Death: Medical, Legal, and Ethical Issues in the Deter-
mination of Death. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1981.
1643. Prettyman, Barrett. Death and the Supreme Court. New York: Harcourt,
Brace & World, 1961.
1644. Robertson, John A. The Rights of the Critically Ill: The Basic ACLU
Guide to the Rights of Critically Ill and Dying Patients. Cambridge, MA: Bal-
linger Publishing Co., 1983. An American Civil Liberties Union Handbook. Also
published by Bantam Books, New York, in 1983.
1645. Rosner, Gerald. Dying and Death: Perspectives on the Role of the Finan-
cial and Estate Planner: A New Compensable Service. New York: Foundation of
Thanatology, 1988.
1646. Scott, Milton Berry. What to Do When Someone Dies: A Legal, Finan-
cial, and Practical Guide. 2nd ed. Alamo, CA: Pere Bruin Press, 2004. First
edition published in 1997.
 Legal and Financial Issues 219

Scott, a California attorney specializing in estate planning and probate law,

offers a guidebook for decisions loved ones may face when someone dies. He
discusses anatomical gifts, autopsy, choosing a funeral home or crematory,
making arrangements, obituaries, wills, probate, wrongful death action, the con-
tinuation of a business after death, safe deposit boxes, medical insurance, social
security, retirement and annuity benefits, pensions, profit-sharing plans, IRAs,
life insurance, workers’ compensation benefits, and various tax issues. A form
for consolidating important information is included in the back of the book, along
with a list of Internet resources.
1647. Shaffer, Thomas L. Death, Property, and Lawyers: A Behavioral Ap-
proach. New York: Dunellen Publishing, 1970.
1648. Shipley, Roger R. The Consumer’s Guide to Death, Dying, and Bereave-
ment. Palm Springs, CA: ETC Publications, 1982.
1649. Smith, Curtis A. Help for the Bereaved: What the Family of the Deceased
Should Know. Chicago: Adams Press, 1972. Also cited as being published by the
Educational Development Association, Hazel Crest, IL.
This book is a guide for the bereaved with details on funeral planning, legal
issues, financial affairs, and much more.
1650. St. John-Stevas, Norman. Life, Death, and the Law. Cleveland, OH:
World Publishing Co., 1961.
1651. Urofsky, Melvin I. Letting Go: Death, Dying, and the Law. Norman:
University of Oklahoma Press, 1994. Published by Charles Scribner’s Sons, New
York, in 1993.
1652. Wolk, Gloria Grening. Ca$h for the Final Days: A Financial Guide for
the Terminally Ill and Their Advisors. Laguna Hills, CA: Bialkin Books, 1997.
 21
Mental Health Issues

1653. Akhtar, Salman, ed. Three Faces of Mourning: Melancholia, Manic De-
fense, and Moving On. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 2001.
All but two of the chapters were originally presented as papers at the 32nd An-
nual Margaret S. Mahler Symposium on Child Development held April 28, 2001,
in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. The symposium was associated with the Margaret S.
Mahler Psychiatric Research Foundation. Topics include Oedipal and separation-
individuation issues in a woman’s loss of her mother, defenses evoked by early
childhood loss and their impact on life-span development, technical problems in
analyzing the mourning patient, child analysis, object loss in childhood, and inter-
rupted mourning. Includes bibliographical references, information on contributors,
and an index.
1654. Bloom-Feshbach, Jonathan, and Sally Bloom-Feshbach. The Psychol-
ogy of Separation and Loss: Perspectives on Development, Life Transitions, and
Clinical Practice. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 1987. Part of the Jossey-Bass
Social and Behavioral Science Series.
Sixteen articles comprise this 587-page tome on separation and loss. The
articles are divided into three sections: “The Role of Separation in Develop-
ment,” “Separation and Loss in Major Life Transitions,” and “Separation, Loss,
and Psychopathology: Implications and Treatment.” An afterword comments
on converging themes in the psychology of separation and loss. Topics covered
include psychoanalytic views of separation in infancy and early childhood, the
attachment theory, cultural identity and mourning, and parental and sibling death.
Several chapters are devoted to topics not related to death and dying. Includes
name and subject indexes.
1655. Canine, John D. The Psychosocial Aspects of Death and Dying. Stam-
ford, CT: Appleton & Lange, 1996. First edition published by McGraw-Hill
Medical in 1996.
220
 Mental Health Issues 221

1656. Cook, Alicia Skinner, and Daniel S. Dworkin. Helping the Bereaved:
Therapeutic Interventions for Children, Adolescents, and Adults. New York:
Basic Books, 1992.
Written for mental health professionals, Cook and Dworkin’s book intends to
provide knowledge and skills to help them work successfully with the bereaved.
Stressing that the “practice of grief therapy is based on an in-depth understanding
of grieving and its manifestations, and like other specialized areas of therapy, it
requires expertise in assessment, diagnosis, intervention,” the authors provide guid-
ance on the assessment process and criteria for differential diagnosis. They address
both group and individual therapeutic interventions and include examples. Topics
include models of grief resolution; theoretical explanations of the pain of loss;
counseling/support services versus grief therapy; complicated/pathological grieving;
therapeutic issues with specific types of loss; positive outcomes of bereavement;
clinical considerations; grief and clinical depression; bereavement scales and inven-
tories; special considerations for children and adolescents, including nonverbal com-
munication; therapeutic techniques; self-help and therapy groups; psychotherapy for
young people; cultural considerations in grief therapy; the resolution of grief and
termination of therapy; socioeconomic influences; and the effects of a therapist’s
cultural background. Includes references and an index.
1657. Dietrich, David R., and Peter C. Shabad, eds. The Problem of Loss and
Mourning: Psychoanalytic Perspectives. Madison, CT: International Universities
Press, 1989.
1658. Eissler, Kurt R. The Psychiatrist and the Dying Patient. New York: In-
ternational Universities Press, 1955. Reprinted in 1970.
A classic of thanatological literature, Eissler reviews the history of Sigmund
Freud’s thanatology, individualism, attitudes toward death, death and the plea-
sure principle, death and ego formation, self-preservation, death as a psychologi-
cally determined event, and euthanasia. Includes three case histories, concluding
remarks on the problems of countertransference, information about death and the
biological sciences, and text on death as a psychic event. Eissler also offers com-
mentary on orthothanasia, or passive death. Includes a bibliography.
1659. Finn, William F., and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. Women and Loss: Psy-
chobiological Perspectives. New York: Praeger, 1985. Part of the Foundation of
Thanatology series.
1660. Garfield, Charles A., ed. Psychosocial Care of the Dying Patient. New
York: McGraw-Hill, 1978.
Includes E. W. Young’s “Reflections on Life and Death.”
1661. Kauffman, Jeffrey. Guidebook on Helping Persons with Mental Retar-
dation Mourn. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2005. Part of the Death,
Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
222 Chapter 21

1662. Kennedy, Elizabeth A. The Impact of Cognitive Development and Social-

ization Factors on the Concept of Death among Adults with Mental Retardation.
Akron, OH: University of Akron, 2000. Author’s doctoral dissertation at the
University of Akron, May, 2000.
1663. Klagsbrun, Samuel C., Ivan K. Goldberg, Marilyn M. Rawnsley, Austin
H. Kutscher, Eric R. Marcus, and Mary-Ellen Siegel, eds. Psychiatric Aspects of
Terminal Illness. Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1988.
The editors present a collection of articles exploring a multitude of mental
health topics and their relevance to the care of terminal patients. Topics include
confronting terminal illness, physician attitudes toward dying patients, commu-
nicating with the patient, issues of control and passivity, psychiatric assessment,
death anxiety, perceptions of life-threatening illness, treating patients with AIDS,
dementia, and home care. Includes references and a subject index.
1664. Kutscher, Austin H. Living under the Sword: Psychosocial Aspects of
Recurrent and Progressive Life-Threatening Illness. Lanham, MD: Scarecrow
Press, 2004.
1665. Kutscher, Austin H., Ivan K. Goldberg, and Sidney Malitz, eds. Psycho-
pharmacological Agents in the Care of the Terminally Ill and the Bereaved. New
York: Foundation of Thanatology, Columbia University Press, 1973.
1666. Lindenberg, Steven Phillip. Group Psychotherapy with People Who Are
Dying. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1983.
1667. Luchterhand, Charlene, and Nancy Murphy. Helping Adults with Men-
tal Retardation Grieve a Death Loss. Philadelphia: Accelerated Development,
1998.
1668. Meyer, Joachim E. Death and Neurosis. New York: International Uni-
versities Press, 1975. Translated by Margarete Nunberg. Originally published by
Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, Gottingen, in 1973.
As with many books published in the early 1970s, Meyer’s text notes with
amazement the growing fascination with death and dying. He writes about the
waning themes of avoidance, suppression, and denial of mortality; however, he
points out that this altered approach is too new for interpretation and quotes Sig-
mund Freud saying, “The wanderer who sings in the dark denies his fears, but his
singing does not lighten the darkness.” Themes in the book include fear of death
as a determinant in the origin of neuroses, death dreams, death anxiety during
various life phases, psychodynamic aspects, current conscious attitudes toward
death and dying, mourning, religious and philosophical considerations, and mod-
ern medicine in the context of aging and death. Includes references.
1669. Rogers, W. F. The Place of Grief Work in Mental Health. Madison, WI:
Microcard Foundation for the American Theological Library Association, 1956.
 Mental Health Issues 223

1670. Schaverien, Joy. The Dying Patient in Psychotherapy: Desire, Dreams,

and Individuation. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2002.
Intended for mental health professionals, this book reveals the process of
individuation through an “account of love and death within a therapeutic re-
lationship.” Schaverien, a Jungian analyst and professor of psychology at the
University of Sheffield, discusses the therapeutic relationship, dreams and the
erotic transference and countertransference, mourning, hospice, medications, and
bereavement. Includes a list of thirty dreams and where they can be found in the
text, references, and an index.
1671. Schoenberg, Bernard S., and Arthur C. Carr. Psychosocial Aspects of
Terminal Care of Oral Cancer. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1976.
1672. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Arthur C. Carr, and Austin H. Kutscher. Con-
tributions to Psychiatry, Education of the Health Professional, Thanatology, and
Ethical Values. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1984.
1673. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Arthur C. Carr, David Peretz, and Austin H.
Kutscher, eds. Psychosocial Aspects of Terminal Care. New York: Columbia
University Press, 1972.
1674. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Irwin Gerber, Alfred Wiener, Austin H.
Kutscher, David Peretz, Arthur C. Carr, and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. Bereave-
ment: Its Psychosocial Aspects. New York: Columbia University Press, 1975.
The editors, noted authorities on thanatology who are associated with the non-
profit Foundation of Thanatology, have assembled a collection of articles on the
fundamental concepts of bereavement, the bereavement process, family issues
associated with grief, the role of the health care professional, and therapeutic in-
tervention. Specific topics addressed include uses of ethnography in understand-
ing grief and mourning, hallucinations among the bereaved, weight loss and sleep
disturbance, attitudes toward death, pathological bereavement, parental grief,
withdrawal in bereaved children, vulnerability among the aged bereaved, and the
role of the nurse. Includes professional information for each of the contributors.
The index is attributed to Lucia Bove.
1675. Shabad, Peter C. Despair and the Return of Hope: Echoes of Mourning
in Psychotherapy. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 2001.
1676. Weisman, Avery D. On Dying and Denying: A Psychiatric Study of
Terminality. New York: Behavioral Publications, 1972. Part of the Gerontology
Series, Sheldon R. Roen, series editor. Also cited as Death and Denial.
Weisman, a psychiatrist at Massachusetts General Hospital and Harvard Medi-
cal School, presents a study of denial and death that includes clinical examples
of the terminally ill. Chapters focus on the practical significance of mortality,
common misconceptions about death and denial, death from terminal old age, in-
dications on impending death, counterparts of death, illusion and incipient death,
224 Chapter 21

denial and acceptance in myocardial infarction and cancer, and case material and
methods. Includes a bibliography and an index. Foreword by Herman Feifel.
1677. Weisman, Avery D., and Robert J. Kastenbaum. The Psychological Au-
topsy: A Study of the Terminal Phase of Life. New York: Behavioral Publications,
1968. Part of the Gerontology Series, Sheldon R. Roen, series editor. Community
Mental Health Journal Monograph number 4. Reprinted by Human Sciences
Press in 1972.
1678. Zisook, Sidney. Biopsychosocial Aspects of Bereavement. Washington,
DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1987. Part of the Progress in Psychiatry Series.
 22
Miscellaneous

1679. Aries, Philippe. Images of Man and Death. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1985. Translated by Janet Lloyd.
1680. Bataille, Georges. Death and Sensuality: A Study of Eroticism and the
Taboo. New York: Walker Publishing Co., 1962. Published by Arno Press, New
York, in 1976 as part of the Literature of Death and Dying series.
1681. Berridge, Kate. Vigor Mortis: The End of the Death Taboo. London:
Profile Books, 2002.
1682. Bryant, Clifton D., and D. J. Shoemaker. Death and the Dead for Fun
and Profit: Thanatological Entertainment as Popular Culture. Blacksburg, VA:
Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University, 1977.
1683. Ebon, Martin. The Evidence for Life after Death. New York: Signet-New
American Library, 1977.
This book is a simple examination of extrasensory perception (ESP), the ele-
ments of witchcraft, exorcism, and other phenomena.
1684. Fahy, Thomas Richard. Considering Alan Ball: Essays on Sexuality,
Death, and America in the Television and Film Writings. Jefferson, NC: McFar-
land & Co., 2006.
1685. Green, Mary Lou Johnson. The Image of Death as Portrayed in Fiction
for Children. Bethlehem, PA: Lehigh University. 1975. The author’s doctoral
dissertation.
1686. Harris, Raymond I. Outline of Death Investigation. Springfield, IL:
Charles C. Thomas, 1973.
1687. Jones, Barbara. Design for Death. New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1967.

225
226 Chapter 22

1688. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, ed. Images of Growth and Death. Englewood

Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1976. A Spectrum book.
This is an edition of the well-known title Death: The Final Stage of Growth.
Includes an index.
1689. Liechty, Daniel. Death and Denial: Interdisciplinary Perspectives on the
Legacy of Ernest Becker. Westport, CT: Praeger, 2002.
1690. Mason, Edward A. Films on Death and Dying. New York: Education
Film Library Association, 1973.
Mason presents a 40-page booklet listing approximately forty death-related
films.
1691. Merkeley, Donald K. The Investigation of Death. Springfield, IL: Charles
C. Thomas, 1957.
1692. Piaget, Jean. The Child’s Conception of Physical Casualty. London:
Kegan Paul, 1930.
1693. Whiter, Walter. Dissertation on the Disorder of Death: The State of
the Frame under the Signs of Death Called Suspended Animation. New York:
Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally
published in 1819.
1694. Wolfenstein, Martha. Disaster: A Psychological Essay. New York:
Arno Press, 1976. Originally published by Free Press, Macmillan, New York,
in 1957.
 23
Near-Death Experiences

1695. Anderson, J. Kerby. Life, Death, and Beyond. Grand Rapids, MI: Zonder-
van Publishing House, 1980.
Anderson presents a review of near-death phenomena, including out-of-body
experiences among terminally ill patients and after-life experiences of patients
who have experienced “clinical death.” Includes a bibliography.
1696. Atwater, P. M. H., and David H. Morgan. The Complete Idiot’s Guide to
Near-Death Experience. Indianapolis, IN: Alpha Books/Penguin, 2000.
Using the popular publishing format of “The Complete Idiot’s Guide to . . .,”
Atwater offers a lengthy overview of near-death topics, which include types of
experiences, historical references, empathic experiences, guided visualizations,
childhood experiences, suicide enigmas, spiritual and religious issues, psycho-
logical and physiological aftereffects, synesthesia and electrical sensitivity,
hallucinations, spontaneous recall, formal research into near-death experiences,
scientific naysayers, interpreting storylines, otherworldly journeys, alternate real-
ities, transformations of consciousness, and enlightenment. Includes an excellent
glossary, information on the International Association for Near-Death Studies,
a list of publications for further reading, websites, and contact and background
information on individuals and organizations mentioned in the text.
1697. Bayless, Raymond. The Other Side of Death. New Hyde Park, NY: Uni-
versity Books, 1971.
Using a “sternly critical scientific method,” Bayless offers an extensive ex-
amination of the after-death state. Through a review of mediumistic communi-
cations and out-of-body experiences, he openly and candidly discusses errors,
ridiculous elements, and false information contained in them. He also provides
a historical overview of theories of the after-death state. Other paranormal
topics referenced or explored include cross-correspondences, communications

227
228 Chapter 23

with and from the dead, deathbed observations, apparitions, astral projection,
telekinesis, and materialization.
1698. Bayly, Joseph. The View from a Hearse. Rev. ed. Elgin, IL: David Cook
Publishing Co., 1973.
Bayly offers short essays on near-death experiences.
1699. Bulkeley, Kelly, and Patricia Bulkley. Dreaming beyond Death: A Guide
to Predeath Dreams and Visions. Boston: Beacon Press, 2005.
The authors offer an extensive treatment of predeath dreams and believe they
are therapeutic for the dying in that they offer solace and peace. They suggest
that dreams experienced by those on the verge of death can be categorized un-
der three themes: dreams in which death is represented as a journey; dreams in
which a guide appears, and dreams involving obstacles that parallel concerns of
the dying in real life. They address visitations, near-death experiences, religion
and spirituality, metaphors and dreaming, the anticipatory function in dreaming,
life reviews, family and faith, visions and dementia, and reconciliation through
dreaming. An appendix offers general caregiving resources for the terminally ill.
Bulkeley is a visiting scholar at the Graduate Theological Union in Berkeley,
California. Bulkley is a Presbyterian minister who served as the spiritual services
provider at the Hospice of Marin in California.
1700. Foos-Graber, Anya. Deathing: An Intelligent Alternative for the Final
Moments of Life. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1984. Also published by
Nicolas-Hays, Inc., York Beach, ME, in 1989.
Foos-Graber, who herself has had a near-death experience, illustrates a “new
way of dying” with deathing or conscious and purposeful dying. Includes a
manual of deathing, experiences with this approach, an extensive section of addi-
tional resources with an annotated bibliography, some black-and-white drawings
illustrating various techniques, and an index.
1701. Green, H. Leon. If I Should Wake Before I Die: The Medical and Biblical
Truth about Near-Death Experiences. Wheaton, IL: Crossway, 1997.
1702. Greyson, Bruce, and Chuck Flynn, eds. The Near-Death Experience:
Problems, Prospects, Perspectives. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1984.
1703. Lundahl, Craig R., ed. A Collection of Near-Death Research Readings:
Scientific Inquiries into the Experiences of Persons Near Physical Death. Chi-
cago: Nelson-Hall Publishing, 1982.
Includes work by Karlis Osis, Erlendur Haraldsson, Kenneth Ring, Raymond
A. Moody Jr., Russell Noyes, and Michael Grosso.
1704. Matson, Archie. Afterlife: Reports from the Threshold of Death. New
York: Harper & Row, 1977. Originally published under the title The Waiting
World.
 Near-Death Experiences 229

Matson presents an entertaining and provocative look at near-death experi-

ences and afterlife musings. He includes personal stories and discusses ghosts,
the “thrill” of dying, and concepts of heaven and hell. The second section looks
at scientific and doctrinal objections, including biblical interpretations. While
humorous at times, Matson does offer an intelligent discussion of the case for the
belief in a life after death. Matson describes the afterlife as one of eternal peace,
happiness, and contentment.
1705. ———. The Waiting World: What Happens after Death. New York:
Harper & Row, 1975.
This book is an exploration of parapsychology and collection of near-death
experiences.
1706. Montague, William P. The Chances of Surviving Death (Ingersall Lec-
ture, 1932). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1934.
1707. Moody, Raymond A. Jr. Life after Life: The Investigation of a Phenom-
enon—Survival of Bodily Death. New York: Bantam Books, 1975.
1708. Morse, Melvin, and Paul Perry. Closer to the Light: Learning from the
Near-Death Experiences of Children. New York: Random House, 1991.
1709. ———. Transformed by the Light: The Powerful Effect of Near-Death
Experiences on People’s Lives. New York: Villard Books, 1992.
1710. Nouwen, Henri J. M. Beyond the Mirror: Reflections on Death and Life.
New York: Crossroads Publishing Co., 1990.
This 74-page book is Nouwen’s personal account of an accident and result-
ing near-death experience. He offers interesting perspectives on death and the
afterlife from a Catholic point of view. He notes, “My accident brought me to the
portal of death and led me to a new experience of God.”
1711. Piper, Don, and Cecil Murphey. 90 Minutes in Heaven: A True Story of
Death and Life. Grand Rapids, MI: Revell, 2004. Written with Cecil Murphey.
An ordained minister, Piper recounts surviving a horrifying automobile ac-
cident and his near-death experience. The book offers encouragement to those
recovering from injuries and those dealing with the loss of a loved one.
1712. Ring, Kenneth. Heading toward Omega: In Search of the Meaning of
Near-Death Experience. New York: William Morrow, 1984.
Ring’s book, as he notes in the preface, is about awakening and is not simply
a collection of near-death experiences or stories. He includes both near-death
and clinical-death experiences. In the foreword, Elisabeth Kübler-Ross writes,
“Thank you, Kenneth, for your masterful work and for the objectivity and open-
ness of this new book.” Includes a bibliography and an index.
230 Chapter 23

1713. ———. Life at Death: A Scientific Investigation of the Near-Death Expe-

rience. New York: Coward, McCann and Geoghegan, 1980. Published by Mor-
row, New York, in 1982.
Ring, professor of psychology at the University of Connecticut, offers a study
of the near-death experience. He explores stages of the near-death experience,
qualitative aspects, attitudes toward death, possible interpretations of such expe-
riences, and decisions to return to life. He includes a compelling essay entitled
“Beyond the Body: A Parapsychological-Holographic Explanation of the Near-
Death Experience.” Appendixes include a narrative on creating a Center for the
Dying Person and information on the Association for the Scientific Study of
Near-Death Phenomena. Introduction by Dr. Raymond A. Moody Jr.
1714. Ring, Kenneth, Sharon Cooper, and Charles Tart. Mindsight: Near-Death
and Out-of-Body Experiences in the Blind. Palo Alto, CA: William James Center
for Consciousness Studies at the Institute of Transpersonal Psychology, 1999.
1715. Ring, Kenneth, and Evelyn Valarino. Lessons from the Light: What We
Can Learn from the Near-Death Experience. Portsmouth, NH: Moment Point
Press, 2000.
1716. Sabom, Michael. Light and Death: One Doctor’s Fascinating Account of
Near-Death Experiences. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing Co., 1998.
1717. Vince, Ken R. Visions of God: From the Near Death Experience. Bur-
dett, NY: Larson Publications, 1994.
1718. Wilkerson, R. Beyond and Back: Those Who Died—and Lived to Tell
about It. Anaheim, CA: Melodyland Productions, 1977.
 24
Nursing

1719. American Nurses Association. Standards and Scope of Hospice Nursing

Practice. Kansas City, MO: American Nurses Association, 1987.
1720. Browning, Mary H., and Edith Patton Lewis, compilers. The Dying Pa-
tient: A Nursing Perspective. New York: American Journal of Nursing Company,
1972. Part of the Contemporary Nursing Series.
This work contains thirty-seven articles on death and dying from the American
Journal of Nursing, Nursing Research, and Nursing Outlook, published from
1962 to 1972. Contributors include Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, Anselm L. Strauss,
Barney G. Glaser, Margaret Mead, Jeanne C. Quint, Cicely M. Saunders (founder
of the hospice movement), and Frances Mervyn. Topics covered include teach-
ing students to work with the dying, children’s awareness of fatal illness, needs
of terminally ill adolescents, thoughtful care for the dying, the plight of dying
patients in hospitals, obstacles to overcome to helping the dying, awareness of
death, the composure of nurses, student reactions to children’s deaths, the right
to die, patient concerns, and the social loss of dying patients.
1721. Charles-Edwards, Allison. The Nursing Care of the Dying Patient. Bea-
consfield, UK: Beaconsfield Publishing, 1983.
1722. Earle, Ann M., Nina T. Argondizzo, and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. The
Nurse as Caregiver for the Terminal Patient and His Family. New York: Colum-
bia University Press, 1976. Also cited as The Nurse as Caregiver for the Dying
Patient and Family.
This book contains twenty-two papers from a symposium on thanatology and
the role of nurses in caring for dying patients and their families. Subjects covered
include coping with staff grief, personal perspectives on death and dying, work-
ing through feelings surrounding death, pediatric nurses’ dreams about death, the

231
232 Chapter 24

nurse as crisis intervener, terminally ill children, continuing and discontinuing

care, and the existential meaning of death. Also contains three articles addressing
gender and how it is viewed in thanatology nursing, stereotyped sex-role ranking
of caregivers and quality of care for dying patients, female chauvinism in nursing,
and the nurse in thanatology and what she can learn from the women’s liberation
movement.
1723. Epstein, Charlotte. Nursing the Dying Patient: Learning Processes for
Interaction. Reston, VA: Reston Publishing, 1975.
1724. Hector, Winifred, and Sarah Whitfield. Nursing Care for the Dying Pa-
tient and the Family. London: Heinemann Medical Books, 1982.
The authors discuss death attitudes and the nurse’s role in terminal care in this
142-page text.
1725. Hospice and Palliative Nurses Association. Scope and Standards of
Hospice and Palliative Nursing Practice. Washington, DC: American Nurses
Publishing, 2002.
1726. Hurst, Noonan. Dealing with Death and Dying: A Nursing Skillbook.
Jenkintown, PA: Intermed Communications, 1977.
1727. Kutscher, Lillian G., and Elsa Poslusny. Nursing and Thanatology. New
York: Arno Press, 1981. Published by MSS Information Corp., New York, in
1978.
1728. Matzo, Marianne, and Deborah Witt Sherman. Palliative Care Nursing:
Quality Care to the End of Life. New York: Springer, 2001.
1729. O’Connor, Andrea. Dying and Grief: Nursing Interventions. New York:
American Journal of Nursing Co., 1976. Part of the Contemporary Nursing Series.
1730. Olson, Melodie. Healing the Dying. Albany, NY: Delmar Publishers,
Inc., 2001. Part of the Nurse as Healer Series, Lynn Keegan, series editor.
1731. Padilla, Geraldine V., Veronica E. Baker, and Vikki A. Dolan. Interact-
ing with Dying Patients: An Interhospital Nursing Research and Nursing Edu-
cation Project. Duarte, CA: City of Hope National Medical Center, Division of
Nursing, 1975.
1732. Payne, Sheila, Jane Seymour, and Christine Ingleton. Palliative Care
Nursing. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2004.
1733. Poor, Belinda, and Gail P. Poirrier. End of Life Nursing Care. Boston:
Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2001.
1734. Quint, Jeanne C. The Nurse and the Dying Patient. New York: Macmil-
lan & Co., 1967. Also published in 1973.
 Nursing 233

Quint details the experiences of a student nurse working with terminally ill
patients and gives practical advice for coping and handling problems related to
death and dying.
1735. Schraff, Sylvia H., ed. Hospice: The Nursing Perspective. New York:
National League for Nursing, 1984. Publication no. 20-1967.
Schraff, executive director of a home nursing agency, presents chapters from
twelve fellow nurses on the role and function of nursing in the hospice move-
ment. Schraff emphasizes the distinction between hospice and traditional care
for the dying. Chapters cover the uniqueness of hospice, philosophies of the
hospice movement, hospice administration, reimbursement issues, the hospice
team of providers, stress management for staff members, the roles of nurses and
volunteers, bereavement programs, and future issues and directions. Several case
examples are included at the end of the book. Also includes notes, references, and
biographical information on each author. There is no index.
1736. Selder, Florence. Nursing Education in Thanatology: A Curriculum Con-
tinuum. New York: Haworth Press, 1990.
1737. Steele, Shirley, ed. Nursing Care of the Child with Long-Term Illness.
2nd ed. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1977.
This text is a classic of pediatric nursing and the care of terminally ill children.
1738. Ufema, Joy. Insights on Death and Dying. Philadelphia: Lippincott Wil-
liams & Wilkins, 2006.
This collection of articles was previously published in Nursing magazine.
Topics include deathbed experiences, surviving spouses, aggressive comfort
care, unique grieving needs, ancillary staff members as partners in care of the
terminally ill, and issues surrounding hospice care.
1739. Wald, Florence S., and Martha E. Russell. Hospice Education Program
for Nurses. Hyattsville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services,
Public Health Service, Health Resources Administration, Bureau of Health Pro-
fessions, Division of Nursing, 1981.
1740. Wiscniak, Debra. A Qualitative Study Exploring the Quality of Life of In-
formal Caregivers Caring for Someone with a Terminal Illness. Ottawa, Ontario:
National Library of Canada/Bibliotheque Nationale du Canada, 2004.
1741. Zerwekh, Joyce V. Nursing Care at the End of Life: Palliative Care for
Patients and Families. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Co., 2006.
 25
Palliative Care

1742. Ajemian, Ina, and Balfour M. Mount. The R.V.H. Manual on Pallia-
tive/Hospice Care: A Resource Book. New York: Arno Press, 1980. Part of the
Foundation of Thanatology/Arno Press Continuing Series on Thanatology.
1743. Aldridge, David, ed. Music Therapy in Palliative Care: New Voices.
Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1999.
1744. Barnard, David, Anna M. Towers, Patricia Boston, and Yanna Lambrini-
dou. Crossing Over: Narratives of Palliative Care. New York: Oxford University
Press, 2000.
1745. Blues, Ann G., and Joyce V. Zerwekh. Hospice and Palliative Care
Nursing. New York: Grune & Stratton/Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1984.
In this nursing textbook, the authors explore patient care in hospice and pallia-
tive care settings. Topics covered include the hospice philosophy of appropriate
care, understanding the patient experience, assessment and goals of care, the
stucture and makeup of the hospice team, principles and standards of hospice
care, symptom control, control of pain, final days, grief and bereavement, social
decisions and social support, the family as a care unit, establishing a community
hospice, professional stress and distress, and the integration of hospice into the
acute care system. Blues also offers a chapter on understanding one’s own feel-
ings about death. Includes appendixes with a list of common nursing diagnoses
and the document “Standards and Principles of a Hospice Program of Care,”
adopted by the National Hospice Organization’s board of directors in February
1979. Includes an index.
1746. Bruera, Eduardo, and Robin L. Fainsinger. Palliative Care Medicine:
Patient-Based Learning. Edmonton: University of Alberta, 1995.

234
 Palliative Care 235

This book is a 171-page manual based on thirty-one different clinical problems

in end-of-life care, each presented in a case presentation format. The main text is
followed by discussion, references, and multiple choice questions.
1747. Cairnes, Moira, Marney Thompson, and Wendy Wainwright. Transitions
in Dying and Bereavement: A Psychosocial Guide for Hospice and Palliative
Care. Baltimore, MD: Health Professions Press, 2003.
1748. Central Service for the Chronically Ill. Terminal Care for Cancer Pa-
tients. Chicago: Institute of Medicine of Chicago, 1950.
1749. Chen, Pauline. Final Exam. New York: Knopf, 2007.
Chen, a young surgeon, writes graphically about surgery and death and advo-
cates for doctors to take a more personal interest in their patients, particularly
those who are terminally ill.
1750. Clark, David, and Jane Seymour. Reflections on Palliative Care. Phila-
delphia: Open University Press, 1999. Part of the Facing Death series, David
Clark, editor.
1751. Clark, David, Jo Hockley, and Sam Ahmedzai, eds. New Themes in
Palliative Care. Philadelphia: Open University Press. Part of the Facing Death
series, David Clark, editor.
1752. Cobb, Mark. Special Issues in Palliative Care. Philadelphia: Open Uni-
versity Press. Part of the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor.
1753. Coberly, Margaret. Sacred Passage: How to Provide Fearless, Compas-
sionate Care for the Dying. Boston: Shambhala Publications, 2002.
A nurse educator and director of research and development for Hospice
Hawaii, Coberly divides her book into the sections “Death in Western Health
Care,” “Resources from the Tibetan Buddhist Tradition,” and “Practical Ap-
plications for Care Providers.” She presents practical advice on the many
dimensions of caring for the dying. Coberly discusses the prevailing medi-
cal paradigm for dealing with death, death denial, emergency room practice,
Kübler-Ross and her writings on dying, palliative care, and facing death.
Drawing upon Tibetan traditions, she reviews the eight stages of dissolution
and discusses the truth of impermanence and the enlightened mind. She also
comments on the Tibetan Book of the Dead. Includes excellent notes with nar-
rative for most and an annotated bibliography.
1754. Cohen, Cynthia B. Casebook on the Termination of Life-Sustaining
Treatment and the Care of the Dying. Bloomington: Indiana University Press,
1988. A Hastings Center publication.
1755. Davy, John, and Susan Ellis. Counseling Skills in Palliative Care. Phila-
delphia: Open University Press, 2000. Part of the Counseling Skills series.
236 Chapter 25

1756. Dillard, James, and Leigh Ann Hirschman. The Chronic Pain Solution:
The Comprehensive, Step-by-Step Guide to Choosing the Best of Alternative and
Conventional Medicine. New York: Bantam Books, 2002.
1757. Doyle, Derek, ed. Palliative Care: The Management of Far-Advanced
Illness. Beckenham, UK: Croom Helm, 1983.
1758. Doyle, Derek, and Geoffrey W. C. Hanks. Oxford Textbook of Palliative
Medicine. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993.
1759. Doyle, Derek, David Jeffrey, and Kenneth Calhan. Palliative Care in the
Home. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.
1760. Fallon, Marie, and Geoffrey W. C. Hanks, eds. ABC of Palliative Care.
2nd ed. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing, 2006.
The authors present a detailed overview and exploration of palliative care,
covering principles and clinical solutions. They examine respiratory issues, oral
health, communication issues, community palliative care, anorexia, constipation,
fatigue, emergencies, care for children, complementary therapies, the last forty-
eight hours, and bereavement. Social and psychological aspects of palliative care
are thoroughly examined.
1761. Faull, Christina, and Yvonne Carter. Handbook of Palliative Care. Mal-
den, MA: Blackwell Publishing, 2005.
1762. Field, David, David Clark, Jessica Corner, and Carol Davis, eds. Re-
searching Palliative Care. Philadelphia: Open University Press. Part of the Fac-
ing Death series, David Clark, editor.
1763. Field, Marilyn J., and Christine K. Cassel, eds. Approaching Death:
Improving Care at the End of Life. Washington, DC: National Academy Press,
1997. Published with the Division of Health Care Services, Institute of Medicine,
Committee on Care at the End of Life.
In broad overview, this title looks at current knowledge of end-of-life care,
what remains to be learned, and what is known but not adequately applied. With
guidance for policymakers and practitioners, the editors offer thoughts on qual-
ity measurement and improvement, cost concerns, legal and ethical issues, and
the role of practice guidelines. They seek to counter the notion that there are
patients for whom “nothing can be done.” Appendixes total more than 100 pages
and include agendas; participant lists and workshop titles from the Institute of
Medicine’s Feasibility Study on Care at the End of Life (August 1993–Febru-
ary 1994) and the institute’s public meetings; examples of initiatives to improve
care at the end of life; prognosis and clinical predictive models for critically ill
patients; information on cultural diversity in decision making about care at the
end of life; text discussing measuring care at the end of life; excerpts from the
Guidelines for Determining Prognosis in Selected Noncancer Diseases; informa-
 Palliative Care 237

tion on the American Board of Internal Medicine Clinical Competence in End-of-

Life Care; examples of medical education curricula; and committee biographies.
Includes an index.
1764. Fins, Joseph. A Palliative Ethic of Care: Clinical Wisdom at Life’s End.
Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2006.
1765. Firth, Pam, Gill Luff, and David Oliviere, eds. Loss, Change, and Be-
reavement in Palliative Care. New York: Open University Press, 2005. Part of
the Facing Death series, David Clark, editor.
Integrating theory, research, practice, and service, the editors bring together
a broad variety of chapters on current thinking in the areas of loss, change,
and bereavement. In thirteen chapters, contributors discuss changing views of
mourning; illness and loss within the family; life review with the terminally ill;
the death of a child; interventions with bereaved children; involving service us-
ers in palliative care; excluded and vulnerable groups of service users; current
research and developments regarding caregivers; group work in palliative care;
cultural perspectives on loss and bereavement; and the context of loss, change,
and bereavement in palliative care. Includes references and an index. Foreword
by Barbara Monroe of St. Christopher’s Hospice.
1766. Ford, Gillian, and Ian G. Lewin. Managing Terminal Illness. London:
Royal College of Physicians of London, 1996. From the Interfaces in Medicine
Conference in 1995.
1767. Goldberg, Ivan K., S. Malitz, and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. Psychophar-
macological Agents for the Terminally Ill and Bereaved. New York: Columbia
University Press, 1973.
Includes Tamara Ferguson’s article “Decision Making and Tranquilizers in
Widowhood.”
1768. Hanratty, J. F., and Irene Higginson. Palliative Care in Terminal Illness.
New York: Radcliffe Medical Press, 1994.
1769. Hockley, Jo, and David Clark, eds. Palliative Care for Older People in
Care Homes. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2002.
1770. Jennings, Bruce, and Gregory E. Kaebnick. Improving End-of-Life Care:
Why Has It Been So Difficult? Garrison, NY: Hastings Center, 2005.
1771. Katz, Jeanne Samson, and Sheila M. Peace. End of Life in Care Homes:
A Palliative Approach. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003.
The authors examine opportunities for improving care of the elderly in nursing
homes and other care facilities. They discuss changes in palliative care approaches
during recent decades and highlight new choices for end-of-life care. Also explored
are the “disadvantaged dying,” people who are disenfranchised due to mental health
issues or physical disabilities. Includes references and an index.
238 Chapter 25

1772. Kaye, Peter. Notes on Symptom Control in Hospice and Palliative Care.
Essex, CT: Hospice Education Institute, 1990.
1773. Kinzbrunner, Barry M., Neil J. Weinreb, and Joel S. Policzer. Twenty
Common Problems: End-of-Life Care. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001.
1774. Kuebler, Kim K., Mellar P. Davis, and Crystal Dea Moore. Palliative
Practices: An Interdisciplinary Approach. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier Mosby,
2005.
1775. Lantos, John D. The Lazarus Case: Life-and-Death Issues in Neonatal
Intensive Care. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2001.
1776. Lawton, Julia. The Dying Process: Patients’ Experiences of Palliative
Care. New York: Routledge, 2000.
This book seems as much about Lawton’s own emotional journey of becoming
more and more familiar with the realities of death and dying as it is an examina-
tion of Western society’s notions of death; end-of-life care; and our romanticized
images of peaceful, good death. The shock of death’s reality affects Lawton’s un-
derstanding and perceptions of hospice care, which she becomes critical of in the
book. This comfort-focused end-of-life care is a mask for bodily deterioration,
she asserts in one chapter. Lawton looks at the transition from “body-subject”
to “body-object,” inpatient hospice care and the sequestration of the unbounded
body, “dirty dying,” and invisible suffering in the social death. Appendixes
include a hospice floor plan and a list of duties of in-house hospice volunteers.
Includes notes, a bibliography, and name and subject indexes.
1777. Lipman, Arthur G., Kenneth C. Jackson II, and Linda S. Tyler. Evidence-
Based Symptom Control in Palliative Care: Systemic Reviews and Validated
Clinical Practice Guidelines for Fifteen Common Problems in Patients with Life
Limiting Disease. New York: Haworth Press, 2000.
1778. MacDonald, Neil, Marcel Boisvert, and Deborah Dudgeon. Palliative
Medicine: A Case-Based Manual. New York: Oxford University Press, 1998.
1779. MacPherson, Myra. She Came to Live Out Loud: An Inspiring Family
Journey through Illness, Loss, and Grief. New York: Scribner, 1999.
This guide to dealing with illness, coping with loss, and recovering from grief
is the product of the author’s three years with the family of Anna, a young, wise,
and witty woman suffering from breast cancer. Through this story, MacPherson
offers insight on how families with children cope with terminally ill parents, how
friends and loved ones provide better support for the dying, the value of feelings
of all kinds, why doctors avoid the issue and subject of death, and differences in
grieving between men and women. It is a moving tribute.
1780. McDermott, R., and J. Russell. Palliative Care: A Shared Experience.
London: Accell Printers, 1994.
 Palliative Care 239

1781. Monroe, Barbara, and David Oliviere. Patient Participation in Palliative

Care: A Voice for the Voiceless. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003.
This title stresses the importance of patient participation in their own health
care decisions, particularly palliative, end-of-life care. It discusses bereavement
issues, awareness of cultural differences, and the interdisciplinary nature of pal-
liative care. Includes material from the patients themselves.
1782. O’Brien, Joanne. Pain Management in Terminal Illness. Independence,
MO: Graceland University, 2002.
1783. O’Reilly, Karen, and Max S. Watson. Pain and Palliation. New York:
Oxford University Press, 2006.
1784. Owens, Michael R. Primary Care Issues for End-of-Life Care. Premiere
edition. Newtown, PA: Handbooks in Health Care, 2003.
Owens presents a core curriculum focused on essential areas of palliative care
that he notes are too often omitted from medical training programs. He begins
with narrative on the current state of dying in the United States. He continues
with chapters on dying, pain management, gastrointestinal and respiratory symp-
toms, neurologic care, fatigue at the end of life, hospice and palliative care, and
end-of-life decision making. An appendix lists organizations that may be helpful
to both medical professionals and their patients.
1785. Preston, Thomas A. Final Victory: Taking Charge of the Last Stages of
Life, Facing Death on Your Own Terms. Roseville, CA: Forum/Prima Publish-
ing, 2000.
Preston, professor of medicine for more than twenty years at the University of
Washington, is a fierce patients’ rights advocate. In this concise and clearly writ-
ten guide, he describes end-of-life options, alternative treatments that can reduce
suffering, and legal limitations of doctors in reducing pain. The book is intended
for the dying and their loved ones to help them make decisions that will allow
the patient to take charge of the dying process and “set the stage for a peaceful,
dignified death.” Preston provides details on withdrawing life-sustaining therapy,
terminal sedation, living wills, durable powers of attorney, coping with a diagno-
sis, planning in the “world of curative therapy,” legal methods of assisted dying,
physician-assisted suicide, issues with terminally ill children, dealing with symp-
toms during the terminal phase of illness, and pain control. Appendixes include a
sample living will and durable power of attorney as well as a list of organizations
and Internet sites. A brief, annotated list of suggested readings is also included.
1786. Quill, Timothy E., and Margaret Pabst Battin. Physician-Assisted Dying:
The Case for Palliative Care and Patient Choice. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins
University Press, 2004.
1787. Regnard, C., and J. Hockley. A Clinical Decision Guide to Symptom Re-
lief in Palliative Care. Abingdon, Oxford: Radcliffe Medical Press, 2003.
240 Chapter 25

1788. Saunders, Cicely M. Beyond All Pain: A Companion for the Suffering
and Bereaved. London: SPCK Publishing, 1983.
1789. ———. Hospice and Palliative Care: An Interdisciplinary Approach.
Sevenoaks, UK: Edward Arnold, 1990.
1790. Saunders, Cicely M., Mary Baines, and R. J. Dunlop. Living with Dying:
A Guide to Palliative Care. New York: Oxford University Press, 1995.
1791. Sheldon, Frances, and Jo Campling. Psychosocial Palliative Care: Good
Practice in the Care of the Dying and Bereaved. Cheltenham, UK: S. Thornes
Ltd., 1997.
1792. Smith, Doug. The Tao of Dying: A Guide to Caring. Rev. ed. Washing-
ton, DC: Caring Publishing, 1997. Photographs by Marilu Pittman.
Inspired by Lao Tzu’s Tao Te Ching, Smith presents a moving book of poems
and touching photographs with messages about dying. He offers a simple defi-
nition of palliative care as “caring for people without trying to change or cure
them.” Smith is executive director of Kanawha Hospice Care in Charleston, West
Virginia, and he presents workshops on patient care for hospices nationwide. Pro-
ceeds from the book’s sales go to the Caring Institute, a nonprofit organization
seeking to promote the social values reflected in community service.
1793. Smith, Shirley Ann. Hospice Concepts: A Guide to Palliative Care in
Terminal Illness. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2000.
1794. Storey, Porter. Primer of Palliative Care. Glenview, IL: American Acad-
emy of Hospice and Palliative Medicine, 1994.
This book is a 57-page guide to assessment and treatment of common physical
and psychological symptoms in end-of-life care.
1795. Tobin, Daniel R., and Karen Lindsey. Peaceful Dying: The Step-by-Step
Guide to Preserving Your Dignity, Your Choice, and Your Inner Peace at the End
of Life. Reading, MA: Perseus Books, 1999.
Tobin, a palliative care physician and hospice consultant, created the FairCare
Health System and the FairCare program for peaceful dying, a 26-step approach
(A through Z) to making death a peace-centered process. The book discusses and
outlines these steps. Includes appendixes containing living wills, health proxy
forms, a summary of FairCare concepts, a list of hospice organizations, and ad-
ditional resources and reading. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross called the book a “major
contribution to the field.”
1796. Twycross, Robert G., and V. Ventifridda, eds. The Continuing Care of
Terminal Cancer Patients. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1980.
1797. Walter, Tony. The Revival of Death. New York: Routledge, 1994.
Noting that traditional religion and modern medical procedures do little to
address the personal experience of the dying and bereaved, Walter proposes that
 Palliative Care 241

society has turned to new ways of talking about death—a sort of revival of death.
He suggests that people are seeking ultimate authority on death in the individual
self. The new death, Walter says, is personal and facilitated by institutions and
such practices as hospice, palliative care, life-focused funerals, and bereave-
ment counseling. Includes an excellent glossary, an extensive bibliography, and
questions appropriate for students following each chapter. Walter is a lecturer in
sociology.
1798. Williams, Mary E. How Can Care of the Terminally Ill Be Improved?
San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001.
1799. ———. How Should the Physical and Emotional Pain of Terminal Illness
Be Addressed? San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2001.
1800. Woodruff, R. Palliative Medicine. Melbourne, Australia: Asperula Pty
Ltd. Publishers, 1993.
Woodruff’s book is a 421-page manual covering all aspects of end-of-life care.
The book is divided into seven sections: “Introduction to Palliative Care,” “Pain,”
“Other Physical Symptoms and Clinical Problems,” “Psychological Aspects of
Care,” “Alternative and Complementary Medicine,” “AIDS,” and “The Practice
of Palliative Care.”
 26
Parental Loss and Grief

1801. Abrams, Rebecca. When Parents Die: Learning to Live with the Loss of a
Parent. 2nd ed. London: Routledge, 1999. Originally published by Charles Letts
& Co., London, in 1992. Second impression published by HarperCollins, New
York, in 1995. Reprinted in 2000 and 2001.
1802. Ainley, Rosa, ed. Death of a Mother: Daughters’ Stories. San Francisco,
CA: Pandora/HarperCollins, 1994.
Ainley presents a collection of thirty-two nonfiction essays written by fe-
male writers, including May Sarton, Marilyn Hacker, and Barbara James. Each
piece is different in its emotions, use of humor, and experience. Includes brief
biographical information on each writer as well as a list of books and helpful
organizations.
1803. Ajjan, Diana, ed. The Day My Father Died: Women Share Their Stories
of Love, Loss, and Life. Philadelphia: Running Press, 1994.
This book brings together a group of twenty-five women who share stories of
their fathers and how they coped and continue to cope with their loss. Ajjan’s
book is about the special bond between fathers and daughters and how these
women exhibited strength and courage in overcoming their grief. Among the
contributors are Bebe Moore Campbell and Sophia Loren. The contributors come
from a variety of professional backgrounds, many of them writers. Biographical
information on each of them is included.
1804. Akner, Lois F. How to Survive the Loss of a Parent: A Guide for Adults.
New York: William Morris and Co., 1993.
Akner, a psychotherapist, has turned her popular workshops that help adults
cope with the death of a parent into a book. She guides the reader through group
sessions with twelve participants who discuss issues and feelings experienced

242
 Parental Loss and Grief 243

as adult orphans. She discusses the mysteries of grief, family secrets, how being
sad requires a large amount of energy, saying goodbye, and opening up a family
dialogue. The book concludes with a wonderful epilogue entitled “A Year Later.”
Sample coping exercises are incorporated as well as extensive narrative and dis-
cussion between workshop participants. A brief reading list is also included.
1805. Angel, Marc D. The Orphaned Adult: Confronting the Death of a Parent.
New York: Insight Books/Human Sciences Press, 1987.
Angel, a rabbi and scholar of Jewish history and culture, offers an in-depth
look at how adults deal with the death of their parents. He highlights issues often
avoided or denied in Western cultures and discusses processes of adult orphan-
hood, including anticipating the death of a parent, mourning the parent, and
internalizing the reality of the parent’s death. Angel offers personal stories from
his own life and work, incorporating Jewish, Christian, Buddhist, Hindu, and
Freudian philosophies. Includes a bibliography.
1806. Bartocci, Barbara. Nobody’s Child Anymore: Grieving, Caring, and
Comforting When Parents Die. Notre Dame, IN: Sorin Books, 2000. Also cited
as Nobody’s Child Anymore: Reclaiming Purpose and Passion.
1807. Becker, Marilyn R. Last Touch: Preparing for a Parent’s Death. Oak-
land, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 1992.
1808. Berlinsky, Ellen B., and Henry B. Biller. Parental Death and Psychologi-
cal Development. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books/D. C. Heath, 1982.
Berlinsky, a practicing psychologist, and Biller, professor of psychology at the
University of Rhode Island, offer a scholarly analysis of the effects of parental
death on children and their psychological development. The authors provide a
review of existing literature, family and situational variables related to parental
death, and characteristics of the child related to behavior subsequent to parental
bereavement. Biographical information on the authors is provided. Extensive
tables and illustrations of the authors’ research and methodology are also incor-
porated. Includes a list of references as well as subject and name indexes.
1809. Birtchnell, John, and Ian C. Wilson. The Effects of Early Parent Death.
New York: MSS Information Corp., 1973.
1810. Blauner, Bob, ed. Our Mothers’ Spirits: On the Death of Mothers and the
Grief of Men. New York: Regan Books/HarperCollins, 1997.
Blauner provides a collection of narratives and poems on the momentous event
of a mother’s death from the perspective of sons. He notes in the introduction
how much of the literature on death and loss focuses on childhood death or the
death of a spouse, but little is written about the effects of and reactions to the
loss of a elderly parent. The contributors, however, focus on the loss of a mother
at any age. The collection is divided into parts on the aged mother, the young
mother, good deaths and bad deaths, suicide and euthanasia, regret, alienation,
244 Chapter 26

reconceiving the mother, and sustaining the mother’s spirit. A section of photos of
the contributors’ mothers is incorporated. Also includes biographical information
on each contributor. Contributors include John Updike, Kirk Douglas, Wallace
Stegner, Henry Louis Gates Jr., John Cheever, Henry Miller, and Art Buchwald.
1811. Bratman, Fred. Everything You Need to Know When a Parent Dies. New
York: Rosen Publishing Group, 1995. Originally published in 1992.
1812. Brooks, Jane. Midlife Orphan: Facing Life’s Changes Now That Your
Parents Are Gone. New York: Berkeley Books, 1999.
Noting that the word orphan often suggests a child, Brooks writes about the
pain of orphanhood that adults experience. She argues that adults who lose par-
ents in their thirties, forties, and fifties often underestimate the emotional impact
of the death. Brooks discusses changes in self-image, unresolved issues with de-
ceased parents, feelings of anger and guilt, loneliness and fear, the good and bad
aspects of a financial inheritance, grieving, and shifting roles within the family.
Includes a bibliography.
1813. Butler, Shari. Becoming Myself: Living Life to the Fullest after the Loss
of Your Parents. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
Butler, a psychotherapist, provides a guide to coping with parental loss. She
presents the death of a parent as not only a “catalyst for feelings of mourning,
grief, and even helplessness” but an opportunity for “enormous positive change
and growth.” She discusses the nature of parental relationships, reclaiming the
self, rediscovering internal depths, where to turn for nurturing and other forms of
support, integrating traditions and personality characteristics of parents following
their deaths, and forming identity in the years following parental loss. Includes
a bibliography.
1814. Chatman, Delle. The Death of a Parent: Reflections for Adults Mourning
the Loss of a Father or Mother. Chicago: ACTA Publications, 2001.
1815. Curry, Cathleen L. When Your Parent Dies: A Concise and Practical
Source of Help and Advice for Adults Grieving the Death of a Parent. Notre
Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press, 1993.
1816. Davenport, Donna S. Singing Mother Home: A Psychologist’s Journey
through Anticipatory Grief. Denton: University of North Texas Press, 2003.
Davenport tells her story of dealing with anticipatory grief and parental loss.
1817. Davidman, Lynn. Motherloss. Berkeley: University of California Press,
2000.
Through personal narratives provided as part of her research, Davidman ex-
plores the condition and experience of motherloss as a biographical disruption.
She examines the psychological effects and ramifications of losing a mother to
death and offers possibilities for biographical repair and coming to terms with
this special loss. The book is appropriate for both professionals and those who
 Parental Loss and Grief 245

have experienced motherloss. An appendix provides the entire 74-question inter-

view guide the author used in her research. A list of references is also included.
1818. Diamond, Jonathan. Fatherless Sons: Healing the Legacy of Loss. Hobo-
ken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
Diamond, a psychotherapist, uses stories and events told as composites from
his years as a psychotherapist to convey the special nature of men’s grief, par-
ticularly when associated with the loss of a father. He explores loss and aban-
donment, anger and forgiveness, love and acceptance, emptiness and despair,
violence and redemption, teaching sons about death and dying, and spiritual
approaches to grief. Includes a touching epilogue, a list of recommended reading
titles, and an index.
1819. Donnelly, Katherine Fair. Recovering from the Loss of a Parent. New
York: Dodd, Mead & Company, 1987.
Focusing on those grief symptoms that many adult children do not associate
with the loss of a parent, Donnelly presents an in-depth look at parental loss. She
discusses the experiences of bereaved adult children, highlighting the emotions
of grief; dealing with anger; guilt trips; suffering from caretaker syndrome; the
trauma associated with holidays and anniversaries; and characteristics of normal
grieving. She also addresses differing attitudes toward death and religion, coping
with a surviving parent, sibling conflicts, returning to the workplace, remem-
brances and recollections, and finding hope. A separate section focuses on such
“helping hands” as a bereavement support program, organizations that help be-
reaved families, and suggested reading. Includes a list of division presidents by
state of the American Association of Marriage and Family Therapy with contact
information. Also includes an index.
1820. Edelman, Hope. Motherless Daughters: The Legacy of Loss. Reading,
MA: Addison-Wesley, 1994. Published by Delta Trade Paperbacks, New York,
in 1995, and by Da Capo Press, Cambridge, MA, in 2006.
Edelman, who lost her mother at the age of seventeen, presents a moving and
consoling bestseller examining the grief and life-changing effects of maternal loss
on daughters. She looks at the unique grief experience with this type of loss as
well as the effects on identity, personality, self-awareness, family structures and
roles, and life choices going forward. The book is based on the author’s speeches
to motherless women of all ages, research, focus groups, and consultations with
practicing mental health professionals and experts on grieving. Includes the
motherless daughters’ survey, a bibliography, and extensive notes.
1821. ———. Motherless Mothers: How Mother Loss Shapes the Parents We
Become. New York: HarperCollins, 2006.
Author of the 1994 bestseller Motherless Daughters, Edelman presents another
book focused on the loss of a mother. This text, however, discusses how this
loss affects the way women raise their own children. She explores the unique
246 Chapter 26

issues and anxieties encountered by mothers who have no maternal guidance.

Including information from more than 1,000 women she surveyed, she discusses
motherhood and mourning, the absent grandmother, explaining death to children,
and raising children without the guidance of a mother. Appendixes include the
motherless mother and control group surveys. A list of helpful organizations and
a brief bibliography are also incorporated.
1822. Erickson, Beth M. Longing for Dad: Father Loss and Its Impact. Deer-
field Beach, FL: Health Communications, Inc., 1998.
1823. Harris, Maxine. The Loss That Is Forever: The Lifelong Impact of the
Early Death of a Mother or Father. New York: Plume, 1996.
1824. Holland, John. Understanding Children’s Experiences of Parental Be-
reavement. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2001.
1825. Kennedy, Alexandra. Losing a Parent: Passage to a New Way of Living.
San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1991.
Through her own experience of losing a parent, Kennedy offers guidance and
strategies for moving through the anguishing feelings of parent loss and cop-
ing with grief. Her focus is transformation through bereavement. Shamanism is
explored.
1826. Klug, Ron. When Your Parent Dies. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg For-
tress, 2001. Part of the Hope and Healing Series.
1827. Koolman, Gladys. When Death Takes a Father. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker
Book House, 1968.
1828. Krementz, Jill. How It Feels When a Parent Dies. New York: Alfred A.
Knopf, 1982. Reprinted in 1988.
1829. Levy, Alexander. The Orphaned Adult: Understanding and Coping with
Grief and Change after the Death of Our Parents. Reading, MA: Perseus Books,
1999.
A psychologist, Levy notes that society assumes parental loss to be a relatively
minor event when if fact it is “almost always more difficult than we imagined it to
be.” He includes his own experiences of losing parents as well as those of people
he has counseled in private practice. Aspects of parental loss covered include the
impact on personal identity, ongoing relationships with parents after they die,
changes in relationships with others after parents die, religious turmoil following
parental loss, techniques for dealing with grief, and lessons to be learned. In the
chapter entitled “Our Father, Who Art in Heaven: Parental Death, the Eternal,
and the Divine,” Levy discusses the religious turmoil that often follows the death
of a parent. He recalls a woman who was grieving the loss of her parents and
said to him, “Now, for the first time, there is no one standing between me and
God.” He explores the various interpretations of that comment. Noted thanatolo-
 Parental Loss and Grief 247

gist and author Earl A. Grollman grandly comments on the book, “I have never
been more moved than by reading this extraordinary, personal, inspirational, and
helpful book.”
1830. Lieberman, Alicia F. Losing a Parent to Death in the Early Years:
Guidelines for the Treatment of Traumatic Bereavement in Infancy and Early
Childhood. Washington, DC: Zero To Three Press, 2003.
1831. Marshall, Fiona. Losing a Parent: Practical Help for You and Other
Family Members. Tucson, AZ: Fisher Books, 1993. Reprinted in 2000.
1832. Miller, Nancy K. Bequest and Betrayal: Memoirs of a Parent’s Death.
New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Although Miller puts forth a memoir about the death of both of her parents, she
also presents a book about parental death and autobiography as a tool for rethink-
ing lives. She notes in her prologue that, “Memoirs about the loss of parents show
how enmeshed in the family plot we have been and the price of our complicity
in its stories.” She goes on to point out that, “We read for what we need to find.
Sometimes, we also find what we didn’t know we needed.” Includes a list of
works cited.
1833. Moss, Miriam S., and Sidney Z. Moss. The Death of a Parent in Midlife:
Coping Strategies. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications, 1977. Edited by Rich-
ard A. Kalish.
1834. Myers, Edward. When Parents Die: A Guide for Adults. Rev. ed. New
York: Penguin Books, 1997. Published by Viking/Penguin, New York, in 1986.
1835. Norlander, Linda, and Kerstin McSteen. Choices at the End of Life:
Finding Out What Your Parents Want before It’s Too Late. Minneapolis, MN:
Fairview Press, 2001.
1836. Schaper, Donna. Mature Grief: When a Parent Dies. Cambridge, MA:
Cowley Publications, 2003.
1837. Secunda, Victoria. Losing Your Parents, Finding Yourself: The Defining
Turning Point of Adult Life. New York: Hyperion Press, 2000.
1838. Simon, Clea. Fatherless Women: How We Change after We Lose Our
Dads. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2001.
Simon begins the book with, “Writing about my father is about as easy as
wading through wet cement.” She warmly writes about the special bond between
a father and a daughter and how death profoundly affects that bond. Her writing
is about both the grief and growth associated with this type of parental death. In
addition to her own story, she shares the stories of several women who have lost
their fathers and have been forced to greet the question of what happens next.
Includes a bibliography and recommended reading list.
248 Chapter 26

1839. Simon, Leslie, and Jan Johnson. A Music I No Longer Heard: The Early
Death of a Parent. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1998.
1840. Smith, Harold Ivan. On Grieving the Death of a Father. Minneapolis,
MN: Augsburg Fortress, 1994.
1841. Umberson, Debra. Death of a Parent: Transition to a New Adult Identity.
New York: Cambridge University Press, 2003.
Umberson, professor and chair of sociology at the University of Texas, exam-
ines issues surrounding adult bereavement associated with the loss of a parent.
She discusses this loss as a turning point for adults and explores the psychological
and social factors that determine the effects of the loss. She reveals the unusual
juxtaposition between an expected loss and the extraordinary change it can bring.
Umberson also discusses unexpected crisis, symbolic loss, the turning point in
adulthood, the parent left behind, and sibling relationships. An appendix provides
details on the author’s research methods and data.
1842. Wakerman, Elyce. Father Loss: Daughters Discuss the Man Who Got
Away. New York: Henry Holt and Company, 1987.
1843. Ware, Shirley Gerald. The Final Goodbye: The Struggle to Self-
Awareness. Santa Barbara, CA: Fithian Press, 1996.
This book is a narrative of an African American woman’s path to self-
awareness through the grief that followed her father’s death.
 27
Pastoral Care

1844. American Association of Retired Persons. Grief Support Training for

Clergy and Congregations: Training Manual. Washington, DC: American As-
sociation of Retired Persons, 1989.
1845. Anderson, Ray S. Theology, Death, and Dying. New York: Basil Black-
well, 1986.
In this discussion of Christian perspectives on death, Anderson addresses the
Christian response to death, a theology of human death, divine judgment and life
after death, and the human ecology of death and dying. He offers various pasto-
ral approaches to dying and examines philosophical and historical perspectives.
Includes a select bibliography and an index.
1846. Asquith, Glenn H. Death Is All Right. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press,
1970.
1847. Autton, Norman. The Pastoral Care of the Dying. London: SPCK
Publishing, 1966. Also published by Alec R. Allenson, Inc., Naperville, IL, in
1967.
1848. Bachmann, Charles C. Ministering to the Grief-Sufferer. Philadelphia:
Fortress Press, 1967. Originally published by Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs,
NJ, in 1964.
This book focuses on pastoral care of the bereaved and the ministry of a funeral.
1849. Bailey, Richard M. Empowering the Laity in a Local Church to Minister
to the Dying. Dayton, OH: Consortium for Higher Education Religion Studies,
United Theological Seminary, 1977.

249
250 Chapter 27

1850. Bailey, Robert W. The Minister and Grief. New York: Hawthorn Books,
1976.
From a pastoral perspective, Bailey shares his experiences with death, dying,
and bereavement as a Baptist minister in North Carolina. He includes suggestions
and resources for making funeral arrangements and focuses on the important re-
lationship between the pastor and families dealing with death.
1851. Bane, J. Donald. Death and Ministry: Pastoral Care of the Dying and the
Bereaved. New York: Seabury Press, 1975.
1852. Blackwood, Andrew W. The Funeral: Sourcebook for Ministers. Grand
Rapids, MI: Baker Book House, 1972. Originally published by Westminster
Press, Philadelphia, in 1942.
1853. Bowman, George W. Dying, Grieving, Faith, and Family: A Pastoral
Care Approach. New York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 1998.
1854. Brandon, S. G. F. The Judgment of the Dead. New York: Charles Scrib-
ner’s Sons, 1967.
1855. Cobb, Mark. The Dying Soul: Spiritual Care at the End of Life. Philadel-
phia: Open University Press, 2001.
1856. Congdon, Howard. The Pursuit of Death. Nashville, TN: Abingdon
Press, 1977.
1857. Cox, Gerry R., and Ronald J. Fundis, eds. Spiritual, Ethical, and Pasto-
ral Aspects of Death and Bereavement. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing,
1992. Revised edition published as Making Sense of Death: Spiritual, Ethical,
and Pastoral Aspects of Death, Dying, and Bereavement, with Gerry R. Cox and
Robert Bendikson in 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John
D. Morgan, editor.
1858. Droege, Thomas A. Guided Grief Imagery: A Resource for Grief Minis-
try and Death Education. New York: Paulist Press, 1987.
1859. Dulany, Joseph P. We Can Minister with Dying Persons. Nashville, TN:
Discipleship Resources, 1986.
Dulany describes meditation and relaxation techniques to be used by those who
care for the terminally ill. He approaches this from both spiritual and psychologi-
cal perspectives.
1860. Dunne, Tad. We Love You, Matty: Meeting Death with Faith. Amityville,
NY: Baywood Publishing, 2000. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series,
John D. Morgan, editor.
1861. Eshelman, Byron. Death Row Chaplain. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall, 1962.
 Pastoral Care 251

1862. Griffith, William H. Death and Dying from the Perspective of the Caring
Professions: A Curriculum Model for the Local Church. Philadelphia: Eastern
Baptist Theological Seminary, 1975.
1863. Groves, Richard F., and Henriette Anne Klauser. The American Book of
Dying: Lessons in Healing Spiritual Pain. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts, 2005.
The book is thoughtfully divided into three parts: the history, the stories, and
the tool chest. The first part focuses on hospice and the concept of dying well as
well as on ancient books of the dead and spiritual pain. The second part is a com-
pendium of personal stories from varying personality types—the perfectionist,
helper, achiever, dreamer, thinker, loyalist, adventurer, asserter, and peacemaker.
Groves concludes the section with a review of the story archetypes. The final part
focuses on tools than can be used for coping, including art therapy, breath work,
dream work, guided visualization, healing religious abuse, intercessory prayer,
journaling, music therapy, and several others. Includes a bibliography with print
and audiovisual resources divided by subject.
1864. Gusmer, Charles W. And You Visited Me: Sacramental Ministry to the
Sick and Dying. New York: Pueblo Publishing, 1984.
1865. Holden, Douglas T. Death Shall Have No Dominion. St. Louis, MO:
Bethany House Publishers, 1970.
1866. Irion, Paul E. The Funeral and the Mourners: Pastoral Care of the Be-
reaved. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1954.
1867. ———. Hospice and Ministry. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1988.
Irion, professor emeritus of pastoral theology at Lancaster Seminary in Lan-
caster, Pennsylvania, offers a guide for helping hospice and the church understand
how both can work together to serve the dying and their families. He discusses
how hospice has made a difference for pastors as well as patients and the role
of spiritual care in a hospice environment. Using the holistic context of hospice,
he notes the importance of the pastor as a member of the interdisciplinary team
in a hospice environment. Irion also emphasizes openness in dealing with death.
Other topics covered include biomedical ethics issues, home care, control issues
and self-determination in decision making, blending professional and lay caregiv-
ers, values and problems of shared pastoral caregiving in hospice, anticipatory
grief, funerals, and pastoral care of bereaved hospice families. Includes a brief
bibliography.
1868. Jupp, Peter C., and Tony Rogers, eds. Interpreting Death: Christian The-
ology and Pastoral Practice. Washington, DC: Cassell, 1997. Title page notes
that book was written “on behalf of The Churches’ Group on Funeral Services at
Cemeteries and Crematoria.”
A survey of contemporary Christian beliefs about death and eternal life, this
book examines the various roles of the church in addressing the needs of the
252 Chapter 27

dying, the dead, and those bereaved. Intended for those “professionally con-
cerned with Christian funerals” or those ministering to the dying or those be-
reaved, articles discuss the theology of the funeral, theologies of disposal, loss
and pain, faith and bereavement, nonstandard funerals, and liturgies. Significant
treatment is given to changes in funeral practices and views toward death and
disposal in Britain over the past fifty years. Includes biographical notes on each
contributor.
1869. Kopp, Ruth Lewshenia, and Stephen Sorenson. When Someone You Love
Is Dying: A Handbook for Counselors and Those Who Care. Grand Rapids, MI:
Zondervan Publishing House/Ministry Resources Library, 1980.
1870. Levering, Matthew Webb. On Christian Dying: Classic and Contempo-
rary Texts. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 2004.
1871. McCall, Junietta Baker. Bereavement Counseling: Pastoral Care for
Complicated Grieving. New York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2004.
An ordained minister of the United Church of Christ, McCall presents a
guide for the assessment and treatment of complicated grief responses. Issues
are approached from a pastoral counseling perspective. McCall makes a case
for incorporating a loss and grief assessment into any patient encounter. She
discusses universal grief processes and responses, management of the normal
grieving process, a loss and recovery model of grief, defining complicated grief
and what makes it more complex, dysfunctional grieving and those particularly at
risk for it, spiritual issues with grief and loss, subjectivity and professional bias,
grief therapies and treatment priorities, strategies for helping and interventions,
and reorganizing and reclaiming one’s life following loss. Appendixes include a
list of possible complications surrounding significant loss, information on risk
factors that may lead to complicated or dysfunctional grieving, a grief trajectory
worksheet, the grief response service wheel, and a compilation of symptoms and
behaviors that can suggest dysfunctional grieving. Includes a bibliography and
thorough index.
1872. Mitchell, Kenneth R., and Herbert Anderson. All Our Losses, All Our
Griefs: Resources for Pastoral Care. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1983.
1873. Nelson, Jan C., and David A. Aaker. The Bereavement Ministry Pro-
gram: A Comprehensive Guide for Churches. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press,
1998.
Designed for churches and their ministers, this title provides guidance for
dealing with various encounters with death, dying, grief, and bereavement that a
clergy person might experience.
1874. O’Connor, Brian, and Daniel J. Cherico. The Role of the Minister in Car-
ing for the Dying Patient and the Bereaved. New York: MSS Information Corp.,
1978. Distributed by Arno Press.
 Pastoral Care 253

1875. O’Connor, Brian, and Lillian G. Kutscher. The Pastoral Role in Caring
for the Dying and Bereaved: Pragmatic and Ecumenical. New York: Praeger,
1986. Part of the Foundation of Thanatology series.
1876. Oates, Wayne Edward. Grief, Transition, and Loss: A Pastor’s Practical
Guide. Minneapolis, MN: Fortress Press, 1997.
1877. ———. Pastoral Care and Counseling in Grief and Separation. Philadel-
phia: Fortress Press, 1976.
1878. Oliver, Samuel Lee. What the Dying Teach Us: Lessons on Living. New
York: Haworth Pastoral Press, 1998.
1879. Oraison, Mark. Death and Then What? Paramus, NJ: Paulist-Newman
Press, 1969.
1880. Phipps, William E. Death: Confronting the Reality. Atlanta, GA: John
Knox Press, 1987.
1881. Platt, Larry A., and Roger G. Branch, eds. Resources for the Ministry in
Death and Dying. Nashville, TN: Broadman Press, 1988.
1882. Reeves, Robert B., Robert E. Neale, and Austin H. Kutscher. Pastoral
Care of the Dying and the Bereaved: Selected Readings. New York: Health Sci-
ences Publishing Corp., 1973. Published for the Foundation of Thanatology.
1883. Richards, Larry O., and Paul Johnson. Death and the Caring Commu-
nity. Portland, OR: Multnomah Press, 1980. Author also cited as Lawrence O.
Richards.
Written from a Christian pastoral counseling perspective, this text provides
guidance for and insights to ministers and parishioners who visit terminal pa-
tients. The chapters are divided into sections on the needs of the terminally ill,
the response of the caring community, and training for caring. Topics covered
include the needs of the family, isolation of terminal patients, thoughts on death
and dying from a Christian perspective, death fear, reactions to dying, pressures
on medical personnel and the family, expectations of caregivers, hopelessness,
communicating with the dying and the bereaved, and models of care in a hospice
setting. This volume can be used as a textbook, as the information is presented
with discussion questions, assignments, and suggested exercises. Includes an
excellent resource review with general comments on the literature as well as
annotated listings of materials in all formats arranged by subject. Also includes
scripture and subject indexes.
1884. Rogers, William F. Ye Shall Be Comforted. Philadelphia: Westminster
Press, 1950.
This book is a consoling text for both the bereaved and those counseling and
supporting them. Divided into two sections, “When Grief Comes” and “Words of
254 Chapter 27

Comfort,” Rogers first puts death into context and then offers comforting Bible
verses, prayers, and inspirational thoughts for those mourning the loss of a loved
one. This work is more substantive than many books in the genre, with thought-
ful discussions of death, funerals, mourning, and recovery from bereavement.
Includes numerous literary references.
1885. Rogness, A. N. Appointment with Death. Nashville, TN: Thomas Nelson
Publishers, 1972.
1886. Rogo, D. S. Man Does Survive Death. Secaucus, NJ: Citadel Press,
1977.
1887. Rumbold, Bruce D. Helplessness and Hope: Pastoral Care in Terminal
Illness. London: SCM Press, 1986.
1888. Rupp, Joyce. Praying Our Goodbyes. New York: Random House, 1992.
1889. Scherzer, Carl J. Ministering to the Dying. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall, 1963.
1890. Smith, William A. Reflections on Death, Dying, and Bereavement: A
Manual for Clergy, Counselors, and Speakers. Amityville, NY: Baywood Pub-
lishing, 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan,
editor.
1891. Soulen, Richard N., ed. Care for the Dying: Resources of Theology. At-
lanta, GA: John Knox Press, 1975.
Soulen offers a guide to pastoral counseling for the dying and bereaved. In-
cludes a bibliography.
1892. Spencer, Glenn M. Jr. Blessed Are Those Who Mourn: Comforting Cath-
olics in Their Time of Grief. Huntington, IN: Our Sunday Visitor, 1999.
1893. Stanworth, Rachel. Recognizing Spiritual Needs in People Who Are Dy-
ing. New York: Oxford University Press, 2004.
Stanworth listened to the stories of twenty-five patients of St. Christopher’s
Hospice in South London for the study presented in this book. She also conducted
a period of participant observation. Principally, Stanworth explores the question,
Beyond the limits broached by medicine, psychology, or the humanities, is there
a further and all-encompassing horizon that gives meaning to human life and its
finitude? She presents the patients’ stories while exploring metaphors in the sto-
rytelling, how spirituality is mediated in the here and now, regrets and mistakes
from the past, the archetypal hero, the mother and stranger, and the implications
for spiritual care. She also points out how patients often use a nonreligious “lan-
guage of spirit” to express spiritual concerns. This is an important text in pallia-
tive care. Includes a very helpful and necessary glossary at the beginning of the
book, color charts and images, extensive references, and an index. Foreword by
Cicely M. Saunders, founder and president of St. Christopher’s Hospice.
 Pastoral Care 255

1894. Starenko, R. C. God, Grass, and Grace: A Theology of Death. St. Louis,
MO: Concordia Publishing House, 1975.
1895. Stuart, Friend. How to Conquer Physical Death. San Marcos, CA: Do-
minion Press, 1968.
1896. Sullender, R. S. Grief and Growth: Pastoral Resources for Emotional
and Spiritual Growth. New York: Paulist Press, 1985.
1897. Switzer, David K. The Minister as Crisis Counselor. Nashville, TN:
Abingdon Press, 1974.
Switzer discusses unresolved grief, the various stages of grief, and how prob-
lems in dealing with grief can lead to emotional disorders.
1898. Taylor, Jeremy. The Rules and Exercises of Holy Dying. London: Bell
& Daldy, 1857. Later published by Arno Press as part of the Literature of Death
and Dying series.
1899. Taylor, Jeremy, and P. G. Stanwood. Holy Living and Holy Dying. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1989.
1900. Tengbom, Mildred. Help for the Terminally Ill. St. Louis, MO: Concor-
dia Publishing House, 1983.
1901. Thielicke, Helmut. Death and Life. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1970.
1902. Turnage, Anne Shaw, and Mac N. Turnage. More Than You Dare Ask:
The First Year of Living with Cancer. Atlanta, GA: John Knox Press, 1976.
1903. VanDuivendyk, Tim P. The Unwanted Gift of Grief: A Ministry Ap-
proach. Binghamton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2006.
Offering methods of embracing grief, this book aims to talk people “through
their pain to make them heal better using ministry and counseling conversations
with real people to identify what really happens in loss and grief.” Several theo-
logical references are used to help the bereaved transcend grief.
1904. Wagner, J., ed. Reforming the Rights of Death. New York: Paulist Press,
1968.
1905. Waters, Brent. Dying and Death: A Resource for Christian Reflection.
Cleveland, OH: United Church Press, 1996.
1906. Weatherhead, Leslie. Life Begins at Death. Nashville, TN: Abingdon
Press, 1970.
1907. Weidner, Halbert. Grief, Loss, and Death: The Shadow Side of Ministry.
New York: Haworth Press, 2006.
1908. Wiersbe, Warren W., and David Wiersbe. Ministering to the Mourning:
A Practical Guide for Pastors, Church Leaders, and Other Caregivers. Chicago:
Moody Publishers, 2006.
256 Chapter 27

1909. Williams, Donna Reilly, and JoAnn Sturzl. Grief Ministry: Helping Oth-
ers Mourn. San Jose, CA: Resource Publications, 1990.
Williams, a hospice grief counselor and teacher at the Center for Pastoral
Studies of Loyola Marymount University, and Sturzl, a licensed personality and
human relations educator, present a guide for those ministering to the bereaved
and those grieving the death of a loved one. They discuss the denial of death, the
dynamics and phases of grief, person-to-person skills in making pastoral visits
expressing empathy and sympathy, religious rituals, spiritual journeys, prayer,
issues surrounding children and death, suicide, ministry discernment, gifts of
ministry, and funeral planning. Includes a short bibliography.
1910. Williams, P. W. When a Loved One Dies. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg
Publishing House, 1976.
1911. Wolfelt, Alan D. Death and Grief: A Guide for Clergy. Milwaukee, WI:
National Funeral Directors Association, 1990. Published by Accelerated Devel-
opment, Levittown, PA, in 1988, and by Taylor & Francis, London, in 1998.
 28
Philosophical Studies

1912. Barry, Vincent E. Philosophical Thinking about Death and Dying. Bel-
mont, CA: Wadsworth Publishing Co., 2006.
1913. Berg, David W., and George G. Daugherty. The Individual, Society, and
Death. DeKalb, IL: Educational Perspectives Associates, 1972.
1914. Bolen, Jean Shinoda. Close to the Bone: Life-Threatening Illness and the
Search for Meaning. New York: Touchstone Publishing, 1996.
Bolen, a Jungian analyst and clinical professor of psychiatry at the University
of California, San Francisco, examines how serious illness can bring one closer
to the soul’s needs or “close to the bone.” She talks about how facing one’s own
mortality can be a life-transforming process. The narrative is about patients and
their loved ones on a journey of discovery, from the trauma of diagnosis and the
challenges of illness and treatment to making meaning out of the process through
prayer, meditation, rituals, sharing stories, and more intense and honest commu-
nication with others. Includes a brief bibliography and an index.
1915. Brock, Dan W. Life and Death: Philosophical Essays in Biomedical Eth-
ics. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1993.
1916. Brooke, Tal. The Other Side of Death: Does Death Seal Your Destiny?
Wheaton, IL: Tyndale House Publishers, 1979.
Written following his conversion to Christianity, this book is Brooke’s effort
to call into question the typical near-death story. A former follower of Hinduism
and a former disciple of Sai Baba, he notes the similarities of many near-death
stories to Eastern mysticism, Indian philosophy, astral projection, and spiritism.
He also questions the work of Elisabeth Kübler-Ross and Raymond Moody,
noting their experiences with psychics. Includes numerous biblical references

257
258 Chapter 28

and Christian perspectives on death and dying as well as a brief list of titles for
further reading.
1917. Choron, Jacques. Death and Western Thought. New York: Collier, 1963.
Published by Macmillan, New York, in 1973.
1918. Derrida, Jacques. The Gift of Death. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1995.
1919. Dietrich, Bernard C. Death, Fate, and the Gods: The Development of a
Religious Idea in Greek Popular Belief and in Homer. London: Athlone Press,
1967. Part of the University of London Classical Studies series, volume 3.
1920. Farber, Maurice L. Theory of Suicide. New York: Funk & Wagnalls,
1968.
1921. Feifel, Herman, ed. The Meaning of Death. New York: McGraw-Hill,
1959.
1922. ———, ed. New Meanings of Death. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1977.
1923. Ferrater, Mora Jose. Being and Death. Berkeley: University of California
Press, 1965.
1924. Fingerarette, Herbert. Death: Philosophical Soundings. Chicago: Open
Court Press, 1996.
Fingerarette presents a narrative on the meaning of death using metaphors and
literary and religious references. He references Sigmund Freud, Marcus Aurelius,
Albert Camus, Chuang Tzu, Bertrand Russell, Leo Tolstoy, Blaise Pascal, Miguel
de Unamuno, David Human, and others. Includes an index.
1925. Fischer, John Martin, ed. The Metaphysics of Death. Stanford, CA: Stan-
ford University Press, 1993. Part of the Stanford Series in Philosophy.
Fischer brings together a collection of papers, metaphysical and perhaps some-
times normative, discussing issues associated with death and dying. Contributors
explore answers to the questions Can death be a bad thing for the individual who
dies? What is the nature of the evil of death, if it is an evil? If death can harm a
person, who is the subject of the harm, and when does the harm occur? And, if
death can be a bad thing for a person, would immortality be good? While most of
the contributors are professors of philosophy, the first chapter is an excerpt from a
play by Woody Allen. Includes a bibliography, an index, and a list of contributors
with title and institutional affiliations.
1926. Flammarion, Camille. Death and Its Mystery before Death. New York:
The Century Co., 1922.
1927. Flumiani, Carlo M. The Philosophy of Life and the Philosophy of Death.
Albuquerque, NM: American Classical College Press, 1974.
 Philosophical Studies 259

1928. Foss, Martin. Death, Sacrifice, and Tragedy. Lincoln: University of Ne-
braska Press, 1966.
Foss explores philosophical issues of death in this 125-page hardback. He
discusses the process of life and its immediacy, the mythological implications
of death, the evasive experience of death, sacrifice and death, mortality, inspira-
tion and value, intercession and the tragic element, and what he terms the Great
Tragic Drama. Includes a bibliography with nine citations, all cited within the
work.
1929. Freud, Sigmund. Mourning and Melancholia. Standard ed. London:
Hogarth Press, 1957.
1930. ———. Reflections on War and Death. New York: Moffat, Yard and Co.,
1918.
1931. Fry, Christopher. Death Is a Kind of Love. Cranberry Isles, ME: Tidal
Press, 1979. Drawings by Charles E. Wadsworth. Calligraphy by Lance Hidy.
Fry offers his thoughts and philosophies on death as a “part of our landscape”
in this small hardcover. The words are from a talk that was one of three lectures
given under the title “Our Basic Concerns” in November 1977, in Chichester
Cathedral.
1932. Gatch, Milton M. Death: Meaning and Mortality in Christian Thought
and Contemporary Culture. New York: Seabury Press, 1969.
1933. Gavin, William Joseph. Cuttin’ the Body Loose: Historical, Biological,
and Personal Approaches to Death and Dying. Philadelphia: Temple University
Press, 1995.
At the core of Gavin’s book is the definition of death. He explores historical
contexts from both the East and West, biological context, and personal contexts
entertaining the notion of death versus dying and overall implications of accep-
tance versus denial. In the preface, he notes that the book stems from comments
by Paul Ramsey who “noted that the more the uniquely individual and the bodily
are emphasized, the more a ‘denial’ or ‘rebellious’ attitude toward death is culti-
vated; and conversely, the more they are deemphasized, the more an ‘acceptance’
model is put forth as normal or desirable.” Gavin also tells us that the title Cuttin’
the Body Loose comes from Kalamu ya Salaam, Banana Republic: Black Street
Life and Culture in New Orleans, quoted in “Rituals: Six Ways Americans Deal
with Death,” Utne Reader 47, (September–October 1991), p. 78. Includes notes
and an index.
1934. Hallam, Elizabeth, Jennifer Lorna Hockey, and Glennys Howarth. Be-
yond the Body: Death and Social Identity. New York: Routledge, 1999.
1935. Hertz, Robert. Death and the Right Hand. Glencoe, IL: Free Press, 1960.
Translated by Rodney and Claudia Needham.
260 Chapter 28

Includes the essay “A Contribution to the Study of the Collective Representa-

tion of Death,” by Robert Hertz.
1936. Herzog, Edgar. Psyche and Death. New York: G. P. Putnam & Sons,
1967. Originally published by Hodger & Stoughton, Ltd., London, in 1966.
Translated by David Cox and Eugene Rolfe.
1937. Hessler, Florence M., and J. P. Carse, eds. Philosophical Aspects of
Thanatology, Volumes I and II. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1976.
1938. Hoffman, Frederick J. The Mortal No: Death and the Modern Imagina-
tion. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1964.
1939. Howes, Elizabeth, ed. And a Time to Die. London: Routledge and Kegan
Paul, 1961.
1940. Jungel, Eberhard. Death: The Riddle and the Mystery. Philadelphia:
Westminster Press, 1975.
1941. Kamath, M. V. Philosophies of Death and Dying. Honesdale, PA: Hima-
layan Institute Press, 1978.
1942. Kapleau, Philip. The Zen of Living and Dying: A Practical and Spiritual
Guide. Boston: Shambhala Publications, 1998.
1943. Kastenbaum, Robert J., ed. Return to Life: Two Imaginings of the Laza-
rus Theme. New York: Arno Press, 1976.
1944. Killilea, Alfred G. The Politics of Being Mortal. Lexington: University
Press of Kentucky, 1988.
Killilea argues that the pain and tragedy of death does nothing to extinguish or
minimize the meaning of a person’s life and their value to loved ones. He notes
that their physical death cannot prevent their life from having a ripple effect on
others and throughout time. He offers commentary and analysis on death as a
paradox, surmounting the denial of death, accepting death and vulnerability,
death and politics, accepting morality, and the limits of self-interest. He includes
a moving afterword in which he reflects on his teenage daughter’s death, which
occurred only seven weeks after he completed the revised manuscript for the
book. He compares his arguments, assertions, and theories with his personal
experience. Includes extensive notes and a useful index.
1945. Kluge, Eike-Henner W. The Practice of Death. New Haven, CT: Yale
University Press, 1975.
Kluge offers a philosophical treatise on issues of morality related to death.
He notes that, “our society has failed to understand the moral nature and conse-
quences of the actions variously advocated; and that as a result of this, it is pres-
ently embarking upon a course of action that is dangerous.” The text is divided
 Philosophical Studies 261

into sections addressing abortion, suicide, euthanasia, infanticide, senicide, and

the morality and practice of death. Includes a thorough index.
1946. Koestenbaum, Peter. Is There an Answer to Death? Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall/Spectrum, 1976. Part of the Spectrum Books in Humanistic
Psychology series, Rollo May and Charles Hampden-Turner, general editors.
Professor of philosophy at San Jose State University, Koestenbaum discusses
various philosophical problems associated with death under the three headings
“Death and the Individual,” “Consciousness and the Individual,” and “Immortal-
ity and the Individual.” Topics addressed include the search for meaning, the
structure of anxiety, death as an answer to pain and evil, inventing death, suicide,
death exercises, consciousness and the brain, the experience of immortality, and
the symbolism of the proof of immortality. Includes appendixes featuring essays
on how philosophy can be of assistance to the problem of aging and the role of
the physician in this context and thoughts on the management of death in the
elderly.
1947. ———. Vitality of Death: Essays in Existential Psychology and Philoso-
phy. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1971.
1948. Lamont, Corliss, ed. Man Answers Death. New York: G. P. Putnam’s
Sons, 1936.
1949. Landsberg, Paul-Louis. The Experience of Death: The Moral Problem
of Suicide. New York: Arno Press, 1977. Part of the Literature of Death and
Dying series. Translated by Cynthia Rowland from the French edition published
in 1951, by Editions du Soleil, Paris, under the title Essai sur l’experience de la
mort suivi de le probleme moral du suicide. First English edition published by
Rockliff, London, in 1953.
Landsberg, professor of philosophy who left Germany four days before Hitler
assumed power, writes beautiful and frequently cited essays on death and suicide
in this 102-page volume. He notes in the first essay that, “We constituted a ‘we’
with the dying man, and it is through this ‘we,’ through the very strength of this
community, which constitutes, as it were, a new order of persons, that we are
led into an experiential knowledge of our own mortality.” Foreword by Martin
Jarrett-Kerr.
1950. Lifton, Robert J. The Broken Connection: On Death and the Continuity
of Life. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1979.
1951. Metchnikoff, Elie. The Nature of Man: Studies in Optimistic Philosophy.
New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series.
Originally published in 1910.
1952. Miller, Randolph Crump. Live Until You Die. Philadelphia: United
Church Press, 1973. Publisher also cited as Pilgrim Press, Philadelphia.
262 Chapter 28

Miller, professor of Christian Nurture, discusses the psychological and social im-
plications of dying and grief as well as preparing for death morally and spiritually.
1953. Montgomery, Mary. Death: End of the Beginning? Toronto, Ontario:
Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1972.
1954. Nagy, Marie H. The Meaning of Death. New York: McGraw-Hill,
1965.
1955. Nugent, Christopher. Mysticism, Death, and Dying. Albany: State Uni-
versity of New York Press, 1994.
1956. Ochs, Robert J. The Death in Every Now. New York: Sheed & Ward,
1969.
Ochs, a Catholic priest and professor of fundamental and systematic theology
at Bellarmine School of Theology in North Aurora, Illinois, notes in this personal
essay that Christian theology has focused too much on biological death and has
failed to recognize that death can be “absurd” and “impersonal.” Based on Karl
Rahner’s theology, Ochs discusses the freedom of death, death as act, trustful
dying, overcoming death, and Christian hope. Includes a bibliography limited to
Rahner’s works.
1957. Orbach, Ann. Life, Psychotherapy, and Death: The End of Our Explor-
ing. Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1999.
Orbach explores various philosophical approaches to death, noting its two in-
escapable truths: certainty and unknowing. From AIDS to sudden death to slow
death, she analyzes death themes in modern culture, seeking roots in tradition,
literature, and even mythology. An appendix discusses the Guild of Psycho-
therapists’ Summer Conference in July 1998, with the theme Love and Death in
Psychoanalysis. Includes references and name and subject indexes.
1958. Ostheimer, N. C., and J. M. Ostheimer. Life or Death—Who Controls?
New York: Springer, 1976.
1959. Park, James. An Existential Understanding of Death: A Phenomenology
of Ontological Anxiety. Minneapolis, MN: Existential Press, 1975.
1960. Piven, Jerry S., ed. The Psychology of Death in Fantasy and History.
Westport, CT: Praeger, 2004.
With the fourteen articles in this book, Piven seeks to achieve a psychological
understanding of death in fantasy and history. He notes in the introduction that
he wants readers to “ponder these ideas, as it seems essential to the history of
the psyche that death has always lingered as an immanent source of terror and
despair.” Includes information about the editor and contributors, references, and
an index.
1961. Ruitenbeek, Hendrik Marinus, ed. The Interpretation of Death. New
York: Jason Aronson, 1969. Title also cited as Death: Interpretations by Dell.
 Philosophical Studies 263

1962. Schur, Max. Freud: Living and Dying. New York: International Univer-
sities Press, 1972.
In this work, Freud’s personal doctor compares Freud’s philosophies about
death with his life and final years.
1963. Shibles, Warren. Death: An Interdisciplinary Analysis. Whitewater, WI:
Language Press, 1974.
The approach, method, and sources used in this book were developed from a
class Shibles taught at the University of Wisconsin, Whitewater. Shibles provides
bits and pieces from various disciplines, but the primary focus of the work is
on death themes in literature and philosophical perspectives on death. He does,
however, offer an analysis of Elisabeth Kübler-Ross’s Death and Dying and com-
ments on Jessica Mitford and other authors. Incorporates a student questionnaire
with results and quotations regarding the instrument. Also includes an excellent
glossary entitled “Definitions and Etymologies” and an extensive bibliography.
Illustrated with historical death-themed images.
1964. Shneidman, Edwin S. The Deaths of Man. Baltimore, MD: Penguin
Books, 1974. First published by Quadrangle/New York Times Book Co., New
York, in 1973.
Nominated for a National Book Award, this text by renowned thanatologist
Edwin S. Shneidman is a philosophical exploration of death. Seeing the dying
process as a “complicated clustering of intellectual and affective states,” Shneid-
man does not see the stages of dying that Elisabeth Kübler-Ross puts forth in her
books. In this text, he explores death work, postvention and the survivor-victim,
the deromanticization of death, somatic and temporal aspects, equivocal death,
medico-legal aspects, death certificates, psychological autopsy, and dimensions
of death. Includes an afterword on initial reactions to the book’s topics, an ap-
pendix featuring a national survey of attitudes toward death, a bibliography, and
name and subject indexes. Foreword by Arnold Toynbee of the Royal Institute
of International Affairs.
1965. Strack, Stephen, ed. Death and the Quest for Meaning: Essays in Honor
of Herman Feifel. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson, 1997.
Strack has assembled seventeen articles on various aspects of death and dy-
ing in honor of noted thanatologist and father of the modern death movement,
Herman Feifel. Contributors include Robert A Neimeyer, Barry Fortner, Jeanne
Quint Benoliel, Florence S. Wald, Elliot N. Dorff, Alan W. Friedman, Balfour M.
Mount, S. Robin Cohen, Laurens P. White, Sandra L. Bertman, Hannelore Wass,
Charles A. Corr, Kenneth J. Doka, Therese A. Rando, Avery D. Weisman, Dan-
iel Leviton, Robert Fulton, John D. Morgan, and Robert J. Kastenbaum. Topics
covered are death attitudes, death and gender, hospice, Judaism and end-of-life
issues, quality of life of the terminally ill, physician-assisted death, childhood
death and bereavement, vicarious bereavement, horrendous death, the quest for
264 Chapter 28

immortality, knowledge of death as a stimulus to creativity, and thoughts on the

future of death studies. Includes images of Herman Feifel, a chronology with
highlights of his career, a print bibliography of Herman Feifel, and an index.
1966. Taylor, Michael J. The Mystery of Suffering and Death. Staten Island,
NY: Alba House Publishers, 1973.
1967. Thielicke, Helmut. Living with Death. Grand Rapids, MI: William B.
Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1983. Translated from the German edition, Leben mit
dem Tod, by Geoffrey W. Bromiley.
Thielicke, a world-renowned theologian and professor emeritus of systematic
theology at the University of Hamburg in Germany, examines death as something
that is with humans throughout their life rather than something that is approached
in the final stages of life. Among the topics explored are the personal nature of
human dying, awareness of death, natural and unnatural death, the connection be-
tween the view of humanity and the understanding of death in philosophy, death
as the end of a journey, biblical understandings of death, and the ineluctability
of death. Appendixes include remarks on the problem of death in the writings
of Johann Wolfgang von Goethe, the concept of palingenesis in romanticism,
death in the cosmos, and a letter to a soldier on death. Includes a bibliography
and subject index.
1968. Vernon, Glenn M., ed. Death Meanings. Salt Lake City, UT: Association
for the Study of Religion, 1973.
1969. Wagner, August H., ed. What Happens When You Die?: Twentieth-
Century Thought on Survival after Death. New York: Abelard-Schuman, 1968.
This fascinating volume is a compilation of letters collected by the author over
a period of thirty years. The letters are from noted intellectuals and are responses
to a questionnaire titled “On the Meaning of Death.” The letter, sent to more than
800 of the “foremost thinkers of the twentieth century,” is included along with 98
responses. Among the respondents are H. L. Mencken, Upton Sinclair, and David
Ben-Gurion. The copy of the book examined included the following inscription
by the author: “To help in man’s search for the meaning of his existence. August
H. Wagner, 1980.”
1970. Walton, Douglas N. On Defining Death: An Analytic Study of the Con-
cept of Death in Philosophy and Medical Ethics. Montreal, Quebec: McGill-
Queen’s University Press, 1979. Also cited as being published in Buffalo, NY.
1971. Weenolsen, Patricia. Transcendence of Loss over the Life Span. New
York: Hemisphere Publishing, 1988.
 29
Practitioner Education

1972. Arnold, Ken. Doctor Death: Medicine at the End of Life, an Exhibition
at the Wellcome Institute for the History of Medicine. London: Wellcome Trust,
1997.
1973. Barbera, Thomas, Richard J. Pitch, and Mary C. Howell. Death and Dy-
ing: A Guide for Serving Adults with Mental Retardation. Boston: Exceptional
Parent Press, 1989.
1974. Bascue, Loy O. Counselor Responses to Death and Dying: Guidelines for
Training. New Orleans: American Personnel and Guidance Association, 1974.
1975. Becvar, Dorothy Stroh. In the Presence of Grief: Helping Family Mem-
bers Resolve Death, Dying, and Bereavement Issues. New York: Guilford Press,
2001.
1976. Beder, Joan. Voices of Bereavement: A Casebook for Grief Counselors.
New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2004. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and
Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
1977. Benoliel, Jeanne Quint. Death Education for the Health Professional.
Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1982. Part of the Series in Death Edu-
cation, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
1978. Berdes, Celia M. Social Services for the Aged, Dying, and Bereaved in
International Perspective. Washington, DC: International Federation on Aging,
1978.
1979. Berzoff, Joan, and Phyllis R. Silverman. Living with Dying: A Handbook
for End-of-Life Health Care Practitioners. New York: Columbia University
Press, 2004.

265
266 Chapter 29

1980. Boba, Antonio. Death in the Operating Room. Springfield, IL: Charles C.
Thomas, 1965. Part of the American Lecture Series, number 628. A monograph
in The Bannerstone Division of American Lectures in Anesthesiology series.
Edited by John Andriani, director of the Department of Anesthesia at Charity
Hospital of Louisiana, New Orleans.
Boba, professor of anesthesiology at Albany Medical College at Union Uni-
versity in Jackson, Tennessee, and a practicing anethesiologist, offers both a
layman’s discussion of death issues in the operating room and a clinical analysis
of death from the anesthesiologist’s perspective. He discusses accidents caused
by anesthetic overdose and airway difficulties, muscle relaxants, and errors in
preoperative evaluations. Includes an index and appendix featuring what appears
to be a list of brief narratives assessing actual deaths in the operating room.
1981. Bowers, Margaretta K., Edgar N. Jackson, James A. Knight, and Law-
rence LeShan. Counseling the Dying. New York: Jason Aronson, 1964. Also
cited as being published by Thomas Nelson and Sons, New York, in 1964. Re-
printed in 1975. Also published by Harper & Row, San Francisco, CA, in 1981.
1982. Brim, Orville G. Jr., ed. Death and Medical Conduct. New York: Russell
Sage Foundation, 1969.
1983. Brim, Orville G. Jr., Howard E. Freeman, Sol Levine, and Norman A.
Scotch, eds. The Dying Patient. New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1970.
Contains fourteen articles on issues relevant to death and dying, many by
noted thanatologists. This book is divided into sections on the social context of
dying; how medical professionals and institutions cope with death; and the social,
ethical, legal, and economic questions surrounding the termination of life. Con-
tributors include Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, Anselm L. Strauss, Barney G. Glaser,
and David Sudnow, among others. Subjects covered include dying in a public
hospital, patterns of dying, physicians’ behavior toward dying patients, the dy-
ing patient’s point of view, cultural beliefs on life and death, and innovations for
prolonging life. A final chapter discusses death and dying as a field of research.
An extensive bibliography compiled by Richard A. Kalish concludes the book.
1984. Bulkin, Wilma. Medical Student Education: Meeting the Challenges
of Life-Threatening Illness, Death, and Bereavement. New York: American
Institute of Life-Threatening Illness and Loss, a Division of the Foundation of
Thanatology, 1992. Presented at a conference at Columbia-Presbyterian Medical
Center in New York City, on December 13, 1991.
1985. Burnell, George M., and Adrienne L. Burnell. Clinical Management of
Bereavement: A Handbook for Healthcare Professionals. New York: Human
Sciences Press, 1989.
The authors present a thorough clinical review of bereavement and its treat-
ment. Beginning with an analysis of the stress caused by bereavement, they ex-
 Practitioner Education 267

amine bereavement as a source of physical, psychological, and social stress. They

continue with definitions and theories of bereavement, looking at the psychoana-
lytic theory, contemporary psychodynamic theories, attachment and interpersonal
theories as well as crisis, and cognitive and behavioral theories. The definitions
and theories chapter reviews the varying theories on the stages of grief, along
with psychosocial factors affecting the grieving process. The book also discusses
signs and symptoms of bereavement; the four categories of adult symptoms;
clinical management guidelines; pathological grief; bereavement following spe-
cific losses (loss of a spouse, parental loss, loss of an older child, and so forth);
anticipatory and unanticipated grief; roles of health professionals during bereave-
ment (physicians, nurses, social workers); bereavement in the hospital and clinic;
ethical and legal issues; and burnout and coping strategies. The text concludes
with suggestions for helping survivors, myths about bereavement, information on
training and support programs, and a section detailing when and where to refer
bereaved families. Special care for widows, bereaved parents, cancer patients
and their families, and survivors of suicide is incorporated. Appendixes address
age-related concepts of death for children, training films, clinical guidelines for
handling stillbirths and care for the parents, and a nursing care plan for a patient
hospitalized during a bereavement reaction. Includes extensive references and a
list of suggested readings. The authors are affiliated with the Kaiser Permanente
Medical Center in Honolulu, Hawaii, and the University of Hawaii, Honolulu.
1986. Chirban, John T., ed. Coping with Death and Dying: An Interdisciplinary
Approach. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1985.
Chirban, a psychotherapist and an academic, offers a collection of six articles
on coping with death and dying written by professionals in the fields of medi-
cine, psychology, and religion. Chirban advocates and makes a strong case for
taking an interdisciplinary approach to issues surrounding death and dying. In
addition to this theme, an emphasis on communication is maintained throughout
the volume. Contributors include Mel Krant, Gerald Koocher, Earl A. Grollman,
Thomas Hopko, Peter Poulos, and John T. Chirban. Includes biographical infor-
mation about the editor.
1987. Crane, Diana. The Sanctity of Social Life: Physicians’ Treatment of Criti-
cally Ill Patients. New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1975. Also cited as being
published by Transaction Books, New Brunswick, NJ, in 1977.
Most appropriate for physicians and others in health care, Crane’s book pres-
ents criteria for decision making in clinical environments and sources of varia-
tion among physicians with organizational, social, and cultural variables. She
also offers insightful commentary on a redefinition of death and dying, origins
of popular interest in death and dying, and the clinical mentality and medical
decision making. Includes charts, questionnaires, a glossary of medical terms, a
bibliography, and an index. Foreword by Charles D. Cook of the Yale University
School of Medicine.
268 Chapter 29

1988. Curtis, J. Randall, and Gordon D. Rubenfeld. Managing Death in the

ICU: The Transition from Cure to Comfort. New York: Oxford University Press,
2001.
1989. Davis, Richard H., ed. The Doctor and the Dying Patient. Los Angeles:
California School of Medicine, 1971.
1990. DeBellis, Robert. Continuing Care for the Dying Patient, Family, and
Staff. New York: Praeger, 1985.
1991. DeBellis, Robert, and Michael R. Goldberg. Medical Care of the Dying
Patient. New York: Arno Press, 1981. Also cited as being published with coau-
thor Lillian G. Kutscher by Arno Press, New York, in 1982.
1992. Degner, Leslie F., and Janet I. Beaton. Life–Death Decisions in Health
Care. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1987. Part of the Series in Death
Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
1993. Dersheimer, Richard A. Counseling the Bereaved. New York: Pergamon
Press, 1990. Part of the Psychology Practitioner Guidebooks series, Arnold P.
Goldstein, Leonard Krasner, and Sol L. Garfield, editors.
Intended for health and human services professionals, Dersheimer’s book is
a primer on working with the bereaved. The chapters are divided into three sec-
tions: “Conceptual Development,” “Assessment and Strategies of Bereavement
Counseling,” and “Focus on the Counselor.” Dersheimer discusses psychosocial
explanations of grief and bereavement, mourning as spiritual development, relat-
ing and assessing during the initial contact with the client, and special needs of
the professional working in this arena. Appendixes include a style inventory for
personal grieving and a questionnaire entitled “The Unfolding Tapestry of My
Life,” reprinted from Faith Development and Pastoral Care, by James W. Fowler
(Fortress Press, 1987). Includes a bibliography and author and subject indexes.
1994. Doka, Kenneth J., ed. Disenfranchised Grief: Recognizing Hidden Sor-
row. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1989.
Doka examines the grief experienced by disenfranchised and socially stig-
matized groups in twenty-seven articles written by thirty-three contributors.
Disenfranchised grief in the following groups or experienced as a result of the
following conditions/experiences include gays, lesbians, and bisexuals; those
suffering from AIDS as well as those who care for them; individuals involved
in extramarital affairs and cohabitation; fellow employees; ex-spouses; people
dealing with perinatal death; those who have underestimated their grief; individu-
als dealing with the effects of abortion; people suffering the loss of companion
animals; men and women going through divorce; suffering young children; teens
dealing with breakups; the very old; and the developmentally disabled. There is
also general discussion of disenfranchised grief, intrapsychic dimensions, and
psychosocial loss. A special section offers professional perspectives on such
 Practitioner Education 269

topics as pastoral counseling, the funeral director’s perspective, rituals, nursing

perspectives, hospice work with AIDS-related grief, and counseling those with
disenfranchised grief. Includes brief narratives on the professional background
of each contributor.
1995. Dowdle, Nancy O’Neill. Death and Dying Training in Counselor Educa-
tion Programs: A National Study. Chicago: Loyola University Chicago, 1985.
1996. Enck, Robert E. The Medical Care of Terminally Ill Patients. Baltimore,
MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2001.
1997. Epting, Franz R., and Robert A. Neimeyer. Personal Meanings of Death:
Applications of Personal Construct Theory to Clinical Practice. Washington,
DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1984. Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging,
and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
1998. Gavey, C. The Management of the “Hopeless” Case. London: H. K.
Lewis and Co, 1952.
1999. Gerchick, Elias. The Role of the Community Hospital in the Care of the
Dying Patient and the Bereaved. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1975.
2000. Goldberg, Ivan K., Harold B. Haley, and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. Thera-
peutic Drugs and the Quality of Life. New York: Foundation of Thanatology,
1997.
2001. Goldberg, Ivan K., and Austin H. Kutscher. Pain, Anxiety, and Grief:
Pharmacotherapeutic Care of the Dying Patient and the Bereaved. New York:
Columbia University Press, 1986.
2002. Gonda, Thomas Andrew, and John Edward Ruark. Dying Dignified: The
Health Professional’s Guide to Care. Menlo Park, CA: Addison-Wesley, 1984.
2003. Groopman, Jerome. The Measure of Our Days: New Beginnings at Life’s
End. New York: Viking Press, 1997.
A clinician, researcher, and professor of immunology at Harvard Medical
School, Groopman advocates for health care providers to have greater awareness
of issues impacting the dying. He does this through eight stories that illustrate
what can be learned about life from the dying and their loved ones. Includes an
index and biographical information about the author.
2004. Hafferty, Frederic W. Into the Valley: Death and the Socialization of
Medical Students. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1991.
2005. Harper, Bernice Catherine. Death: The Coping Mechanism of the Health
Professional. Greenville, SC: Southeastern University Press, 1977. Author is also
cited as Bernice Wright-Harper.
Noting that many of the responsibilities associated with dying have been
shifted from the family to the less personal health care industry, Harper suggests
270 Chapter 29

that there is a great need for a better understanding of a coping mechanism for
health professionals. Relaying experiences from the City of Hope Medical Center
in California, she discusses professional anxieties, intellectualization, emotional
survival during traumatic experiences, depression, deep compassion, grief, and
bereavement. She includes a glossary with definitions of terms arranged accord-
ing to Elisabeth Kübler-Ross’s five stages of grief. Includes a bibliography and a
biographical sketch of the author, along with a list of her publications.
2006. Hastings Center. Guidelines on the Termination of Life-Sustaining Treat-
ment and the Care of the Dying. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1987.
2007. Hollingsworth, Charles E., and Robert O. Pasnau, eds. The Family in
Mourning: A Guide for Health Professionals. New York: Grune & Stratton,
1977. Part of the Seminars in Psychiatry series, Milton Greenblatt, editor.
This title contains twenty-seven articles discussing bereavement from the
perspectives of various health professions. While social workers, nurses, and
cardiologists are included among the article authors, Hollingsworth and Pasnau
have authored the majority of the pieces. Issues explored include psychological
assessment, informing families about death, mourning following the birth of a
handicapped child, psychotherapy, liaison psychiatry, and widowhood. Includes
references and an extensive index.
2008. Hooyman, Nancy R., and Betty J. Kramer. Living through Loss: Interven-
tions across the Life Span. New York: Columbia University Press, 2006. Part of
the Foundations of Social Work Knowledge series, Frederic G. Reamer, editor.
Intended primarily for professionals working in grief therapy settings, Hooy-
man and Kramer’s exceptional text examines the grief process, looks at theoreti-
cal perspectives on grief, and offers comments on grief at various life stages as
well as intervention strategies for each stage. Notable cited research includes the
use of paradox with Native American adolescents bereaved by suicide, school
responses to the trauma of violent death, and suggestions for preparing for cross-
cultural assessment and communication. Includes an extensive list of references
and a detailed index.
2009. Humphrey, Geraldine M., and David G. Zimpfer. Counseling for Grief
and Bereavement. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1996.
2010. Jones, Mary. Love after Death: Counseling in Bereavement. London:
Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1995.
In this 67-page paperback, Jones uses case histories from her experience as a
counselor to examine the issues surrounding bereavement and the feelings that
stem from it. Intended as a guide for counselors and those who provide support
to the grieving, the book explains the processes behind bereavement and offers
suggestions for communicating with and providing care to the bereaved. Jones
strongly emphasizes the importance of counseling. She also wrote Secret Flowers
(1987), an autobiographical account of her husband’s death.
 Practitioner Education 271

2011. Kellehear, Allan. Compassionate Cities: Public Health and End-of-Life

Care. New York: Routledge, 2005.
Kellehear, a sociologist and professor of palliative care at La Trobe University
in Melbourne, Australia, suggests that in the intense and intimate experience of
death, people are able to recognize a bigger societal picture, almost stepping
outside of themselves to understand a greater community and a greater good. He
compares parallel histories of public health and end-of-life care and advocates
for the inclusion of death, loss, and compassion in public health approaches and
policies. Includes references and an index.
2012. Kemp, Charles. Terminal Illness: A Guide to Nursing Care. Philadelphia:
J. B. Lippincott, 1999.
2013. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. On Death and Dying: What the Dying Have
to Teach Doctors, Nurses, Clergy, and Their Families. New York: Macmillan,
1969. Published by Tavistock Publications, London, in 1973. Reprint edition
published by Simon & Schuster/Touchstone, New York, in 1997, and by Scrib-
ner, New York, in 2003.
In one of the most celebrated and best-selling books on death and dying,
Kübler-Ross discusses her five stages of dying: denial, anger, bargaining, depres-
sion, and acceptance. This is an important and influential text.
2014. Kuebler, Kim K., Patricia H. Berry, and Debra E. Heidrich. End-of-Life
Care: Clinical Practice Guidelines. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders, 2001.
2015. Kutscher, Austin H., and Michael R. Goldberg. Caring for the Dying
Patient and His Family: A Model for Medical Education—Medical Center Con-
ferences. New York: Health Sciences Publishing Co., 1973. Published for the
Foundation of Thanatology by Health Sciences Publishing Co.
2016. Kutscher, Austin H., Bernard Schoenberg, and Arthur C. Carr. Oral Care:
The Mouth in Critical and Terminal Illness. New York: Arno Press, 1980.
2017. ———. The Terminal Patient: Oral Care. New York: Foundation of
Thanatology, 1973. Distributed by Columbia University Press.
2018. Lair, George S. Counseling the Terminally Ill: Sharing the Journey.
Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis, 1996. Part of the Series in Death Education,
Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
2019. Lord, Janice Harris. Trauma, Death, and Death Notification: A Seminar for
Professional Counselors and Victim Advocates. Washington, DC: U.S. Department
of Justice, Office of Justice Programs, Office for Victims of Crime, 2000.
2020. Lynn, Joanne, Janice Lynch Schuster, and Andrea Kabcenell. Improving
Care for the End of Life: A Sourcebook for Health Care Managers and Clini-
cians. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.
272 Chapter 29

2021. McGrory, Arlene. A Well Model Approach to Care of the Dying Client.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978.
2022. Naylor, Harriet H., and Lillian G. Kutscher. The Role of the Volunteer
Director in the Care of the Terminal Patient and the Family. New York: Arno
Press, 1980.
2023. Norlander, Linda. To Comfort Always: A Nurse’s Guide to End-of-Life
Care. Washington, DC: American Nurses Association, 2001.
2024. Osis, Karlis. Deathbed Observations by Physicians and Nurses. New
York: Parapsychology Foundation, 1961.
Noting how the study of death has evolved from a field within religion and
philosophy to one of scientific study, Osis suggests that death can now be defined
as the ultimate destruction and end of a human personality. He discusses how
researchers in parapsychology have “unearthed information rather difficult to
explain without assuming some modus of survival after death.” Topics covered
include mediumistic messages, deathbed hallucinations, “Peak in Darrien” cases,
out-of-body experiences, pharmacological explanations for unusual deathbed
experiences, elated mood phenomena, visions and apparitions, and effects of an-
esthesia. Incorporates several odd yet interesting tables and charts, for example,
“Biological Variables in Terminal and Nonterminal Patients Who Hallucinated
Persons or Religious Figures.” Appendixes include a questionnaire; case descrip-
tion forms; and a summary in English, French, German, Italian, and Spanish.
2025. Parkes, Colin Murray, Marilyn Relf, and Ann Couldrick. Counseling in
Terminal Care and Bereavement. Baltimore, MD: P. H. Brookes Publishing Co.,
1996. Also published by B.P.S. Books in Leicester, UK.
2026. Pearl, Raymond. The Biology of Death: A Series of Lectures Delivered at
the Lowell Institute in Boston in December 1920. New York: Arno Press, 1976.
2027. Pearson, Althea. Growing through Loss and Grief: A Counselor’s Guide.
London: HarperCollins, 1994.
2028. Playing God: The Dilemma of the Dying Patient. Reston, VA: American
Medical Student Association, 1995.
2029. Post, Kalmon D. Acute, Chronic, and Terminal Care in Neurosurgery.
Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1987.
2030. Prichard, Elizabeth R., Jean Goliard, Ben A. Orcutt, Austin H. Kutscher,
and Irene Seelan, eds. Social Work with the Dying Patient and the Family. New
York: Columbia University Press, 1977.
2031. Quill, Timothy E. Caring for Patients at the End of Life: Facing an Un-
certain Future Together. New York: Oxford University Press, 2001.
 Practitioner Education 273

2032. Raether, Howard C. The Funeral Director and His Role as Counselor.
Milwaukee, WI: National Funeral Directors Association, 1975. Also published
by Bulfin Press.
2033. Rando, Therese A. Grief, Dying, and Death: Clinical Interventions
for Caregivers. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 1984. Originally published in
1981.
2034. ———. Treatment of Complicated Mourning. Champaign, IL: Research
Press, 1993.
2035. Raven, Ronald W. The Dying Patient: The Role of the Family Doctor,
Nurse, and Medical Social Worker. New York: State Mutual, 1975. Also cited as
being published by Beekman in 1975 and Pitman Medical in the United Kingdom
in the same year.
2036. Saunders, Cicely M. The Management of Terminal Disease. Chicago:
Yearbook Medical Publishers, 1978.
2037. ———. The Management of Terminal Illness. London: Hospital Medicine
Publications, 1967.
2038. ———, ed. The Management of Terminal Malignant Disease. London:
Edward Arnold, 1984. Part of the Management of Malignant Disease Series.
2039. Schnaper, Nathan, J. W. Annis, and Lawrence J. Roose. Management of
the Dying Patient and His Family. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1974.
2040. Schoenberg, B. Mark, ed. Bereavement Counseling: A Multidisciplinary
Handbook. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1980.
Includes “A Psychiatric Model of Bereavement Counseling,” by Beverly
Raphael.
2041. Schoenberg, Bernard, Arthur C. Carr, David Peretz, and Austin H.
Kutscher, eds. Loss and Grief: Psychological Management in Medical Practice.
New York: Columbia University Press, 1970. Reprinted in 1973.
Includes the article “The Child’s Reaction to Death in the Family,” by Robert
A. Furman.
2042. Smith, Helen C. Care of the Dying Patient: A Comparison of Instruc-
tional Plans. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1965.
2043. Society for the Right to Die. The Physician and the Hopelessly Ill Pa-
tient: Legal, Medical, and Ethical Guidelines. New York: Society for the Right
to Die, 1985.
2044. Speck, Peter. Loss and Grief in Medicine. London: Bailliere Tyndall,
1978.
274 Chapter 29

Speck, a hospital chaplain, emphasizes the importance of medical personnel

being attentive to grief and loss with their patients. Through several case studies
he covers different kinds of losses in the context of religious and various world
views.
2045. Strosberg, Martin A., I. Alan Fein, and James D. Carroll, eds. Rationing
of Medical Care for the Critically Ill: Report of a Conference Held in Washing-
ton, D.C., on May 27, 1986. Washington, DC: Brookings Institution, 1989.
This report, a collection of articles, discusses the ethics of rationing, alterna-
tives, case studies from the United Kingdom, federal policy, criteria for admis-
sion to intensive care units, reimbursement policy, triage, legal perspectives on
allocation of services, and political implications.
2046. Swanson, Jan, and Alan Cooper. A Physician’s Guide to Coping with
Death and Dying. Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 2005.
The authors present an introductory text for physicians on death and dying is-
sues and coping with them. Swanson and Cooper practice internal medicine and
clinical psychology, respectively. They discuss the importance of understanding
death, the stages of dying, the physician’s role in a peaceful death, and treatment
options. Other topics covered include talking with the dying patient; death and
children, including spiritual needs; physicians as patients; facing the end of life;
and death in the emergency department. Swanson and Cooper offer suggestions
on how to cope with the death of a patient, dealing with guilt and shame, and
various problems in coping with death. The final section focuses on reducing
stress, offering ideas for relaxation, meditation, visualization, keeping a journal,
spirituality, and opening up to others. An extensive list of organizations, associa-
tions, and websites is incorporated with brief information on each. Also includes
a list of references.
2047. Tedeschi, Richard G., and Lawrence G. Calhoun. Helping Bereaved Par-
ents: A Clinician’s Guide. New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2004. Part of the Se-
ries in Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
2048. Trotman, Frances K., and Claire M. Brody. Psychotherapy and Counsel-
ing with Older Women: Cross-Cultural, Family, and End-of-Life Issues. New
York: Springer, 2001.
2049. Troup, Stanley B., and William A. Greene, eds. The Patient, Death, and
the Family. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1974.
Presented at the Conference on the Patient, Death, and the Family at the
Rochester General Hospital in Rochester, New York, in October 1971. The
book consists of twelve essays from the fields of medicine, nursing, sociology,
philosophy, and chaplaincy. It also features an essay by Robert Anderson on the
death of his wife.
 Practitioner Education 275

2050. Vachon, Mary L. S. Occupational Stress in the Care of the Critically Ill,
the Dying, and the Bereaved. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1987.
Part of the Series in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass,
editor.
2051. Walker, Earl A. Cerebral Death. Albuquerque: University of New
Mexico, School of Medicine, 1981.
2052. Walsh-Burke, Katherine. Grief and Loss: Theories and Skills for Helping
Professionals. Boston: Pearson Allyn & Bacon, 2006.
2053. Warthin, Alfred. The Physician of the Dance of Death. New York: Arno
Press, 1977. Part of the Literature of Death and Dying series. Originally pub-
lished in 1931.
2054. Weisman, Avery D. The Realization of Death: A Guide for the Psycho-
logical Autopsy. New York: Jason Aronson, 1974.
A physician, psychiatrist, and psychoanalyst, Weisman gives an academic
examination of the multidisciplinary arena of the psychological autopsy. In his
foreword, noted thanatologist Edwin S. Shneidman describes the effort of the
psychological autopsy as trying to “bring him to ‘life’ as it were—and then try-
ing to divine his motivations, intentions, attitudes, and ambivalences in relation
to one specific temporal span of behavior which in itself had extreme conse-
quences—his dying.” Weisman discusses the Los Angeles Suicide Prevention
Center, geriatric, and Omega versions of the psychological autopsy as well as its
comparison with the regular autopsy. He includes eight case illustrations, most
of them suicides. Another section explores the common denominators of death.
Includes extensive references and a brief index.
2055. Wilkes, Eric. The Dying Patient: The Medical Management of Incurable
and Terminal Illness. Ridgewood, NJ: G. A. Bogden, 1982. Also published by
MTP Press, London.
2056. Wolf, Stewart G., ed. The Responsible Physician: Standards of Excel-
lence and the Critically Ill Patient. New York: Foundation of Thanatology,
1988.
2057. Wolf, Stewart G., and Lillian G. Kutscher. Caregiving in the Community
Hospital for the Terminally Ill and Bereaved. New York: Arno Press, 1982.
2058. Worden, J. William. Grief Counseling and Grief Therapy: A Handbook
for the Mental Health Practitioner. 3rd ed. New York: Springer, 2002. Originally
published in 1982. Second edition published in 1991.
 30
Rituals

2059. Albery, Nicholas, Stephanie Wienrich, Gil Elliot, and Joseph Elliot. The
New Natural Death Handbook. 3rd ed. London: Rider, 2000. Previous edition
published in 1997.
The authors describe British options for nontraditional funerals and interments.
Examples include burial grounds in forests and cardboard coffins.
2060. Anderson, Megory. Sacred Dying: Creating Rituals for Embracing the
End of Life. Roseville, CA: Prima Publishing, 2001. Also cited as being published
by Marlowe & Company, New York.
2061. Ball, Mog. Death. New York: Oxford University Press, in association
with Chameleon/Ikon, 1976. Part of the Standpoints series.
In this 64-page paperback, Ball purports to provide information “usually re-
stricted to professionals such as doctors and undertakers.” She attempts to do this
through numerous black-and-white photographs, cartoons, reproduced articles,
and quotes, all arranged as collages. The photographs depict mummies, contem-
porary dead bodies, cemeteries, a murdered corpse, crematoria, funeral scenes,
caskets, and mourners. This book is a graphic discussion of death and the rituals
surrounding it.
2062. Budge, E. A. Wallis. The Book of the Dead: An English Translation of
the Chapters, Hymns, Etc., of the Theban Recension, with Introduction, Notes,
Etc. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1960. Second edition revised and en-
larged (eighth impression) with 20 plates and 400 vignettes. Also published by
University Books, New Hyde Park, NY, in 1960.
E. A. Wallis Budge was keeper of the Egyptian and Assyrian antiquities in the
British Museum. In this book, he offers a translation of the Book of the Dead as

276
 Rituals 277

well as interpretive commentary. Includes illustrations, notably a pull-out color

plate of the Funeral Procession with brief descriptions below.
2063. Childs-Gowell, Elaine. Good Grief Rituals: Tools for Healing. Barry-
town, NY: Station Hill Press, 1992.
2064. Derrida, Jacques. The Work of Mourning. Chicago: University of Chi-
cago Press, 2001. Edited by Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas.
The editors offer a collection of eulogies written by famous philosopher Der-
rida about his friends and colleagues in the form of memorial essays, letters of
condolence, funeral orations, and traditional eulogies. Includes a collection of
bibliographies.
2065. Diamant, Anita. Saying Kaddish: How to Comfort the Dying, Bury the
Dead, and Mourn as a Jew. New York: Schocken Books, 1998.
2066. Eimer, Robert, and Sarah O’Malley. In the Potter’s Hands: Nine Wake
Services. San Jose, CA: Resource Publications, 1998.
This work is a practical guide for families, ministers, funeral directors, and
bereavement teams to use to plan wake services. Eimer and O’Malley discuss the
need to be flexible and personable with the services, catering to individual needs
and addressing the circumstances.
2067. Feinstein, David, and Peg Elliott Mayo. Mortal Acts: Eighteen Empow-
ering Rituals for Confronting Death. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco,
1990.
2068. ———. Rituals for Living and Dying: From Life’s Wounds to Spiritual
Awakening. San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1990.
2069. Hockey, Jennifer Lorna, Jeanne Katz, and Neil Small, eds. Grief, Mourn-
ing, and Death Ritual. Philadelphia: Open University Press, 2001. Jennifer Lorna
Hockey is also cited as Jenny Hockey. Part of the Facing Death series, David
Clark, editor.
The contributors examine various responses to death and how they occur
“within the unique set of cultural, social, and historical circumstances [that]
characterizes postwar society.” Articles document contemporary practices and
review the ways grief, mourning, and death rituals have been approached by
researchers in the field. Subject matter covered includes theories of grief, grief as
illness, widowhood, bereavement care, support for bereaved children in school
environments, the Child Death Helpline, funeral rituals past and present, Hindu
death and mourning rituals, the cemetery as evidence of continuing bonds, griev-
ing in public, and postdisaster rituals. Includes a list of British organizations and
addresses as well as an index.
2070. Huntington, Richard, and Peter Metcalf. Celebrations of Death: The
Anthropology of the Mortuary Ritual. New Rochelle, NY: Cambridge University
Press, 1979.
278 Chapter 30

2071. Irion, Paul E. Cremation. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1968.

2072. ———. The Funeral: An Experience of Value. Lancaster, PA: Lancaster
Theological Seminary, 1956. Also cited as being a publication of the National
Funeral Directors Association, Milwaukee, WI.
2073. ———. The Funeral: Vestige or Value? Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press,
1966.
2074. Iserson, Kenneth V. Death to Dust: What Happens to Dead Bodies?
Tucson, AZ: Galen Press, 2001.
2075. Jackson, Edgar N. For the Living. New York: Channel Press, 1964.
Jackson gives details on how the funeral assists the bereaved and discusses
psychological and theological implications.
2076. ———. The Significance of the Christian Funeral. Milwaukee, WI: Na-
tional Funeral Directors Association, 1966.
2077. Kolatch, Alfred J. The Jewish Mourner’s Book of Why. Middle Village,
NY: Jonathan David Publishers, 1993.
In this informative book on Jewish death and mourning rites, Kolatch seem-
ingly addresses every matter on the topic in more than 400 pages. Several helpful
appendixes are incorporated, including “The Unveiling Service,” “Home Yizkor
Memorial Service,” “Family Yahrzeit Record,” “Rabbis’ Kaddish,” “Mourners’
Kaddish,” “Full Kaddish,” “Half Kaddish,” and “Burial Kaddish.” Includes a
bibliography, an index, and biographical information on the author.
2078. Llewellyn, John F. Saying Goodbye Your Way: Planning or Buying a
Funeral or Cremation for Yourself or Someone You Love. Glendale, CA: Tropico
Press, 2004.
Llewellyn, president of Forest Lawn Memorial-Parks and Mortuaries, pro-
vides an insider’s guide to the daunting task of planning a funeral. He covers the
entire funeral landscape with insightful narrative and helpful guidance. Subjects
addressed include “simple” and “traditional” funeral services, graveside and me-
morial services, grief and mourning, emotional and physical reactions to death,
communicating about death, pallbearers, the length of a funeral service, clergy
and honoraria, obituaries, open or closed caskets, flowers, cremation and options
associated with this choice, shipping bodies and cremated remains, prearranged
funerals, estates and wills, mortuaries, endowment care funds, memorial and
cremation societies, retail casket sellers, monument dealers, outer burial contain-
ers and vaults, autopsies, death certificates, hospice, social security and veterans’
benefits, and public aid funerals. Three appendixes feature guidance on keeping
financial and other valuable papers; a list of goods and services provided by fu-
neral homes and cemeteries; and a section on helpful organizations, with contact
information, Web addresses, and descriptions of their services. Includes a helpful
and lengthy glossary, a bibliography, and an index.
 Rituals 279

2079. Margolis, Otto Schwarz. Grief and the Meaning of the Funeral. Edison,
NJ: MSS Information Corp., 1975. Also cited as being published in New York.
2080. Martin, Edward. Psychology of Funeral Service. Grand Junction, CO:
Sentinel Printers, 1950.
2081. Mayo, Peg Elliott. The Healing Sorrow Workbook: Rituals for Trans-
forming Grief and Loss. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 2001.
2082. Metrick, Sydney Barbara. Crossing the Bridge: Creating Ceremonies for
Grieving and Healing from Life’s Losses. Berkeley, CA: Celestial Arts, 1994.
Examining a variety of responses to loss, Metrick offers the five stages of a
healing ceremony: intention, planning, preparation, manifestation, and incorpora-
tion. As assistant professor of psychology, certified expressive therapist, ordained
minister, and clinical hypnotherapist, Metrick assists individuals, couples, and
groups experiencing loss and grief by creating special ceremonies and therapeutic
techniques. Her title page includes a quote from Stephen Levine’s Healing into
Life and Death: “The toll for crossing to the other shore of wholeness is the re-
linquishment of suffering. This crossing over is what is called healing.” Includes
a list of support groups divided by subject and suggestions for further reading.
2083. Morgan, Ernest A. A Manual of Death Education and Simple Burial. 10th
ed. Burnsville, NC: Celo Press, 1984. Published in 1964 as A Manual for Simple
Burial. Published as Dealing Creatively with Death: A Manual of Death Educa-
tion and Simple Burial, by Zinn Communications, Bayside, NY, in 1994.
This booklet discusses efforts at funeral reform during the 1950s and 1960s,
suggesting patterns by which, through group interaction, funerals may be made
simpler and less costly. Morgan advocates cremation as a means of disposing of
the dead, though not exclusively.
2084. Pine, Vanderlyn R., Austin H. Kutscher, David Peretz, Robert C. Slater,
Robert DeBellis, Robert J. Volk, Daniel J. Cherico, and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds.
Acute Grief and the Funeral. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1976.
The editors have assembled an extensive collection of articles and essays on the
relationship between the funeral and grief. Contributors include child develop-
ment researchers, mortuary science educators, funeral service providers, clergy,
physicians, sociologists, and psychiatrists. Many of the contributors are cited
elsewhere in the book. Among the many topics covered are a physician’s per-
spective on acute grief, the use of psychopharmacologic agents for the bereaved,
postbereavement family support services, traditional funerals in contemporary
society, the sociology of the mortuary, expressing grief, social meanings of the
funeral, humanist services, funerary social behavior, roles for the funeral profes-
sional, death anxiety for funeral home workers, pastoral care of the bereaved,
loss and grief among the elderly, helping children mourn, funeral behavior and
unresolved grief, the school and the funeral, and bibliotherapy as a tool to help
280 Chapter 30

children cope with acute grief. Includes an extensive index and professional in-
formation for each contributor.
2085. Prioreschi, Plinio. A History of Human Responses to Death: Mythologies,
Rituals, and Ethics. Lewiston, Australia: Eden Mellen Press, 1990.
2086. Raether, Howard C., and Robert C. Slater. The Funeral: Facing Death
as an Experience of Life. Milwaukee, WI: National Funeral Directors Associa-
tion, 1974.
2087. Roach, Mary. Stiff: The Curious Lives of Human Cadavers. New York:
W. W. Norton & Company, 2003.
2088. Rushton, L. Death Customs. Boston: Thomson Learning, 1993.
Intended for ages seven to ten.
2089. Santino, Jack. Spontaneous Shrines and the Public Memorialization of
Death. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006.
2090. Soper, Susan. ObitKit: A Guide to Celebrating Your Life: How to Per-
sonalize the Obituary Process and Create Your Written Legacy. Atlanta, GA:
ObitKit.com, 2008.
In this 72-page spiral-bound guide to writing obituaries, Soper offers com-
forting and insightful guidance for those charged with handling a person’s final
wishes or for those thinking ahead and preparing for their own death. She in-
cludes a brief history of the obituary and offers numerous tips for preparing an
abbreviated life story. The guide can be used as a workbook with several fill-in-
the-blank forms for compiling your personal information. Helpful advice is also
provided on funeral services. Soper includes numerous quotes, homilies, and
Bible verses as well as a list of eight online resources. Soper worked as a reporter
in New York writing obituaries, news, and feature stories before writing for CNN
and serving as features editor at the Atlanta Journal-Constitution.
2091. Starhawk, and M. Macha NightMare. The Pagan Book of Living and
Dying: Practical Rituals, Prayers, Blessings, and Meditations on Crossing Over.
San Francisco, CA: HarperSanFrancisco, 1997.
2092. Theroux, Phyllis, ed. The Book of Eulogies: A Collection of Memorial
Tributes, Poetry, Essays, and Letters of Condolence. New York: Scribner, 1997.
2093. Wallis, C. J. The Funeral Encyclopedia: A Source Book. Grand Rapids,
MI: Baker Books, 1953.
2094. Wolfelt, Alan D. Creating Meaningful Funeral Ceremonies: A Guide for
Caregivers. Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2000. Companion Press is an
imprint for the Center for Loss and Life Transition.
 Rituals 281

2095. ———. Creating Meaningful Funeral Services: A Guide for Families.

Fort Collins, CO: Companion Press, 2000. Companion Press is an imprint for the
Center for Loss and Life Transition.
2096. Wood, William, and John Wharton. Death-Bed Scenes. London: C. and
J. Rivington, 1826.
2097. York, Sarah. Remembering Well: Rituals for Celebrating Life and
Mourning Death. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2000.
This is a guide and sourcebook for planning memorial ceremonies and other
rituals. York, a Unitarian Universalist minister, respects cultural and religious
diversity in offering ideas and insights into the planning of funerals and rituals
honoring the dead. She does, however, present all in the context of spirituality.
Following chapters that address variations in types of deaths, committal cer-
emonies, and rituals long after death, she offers three resource sections that give
specific ideas for blessing and preparing a body; text on five actual services cre-
ated by families and friends; and selections of readings, prayers, and blessings.
Includes a list of recommended titles, biographical information about the author,
and an index.
2098. Young, Gregory W. The High Cost of Dying: A Guide to Funeral Plan-
ning. Buffalo, NY: Prometheus Books, 1994.
 31
Sibling Loss and Grief

2099. Barber, Erika R. Letters from a Friend: A Sibling’s Guide for Coping and
Grief. Amityville, NY: Baywood Publishing, 2003. Part of the Death, Value, and
Meaning Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
Presented as a workbook, Barber’s text offers an interactive and creative way
to learn about and deal with childhood death. She provides places in the book to
include photos, information about the sibling and their death, and drawings. In
the chapter concerning the body, she includes space for a gravestone rubbing.
The text also includes numerous gentle suggestions for coping. This book is an
unusual but excellent therapeutic learning tool that is comprehensive in its treat-
ment of childhood grief. Tips for utilizing the book are included for parents and
caregivers. Includes an index.
2100. Bluebond-Langner, Myra. In the Shadow of Loss: Parents and Siblings of
the Chronically Ill Child. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1996.
Bluebond-Langner focuses on well siblings of children with chronic, life-
threatening illness. Most of her research is with children suffering from cystic
fibrosis. She divides her text into three parts: the introduction and impact of cystic
fibrosis, portraits of nine families, and containing the intrusion of the illness and
all that it brings. An afterword provides general guidelines for clinical interven-
tion and suggestions for communication within the family. Includes three tables,
a helpful glossary, a lengthy list of works cited, and an index.
2101. Brandt, Raymond William. Twin Loss: A Book Where the Twinless and
Others Can Seek Answers to the Many Questions Which Rise During Terminal
Illness and after the Death of Their Beloved Twin. Leo, IN: Twinsworld Publish-
ing Co., 2001.

282
 Sibling Loss and Grief 283

2102. Davies, Betty. Shadows in the Sun: The Experiences of Sibling Bereave-
ment in Childhood. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999. Part of the Series in
Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
Davies provides a scholarly, research-based examination of childhood grief
following the death of a sibling. She explores the bond between siblings and ex-
amines the many dimensions of sibling relationships. She then writes about the
impact of sibling bereavement. Other topics covered include the child’s under-
standing of death; sibling responses to a child’s death; individual, situational, and
environmental variables affecting sibling bereavement responses; the family’s
role in sibling bereavement; and long-term effects. Davies concludes her text
with a paradigm model of sibling bereavement and implications for caregiving
adults. Appendixes include summaries of anecdotal and scholarly articles in the
literature as well as summaries of research reports. A lengthy list of references
is also included.
2103. DeVita-Raeburn, Elizabeth. The Empty Room: Surviving the Loss of a
Brother or Sister at Any Age. New York: Scribner, 2004.
Focusing on the psychological aspects of losing a sibling, DeVita-Raeburn
offers a compassionate and poignant examination of the unique nature of grief
and bereavement associated with a sibling. Rooted in the author’s own grief for
her oldest brother and best friend, Ted, she discusses ambiguous loss, disenfran-
chised grief, reforming an identity, the loss of a twin, and recovery from grief.
Includes an annotated list of books, an extensive bibliography, and a list of orga-
nizations and websites.
2104. Donnelly, Katherine Fair. Recovering from the Loss of a Sibling. New
York: Dodd, Mead & Company, 1988.
A columnist for Thanatos, Donnelly offers a guide for children and adults who
have suffered the loss of a brother or sister. She calls them “forgotten grievers”
and “lonely mourners.” She addresses the unique issues surrounding the grief
that follows the loss of a sibling. Donnelly touches on the sometimes love–hate
relationship between siblings and discusses feelings of anger and guilt, denial,
and symptoms of sibling grief. Several case studies and stories are presented.
Includes a directory of organizations and support groups in the United States and
Canada as well as a brief list of suggested readings prepared by Froma Lippmann,
a parent education/resource consultant in Arlington, Virginia.
2105. Fanos, Joanna H. Sibling Loss. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associ-
ates, 1996.
Based on extensive interviews and a review of existing literature on sibling
loss, Fanos offers a thorough examination of clinical and therapeutic issues for
mental health researchers and clinicians. She discusses fundamental problems
with sibling loss, the family setting, sibling relationships, how siblings view ill-
ness, ensuing grief and bereavement stages, the fear of death, guilt, resolution,
284 Chapter 31

and recommendations for practitioners. An appendix includes Fanos’s detailed

research methods. Includes an extensive bibliography.
2106. Jenkins, Clare, and Judy Merry. Relative Grief: Parents and Children,
Sisters and Brothers, Husbands, Wives, and Partners, Grandparents and Grand-
children Talk about Their Experience of Death and Grieving. Philadelphia: Jes-
sica Kingsley Publishers, 2005.
Jenkins and Merry, British radio broadcasters, offer a collection of personal
stories and experiences from their interviewees that relay experiences with be-
reavement. The book is divided into sections based on the relationship to the
deceased. Includes a list of useful contacts, all in the United Kingdom, and a brief
list of titles recommended by the interviewees.
2107. LaTour, Kathy. For Those Who Live: Helping Children Cope with the
Death of a Brother or Sister. Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 1983.
2108. Linn, Erin. Children Are Not Paper Dolls: A Visit with Bereaved Sib-
lings. Incline Village, NV: Publisher’s Mark, 1982.
Linn offers a guide for bereaved siblings of all ages through the stories, il-
lustrations, and quotations from young grieving siblings. Children discuss their
experiences of loss, learning of the death, the funeral, their reactions and feelings,
and what assisted them in their healing.
2109. Rosen, Helen. Unspoken Grief: Coping with Childhood Sibling Loss.
Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1986.
2110. Ruiz, Ruth Ann. Coping with the Death of a Brother or Sister. New
York: Rosen Publishing Group, 2001.
2111. Smith, Alison. Name All the Animals: A Memoir. New York: Simon &
Schuster, 2004.
An account of dramatic and monumental loss, Smith describes the grief that
encompassed her following the death of her teenage brother, Roy. The book is a
poignant look at sibling loss and severe bereavement as well as unconventional
survival methods.
2112. Wray, T. J. Surviving the Death of a Sibling: Living through Grief When
an Adult Brother or Sister Dies. New York: Three Rivers Press, 2003.
 32
Thanatology

2113. Borchelt, Peter L. Animal Behavior and Thanatology. New York: Foun-
dation of Thanatology, 1988.
2114. Cherico, Daniel J., and Otto Schwarz Margolis. Thanatology Course
Outlines. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1978. Distributed by Arno Press.
This book is divided into “General,” “Religion,” and “Philosophy” sections.
2115. Clark, Elizabeth J., and Austin H. Kutscher. The Thanatology Commu-
nity and the Needs of the Movement. New York: Haworth Press, 1992.
2116. Cohen, Marion Deutsch. Epsilon Country. New York: Center for Thana-
tology Research and Education, 1995.
2117. Coly, Lisette, and Joanne D. S. McMahon. Parapsychology and Thana-
tology: Proceedings of an International Conference Held in Boston, Massachu-
setts, November 6–7, 1993. New York: Parapsychology Foundation, 1995.
2118. DeBellis, Robert. The House Staff and Thanatology. New York: Arno
Press, 1982.
2119. DeBellis, Robert, and Jeanne D. Cole. Thanatology Curriculum-
Medicine. New York: Haworth Press, 1988.
2120. Donne, John. Biathanatos. New York: Arno Press, 1976. Part of the Lit-
erature of Death and Dying series. Originally published in 1930.
2121. Eckert, William G., and Thomas T. Noguchi, eds. Thanatology. Wichita,
KS: International Reference Organization in Forensic Medicine, 1968.
2122. Fleming, Thomas P., ed. Communications and Thanatology. New York:
Health Sciences Publishing Corp., 1974.

285
286 Chapter 32

2123. Fleming, Thomas P., and Austin H. Kutscher, eds. Communicating Issues
in Thanatology. New York: MSS Information Corp., 1976.
2124. Gelfand, Donald E., Richard Raspa, Sherylyn H. Briller, and Stephanie
Myers Schim. End-of-Life Stories: Crossing Disciplinary Boundaries. New
York: Springer, 2005. Part of the Springer Series on Death and Suicide, Robert
J. Kastenbaum, series editor.
The authors present a variety of end-of-life experiences with interdisciplin-
ary analyses. From the social sciences to the helping professions to the law,
each case is examined from three to four different perspectives, for example,
a cultural response, a provider response, a family response, and an economic
response. The contributions of “responses” come from members of the Wayne
State University End-of-Life Interdisciplinary Project. The responses analyze the
end-of-life narrative. Includes biographical information on each of the contribu-
tors and editors.
2125. Halporn, Roberta. The Thanatology Librarian. New York: Highly Spe-
cialized Promotions, n.d.
2126. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Death Is of Vital Importance: On Life, Death,
and Life after Death. Barrytown, NY: Station Hill Press, 1995. Compiled and
edited by Goran Grip, with photographs by Ken Ross.
This book is a compilation of transcripted tape recordings of lectures given by
acclaimed psychiatrist and thanatologist Elisabeth Kübler-Ross from 1976 to 1989.
The title of the book is taken from her first Stockholm lecture in 1980. Other lectures
include “The Cocoon and the Butterfly”; “Life, Death, and Life after Death”; “Heal-
ing in Our Time, to Say Yes to It at the Edgar Cayce Foundation”; and “Making the
Most of the Inbetween.” Grip is a translator of Kübler-Ross’s books as well as an
attending physician at University Hospital in Uppsala, Sweden.
2127. Kutscher, Austin H., Arthur C. Carr, and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds. Prin-
ciples of Thanatology. New York: Columbia University Press, 1987. Part of the
Foundation of Thanatology series.
The editors present a collection of articles by noted thanatologists, including
Therese A. Rando, Stephen V. Gullo, Vanderlyn Pine, Robert G. Stevenson, and
Margot Tallmer. Subjects addressed include thanatology education, multidisci-
plinary approaches in the care of terminally ill patients, death and dying as taboo
topics, open communication about death, death without indignity, how healthy
life outlooks necessitate comprehending death, grief as a normal response, rights
of the bereaved, somatic symptoms of grief, severe reactions to grief and special
care, clinical care of dying patients, and the art and science of thanatology. In-
cludes an index and brief information on the contributors.
2128. Lampke, Robert S. Perspectives on the AIDS Crisis: Thanatologic As-
pects. New York: Foundation of Thanatology, 1989.
 Thanatology 287

2129. Leenaars, Antoon A. Lives and Deaths: Selections from the Works of
Edwin S. Shneidman. Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1999. Part of the Series in
Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
Leenaars presents a collection of thirty-seven writings by the noted thanatolo-
gist and authority on suicide.
2130. Lynn, Margaret Mount, and Lillian G. Kutscher. The Lillian G. Kutscher
Thanatology Collection in the Gill Library of the College of New Rochelle. New
Rochelle, NY: College of New Rochelle, 1996.
2131. Mercer, John Edward. Why Do We Die?: An Essay in Thanatology. New
York: E. P. Dutton, 1919. Originally published by Keegan Paul, London.
2132. Morgan, John D. Readings in Thanatology. Amityville, NY: Baywood
Publishing, 1997. Part of the Death, Value, and Meaning Series, John D. Morgan,
editor.
Beginning with a chapter on death education in the context of general educa-
tion, Morgan presents a collection of thirty-five articles on various topics within
the interdisciplinary field of thanatology. This book is divided into the sections
“North American Death Attitudes,” “The Care of the Terminally Ill,” “Bereave-
ment,” “Children and Death,” “Questions of Values,” and “Suicide.” Subjects
treated in the articles include historical and cultural attitudes toward death, dy-
ing, and grieving; death in film; death in adult and children’s literature; music
and death; patterns of bereavement in Indian and English society; the economics
of death; dying in the hospital; AIDS, death, and censorship; family stress dur-
ing the terminal illness of a loved one; general care of the dying; nursing care
of dying patients; social work in palliative care; home care of the dying; rituals
and resources for grief management through funerals and funeral directors; dis-
enfranchised grief; counseling techniques for both the dying and the bereaved;
complicated bereavement; working with widows in groups; men and grief; adult
bereavement following parental death; grief patterns in youth; bereavement
among African American children; issues of autonomy among dying patients;
assisted suicide; immortality and resurrection; death and dying in major Eastern
traditions; suicide in youth and the elderly; and suicide theories. Each article is
fully referenced, and Morgan includes professional background information for
each contributor following each article. An extensive index is also included.
2133. Morgan, Mary Ann, and John D. Morgan. Thanatology: A Liberal Arts
Approach. London, Ontario: King’s College, 1988.
2134. Orcutt, Ben Avis. Social Work and Thanatology. New York: Arno Press,
1980. Published by MSS Information Corp., New York, in 1978.
2135. Park, Roswell. The Evil Eye, Thanatology, and Other Essays. Boston: R.
G. Badger, 1912.
288 Chapter 32

2136. Rhodes, Colbert, and Clyde B. Vedder. An Introduction to Thanatol-

ogy: Death and Dying in American Society. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas,
1983.
The authors attempt to introduce students and the general reader to the many
issues surrounding death and dying and intend to better equip them in coping
with bereavement and assisting loved ones in the dying process. Both Rhodes
and Vedder are professors of sociology at the University of Texas of the Permian
Basin in Odessa. Their text discusses definitions of death, trends in mortality, fac-
tors affecting longevity, the importance of death education, perspectives on death
from children and young adults, the fear of death, nursing home environments,
old women and identity maintenance, hospice, terminal status in facilities for the
aged, ministry and death counseling, funerals and other death rituals, bereave-
ment, living wills, suicide, euthanasia, and immortality. Includes an index.
2137. Schoenberg, Bernard S., Arthur C. Carr, Austin H. Kutscher, Lester C.
Mark, Robert DeBellis, David Peretz, Irwin Gerber, and Lillian G. Kutscher, eds.
Education of the Medical Student in Thanatology. New York: Arno Press, 1981.
A volume in the Foundation of Thanatology/Arno Press Continuing Series on
Thanatology.
The editors present a significant collection of articles addressing issues of
death in medical education. Though many of the pieces are general commentar-
ies on the role, purpose, and importance of death education in medical schools,
several explore more narrow subject matter, for example, confronting death in
gross anatomy labs, communicating with the dying, students’ views on griev-
ing, sensitization, and literary and sociological approaches to death education.
Includes a list of contributors with academic affiliations.
2138. Torpie, Richard J., and Lillian G. Kutscher. Radiation Therapy and
Thanatology. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1984.
2139. Toynbee, Arnold. Man’s Concern with Death. London: Hodder &
Stoughton, 1968.
A classic of thanatology, this work reviews philosophical, medical, and reli-
gious concepts of death and includes chapters by Simon Yudkin, Keith Mant,
Ninian Smart, and Eric Rhode.
2140. Wolf, Stewart G. The Community Hospital and Its Expanding Role in
Thanatology. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1985.
 33
Widowhood

2141. Ames, Edward M., and Diane Robertson. A Handbook for Widowers.
Omaha, NE: Centering Corporation, 2004. Photographs by Diane Robertson.
In this 48-page paperback filled with practical advice, Ames relays many of the
common experiences widowers face. He covers loneliness, depression, isolation,
guilt, taking care of oneself, employment and financial matters, living alone, par-
enthood as a widower, rediscovering purpose in life, and moving beyond grief.
Includes a brief list of supportive resources.
2142. Anthony, Nancy. Mourning Thoughts: Facing a New Day after the Death
of a Spouse. Mystic, CT: Twenty-Third Publications, 1991.
2143. Armstrong, Alexandra, and Mary R. Donahue. On Your Own: A Widow’s
Passage to Emotional and Financial Well-Being. 3rd ed. Chicago: Dearborn,
2000.
2144. Auchard, Betty. Dancing in My Nightgown: The Rhythms of Widowhood.
Las Vegas, NV: Stephens Press, 2005.
This book is a touching and bittersweet collection of stories documenting
Auchard’s path through bereavement. Through her wonderful storytelling skills,
she relays her experiences following the death of her husband of forty-nine
years.
2145. Bowling, Ann, and Ann Cartwright. Life after Death: A Study of the El-
derly Widowed. New York: Tavistock, 1982.
2146. Brothers, Joyce. Widowed. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1990.
Having provided advice on innumerable topics for many years, here Brothers
relays her feelings of deep loss and even suicidal thoughts following the death

289
290 Chapter 33

of her husband to cancer after thirty-nine years of marriage. The book is both a
self-help guide and memoir.
2147. Caine, Lynn. Being a Widow. New York: Arbor House/William Morrow,
1988. An Eleanor Friede book.
Having learned the lesson that she should have been more realistic and less
heroic during her husband’s fourteen-month terminal illness, Caine writes about
her experiences both before and after his death. She writes that she and her hus-
band “playacted, assuming roles we considered admirable and playing to the hilt
the gallant young couple facing death with courage, honesty, and grace under
pressure.” She discusses such practical issues as insurance and finances. Chapters
also explore disorientation and denial, the need to express emotion, help from
dreams, sleeping and eating disorders, rebuilding self-confidence, being asser-
tive, creating a new social life, dating and sexuality, and the impact of death. She
includes several resources that offer help as well as narrative about each relating
personal experiences to the various situations. A section for those in the helping
professions is also included. An epilogue written by Caine notes that she was
diagnosed with breast cancer in 1983, and a note follows informing that she died
of cancer in 1987. Includes a list of organizations, a short list of titles for recom-
mended reading, and an index.
2148. ———. Lifelines. New York: Doubleday, 1977.
Author of the bestselling book Widow, Caine addresses the lonely and isolated
woman. While there is much in this book unrelated to death and dying, she does
offer valuable and insightful commentary on loss that may be pertinent to recov-
ery from bereavement in widowhood.
2149. ———. Widow. New York: Bantam Books, 1975. Published by William
Morrow, New York, in 1974.
2150. Campbell, Scott, and Phyllis Rolfe Silverman. Widower. New York:
Prentice-Hall, 1987. Published by Baywood Publishing, Amityville, NY, in 1996,
as Widower: When Men Are Left Alone, as part of the Death, Value, and Meaning
Series, John D. Morgan, editor.
Through sixteen touching, emotional, and sometimes shocking stories of wid-
owers in their own voice, Campbell and Silverman illustrate the many ways in
which widowers grieve. They also provide a brief list of self-help organizations
and suggested reading.
2151. Carr, Deborah, Randolph M. Nesse, and Camille B. Wortman, eds. Spou-
sal Bereavement in Late Life. New York: Springer, 2006.
Based on a conference held in June 2002, at the University of Michigan, this
book also highlights the findings of the Changing Lives of Older Couples (CLOC)
study funded by the National Institute on Aging. Articles explore methodologi-
cal issues in studying late life widowhood, the “black box” of widowhood, how
older Americans die today in comparison with those living in previous decades,
 Widowhood 291

the psychological consequences of spousal loss, the change in health behaviors

following spousal loss, interpersonal and spiritual connections among bereaved
older adults, the economic and practical adjustments to late life spousal loss,
changing demographic and economic contexts, implications of the changing en-
vironment on education and training, and clinical interventions for the bereaved.
A section on new perspectives on grief and bereavement includes an article by
Robert A. Neimeyer entitled “Widowhood, Grief, and the Quest for Meaning: A
Narrative Perspective on Resilience.” A history of the CLOC study and a primary
data analysis are also presented. Includes references, twenty-six illustrations and
tables, and a thorough index. Foreword by Margaret S. Stroebe.
2152. Chambers, Pat. Older Widows and the Lifecourse: Multiple Narratives of
Hidden Lives. Burlington, VT: Ashgate Publishing Co., 2005.
2153. Chapin, Bruce. The Hardest Challenge: Surviving the Death of a Spouse.
New York: Teachers Insurance and Annuity Association, College Retirement
Equities Fund, 1990.
2154. Colgrove, Melba, Harold H. Bloomfield, and Peter McWilliams. How to
Survive the Loss of a Love: Fifty-Eight Things to Do When There Is Nothing to Be
Done. New York: Bantam Books, 1983. Originally published in 1976. Published
by Mary Book/Prelude Press, Los Angeles, in 1993.
Designed to directly respond to the reader’s stage of loss, this book offers
concise, practical suggestions for surviving loss, healing from grief, and grow-
ing beyond bereavement. The authors validate feelings, offer encouraging and
reaffirming thoughts, and incorporate poetry that accompanies each step or
suggestion.
2155. Convissor, Kate. Young Widow: Learning to Live Again. Grand Rapids,
MI: Zondervan Publishing House, 1992.
2156. Curry, Cathleen L. When Your Spouse Dies: A Concise and Practical
Source of Help and Advice. Notre Dame, IN: Ave Maria Press, 1990.
2157. Daniels, Alice Grossman. After the Flowers: Life beyond Widowhood.
Santa Barbara, CA: Fithian Press, 1996.
2158. DiGiulio, Robert C. Beyond Widowhood: From Bereavement to Emer-
gence and Hope. New York: Free Press, 1989.
Focusing on the different stages of widowhood, DiGiulio discusses the images
and reality of the widowed in the United States, bereavement, feelings of loss,
growing through and beyond widowhood, support groups, and the obstacles and
satisfactions of remarriage. DiGiulio is a widower himself, and he incorporates
his own experiences into the text. He also includes words of such famous widows
as Jihan Sadat, Coretta Scott King, and Corazon Aquino. Includes an extensive
list of sources of organized support in the United States and Canada.
292 Chapter 33

2159. Feinberg, Linda Sones. I’m Grieving as Fast as I Can: How Young
Widows and Widowers Can Cope and Heal. Far Hills, NJ: New Horizon Press,
1994.
Founder of the first nonprofit organization for young widowed people, Fein-
berg offers twenty-seven chapters that explore the many feelings encountered
following the death of a spouse, including guilt and anger. Chapters also explore
the issues of visits to the cemetery; difficult times and holidays; wearing rings;
dealing with possessions; returning to work; matters of how the person died; sup-
port groups; and socializing, dating, and sex.
2160. Felber, Marta. Finding Your Way after Your Spouse Dies. Notre Dame,
IN: Ave Maria Press, 2000.
Felber presents a step-by-step (sixty-four total steps) guide to recovery for
widows and widowers written from a Christian perspective. She includes prayers
and scripture suggestions for each step. Page 136 offers a handwritten note from
Felber to the grieving reader. The book concludes with an annotated bibliography
of books and periodicals, a list of mail-order sources for books and other grief
materials, and a list of organizations with a paragraph about each and how they
might help widows.
2161. Garrison, Gene K. Widowhood Happens. Philadelphia: Xlibris, 2002.
2162. Ginsburg, Genevieve Davis. Widow: Rebuilding Your Life. Tucson, AZ:
Fisher Books, 1995. Originally published in 1987. Revised edition published as
Widow To Widow: Thoughtful, Practical Ideas for Rebuilding Your Life, by De
Capo Press, in 2004.
2163. Gordon, Beverly S. The First Year Alone. Dublin, NH: William L. Bau-
han, 1986.
In her foreword, Elizabeth Yates notes that when the author’s husband, Tom
Gordon, died suddenly of a heart attack, all who knew them asked, “What will
Beverly do?” Yates says, “This is her answer.” Gordon writes that this book is
“not only for women who have lost their husbands, but for families and friends
who are seeking a better understanding of the grieving process that is unique to
widowhood.”
2164. Greene, Phyllis. It Must Have Been Moonglow: Reflections on the First
Years of Widowhood. New York: Villard, 2001. Reprinted in 2003.
2165. Harvey, Carol D. H., and Howard M. Bahr. The Sunshine Widows:
Adapting to Sudden Bereavement. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1980.
Both professors of sociology, the authors explore a multitude of emotions, ex-
periences, personal stories, and social tensions in this academic study of sudden
widowhood. This book features thirty-six charts and tables representing surveys
and research on various aspects of widowhood. Among them are family income,
phone calls and personal visits, volunteering, church activity and salience of
 Widowhood 293

religion, life satisfaction, self-esteem, and loneliness. Includes references and an

index.
2166. Heinlein, Susan, and Grace Brumett. When a Lifemate Dies: Stories of
Love, Loss, and Healing. Minneapolis, MN: Fairview Press, 1997.
2167. Hosansky, Anne. Widow’s Walk. New York: D. I. Fine, 1993.
2168. Hyman, Herbert Hiram. Of Time and Widowhood: Nationwide Studies of
Enduring Effects. Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 1983. Part of the Duke
Press Policy Studies.
Hyman, a professor of sociology, reports on research funded by the National
Institute of Mental Health in this 118-page book. It is an analysis of the effects of
widowhood according to such factors as income, number of children, race, age,
recency of death, and others. Includes twelve tables, several surveys, a bibliog-
raphy, and an index.
2169. Jebb, Philip. Widowed. Still River, MA: St. Bede’s Publications, 1984.
2170. Jones, Jane Griz. From Grief to Gladness: Coming Back from Widow-
hood. Baltimore, MD: Recovery Communications, 1999.
Jones provides suggestions for both men and women on grief recovery.
2171. Karo, Nancy, and Alvera Michelson. Adventure in Dying. Chicago:
Moody Press, 1976.
Karo emotionally recalls the last months of her husband Lindon’s life, focusing
on the quality of living rather than how death arrives. Written from a Christian
perspective, the text includes prayers, homilies, stories, and poems. Begins with
the Apostles’ Creed.
2172. Kohn, Jane Burgess, and Willard K. Kohn. The Widower. Boston: Bea-
con Press, 1978.
Among the many books on thanatological subjects published in the 1970s,
this is the first work devoted to the unique grief of widowers. Based on Willard
K. Kohn’s experiences with his first wife’s terminal illness and his feelings of
loneliness and guilt following her death, this book is both an emotional story and
a professional perspective on Kohn’s experience by his second wife, professor of
sociology at the University of Wisconsin, who is herself a widow. They met at
a meeting of widows and widowers where she was speaking professionally. The
text examines the psychological, sociological, and physiological implications of
widowhood.
2173. Kramer, Rita Wendy. Widowhood Isn’t for Wimps: Meditations for
Women in the First Three Months of Widowhood by Someone Who’s Been There.
Preston, MN: Heirloom Press, 2004.
2174. Langer, Marion. Learning to Live as a Widow. New York: J. Messner,
1957.
294 Chapter 33

2175. Lenhart, Gloria. Planet Widow: A Mother’s Story of Navigating a Sud-

denly Unrecognizable World. Emeryville, CA: Seal Press, 2006.
A widow at the age of forty-two with two young children, Lenhart describes
the practical and emotional struggles of widowhood. She is extremely frank and
relays stark but humorous anecdotes about her experiences being inspired by
Jacqueline Kennedy Onassis, looking for a psychic, and following someone she
believes to be her deceased husband. Her mantra becomes “What would Jackie
do?” In addition to documenting her difficult struggle, Lenhart offers insights
into dealing with legal, financial, and other important everyday issues for wid-
ows. Includes a resource guide and information about the author.
2176. Levinson, Deborah. Surviving the Death of Your Spouse: A Step-by-Step
Workbook. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications, 2004.
2177. Lieberman, Morton A. Doors Close, Doors Open: Widows, Grieving,
and Growing. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1996.
2178. Lindsay, R. Alone and Surviving: A Guide for Today’s Widow. New
York: Walker Publishing, 1977.
2179. Loewinsohn, R. Survival Handbook for Widows (and for Relatives and
Friends Who Want to Understand). Washington, DC/ Glenview, IL: AARP/
Scott, Foresman and Company, 1984.
2180. Lopata, Helena Z. Current Widowhood: Myths and Realities. Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1996. Part of the Understanding Families series,
Bert M. Adams and David M. Klein, editors.
Lopata’s emphasis is on the differences between widowhood today and what
being a widow meant in the past, both in the United States and elsewhere. A
leading researcher on widowhood, she examines widowhood in both diverse and
homogeneous communities, factors affecting caregiving stress, the pervasive
identity of widowhood, the role of the widow, loneliness and other emotions, risk
factors in bereavement, roles of relatives, friendship and romantic relationships,
and community and societal responses to widowhood. Annette Prosterman, a
doctoral student at Loyola University in Chicago, authored the chapter on com-
munity and societal responses to widowhood. Includes references, an index, and
information about the author.
2181. ———. Widowhood in an American City. Morristown, NJ: General
Learning Corp., 1972. Also published by Schenkman, Cambridge, MA, in 1971.
2182. ———. Women as Widows: Support Systems. New York: Elsevier North
Holland, 1979.
2183. Lund, Dale A., ed. Older Bereaved Spouses: Research with Practical
Applications. Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing, 1989. Part of the Series
in Death Education, Aging, and Health Care, Hannelore Wass, editor.
 Widowhood 295

2184. Marris, P. Widows and Their Families. London: Routledge and Kegan
Paul, 1968. Originally published in 1958.
2185. Matthews, Anne Martin. Widowhood in Later Life. Toronto, Ontario:
Butterworths, 1991. Part of the Perspectives on Individual and Population Aging
series, Barry McPherson, editor.
Matthews is director of the Gerontology Research Centre and a professor in
the Department of Family Studies at the University of Guelph in Ontario. An in-
depth exploration of the literature on widowhood in Canada, the text discusses
the topic amidst frequent comparisons with United States and international ap-
proaches to death and widowhood. She highlights distinctions between widowed
people with and without children and those who live in rural and urban areas.
Includes an index and a lengthy bibliography.
2186. McNally, Shirley Reeser, Barbara Harrison Mulhern, and Mary Witt
Wydman. When Husbands Die: Women Share Their Stories. Santa Fe, NM:
Sunstone Press, 2005.
2187. Moore, Alinde J., and Dorothy C. Stratton. Resilient Widowers: Older
Men Speak for Themselves. New York: Springer, 2002. Part of the Springer Se-
ries: Focus on Men. Published by Prometheus Books, Amherst, NY, in 2003.
Noting that most widowhood studies focus on older women, the authors em-
phasize the importance of research on widowers. This text brings forth the stories
and experiences of fifty-one widowers, each with a unique message. Moore and
Stratton do not attempt to create statistics from the stories or categories of widow-
ers because of this uniqueness. They indicate in their preface that their purpose
is to set the widowhood experience within the context of the life experience for
the purpose of contributing to the knowledge base about widowhood and older
men, informing professionals who work with older men to improve services
and encourage researchers to explore the lives of older widowed men. Topics
explored include resilience in widowers, models of resilience, caregiving and
communication, saying goodbye, grief and adjustment, living alone, remarriage,
adult children and social support, and cohorts and the future. Appendixes include
the methodology and interview topics of the research as well as characteristics of
the respondents. Characteristics include year born, religious affiliation, highest
educational achievement, occupation, marital status at interview or follow-up,
and number of children reared. Includes a subject index and an index of authors
referenced in the text.
2188. Murphy, Sylvia. Surviving Your Partner: How to Live with the Death of
the Person Closest to You. Oxford, England: How To Books, 1998.
2189. Nowak, Pat. The ABCs of Widowhood. Bloomington, IN: 1stBooks,
2003.
296 Chapter 33

Nowak describes the challenges of the unknown world of widowhood follow-

ing the death of her husband after a five-year nonlife-threatening illness exacer-
bated by alcoholism. Each step and experience is relayed in great detail.
2190. Owen, Margaret. A World of Widows. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Zed
Books, 1996.
2191. Peterson, James A., and Michael P. Briley. Widows and Widowhood: A
Creative Approach to Being Alone. New York: Association Press, 1977.
2192. Phipps, Joyce. Death’s Single Privacy: Grieving and Personal Growth.
New York: Seabury Press, 1974.
This book is a personal and poignant story about Phipps’s husband’s death at
an early age from a heart attack. She conveys a gentle strength and quiet pride
about her ability to deal effectively with the circumstances and her grief. Phipps
provides indirect advice and counseling on widowhood. She also provides guid-
ance for speaking to children about the death of a parent.
2193. Presnell, Romaine. Taking the Trip: A Journey through Widowhood.
Omaha, NE: Centering Corp., 1997.
2194. Rice, Rebecca. A Time to Mourn. New York: New American Library,
1990.
2195. Roberts, Barbara K. Death without Denial, Grief without Apology: A
Guide for Facing Death and Loss. Troutdale, OR: NewSage Press, 2002.
Roberts, former Governor of Oregon (1991–1995), lost her husband, Frank
Roberts, former state senator, to lung cancer in 1993. This work is her account
of the year prior to his death and her subsequent years of grieving. It serves as
a practical guide that examines both the personal and societal aspects of death
and bereavement. Chapters include “Facing Death: The Misery and the Mo-
ment,” “Saying Goodbye,” “Permission to Be Weird,” “Grieving into Healing,”
and “The Long, Slow Climb Back.” Includes a short list of resources for those
grieving. Roberts later became professor and associate director of Leadership
Development at Portland State University. She is now an active public speaker
on death and dying.
2196. Schoen, Elin. Widower. New York: Morrow, 1984.
2197. Seskin, Jane. Young Widow. New York: Ace Books, 1975.
2198. Shuchter, Stephen R. Dimensions of Grief: Adjusting to the Death of a
Spouse. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 1986. Part of the Jossey-Bass Social
and Behavioral Science Series.
Shuchter, associate clinical professor of psychiatry and director of the Gifford
Mental Health Clinic at the University of California, San Diego, explores the dif-
ferences between normal and unhealthy grief following the death of a spouse. He
 Widowhood 297

also discusses the different ways of grieving using real life stories from fifty-five
widows and twenty-five widowers. Shuchter also examines the effectiveness of
support groups, medical treatment, and family therapy in assisting the bereave-
ment process. Other topics include understanding the experience of bereavement,
emotional and mental responses to the death of a spouse, how bereaved people
cope with emotional pain, continuing ties to the deceased, relationship changes
with friends and family, and the effects of bereavement on health and work life.
The author is also associated with the San Diego Widowhood Project. An appen-
dix describes the bereavement study. Also includes a brief bibliography divided
by subject.
2199. Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe. Widow-to-Widow: How the Bereaved Help
One Another. New York: Springer, 1986. Second edition published by Brunner-
Routledge, New York, in 2004. Part of the Series in Death, Dying, and Bereave-
ment, Robert A. Neimeyer, consulting editor.
The first edition of this book was a report on the Widow-to-Widow Program,
which demonstrated how someone who had been widowed for some time could
be helpful to the newly widowed. Silverman, an internationally recognized au-
thority on widowhood and grieving children, notes in the preface to her second
edition that by 2004, widows seeking other widows out for support had become
commonplace. The text explores these relationships and their value. Topics cov-
ered include gender differences, grief as both a normal life event and an illness,
detachment, building a new life, uncertainty, differences between expected and
unanticipated deaths, when the silence of the grave becomes real, confronting
family issues, widowhood as a new status, continuing bonds with the deceased,
widowhood with dependent children, childhood bereavement in this context,
reality versus disbelief, theoretical perspectives on grief and mourning, and the
role of adult children with the older widowed. Appendixes include a summary
of the research findings and resources with descriptions for the widowed (mostly
organizations). Includes references and an index.
2200. Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe, Dorothy Mackenzie, Mary Pettipas, and Eliza-
beth Wilson, eds. Helping Each Other in Widowhood. New York: Health Sci-
ences Publishing Corp, 1974.
2201. Start, Clarissa. On Becoming a Widow. New York: Family Library, 1968.
Also published by Pyramid Publications for Concordia Publishing, St. Louis, in
1973.
Start, a veteran journalist, describes her experiences of widowhood from a
Christian perspective. She writes about her husband’s sudden death, how she
reacted to it in the days and months thereafter, and how she began to reshape her
life. She notes that, “You can surmount your grief. . . . You will eventually even
sense a certain pity for those whose lives have not been touched by grief, for they
have not lived life to the fullest.”
298 Chapter 33

2202. Stroebe, Wolfgang, and Margaret S. Stroebe. Bereavement and Health:

The Psychological and Physical Consequences of Partner Loss. New York: Cam-
bridge University Press, 1987.
The Stroebes examine the physical effects of conjugal loss. Promotional narra-
tive for the book appropriately muses on whether the popular notion of a “broken
heart” may have some grounding in reality. The text explores ways in which be-
reavement affects the body in ways that can actually necessitate medical care and
possibly be life-threatening. The authors analyze stress and depression models of
bereavement and offer their own approach, emphasizing the interpersonal nature
of grief. They discuss cultural variations in emotional reactions to loss, absence of
grief, mediators between stress and illness, risk factors in bereavement outcomes,
and reducing the risk of poor bereavement outcomes. Holmes and Rahe’s social
readjustment rating scale for forty-three life events is included and discussed.
Includes an extensive list of references as well as author and subject indexes.
2203. Strugnell, Cecile. Adjustment to Widowhood and Some Related Prob-
lems: A Selective and Annotated Bibliography. New York: Health Sciences
Publishing Corp., 1974.
Strugnell’s book is intended to provide a background for research done in the
Widow-to-Widow Program directed by Phyllis Rolfe Silverman at Harvard Med-
ical School’s Laboratory of Community Psychiatry. The annotated bibliography,
which constitutes most of the book’s text, is divided into the following sections:
“Concerning Bereavement,” “Problems Related to Widowhood,” “Helping Rela-
tionships,” and “Related Bibliographies.” Titles include monographs and journal
articles. Many of the titles do not relate well to widowhood.
2204. Van den Hoonaard, Deborah K. The Widowed Self: The Older Woman’s
Journey through Widowhood. Waterloo, ON: Wilfrid Laurier University Press,
2001.
2205. Whipple, Vicky. Lesbian Widows: Invisible Grief. New York: Har-
rington Park Press, 2006.
Through the personal stories of twenty-five women, including her own,
Whipple discusses grief among lesbians and related issues of discrimination in
the legal, financial, and social arenas. An associate professor of counseling at
National-Louis University, Whipple offers advice for coping and recovering.
Topics covered include shock and denial; terminal illness and disbelief; long-
term illness; caretaking; parting moments; funerals and memorial services; grief
work; disenfranchised grief; learning to love again; long-term grief following a
death; relationships with friends and family; and information for professionals
on counseling lesbians, the lesbian community, and grief models. The women in
Whipple’s study all suffered the death of their life partner at a young age. Their
stories are principally from their first two years of widowhood. Appendixes
include a list of resources recommended by the widows in the book and brief
 Widowhood 299

biographical information on the widows and their life partners. Also includes a
brief bibliography.
2206. Williams, Marna B. Living through the Death of a Spouse: Leader’s
Guide. Nashville, TN: Graded Press, 1987.
2207. Wylie, Betty Jane. Beginnings: A Book for Widows. Toronto, Ontario:
McClelland & Stewart, 1977.
2208. Yates, Martha. Coping: A Survival Manual for Women Alone. New York:
Spectrum/Prentice-Hall, 1976.
2209. Zonnebelt-Smeenge, Susan J., and Robert C. DeVries. Getting to the
Other Side of Grief: Overcoming the Loss of a Spouse. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker
Book House, 1998.
 Name Index
Aaker, David A., 1873
Abbott, John W., 1487
Abel-Smith, Brian, 1488
Abrams, Michael, 667
Abrams, Rebecca, 1801
Acri, Albert Jay, 123
Adams, Christine A., 1095
Adams, David W., 69, 565
Adams, J. Robert., 1598
Adams, Jay Edward, 819
Adler, Charles S., 1096
Adlerstein, Arthur M., 61
Agee, James, 928
Ahmedzai, Sam, 1751
Aid Association for Lutherans, 1620
Aiken, Lewis R., 929
Ainley, Rosa, 1802
Ainsworth-Smith, Ian, 306
Aisenberg, Ruth, 80, 1023
Ajemian, Ina, 1742
Ajjan, Diana, 1803
Akhtar, Salman, 1653
Akins, Dianna L., 120
Akins, Faren R., 120
Akner, Lois F., 1804
Albery, Nicholas, 2059
Alden, Henry M., 704, 930
Alderman, Linda, 135
Aldiss, Brian Wilson, 626
301
Aldiss, Margaret, 626
Aldrich, Sandra Picklesimer, 1097
Aldridge, David, 1743
Alexander, Helen Mae, 1098
Allen, Charles Livingstone, 1099
Allen, Janet, 1
Alles, Wesley, 497
Almeder, Robert F., 864
Alpert, Richard, 434
Alters, Sandra, 842
Altschul, Sol, 136
Amenta, Madalon O’Rawe, 1489, 1522
American Association of Retired Persons,
1844
American Nurses Association, 1719
Ames, Edward M., 2141
Anders, Rebecca, 986
Anderson, Colena M., 1100
Anderson, Herbert, 1872
Anderson, J. Kerby, 1695
Anderson, John L., 643
Anderson, Jon, 307
Anderson, Megory, 2060
Anderson, Patricia, 62, 1621
Anderson, Ray S., 1845
Andre, Dena, 1524
Andreae, Christine, 1490
Andrews, Maureen Lyons, 1108
Angel, Marc D., 32, 1805
302
Annis, J. W., 2039
Anspaugh, D. J., 981
Anthony, E. James, 544
Anthony, Nancy, 2142
Anthony, Sylvia, 137
Appel, Gerald B., 692
Appleton, Michael, 1491, 1492
Arcangel, Dianne, 1301
Archer, John, 1101
Arendzen, John Peter, 820
Argondizzo, Nina T., 1722
Aries, Philippe, 1102, 1103, 1679
Arkin, Arthur, 1179
Armstrong, Alexandra, 2143
Armstrong, H. G., 627
Armstrong, Harry G., 63
Armstrong, O. V., 1104
Armstrong-Dailey, Ann, 1493
Arnold, Joan Hagan, 545
Arnold, Johann Christoph, 912
Arnold, Ken, 1972
Arnstein, Helene S., 266
Arvio, Raymond Paavo, 628
Ascher, Barbara Lazear, 1105
Ashenburg, Katherine, 390
Ashton, Dennis, 546
Ashton, Joyce, 546
Asquith, Glenn H., 1846
Attig, Thomas, 1106, 1107
Atwater, P. M. H., 1696
Auchard, Betty, 2144
Austin, Mary, 629
Autton, Norman, 1847
Auz, Martin M., 1108
Avery, Gillian, 547
Bachmann, Charles C., 1848
Backer, Barbara A., 630, 631, 931
Bahr, Howard M., 2165
Bailey, Lloyd R., 391
Bailey, Richard M., 1849
Bailey, Robert W., 1850
Baines, Mary, 779, 1790
Baird, Robert M., 308, 843
Baisch, Mary Jo, 1370
Baker, Veronica E., 1731
Balk, David E., 4
Name Index
Ball, Mog, 2061
Ballard, James O., 697
Bane, J. Donald, 1851
Barahal, Hyman S., 918
Barber, Erika R., 2099
Barbera, Thomas, 1937
Bardis, Panos Demetrios, 1448
Barkin, Carol, 600
Barley, Nigel, 1449
Barlow, Brent, 392
Barnard, Christiaan, 309
Barnard, David, 1744
Barnard, Paul, 138
Barnett, Geraldine E., 483
Barry, Vincent E., 1912
Bartlow, Bruce G., 310
Bartocci, Barbara, 1806
Barton, David, 311
Bascue, Loy O., 1974
Basta, Lofty L., 632
Bataille, Georges, 1680
Battin, Delia, 1179
Battin, Margaret Pabst, 844, 845, 1786
Bauman, Harold, 1109
Bauman, Zygmunt, 1599
Baxter, Grant, 2
Bayles, Michael D., 846
Bayless, Raymond, 1697
Bayly, Joseph, 1698
Beaton, Janet I., 1992
Beauchamp, Tom L., 847
Becker, Ernest, 913
Becker, Marilyn R., 1807
Beckman, Gunnel, 312
Becvar, Dorothy Stroh, 1975
Bedard, Kathryn, 1110
Beder, Joan, 1976
Behrman, Richard E., 572
Bencala, Rose, 1494
Bender, David L., 848
Bendiksen, Robert A., 1141
Benham, F. Lucas, 941
Bennett, Roger V., 484
Benoliel, Jeanne Quint, 33, 1977
Benson, Hazel B., 106
Berardo, Felix M., 808
Berdes, Celia M., 1978
 Name Index 303

Beresford, Larry, 1495 Blues, Ann G., 1745

Berg, David W., 485, 486, 487, 1913 Boase, Thomas Sherrer Ross, 1450
Berg, Julie, 548 Boba, Antonio, 1980
Berger, Arthur, 393 Bode, Janet, 3
Berger, Arthur S., 849, 914, 1622 Boerstler, Richard W., 634
Berger, Joyce, 914 Boisvert, Marcel, 1778
Bergersen, Betty S., 633 Bolen, Jean Shinoda, 1914
Berkan, William A., 564 Bondeson, Jan, 916
Berkus, Rusty, 1111 Borchelt, Peter L., 2113
Berlinsky, Ellen B., 1808 Bordow, Joan, 552
Bermann, Eric, 915 Boritzer, Etan, 143
Bernard, Hugh Y., 1623 Boros, Ladislaus, 938
Bernard, Jan Selliken, 1496 Boss, Pauline, 1115
Bernstein, Joanne E., 107, 139, 140, 228, Boston, Patricia, 1744
1112 Botsford, Anne L., 34
Bernstein, Judith R., 549 Botsford, Force Lawrence T., 34
Berridge, Kate, 1681 Bouvard, Marguerite Guzman, 1116
Berrigan, Daniel, 267 Bowers, Margaretta K., 1981
Berry, Joy Wilt, 141, 142 Bowlby, John, 1117
Berry, Patricia H., 2014 Bowling, Ann, 2145
Berry, Rebecca L., 763 Bowman, George W., 1853
Bertman, Sandra L., 932, 1113 Boyd, Pamela, 1527
Bertoia, Judi, 550 Boyle, Joan M., 35
Berzoff, Joan, 1979 Bozarth, Alla Renee, 1118, 1119
Better Business Bureau, 268 Brabant, Sarah, 1120
Bigelow, John, 704 Bradbury, Mary, 64
Biller, Henry B., 1808 Bradley, Buff, 939
Billops, Camille, 476 Branch, Roger G., 1881
Birtchnell, John, 1809 Brandon, S. G. F., 1854
Blackwell, Roger D., 933 Brandon, Samuel G., 821
Blackwood, Andrew W., 1852 Brandt, Raymond William, 2101
Blair, Cornelia, 872 Brant, Patricia, 148
Blair, Pamela D., 1312 Bratman, Fred, 1811
Blanchette, Patricia L., 394 Brauer, Paul H., 635
Bland, Olivia, 934 Braun, Kathryn L., 394
Blank, Jeanne Webster, 1114 Breaux, John, 1157
Blauner, Bob, 1810 Breebaart, Joeri, 553
Bleckman, Isaac A., 935 Breebaart, Piet, 553
Bleeker, Sonia, 31 Bregman, Lucy, 395, 636, 940
Bloch, Maurice, 936 Bremer, J. M., 1451
Bloch, Sidney, 1226 Brener, Anne, 396
Bloom, Shalom, 937 Brewer, Ruth M., 530
Bloom-Feshbach, Jonathan, 1654 Brice, Carleen, 397
Bloom-Feshbach, Sally, 1654 Bride, Brian E., 1168
Bloomfield, Harold H., 2154 Bright, Ruth, 1121
Blowers, Margaret Robin, 488 Briley, Michael P., 2191
Bluebond-Langner, Myra, 551, 2100 Briller, Sherylyn H., 2124
304
Brim, Orville G., Jr., 1982, 1983
Brinkman, June M., 489
Brock, Dan W., 1915
Brodie, Howard, 850
Brody, Claire M., 2048
Brohl, Noreen O’Brien, 573
Brokhoff, John R., 1122
Brooke, Jill, 1123
Brooke, Tal, 1916
Brookman, Philip, 1524
Brooks, Anne M., 1124
Brooks, Jane, 1812
Brookside, Lynn, 1295
Brothers, Joyce, 2146
Brouardel, Paul, 941
Brown, Erica, 1125
Brown, Judy, 851
Brown, Norman O., 313
Brown, Reg, 1126
Browning, Mary H., 1720
Bruce, Elizabeth J., 1127
Bruce, Hank, 637
Bruce, James W., 554
Bruera, Eduardo, 1746
Brumett, Grace, 2166
Bruno, Susan, 777
Bryant, Clifton D., 942, 1682
Bryant-Mole, Karen, 269
Buckingham, Robert W., 555, 1128, 1497,
1498, 1499, 1547
Buckman, Robert, 270
Budge, E. A. Wallis, 2062
Bugen, Larry A., 943
Bulkeley, Kelly, 1699
Bulkeley, Patricia, 1699
Bulkin, Wilma, 1984
Bultmann, Rudolph, 944
Burke, Dianne O’Quinn, 216
Burland, C. A., 945
Burnell, Adrienne L., 1985
Burnell, George M., 638, 1985
Burstein, Andrew, 1468
Burton, Lindy, 556
Buschman, Penelope, 619
Butler, Shari, 1813
Buttery, Thomas J., 500
Byock, Ira, 639, 794
Name Index
Cable, Dana G., 490
Caine, Lynn, 2147, 2148, 2149
Cairnes, Moira, 1747
Calder, Bobby J., 88
Calhan, Kenneth, 1759
Calhoun, Lawrence G., 2047
Calhoun, Nancy, 247
Callahan, Daniel, 65
Callanan, Maggie, 27
Callari, Elizabeth S., 314
Callis, Stephen, 1387
Camp, Marcia, 1624
Campbell, Karen, 640
Campbell, Scott, 2150
Campling, Jo, 1791
Canfield, Jack, 1129
Canine, John D., 1655
Cantor, Norman L., 1625
Caplan, Sandi, 1130
Capron, Alexander Morgan, 867, 1633
Carey, Deborah Allen, 1501
Carey, Gabrielle, 946
Cargas, Harry J., 315
Carlozzi, Carl G., 641
Carlson, Lisa, 316
Carmody, John, 272
Carmody, John Tully, 642
Carpenter, Edward, 317
Carr, Arthur C., 1131, 1366, 1671, 1672,
1673, 1674, 2016, 2017, 2041, 2127,
2137
Carr, Deborah, 2151
Carr, Thomas K., 947
Carrington, Hereward, 917, 1600
Carroll, David, 318
Carroll, James D., 2045
Carse, J. P., 1937
Carse, James P., 491
Carter, James, 398
Carter, Nick, 319
Carter, Steven, 320
Carter, Yvonne, 1761
Cartwright, Ann, 643, 2145
Cassel, Christine K., 1763
Cassell, Dana K., 948
Castles, Mary Reardon, 644
Caughill, Rita E., 645
 Name Index 305

Central Service for the Chronically Ill, Collett, Merrill, 1505

1748 Colletti, Lorenza, 600
Chambers, Pat, 2152 Collick, Elizabeth, 1136
Chambers, Ross, 646 Collins, Vincent J., 1137
Champagne, Marian, 1132 Colman, Hila, 648
Chaney, Earlyne, 647 Colman, Penny, 1452
Chaney, Patricia S., 949 Coloroso, Barbara, 145
Chapin, Bruce, 2153 Colwell, Jim, 507
Charles-Edwards, Allison, 1721 Coly, Lisette, 2117
Charmaz, Kathy, 399 Comper, Frances M. M., 1453
Chase, Deborah, 1502 Congdon, Howard, 1856
Chatman, Delle, 1814 Conley, Herbert N., 649
Chen, Clarence Lee, 400 Connelly, Robert Joseph, 1626
Chen, Pauline, 1749 Connor, Stephen R., 1506
Cherico, Daniel J., 118, 119, 456, 1269, Conrad, Bonnie Hunt, 557
1271, 1874, 2084, 2114 Convissor, Kate, 2155
Cherry, Frank, 1215 Cook, Alicia Skinner, 1656
Chidester, David, 950 Cook, Judith A., 558
Childs-Gowell, Elaine, 2063 Cook, Mary Lou, 1173
Chirban, John T., 1986 Cook, Sarah Sheets, 559
Chord, Melody, 213 Cooke, Hannah, 650
Choron, Jacques, 951, 952, 1917 Cooper, Alan, 2046
Christ, Grace Hyslop, 144 Cooper, Sharon, 1714
Chung, Sue Fawn, 401 Cooper-Lewter, Nicholas C., 404
Churchill, Dorothy, 1133 Cope, Gilbert, 955
Church of England, Board for Social Copperman, Harriet, 651
Responsibility, 402 Corless, Inge B., 956, 957, 958, 1507
Churn, Arlene H., 403 Corner, Jessica, 1762
Cicirelli, Victor G., 36 Cornils, Stanley P., 1138, 1139
Cinnamon, Kenneth M., 1377 Corr, Charles A., 4, 5, 146, 253, 254, 493,
Clark, David, 292, 953, 1503, 1578, 1750, 539, 560, 959, 960, 1508
1751, 1762, 1769 Corr, Donna M., 146, 560, 960, 1508
Clark, Elizabeth J., 2115 Coryell, Deborah Morris, 1140
Claspell, Emily, 1135 Couldrick, Ann, 2025
Cleiren, Marc, 1134 Coulter, David L., 38
Clemens, Christopher, 954 Counts, David R., 405
Cline, Sally, 492 Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 405
Cobb, Mark, 1752, 1855 Coute, Lucille, 274
Cobb, Nancy, 273 Cox, Gerry R., 961, 1141, 1857
Coberly, Margaret, 1753 Crane, Diana, 1987
Cochran, Larry, 1135 Crenshaw, David A., 1142
Cohen, Audrey, 600 Crichton, Ian, 652
Cohen, Cynthia B., 1754 Crider, Tom, 561
Cohen, Kenneth P., 1504 Crissman, James K., 406
Cohen, Marion Deutsch, 2116 Croskery, Beverly F., 494
Cole, Jeanne D., 2119 Cundiff, David E., 1509
Colgrove, Melba, 2154 Curl, James Stevens, 66, 1454
306 Name Index
Curley, Terence P., 1143
Curnen, Mary G. McCrea, 472
Curry, Cathleen L., 1815, 2156
Curtis, J. Randall, 1988
Cutler, Donald R., 852
Cutler, William, 1144
Cutter, Fred, 321
Daher, Douglas, 562
Dalai Lama XIV, 643
Dallery, Arlene B., 491
Dane, Barbara O., 1145, 1146
Daniels, Alice Grossman, 2157
Danto, Bruce L., 1147
D’Arcy, Martin Cyril, 962
Dastre, Albert, 963
Daugherty, George G., 485, 486, 487,
1913
Davenport, Donna S., 1816
Davey, Richard, 1455
Davidman, Lynn, 1817
Davidsen-Nielsen, Marianne, 1250
Davidson, Glenn W., 654, 1148, 1510
Davidson, Joyce, 1149
Davidson, Joyce D., 1158, 1159, 1160
Davidson, Marjoe, 655
Davidson, Susan Wengerhoff, 596
Davies, Betty, 322, 2102
Davies, Douglas James, 1456
Davies, Phyllis, 1150
Davis, Carol, 1762
Davis, Mellar P., 1774
Davis, Richard H., 323, 1989
Davis, Thomas Martin, 495
Davy, John, 1755
Dawson, Ann, 1151
Dawson, Pam, 611
Day, Stacey B., 67, 407
Dean, Katie Hodge, 563
Deaton, Bob, 564
De Bary, Richard, 324
de Beauvoir, Simone, 964
DeBellis, Robert, 51, 118, 1152, 1271,
1546, 1990, 1991, 2084, 2118, 2119,
2137
de Bosis, Lauro, 656
Degner, Leslie F., 1992
Dehejia, Vidya, 822
Delfosse, Renee, 1511
Della Monica, Elissa, 1527
DeLone, Susan Talia, 1153
Dempsey, David, 275, 657
Dennison, Allie, 147
Dennison, Amy, 147
Dennison, David, 147
de Parvillez, Alphonse, 68
DeRopp, Robert Sylvester, 37
Derr, Paula, 359
Derrida, Jacques, 1918, 2064
Dersheimer, Richard A., 1993
DeSpelder, Lynne Ann, 966, 967
Destouches, L. F., 325
Deveau, Eleanor J., 69, 565
DeVita-Raeburn, Elizabeth, 2103
de Vries, Brian, 965
DeVries, Robert C., 2209
Diamant, Anita, 2065
Diamond, Jonathan, 1818
Dick, Harold M., 566
Dickenson, Donna L., 968
Dickerson, Julie G., 148
Dickinson, George E., 1040
Dicks, Russell, 326
Dietrich, Bernard C., 1919
Dietrich, David R., 1657
DiGiulio, Robert C., 276, 2158
Dileo, Cheryl, 658
Dillard, James, 1756
Dingus, C. Mary, 892
Dinsmore, J. S., 1627
Dobihal, Edward F., Jr., 659
Dockrey, Karen, 1154
Dodder, Barbara, 853
Dodder, Clyde, 853
Dodson, Owen, 476
Doerr, Maribeth Wilder, 567
Doka, Kenneth J., 149, 150, 327, 346,
456, 854, 969, 1149, 1155, 1156, 1157,
1158, 1159, 1160, 1278, 1994
Dolan, Vikki A., 1731
Dombrink, John, 862
Donahue, Mary R., 2143
 Name Index 307

Donne, John, 970, 2120 Ehrlich, Carol H., 1538

Donnelly, John, 971 Eimer, Robert, 2066
Donnelly, Katherine Fair, 568, 1819, 2104 Eisenberg, Barbara, 600
Doss, Richard W., 823 Eissler, Kurt R., 1658
Doudera, A. Edward, 1628 Eliade, Mircea, 825, 826
Dougy Center for Grieving Children and Elias, Norbert, 666
Families, 151, 152, 153 Ellard, John, 1163
Dowdle, Nancy O’Neill, 1995 Elliot, Gil, 977, 2059
Dower, Laura, 6 Elliot, Joseph, 2059
Downing, A. B., 893 Ellis, Susan, 1755
Doyle, Derek, 660, 1512, 1757, 1758, 1759 Ellis, Thomas M., 1164
Doyle, Nancy, 328 Ellis-Hill, Caroline, 757
Doyle, Polly, 1161 Elsegood, John, 201
Drath, Bill, 167 Emswiler, James P., 155
Draznin, Yaffa, 662 Emswiler, Mary Ann, 155
Droege, Thomas A., 663, 1858 Enck, Robert E., 1996
Drolet, Judy Catherine, 234 Engram, Sara, 1165
Dublin, Louis I., 972 Enright, D. J., 978
DuBois, Paul M., 1514, 1515, 1516, 1517 Epstein, Charlotte, 1723
Du Boulay, Shirley, 1513 Epting, Franz R., 1997
Dubrow, Nancy, 449 Erickson, Beth M., 1822
Ducasse, Curt John, 824, 973 Ericsson, Stephanie, 1166
Duckett, Eleanor Shipley, 1458 Eshelman, Byron, 1861
Duda, Deborah, 664 Espeland, Pamela, 9, 187
Dudgeon, Deborah, 1778 Ettinger, Robert C. W., 1602
Dufault, Karin, 1557 Evans, Jocelyn, 668
Duhring, Nathan, 1601 Evans, W. E. D., 979
Dulany, Joseph P., 1859 Evans-Wentz, W. E., 980
Dumont, Richard G., 70 Ewens, James, 1518, 1519
Dunlop, R. J., 1790 Ezell, G., 363, 981
Dunlop, Richard S., 1162
Dunne, Tad, 1860 Faber, H., 1279
Durkheim, Emile, 974 Fahy, Thomas Richard, 1684
Dworkin, Daniel S., 1656 Fainsinger, Robin L., 1746
Dyck, Arthur J., 855 Fallon, Marie, 1760
Dyer, Barry Albin, 408 Fanos, Joanna H., 2105
Dyregov, Atle, 154 Farber, Maurice L., 1920
Farberow, Norman L., 108, 329
Earle, Ann M., 1722 Fargues, Marie, 571
Easson, William M., 569 Farrell, James J., 982
Ebon, Martin, 1683 Fassler, Joan, 156
Eckert, William G., 975, 976, 2121 Faull, Christina, 1761
Eddy, James M., 496, 497 Fayerweather Street School, The Unit,
Edelman, Hope, 1820, 1821 527
Edelstein, Linda, 570 Fedden, Henry Romilly, 1459
Edwards, Dan, 665 Feifel, Herman, 1921, 1922
308
Feigenberg, Loma, 669
Fein, I. Alan, 2045
Fein, Leonard J., 670
Feinberg, Linda Sones, 2159
Feinstein, David, 2067, 2068
Felber, Marta, 2160
Feldman, Marvin J., 918
Felsenthal, Carol, 1188
Ferrater, Mora Jose, 1923
Ferrero, Guglielmo, 704
Ferris, Frank D., 1275
Fetro, Joyce V., 234
Field, David, 409, 1762
Field, Marilyn J., 572, 1763
Figley, Charles R., 1167, 1168
Filene, Peter G., 1460
Finch, Stuart M., 7
Fingerarette, Herbert, 1924
Finn, William F., 1659
Fins, Joseph, 1764
Fiorini, Jody J., 157
Firth, Pam, 1765
Fischer, John Martin, 1925
Fischoff, Joseph, 573
Fisher, Diane, 1173
Fitzgerald, Helen, 8, 158, 1169
Flammarion, Camille, 1926
Fleming, Steve, 71
Fleming, Thomas P., 2122, 2123
Flew, Anthony, 983
Flew, Anthony G. M., 893
Floyd, Gregory, 574
Flumiani, Carlo M., 984, 1927
Flynn, Chuck, 1702
Fogarty, James A., 159
Foos-Graber, Anya, 1700
Footman, Marilyn E., 9
Forbes, John Douglas, 985
Ford, Gillian, 1766
Forman, Walter B., 1583
Forrai, Maria S., 986
Foss, Dennis C., 70
Foss, Martin, 1928
Foster, Zelda, 1507
Fox, Sandra Sutherland, 160
Frances, Gill, 178
Frandsen, Kathryn J., 860
Name Index
Frank, Dick, 244
Frantz, Thomas T., 575, 1193
Frazer, James G., 919, 1603
Fredrick, David L., 498
Fredrick, Donna M., 498
Freeman, Eugene, 856
Freeman, Howard E., 1983
Freeman, Lucy, 1170
Freeman, Stephen J., 1171
Freemantle, Francesca, 410
Freese, Arthur S., 1172
Frenay, Adolph Dominic, 1461
Freud, Sigmund, 1929, 1930
Frick, Marlena, 671
Friedler, Anna B., 109
Friedman, Mary M., 1574
Friedman, Russell, 175
Frigo, Victoria, 1173
Froman, Paul Kent, 1174
Frozena, Cynthia L., 1521
Fruehling, James A., 987
Fry, Christopher, 1931
Fry, Virginia Lynn, 161
Fulton, Gere B., 988
Fulton, Robert, 72, 73, 110, 111, 112, 525,
989, 990
Fundis, Ronald J., 1857
Furman, Edna, 162
Furman, Joan, 330
Gaasch, Ann, 193, 194, 195
Gaffney, Donna A., 163
Gaffney, Patrick, 768
Gagne, Kathleen Dunne, 228
Gallagher-Allred, Charlette R., 1522
Gallop, Ruth, 270
Ganeri, Anita, 1175
Gardiner, Alan H., 1462
Garfield, Charles A., 1660
Garrison, Gene K., 2161
Garrison, Webb, 991
Gary, Juneau Mahan, 1176
Gatch, Milton M., 1932
Gatliffe, Eleanor D., 499
Gatov, Elizabeth Smith, 1629
Gattegno, Caleb, 992
Gaughen, Shasta, 1177
 Name Index 309

Gaventa, William C., 38 Gordon, David Cole, 920

Gavey, C., 1998 Gordon, P., 731
Gavin, William Joseph, 1933 Gorer, Geoffrey, 411, 1184
Gelfand, Donald E., 2124 Gorostiza, Jose, 994
Gemma, Penelope Buschman, 545 Goss, Robert, 412
Gentles, Ian, 1178 Goulding, Mary McClure, 1185
Gerard, H. I., 61 Graham, Billy, 679
Gerber, Irwin, 1179, 1674, 2137 Grainger, Roger, 1186
Gerchick, Elias, 1999 Gravelle, Karen, 11
Germino, Barbara B., 956, 957, 958 Graves, M. J., 665
Gervais, Karen Grandstrand, 857 Graves, Sandra L., 1187
Gibbons, Joan Lyon, 672 Greely, Andrew M., 828
Gibson, A. Barbara, 500 Green, Betty R., 502
Giddens, Owen, 10 Green, Daniel, 1247
Giddens, Sandra, 10 Green, H. Leon, 1701
Gilbert, Sandra M., 993 Green, Mary Lou Johnson, 1685
Ginsburg, Genevieve Davis, 2162 Green, Morris, 1321
Gissler, Mary, 1370 Greene, Carlton, 1464
Gittings, C., 1463 Greene, Phyllis, 2164
Gladu, Evelyn, 1116 Greene, William A., 2049
Glaser, Barney G., 673, 674, 675, 676 Greenlee, Sharon, 167
Glasscock, Geoffrey, 1180 Greenstock, David L., 995
Glavan, Denise, 1523 Greer, David S., 1563
Gleason, Edward S., 677 Gregg, Joan Young, 630
Glick, Ira O., 1181 Greinacher, Norbert, 680
Godin, Andre, 827 Gressor, Megan, 1180
Goldberg, I. K., 40 Greyson, Bruce, 1702
Goldberg, Ivan K., 1131, 1179, 1366, Griffin, Mary, 1188
1663, 1665, 1767, 2000, 2001 Griffith, William H., 331, 681, 1862
Goldberg, Jim, 1524 Grof, Christina, 683
Goldberg, Michael R., 1991, 2015 Grof, Stanislav, 332, 682, 683
Golden, Thomas R., 1182 Grollman, Earl A., 12, 168, 278, 333, 413,
Goldfischer, Morrie, 1234 684, 996, 997, 1189, 1190
Goldin, Nan, 1524 Groopman, Jerome, 2003
Goldman, Ann, 576 Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry,
Goldman, Linda, 164, 165, 166 76, 858
Goldsmith, Charles E., 74 Groves, Richard F., 1863
Goldstein, Barbara J., 600 Gruber, Otto, 334
Goliard, Jean, 2030 Gruman, Gerald J., 685
Gollwitzer, Helmut, 678 Gualtieri, Antonio R., 77
Golubow, Mark, 277 Guardini, Romano, 829
Gonda, Thomas Andrew, 2002 Gubrium, Jaber F., 335
Gongaware, Timothy B., 961 Guggenheimer, Kurt J., 935
Goodman, Lisl Marburg, 75 Guilmartin, Nance, 279
Gordon, Albert I., 1183 Guinan, John, 1385
Gordon, Audrey K., 419, 501 Guinness, Howard Wyndham, 686
Gordon, Beverly S., 2163 Gullo, Stephen V., 140, 503
310
Guntzelman, Joan, 1191
Guroian, Vigen, 859
Gurrin, Basil, 962
Gusmer, Charles W., 1864
Guthman, Robert F., Jr., 113
Gyulay, Jo-Eileen, 577
Hablitzel, William E., 687
Hafen, Brent Q., 860
Hafer, W. Keith, 1192
Hafferty, Frederic W., 2004
Hagen, Richard, 848
Hagglund, Tor-Bjorn, 688
Hale, Mahlon S., 51, 1546
Haley, Harold B., 2000
Haley, James, 998
Halifax, Joan, 332
Hallam, Elizabeth, 1934
Halporn, Roberta, 114, 118, 504, 1525,
2125
Hamilton, Michael Pollock, 1526
Hamner, James E., 999
Hamovitch, Maurice B., 578, 579
Hampe, Johann Christoff, 689
Hampton, C., 690
Handal, Paul J., 918
Hanks, Geoffrey W. C., 1758, 1760
Hanlan, Archie J., 691
Hanley, E., 830
Hanninen, Amy E., 119
Hannon, Natalie, 630, 631, 931
Hanratty, J. F., 1768
Hansen, Adolf, 336
Hansen, James C., 1193
Hansen, Mark Victor, 1129
Hansson, Robert O., 1396
Harbaugh, Oary L., 1398
Hardt, Dale V., 1000
Hardwig, John, 861
Hardy, Mark A., 692
Harlow, Ilana Beth, 1443
Harmon, Louise, 693
Harper, Bernice Catherine, 2005
Harper, George Lea, 694
Harrington, Alan, 1604
Harris, Audrey Jane Axelrod, 1194
Harris, Marilyn D., 1527
Name Index
Harris, Maxine, 1823
Harris, Raymond I., 1686
Harrison, Robert Pogue, 1001
Harrold, Joan, 695, 739
Hartnett, Johnette, 169, 280, 1195
Harvey, Andrew, 768
Harvey, Carol D. H., 2165
Harvey, John H., 1196, 1197, 1198,
1199
Harwell, Amy, 696
Haskins, Charles, 11
Hastings Center, 1528, 2006
Hathaway, Nancy, 1258
Haupt, Barbara J., 1529
Hawke, Sharryl, 1002
Hawkins, Anne Hunsaker, 78, 697
Hayslip, Bert, 115, 414, 1530
Health Care Financing Administration,
United States Government, 1531
Hector, Winifred, 1724
Hedtke, Lorraine, 281
Heegaard, Marge Eaton, 170, 1200, 1201
Heidrich, Debra E., 2014
Heilman, Samuel C., 415, 1003
Heinlein, Susan, 2166
Heit, Philip, 44, 45
Henderson, Joseph L., 831
Henderson, Randi, 337
Hendin, David, 1004
Hendin, Herbert, 416
Hennezel, Marie de, 698
Henry, DeWitt, 1202
Henschell, Todd, 1492
Hentoff, Nat, 861
Herbeck, David J., 1630
Herhold, Robert M., 699
Herrington, Patricia, 1518, 1519
Hertz, Robert, 1935
Herzog, Edgar, 1936
Hessler, Florence M., 1937
Hick, John H., 832
Hickey, Tom, 1203
Hickman, Martha Whitmore, 171, 1204
Hickman, Tom, 1005
Higginson, Irene, 1768
Higginson, Thomas Wentworth, 704
Hill, D., 1532
 Name Index 311

Hill, Karen Liffring, 1559 Huber, Jim, 1206

Hill, Lenore, 580 Huber, M., 1535
Hill, Nancy, 700 Huber, Terri, 581
Hill, T. Patrick, 701 Huggard, Sandra K., 1128
Hilliard, Russell E., 1533 Hughes, Lynne B., 14
Hillyard, Daniel, 862 Hughes, Marylou, 1207
Hinton, John M., 702 Hughes, Richard, 1009
Hirschman, Leigh Ann, 1756 Hughs, Hugh Llewelyn, 1208
Hockey, Jennifer Lorna, 409, 1006, 1934, Humber, James M., 864
2069 Humphrey, Geraldine M., 2009
Hockey, Lisbeth, 643 Humphry, Derek, 865, 866
Hocking, William Earnest, 1605, 1606 Hunt, Gladys M., 706
Hockley, J., 1787 Huntington, Richard, 2070
Hockley, Jo, 1751, 1769 Huntley, Theresa, 173
Hoffman, Frederick J., 1938 Hurley, Ann, 1592
Hogan, N. S., 13 Hurst, Noonan, 1726
Holbrook, Frank B., 505 Hurtt, Maryann, 1521
Holck, Frederick H., 1465 Hutschnecker, Arnold A., 707
Holden, Douglas T., 1865 Hyde, Margaret O., 708
Holderby, Robert A., 1561 Hyman, Herbert Hiram, 2168
Holford, Karen, 172
Holland, John, 1824 Ilse, Sherokee, 1252
Hollingsworth, Charles E., 2007 Indiana Health Planning and Agency
Holloway, Karla F. C., 417 Support Bureau, 1536
Holmes, Frances B., 176 Infeld, Donna Lind, 419, 1537
Homans, Peter, 1466 Ingleton, Christine, 1732
Hooyman, Nancy R., 2008 Ingpen, Robert, 202
Horan, Dennis J., 863 Irion, Paul E., 1866, 1867, 2071, 2072,
Horn, Robert C., 703 2073
Horn, Sandra, 1325 Irish, Donald P., 420, 502
Horton, Keith V., 506 Irish, Jerry A., 15
Hosansky, Anne, 2167 Ironside, Virginia, 1209
Hospice and Palliative Nurses Association, Isaacs, Ronald H., 421
1725 Isenberg, Nancy, 1468
Hospice Saint John, 1553 Iserson, Kenneth V., 282, 2074
Houghton, Peter, 1007
Houlbrooke, Ralph A., 1467 Jackson, Aariane R., 174
Howard, Deborah, 1205 Jackson, Charles O., 1010
Howarth, Glennys, 399, 418, 1008, 1469, Jackson, D. A., 467
1934 Jackson, Edgar N., 283, 284, 338, 1210,
Howe, Julia Ward, 704 1211, 1212, 1981, 2075, 2076
Howell, Mary C., 1937 Jackson, Kenneth C., II, 1777
Howells, W. D., 704 Jackson, Maggie, 507
Howes, Elizabeth, 1939 Jacobs, Barbara J. Sax, 999
Howes, Elizabeth Boyden, 672 Jacobs, Selby, 1213, 1214
Hrycyniak, Stephen J., 1291 Jacobsen, Fay W., 709
Hubbard, David A., 705 Jacobsen, Gail B., 285
312 Name Index
Jaffe, Carolyn, 1538
Jalland, Pat, 422
James, Henry, 704
James, John W., 175, 1215
Jarow, Rick, 423
Jatz, Jay, 867
Jebb, Philip, 2169
Jeffrey, David, 1759
Jeffreys, J. Shep, 1216, 1217
Jenkins, Bill, 1218
Jenkins, Clare, 2106
Jennings, Bruce, 854, 1539, 1770
Jens, Walter, 870
Jensen, Amy Hillyard, 1219
Jersild, Arthur T., 176
Jessop, Julie, 203
Jewett, Claudia L., 177
Jewish Theological Seminary of America,
424
Jimerson, Shane R., 193, 194, 195
Job, Nina, 178
Johns, Fran Moreland, 921
Johnson, Catherine, 812
Johnson, Christopher Jay, 425
Johnson, Elizabeth A., 710
Johnson, Jan, 1839
Johnson, Joy, 179, 180, 582
Johnson, L. D., 339
Johnson, Malcolm Lewis, 968
Johnson, Margaret Woods, 711
Johnson, Marv, 180, 582
Johnson, Paul, 1883
Johnson, Sherry E., 583
Johnson, Steven, 119
Joint Commission on Accreditation of
Hospitals, 1540, 1541
Jones, Barbara, 1687
Jones, Constance, 1011
Jones, Jane Griz, 2170
Jones, Mary, 2010
Jones, William Tudor, 1012
Jozefowski, Joanne T., 1220
Judd, Dorothy, 584
Juneau, Barbara Frisbie, 181
Jungel, Eberhard, 1940
Jupp, Peter C., 418, 1469, 1868
Jury, Dan, 39
Jury, Mark, 39
Kabcenell, Andrea, 2020
Kachoyeanos, Mary, 1370
Kaebnick, Gregory E., 1770
Kagan, Henya, 585
Kalina, Kathy, 1542
Kalish, Richard A., 426, 427, 712, 713,
1013, 1014, 1221
Kamath, M. V., 1941
Kamerman, Jack B., 428
Kamm, Phyllis, 1421
Kan, S., 1607
Kane, William, 19
Kantonen, T. A., 833
Kaplan, Karen Orloff, 1631
Kaplan, Louise J., 714
Kaplan, Pascal M., 79
Kapleau, Philip, 1470, 1942
Karim, Abul Bashr Mohammed Fazlul,
1015
Karnes, Barbara, 715, 1632
Karo, Nancy, 2171
Kasden, Madelaine Perri, 600
Kast, Verena, 1222
Kastenbaum, Beatrice, 1024
Kastenbaum, Robert J., 80, 115, 340, 468,
1016, 1017, 1018, 1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023, 1024, 1677, 1943
Katafiasz, Karen, 1223
Kato, Shuichi, 436
Katz, Jay, 1633
Katz, Jeanne, 2069
Katz, Jeanne Samson, 968, 1771
Kauffman, Jeffrey, 1025, 1661
Kaufman, Barry Neil, 81
Kaufman, Sharon R., 716
Kaufman, Suzi Lyte, 81
Kavanaugh, R. E., 341
Kay, Alan A., 429
Kaye, Peter, 1772
Kearl, Michael C., 1026
Kearney, Michael, 717
Keizer, Bert, 1027
Keleman, Stanley, 718
 Name Index
Kellehear, Allan, 399, 719, 1028, 2011
Kelly, Evelyn B., 342
Kelly, Patricia, 271
Kelly, Robert, 537
Kemp, Charles, 2012
Kennedy, Alexandra, 1825
Kennedy, E. A., 56
Kennedy, Elizabeth A., 1662
Kennedy, Eugene C., 1224
Kennedy, Nathalie E., 805
Kennedy, Patricia H., 720
Keogh, Martin J., 1225
Kepler, Thomas, 326
Kessler, David, 721, 722, 1033, 1236
Keyfitz, Nathan, 761
Kienow, Nancy Louise, 508
Kiernan, John M., 692
Killilea, Alfred G., 1944
Kilner, John F., 868
Kindlen, Margaret, 709
Kinzbrunner, Barry M., 1773
Kircher, Pamela M., 1543
Kirk, Paul, 780
Kirschling, Jane Marie, 1548
Kissane, David, 1226
Kittleson, Mark J., 19
Klagsbrun, Samuel C., 1546, 1663
Klass, Dennis, 412, 501, 586, 1227, 1228
Klauser, Henriette Anne, 1863
Kleespies, Phillip M., 869
Klein, Allen, 82
Klein, Sandra Jacoby, 1229
Klein, Stanley, 430
Klicker, Ralph L., 182
Kliman, Gilbert, 183, 244, 262
Klopfenstein, Janette, 286
Klopfenstein, Pamela, 587
Klug, Ron, 1826
Kluge, Eike-Henner W., 1945
Kluger-Bell, K., 588
Knapp, Ronald J., 589, 606
Knight, James A., 1981
Knott, J. Eugene, 83, 509
Knowles, Don, 184
Knox, Jean McBee, 1029
Koestenbaum, Peter, 1946, 1947
313
Koff, Theodore H., 1544
Kohn, Jane Burgess, 2172
Kohn, Willard K., 2172
Kohut, Jeraldine Marasco, 1545
Kohut, Sylvester, 1545
Kolatch, Alfred J., 2077
Kolf, June Cerza, 723, 1230, 1231
Koocher, Gerald P., 185
Koolman, Gladys, 1232, 1827
Koop, C. Everett, 703, 1030
Kopp, Ruth Lewshenia, 186, 724, 1869
Kothari, M. L., 725
Koupernik, Cyrille, 544
Kouri, Mary K., 1233
Kraemer, David Charles, 431
Kramer, Betty J., 2008
Kramer, Herb, 84
Kramer, Kenneth, 432
Kramer, Ray, 84
Kramer, Rita Wendy, 2173
Kramer, Scott, 343
Kramp, Douglas H., 726
Kramp, Erin Tierney, 726
Krant, Melvin J., 661
Kranz, Rachel, 276
Kraus, Frances, 206
Krauss, Pesach, 1234
Kreeft, Peter J., 344
Kreis, Bernadine, 1235
Krementz, Jill, 1828
Kroen, William C., 187
Krohe, Dale C., 510
Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, 188, 189, 287,
345, 511, 590, 728, 729, 730, 834,
1031, 1032, 1033, 1236, 1688, 2013,
2126
Kuebler, Kim K., 1774, 2014
Kuehn, Eileen, 16, 1237
Kuenning, Delores, 1238
Kumar, Sameet M., 1239
Kung, Hans, 870
Kurtzman, J., 731
Kushner, Harold S., 1034
Kushner, Thomasine Kimbrough, 897
Kutscher, Austin H., 40, 51, 116, 117,
118, 119, 288, 289, 456, 619, 692,
314 Name Index

1035, 1131, 1147, 1179, 1240, 1241, Lee, Elizabeth, 348

1242, 1243, 1244, 1269, 1271, 1366, Lee, J. Y., 435
1546, 1663, 1664, 1665, 1672, 1673, Lee, Robert G., 1634
1674, 1722, 1767, 1882, 2000, 2001, Leech, Peter, 1249
2015, 2016, 2017, 2030, 2041, 2084, Leenaars, Antoon A., 2129
2115, 2123, 2127, 2137 Lehmann, Linda, 193, 194, 195
Kutscher, Lillian G., 289, 692, 767, 1243, Lehner, Ernst, 85
1244, 1269, 1270, 1659, 1674, 1727, Leick, Nini, 1250
1875, 1991, 2022, 2057, 2084, 2127, Lembke, Janet, 349
2130, 2137, 2138 Leming, Michael R., 1040
Kutscher, Martin L., 118, 119 Lendrum, Susan, 1251
Kysar, Ardis, 190 Lenhart, Gloria, 2175
Leon, Joel, 1530
Lack, Sylvia A., 1036, 1547 Lepp, Ignace, 1041
Laderman, Gary, 1471 Lerman, Dan, 1550
LaGrand, Louis E., 17 Lerner, E., 1472
Lair, George S., 2018 Lerner, Gerda, 350
Lamb, David, 871 Lerner, I., 1472
Lambrinidou, Yanna, 1744 LeShan, Eda, 196, 197
Lamers, William, Jr., 191 LeShan, Lawrence, 1981
Lamerton, Richard, 732, 1036 Leslie, Robert C., 805
Lamm, Maurice, 433, 1245 Levang, Elizabeth, 1252
Lamont, Corliss, 1948 Levering, Matthew Webb, 1870
Lampke, Robert S., 2128 Levete, Sarah, 198
Landau, Elaine, 192 LeVier, Emily, 372
Landes, Alison, 872 Levine, Aaron, 1253
Landsberg, Paul-Louis, 1949 Levine, Carol, 1145
Lang, Gordon, 1130 Levine, Phyllis, 600
Langer, Marion, 2174 Levine, Sol, 1983
Langner, Thomas S., 922 Levine, Stephen, 290, 733, 734, 735,
Langue, John, 1037, 1038 1254, 1255
Lansing, Patricia, 512 Levinson, Deborah, 2176
Lantos, John D., 1775 Leviton, Daniel, 1042, 1256
Larson, Dale G., 1246 Levy, Alexander, 1829
Larson, Judith, 1313 Levy, E. L., 199
Lasagna, Louis, 873 Lewin, Ian G., 1766
LaTour, Kathy, 2107 Lewis, C. S., 1043
Lattanzi-Licht, Marcia, 346, 1548, 1549 Lewis, Edith Patton, 1720
Laungani, Pittu, 443, 444, 445, 446, 454 Lewis, Martyn, 1551
Lawhon, Leigh, 174 Lewis, Paddy Greenwall, 200
Lawrenz, Mel, 1247 Ley, D., 1552
Lawton, Julia, 1776 Lieberman, Alicia F., 1830
Lawton, M. Powell, 1039 Lieberman, Morton, 2177
Leahey, Maureen, 347 Liebman, Joshua Loth, 1257
Leaman, Oliver, 513, 1008 Liechty, Daniel, 1689
Leary, Timothy Francis, 434 Lifton, Robert J., 436, 736, 1950
Lee, Carol, 1248 Lightner, Candy, 1258
 Name Index 315

Ligouri, Alphonsus, 923 Lunney, June Rigby, 514

Limbo, Rana K., 591 Lutheran Welfare Service of Northeastern
Lindenberg, Steven Phillip, 1666 Pennsylvania, 1553
Lindholm, Dorothy, 1044 Lynn, Joanne, 695, 739, 2020
Lindsay, Bruce, 201 Lynn, Margaret Mount, 2130
Lindsay, R., 2178 Lyons, Christine, 231
Lindsey, Karen, 1795
Linn, Erin, 291, 2108 MacDonald, Neil, 1778
Lintermans, Gloria, 1259 Mace, Gillian S., 120
Linzer, N., 1260 MacGregor, Cynthia, 292
Lipman, Arthur G., 1777 Mack, Arien, 1474
Lippman, Jessica G., 200 Mack, Stanley, 1264
Liss-Levinson, Nechama, 437 Mackenzie, Dorothy, 2200
Lister, Elena, 6 MacNab, Francis A., 1265
Lister, Marcie, 592 Macpherson, Colin R., 515
Little, Deborah Whiting, 351 MacPherson, Myra, 1779
Littlewood, Jane, 1261 Madden, Ed, 740
Livingston, Gordon, 593 Maeterlinck, Maurice, 1046, 1047, 1608
Livington, Jane, 1524 Magee, Bryan, 741
Llewellyn, John F., 2078 Mahoney, John J., 1549
Llewellyn, Nigel, 1473 Malitz, S., 1767
Loewinsohn, R., 2179 Malitz, Sidney, 1665
Loewy, Erich H., 874 Malkinson, Ruth, 1266
Loewy, Joanne, 658 Mall, David, 863
Loewy, Roberta Springer, 874 Mallonie, Bryan, 202
Lofland, Lyn H., 737, 1045 Mann, Sally, 1524
Lonetto, Richard, 71, 86 Manning, Doug, 1267, 1268
Long, Ariella, 600 Manning, Margaret, 1554
Long, Susan Orpett, 438 Marcil, William Matthew, 800
Longacre, Christine, 738 Marcus, Eric R., 1269, 1663
Longacre, Marilee, 62 Marek, Richard, 337
Longanacre, Cindy, 1523 Margolis, Otto S., 456
Lopata, Helena Z., 2180, 2181, 2182 Margolis, Otto Schwarz, 1269, 1270,
Lopez, Donald S., 643 1271, 2079, 2114
Lord, Janice Harris, 1262, 2019 Mark, Lester C., 2137
Lorenzo, Raphael, 119 Markham, Ursula, 1272
Lovell, Sandra, 592 Marks, Amy Seidel, 88
Luchterhand, Charlene, 1667 Marks, Renee U., 121
Luczak, Jacek, 1503 Marrelli, Tina M., 1555, 1556
Luff, Gill, 1765 Marris, P., 2184
Lugt, Herbert Vander, 352 Marris, Peter, 1273
Lukas, Christopher, 1631 Marrone, Robert L., 1048
Lunceford, Judy, 87 Marshall, Fiona, 1831
Lunceford, Ronald, 87 Marshall, George N., 1274
Lund, Dale A., 1263, 2183 Marshall, Victor W., 41
Lundahl, Craig R., 1703 Martin, Edward, 2080
Lundquist, Kathleen F., 420 Martin, J. Paul, 875
316 Name Index

Martin, Jenny A., 742 McKerrow, Margaret M., 354

Martin, John, 270, 1275 McKhann, Emily P., 726
Martin, Sheila, 1276 McLean, Sheila, 1637
Martin, Sherry Hendricks, 1277 McMahon, Joan D., 543
Martin, Terry L., 1278 McMahon, Joanne D. S., 2117
Martinson, Ida Marie, 594, 595 McMullen, Ernan, 355
Martocchio, Benita C., 743, 1557 McNabb, David, 330
Marx, Robert J., 596 McNally, Shirley Reeser, 2186
Maryuma, Terence Chikako, 1558 McNamara, Beverley, 356
Mason, Edward A., 1690 McNees, Pat, 744
Massimini, Kathy, 249 McNeil, Joan N., 5
Masterson-Allen, Susan, 1564 McNeil, John S., 1391
Matse, Jan, 1279 McNulty, Elizabeth G., 1561
Matson, Archie, 1704, 1705 McSteen, Kerstin, 1835
Matthews, Anne Martin, 2185 McWilliams, Peter, 2154
Matthews, Leslie Landon, 175 Meader, John R., 1600
Matzo, Marianne, 1728 Meagher, David K., 122, 516, 745
Mauger, P. A., 1358 Meeks, Linda Brower, 44, 45
Maxwell, Katie, 1635 Mehren, Elizabeth, 598
Maxwell, Robert J., 59 Mehta, L. A., 725
Mayer, Gladys, 835 Mehta, Rohit, 1049
Mayfield, James L., 1280 Melton, David, 210
Mayo, Peg Elliott, 2067, 2068, 2081 Memorial Society of Edmonton and
McBride, Alfred, 18 District, 517
McCabe, Marilyn, 1281 Mennes, Marya, 746
McCain, Kevin, 172 Menten, Ted, 293, 1285
McCall, Junietta Baker, 42, 1871 Mercer, John Edward, 2131
McCann, Barbara A., 1559 Merkeley, Donald K., 1691
McCarthy, J., 924 Merry, Judy, 2106
McCarthy, Jane Ribbens, 203 Mervyn, Carol, 357
McCarthy, Sarah, 1282 Metcalf, Peter, 2070
McCormack, Jerusha Hull, 1283 Metchnikoff, Elie, 747, 1951
McCoy, Marjorie Casebier, 89 Metress, E. K., 988
McCracken, Anne, 597 Metrick, Sydney Barbara, 2082
McDermott, R., 1780 Metze, Erno, 1063
McDonnell, Alice, 1560 Metzgar, Margaret, 1286
McFarlane, Marilyn, 1320 Metzger, Arnold, 358
McGeachy, D. P., 353 Metzner, Ralph, 434
McGee, Ann Young, 43 Meyer, Charles, 748
McGee, Marsha G., 425 Meyer, Joachim E., 1668
McGoldrick, Monica, 1416 Meyer, Maria M., 359
McGrory, Arlene, 2021 Meyers, David W., 1638
McGuire, Leslie, 204 Meyers, Karen, 19
McHugh, James T., 1636 Michelson, Alvera, 2171
McIlwain, Charlton, 439 Millen, Rochelle L., 440
McIlwraith, Hamish, 1284 Miller, Arlene B., 868
McIntosh, Elaine, 1494 Miller, Eric D., 1199
 Name Index
Miller, Galen W., 1549
Miller, Jack Silvey, 1287
Miller, James E., 1182, 1288, 1289
Miller, Jolanda, 1290
Miller, Michael James, 123
Miller, Nancy K., 1832
Miller, Randolph Crump, 1952
Miller, Robert J., 1291
Miller, Sally Downham, 205, 1292
Miller, Samuel O., 1146
Miller, Sukie, 599
Millet, Edmund A., 20
Mills, Gretchen C., 518
Mills, Liston O., 876
Mims, Cedric, 1050
Minamide, Elaine, 1293
Minear, Paul Sevier, 1294
Minot, Charles, 46
Misbin, Robert I., 877
Mitchell, Ellen, 600
Mitchell, Kenneth R., 1872
Mitchell, Marjorie Edythe, 90
Mitford, Jessica, 1051
Mitsch, Raymond R., 1295
Mitscherlich, Alexander, 1296
Mitscherlich, Margarete, 1296
Model Projects in Aging Programs, 1553
Moffat, M. J., 1297
Moffatt, Bettyclare, 294
Mogensen, Greg, 1298
Mojtabai, A. G., 1562
Moller, David Wendell, 441, 749, 750,
1052
Moltmann, Jurgen, 836, 1299
Monroe, Barbara, 206, 1057, 1781
Montague, William P., 1706
Montgomery, Herb, 1300
Montgomery, Mary, 1953
Montgomery, Mary Ann, 1300
Moody, A., 207
Moody, Raymond A., Jr., 1301, 1707
Moore, Alinde J., 2187
Moore, Crystal Dea, 1774
Moore, James W., 1302
Moore, Jane Peters, 208
Moore, Marvin, 1609
Moore, Virginia, 91
317
Moorey, James, 1303
Mor, Vincent, 1563, 1564
Moraczewski, Albert S., 1639
Morduch, Anna, 751
Morgan, David H., 1696
Morgan, Derek, 1634
Morgan, Ernest A., 2083
Morgan, J. H., 124
Morgan, John D., 21, 47, 209, 360, 442,
443, 444, 445, 446, 519, 878, 959, 969,
1095, 1304, 1305, 2132, 2133
Morgan, Mary Ann, 2133
Moriarty, David M., 1306
Morland, Ian, 138
Morley, John, 1475
Morris, Sarah, 1307
Morris, Virginia, 295
Morriss, James E., 35
Morrissey, Paul F., 1565
Morse, Melvin, 1708, 1709
Moscrop, Janet, 769
Moser, Adolph, 210
Moss, Miriam S., 1833
Moss, Sidney Z., 1833
Mount, Balfour M., 1742
Moxley, Sheila, 770
Mulhern, Barbara Harrison, 2186
Mullen, Jodi Ann, 157
Muller, Alois, 680
Mullin, Glenn H., 447, 448
Mundy, Jon, 752
Mundy, Linus, 1308
Mundy, Michaelene, 211
Munley, Anne, 1566
Munnichs, Joep M. A., 48
Munro, Susan, 1567
Murphey, Cecil, 1711
Murphy, Marie, 92
Murphy, N. Michael, 93
Murphy, Nancy, 1667
Murphy, Sylvia, 2188
Murray, Donald Morison, 601
Muth, Annemarie, 1640
Myers, Edward, 22, 1834
Nabe, Clyde M., 960
Nadeau, Janice Winchester, 361
318 Name Index

Nader, Kathleen, 449 O’Brien, Joanne, 1782

Nagy, Jan, 138 Ochs, Robert J., 1956
Nagy, Marie H., 1954 O’Connor, Andrea, 1729
Nairn, Rob, 753 O’Connor, Brian, 1874, 1875
National Cancer Foundation, 94 O’Connor, Mary Catherine, 1476
National Conference on Social Welfare, O’Connor, Nancy, 1315
1568 O’Connor, Patrice M., 1581
Natural Death Centre, 1053 Oden, Thomas C., 880
Naylor, Harriet H., 2022 Ogg, Elizabeth, 1056
Neale, Robert E., 754, 1882 Oliver, Marjorie, 364
Nearing, Helen, 49 Oliver, Samuel Lee, 1878
Neimeyer, Robert A., 95, 808, 1309, 1310, Oliviere, David, 1057, 1765, 1781
1997 Olson, Eric, 736
Nelson, Jan C., 1873 Olson, Melodie, 1730
Nelson, Leonard J., 1054 O’Malley, Sarah, 2066
Nelson, Vivian Jenkins, 420 O’Neill, Christopher, 198
Nesse, Randolph M., 2151 Oraison, Mark, 1879
Nessit, Marion, 520 Orbach, Ann, 1957
Neuberger, Julia, 450 Orcutt, Ben A., 2030, 2134
Neuhaus, Richard John, 755 O’Reilly, Karen, 1783
Nevejan, Marc-Armand-Jean-Marie, 1279 Orr, Martha L., 692
Nevins, M., 879 Osborne, Ernest, 365
Newell, Martha M., 362 Osgood, Judy, 602
Newnes, Craig, 1055 O’Shaughnesay, T., 452
Nickman, Stephen L., 1228 Osis, Karlis, 2024
Nieto, Beatriz C., 1343 Osler, William, 1611
NightMare, M. Macha, 2091 Osmont, Kelly, 1319, 1320
Noel, Brook, 1311, 1312 Osterweis, Marian, 1321
Noguchi, Thomas T., 2121 Ostheimer, J. M., 1958
Nolen-Hoeksema, Susan, 1313 Ostheimer, N. C., 1958
Noorbergen, Rene, 1333 Otero, George G., 521
Norlander, Linda, 1835, 2023 O’Toole, Donna R., 214, 1316
Northcott, Herbert C., 451 Overall, Christine, 50
Nouwen, Henri J. M., 96, 1314, 1710 Overstad, Elizabeth, 190
Nowak, Pat, 2189 Owen, Margaret, 2190
Noys, Benjamin, 925 Owens, Michael R., 1784
Nugent, Christopher, 1955
Nuland, Sherwin B., 756 Pacholski, Richard A., 522, 523, 539
Nussbaum, Kathy, 212, 213 Padilla, Geraldine V., 1731
Palmer, Greg, 453
Oakes, Maud, 831 Palmer, Pat, 216
Oaks, J., 363, 981 Papadatos, Constantine J., 217
Oaks, Judy, 1317 Papadatou, Danai, 217
Oates, Martha D., 215 Papenbrock, Patricia L., 218
Oates, Wayne Edward, 1318, 1876, 1877 Paradis, Lenora Finn, 1569
Obayashi, Hiroshi, 1610 Pardi, Marco M., 1058
Ober, Doris, 599 Park, James, 1959
 Name Index
Park, Roswell, 2135
Parkes, Colin Murray, 454, 1181, 1322,
1323, 1324, 2025
Parrish-Harra, Carol E., 1059
Parry, Joan K., 366, 455
Parry, Jonathan, 936
Parsonnet, Lissa, 692
Pasnau, Robert O., 2007
Patterson, Paul R., 503, 618, 619
Pattie, Alice, 1235
Pattison, E. Mansell, 1060
Payne, Sheila, 757, 1325, 1732
Peace, Richard, 1144
Peace, Sheila M., 1771
Peachey, Mark, 758
Peacock, Carol Antoinette, 1326
Pearl, Raymond, 2026
Pearson, Althea, 1327, 2027
Pearson, Cynthia, 367
Pearson, Judy C., 603
Pearson, Leonard S., 1061
Peck, Rosalie, 1062
Pedersen, Debbie Wiley, 604
Pegg, Patricia F., 1063
Pelgrin, Mark, 368
Pelikan, Jaroslav, 1477
Penelhum, Terence, 1612
Pennells, Margaret, 219, 241
Penner, Nadine Reimer, 1537
Penso, D., 1532
Peppers, Larry G., 605, 606
Peretz, David, 119, 1131, 1366, 1673,
1674, 2041, 2084, 2137
Perlin, Seymour, 847
Perrett, Roy W., 1613
Perry, Deborah, 792
Perry, J. K., 369
Perry, Paul, 1708, 1709
Pershy, Mary Kelly, 23
Persico, V. Richard, 457
Peters, J. Douglas, 1628
Peters, Rudolph, 1451
Peterson, James A., 2191
Petrinovich, Lewis, 881
Petrosino, Barbara M., 1570
Pettipas, Mary, 2200
Peveto, Cynthia A., 414
319
Phelps, Elizabeth Stuart, 704
Phillips, D. Z., 1614
Phipps, Joyce, 2192
Phipps, William E., 1880
Piaget, Jean, 1692
Pieper, Josef, 1615
Pietsch, James H., 394
Pike, Diane Kennedy, 1328
Pincus, Lily, 1329
Pine, Vanderlyn R., 456, 1269, 2084
Piper, Don, 1711
Pitch, Richard J., 1937
Piven, Jerry S., 1960
Platt, Larry A., 457, 1881
Plouffe, Rhea Therese, 759
Poirrier, Gail, 883, 1733
Pojman, Louis P., 882
Policzer, Joel S., 1773
Pollock, G. H., 136
Pollock, George H., 1330
Poor, Belinda, 883, 1733
Poslusny, Elsa, 1727
Poss, Sylvia, 760
Post, Carole, 632
Post, Kalmon D., 2029
Poteet, G. Howard, 125, 126
Powers, J. Bruce, 1271
Poznanski, Elva O., 7
Pregent, Carol, 607
Prend, Ashley Davis, 1331
President’s Commission for the Study
of Ethical Problems in Medicine and
Biomedical and Behavioral Research,
1641, 1642
Presnell, Romaine, 2193
Preston, S. H., 761
Preston, Thomas A., 1785
Prettyman, Barrett, 1643
Price, Ann Back, 1438
Price, Eugenia, 1332
Price, Julius J., 458
Prichard, Elizabeth R., 51, 2030
Priest, Mary Woodward, 762
Prince, Arlene, 127
Pringle, Laurence, 220
Prioreschi, Plinio, 2085
Proctor, W., 927
320
Prunkl, Peter R., 763
Putnam, Constance E., 1571
Pyles, Marian S., 524
Quarles, Tresa F., 489
Quicksall, Larry E., 764
Quill, Timothy E., 370, 765, 1786, 2031
Quint, Jeanne C., 1734
Raab, Robert A., 1064
Rabinowicz, Rabbi Tzvi, 459
Radcliffe, Jack, 1524
Raether, Howard C., 1269, 1271, 2032,
2086
Rahner, Karl, 460
Ramsay, Ronald W., 1333
Ramsey, P., 884
Randall, Rebecca, 230
Rando, Therese A., 608, 1334, 1335,
1336, 2033, 2034
Raphael, Beverly, 1337
Rapoport, Nessa, 1338
Rasberry, Salli, 766
Raspa, Richard, 2124
Rathke, Julia Wilcox, 221
Raven, Ronald W., 2035
Rawnsley, Marilyn M., 1663
Ray, M. Catherine, 1572
Redshaw, Thomas Dillon, 407
Reed, Elizabeth L., 222
Reed, Margaret R., 112
Reed, Mary Lou, 609
Reeves, Nancy, 184
Reeves, Robert B., 1882
Regnard, C., 1787
Reich, Michael, 436
Reid, Helen F., 1526
Reiffel, James, 767
Reinsmith, A. M. Brady, 1339
Reisler, Ray, 518
Relf, Marilyn, 1325, 2025
Remolino, Linda, 1176
Reoch, Richard, 371
Resnick, David B., 1573
Resnick, Sheila Handler, 296
Reynolds, David K., 427
Reynolds, Frank E., 1478
Name Index
Reynolds, Kimberley, 547
Reynolds, Paul Davidson, 525
Reynolds, Rita M., 526
Rhea, Carolyn, 1340
Rheingold, Joseph C., 610
Rhinehart, Emily, 1574
Rhodes, Colbert, 2136
Rice, Rebecca, 2194
Rich, Phil, 1341, 1342
Richards, Larry O., 1883
Riches, Gordon, 611
Richmond, Judy, 223
Riemer, Jack, 461, 462, 463
Ring, Kenneth, 1712, 1713, 1714, 1715
Rinpoche, Sogyal, 768
Rinpoche, Tulku Chagdud, 1065
Risley, Robert L., 885
Rivera, Michelle A., 1575
Roach, Mary, 2087
Roach, Sally S., 1343
Robben, Antonius C., 464
Robbins, Joy, 769
Roberts, Barbara K., 2195
Roberts, Harry, 886
Roberts, Polly C., 500
Robertson, Diane, 2141
Robertson, John A., 1644
Robinson, Alice E., 518
Rochlin, Gregory, 1344
Rock, Lois, 770
Rodd, Susan, 1378
Rodman, F. Robert, 771
Rofes, Eric E., 527
Rogers, Tony, 1868
Rogers, W. F., 1669
Rogers, William F., 1884
Rogness, A. N., 1885
Rogo, D. S., 1886
Rollin, Betty, 772
Romain, Trevor, 224
Romanyshyn, Robert, 1345
Romond, Janice Loomis, 225
Ronan, Margaret, 465
Roos, Susan, 1346
Roose, Lawrence J., 2039
Rose, Ada Campbell, 1347
Rose, Charles Spencer, 1576
 Name Index
Rosen, Elliott J., 773
Rosen, Helen, 2109
Rosen, Marvin, 387
Rosenbaum, Stuart E., 308, 843
Rosenblatt, Paul C., 466, 467, 612, 613,
1348
Rosenfeld, Stephen S., 774
Roslansky, John D., 52
Rosner, Gerald, 1645
Rosof, Barbara D., 614
Ross, E. Betsy, 1349
Rossman, Parker, 1577
Roth, Deborah, 372, 1350
Rothman, J. C., 373
Rothschild, Janet, 528
Rowland, M., 775
Rowling, Louise, 226
Ruark, John Edward, 2002
Rubenfeld, Gordon D., 1988
Rubin, Simon, 1266
Rudman, Masha Kabakow, 227, 228
Rudolph, Marguerita, 297
Rugg, Sharon, 229, 230
Ruitenbeek, Hendrik Marinus, 1351, 1961
Ruiz, Ruth Ann, 2110
Rumbold, Bruce D., 1887
Rupp, Joyce, 1888
Rushton, L., 2088
Russell, J., 1780
Russell, Martha E., 1739
Russell, Noreen A., 631, 931
Russell, Robert A., 1352
Ryan, Angela Shen, 455
Ryerson, Marjorie, 776
Ryndes, True, 777
Rynearson, Edward K., 1353
Sabom, Michael, 1716
Sahler, Ollie Jane Z., 615
St. John-Stevas, Norman, 1650
Salem, Cheryl, 1354, 1355
Salem, Harry, 1354, 1355
Salinas, Robert C., 948
Salzman, Cynthia, 1494
Samarel, Nelda, 53
Sanders, Catherine M., 539, 616, 1356,
1357, 1358
321
Sanders, Pete, 1066
Sankar, Andrea, 374
Santino, Jack, 2089
Santora, Joseph C., 126
Sargent, Marilyn, 529
Sauer, Herbert I., 778
Saunders, Cicely M., 468, 779, 1067,
1578, 1579, 1788, 1789, 1790, 2036,
2037, 2038
Savary, Karen, 437
Schaefer, Dan, 231
Schaefer, Daniel J., 456
Schaper, Donna, 1836
Schatz, William H., 1359
Schaverien, Joy, 1670
Scherer, Jennifer M., 887
Scherzer, Carl J., 1889
Schiff, Harriet Sarnoff, 617, 1360
Schim, Stephanie Myers, 2124
Schleifer, Jay, 1361
Schmitt, Abraham, 1362
Schnaper, Nathan, 2039
Schneider, Carl, 888
Schneider, John, 1363
Schneider, John M., 1364
Schneider, Miriam, 1496
Schneiderman, G., 1365
Schoen, Elin, 2196
Schoen, Robert, 761
Schoenberg, B. Mark, 2040
Schoenberg, Bernard, 1131, 2041
Schoenberg, Bernard S., 1366, 1671,
1672, 1673, 1674, 2016, 2017, 2137
Schoeneck, Therese, 24, 1367
Schowalter, John E., 503, 618, 619
Schraff, Sylvia H., 1735
Schuklenk, Udo, 889
Schulman, J. L., 620
Schultz, Cynthia L., 1127
Schulz, Richard, 1068
Schur, Max, 1962
Schuster, Janice Lynch, 2020
Schuurman, Donna L., 232, 233
Schweibert, Pat, 780
Scotch, Norman A., 1983
Scott, D. H., 1616
Scott, Frances G., 530
322 Name Index

Scott, Milton Berry, 1646 Shibles, Warren, 1963

Scott, Nathan A., 1069 Shield, Renee Rose, 377
Scott, Patricia Cumin, 1580 Shiloh, Ailon, 469
Scrimgeour, Elizabeth, 781 Shipley, Roger R., 1648
Scrivani, Mark, 25 Shirley, David A., 701
Scrutton, Steve, 1368 Shively, Charles, 1479
Seale, Clive, 1369 Shneidman, Edwin S., 329, 1075, 1076,
Secunda, Victoria, 1837 1077, 1964
Sed, C., 56 Shoemaker, D. J., 1682
Seelan, Irene, 2030 Shoemark, Allison, 709
Seeland, Irene B., 782, 1269, 1271 Short, Robert, 1078
Segerberg, Osborn, 783, 1617 Shoshanna, Brenda, 1375
Segraves, Kelly L., 1070 Shrut, Samuel D., 54
Seibert, Dinah, 234 Shuchter, Stephen R., 2198
Selavan, Ida Cohen, 469 Shuman, Ron, 787
Selder, Florence, 1370, 1736 Shuy, Roger, 794
Seligman, Martin, 784 Siebold, Cathy, 1584
Sell, Irene L., 128 Siegel, Mary-Ellen, 456, 1663
Sell, Kenneth D., 129 Siekmann, Theodore C., 235
Selzer, Richard, 1071 Silverman, Janis, 236
Semel, Mary, 597 Silverman, Nancy Jean Price, 531
Sendor, Virginia F., 1581 Silverman, Phyllis R., 1228, 1979
Seskin, Jane, 2197 Silverman, Phyllis Rolfe, 237, 1376, 2150,
Seymour, Jane, 1732, 1750 2199, 2200
Shabad, Peter C., 1657, 1675 Silverman, William B., 1377
Shaffer, Thomas L., 1647 Simon, Clea, 1838
Shaler, Nathaniel Southgate, 1072 Simon, Leslie, 1839
Shane, Thomas W., 785 Simon, Rita James, 887
Shannon, Thomas A., 890 Simpson, Michael, 838
Shapiro, Ester R., 1371 Simpson, Michael A., 130, 1079
Shapiro, R. Debra, 745 Singer, Lilly, 1378
Sharoff, Kenneth, 375 Singer, Peter, 98
Sharp, Anne Wallace, 1582 Singer, Zeva, 1249
Sharp, Joseph, 376 Singh, Kathleen Dowling, 788
Shatte, Howard Alexander, 837 Sinick, Daniel, 55
Shavelson, Lonny, 891 Sirot, Margaret, 1378
Shaw, Eva, 1372 Sirvis, Barbara, 238
Sheehan, Denice C., 1583 Slater, E., 893
Sheepshanks, Mary, 1373 Slater, Robert C., 2084, 2086
Sheikh, Anees A., 97 Small, Neil, 409, 2069
Sheikh, Katharina S., 97 Smilansky, Sara, 239
Sheldon, Frances, 1791 Smith, Alison, 2111
Shepard, Martin, 298, 786 Smith, B. A., 240
Sherlock, Richard, 892 Smith, Bradford, 378
Sherlock, William, 1073 Smith, Carole R., 379
Sherman, Deborah Witt, 1728 Smith, Curtis A., 1649
Sherr, Lorraine, 1074, 1374 Smith, Doug, 1585, 1792
 Name Index 323

Smith, Harold Ivan, 1379, 1380, 1381, Starenko, R. C., 1894

1382, 1840 Starhawk, 2091
Smith, Helen C., 2042 Start, Clarissa, 2201
Smith, Kathleen, 1383, 1384 Staton, Jana, 794
Smith, Mark, 954 Staudacher, Carol, 1392, 1393, 1394
Smith, Rodney, 789 Steele, Shirley, 1737
Smith, Sharon Hines, 470 Stefanics, Charlotte, 1062
Smith, Shirley Ann, 1793 Stein, Diane, 1395
Smith, Susan C., 219, 241 Stein, Sara Bonnett, 244
Smith, Walter J., 790 Steinberg, Maurice D., 895
Smith, William A., 1890 Steinfels, Peter, 1081
Smolin, Ann, 1385 Stephens, C. S., 1618
Snow, Lois W., 380 Stephenson, John S., 1082
Snyder, Carrie, 894 Sterns, H. L., 56
Society for the Right to Die, 2043 Stetson, Brad, 621
Soder-Alderfer, Kay, 1386 Stevenson, Eileen P., 534
Sogn, Donnelen L., 242 Stevenson, Robert G., 245, 516, 534, 619,
Solomon, Fredric, 1321 1141
Solomon, Lewis D., 471 Stewart, Charles W., 659
Somerville, Rose M., 532 Stewart, Gail B., 246
Soper, Susan, 2090 Stillion, Judith M., 100
Sorensen, Rosemary Lee, 946 Stoddard, Sandol, 1586
Sorenson, Stephen, 724, 1869 Stolzman, Marilyn, 1259
Soulen, Richard N., 1891 Storey, Porter, 1794
Southard, Samuel, 131 Storley, C. J., 382
Spall, Bob, 1387 Strack, Stephen, 1965
Speck, Peter, 306, 2044 Stratton, Dorothy C., 2187
Spencer, Glenn M., Jr., 1892 Straub, Sandra Helene, 795
Spiegel, Maura, 381 Strauss, A. L., 673
Spiegel, Yorick, 1388, 1389 Strauss, Anselm L., 674, 675, 676, 796
Spies, Karen Bornemann, 1390 Strickland, Albert Lee, 966, 967
Spilling, Roy, 791 Stroebe, Margaret S., 1396, 2202
Spinetta, John J., 533 Stroebe, Wolfgang, 1396, 2202
Spiro, Howard M., 472 Strong, P. N., 1358
Spiro, Jack D., 473 Strosberg, Martin A., 2045
Spivey, John, 1523 Strothmann, Maynard Herman, 839
Sprang, Ginny, 1391 Strugnell, Cecile, 2203
Sprung, Barbara, 243 Stuart, Friend, 1895
Spurgeon, C. H., 1080 Stuart, Wendy, 2
Stamm, B. H., 449 Stubbs, Margaret L., 367
Standard, Nathan H., 299 Sturzl, JoAnn, 1909
Standard, S., 299 Sudnow, David, 383
Stanford, Gene, 792 Sullender, R. S., 1896
Stannard, David E., 99, 1480 Sulzberger, Cyrus, 474
Stanwood, P. G., 1899 Summers, Dorothy H., 1579
Stanworth, Rachel, 1893 Suszycki, Lee H., 797
Starck, Peter, 793 Sutton, Marilyn, 1089
324
Swanson, Jan, 2046
Swetland, Sandra, 247
Switzer, David K., 1397, 1897
Syme, Gabrielle, 1251
Szabo, John F., 132
Tagliaferre, Lewis, 1398
Tallmer, Margot, 51, 57, 618, 619, 798,
1399, 1546
Tanner, Dennis C., 1400
Tanner, I. J., 1401
Tarlow, Sarah, 1402
Tart, Charles, 1714
Tatelbaum, Judy, 1403
Taylor, Jeremy, 1898, 1899
Taylor, Joan Leslie, 1587
Taylor, Michael J., 1966
Taylor, Richard P., 475
Taylor, Timothy, 1481
Tedeschi, Richard G., 2047
Tehan, Claire B., 1489, 1550
Temes, Roberta, 1404
Templer, Donald I., 86
Tengbom, Mildred, 622, 1405, 1900
Terbay, Susan Handle, 1582
Terhune, James A., 248
Theroux, Phyllis, 2092
Thielen, Joyce H., 112
Thielicke, Helmut, 896, 1901, 1967
Thiermann, Sara, 940
Thomas, James L., 535
Thomas, Pat, 536
Thomas, V. R., 300
Thomasma, Davis C., 897
Thompson, Douglas K., 799
Thompson, Ian, 898
Thompson, Marney, 1747
Thompson, Neil, 1406
Thomson, William Hanna, 704
Thornton, V. K., 1407
Tigges, Kent Nelson, 800
Tis’Ney, Carol, 1408
Tittensor, John, 623
Tobin, Daniel R., 1795
Toder, Francine, 624
Tomer, Adrian, 58
Tompkins, Susan E., 840
Name Index
Torpie, Richard J., 1546, 2138
Torrens, Paul R., 1588
Torres, Carole, 692
Towers, Anna M., 1744
Toynbee, Arnold, 841, 1482, 2139
Toynbee, Jocelyn M. C., 1482
Treadway, David C., 1409
Tristman, Richard, 381
Tromp, Nicholas J., 1483
Trotman, Frances K., 2048
Troup, Stanley B., 2049
Trozzi, Maria, 249
Tuccille, Jerome, 1619
Tuck, William P., 1410
Turnage, Anne Shaw, 1902
Turnage, Mac N., 1902
Turnbull, Richard, 384
Twycross, Robert G., 801, 1796
Tyler, Linda S., 1777
Ufema, Joy, 1738
Uhlmann, Michael M., 899
Ulanov, Barry, 1083
Ulin, Richard Otis, 537
Umberson, Debra, 1841
United States Congress, Office of
Technology Assessment, 802
United States General Accounting Office,
1589, 1590
United States Senate, 900
United States Senate, Special Committee
on Aging, 1591
Urofsky, Melvin I., 1651
Vachon, Mary L. S., 2050
Vail, Elaine, 1411
Valarino, Evelyn, 1715
Valentine, Bill, 1412
Van Bommel, Harry, 385, 1552
Vandeman, George E., 250
Van den Hoonaard, Deborah K., 2204
Van Den Hout, Theo P. J., 1451
Van Der Zee, James, 476
VanDuivendyk, Tim P., 1903
Van Praagh, James, 1413
Van Zeller, Hubert, 1084
Vargas, Kathy, 1524
 Name Index
Vaux, Kenneth L., 803, 901
Vaux, Sara Anson, 803
Veatch, Robert M., 847, 902, 1081
Vedder, Clyde B., 2136
Ventifridda, V., 1796
Vermilye, Gretchen, 518
Vernick, Joel J., 133
Vernon, Glenn M., 386, 1968
Verwoerdt, Adriaan, 301
Vince, Ken R., 1717
Vlitos, Roger, 198
Vogel, Linda Jane, 251
Vogt, Christopher P., 804
Volicer, Ladislav, 1592
Volk, Robert J., 2084
Volkan, Vamik D., 1163, 1414
Volpe, Rita, 600
Voss, Robert F., 218
Voysey, M., 1085
Vredevelt, Pam W., 1415
Wagner, August H., 1969
Wagner, Heather Lehr, 387
Wagner, J., 1904
Wahl, Charles W., 805
Wainwright, Wendy, 1747
Wald, Florence S., 1739
Wald, George, 52
Walker, Alice, 806
Walker, Earl A., 2051
Walker, Kenneth M., 101
Wallace, Beverly R., 466
Wallis, C. J., 2093
Walsh, Froma, 1416
Walsh, R. P., 467
Walsh-Burke, Katherine, 2052
Walter, Carolyn Ambler, 1417
Walter, Tony, 1418, 1797
Walton, Charlie, 1419
Walton, Douglas N., 904, 1970
Wandel, Lee Palmer, 472
Wanderer, Zev, 807
Ward, Barbara, 26, 252
Wardi, Anissa Janine, 477
Ware, Shirley Gerald, 1843
Warner, W. Lloyd, 1086
Warthin, Alfred, 2053
325
Wass, Hannelore, 253, 254, 538, 539, 808
Waterhouse, Michael, 809
Waters, Brent, 1905
Watson, David, 810
Watson, Max S., 1783
Watson, Wilbur H., 59
Watt, Jill, 478
Watts, Alan W., 811
Watts, Richard G., 302
Waugh, Earle H., 1478
Weatherhead, Leslie, 1906
Webb, Marilyn, 388
Webb, Nancy Boyd, 255
Weeks, O. Duane, 812
Weenolsen, Patricia, 813, 1971
Wegars, Priscilla, 401
Weidner, Halbert, 1907
Weiner, Bill, 102
Weingarten, Violet, 814
Weinreb, Neil J., 1773
Weir, Robert F., 905, 906
Weisman, Avery D., 1420, 1676, 1677,
2054
Weiss, Abner, 479
Weiss, Jess E., 103
Weiss, Robert S., 1181, 1324
Weitzman, Elizabeth, 256
Weizman, Savine Gross, 1421
Wells, Robert V., 1484
Welshons, John E., 1422
Wengerd, Sara, 1423
Wentzel, Kenneth B., 1593
Wertenbaker, Lael T., 1087
Wertheimer, Alison, 1424
Westberg, Granger E., 1425
Whaley, Joachim, 1485
Wharton, John, 2096
Wheeler, David R., 815
Wheeler, Sara Rich, 591
Whipple, Vicky, 2205
Whitaker, Agnes, 1426
White, Ann, 315
White, James R., 1427
White Deer of Autumn, 480
Whiter, Walter, 1693
Whitfield, Sarah, 1724
Wiener, Alfred, 1179, 1674
326 Name Index

Wienrich, Stephanie, 2059 Worcester, Alfred, 1092

Wiersbe, David, 1908 Worden, J. William, 264, 927, 1437,
Wiersbe, Warren W., 1908 2058
Wilcox, Sandra Galdieri, 1089 Worswick, Jacqueline, 1596
Wilde, Gary, 27 Worth, Richard, 817
Wilkenfeld, Loren, 625 Wortman, Camille B., 2151
Wilkerson, R., 1718 Wray, T. J., 1438, 2112
Wilkes, Eric, 2055 Wright, Bob, 1439
Williams, Donna Reilly, 1909 Wright, H. T., 1093
Williams, Elaine K., 1594 Wright, Lorraine M., 347
Williams, Marna B., 2206 Wright, Michael, 1503
Williams, Mary Beth, 1446 Wroblieski, Adina, 1440
Williams, Mary E., 907, 908, 1090, 1798, Wu, Kuang-ming, 343
1799 Wydman, Mary Witt, 2186
Williams, P. W., 1910 Wylie, Betty Jane, 1441, 2207
Williams, Robert H., 909 Wyschogrod, Edith, 1094
Williams, Tom A., 926
Willis, Clarissa, 1624 Yates, Martha, 2208
Wilson, Antoine, 1428 York, Sarah, 2097
Wilson, Donna M., 451 Young, Dennis, 1442
Wilson, Elizabeth, 2200 Young, Gregory W., 2098
Wilson, Ian C., 1809 Youngner, Stuart J., 895
Wilson, Liz, 481 Yount, Lisa, 910
Winn, Denise, 1595
Winn, Peter S., 948 Zagaranski, D., 305
Winslade, John, 281 Zalaznik, Patricia Weller, 134, 541
Winter, Arthur, 816 Zandee, Jan, 1486
Winters, Paul A., 1091 Zarbock, Sarah F., 1493
Wiscniak, Debra, 1740 Zarit, Steven H., 60
Wogrin, Carol, 303 Zeitlin, Steven J., 1443
Wolf, Anna M., 540 Zelenka, Linda, 1444
Wolf, Stewart G., 2056, 2057, 2140 Zeligs, Rose, 265
Wolfe, Thomas, 1429 Zerwekh, Joyce V., 1741, 1745
Wolfelt, Alan D., 28, 29, 30, 257, 258, Zim, Herbert S., 31
259, 260, 261, 389, 1430, 1431, 1432, Zimmerman, Jack McKay, 1597
1433, 1434, 1435, 1911, 2094, 2095 Zimmerman, Susan, 1445
Wolfelt, Megan E., 30 Zimpfer, David G., 2009
Wolfenstein, Martha, 262, 1694 Zinker, Joseph Chaim, 104
Wolff, S., 263 Zinner, Ellen, 490, 542, 543, 1446
Wolfson, Ron, 482 Zintl, Elizabeth, 1414
Wolk, Gloria Grening, 1652 Zisook, Sidney, 1447, 1678
Womack, Sharon Kay, 113 Zonnebelt-Smeenge, Susan J., 2209
Wong, Mary M., 1436 Zorza, Rosemary, 818
Wood, William, 2096 Zorza, Victor, 818
Woodruff, R., 1800 Zucker, Marjorie B., 911
Wooten-Green, Ron, 304
 Title Index
ABC of Palliative Care, 1760
The ABCs of Grief: A Handbook for
Survivors, 1095
The ABCs of Widowhood, 2189
About Death, 141
About Dying: An Open Family Book for
Parents and Children Together, 244
About Mourning: Support and Guidance
for the Bereaved, 1421
Access to Experimental Drugs in Terminal
Illness: Ethical Issues, 889
Access to Hospice Care: Expanding
Boundaries, Overcoming Barriers: A
Special Supplement to the Hastings
Center Report, 1528
Acknowledgment: Opening to the Grief of
Unacceptable Loss, 1249
Acquainted with Grief, 1347
An Act of Love: Preparing Your Spouse
for Life without You, a Financial
Guide, 1630
Acute, Chronic, and Terminal Care in
Neurosurgery, 2029
Acute Grief and the Funeral, 2084
Acute Grief: Counseling the Bereaved,
1271
The Adjustment of Parents Following
the Death of a Child from a Terminal
Illness: A Dissertation, 558
327
Adjustment to Widowhood and Some
Related Problems: A Selective and
Annotated Bibliography, 2203
Admission to the Feast, 312
Adolescence and Death, 5
Adolescent Suicide, 7
Adventure in Dying, 2171
Affairs in Order: A Complete Resource
Guide to Death and Dying, 1621
African American Daughters and Elderly
Mothers: Examining Experiences of
Grief, Loss, and Bereavement, 470
African American Grief, 466
After a Child Dies: Counseling Bereaved
Families, 583
After Goodbye: How to Begin Again after
the Death of Someone You Love,
1285
Afterlife: Reports from the Threshold of
Death, 1704
After the Darkest Hour the Sun Will Shine
Again: A Parent’s Guide to Coping
with the Loss of a Child, 598
After the Flowers Have Gone, 1232
After the Flowers: Life beyond
Widowhood, 2157
After You Lose Someone You Love: Advice
and Insight from the Diaries of Three
Kids Who’ve Been There, 147
328 Title Index
After You Say Goodbye: When Someone
You Love Dies of AIDS, 1174
Against the Dying of the Light: A Father’s
Journey through Loss, 670
Aging and Dying as Aspects of Living,
32
Aging, Death, and Human Longevity: A
Philosophical Inquiry, 50
Aging, Dying, and Death, 44
Aging, Dying, and Death: A Teacher’s
Guide, 45
AIDS and the Hospice Community,
1489
AIDS and the New Orphans: Coping with
Death, 1145
AIDS: Intervening with Hidden Grievers,
1146
AIDS: The Ultimate Challenge, 728
Alerting Bereaved Families: A Special
Bulletin, 268
All in the End Is Harvest: An Anthology
for Those Who Grieve, 1426
All Kinds of Love: Experiencing Hospice,
1538
All of Us: Americans Talk about the
Meaning of Death, 62
All Our Losses, All Our Griefs: Resources
for Pastoral Care, 1872
All the Days of His Dying, 671
Alone and Surviving: A Guide for Today’s
Widow, 2178
Ambiguous Loss: Learning to Live with
Unresolved Grief, 1115
The American Book of Dying: Lessons in
Healing Spiritual Pain, 1863
The American View of Death: Acceptance
or Denial?, 70
The American Way of Death, 1051
The American Way of Dying, 627
Among Friends: Hospice Care for the
Person with AIDS, 1497
The Anatomy of Bereavement, 1337
And a Time to Die (Howes), 1939
And a Time to Die (Pelgrin), 368
And a Time to Die: How American
Hospitals Shape the End of Life, 716
And Peace at Last, 326
And the Passenger Was Death: The
Drama and Trauma of Losing a Child,
562
And You Visited Me: Sacramental
Ministry to the Sick and Dying, 1864
Anguish: A Case History of a Dying
Patient, 674
Anguish: A Case History of a Dying
Trajectory, 675
Animal Behavior and Thanatology,
2113
Annotated Catalog of Books and
Audiovisual Materials on Thanatology:
Death, Bereavement, Loss, Grief, and
Recovery from Bereavement, 105
Anticipatory Grief, 1366
Aphasia: The Family’s Guide to the
Psychology of Loss, Grief, and
Adjustment, 1400
Appointment with Death, 1885
Approaching Death: Improving Care at
the End of Life, 1763
Are You Sad Too?: Helping Children Deal
with Loss and Death, 234
Ars Morendi: The Book of the Craft of
Dying and Other Early English Tracts
Concerning Death, 1453
The Art of Death: Visual Culture in the
English Death Ritual, c. 1500-1800,
1473
The Art of Dying (Crichton), 652
The Art of Dying (Neale), 754
The Art of Dying: Honoring and
Celebrating Life’s Passages, 766
The Art of Dying: How to Leave This
World with Dignity and Grace, at
Peace with Yourself and Your Loved
Ones, 813
The Art of Dying Well: The Development
of Ars Moriendi, 1476
As I Lay Dying: Meditations upon
Returning, 755
As It Is Said: A Selected, Annotated
Bibliography in Death and Dying, 122
As Much Time as It Takes: A Guide for
the Bereaved, Their Family, and
Friends, 1225
 Title Index
Aspects of Grief: Bereavement in Adult
Life, 1261
As Someone Dies: A Handbook for the
Living, 710
At Home with Dying: A Zen Hospice
Approach, 1505
At Home with Terminal Illness: A Family
Guide to Hospice in the Home, 1492
Attachment and Loss: Loss, Sadness, and
Depression, 1117
The Attitude of Ancient Egyptians to
Death and the Dead, 1462
Attitudes on Death and Dying: A Cross-
Cultural View, 87
Attitudes toward Death and Funerals, 88
Autobiography of Dying, 691
Awakening from Grief: Finding the Way
Back to Joy, 1422
Awareness of Dying, 673
Awareness of Mortality, 1025
Barriers to Hospice Care: Are We
Shortchanging Dying Patients:
Hearing before the Special Committee
on Aging, United States Senate, One
Hundred Sixth Congress, Second
Session, Washington, DC, September
18, 2000, 1591
Becoming Myself: Living Life to the
Fullest after the Loss of Your Parents,
1813
Before and After My Child Died: A
Collection of Parents’ Experiences,
573
Before the Great Silence, 1046
Beginning Again: Tools for the Journey
through Grief, 1277
Beginning at the End: A Study in Death
and Life, 382
Beginnings: A Book for Widows, 2207
Behind the Veils of Death and Sleep, 835
Being and Death, 1923
Being a Widow, 2147
Being Human in the Face of Death, 372
Belief in Immortality and the Worship of
the Dead, 1603
329
Be Not Afraid: Overcoming the Fear of
Death, 912
Bequest and Betrayal: Memoirs of a
Parent’s Death, 1832
The Bereaved Child: Analysis, Education,
and Treatment: An Abstracted
Bibliography, 120
Bereaved Children and Teens: A Support
Guide for Parents and Professionals,
12
The Bereaved Parent, 617
Bereavement and Adaptation: A
Comparative Study of the Aftermath of
Death, 1134
Bereavement and Commemoration: An
Archeology of Mortality, 1402
Bereavement and Grief: Supporting Older
People through Loss, 1368
Bereavement and Health: The
Psychological and Physical
Consequences of Partner Loss,
2202
Bereavement and Support: Healing in a
Group Environment, 1207
Bereavement Care: A New Look at
Hospice and Community-Based
Services, 1548
Bereavement: Client Adaptation and
Hospice Services, 1537
Bereavement Counseling: A
Multidisciplinary Handbook, 2040
Bereavement Counseling: Pastoral Care
for Complicated Grieving, 1871
Bereavement: Counseling the Grieving
throughout the Life Cycle, 1142
Bereavement in Children under Stress,
263
Bereavement: Its Psychosocial Aspects,
1674
The Bereavement Ministry Program: A
Comprehensive Guide for Churches,
1873
Bereavement: Reactions, Consequences,
and Care, 1321
Bereavement: Studies of Grief in Adult
Life, 1322
330 Title Index
Bereavement: Three Aspects of Mourning
for the Bereaved and for Those Who
Want to Help Them, 1279
Between Life and Death, 1016
Beyond All Pain: A Companion for the
Suffering and Bereaved, 1788
Beyond and Back: Those Who Died–and
Lived to Tell about It, 1718
Beyond Death: The Gates of
Consciousness, 683
Beyond Endurance: When a Child Dies,
589
Beyond Grief: A Guide for Recovering
from the Death of a Loved One, 1392
Beyond Loss: A Practical Guide through
Grief to a Meaningful Life,
1378
Beyond Silence and Denial: Death and
Dying Reconsidered, 636
Beyond Sorrow: Reflections on Death and
Grief, 1300
Beyond Tears: Living after Losing a
Child, 600
Beyond the Body: Death and Social
Identity, 1934
Beyond the Innocence of Childhood:
Factors Influencing Children and
Adolescents’ Perceptions and Attitudes
toward Death, 69
Beyond the Innocence of Childhood:
Helping Children and Adolescents
Cope with Life-Threatening Illness and
Dying, 565
Beyond the Mirror: Reflections on Death
and Life, 1710
Beyond Widowhood: From Bereavement
to Emergence and Hope, 2158
Biathanatos, 2120
Biblical Perspectives on Death, 391
A Bibliography of Books on Death,
Bereavement, Loss, and Grief: 1935-
1968, 116
A Bibliography of Books on Death,
Bereavement, Loss, and Grief: 1968-
1972, 117
Bibliography of the Thanatology
Literature, 119
A Bibliography on Death, Grief, and
Bereavement II, 1975-1980, 112
Bibliography on Grief: Your Guide to the
Right Resources to Cope with Loss and
Death, 134
Bibliography on Suicide and Suicide
Prevention: 1897-1957; 1958-1967,
108
A Bioethical Perspective on Death and
Dying, 879
Bioethical Problems: Death and Social
Responsibility, 856
The Biology of Death: A Series of Lectures
Delivered at the Lowell Institute in
Boston in December 1920, 2026
Biopsychosocial Aspects of Bereavement,
1678
The Bird of My Loving: A Personal
Response to Loss and Grief, 1373
Birth to Death: Science and Bioethics, 897
Bitter, Bitter Tears: Nineteenth-Century
Diarists and Twentieth-Century Grief
Theories, 1348
Black Grief and Soul Therapy, 404
Black Suicide, 416
Blessed Are Those Who Mourn:
Comforting Catholics in Their Time of
Grief, 1892
Blessed Grieving: Reflections on Life’s
Losses, 1191
Blessing the Bridge: What Animals Teach
Us about Death, Dying, and Beyond,
526
Body, Mind, and Death, 983
The Book of Eulogies: A Collection of
Memorial Tributes, Poetry, Essays, and
Letters of Condolence, 2092
The Book of the Dead: An English
Translation of the Chapters, Hymns,
Etc., of the Theban Recension, with
Introduction, Notes, Etc., 2062
Books to Help Children Cope with
Separation and Loss, 107
Books to Help Children Cope with
Separation and Loss: An Annotated
Bibliography, 228
A Boy Thirteen: Reflections on Death, 15
 Title Index
Brain Death: Ethical Considerations, 904
Breaking the Silence: A Guide to Help
Children with Complicated Grief–
Suicide, Homicide, AIDS, Violence,
and Abuse, 164
A Brief History of Death, 1456
Brief Interventions with Bereaved
Children, 206
The Broken Connection: On Death and
the Continuity of Life, 1950
A Broken Heart Still Beats: After Your
Child Dies, 597
Buried Alive: The Terrifying History of
Our Most Primal Fear, 916
The Buried Soul: How Humans Invented
Death, 1481
But Not to Lose: A Book of Comfort for
Those Bereaved, 1240
But Won’t Granny Need Her Socks?:
Dealing Effectively with Children’s
Concerns about Death and Dying,
184
Canadian Guide to Death and Dying, 478
Can You Hear Me Smiling?: A Child
Grieves a Sister, 174
Cardinal Bernardin’s Stations of the
Cross: Transforming Our Grief and
Loss into New Life, 1224
Care for the Dying and the Bereaved,
1178
Care for the Dying: Resources of
Theology, 1891
Caregiving and Loss: Family Needs,
Professional Responses, 1158
Caregiving: Hospice-Proven Techniques
for Healing Body and Soul, 1585
Caregiving in the Community Hospital for
the Terminally Ill and Bereaved, 2057
The Care of the Aged, Dying, and Dead,
1092
The Care of the Aged, the Dying, and the
Dead, 1017
Care of the Child Facing Death, 556
Care of the Dying (Lamerton), 732
Care of the Dying (Saunders), 1067
Care of the Dying Child, 576
331
Care of the Dying Child: A Practical
Guide for Those Who Help Others, 555
Care of the Dying Patient: A Comparison
of Instructional Plans, 2042
Care of the Terminally Ill: The Hospice
Concept, 1500
Caring for a Dying Relative: A Guide for
Families, 660
Caring for Dying Children and Their
Families, 580
Caring for Dying People of Different
Faiths, 450
Caring for Life and Death, 53
Caring for Patients at the End of Life:
Facing an Uncertain Future Together,
2031
Caring for the Dead: Your Final Act of
Love, 316
Caring for the Dying: Critical Issues at
the Edge of Life, 308
Caring for the Dying Patient and
His Family: A Model for Medical
Education-Medical Center
Conferences, 2015
Caring for the Dying Patient and the
Family, 769
Caring Relationships: The Dying and the
Bereaved, 712
Carpe Diem: Enjoying Every Day with a
Terminal Illness, 740
Casebook on the Termination of Life-
Sustaining Treatment and the Care of
the Dying, 1754
Ca$h for the Final Days: A Financial
Guide for the Terminally Ill and Their
Advisors, 1652
Catastrophic Diseases: Who Decides
What?, 867
Catastrophic Diseases: Who Decides
What? A Psychosocial and Legal
Analysis of the Problems Posed
by Hemodialysis and Organ
Transplantation, 1633
Causes of Death, 761
A Celebration of Death, 66
Celebrations of Death: The Anthropology
of the Mortuary Ritual, 2070
332 Title Index
The Center for Bioethics and Human
Dignity Presents Dignity and Dying: A
Christian Appraisal, 868
Cerebral Death, 2051
A Challenge for Living: Dying, Death, and
Bereavement, 956
The Chances of Surviving Death (Ingersall
Lecture, 1932), 1706
The Changing Face of Death: Historical
Accounts of Death and Disposal, 1469
Changing Ways of Death in Twentieth-
Century Australia: War, Medicine, and
the Funeral Business, 422
The Chemistry of Death, 979
Chicken Soup for the Grieving Soul:
Stories about Life, Death, and
Overcoming the Loss of a Loved One,
1129
The Child and Death (Grollman), 168
The Child and Death (Sahler), 615
The Child and Death (Schowalter et al.),
619
The Child and the Mystery of Death,
571
A Child Dies: A Portrait of Family Grief,
545
Childhood and Death, 253
Childhood Bereavement and Its Aftermath,
136
Childhood Bereavement: Developing the
Curriculum and Pastoral Support, 178
The Child in His Family: The Impact of
Disease and Death, 544
Children and Death, 217
Children and Death: Perspectives from
Birth through Adolescence, 618
Children and Dying: An Exploration and
a Selective Professional Bibliography,
559
Children and Grief: Big Issues for Little
Hearts, 169
Children and Grief: When a Parent Dies,
264
Children and the Death of a President:
Multidisciplinary Studies, 262
Children Are Not Paper Dolls: A Visit
with Bereaved Siblings (Levy), 199
Children Are Not Paper Dolls: A Visit
with Bereaved Siblings (Linn), 2108
Children, Bereavement, and Trauma:
Nurturing Resilience, 138
Children Die, Too, 582
Children Facing Grief, 225
Children Mourning, Mourning Children,
149
Children’s Conceptions of Aging and
Death, 71
Children’s Experience with Death, 265
Children’s Fears, 176
Children’s Literature: An Issues
Approach, 227
The Child’s Attitude toward Death, 90
The Child’s Conception of Physical
Casualty, 1692
The Child’s Discovery of Death: A Study
in Child Psychology, 137
A Child’s Parent Dies: Studies in
Childhood Bereavement, 162
A Child’s View of Grief: A Guide for
Parents, Teachers, and Counselors,
257
Chinese American Death Rituals:
Respecting the Ancestors, 401
Chinese Americans in Loss and
Separation: Social, Medical, and
Psychiatric Perspectives, 400
Choices at the End of Life: Finding Out
What Your Parents Want before It’s
Too Late, 1835
The Choice: Seasons of Loss and Renewal
after a Father’s Decision to Die, 851
Choices for Living: Coping with Fear of
Dying, 922
Choices: For People Who Have a
Terminal Illness, Their Families, and
Their Caregivers, 385
A Chosen Death: The Dying Confront
Assisted Suicide, 891
The Christian Way of Death, 706
Chronic and Terminal Illness: New
Perspectives on Caring and Carers,
757
Chronic Illness and the Quality of Life,
796
 Title Index
The Chronic Pain Solution: The
Comprehensive, Step-by-Step Guide to
Choosing the Best of Alternative and
Conventional Medicine, 1756
Chronic Sorrow: A Living Loss, 1346
Cicely Saunders: Founder of the Hospice
Movement, Selected Letters, 1959-
1999, 1578
Cicely Saunders, Founder of the Modern
Hospice Movement, 1513
The Circle of Life: A Search for an
Attitude to Pain, Disease, Old Age, and
Death, 101
A Clinical Decision Guide to Symptom
Relief in Palliative Care, 1787
Clinical Dimensions of Anticipatory
Mourning: Theory and Practice in
Working with the Dying, Their Loved
Ones, and Their Caregivers, 1334
Clinical Management of Bereavement:
A Handbook for Healthcare
Professionals, 1985
Clinical Protocols for Care of Hospice
Patients: An Interdisciplinary
Approach, 1535
Closer to the Light: Learning from the
Near-Death Experiences of Children,
1708
Close to the Bone: Life-Threatening
Illness and the Search for Meaning,
1914
A Collection of Near-Death Research
Readings: Scientific Inquiries into the
Experiences of Persons Near-Physical
Death, 1703
Come Phoenix Word: An Account of a
Woman’s Journey and Struggle for
Consciousness during a Terminal
Illness: Journal and Writings of
Joan Lyon Gibbon, 1924-1987,
672
Come the End: Instructions for Young
People on the Last Things, 235
Comfort and Care in a Final Illness:
Support for the Patient and Caregiver,
723
Comfort for Those Who Mourn, 1104
333
Comforting Those Who Grieve: A Guide
for Helping Others, 1267
The Comfort of Home: An Illustrated Step-
by-Step Guide for Caregivers, 359
Coming Home: A Guide to Dying at Home
with Dignity, 664
Coming to Terms with Death: How to
Face the Inevitable with Wisdom and
Dignity, 321
Communicating Issues in Thanatology,
2123
Communications and Thanatology,
2122
Communication with the Fatally Ill, 301
The Community Hospital and Its
Expanding Role in Thanatology,
2140
Companions for the Passage: Stories of
the Intimate Privilege of Accompanying
the Dying, 776
Companion through the Darkness: Inner
Dialogues on Grief, 1166
A Comparison of Attitudes of Associate
Degree Student Nurses Caring for the
Dying Patient before and after Death
Education, 512
Compassion and Courage in the Aftermath
of Traumatic Loss: Stones in My Heart
Forever, 1110
Compassionate Cities: Public Health and
End-of-Life Care, 2011
A Compilation of Studies of Attitudes
toward Death, Funerals, and Funeral
Directors: Participated in by the
Clergy, the Public, Including Critical
Segments Thereof, Funeral Directors,
72
The Complete Hospice Guide, 1498
The Complete Idiot’s Guide to Near-Death
Experience, 1696
Complicated Grieving and Bereavement:
Understanding and Treating People
Experiencing Loss, 1141
A Comprehensive Bibliography of the
Thanatology Literature, 119
Concerning Death: A Practical Guide for
the Living, 996
334 Title Index
Confrontations on Death: A Book of
Readings and a Suggested Method of
Instruction, 530
Confronting Death, 331
Confronting Death: Values, Institutions,
and Human Mortality, 1052
Considering Alan Ball: Essays on
Sexuality, Death, and America in the
Television and Film Writings, 1684
Consolation: The Spiritual Journey
beyond Grief, 1245
A Constant Burden, 1085
Constructing Death: The Sociology of
Dying and Bereavement, 1369
A Constructive Approach to Terminal
Illness (Brauer), 635
A Constructive Approach to Terminal
Illness (National Cancer Foundation),
94
The Consumer’s Guide to Death, Dying,
and Bereavement, 1648
Contemporary Issues in the Sociology of
Death, Dying, and Disposal, 418
Continuing Bonds: New Understandings
of Grief, 1228
Continuing Care for the Dying Patient,
Family, and Staff, 1990
The Continuing Care of Terminal Cancer
Patients, 1796
Contributions to Psychiatry, Education of
the Health Professional, Thanatology,
and Ethical Values, 1672
Conversations at Midnight: Coming to
Terms with Dying and Death, 84
Conversations with a Dying Friend
(Carmody), 272
Conversations with a Dying Friend
(Coute), 274
Coping: A Survival Manual for Women
Alone, 2208
The Coping Capacity: On the Nature of
Being Mortal, 1420
Coping Skills Therapy for Managing
Chronic and Terminal Illness, 375
Coping with Bereavement, 1284
Coping with Bereavement from Death or
Divorce, 1192
Coping with Death (Gaughen), 1177
Coping with Death (Raab), 1064
Coping with Death and Dying: An
Interdisciplinary Approach, 1986
Coping with Death and Grief, 170
Coping with Death in the Family, 1365
Coping with Death on Campus, 542
Coping with Dying: A Study of Patient
and Family Interaction in Terminal
Illness, 296
Coping with Grief, 1128
Coping with Grieving and Loss, 10
Coping with Loss, 1313
Coping with Loss and Grief, 1180
Coping with Loss and Grief through
Online Support Groups, 1176
Coping with Personal Losses, 248
Coping with Public Tragedy, 346
Coping with Separation and Loss as a
Young Adult: Theoretical and Practical
Realities, 17
Coping with the Death of a Brother or
Sister, 2110
Coping with the Final Tragedy: Cultural
Variation in Dying and Grieving, 405
Coping with Tragedy: Successfully Facing
the Problem of a Seriously Ill Child,
620
Coping with Workplace Grief: Dealing
with Loss, Trauma, and Change, 1216
Corpses, Coffins, and Crypts: A History of
Burial, 1452
The Cost of Dying and What You Can Do
about It, 628
Counseling Children and Adolescents
through Grief and Loss, 157
Counseling for Grief and Bereavement,
2009
Counseling in Terminal Care and
Bereavement, 2025
Counseling Older Persons: Careers,
Retirement, Dying, 55
Counseling Skills in Palliative Care, 1755
Counseling the Bereaved, 1993
Counseling the Dying, 1981
Counseling the Terminally Ill: Sharing the
Journey, 2018
 Title Index
Counselor Responses to Death and Dying:
Guidelines for Training, 1974
The Courage to Grieve: Creative Living,
Recovery, and Growth, 1403
The Courage to Laugh: Humor, Hope,
and Healing in the Face of Death and
Dying, 82
Crafting a Crazy Quilt: Four Teachers
Piece Together Death in a School
Context, 208
The Craft of Dying: The Modern Face of
Death, 737
Creating Meaningful Funeral Ceremonies:
A Guide for Caregivers, 2094
Creating Meaningful Funeral Services: A
Guide for Families, 2095
Creativity in Death Education and
Counseling, 493
Cremation, 2071
A Critical Examination of the Belief in a
Life after Death, 824
A Cross-Cultural Look at Death, Dying,
and Religion, 455
A Cross-Index of Indices of Books of
Thanatology, 118
Crossing Over: Narratives of Palliative
Care, 1744
Crossing the Bridge: Creating Ceremonies
for Grieving and Healing from Life’s
Losses, 2082
Cry for Help, 1188
The Cry for Help, 329
Cultural Changes in Attitudes toward
Death, Dying, and Bereavement, 414
Cultural Issues in End-of-Life Decision
Making, 394
The Culture of Death, 925
Current Widowhood: Myths and Realities,
2180
Cuttin’ the Body Loose: Historical,
Biological, and Personal Approaches
to Death and Dying, 1933
Dancing in My Nightgown: The Rhythms
of Widowhood, 2144
Dancing on the Grave, 1449
335
Dancing with Broken Bones: Portraits of
Death and Dying among Inner-City
Poor, 441
Dancing with Mr. D: Notes on Life and
Death, 1027
Day by Day, 787
The Day My Father Died: Women Share
Their Stories of Love, Loss, and Life,
1803
Dead but Not Lost: Grief Narratives in
Religious Traditions, 412
Dead Reckoning: A Therapist Confronts
His Own Grief, 1409
Dealing Creatively with Death: A Manual
of Death Education and Simple Burial,
2083
Dealing with Death, 323
Dealing with Death: A Four-Week Course
to Help Junior Highers Explore Their
Feelings about Death, 27
Dealing with Death and Dying, 949
Dealing with Death and Dying: A Nursing
Skillbook, 1726
Dealing with Death: A Strategy for
Tragedy, 342
Dealing with Death: Discussions of Death
Presented for Those Concerned with
the Delivery of Care Service for the
Elderly, 33
Dealing with Grief, 1437
Dealing with Grief and Loss: Hope in the
Midst of Pain, 1144
Dealing with Terminal Illness in the
Family, 387
Dear Gift of Life: A Man’s Encounter with
Death, 378
Death (Ball), 2061
Death (Maeterlinck), 1047
Death (Sprung), 243
Death (Spurgeon), 1080
Death (Stewart), 246
Death (Watts), 811
Death: A Bibliographical Guide, 123
Death: A Book of Preparation and
Consolation, 1083
Death, Afterlife, and Eschatology, 825
336 Title Index
Death: An Anthropological Perspective,
1058
Death and Afterlife: Perspectives of World
Religions, 1610
Death and Attitudes toward Death, 67
Death and Bereavement, 1035
Death and Bereavement across Cultures,
454
Death and Bereavement: A Halakhic
Guide, 479
Death and Bereavement around the
World: Asia, Australia, and New
Zealand (Volume 4), 443
Death and Bereavement around the world:
Death and Bereavement in Europe
(Volume 3), 444
Death and Bereavement around the
World: Death and Bereavement in the
Americas (Volume 2), 445
Death and Bereavement around the
World: Death and Bereavement in the
Emerging World, 442
Death and Bereavement around the World:
Major Religious Traditions, 446
Death and Beyond, 828
Death and Beyond in the Eastern
Perspective: A Study Based on the
Bardo Thodol and the I Ching, 435
Death and Burial in the Roman World,
1482
Death and Children: A Guide for
Educators, Parents, and Caregivers, 503
Death and Contemporary Man: The Crisis
of Terminal Illness, 641
Death and Decision, 355
Death and Denial: Interdisciplinary
Perspectives on the Legacy of Ernest
Becker, 1689
Death and Dignity, 370
Death and Dying (Donne), 970
Death and Dying (Kastenbaum),
1018
Death and Dying (Knox), 1029
Death and Dying (Peacock), 1326
Death and Dying (Sanders), 1066
Death and Dying: A Bibliographical
Survey, 131
Death and Dying: A Bibliography, 1950-
1974, 125
Death and Dying: A Bibliography (1974-
1978), 126
Death and Dying: A Guide for Serving
Adults with Mental Retardation, 1973
Death and Dying: A Living Study, 1002
Death and Dying: A Mediagraphy: An
Annotated Listing of Audiovisual
Materials, 127
Death and Dying among African
Americans: Cultural Characteristics
and Coping Tidbits, 398
Death and Dying: An Annotated
Bibliography, 128
Death and Dying: An Educational Module
for Special Educators, 238
Death and Dying: An Examination of
Legislative and Policy Issues, 1627
Death and Dying: A Quality of Life, 1063
Death and Dying: A Reader, 890
Death and Dying: A Resource
Bibliography for Clergy and Chaplains
(1960-1976), 124
Death and Dying: A Selective
Bibliography for Gerontology
Instruction, 115
Death and Dying, A to Z: A Loose-Leaf
Encyclopedic Handbook on Death and
Dying and Related Subjects, 935
Death and Dying: Attitudes of Patient and
Doctor, 76
Death and Dying: Challenge and Change,
989
Death and Dying: Current Issues in the
Treatment of the Dying Person, 1061
Death and Dying Education, 537
Death and Dying: From a Health and
Sociological Perspective, 981
Death and Dying from the Perspective of
the Caring Professions: A Curriculum
Model for the Local Church, 1862
Death and Dying in Central Appalachia:
Changing Attitudes and Practices, 406
Death and Dying in Children’s and Young
People’s Literature: A Survey and
Bibliography, 524
 Title Index
Death and Dying: Individuals and
Institutions, 931
Death and Dying in the Classroom:
Readings for Reference, 535
Death and Dying, Life and Living, 960
Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints
(Bender and Hagen), 848
Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints
(Haley), 998
Death and Dying: Opposing Viewpoints
(Winters), 1091
Death and Dying Sourcebook: Basic
Consumer Health Information for the
Layperson about End-of-Life Care and
Related Ethical and Legal Issues, 1640
Death and Dying, Spirituality, and
Religions: A Study of the Death
Awareness Movement, 395
Death and Dying: Theory, Research, and
Practice, 943
Death and Dying: The Tibetan Tradition,
447
Death and Dying Training in Counselor
Education Programs: A National
Study, 1995
Death and Dying: Understanding and
Care, 631
Death and Dying: Views from Many
Cultures, 426
Death and Dying: Who Decides? (Alters),
842
Death and Dying: Who Decides? (Landes
and Blair), 872
Death and Dying: Who Decides?
(Snyder), 894
Death and Eastern Thought:
Understanding Death in Eastern
Religions and Philosophies, 1465
Death and Eternal Life (Hick), 832
Death and Eternal Life (Simpson), 838
Death and Ethnicity: A Psychocultural
Study, 427
Death and Friends, 307
Death and Grief: A Guide for Clergy,
1911
Death and Grief and the Family, 1193
Death and Grief: Healing through
Support, 1379
337
Death and Hope, 315
Death and Identity, 990
Death and Illness, 204
Death and Immortality (Perrett), 1613
Death and Immortality (Phillips), 1614
Death and Immortality (Pieper), 1615
Death and Its Mysteries, 1041
Death and Its Mystery before Death, 1926
Death and Life (D’Arcy and Gurrin), 962
Death and Life (Thielicke), 1901
Death and Life in the Tenth Century, 1458
Death and Loss: Compassionate
Approaches in the Classroom, 513
Death and Medical Conduct, 1982
Death and Ministry: Pastoral Care of the
Dying and the Bereaved, 1851
Death and Modern Man, 951
Death and Mourning, 1351
Death and Neurosis, 1668
Death and Presence: Studies in the
Psychology of Religion, 827
Death and Sensuality: A Study of
Eroticism and the Taboo, 1680
Death and Sleep: Their Analogy
Illustrated by Examples, 1464
Death and Society: A Book of Readings
and Sources, 491
Death and Spirituality, 969
Death and Sudden Death, 941
Death and the Adolescent: A Resource
Handbook for Bereavement Support
Groups in Schools, 2
Death and the Afterlife: A Cultural
Encyclopedia, 475
Death and the Arc of Meaning in African
American Literature, 477
Death and the Caring Community, 1883
Death and the College Student, 1076
Death and the Creative Life:
Conversations with Prominent Artists
and Scientists, 75
Death and the Curriculum, 484
Death and the Dead for Fun and Profit:
Thanatological Entertainment as
Popular Culture, 1682
Death and the Family: The Importance of
Mourning, 1329
Death and Then What?, 1879
338 Title Index
Death and the Quest for Meaning: Essays
in Honor of Herman Feifel, 1965
Death and the Regeneration of Life, 936
Death and the Right Hand, 1935
Death and the Sexes: An Examination
of Differential Longevity, Attitudes,
Behaviors, and Coping Skills, 100
Death and the Supreme Court, 1643
Death and the Visual Arts: An Original
Arno Press Anthology, 1019
Death and Trauma: The Traumatology of
Grieving, 1168
Death and Western Thought, 1917
Death, a New Perspective on the
Phenomena of Disease and Dying, 725
Death: An Interdisciplinary Analysis, 1963
Death Anxiety, 86
Death Anxiety Handbook: Research,
Instrumentation, and Application, 95
Death Anxiety of Perinatal Nurses: The
Relationship to Death Education and
Death Exposure, 483
Death, a Part of Life: An Experimental
Unit, 521
Death around the World, 465
Death as a Fact of Life, 1004
Death as an Enemy According to Ancient
Egyptian Conceptions, 1486
Death as a Speculative Theme in
Religious, Scientific, and Social
Thought: An Original Anthology, 1020
Death: A Teacher’s Guide, 520
Death Attitudes and the Older Adult:
Theories, Concepts, and Applications,
58
Death: A User’s Guide, 1005
Death 101: A Workbook for Educating
and Healing, 1304
Deathbed Observations by Physicians and
Nurses, 2024
Death-Bed Scenes, 2096
Death, Bereavement, and Mourning, 1003
Death, Brain Death, and Ethics, 871
Death, Burial, and the Individual in Early
Modern England, 1463
Death: Confronting the Reality, 1880
Death: Coping with the Pain, 16
Death: Current Perspectives, 1075
Death Customs, 2088
The Death Decision, 1054
Death Deferred: How to Live Long and
Happily, Defer Death, and Lose All
Fear of It, 917
Death Descending, 640
Death, Dying, and Bereavement, 968
Death, Dying, and Bereavement: An
Insight for Carers, 1074
Death, Dying, and Euthanasia, 863
Death, Dying, and Grief: A Bibliography,
113
Death, Dying, and Social Differences,
1057
Death, Dying, and Society, 1055
Death, Dying, and Terminal Illness, 937
Death, Dying, and the Biological
Revolution: Our Last Quest for
Responsibility, 902
Death, Dying, and the Law (McHugh),
1636
Death, Dying, and the Law (McLean),
1637
Death, Dying, Transcending, 1013
Death Education, 497
Death Education: A Concern for the
Living, 500
Death Education: An Annotated Resource
Guide, 539
Death Education and Counseling: A
Training Manual, 498
Death Education and Death Anxiety in
Student Nurse Aides, 508
Death Education as Part of Family
Life Education: Using Imaginative
Literature for Insights into Family
Crises, 532
Death Education: A Survey and Study of
Colleges and Universities, 485
Death Education: Attitudes of Teachers,
School Board Members, and Clergy,
494
Death Education for the Health
Professional, 1977
Death Education II: An Annotated
Resource Guide, 538
 Title Index
Death Education in Canada: Survey,
Curricula, Protocols, Bibliography,
519
Death Education: Preparation for Living,
502
Death Education Resource Book, 489
Death: End of the Beginning?, 1953
Death Etiquette for the 90s: What to Do,
What to Say, 280
Death: Everyone’s Heritage, 192
Death, Fate, and the Gods: The
Development of a Religious Idea in
Greek Popular Belief and in Homer,
1919
Death, Gender, and Ethnicity, 409
Death, Grief and Bereavement: A
Bibliography, 1845-1975, 110
Death, Grief, and Bereavement: A
Chronological Bibliography, 1843-
1970, 111
Death, Grief, and Bereavement II: A
Bibliography, 1975-1980, 112
Death, Grief, and Caring Relationships,
1014
Death, Grief, and Mourning, 1184
Death, Grief, and Mourning in
Contemporary Britain, 411
Death, Grief, and Mourning: Individual
and Social Realities, 1082
Death, Grief, Mourning, the Funeral, and
the Child, 191
Death: Grim Realities and Comic Relief,
954
Death, Heaven, and the Victorians, 1475
Death Imagery: Confronting Death Brings
Us to the Threshold of Life, 97
Death in America, 99
Death in American Experience, 1474
Death in Black and White: Death, Ritual,
and Family Ecology, 439
The Death in Every Now, 1956
Deathing: An Intelligent Alternative for
the Final Moments of Life, 1700
Death in Other Words, 1084
Death in Our Lives and Thoughts, 80
Death Inside Out: The Hastings Center
Report, 1081
339
Death: Interpretations by Dell, 1961
Death in the Classroom: A Resource
Book for Teachers and Others,
499
A Death in the Family, 928
Death in the Middle Ages: Mortality,
Judgment, and Remembrance, 1450
Death in the Midst of Life: Social and
Cultural Influences on Death, Grief,
and Mourning, 428
Death in the Operating Room, 1980
Death in the Public Scene, Facing the
1990s: Papers and Addresses of
ADEC’s 1989 Conference, 490
Death in the School Community: A
Handbook for Counselors, Teachers,
and Administrators, 215
Death Is a Kind of Love, 1931
Death Is All Right, 1846
Death Is a Miracle, 1044
Death Is a Noun: A View of the End of
Life, 1037
Death Is Hard to Live With: Teenagers
Talk about How They Cope with Loss,
3
Death Is Natural, 220
Death Is of Vital Importance: On Life,
Death, and Life after Death, 2126
Death: Its Causes and Phenomena with
Special Reference to Immortality,
1600
Death: Meaning and Mortality in
Christian Thought and Contemporary
Culture, 1932
Death Meanings, 1968
Death: Medical, Spiritual, and Social
Care of the Dying, 1015
Death, Mourning, and Burial: A Cross-
Cultural Reader, 464
Death, Mourning, and Caring, 1048
Death of a Man, 1087
Death of a Mother: Daughters’ Stories,
1802
The Death of an Adult Child: A Book for
and about Bereaved Parents, 1114
The Death of a Parent in Midlife: Coping
Strategies, 1833
340 Title Index
The Death of a Parent: Reflections for
Adults Mourning the Loss of a Father
or Mother, 1814
Death of a Parent: Transition to a New
Adult Identity, 1841
A Death of One’s Own, 350
Death on the Installment Plan, 325
Death out of the Closet: A Curriculum
Guide to Living with Dying, 792
Death: Philosophical Soundings, 1924
Death, Property, and Lawyers: A
Behavioral Approach, 1647
Death Rites: Law and Ethics at the End of
Life, 1634
Death, Ritual, and Bereavement, 1467
Death Row Chaplain, 1861
Death, Sacrifice, and Tragedy, 1928
Death’s Door: Modern Dying and the
Ways We Grieve, 993
Death Shall Have No Dominion (Holden),
1865
Death Shall Have No Dominion
(McBride), 18
Death, Society, and Human Experience,
1021
The Deaths of Man, 1964
Death’s Single Privacy: Grieving and
Personal Growth, 2192
Death Strain, 319
Death: The Coping Mechanism of the
Health Professional, 2005
Death: The Doorway to the Future, 665
Death, the Experience, 745
Death: The Final Frontier, 1000
Death: The Final Stage of Growth,
1031
Death: The Glorious Adventure, 995
Death, the Press, and the Public, 275,
288
Death: The Riddle and the Mystery, 1940
Death: The Trip of a Lifetime, 453
Death to Dust: What Happens to Dead
Bodies?, 2074
Death Warmed Over, 985
Death Week: Exploring the Dying
Process, 763
A Death with Dignity, 380
Death with Dignity: A New Law
Permitting Physician Aid-in-Dying,
885
Death with Dignity: An Inquiry into
Related Public Issues, 900
Death with Dignity: A Reply to “On Dying
Well,” 893
Death without Denial, Grief without
Apology: A Guide for Facing Death
and Loss, 2195
Death without End, 994
Death without Notice, 795
A Decembered Grief: Living with Loss
While Others Are Celebrating, 1380
Deciding to Forego Life-Sustaining
Treatment: A Report on the Ethical,
Medical, and Legal Issues in Treatment
Decisions, 1641
Decision for Death: Simulation of a
Societal Consensus Group, 525
Defining Death: Medical, Legal, and
Ethical Issues in the Determination of
Death, 1642
The Denial of Death, 913
Describing Death in America: What We
Need to Know, 514
Design for Death, 1687
Despair and the Return of Hope: Echoes
of Mourning in Psychotherapy, 1675
Determination of Death: Theological,
Medical, Ethical, and Legal Issues,
1639
The Development and Validation of a
Knowledge Test of Death and Dying
for College Students, 496
Development of the National Home and
Hospice Care Survey, 1529
Devils, Demons, Death, and Damnation,
85, 1472
Dialogues: The Dying and the Living, 289
Diary of Courage: Coping with Life-
Threatening Illness, 762
Different Losses, Different Issues: What to
Expect and How to Help, 1195
Dilemmas of Dying: A Study in the Ethics
of Terminal Care, 898
Dimensions of Dying and Rebirth, 682
 Title Index
Dimensions of Grief: Adjusting to the
Death of a Spouse, 2198
Dimensions of Loss and Death Education:
A Resource and Curriculum Guide,
541
Disaster: A Psychological Essay, 1694
Discovering Grace in Grief, 1280
The Discovery of Death in Childhood and
After, 137
Discussing Death: A Guide to Death
Education, 518
Disenfranchised Grief: New Directions,
Challenges, and Strategies for
Practice, 1155
Disenfranchised Grief: Recognizing
Hidden Sorrow, 1994
Dissertation on the Disorder of Death:
The State of the Frame under the Signs
of Death Called Suspended Animation,
1693
Distance and the Dying Patient, 633
The Doctor and the Dying Patient, 1989
The Doctor as Judge of Who Shall Live
and Who Shall Die, 896
Doctor Death: Medicine at the End of
Life, an Exhibition at the Wellcome
Institute for the History of Medicine,
1972
The Dominion of the Dead, 1001
Don’t Despair on Thursdays!: The
Children’s Grief Management Book,
210
Don’t Let Death Ruin Your Life: A
Practical Guide to Reclaiming
Happiness after the Death of a Loved
One, 1123
Don’t Take My Grief Away from Me, 1268
Doors Close, Doors Open: Widows,
Grieving, and Growing, 2177
Do the Terminally Ill Have a Right to
Die?, 907
The Dougy Letter: A Letter to a Dying
Child, 590
The Drama of Love and Death, 317
Drawings from a Dying Child: Insights
into Death from a Jungian Perspective,
550
341
Dreads and Besetting Fears, 926
Dreaming beyond Death: A Guide to
Predeath Dreams and Visions, 1699
Dry Those Tears, 1352
Dying, 702
Dying: A Book of Comfort, 744
Dying: A Guide for Helping and Coping,
786
Dying and Death: A Clinical Guide for
Caregivers, 311
Dying and Death: A Resource for
Christian Reflection, 1905
Dying and Death: Coping, Caring, and
Understanding, 363
Dying and Death in Canada, 451
Dying and Death in Law and Medicine: A
Forensic Primer for Health and Legal
Professionals, 849
Dying and Death: Perspectives on the
Role of the Financial and Estate
Planner: A New Compensable Service,
1645
Dying and Dignity: The Meaning and
Control of a Personal Death, 661
Dying and Disabled Children: Dealing
with Loss and Grief, 566
Dying and Grief: Nursing Interventions,
1729
The Dying and the Bereaved Teenager,
21
Dying: A Psychoanalytic Study with
Special Reference to Individual
Creativity and Defensive Organization,
688
Dying at Home, 651
Dying at Home: A Family Guide for
Caregiving, 374
Dying at Home with Cancer, 720
Dying at Home with Hospice, 1502
The Dying Child, 577
The Dying Child: An Annotated
Bibliography, 106
The Dying Child, the Family, and the
Health Professionals, 594
The Dying Child: The Management of the
Child or Adolescent Who Is Dying, 569
Dying, Death, and Bereavement, 929
342 Title Index
Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A
Challenge for Living, 957
Dying, Death, and Bereavement:
Continuities, Changes, and
Challenges: Papers from ADEC’s 1990
Conference, 516
Dying, Death, and Bereavement:
Theoretical Perspectives and Other
Ways of Knowing, 958
Dying, Death, and Disposal, 955
Dying, Death, and Grief: A Critically
Annotated Bibliography and Source
Book of Thanatology and Terminal
Care, 130
Dying Declarations: Notes from a Hospice
Volunteer, 1573
Dying Dignified: The Health
Professional’s Guide to Care, 2002
Dying: Facing the Facts, 808
Dying, Grieving, Faith, and Family: A
Pastoral Care Approach, 1853
Dying in an Institution: Nurse/Patient
Perspectives, 644
Dying in the Human Life Cycle:
Psychological, Biomedical, and Social
Perspectives, 790
Dying of Cancer: The Final Year of Life,
719
The Dying Patient (Brim et al.), 1983
The Dying Patient (Twycross), 801
The Dying Patient: A Nursing Perspective,
1720
The Dying Patient: A Supportive
Approach, 645
The Dying Patient in Psychotherapy:
Desire, Dreams, and Individuation,
1670
The Dying Patient: The Medical
Management of Incurable and
Terminal Illness, 2055
The Dying Patient: The Role of the Family
Doctor, Nurse, and Medical Social
Worker, 2035
The Dying Person and the Family,
328
The Dying Process: Patients’ Experiences
of Palliative Care, 1776
Dying Right: The Death with Dignity
Movement, 862
The Dying Soul: Spiritual Care at the End
of Life, 1855
The Dying Time: Practical Wisdom for the
Dying and Their Caregivers, 330
Dying Unafraid, 921
Dying Was the Best Thing That Ever
Happened to Me: Stories of Healing
and Wisdom along Life’s Journey, 687
Dying We Live, 677
Dying We Live: The Final Messages and
Records of the Resistance, 678
Dying Well, 803
Dying Well: A Holistic Guide for the
Dying and Their Carers, 371
Dying Well: The Prospect for Growth at
the End-of-Life, 639
Dying with Dignity: A Plea for Personal
Responsibility, 870
The Dynamics of Grief: Its Sources, Pain,
and Healing, 1397
An Easeful Death?: Perspectives on
Death, Dying, and Euthanasia, 878
Education of the Medical Student in
Thanatology, 2137
The Effectiveness of a Death Education
Program on Children’s Knowledge and
Attitudes toward Death, 488
The Effect of the Death Education Film
“In My Memory” on Elementary
School Students in the La Crosse
Wisconsin Public Schools, 495
The Effects of Chronic and Terminal
Illness on the Family, 357
The Effects of Early Parent Death, 1809
Elders: The Need for Death Education,
506
Element Guide to Bereavement: Your
Questions Answered, 1272
Elisabeth Kübler-Ross and Josefina B.
Magno Present Hospice: A Handbook
for Families and Others Facing
Terminal Illness, 1518
Elisabeth Kübler-Ross: Encountering
Death and Dying, 817
 Title Index
Embarkations: A Guide to Dealing with
Death and Parting, 1375
Embracing Their Memory: Loss and the
Social Psychology of Storytelling, 1196
The Emerging Death Mystique: The
Challenge and the Promise, 63
Empowering the Laity in a Local Church
to Minister to the Dying, 1849
Empty Arms, 1415
The Empty Room: Surviving the Loss of a
Brother or Sister at Any Age, 2103
Encounter with Terminal Illness, 724
Encyclopedia of Death, 1024
Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, 1008
The Encyclopedia of Death and Dying,
948
Ending Life: Ethics and the Way We Die,
844
Endings: A Book about Death, 939
Endings: A Sociology of Death and Dying,
1026
The End Is Just the Beginning: Lessons in
Grieving for African Americans, 403
The End of Life: A Discussion at the
Nobel Conference, 52
End of Life Care: A Guide for Supporting
Older People with Intellectual
Disabilities and Their Families, 34
End-of-Life Care: Bridging Disability and
Aging with Person-Centered Care, 38
End-of-Life Care: Clinical Practice
Guidelines, 2014
End-of-Life Decisions: A Psychosocial
Perspective, 895
End of Life in Care Homes: A Palliative
Approach, 1771
End of Life Issues, 883
End of Life Issues: Interdisciplinary and
Multidimensional Perspectives, 965
End of Life Nursing Care, 1733
End-of-Life Stories: Crossing Disciplinary
Boundaries, 2124
Enduring Grief: True Stories of Personal
Loss, 1370
Epsilon Country, 2116
Eschatology and the Mission of
Christianity, 839
343
Eternity and Me: The Everlasting Things
in Life and Death, 1028
Ethical Decisions in Medicine, 850
Ethical Dilemmas at the End of Life,
854
Ethical Issues in Death and Dying
(Beauchamp and Perlin), 847
Ethical Issues in Death and Dying (Weir),
905
Ethical Issues in the Care of the Dying
and Bereaved Aged, 47
Ethics at the Edges of Life: Medical and
Legal Intersections, 884
Ethics in Hospice Care: Challenges to
Hospice Values in a Changing Health
Care Environment, 1539
The Ethics of Terminal Care:
Orchestrating the End of Life, 874
Ethnic Groups of America: Their
Morbidity, Mortality, and Behavior
Disorders, Volume I: The Jews,
469
Ethnic Variations in Dying, Death, and
Grief: Diversity in Universality,
420
Euthanasia and Other Aspects of Life and
Death, 886
Euthanasia and the Right to Die: A
Comparative View, 887
Euthanasia Is Not the Answer: A Hospice
Physician’s View, 1509
Euthanasia: The Good of the Patient, the
Good of Society, 877
Euthanasia: The Moral Issues, 843
Every Person’s Guide to Death and Dying
in the Jewish Tradition, 421
Everything You Need to Know about
Grieving, 1390
Everything You Need to Know When a
Parent Dies, 1811
Everything You Need to Know When
Someone You Know Has Been Killed,
1361
Evidence-Based Symptom Control in
Palliative Care: Systemic Reviews and
Validated Clinical Practice Guidelines
for Fifteen Common Problems in
344 Title Index
Patients with Life Limiting Disease,
1777
The Evidence for Life after Death, 1683
The Evil Eye, Thanatology, and Other
Essays, 2135
An Existential Understanding of Death:
A Phenomenology of Ontological
Anxiety, 1959
The Experience of Death: The Moral
Problem of Suicide, 1949
The Experience of Dying (Greinacher and
Muller), 680
The Experience of Dying (Pattison), 1060
Experiences Facing Death, 629
Experiences of Death: An Anthropological
Account, 1006
Experiencing Bereavement, 1098
Explaining Death to Children (Grollman),
278
Explaining Death to Children (Jackson),
283
An Exploration of Issues and Challenges
Surrounding the Marital Relationships
of Parents after the Death of a Child,
604
Expressions of Healing: Embracing the
Process of Grief, 1187
Faces of Death: Grief, Dying, Euthanasia,
Suicide, 860
Facing Death (Kavanaugh), 341
Facing Death (Magee), 741
Facing Death and Finding Hope: A Guide
to the Emotional and Spiritual Care of
the Dying, 738
Facing Death and Grief: A Sensible
Perspective for the Modern Person,
1274
Facing Death and Loss, 1056
Facing Death and the Life After, 679
Facing Death: Images, Insights, and
Interventions: A Handbook for
Educators, Healthcare Professionals,
and Counselors, 932
Facing Death: Where Culture, Religion,
and Medicine Meet, 472
Facing Grief and Death, 1410
Facing It: AIDS Diaries and the Death of
the Author, 646
Facing Life Alone, 1132
Facing Terminal Illness, 758
Facing the “King of Terrors”: Death and
Society in an American Community,
1750-1990, 1484
Facing the Ultimate Loss: Coping with the
Death of a Child, 596
Factbook on Man from Birth to Death,
972
The Facts of Death, 1079
Fading Away: The Experience of
Transition in Families with Terminal
Illness, 322
Families and Life-Threatening Illness,
347
Families and the Gravely Ill: Roles, Rules,
and Rights, 892
Families Facing Death: Family Dynamics
of Terminal Illness, 773
Families Making Sense of Death, 361
The Family Book of Hospice Care, 1520
The Family Caregiver’s Journal: A Guide
to Facing the Terminal Illness of a
Loved One, 637
Family Grief Therapy, 1226
The Family in Mourning: A Guide for
Health Professionals, 2007
Fatherless Sons: Healing the Legacy of
Loss, 1818
Fatherless Women: How We Change after
We Lose Our Dads, 1838
Father Loss: Daughters Discuss the Man
Who Got Away, 1842
Fearful Living: The Fear of Death, 924
Fear No Evil: One Man Deals with
Terminal Illness, 810
The Fear of the Dead in Primitive
Religion, 919
Fear of the Unknown: Enlightened Aid-in-
Dying, 914
Fears Related to Death and Suicide, 918
A Few Months to Live: Different Paths to
Life’s End, 794
Films on Death and Dying, 1690
The Final Act of Living, 1632
 Title Index
Final Choices: To Live or to Die in an
Age of Medical Technology, 638
Final Days: Japanese Culture and Choice
at the End of Life, 438
Final Departures: Weird and Wonderful
Tales of Death, Funerals, and
Bereavement from around the World,
408
Final Exam, 1749
Final Exit: The Practicalities of Self-
Deliverance and Assisted Suicide for
the Dying, 865
Final Gifts: Understanding the Special
Awareness Needs and Communications
of the Dying, 271
The Final Goodbye: The Struggle to Self-
Awareness, 1843
The Final 48 Hours: Observations on the
Last Days of Life, 782
The Final Mystery, 430
The Final Transition, 713
Final Victory: Taking Charge of the Last
Stages of Life, Facing Death on Your
Own Terms, 1785
Finding Hope When a Child Dies: What
Other Cultures Can Teach Us, 599
Finding My Way: Healing and
Transforming through Loss and Grief,
1364
Finding Your Way after Your Spouse Dies,
2160
First American Hospice: Three Years of
Home Care, 1547
First Person Mortal: Personal Narratives
of Dying, Death, and Grief, 940
The First Year Alone, 2163
The First Year of Bereavement, 1181
Focus on the End of Life: Scientific and
Social Issues, 1039
For Better or Worse: For Couples Whose
Child Has Died, 567
The Forgotten Mourners: Guidelines for
Working with Bereaved Children, 219
For the Bereaved, 1243
For the Bereaved: The Road to Recovery,
1241
For the Living, 2075
345
For the Living: Coping, Caring, and
Communicating with the Terminally
Ill, 277
For Those Bereaved: But Not to Lose: A
Book of Comfort, 1242
For Those Who Live: Helping Children
Cope with the Death of a Brother or
Sister, 2107
Fragile Lives: Death, Dying, and Care,
356
Fragments on the Deathwatch, 693
Frank Answers on Death, 505
Freedom and Death, 358
Freud: Living and Dying, 1962
Friendgrief: An Absence Called Presence,
1381
From Death to Mourning, 1429
From Grief to Gladness: Coming Back
from Widowhood, 2170
From Grief to Glory: Rediscovering Life
after Loss, 1354
From Grief to Glory: Spiritual Journeys of
Mourning Parents, 554
From Mourning to Morning: Discovering
the Healing Power of God’s Love to
Take You from Grief to Glory, 1355
From Mourning to Morning: Six Years
Later, 1133
From This World to the Next: Jewish
Approaches to Illness, Death, and the
Afterlife, 424
The Funeral and the Mourners: Pastoral
Care of the Bereaved, 1866
The Funeral: An Experience of Value,
2072
The Funeral Director and His Role as
Counselor, 2032
The Funeral Encyclopedia: A Source
Book, 2093
The Funeral: Facing Death as an
Experience of Life, 2086
The Funeral: Sourcebook for Ministers,
1852
The Funeral: Vestige or Value?, 2073
Gentle Closings: How to Say Goodbye to
Someone You Love, 293
346 Title Index
A Gentle Death: Personal Caregiving to
the Terminally Ill, 314
Geographic Patterns in the Risk of Dying
and Associated Factors, United States,
1968-1972, 778
Geriatrics and Thanatology, 51
Getting through the Night: Finding Your
Way after the Loss of a Loved One,
1332
Getting to the Other Side of Grief:
Overcoming the Loss of a Spouse,
2209
The Gift of Death, 1918
The Gift of Grief: Healing the Pain of
Everyday Losses, 1401
Gift of Tears: A Practical Approach to
Loss and Bereavement Counseling,
1251
Gifts for the Living: Conversations with
Caregivers on Death and Dying, 294
Gifts: Two Hospice Professionals Reveal
Messages from Those Passing On,
1582
Gili’s Book: A Journey into Bereavement
for Parents and Families, 585
Give Sorrow Words: A Father’s Passage
through Grief, 561
Give Sorrow Words: Perspectives on Loss
and Trauma, 1197
Give Sorrow Words: Working with a
Dying Child, 584
Giving a Voice to Sorrow: Personal
Responses to Death and Mourning,
1443
Giving Sorrow Words: How to Cope with
Grief and Get on with Your Life, 1258
God, Grass, and Grace: A Theology of
Death, 1894
Gone from My Sight: The Dying
Experience, 715
Good Answers to Tough Questions about
Death, 142
A Good Death: A Guide for Patients and
Carers Facing Terminal Illness at
Home, 348
A Good Death: Taking More Control at
the End of Your Life, 701
The Good Death: The New American
Search to Reshape the End of Life, 388
A Good Dying: Shaping Health Care for
the Last Months of Life, 695
Good End: End-of-Life Concerns and
Conversations about Hospice and
Palliative Care, 1491
Good Grief: A Constructive Approach to
the Problem of Loss, 1425
Good Grief: Experiencing Loss, 1248
Good Grief: Exploring Feelings, Loss, and
Death with over Elevens and Adults: A
Holistic Approach, 26
Good Grief: Exploring Feelings, Loss, and
Death with under Elevens: A Holistic
Approach, 252
Good Grief: Helping Groups of Children
When a Friend Dies, 160
Good Grief Rituals: Tools for Healing,
2063
Good Life/Good Death: A Doctor’s Case
for Euthanasia and Suicide, 309
A Graceful Exit: Life and Death on Your
Own Terms, 632
The Grace in Dying: How We Are
Transformed Spiritually as We Die,
788
A Gradual Awakening, 1254
Gramp: A Man Ages and Dies, 39
Grandparents Cry Twice: Help for
Bereaved Grandparents, 609
Grandpa’s Berries: A Story to Help
Children Understand Grief and Loss,
148
Grave Matters: A Lively History of Death
around the World, 1449
Grave Words: Notifying Survivors about
Sudden, Unexpected Deaths, 282
The Great Change: A Native American
Perspective on Dying, 480
Greeting the Angels: An Imaginal View of
the Mourning Process, 1298
Grief: A Natural Reaction to Loss, 1200
Grief and AIDS, 1374
Grief and Bereavement, 1447
Grief and Growth: Pastoral Resources for
Emotional and Spiritual Growth, 1896
 Title Index
Grief and How to Live with It, 1307
Grief and Loss: Theories and Skills for
Helping Professionals, 2052
Grief and Loss: Understanding the
Journey, 1171
Grief and Mourning in Cross-Cultural
Perspectives, 467
Grief and the Healing Arts: Creativity as
Therapy, 1113
Grief and the Loss of an Adult Child, 1269
Grief and the Meaning of the Funeral,
2079
Grief as a Family Process: A
Developmental Approach to Clinical
Practice, 1371
The Grief Care Guide, 1382
Grief: Climb toward Understanding, Self-
Help When You Are Struggling, 1150
Grief Counseling and Grief Therapy:
A Handbook for the Mental Health
Practitioner, 2058
Grief Counseling and Sudden Death: A
Manual and Guide, 1161
Grief Counseling Homework Planner,
1341
Grief Dreams: How They Help Heal Us
after the Death of a Loved One, 1438
Grief, Dying, and Death: Clinical
Interventions for Caregivers, 2033
Grief Education for Caregivers of the
Elderly, 42
Grief for a Season, 1405
Grief: How to Live with Sorrow, 1137
Grief in Children: A Handbook for Adults,
154
Grief in Cross-Cultural Perspective: A
Casebook, 457
Grief in School Communities: Effective
Support Strategies, 226
Griefjourney: Notes on Grief for Teens,
Young Adults, and Anyone Who Is
Grieving, 24
Grief, Loss, and Death: The Shadow Side
of Ministry, 1907
Grief Ministry: Helping Others Mourn,
1909
Grief, Mourning, and Death Ritual, 2069
347
A Grief Observed, 1043
The Grief Process, 1388
The Grief Process: Analysis and
Counseling, 1389
Grief Quest: Reflections for Men Coping
with Loss, 1291
The Grief Recovery Handbook: A Step-
by-Step Program for Moving beyond
Loss, 1215
Griefs and Discontents: The Focus of
Change, 1344
Grief’s Courageous Journey, 1130
Grief: Selected Readings, 1131
Grief’s Journey . . . When a Child Dies,
563
Grief’s Slow Work, 1109
Grief Steps: Ten Steps to Regroup,
Rebuild, and Renew after Any Life
Loss, 1311
Grief Support Training for Clergy and
Congregations: Training Manual, 1844
Grief: The Mourning After, Dealing with
Adult Bereavement, 1356
Grief Therapy for Men: How to Grieve
Like a “Real” Man, 1308
Grief Therapy: Out of Pain Can Come
Profound Transforming Healing,
1223
Grief, Transition, and Loss: A Pastor’s
Practical Guide, 1876
A Grief Unveiled: One Father’s Journey
through the Death of a Child, 574
Grieving, 1335
Grieving: A Beginner’s Guide, 1283
Grieving: A Handbook for Those Who
Care, 1121
The Grieving Child: A Parent’s Guide,
158
Grieving Mindfully: A Compassionate and
Spiritual Guide to Coping with Loss,
1239
Grieving: Our Path Back to Peace, 1427
The Grieving Teen: A Guide for Teenagers
and Their Friends, 8
Grieving the Loss of Someone You Love:
Daily Meditations to Help You through
the Grieving Process, 1295
348 Title Index
The Grieving Time: A Year’s Account of
Recovery from Loss, 1124
The Grim Reader: Writings on Death,
Dying, and Living On, 381
Group Psychotherapy with People Who
Are Dying, 1666
Growing through Grief: A K-12
Curriculum to Help Young People
through All Kinds of Loss, 214
Growing through Loss and Grief: A
Counselor’s Guide, 2027
Growing through Loss and Grief: Dealing
with Life’s Tough Times, 1327
Guidebook on Helping Persons with
Mental Retardation Mourn, 1661
Guided Grief Imagery: A Resource for
Grief Ministry and Death Education,
1858
Guidelines on the Termination of Life-
Sustaining Treatment and the Care of
the Dying, 2006
A Guide to Dying at Home, 664
A Guide to Life: Jewish Laws and
Customs of Mourning, 459
Guide to the 400 Best Children’s and
Adult’s Multicultural Books about
Disability, Illness, and Death, 109
Guiding Your Child through Grief, 155
Handbook for Mortals: Guidance for
People Facing Serious Illness, 739
Handbook for Those Who Grieve: What
You Should Know and What You Can
Do During Times of Loss: A Resource
for Family, Friends, Ministers,
Caregivers, and Colleagues, 1108
A Handbook for Widowers, 2141
Handbook of Adolescent Death and
Bereavement, 4
Handbook of Bereavement: Theory,
Research, and Intervention, 1396
Handbook of Childhood Death and
Bereavement, 146
Handbook of Death and Dying, 942
The Handbook of Hospice Care, 1499
Handbook of Hospice Policies and
Procedures, 1527
Handbook of Palliative Care, 1761
Hanging On, 648
The Hardest Challenge: Surviving the
Death of a Spouse, 2153
The Harlem Book of the Dead, 476
Heading toward Omega: In Search of the
Meaning of Near-Death Experience,
1712
Healing a Child’s Grieving Heart: 100
Practical Ideas for Families, Friends,
and Caregivers, 259
Healing a Father’s Grief, 1359
Healing a Friend’s Grieving Heart: One
Hundred Practical Ideas for Helping
Someone You Love through Loss, 1430
Healing after Loss: Daily Meditations for
Working through Grief, 1204
Healing after the Suicide of a Loved One,
1385
Healing and Growing through Grief, 1316
Healing and the Grief Process, 1343
Healing a Teen’s Grieving Heart: 100
Practical Ideas for Families, Friends,
and Caregivers, 28
Healing Children’s Grief: Surviving a
Parent’s Death from Cancer, 144
Healing Conversations: What to Say When
You Don’t Know What to Say, 279
Healing Grief, 1219
Healing Grief at Work: One Hundred
Practical Ideas after Your Workplace
Is Touched by Loss, 1431
Healing Grief: Reclaiming Life after Any
Loss, 1413
A Healing Grief: Walking with Your
Friend through Loss, 1423
Healing into Life and Death, 733
A Healing Journey through Grief: Your
Journey for Reflection/Recovery and
Clinician’s Guide to a Healing Journey
through Grief, 1342
Healing Pain: Attachment, Loss, and Grief
Therapy, 1250
The Healing Power of Grief, 1287
The Healing Power of Grief: The Journey
through Loss to Life and Laughter,
1259
 Title Index
The Healing Sorrow Workbook: Rituals
for Transforming Grief and Loss, 2081
Healing the Bereaved Child: Grief
Gardening, Growth through Grief, and
Other Touchstones for Caregivers, 258
Healing the Dying, 1730
Healing the Grieving Heart: Practical
Ideas for Families, Friends, and
Caregivers, 1432
Healing through the Shadow of Loss, 1140
Healing Together: For Couples Grieving
the Death of Their Baby, 592
Healing Your Grieving Heart for Kids:
100 Practical Ideas: Simple Advice
and Activities for Children after a
Death, 260
Healing Your Grieving Heart for Teens:
One Hundred Practical Ideas, 29
The Healing Your Grieving Heart Journal
for Teens, 30
Healing Your Grieving Heart: One
Hundred Practical Ideas, 1433
The Heart of Grief: Death and the Search
for Lasting Love, 1106
The Heart of Hospice, 1552
Heavenly Hurts: Surviving AIDS-Related
Deaths and Losses, 1229
The Helper’s Journey: Working with
People Facing Grief, Loss, and Life-
Threatening Illness, 1246
Help for Bereaved Parents, 622
Help for the Bereaved, 1383
Help for the Bereaved: What the Family of
the Deceased Should Know, 1649
Help for the Terminally Ill, 1900
Help for Your Grief: Turning Emotional
Loss into Growth, 1172
Helping a Child Understand Death, 251
Helping Adults with Mental Retardation
Grieve a Death Loss, 1667
Helping Bereaved Children: A Handbook
for Practitioners, 255
Helping Bereaved Parents: A Clinician’s
Guide, 2047
Helping Children Cope: Mastering Stress
through Books and Stories, 156
Helping Children Cope with Death, 232
349
Helping Children Cope with Death: A
Guide for School Personnel, 247
Helping Children Cope with Death:
Guidelines and Resources, 254
Helping Children Cope with Grief, 261
Helping Children Cope with Loss: A
Bibliotherapy Approach, 139
Helping Children Cope with Separation
and Loss, 177
Helping Children Cope with the Death of
a Parent: A Guide for the First Year,
200
Helping Children Cope with the Loss of
a Loved One: A Guide for Grownups,
187
Helping Children Grieve When Someone
They Love Dies, 173
Helping Children with the Mystery of
Death, 222
Helping Each Other in Widowhood,
2200
Helping Grieving People–When Tears Are
Not Enough: A Handbook for Care
Providers, 1217
Helping People through Grief, 1238
Helping Teens Work through Grief, 23
Helping the Bereaved, 1162
Helping the Bereaved: Therapeutic
Interventions for Children,
Adolescents, and Adults, 1656
Helping the Dying Patient and His
Family, 805
Helping the Grieving Child in School, 165
Helping the Grieving Student: A Guide
for Teachers: A Practical Guide
for Dealing with Death in Your
Classroom, 151
Helping Women Cope with Grief, 1376
Helping Young Children Cope with Crisis:
A Guide for Training Child Care
Workers, 190
Helping Your Children to Understand
Death, 540
Helplessness and Hope: Pastoral Care in
Terminal Illness, 1887
Helplessness: On Depression,
Development, and Death, 784
350 Title Index
Help Me Say Goodbye: Activities for
Helping Kids Cope When a Special
Person Dies, 236
Help Your Marriage Survive the Death of
a Child, 612
Here Comes Immortality, 1619
Here Is My Hope: Inspirational Stories
from the Johns Hopkins Hospital, 337
Hidden Futures: Death and Immortality in
Ancient Egypt, Anatolia, the Classical,
Biblical, and Arabic-Islamic World,
1451
The High Cost of Dying: A Guide to
Funeral Planning, 2098
A History of Human Responses to Death:
Mythologies, Rituals, and Ethics, 2085
A History of Ideas about the Prolongation
of Life, 685
A History of Mourning, 1455
History of Thanatology: Philosophical,
Religious, Psychological, and
Sociological Ideas Concerning Death
from Primitive Times to the Present,
1448
A History of the Conception of Death in
America, 1650-1860, 1479
Ho for Heaven! Man’s Changing Attitude
toward Dying, 91
Holy Living and Holy Dying, 1899
Home Care for the Dying: A Reassuring,
Comprehensive Guide to Physical and
Emotional Care, 351
Home Care for the Dying Child:
Professional and Family Perspectives,
595
Honoring Differences: Cultural Issues in
the Treatment of Trauma and Loss, 449
Honouring Sacred Spaces: Voicing Stories
of Terminal Illness, 781
Hope for the Bereaved: Understanding,
Coping, and Growing through Grief,
1367
Horrendous Death and Health: Toward
Action, 1256
Horrendous Death, Health, and Well-
Being, 1042
The Hospice: 1800-1948, 1488
Hospice, a Caring Challenge, 1561
Hospice: A Caring Community, 1544
Hospice: A Handbook for Families and
Others Facing Terminal Illness, 1519
Hospice, a Labor of Love, 1523
The Hospice Alternative: A New Context
for Death and Dying, 1566
The Hospice Alternative: Living with
Dying, 1554
Hospice and Home Health Agency
Characteristics: United States, 1991,
1511
Hospice and Ministry, 1867
Hospice and Palliative Care: An
Interdisciplinary Approach, 1789
Hospice and Palliative Care: Concepts
and Practice, 1583
Hospice and Palliative Care Handbook:
Quality, Compliance, and
Reimbursement, 1555
Hospice and Palliative Care Music
Therapy: A Guide to Program
Development and Clinical Care, 1533
Hospice and Palliative Care Nursing,
1745
Hospice and Palliative Care: Questions
and Answers, 1581
Hospice, an International English
Language Bibliography, 129
Hospice: A Photographic Inquiry, 1524
Hospice Approaches to Pediatric Care,
560
Hospice as a Social Health Care
Institution, 1568
Hospice as a Social Health Care
Institution: Report of the Pre-Forum
Institute of the 105th Annual Forum
of the National Conference on Social
Welfare, 1534
Hospice Care, 1530
Hospice Care, a Growing Concept in the
United States: Report to the Congress,
1589
Hospice Care and Cultural Diversity, 419
Hospice Care and Culture: Comparison of
the Hospice Movement in the West and
Japan, 1558
 Title Index
Hospice Care Demonstration Project: A
Study of Two Models of Hospice Home
Care Delivery, 1494
Hospice Care for Children, 1493
Hospice Care for Patients with Advanced
Progressive Dementia, 1592
The Hospice: Care for People with
Terminal Illness, 1536
Hospice Care on the International Scene,
468
Hospice Care Planning: An
Interdisciplinary Guide, 1521
Hospice Care: Principles and Practice,
1508
Hospice Care Systems: Structure, Process,
Costs, and Outcomes, 1564
Hospice: Caring for the Terminally Ill,
1545
The Hospice Choice: In Pursuit of a
Peaceful Death, 1549
Hospice: Complete Care for the
Terminally Ill, 1597
The Hospice Concept, 1525
Hospice Concepts: A Guide to Palliative
Care in Terminal Illness, 1793
Hospice: Creating New Models of Care
for the Terminally Ill, 1577
The Hospice: Development and
Administration, 1510
Hospice Education Program for Nurses,
1739
The Hospice Handbook: A Complete
Guide, 1495
Hospice Handbook: A Guide for
Managers and Planners, 1569
A Hospice Handbook: A New Way to Care
for the Dying, 1526
The Hospice Heritage: Celebrating Our
Future, 1507
Hospice Hounds: Animals and Healing at
the Borders of Death, 1575
Hospice Inpatient Environments:
Compendium and Guidelines,
1501
The Hospice Movement, 1563
The Hospice Movement: A Better Way of
Caring for the Dying, 1586
351
The Hospice Movement: Easing Death’s
Pains, 1584
Hospice or Hemlock?: Searching for
Heroic Compassion, 1571
Hospice: Practice, Pitfalls, and Promise,
1506
Hospice, Prescription for Terminal Care,
1504
Hospice Programs and Public Policy,
1588
The Hospice Project Report, 1559
Hospice Resource Manual for Local
Churches, 1487
Hospice Saint John: A Three-Year
Demonstration of Hospice Care,
1553
Hospices: A New Way to Die, 1515
Hospice Self-Assessment and Survey
Guide, 1540
Hospice Standards Manual, 1541
Hospice: The Living Idea, 1579
Hospice: The Nursing Perspective, 1735
Hospice U.S.A., 1546
The Hospice Way, 1595
The Hospice Way of Death, 1514
Hospital-Based Palliative Care Teams:
The Hospital-Hospice Interface, 1516
Hospital-Hospice Management Models:
Integration and Collaboration, 1550
The Hour of Death, 1036
The Hour of Our Death: The Classical
History of Western Attitudes toward
Death over the Last One Thousand
Years, 1102
A House Called Helen: The Development
of Hospice Care for Children, 1596
The House Staff and Thanatology, 2118
How Can Care of the Terminally Ill Be
Improved?, 1798
How Can I Help?: How to Support
Someone Who Is Grieving, 1230
How Different Religions View Death and
Afterlife, 425
How Do We Tell the Children?, 231
How It Feels When a Parent Dies, 1828
How Should One Cope with Death?,
1293
352 Title Index
How Should the Physical and Emotional
Pain of Terminal Illness Be
Addressed?, 1799
How to Care for Yourself While You Care
for the Dying and the Bereaved, 389
How to Conduct a One-Day Conference
on Death Education: The Dos and
Don’ts, 543
How to Conquer Physical Death, 1895
How to Cope with a Fatal Illness: The
Rational Management of Death and
Dying, 667
How to Die, 775
How to Face Death without Fear, 923
How to Go on Living after the Death of a
Baby, 605
How to Go on Living When Someone You
Love Dies, 1335
How to Prepare for Death: Your Own or
Someone Else’s, 662
How to Survive the Loss of a Child:
Filling the Emptiness and Rebuilding
Your Life, 616
How to Survive the Loss of a Love: Fifty-
Eight Things to Do When There Is
Nothing to Be Done, 2154
How to Survive the Loss of a Parent: A
Guide for Adults, 1804
How We Die: Reflections on Life’s Final
Chapter, 756
How We Grieve: Relearning the World,
1107
How Will They Know If I’m Dead?:
Transcending Disability and Terminal
Illness, 703
Human Aging and Dying: A Study in
Sociocultural Gerontology, 59
The Human Encounter with Death, 332
I Can’t Stop Crying: It’s So Hard When
Someone You Love Dies, 1275
I Don’t Know What to Say: How to Help
and Support Someone Who Is Dying,
270
If I Should Wake Before I Die: The
Medical and Biblical Truth about
Near-Death Experiences, 1701
If Your Dearest Should Die, 1122
I Know Just How You Feel: Avoiding the
Clichés of Grief, 291
The Image of Death as Portrayed in
Fiction for Children, 1685
Images of Growth and Death, 1688
Images of Man and Death, 1679
I’m Grieving as Fast as I Can: How
Young Widows and Widowers Can
Cope and Heal, 2159
I’m Here to Help: A Guide for Caregivers,
Hospice Workers, and Volunteers,
1572
I Miss Grandpa: A Story to Help Your
Child Understand Death–and Eternal
Life, 172
I Miss You: A First Look at Death, 536
The Immoralist: An Approach to the
Engineering of Man’s Divinity, 1604
Immortality, 1612
The Immortality Factor, 1617
Immortality: Physically, Scientifically,
Now: A Reasonable Guarantee of
Bodily Preservation, a General
Discussion, and Research Targets,
1601
The Impact of an Educational Intervention
Module on Death and Dying on Death
Anxiety among Middle-Aged and Older
Adults in North Carolina, 43
The Impact of Cognitive Development and
Socialization Factors on the Concept
of Death among Adults with Mental
Retardation, 1662
Improving Care for the End of Life: A
Sourcebook for Health Care Managers
and Clinicians, 2020
Improving End-of-Life Care: Why Has It
Been So Difficult?, 1770
The Inability to Mourn: Principles of
Collective Behavior, 1296
In after Days: Thoughts on the Future
Life, 704
Including the Children: A Resource Guide
for Adults to Help Children Deal with
the Terminal Illness and Death of a
Loved One, 213
 Title Index
Income Level and Parental Attitudes
toward Death Education for Preschool
Children, 528
The Individual: A Study of Life and Death,
1072
The Individual, Society, and Death, 1913
Infection Control in Home Care and
Hospice, 1574
In Lieu of Flowers: A Conversation for the
Living, 273
In Sickness and in Health: How to Cope
When Your Loved One Is Ill, 684
Insights on Death and Dying, 1738
Institutional Protocols for Decisions about
Life-Sustaining Treatments: Special
Report, 802
Interacting with Dying Patients: An
Interhospital Nursing Research and
Nursing Education Project, 1731
The Interpretation of Death, 1961
Interpreting Death: Christian Theology
and Pastoral Practice, 1868
Interventions with Bereaved Children, 241
In the Arms of Others: A Cultural History
of the Right-to-Die in America, 1460
In the End, the Beginning: The Life of
Hope, 1299
In the Light of Dying: The Journals of a
Hospice Volunteer, 1587
In the Midst of Life: A Hospice
Volunteer’s Story, 1576
In the Midst of Winter: Selections from the
Literature of Mourning, 1297
In the Potter’s Hands: Nine Wake
Services, 2066
In the Presence of Grief: Helping Family
Members Resolve Death, Dying, and
Bereavement Issues, 1975
In the Shadow of Loss: Parents and
Siblings of the Chronically Ill Child,
2100
Intimate Death: How the Dying Teach Us
How to Live, 698
An Intimate Loneliness: Supporting
Bereaved Parents and Siblings, 611
Intimations of Mortality, 814
In Times of Sorrow, 1183
353
Into the Valley: Death and the
Socialization of Medical Students, 2004
Introducing Death and Dying: Readings
and Exercises, 947
Introduction to Forensic Sciences, 975
An Introduction to Thanatology: Death
and Dying in American Society, 2136
Inventing the American Way of Death,
1830-1920, 982
An Investigation among Junior Highs into
the Understanding of Death and Dying
and a Program Response, 20
The Investigation of Death, 1691
An Investigation of the Adolescent Sibling
Bereavement Process and Adaptation,
13
Is Death the End?, 840
Is There a Duty to Die?, 864
Is There a Duty to Die?: And Other
Essays in Bio-Ethics, 861
Is There an Answer to Death?, 1946
Is There Life after Death?, 1616
It Must Have Been Moonglow: Reflections
on the First Years of Widowhood, 2164
I Wasn’t Ready to Say Goodbye:
Surviving, Coping, and Healing after
the Sudden Death of a Loved One,
1312
I Will Remember You: What to Do When
Someone You Love Dies: A Guidebook
through Grief for Teens, 6
I Will Tell Thee the Mystery, 819
“I Wish I Could Hold Your Hand”: A
Child’s Guide to Grief and Loss, 216
Janet and Me: An Illustrated Story of Love
and Loss, 1264
A Jewish Book of Comfort, 429
Jewish Insights on Death and Mourning,
461
The Jewish Mourner’s Book of Why, 2077
Jewish Reflections on Death, 462
The Jewish Tradition and Choices at the
End of Life: A New Judaic Approach to
Illness and Dying, 471
The Jewish Way in Death and Mourning,
433
354 Title Index
Journal of Religion, Disability, and
Health, 38
Journey’s End: Death and Mourning,
1175
A Journey through Grief: Gentle Specific
Help to Get You through the Most
Difficult Stages of Grieving, 1118
The Journey through Grief: Reflections on
Healing, 1434
Journey to the Other Side, 815
The Journey with Death, 1049
Joy Beyond Grief, 1100
Joy in the Face of Death, 68
The Joy of Living and Dying in Peace, 653
The Judgment of the Dead, 1854
Judgment of the Dead: Life after Death in
Major Religions, 821
Just You and Me: Making Memories with
Your Children, 223
Keys to Dealing with the Loss of a Loved
One, 1233
Keys to Helping Children Deal with Death
and Grief, 179
The Kids’ Book about Death and Dying,
by and for Kids, 527
A Land beyond Tears: The Liberating
Approach to Death and Dying, 81
Landscape without Gravity: A Memoir of
Grief, 1105
Language, Metaphysics, and Death,
971
Last Breath: Cautionary Tales from the
Limits of Human Endurance, 793
Last Chapters: A Sociology of Aging and
Dying, 41
The Last Dance: Encountering Death and
Dying, 966
The Last Enemy: A Christian
Understanding of Death, 823
The Last Enemy: Living with Terminal
Illness, 686
Last Rights: A Case for the Good Death,
746
Last Rights?: Assisted Suicide and
Euthanasia Debated, 899
Last Rights: Death and Dying in Texas
Law and Experience, 1626
The Last Things Concerning Death,
Purification after Death, Resurrection,
829
Last Touch: Preparing for a Parent’s
Death, 1807
Last Week My Brother Anthony Died, 171
Last Wish, 772
Law at the End of Life: The Supreme
Court and Assisted Suicide, 888
The Law of Death and Disposal of the
Dead, 1623
The Lazarus Case: Life-and-Death Issues
in Neonatal Intensive Care, 1775
Leaders Guide for Grief Recovery Support
Groups, 1317
Lead Me Home: An African American’s
Guide through the Grief Journey, 397
Learning to Die, 752
Learning to Die, Learning to Live, 699
Learning to Live as a Widow, 2174
Learning to Say Goodbye: Dealing wth
Death and Dying, 1062
Learning to Say Goodbye: When a Parent
Dies, 196
The Least Worst Death: Essays in
Bioethics on the End of Life, 845
Legal and Ethical Aspects of Treating
Critically and Terminally Ill Patients,
1628
Legal Frontiers of Death and Dying, 1625
Lesbian Widows: Invisible Grief, 2205
Lessons from the Dead: The Graveyard as
a Classroom for the Study of the Life
Cycle, 504
Lessons from the Dying, 789
Lessons from the Light: What We
Can Learn from the Near-Death
Experience, 1715
Lessons of Loss: A Guide to Coping, 1309
Let Me Die before I Wake: Hemlock’s
Book of Self-Deliverance for the Dying,
866
Let Someone Hold You: The Journey of a
Hospice Priest, 1565
Let’s Talk about When a Parent Dies, 256
 Title Index
Letters from a Friend: A Sibling’s Guide
for Coping and Grief, 2099
Letting Go, 807
Letting Go: A Holistic and Meditative
Approach to Living and Dying, 634
Letting Go: Caring for the Dying and the
Bereaved, 306
Letting Go: Death, Dying, and the Law,
1651
Letting Go with Love: The Grieving
Process, 1315
Life after Death (Hanley), 830
Life after Death (Kantonen), 833
Life after Death (Toynbee et al.), 841
Life after Death: A Study of the Elderly
Widowed, 2145
Life after Grief: How to Survive Loss and
Trauma, 1247
Life after Life: The Investigation of a
Phenomenon–Survival of Bodily Death,
1707
Life after Loss: Conquering Grief and
Finding Hope, 1301
Life after Loss: Getting over Grief,
Getting on with Life, 1265
Life after Loss: The Lessons of Grief, 1414
Life after Suicide: A Ray of Hope for
Those Left Behind, 1349
Life after What?, 1609
Life against Death, 313
Life and Death (Bultmann), 944
Life and Death (Dastre), 963
Life and Death (Flumiani), 984
Life and Death (Zim and Bleeker), 31
Life and Death Decisions: Psychological
and Ethical Considerations in End-of-
Life Care, 869
Life and Death: Grappling with the Moral
Dilemmas of Our Time, 882
Life and Death Issues, 999
Life and Death: Philosophical Essays in
Biomedical Ethics, 1915
Life and Loss: A Guide to Help Grieving
Children, 166
Life at Death: A Scientific Investigation of
the Near-Death Experience, 1713
Life before Death, 643
355
Life Begins at Death, 1906
Life, Death, and Beyond, 1695
Life, Death, and the Doctor, 873
Life, Death, and the Law, 1650
Life-Death Decisions in Health Care,
1992
Life in Relation to Death, 1065
Life Is Goodbye, Life Is Hello: Grieving
Well through All Kinds of Loss, 1119
Life Is Victorious!: How to Grow through
Grief, 1328
Life Lessons: Two Experts on Death and
Dying Teach Us about the Mysteries of
Life and Living, 1033
Lifelines, 2148
Life or Death–Who Controls?, 1958
Life, Psychotherapy, and Death: The End
of Our Exploring, 1957
Life’s End: Technocratic Dying in an Age
of Spiritual Yearning, 749
Life’s Living toward Dying: A Theological
and Medical-Ethical Study, 859
Life’s Worth: The Case against Assisted
Suicide, 855
Lifetimes: The Beautiful Way to Explain
Death to Children, 202
Lifting the Taboo: Women, Death, and
Dying, 492
Light and Death: One Doctor’s
Fascinating Account of Near-Death
Experiences, 1716
Light in the Valley, 352
Light on Aging and Dying, 49
The Lillian G. Kutscher Thanatology
Collection in the Gill Library of the
College of New Rochelle, 2130
The Lively Shadow: Living with the Death
of a Child, 601
Lives and Deaths: Selections from the
Works of Edwin S. Shneidman, 2129
Live Until You Die, 1952
Living and Dying, 736
Living and Dying: An Inquiry into the
Enigma of Death and Afterlife, 822
Living and Dying at Murray Manor, 335
Living and Dying Gracefully, 649
Living and Dying Well, 881
356 Title Index
The Living and the Dead, 1086
The Living and the Dead: Social
Dimensions of Death in South Asian
Religions, 481
Living beyond Loss: Death in the Family,
1416
Living, Dreaming, Dying: Practical
Wisdom from the Tibetan Book of the
Dead, 753
Living in the Face of Death: The Tibetan
Tradition, 448
Living Our Dying: A Way to the Sacred in
Everyday Life, 376
Living through Loss: A Manual for Those
Working with Issues of Terminal
Illness and Bereavement, 709
Living through Loss: Interventions across
the Life Span, 2008
Living through Mourning: Finding
Comfort and Hope When a Loved One
Has Died, 1360
Living through the Death of a Spouse:
Leader’s Guide, 2206
Living through the Loss of Someone You
Love: One Woman’s Story of Loss,
Grief, and New-Found Hope, 1097
Living under the Sword: Psychosocial
Aspects of Recurrent and Progressive
Life-Threatening Illness, 1664
Living Victims, Stolen Lives: Parents of
Murdered Children Speak to America,
621
Living When a Loved One Has Died, 1189
Living While Dying, 743
Living with a Man Who Is Dying, 668
Living with an Empty Chair: A Guide
through Grief, 1404
Living with Death (Blackwell), 933
Living with Death (Segerberg), 783
Living with Death (Thielicke), 1967
Living with Death and Dying, 287
Living with Dying: A Guide for Relatives
and Friends, 654
Living with Dying: A Guide to Palliative
Care, 1790
Living with Dying: A Handbook for End-
of-Life Health Care Practitioners, 1979
Living with Dying: A Loving Guide for
Family and Close Friends, 318
Living with Dying: Finding Meaning in
Chronic Illness, 694
Living with Dying: The Management of
Terminal Disease, 779
Living with Grief after Sudden Loss:
Suicide, Homicide, Accident, Heart
Attack, Stroke, 1156
Living with Grief and Mourning, 1303
Living with Grief: At Work, at School, at
Worship, 1149
Living with Grief: Children, Adolescents,
and Loss, 150
Living with Grief: Loss in Later Life,
1157
Living with Grief When Illness Is
Prolonged, 1160
Living with Grief: Who We Are, How We
Grieve, 1159
Living with Life-Threatening Illness: A
Guide for Patients, Their Families, and
Caregivers, 327
Living with Loss: A Dramatic New
Breakthrough in Grief Therapy, 1333
Living with Loss, Healing with Hope: A
Jewish Perspective, 413
Living with Terminal Illness, 700
Living with the End in Mind: A Practical
Checklist for Living Live to the Fullest
by Embracing Your Mortality, 726
Living Your Dying, 718
The Loneliness of Dying, 666
Longing for Dad: Father Loss and Its
Impact, 1822
Long-Term Effects of Death Education
and Counseling: Papers from the 1987
Annual Meeting of ADEC, 522
A Look at Death, 986
Losing a Parent: Passage to a New Way
of Living, 1825
Losing a Parent: Practical Help for You
and Other Family Members, 1831
Losing a Parent to Death in the Early
Years: Guidelines for the Treatment of
Traumatic Bereavement in Infancy and
Early Childhood, 1830
 Title Index
Losing Your Parents, Finding Yourself:
The Defining Turning Point of Adult
Life, 1837
Loss and Anticipatory Grief, 1336
Loss and Bereavement, 1325
Loss and Change, 1273
Loss and Grief, 1439
Loss and Grief: A Guide for Human
Services Practitioners, 1406
Loss and Grief in Medicine, 2044
Loss and Grief: Psychological
Management in Medical Practice,
2041
Loss and Grief Recovery: Help Caring for
Children with Disabilities, Chronic or
Terminal Illness, 546
Loss and How to Cope with It, 1112
Loss and Trauma: General and Close
Relationship Perspectives, 1199
Loss, Bereavement, and Grief: A Guide to
Effective Caring, 1387
Loss, Change, and Bereavement in
Palliative Care, 1765
Loss, Change, and Grief: An Educational
Experience, 1125
Loss, Grief, and Bereavement: A Guide
for Counseling, 1270
Loss: How Children and Teenagers Can
Cope with Death and Other Kinds of
Loss, 218
The Loss of a Life Partner: Narratives of
the Bereaved, 1417
The Loss of Loved Ones: The Effects of
a Death in the Family on Personality
Development, 1306
Loss Reaction and Grief Management,
1203
The Loss That Is Forever: The Lifelong
Impact of the Early Death of a Mother
or Father, 1823
Loss: Understanding the Emptiness,
1237
Love after Death: Counseling in
Bereavement, 2010
Love and Loss: The Roots of Grief and Its
Complications, 1323
Love Is Stronger Than Death, 344
357
Love Is the Link: A Hospice Doctor
Shares Her Experience of Near-Death
and Dying, 1543
Love, Loss, and Healing: A Woman’s
Guide to Transforming Grief, 1153
Macmillan Encyclopedia of Death and
Dying, 1022
The Magical Thoughts of Grieving
Children: Treating Children with
Complicated Mourning and Advice for
Parents, 159
Making Sense of Death: Spiritual, Ethical,
and Pastoral Aspects of Death, Dying,
and Bereavement, 1857
Man against Dying, 37
The Management of Terminal Disease,
2036
The Management of Terminal Illness,
2037
The Management of Terminal Malignant
Disease, 2038
Management of the Dying Patient and His
Family, 2039
The Management of the “Hopeless” Case,
1998
Managing Death in the ICU: The
Transition from Cure to Comfort, 1988
Managing Terminal Illness, 1766
Man Answers Death, 1948
Man Does Survive Death, 1886
Man’s Concern with Death, 2139
A Manual for the Grief Experience
Inventory, 1358
A Manual of Death Education and Simple
Burial, 2083
The Many Faces of Bereavement: The
Nature and Treatment of Natural,
Traumatic, and Stigmatized Grief,
1391
The Many Faces of Grief, 1210
Marriage after Mourning: The Secrets of
Surviving Couples, 603
Marriage after the Death of a Child, 604
Maternal Bereavement: Coping with the
Unexpected Death of a Child, 570
A Matter of Life and Death, 353
358 Title Index
Matters of Life and Death: Finding the
Words to Say Goodbye, 303
The Matthew Tree, 1093
Mature Grief: When a Parent Dies,
1836
The Meaning of Death (Feifel), 1921
The Meaning of Death (Nagy), 1954
The Meaning of Grief, 1135
The Meaning of Immortality in Human
Experience, Including Thoughts on Life
and Death, 1605
Meaning Reconstruction and the
Experience of Loss, 1310
The Meanings of Death in Rabbinic
Judaism, 431
The Measure of Our Days: New
Beginnings at Life’s End, 2003
The Medical Care of Terminally Ill
Patients, 1996
Medical Care of the Dying Patient,
1991
Medical Care of the Soul: A Practical and
Healing Guide to End-of-Life Issues
for Families, Patients, and Health
Care Providers, 310
Medical Student Education: Meeting the
Challenges of Life-Threatening Illness,
Death, and Bereavement, 1984
Medical Treatment of the Dying: Moral
Issues, 846
Medicare Hospice Benefits: A Special
Way of Caring for People Who Have a
Terminal Illness, 1531
Medicare: Program Provisions and
Payments Discourage Hospice
Participation: Report to the
Subcommittee on Health, Committee
on Way and Means, House of
Representatives, 1590
Medicolegal Implications of Death and
Dying: A Detailed Discussion of
the Medical and Legal Implications
Involved in Death and/or Care of the
Dying and Terminal Patient, 1638
Meditations for Bereaved Parents, 602
Meditations on the End of Life, 642
Meeting Death, 708
Meetings at the Edge: Dialogues with the
Grieving and the Dying, the Healing,
and the Healed, 290
Meeting the Needs of Our Clients
Creatively: The Impact of Art and
Culture on Caregiving, 360
Memories Live Forever: A Memory Book
for Grieving Children, 229
Men and Grief: A Guide for Men
Surviving the Death of a Loved One:
A Resource for Caregivers and Mental
Health Professionals, 1393
Men Coping with Grief, 1263
Mending the Torn Fabric: For Those Who
Grieve and Those Who Want to Help
Them, 1120
Men Don’t Cry . . . Women Do:
Transcending Gender Stereotypes of
Grief, 1278
The Metaphysics of Death, 1925
Metaphysics of Life and Death, 1012
Midlife Loss: Coping Strategies, 1221
Midlife Orphan: Facing Life’s Changes
Now That Your Parents Are Gone,
1812
Midwife for Souls: Spiritual Care for
the Dying: A Guide for Hospice Care
Workers and All Who Live with the
Terminally Ill, 1542
A Midwife through the Dying Process:
Stories of Healing and Hard Choices
at the End of Life, 765
Mindsight: Near-Death and Out-of-Body
Experiences in the Blind, 1714
The Minister and Grief, 1850
The Minister as Crisis Counselor, 1897
Ministering to the Dying, 1889
Ministering to the Grief-Sufferer, 1848
Ministering to the Mourning: A Practical
Guide for Pastors, Church Leaders,
and Other Caregivers, 1908
The Mirror of Time: Images of Aging and
Dying, 35
Mirrors of Mortality: Studies in the Social
History of Death, 1485
Modern Man and Mortality, 951
The Modern Vision of Death, 1069
 Title Index
Moment of Death, 816
More Than a Parting Prayer: Lessons in
Caregiving for the Dying, 681
More Than Surviving: Caring for Yourself
While You Grieve, 1319
More Than You Dare Ask: The First Year
of Living with Cancer, 1902
The Morning after Death, 339
Mortal Acts: Eighteen Empowering
Rituals for Confronting Death, 2067
Mortality, Immortality, and Other Life
Strategies, 1599
Mortal Lessons: Notes on the Art of
Surgery, 1071
Mortal Matters: When a Loved One Dies,
1165
The Mortal No: Death and the Modern
Imagination, 1938
Mortal Remains: Death in Early America,
1468
Mortuary Science: A Sourcebook, 132
Mosby’s Home Care and Hospice Drug
Handbook, 1556
The Mother, Anxiety, and Death: The
Catastrophic Death Complex, 610
Motherhood and Mourning: Perinatal
Death, 606
Motherless Daughters: The Legacy of
Loss, 1820
Motherless Mothers: How Mother Loss
Shapes the Parents We Become, 1821
Motherloss, 1817
Mourner, Come to My Bosom, 1408
The Mourner’s Dance: What We Do When
People Die, 390
The Mourning After: How to Manage
Grief Wisely, 1138
Mourning and Dancing: A Memoir of
Grief and Recovery, 1292
Mourning and Dancing for Schools: A
Grief and Recovery Sourcebook for
Students, Teachers, and Parents,
205
Mourning and Melancholia, 1929
Mourning and Mitzvah: A Guided Journal
for Walking the Mourner’s Path
through Grief to Healing, 396
359
Mourning Child Grief Support
Curriculum: Early Childhood Edition:
Kindergarten-Grade 2, 193
Mourning Child Grief Support
Curriculum: Middle Childhood
Edition: Grades 3-6, 194
Mourning Child Grief Support
Curriculum: Preschool Edition: Denny
the Duck Stories, 195
The Mourning Handbook: The Most
Comprehensive Resource Offering
Practical and Compassionate Advice
on Coping with All Aspects of Death
and Dying, 1169
Mourning Journey: Spiritual Guidance for
Facing Grief, Death, and Loss, 1442
The Mourning-Liberation Process, 1330
Mourning Thoughts: Facing a New Day
after the Death of a Spouse, 2142
Mr. Death: Four Stories, 207
Muhammed’s Thoughts on Death: A
Thematic Study of the Qur’Anic Data,
452
A Music I No Longer Heard: The Early
Death of a Parent, 1839
Music Therapy at the End of Life, 658
Music Therapy in Palliative Care: New
Voices, 1743
Music Therapy in Palliative/Hospice Care,
1567
Must I Think about Death? Now?:
Student Essays from “Death, Dying,
and Grieving,” a First-Year Course,
University of Cincinnati College of
Medicine, Cincinnati, Ohio, 515
My Brother Death, 474
My Experiments with Death: A Study of
the World Soul in Its Relations with the
Private Self, 324
My Heart Will Forever Go On: Coping
with the Daily Challenges of Raising
a Child with Special Needs and How
to Survive the Loss When They Are
Called Away, 587
My Life Is on Hold: One Family’s
Struggle with Terminal Illness, 655
Mystery of Death, 938
360 Title Index
The Mystery of Death: Initiation at the
Moment of Death, 647
The Mystery of Suffering and Death, 1966
Mysticism, Death, and Dying, 1955
The Myth of Eternal Return, 826
Myths of Life and Death, 945
Name All the Animals: A Memoir,
2111
The Natural Death Handbook, 1053
Natural Salvation: The Message of
Science, Outlining the First Principles
of Immortal Life on Earth, 1618
Nature, Mind, and Death, 973
The Nature of Grief: The Evolution and
Psychology of Reactions to Loss, 1101
The Nature of Man: Studies in Optimistic
Philosophy, 1951
The Near-Death Experience: Problems,
Prospects, Perspectives, 1702
The Needs of the Dying: A Guide for
Bringing Hope, Comfort, and Love to
Life’s Final Chapter, 721
Never the Same: Coming to Terms with
the Death of a Parent, 233
Never Too Young to Know: Death in
Children’s Lives, 237
The New Age Handbook on Death and
Dying, 1059
New Beginnings: Living through Loss and
Grief, 1441
New Images of the Last Things: Karl
Rahner on Death and Life after Death,
92
New Meanings of Death, 1922
The New Natural Death Handbook, 2059
New Themes in Palliative Care, 1751
The Next Step Forward: Music Therapy
with the Terminally Ill, 742
90 Minutes in Heaven: A True Story of
Death and Life, 1711
Nobody’s Child Anymore: Grieving,
Caring, and Comforting When Parents
Die, 1806
No Lifetime Guarantee: Dealing with the
Details of Death, 1635
No More Dying, 731
Nonfinite Loss and Grief: A
Psychoeducational Approach, 1127
Normal and Pathological Responses to
Bereavement, 1163
No Screen for the Dying, 751
Not Dying, 771
Notes on Symptom Control in Hospice and
Palliative Care, 1772
The Nothing That Is and the Nothing
That Is Not: On Death, Dying, and
Suffering, 320
No Time for Goodbyes: Coping with Grief,
Anger, and Injustice after a Tragic
Death, 1262
No Time Out from Grief: Surviving the
Death of My Son, 581
No Voice Is Ever Wholly Lost, 714
The Nurse and the Dying Patient, 1734
The Nurse as Caregiver for the Terminal
Patient and His Family, 1722
Nursing and Thanatology, 1727
Nursing Care at the End of Life: Palliative
Care for Patients and Families, 1741
Nursing Care for the Dying Patient and
the Family, 1724
Nursing Care of the Child with Long-Term
Illness, 1737
The Nursing Care of the Dying Patient,
1721
Nursing Education in Thanatology: A
Curriculum Continuum, 1736
Nursing in Hospice and Terminal Care:
Research and Practice, 1570
Nursing the Dying Patient: Learning
Processes for Interaction, 1723
Nutrition and Hydration in Hospice Care:
Needs, Strategies, Ethics, 1522
ObitKit: A Guide to Celebrating Your
Life: How to Personalize the Obituary
Process and Create Your Written
Legacy, 2090
Occupational Stress in the Care of the
Critically Ill, the Dying, and the
Bereaved, 2050
Of Time and Widowhood: Nationwide
Studies of Enduring Effects, 2168
 Title Index
Old Age and Death Attitudes: A
Comparative Analysis and Evaluation
of Responses by a Group of
Ambulatory White Female Persons
Sixty-Five Years and Older Living
under Varying Conditions of
Institutional Supervision, 54
Old Age and Finitude: A Contribution to
Psychogerontology, 48
Older Adults’ Views on Death, 36
Older Bereaved Spouses: Research with
Practical Applications, 2183
Older Widows and the Lifecourse:
Multiple Narratives of Hidden Lives,
2152
On Becoming a Widow, 2201
On Bereavement: The Culture of Grief,
1418
On Children and Death: How Children
and Their Parents Can and Do Cope
with Death, 188
On Christian Dying: Classic and
Contemporary Texts, 1870
On Death, 976
On Death and Dying: What the Dying
Have to Teach Doctors, Nurses,
Clergy, and Their Families, 2013
On Death: An Essay, 992
On Death, Dying, and Not Dying, 1007
On Death: Helping Children Understand
and Cope, 239
On Death without Dignity: The Human
Impact of Technological Dying, 750
On Defining Death: An Analytic Study of
the Concept of Death in Philosophy
and Medical Ethics, 1970
On Dying and Denying: A Psychiatric
Study of Terminality, 1676
On Dying Well: An Anglican Contribution
to the Debate on Euthanasia, 402
On Grief and Dying: Understanding the
Soul’s Journey, 1395
On Grief and Grieving: Finding the
Meaning of Grief through the Five
Stages of Loss, 1236
On Grieving the Death of a Father, 1840
On Life after Death, 834
361
Only Spring: On Mourning the Death of
My Son, 593
On Our Way: The Final Passage through
Life and Death, 340
On the Theology of Death, 460
On Your Own: A Widow’s Passage to
Emotional and Financial Well-Being,
2143
Opening Doors: Improving Access to
Hospice and Specialist Care Services
by Members of Black and Ethnic
Minority Communities, Occasional
Paper 7, 1532
Oral Care of the Aging and Dying Patient,
40
Oral Care: The Mouth in Critical and
Terminal Illness, 2016
The Orphaned Adult: Confronting the
Death of a Parent, 1805
The Orphaned Adult: Understanding and
Coping with Grief and Change after
the Death of Our Parents, 1829
The Other Side of Death, 1697
The Other Side of Death: Does Death Seal
Your Destiny?, 1916
Our Dad Died: The True Story of Three
Kids Whose Lives Changed, 147
Our Eternity (Extension of Essay on
Death), 1608
Our Greatest Gift: A Meditation on Dying
and Caring, 96
Our Mothers’ Spirits: On the Death of
Mothers and the Grief of Men, 1810
Outline of Death Investigation, 1686
Overcoming the Fear of Death, 920
The Oxford Book of Death, 978
Oxford Textbook of Palliative Medicine,
1758
The Pagan Book of Living and Dying:
Practical Rituals, Prayers, Blessings,
and Meditations on Crossing Over,
2091
Pain and Palliation, 1783
Pain, Anxiety, and Grief:
Pharmacotherapeutic Care of the
Dying Patient and the Bereaved, 2001
362 Title Index
Pain Management in Terminal Illness,
1782
Palliative Care: A Shared Experience,
1780
Palliative Care for Older People in Care
Homes, 1769
Palliative Care in Terminal Illness, 1768
Palliative Care in the Home, 1759
Palliative Care Medicine: Patient-Based
Learning, 1746
Palliative Care Nursing, 1732
Palliative Care Nursing: Quality Care to
the End of Life, 1728
Palliative Care: The Management of Far-
Advanced Illness, 1757
A Palliative Ethic of Care: Clinical
Wisdom at Life’s End, 1764
Palliative Medicine, 1800
Palliative Medicine: A Case-Based
Manual, 1778
Palliative Practices: An Interdisciplinary
Approach, 1774
Papa, Are You Going to Die?, 250
The Paradox of Loss: Toward a Relational
Theory of Grief, 1281
Parapsychology and Thanatology:
Proceedings of an International
Conference Held in Boston,
Massachusetts, November 6-7, 1993,
2117
Parental Death and Psychological
Development, 1808
Parental Grief: Solace and Resolution,
1227
Parental Loss of a Child, 608
Parental Reactions to the Death of a
Child, 579
The Parent and the Fatally Ill Child, 578
Parent Grief: Narratives of Loss and
Relationship, 613
Parenting through Crisis: Helping Kids in
Times of Loss, Grief, and Change, 145
Parting Company: Understanding the
Loss of a Loved One: The Caregiver’s
Journey, 367
Parting Is Not Goodbye: Coping with
Grief in Creative, Healthy Ways, 1320
Part of Me Died, Too: Stories of Creative
Survival among Bereaved Children and
Teenagers, 161
Passed On: African American Mourning
Stories: A Memorial, 417
Passing On: The Social Organization of
Dying, 383
Passing: The Vision of Death in America,
1010
Pastoral Care and Counseling in Grief
and Separation, 1877
The Pastoral Care of the Dying, 1847
Pastoral Care of the Dying and the
Bereaved: Selected Readings, 1882
The Pastoral Role in Caring for the
Dying and Bereaved: Pragmatic and
Ecumenical, 1875
The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and
Dying, 967
Pathologic Grief: Maladaptation to Loss,
1213
The Path through Grief: A Compassionate
Guide, 1116
A Pathway for Patients and Families
Facing Terminal Illness, 777
Patience, Compassion, Hope, and the
Christian Art of Dying Well, 804
The Patient, Death, and the Family, 2049
Patient Participation in Palliative Care: A
Voice for the Voiceless, 1781
Patterns of Transcendence: Religion,
Death, and Dying, 950
PDA (Personal Death Awareness):
Breaking Free of Fear to Live a Better
Life Now, 927
Peace at the Last, 1208
Peaceful Dying: The Step-by-Step Guide
to Preserving Your Dignity, Your
Choice, and Your Inner Peace at the
End of Life, 1795
Peace of Mind, 1257
The Penguin Book of Death, 946
Personal Care in an Impersonal
World: A Multidimensional Look at
Bereavement, 1305
A Personal Guide to Living with Loss,
1411
 Title Index
Personal Meanings of Death: Applications
of Personal Construct Theory to
Clinical Practice, 1997
Person-Centered Planning for Later Life:
A Curriculum on Death and Dying for
Adults with Mental Retardation, 56
Perspectives on Bereavement, 1179
Perspectives on Death, 876
Perspectives on Death and Dying, 988
Perspectives on Death and Dying: Cross-
Cultural and Multidisciplinary Views,
393
Perspectives on Death: Student Activity
Handbook, 486
Perspectives on Death: Teacher’s
Resource Book, 487
Perspectives on Loss: A Sourcebook, 1198
Perspectives on the AIDS Crisis:
Thanatologic Aspects, 2128
The Phenomenon of Death: Faces of
Mortality, 1094
Philosophical Aspects of Thanatology,
Volumes I and II, 1937
Philosophical Thinking about Death and
Dying, 1912
Philosophies of Death and Dying, 1941
The Philosophy of Life and the Philosophy
of Death, 1927
The Phoenix Phenomenon: Rising from
the Ashes of Grief, 1220
The Physician and the Hopelessly Ill
Patient: Legal, Medical, and Ethical
Guidelines, 2043
Physician-Assisted Dying: The Case for
Palliative Care and Patient Choice,
1786
Physician-Assisted Suicide, 906
Physician-Assisted Suicide and
Euthanasia, 910
The Physician of the Dance of Death,
2053
A Physician’s Guide to Coping with Death
and Dying, 2046
A Pilgrimage through Grief: Healing the
Soul’s Hurt after Loss, 1288
The Place of Grief Work in Mental Health,
1669
363
A Place of Healing: Working with
Suffering in Living and Dying, 717
Planet Widow: A Mother’s Story of
Navigating a Suddenly Unrecognizable
World, 2175
Planning and Managing Death Issues in
the Schools, 564
Playing God: The Dilemma of the Dying
Patient, 2028
The Politics of Being Mortal, 1944
Positive Approaches to Living with End
Stage Renal Disease: Psychosocial and
Thanatologic Aspects, 692
A Practical Discourse Concerning Death,
1073
The Practice of Death, 1945
Praying Our Goodbyes, 1888
Preparing the Children: Information and
Ideas for Families Facing Terminal
Illness and Death, 212
Preventive Opportunities in Childhood
Bereavement (Death of a Parent
Study), 183
Primary Care Issues for End-of-Life Care,
1784
Primer of Palliative Care, 1794
Primitive Conceptions of Death and the
Nether World in the Old Testament,
1483
Principles of Thanatology, 2127
The Private Worlds of Dying Children,
551
The Problem of Age, Growth, and Death, 46
The Problem of Loss and Mourning:
Psychoanalytic Perspectives, 1657
Problems of Death: Opposing Viewpoints,
848
The Prolongation of Life: Optimistic
Studies, 747
The Prospect of Immortality, 1602
Prospects for Immortality: A Sensible
Search for Life after Death, 1598
Psyche and Death, 1936
The Psychedelic Experience: A Manual on
the Tibetan Book of the Dead, 434
Psychiatric Aspects of Terminal Illness,
1663
364 Title Index
The Psychiatrist and the Dying Patient,
1658
The Psychological Autopsy: A Study of the
Terminal Phase of Life, 1677
The Psychology of Death, 1023
The Psychology of Death and Dying, 1068
The Psychology of Death in Fantasy and
History, 1960
Psychology of Funeral Service, 2080
The Psychology of Separation and Loss:
Perspectives on Development, Life
Transitions, and Clinical Practice,
1654
Psychopharmacological Agents for the
Terminally Ill and Bereaved, 1767
Psychopharmacological Agents in the
Care of the Terminally Ill and the
Bereaved, 1665
Psychosocial Aspects of Cardiovascular
Disease: The Life-Threatened Patient,
the Family, and the Staff, 767
The Psychosocial Aspects of Death and
Dying, 1655
Psychosocial Aspects of Terminal Care,
1673
Psychosocial Aspects of Terminal Care of
Oral Cancer, 1671
Psychosocial Care of the Dying Patient,
1660
Psychosocial Palliative Care: Good
Practice in the Care of the Dying and
Bereaved, 1791
Psychotherapy and Counseling with Older
Women: Cross-Cultural, Family, and
End-of-Life Issues, 2048
Puppet Plays for Grieving Children, 230
The Puritan Way of Death: A Study in
Religion, Culture, and Social Change,
1480
The Pursuit of Death, 1856
A Qualitative Study Exploring the Quality
of Life of Informal Caregivers Caring
for Someone with a Terminal Illness,
1740
Quality Hospice Care: Administration,
Organization, and Models, 1560
The Quality of Life: Living Well, Dying
Well, 349
Questions and Answers on Death and
Dying, 511
Quiet Desperation: Plain Talk on Life and
Death, 102
Rabbinic Conceptions about Death, 458
The Radiant Shock of Death, 1009
Radiation Therapy and Thanatology,
2138
Rationing of Medical Care for the
Critically Ill: Report of a Conference
Held in Washington, D.C., on May 27,
1986, 2045
Readings in Aging and Death:
Contemporary Perspectives, 60
Readings in Thanatology, 2132
Ready to Live, Prepared to Die: A
Provocative Guide to the Rest of Your
Life, 696
The Realization of Death: A Guide for the
Psychological Autopsy, 2054
Realized Millennialism: A Study in
Biblical Eschatology, 819
Recognizing Spiritual Needs in People
Who Are Dying, 1893
Reconstructing Illness: Studies in
Pathography, 78
Recovering from the Loss of a Child, 568
Recovering from the Loss of a Parent,
1819
Recovering from the Loss of a Sibling,
2104
Recovery from Bereavement, 1324
Recovery from Loss: A Personalized
Guide to the Grieving Process, 1398
Redefining Death, 857
Reflections on Death, Dying, and
Bereavement: A Manual for Clergy,
Counselors, and Speakers, 1890
Reflections on Palliative Care, 1750
Reflections on War and Death, 1930
Reforming the Rights of Death, 1904
A Refuge from the Storm: A Shelter from
the Storm of Caring for a Loved One
with a Terminal Illness, 799
 Title Index
A Regulatory Handbook for Hospice
Social Workers: The Heart of Healing,
1594
The Relationship between End-of-Life
Education Obtained through Didactic,
Clinical, Personal, and Introspective
Experiences and the Attitudes of
Nursing Students toward the Care of
the Dying Patient, 531
The Relationship between Religious Belief
and Death Affect, 61
Relative Grief: Parents and Children,
Sisters and Brothers, Husbands,
Wives, and Partners, Grandparents
and Grandchildren Talk about Their
Experience of Death and Grieving,
2106
Religion and Bereavement, 1244
Religious Encounters with Death: Insights
from the History and Anthropology of
Religions, 1478
Remembering Lives: Conversations with
the Dying and the Bereaved, 281
Remembering Well: Rituals for
Celebrating Life and Mourning Death,
2097
Remembering with Love: Messages of
Hope for the First Year, 1252
Remember the Laughter: Children, Death,
and Loss, 242
Remember the Secret, 189
Representations of Childhood Death,
547
Representations of Death: A Sociological
Perspective, 64
Re-Searching Death: Selected Essays in
Death Education and Counseling, 523
Researching Palliative Care, 1762
Resilient Widowers: Older Men Speak for
Themselves, 2187
Resources for the Ministry in Death and
Dying, 1881
Responding to Loss: A Resource for
Caregivers, 336
The Responsible Physician: Standards
of Excellence and the Critically Ill
Patient, 2056
365
Rest in Peace: A Cultural History of
Death and the Funeral Home in
America, 1471
Retelling Violent Death, 1353
Rethinking Life and Death: The Collapse
of Our Traditional Ethics, 98
Return to Life: Two Imaginings of the
Lazarus Theme, 1943
The Revival of Death, 1797
The Rights of the Critically Ill: The Basic
ACLU Guide to the Rights of Critically
Ill and Dying Patients, 1644
The Rights of the Dying: A Companion for
Life’s Final Moments, 722
The Right to Die Debate: A Documentary
History, 911
The Right to Die: Decision and Decision
Makers, 858
The Right to Life, the Right to Die,
1030
R.I.P.: The Complete Book of Death and
Dying, 1011
Rituals for Living and Dying: From Life’s
Wounds to Spiritual Awakening, 2068
The Role of the Community Hospital in
the Care of the Dying Patient and the
Bereaved, 1999
The Role of the Minister in Caring for the
Dying Patient and the Bereaved, 1874
The Role of the Volunteer Director in the
Care of the Terminal Patient and the
Family, 2022
The Role of the Volunteer in the Care of
the Terminal Patient and the Family,
362
The Royal Way of Death, 934
The Rules and Exercises of Holy Dying,
1898
The R.V.H. Manual on Palliative/Hospice
Care: A Resource Book, 1742
The Sacred and the Secular: Attitudes of
the American Public toward Death, 73
The Sacred Art of Dying: How the World
Religions Understand Death, 432
Sacred Dying: Creating Rituals for
Embracing the End of Life, 2060
366 Title Index
Sacred Passage: How to Provide Fearless,
Compassionate Care for the Dying,
1753
Sad but O.K. My Daddy Died Today: A
Child’s View of Death, 181
Sad Isn’t Bad: A Good-Grief Guidebook
for Kids Dealing with Loss, 211
The Sanctity of Social Life: Physicians’
Treatment of Critically Ill Patients,
1987
Saying Goodbye to Daniel: When Death Is
the Best Choice, 373
Saying Goodbye to Grandma, 300
Saying Goodbye with Love: A Step-by-
Step Guide through the Details of
Death, 1276
Saying Goodbye Your Way: Planning or
Buying a Funeral or Cremation for
Yourself or Someone You Love, 2078
Saying Kaddish: How to Comfort the
Dying, Bury the Dead, and Mourn as a
Jew, 2065
Scapegoat: The Impact of Death-Fear on
an American Family, 915
Science and Immortality, 1611
Scope and Standards of Hospice and
Palliative Nursing Practice, 1725
A Season of Grief, 1412
A Season of Grief: A Comforting
Companion for Difficult Days,
1151
Seasons of Grief and Healing: A Guide for
Those Who Mourn, 1289
The Seasons of Grief: Helping Your
Children Grow through Loss, 163
Selected Bibliography on Death and
Dying, 133
Sexuality and Life-Threatening Illness,
798
Shadows in the Sun: The Experiences of
Sibling Bereavement in Childhood,
2102
The Shape of Death, Life, and Immortality
in the Early Fathers, 1477
She Came to Live Out Loud: An Inspiring
Family Journey through Illness, Loss,
and Grief, 1779
Should Physicians Be Permitted to Hasten
the Deaths of Terminally Ill Patients?,
908
Should the Children Know?: Encounters
with Death in the Lives of Children,
297
Should the Patient Know the Truth?, 299
Should Treatment Be Terminated?, 880
Sibling Loss, 2105
The Significance of the Christian Funeral,
2076
Singing Mother Home: A Psychologist’s
Journey through Anticipatory Grief,
1816
Six Lives, Six Deaths: Portraits from
Modern Japan, 436
Six Steps for Managing Loss: A Catholic
Guide through Grief, 1143
Social Services for the Aged, Dying, and
Bereaved in International Perspective,
1978
The Social Symbolism of Grief and
Mourning, 1186
Social Work and Terminal Care, 797
Social Work and Thanatology, 2134
Social Work Practices with the Terminally
Ill: A Transcultural Perspective, 369
Social Work Theory and Practice with the
Terminally Ill, 366
Social Work with the Dying and Bereaved,
379
Social Work with the Dying Patient and
the Family, 2030
The Sociology of Death: An Analysis of
Death-Related Behavior, 386
Sociology of Death and Dying: A
Teaching Resource, 961
The Sociology of Death: A Selected
Bibliography, 121
The Sociology of Death: Theory, Culture,
Practice, 953
Some Information for Those Caring for
Patients, 1580
Someone You Love Is Dying: A Guide for
Helping and Coping, 298
Somewhere Just Beyond, 240
Soon: Tales from Hospice, 1562
 Title Index
The Sorrow and the Fury: Overcoming
Hurt and Loss from Childhood to Old
Age, 1170
Sorrow’s Company: Writers on Loss and
Grief, 1202
The Soul in Grief: Love, Death, and
Transformation, 1345
Sourcebook on Death and Dying, 987
Special Issues in Palliative Care, 1752
A Special Kind of Love: Care of the Dying
Child, 555
A Special Scar: The Experiences of People
Bereaved by Suicide, 1424
Spiritual, Ethical, and Pastoral Aspects of
Death and Bereavement, 1857
The Spiritual Lives of Bereaved Parents,
586
Spontaneous Shrines and the Public
Memorialization of Death, 2089
Spousal Bereavement in Late Life, 2151
The Stages of Sorrow, 1384
Standards and Scope of Hospice Nursing
Practice, 1719
Statements on Death, Dying, and
Bereavement, 959
Staying Close: A Positive Approach to
Dying and Bereavement, 809
Staying in Charge: Practical Plans for the
End of Your Life, 1631
Step by Step: Your Guide to Making
Practical Decisions When a Loved One
Dies, 1620
Stepping Stones to Grief Recovery,
1350
Stiff: The Curious Lives of Human
Cadavers, 2087
The Story of My Death, 656
Straight Talk about Death and Dying,
276
Straight Talk about Death with Young
People, 302
Strange Facts about Death, 991
Stress, Loss, and Grief: Understanding
Their Origins and Growth Potential,
1363
Stuck for Words: What to Say When
Someone Is Grieving, 305
367
A Student Dies, a School Mourns: Dealing
with Death and Loss in the School
Community, 182
A Study of Death, 930
Suffering: Psychological and Social
Aspects in Loss, Grief, and Care, 1152
Suicide (Choron), 952
Suicide (Dodder and Dodder), 853
Suicide (Durkheim), 974
Suicide and Bereavement, 1147
Suicide: A Social and Historical Study,
1459
Suicide: Prevention, Intervention,
Postvention, 997
The Suicide Problem in the United States,
1461
Suicide Survivors: A Guide for Those Left
Behind, 1440
Sunsets: Reflections for Life’s Final
Journey, 1205
The Sunshine Widows: Adapting to
Sudden Bereavement, 2165
A Survey to Determine the Status of Death
Education in the Wisconsin Secondary
Health Education Curriculum, 510
Survival Handbook for Widows (and for
Relatives and Friends Who Want to
Understand), 2179
Surviving Death: A Practical Guide to
Caring for the Dying and Bereaved,
748
Surviving Grief and Learning to Live
Again, 1357
Surviving Grief: Thirty Questions and
Answers for a Time of Loss, 1339
Surviving the Death of a Sibling: Living
through Grief When an Adult Brother
or Sister Dies, 2112
Surviving the Death of Your Spouse: A
Step-by-Step Workbook, 2176
Surviving the Loss of a Loved One: Living
through Grief, 1126
Surviving Your Partner: How to Live with
the Death of the Person Closest to You,
2188
The Survivor’s Guide, 1407
Symbolic Immortality, 1607
368 Title Index
Symbolic Loss: The Ambiguity of
Mourning and Memory at Century’s
End, 1466
Symposia on Hospice, Compassionate
Care, and the Dying Experience, 1557
Symposium: Death as an Ethical Issue for
the Professions, 875
Taking the Trip: A Journey through
Widowhood, 2193
Tales for the Dying: The Death Narratives
of the Bhagavita-Purana, 423
Talking about Death, 269
Talking about Death with “Normal”
Children: Research Strategies and
Issues, 185
Talking about Death Won’t Kill You, 295
Talking to Children about Death, 529
Talking with Children about Loss, 249
Talking with Children with a Life-
Threatening Illness: A Handbook for
Health Care Professionals, 533
The Tao of Dying: A Guide to Caring,
1792
A Teacher’s Handbook of Death, 507
Teaching Students about Death: A
Comprehensive Resource for
Educators and Parents, 534
A Teaching Unit on Death and Dying, 517
Tears and Smiles: The Hospice Handbook,
1551
Teenagers Face-to-Face with
Bereavement, 11
Teens, Loss, and Grief: The Ultimate Teen
Guide, 22
Telling a Child about Death, 284
Tell Me about Death, Mommy, 286
Tell Me Papa: A Family Book for
Children’s Questions about Death and
Funerals, 180
Terminal and Life-Threatening Illness: An
Occupational Behavior Perspective,
800
Terminal Care, 384
Terminal Care at Home, 791
Terminal Care for Cancer Patients, 1748
Terminal Care: Friendship Contracts with
Dying Cancer Patients, 669
Terminal Care Support Teams: The
Hospital-Hospice Interface, 1517
Terminal Illness, 724
Terminal Illness: A Guide to Nursing
Care, 2012
Terminal Illness and the Experience
of God: A Qualitative Study of the
Transitional Space, 759
Terminal Illness as a Source of
Personality Change in a Woman
Suffering from Cancer, 104
Terminal Illness: Opposing Viewpoints,
1090
The Terminal Patient: Oral Care, 2017
Thanatologic Aspects of Aging: Selected
Readings, 57
Thanatology, 2121
Thanatology: A Liberal Arts Approach,
2133
The Thanatology Community and the
Needs of the Movement, 2115
Thanatology Course Outlines, 2114
Thanatology Curriculum–Medicine, 2119
The Thanatology Librarian, 2125
The Thanatology Library, 114
Thanatopics: Activities and Exercises for
Confronting Death, 83
Thanatopics: A Manual of Structured
Learning Experiences for Death
Education, 509
Theology, Death, and Dying, 1845
Theology of Hope: On the Ground
and the Implications of a Christian
Eschatology, 836
A Theoretical Analysis of Attitudes of
Older People toward Dying, 74
Theory of Suicide, 1920
Therapeutic Drugs and the Quality of Life,
2000
They Need to Know: How to Teach
Children about Death, 501
Thinking through Death, 343
Thirty-Five Ways to Help a Grieving
Child, 152
 Title Index
This Thing Called Grief: New
Understandings of Loss, 1164
Thoughts on Death and Life, 1606
A Thousand Goodbyes: A Son’s Reflection
on Living, Dying, and the Things That
Matter Most, 1206
Three Faces of Mourning: Melancholia,
Manic Defense, and Moving On, 1653
Through Grief: The Bereavement Journey,
1136
Through the Valley: A Caregiver’s
Account of Terminal Illness, 364
The Tibetan Book of Living and Dying,
768
The Tibetan Book of the Dead, 980
The Tibetan Book of the Dead: The Great
Liberation through Hearing in the
Bardo, 410
Time and Its End: A Comparative
Existential Interpretation of Time and
Eschatology, 837
Time for Dying, 676
The Time Is at Hand, 819
The Time of Their Dying, 774
A Time to Be Born–A Time to Die, 1078
A Time to Care: A Study in Terminal
Illness, 354
Time to Go: Three Plays on Death and
Dying, with Commentary on End-of-
Life Issues, 697
A Time to Grieve: Meditations for Healing
after the Death of a Loved One, 1394
A Time to Mourn, 2194
A Time to Mourn, a Time to Comfort, 482
A Time to Mourn, a Time to Dance, 1286
A Time to Mourn: Growing through the
Grief Process, 1222
Time to Mourn: Judaism and the
Psychology of Bereavement, 473
Time to Say Goodbye: Moving beyond
Loss, 1185
To Comfort Always: A Nurse’s Guide to
End-of-Life Care, 2023
To Comfort the Bereaved, 1253
To Die and to Live: Christ’s Resurrection
and Christian Vocation, 1294
369
To Die Is to Gain: The Experience of
One’s Own Death, 689
To Die Well: A Holistic Guide for the
Dying and Their Caregivers, 371
To Die with Style!, 89
To Heal Again: Toward Serenity and the
Resolution of Grief, 1111
To Hell with Dying, 806
To Listen, to Comfort, to Care: Reflections
on Death and Dying, 630
To Live and to Die: When, Why, and How,
909
To Live Until We Say Goodbye, 729
To Those Who Need It Most: Hospice
Means Hope, 1593
Toward a Sociology of Death and Dying,
1045
Toward Death with Dignity: Caring for
Dying People, 760
Transcendence of Loss over the Life Span,
1971
Transcending Loss: Understanding the
Lifelong Impact of Grief and How to
Make It Meaningful, 1331
Transformed by the Light: The Powerful
Effect of Near-Death Experiences on
People’s Lives, 1709
Transition Called Death, 690
Transitions in Dying and Bereavement: A
Psychosocial Guide for Hospice and
Palliative Care, 1747
Transitions in End-of-Life Care: Hospice
and Related Developments in Eastern
Europe and Central Asia, 1503
Trauma, Death, and Death Notification: A
Seminar for Professional Counselors
and Victim Advocates, 2019
Traumatic and Nontraumatic Loss and
Bereavement: Clinical Theory and
Practice, 1266
Traumatic Grief: Diagnosis, Treatment,
and Prevention, 1214
Traumatology of Grieving: Conceptual,
Theoretical, and Treatment
Foundations, 1167
Treatment of Complicated Mourning, 2034
370 Title Index
The Troubled Dream of Life: Living with
Mortality, 65
The True Work of Dying: A Practical and
Compassionate Guide to Easing the
Dying Process, 1496
The Truth about Death and Dying, 19
Tuluak and Amaulik: Dialogues on Death
and Mourning with the Inuit Eskimo,
407
The Tunnel and the Light: Essential
Insights on Living and Dying, 1032
Turn Again to Life: Growing Old through
Grief, 1362
Twentieth Century Book of the Dead, 977
Twenty Common Problems: End-of-Life
Care, 1773
Twin Loss: A Book Where the Twinless
and Others Can Seek Answers to the
Many Questions Which Rise During
Terminal Illness and after the Death of
Their Beloved Twin, 2101
The Ultimate Loss: Coping with the Death
of a Child, 552
Unattended Sorrow: Recovering from Loss
and Reviving the Heart, 1255
Understanding Children’s Experiences of
Parental Bereavement, 1824
Understanding Death, 392
Understanding Death and Dying: An
Interdisciplinary Approach, 1089
Understanding Death, Dying, and
Bereavement, 1040
Understanding Death from a Spiritual
Perspective, 79
Understanding Grief and Bereavement,
1260
Understanding Grief: Helping Yourself
Heal, 1435
Understanding Grief: Its Roots, Dynamics,
and Treatment, 1211
Understanding Mourning: A Guide for
Those Who Grieve, 1148
Understanding Your Grieving Heart after
a Loved One’s Death, 1436
Uneasy Endings: Daily Life in an
American Nursing Home, 377
The Unknown Country: Death in
Australia, Britain, and the USA, 399
Unrecognized and Unsanctioned Grief:
The Nature and Counseling of
Unacknowledged Loss, 456
Unspeakable Loss: Understanding
the Experience of Pregnancy Loss,
Miscarriage, and Abortion, 588
Unspoken Grief: Coping with Childhood
Sibling Loss, 2109
An Untimely Loss: A Passage to the
Gentle Side of Grief, 1444
The Unwanted Gift of Grief: A Ministry
Approach, 1903
Updating Life and Death: Essays in Ethics
and Medicine, 852
Up from Grief: Patterns of Recovery, 1235
Using Literature to Help Troubled
Teenagers Cope with End-of-Life
Issues, 1
A Very Easy Death, 964
The Vestibule, 103
The Victorian Celebration of Death, 1454
The View from a Hearse, 1698
Vigor Mortis: The End of the Death
Taboo, 1681
Visions of God: From the Near Death
Experience, 1717
Vitality of Death: Essays in Existential
Psychology and Philosophy, 1947
Vital Signs (The Way We Die in America),
1038
A Voice for Those Bereaved by Suicide,
1282
Voices of Bereavement: A Casebook for
Grief Counselors, 1976
Voices of Death, 1077
Volunteers in Hospice and Palliative
Care: A Handbook for Volunteer
Service Managers, 1512
The Vulture and the Bull: Religious
Responses to Death, 77
The Waiting World: What Happens after
Death, 1705
A Way to Die, 818
 Title Index
The Way We Die: An Investigation of
Death and Dying in America Today,
657
We Are But a Moment’s Sunlight:
Understanding Death, 1096
We Can Minister with Dying Persons,
1859
We Die before We Live: Talking with the
Very Ill, 267
We Lived with Dying, 711
A Well Model Approach to Care of the
Dying Client, 2021
We Love You, Matty: Meeting Death with
Faith, 1860
We Need to Talk: A Practical Guide for
Those Facing Terminal Illness, 764
Western Attitudes toward Death: From the
Middle Ages to the Present, 1103
What Becomes of the Dead?: A Study of
Eschatology, 820
What Children Need When They Grieve:
The Four Essentials: Routine, Love,
Honesty, and Security, 221
What Happens When You Die?:
Twentieth-Century Thought on Survival
after Death, 1969
What Helped Me When My Loved One
Died, 1190
What Is Death?, 143
What on Earth Do You Do When Someone
Dies?, 224
What the Dying Teach Us: Lessons on
Living, 1878
What to Do When a Loved One Dies: A
Practical and Compassionate Guide to
Dealing with Death on Life’s Terms,
1372
What to Do When Someone Dies: A Legal,
Financial, and Practical Guide, 1646
What to Do When the Police Leave: A
Guide to the First Days of Traumatic
Loss, 1218
What to Tell Your Child about Birth,
Illness, Death, Divorce, and Other
Family Crises, 266
What Will We Do? Preparing a School
Community to Cope with Crises, 245
371
The Wheel of Death: A Collection of
Writings from Zen Buddhists and Other
Sources on Dying, Death, Rebirth,
1470
The Wheel of Life: A Memoir of Living
and Dying, 730
When a Baby Dies: A Handbook for
Healing and Helping, 591
When a Child Dies, 607
When a Child Has Been Murdered: Ways
You Can Help the Grieving Parents,
557
When a Classmate Dies, 548
When a Community Weeps: Case Studies
in Group Survivorship, 1446
When a Friend Dies: A Book for Teens
about Grieving and Healing, 9
When a Friend Is Dying: A Guide to
Caring for the Terminally Ill, 659
When a Grandparent Dies: A Kid’s Own
Remembering Workbook for Dealing
with Shiva and the Year Beyond, 437
When a Jew Dies: The Ethnography of a
Bereaved Son, 415
When a Lifemate Dies: Stories of Love,
Loss, and Healing, 2166
When All the Friends Have Gone: A
Guide for Aftercare Providers, 812
When a Loved One Dies, 1910
When a Man Faces Grief: Twelve
Practical Ideas to Help You Heal from
Loss, 1182
When a Parent Is Very Sick, 197
When Bad Things Happen to Good
People, 1034
When Children Die, 625
When Children Die: Improving Palliative
and End-of-Life Care for Children and
Their Families, 572
When Children Grieve: For Adults to Help
Children Deal with Death, Divorce,
Pet Loss, Moving, and Other Losses,
175
When Death Comes, 1088
When Death Impacts Your School: A
Guide for School Administrators, 153
When Death Takes a Father, 1827
372 Title Index
When Death Walks In: For Teenagers
Facing Grief, 25
When Evening Comes: The Education of a
Hospice Volunteer, 1490
When Goodbye Is Forever, 770
When Grief Breaks Your Heart, 1302
When Grief Is Your Constant Companion:
God’s Grace for a Woman’s
Heartache, 1340
When Hello Means Goodbye, 780
When Husbands Die: Women Share Their
Stories, 2186
When I Die, 334
When I Die, Will I Get Better?, 553
When Life Ends: Legal Overviews,
Medicolegal Forms, and Hospital
Policies, 1622
When Life Meets Death: Stories of Death
and Dying, Truth and Courage, 785
When Mourning Comes: A Book of
Comfort for the Grieving, 1377
When Parents Die: A Guide for Adults,
1834
When Parents Die: Learning to Live with
the Loss of a Parent, 1801
When People Die (Bernstein and Gullo),
140
When People Die (Levete et al.), 198
When Someone Dies (Greenlee and Drath),
167
When Someone Dies (Jackson), 338
When Someone Dies: A Practical Guide to
Holistic Care at the End of Life, 650
When Someone Very Special Dies, 1201
When Someone You Love Is Dying: A
Handbook for Counselors and Those
Who Care, 1869
When the Bough Breaks: Forever after the
Death of a Son or Daughter, 549
When the Dying Speak: How to Listen and
Learn from Those Facing Death, 304
When the Feast Is Finished: Reflections
on Terminal Illness, 626
When There Are No Words: Finding Your
Way to Cope with Loss and Grief, 1419
When We Die: The Science, Culture, and
Rituals of Death, 1050
When Will I Stop Hurting?: Dealing with
a Recent Death, 1231
When You Lose a Loved One (Allen),
1099
When You Lose a Loved One (Osborne),
365
When Your Child Has a Life-Threatening
Illness, 575
When Your Child Is Gone: Learning to
Live Again, 624
When You’re Dead, You’re Dead, 1070
When Your Loved One Is Dying, 333
When Your Parent Dies, 1826
When Your Parent Dies: A Concise and
Practical Source of Help and Advice
for Adults Grieving the Death of a
Parent, 1815
When Your Spouse Dies: A Concise and
Practical Source of Help and Advice,
2156
Where Has Grandpa Gone?: Helping
Children Cope with Grief and Loss,
186
Who Dies?: An Investigation of Conscious
Living and Conscious Dying, 734
Why Did Daddy Die?: Helping Children
Cope with the Loss of a Parent, 135
Why Did He Die?, 1194
Why Do I Have to Die?, 705
Why Do People Die?: Helping Your
Child Understand–with Love and
Illustrations, 292
Why Do We Die?: An Essay in
Thanatology, 2131
Why Me?: Coping with Grief, Loss, and
Change, 1234
Widow, 2149
Widowed (Brothers), 2146
Widowed (Jebb), 2169
The Widowed Self: The Older Woman’s
Journey through Widowhood, 2204
Widower (Campbell and Silverman), 2150
Widower (Schoen), 2196
The Widower, 2172
Widowhood Happens, 2161
Widowhood in an American City, 2181
Widowhood in Later Life, 2185
 Title Index
Widowhood Isn’t for Wimps: Meditations
for Women in the First Three Months
of Widowhood by Someone Who’s
Been There, 2173
Widow: Rebuilding Your Life, 2162
Widows and Their Families, 2184
Widows and Widowhood: A Creative
Approach to Being Alone, 2191
Widows in the Dark: Rescuing Your
Financial Position, 1629
Widow’s Walk, 2167
Widow-to-Widow: How the Bereaved Help
One Another, 2199
Will I Ever Feel Good Again?: When
You’re Overwhelmed by Grief and
Loss, 1154
The Will to Live, 707
Will to Live–Will to Die: Ethics and the
Search for a Good Death, 901
The Wisdom of Dying: Practices for
Living, 93
Wisdom of the Serpent: The Myths of
Death, Rebirth, Resurrection, 831
With Open Arms: Receiving Care with
Grace and Gratitude, 663
With Those Who Grieve: Twenty Grief
Survivors Share Their Stories of Loss,
Pain, and Hope, 1386
A Woman’s Book of Grieving, 1338
Women and Loss: Psychobiological
Perspectives, 1659
Women as Widows: Support Systems, 2182
Women, Birth, and Death in Jewish Law
and Practice, 440
Women Facing Loss: Disease,
Bereavement, and Emotional Response,
1399
Working It Through, 345
Working with Children in Grief and Loss,
201
The Work of Mourning, 2064
373
A World of Widows, 2190
The Worst Loss: How Families Heal from
the Death of a Child, 614
The Wounded Healer, 1314
Wrestling with the Angel: Jewish Insights
on Death and Mourning, 463
Write Grief: How to Transform Loss with
Writing, 285
Writing to Heal the Soul: Transforming
Grief and Loss through Writing, 1445
Year One: A Record, 623
A Year to Live: How to Live This Year as
If It Were Your Last, 735
Ye Shall Be Comforted, 1884
You and a Death in Your Family, 1428
You and Your Grief, 1212
You Are Not Alone: Teens Talk about Life
after the Loss of a Parent, 14
You Can Become Whole Again: A Guide
to Christians in Grieving, 1290
You Can Help Someone Who’s Grieving:
A How-To Healing Handbook, 1173
You Can’t Leave Till You Do the
Paperwork: Matters of Life and Death,
1624
You’ll Get over It: The Rage of
Bereavement, 1209
Young People and Death, 209
Young People, Bereavement, and Loss:
Disruptive Transitions?, 203
Young Widow, 2197
Young Widow: Learning to Live Again,
2155
Your Healing Journey through Grief: A
Practical Guide to Grief Management,
1139
Your Particular Grief, 1318
The Zen of Living and Dying: A Practical
and Spiritual Guide, 1942
 About the Author

John F. Szabo is director of the Atlanta-Fulton Public Library System. He was

previously director of the Clearwater Public Library System and served as presi-
dent of the Florida Library Association. He has also served as director of the Palm
Harbor Public Library in Palm Harbor, Florida, and the Robinson Public Library
District in Robinson, Illinois. Szabo was head librarian of the Residential Col-
lege at the University of Michigan, where he received his master’s in information
and library studies. The author of Mortuary Science: A Sourcebook (Scarecrow,
1993), he has studied the literature of death and dying for many years.

375